Hitachi Service Manual FSN FXN FSVN Rev 06-2006t

SET-FREE FSN(E)/
FXN(E)/FSVN(E) SERIES
Service Manual
Outdoor Units: 3 ~ 32 HP
Indoor Units Type:
• 4-Way Cassette
• 2-Way Cassette
• Ceiling
• In-the-Ceiling
• Wall
• Floor
• Floor Concealed
��
��
��
��
Contents
Contents
Units installation 1
Piping installation 2
Electrical wiring 3
Remote control switch installation 4
Control system 5
Available optional functions 6
Test run 7
Troubleshooting 8
Spare parts 9
Servicing 10
Main parts 11
Field work instruction 12
Page iii
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Contents
Page iv
SMGB0032 rev.1 - 06/2006
Contents
UNITS CODE LIST
 NOTE:
Please check, according to the model name, which is your air conditioner type and how it is
MODELS CODIFICATION
abbreviated and referred to in this technical catalogue.
INDOOR UNITS FSN(1)(E/M) – System Free

4-Way-Cassette 4-Way-Cassette Mini 2-Way-Cassette Ceiling In-The-Ceiling
Unit Code Unit Code Unit Code Unit Code Unit Code
NEW
RPI–0.8FSN1E 7E887302
NEW
RCI–1.0FSN1E 7E861618 RCIM–1.0FSN 60277887 RCD–1.0FSN 60277813 RPI–1.0FSN1E 7E887303
NEW
RCI–1.5FSN1E 7E861619 RCIM–1.5FSN 60277889 RCD–1.5FSN 60277814 RPI–1.5FSN1E 7E887304
NEW
RCI–2.0FSN1E 7E861621 RCIM–2.0FSN 60277890 RCD–2.0FSN 60277815 RPC–2.0FSNE 7E872055 RPI–2.0FSN1E 7E882024
NEW
RCI–2.5FSN1E 7E861620 RCD–2.5FSN 60277816 RPC–2.5FSNE 7E872030 RPI–2.5FSN1E 7E882025
NEW
NEW
RCI–3.5FSN1E 7E871779 RPC–3.5FSNE 7E872057 RPI–3.5FSN1E 7E882035
RCI–4.0FSN1E 7E871780 RCD–4.0FSN 60277818 RPC–4.0FSNE 7E872059 RPI–4.0FSN1ENE 7E882032
W
NEW
NEW
RCI–6.0FSN1E 7E871794 RPC–6.0FSNE 7E872061 RPI–6.0FSN1E 7E882034
RPI–8.0FSNE 70886723
RPI–10.0FSNE 70886733
RCI RCIM RCD RPC RPI
INDOOR UNITS FSN(1)(E/M) – System Free

Wall Wall - Mini Floor Floor Concealed
Unit Code Unit Code Unit Code Unit Code
RPK–0.8FSNM 60277823
RPK–1.0FSNM 60277824 RPK–1.0FSN1M 60277865 RPF–1.0FSNE 7E877715 RPFI–1.0FSNE 7E877719
RPK–1.5FSNM 60277825 RPK–1.5FSN1M 60277867 RPF–1.5FSNE 7E877716 RPFI–1.5FSNE 7E877720
RPK–2.0FSNM 60277826 RPF–2.0FSNE 7E877309 RPFI–2.0FSNE 7E877311
RPK–2.5FSNM 60277844 RPF–2.5FSNE 7E877310 RPFI–2.5FSNE 7E877312
RPK–3-0FSNM 60277845
RPK–3.5FSNM 60277846
RPK-4.0FSNM 60277847
RPK RPK (mini) RPF RPFI
Meaning of model codification: RPI 3.0 FS N (1) (E)

Unit Type (Indoor Unit)
RCI -RCIM - RCD - RPC - RPI
RPK - RPF - RPFI
Capacity (HP) 0.8 ~ 10.0
H-Link Set-Free / System Free
R410 A refrigerant
Series
E : Made in Europe
M : Made in Malaysia
– : Made in Japan
Page v
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Contents
FSN OUTDOOR UNITS FXN OUTDOOR UNITS

Unit Code Unit Code Unit Code Unit Code
NEW
RAS–5FSN 60278771 RAS–18FSN 60278909 RAS–16FXN 60278841
NEW
RAS–8FSNE 7E878772 RAS–20FSN 60278775 RAS–8FXNE 7E878774 RAS–18FXN 60278928
NEW
NEW NEW NEW
NEW NEW
RAS–14FSNE 60278908 RAS–26FSN 60278911 RAS–24FXN 60278842
NEW NEW
RAS–16FSN 60278774 RAS–28FSN 60278912 RAS–26FXN 60278930
RAS–30FSN 60278777 RAS–30FXN 60278822
NEW NEW
RAS–32FSN 60278913 RAS–32FXN 60278931
FSVNE OUTDOOR UNITS

Unit Code Unit Code
RAS–3FSVNE 7E878654
Meaning of model codification: RAS 10 FS FX V N E

Unit Type (Outdoor Unit)
Compressor power (HP) 3 ~ 32
Set-Free System 2 pipes
Set-Free System 3 pipes
Single phase unit (1~)
R410A Refrigerant
E : Made in Europe
– : Made in Japan
Page vi
SMGB0032 rev.1 - 06/2006
Contents
COMPLEMENTARY SYSTEMS
Accessory Name Code Figure
KPI-2521 Total Heat Exchanger 60277481
EF-5GE Econofresh Kit 7E774148
CODE LIST ACCESSORIES

PC-P1HE Remote control switch 7E799954
PSC-5S Central station 60291050
PSC-5T 7 day timer 60291052
PC-P5H Optional remote controller 60290879
PC-LH3A Wireless control switch 60291056
Page vii
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Contents

PC-RLH8 Receiver kit 60291106
for RCI-FSN1E on the panel

for RCI-FSN on the panel

for RCI, RCD, RPC, RPI, RPK and
RPF(I) on the wall
PC-RLH13 Receiver kit 60291294 (Figure not available)

for RCIM-FSN on the panel
PSC-5HR H-LINK relay 60291105
PCC 1A Optional function connector 60199286
PRC-10E1 2P extension cord 7E790211

THM-R2AE Remote sensor (THM4) 7E799907
HARC-BXE (A) Lonwork BMS interface 60290874

(7 inputs up to 6 units
HARC-BXE (B) Lonwork BMS interface 60290875

(4 inputs up to 32 units
CS-NET CS-NET + inteface 6E191922

(HARC-40E)
DBS-26 Drain discharge boss 60299192
Page viii
SMGB0032 rev.1 - 06/2006
Contents

P-G23WA2 Air panel for RCI 60290534
P-N23WAM Air panel for RCIM 60197160
P-G23DWA1 Air panel for RCD 60291106

P-G46DWA1 Air panel for RCD 60291109
B-32H4 Adapter for deodorant filter 60199790
F-23L4-K Anti bacteria filter 60199791

F-23L4-D Deodorant filter 60199793
F-46L4-D Deodorant filter 60199794
PDF-23CE Duct connection flange 60199795

PDF-46C3 Duct connection flange 60199796
OACI-232 Fresh air intake kit 60199797
PD-75 Fesh air intake kit 60199798
PI-23LS5 3-way oulet parts 60199799
TKCI-232 T duct connecting kit 60199801
Page ix
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Contents

CH-4.0NE CH Unit 7E890278
CH-8.0NE CH Unit 7E890197
CH-12.0NE CH Unit 60291260
E-102SN Branch pipe 60291202

E-52XN Branch pipe 60291266
E-84HSN Distributor 60291197
E-108HSN Distributor 60291198
Page x
SMGB0032 rev.1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1. Units installation
This chapter provides information about the procedures you must follow to install the Set-Free FSN(E)/FXN(E)/FSVNE outdoor
1
units and the complete range of Hitachi indoor units.
CONTENTS
1 UNITS INSTALLATION ___________________________________________________ 1-1

1.1. Transportation of Outdoor Unit ______________________________________________ 1-4
1.2. RCI ___________________________________________________________________ 1-5
1.2.1. Factory-Supplied Accessories ______________________________________________ 1-5
1.2.2. Initial Check ____________________________________________________________ 1-5
1.2.3. Installation _____________________________________________________________ 1-6
1.2.4. Air Panel Installation _____________________________________________________ 1-7
1.3. RCIM-FSN _____________________________________________________________ 1-9
1.3.1. Factory-Supplied Accessories ______________________________________________ 1-9
1.3.2. Initial Check ____________________________________________________________ 1-9
1.3.3. Installation ____________________________________________________________ 1-10
1.3.4. Air Panel Installation ____________________________________________________ 1-11
1.4. RCD _________________________________________________________________ 1-12
1.4.1. Factory-Supplied Accessories _____________________________________________ 1-12
1.4.2. Initial Check ___________________________________________________________ 1-12
1.4.3. Installation ____________________________________________________________ 1-13
1.4.4. Air Panels Installation ___________________________________________________ 1-14
1.5. RPC _________________________________________________________________ 1-16
1.5.2. Initial Check ___________________________________________________________ 1-16
1.5.3. Installation ____________________________________________________________ 1-16
1.6. RPI (In-The-Ceiling) _____________________________________________________ 1-18
1.6.2. Initial Check ___________________________________________________________ 1-18
1.6.3. Unit installation ________________________________________________________ 1-18
1.6.4. Connecting field Supply Air Duct ___________________________________________ 1-19
1.6.5. Air Suction Direction Change _____________________________________________ 1-20
1.7. RPK _________________________________________________________________ 1-21
1.7.2. Initial Check ___________________________________________________________ 1-21
1.7.3. Dimensions of the Mounting Bracket ________________________________________ 1-23
1.8. RPF (Floor Type) / RPFI (Floor-Concealed Type) ______________________________ 1-24
1.8.2. Initial Check ___________________________________________________________ 1-24
1.8.3. Installation ____________________________________________________________ 1-24
1.9. Complementary Systems _________________________________________________ 1-26
1.9.1. KPI (Total Heat Exchanger) _______________________________________________ 1-26
1.9.2. Econofresh Kit _________________________________________________________ 1-28
1.10. RAS FSVNE ___________________________________________________________ 1-29
1.10.1. Installation space _______________________________________________________ 1-29
1.10.2. Installation Place Provision _______________________________________________ 1-30
1.10.3. Remove Shipping Washer ________________________________________________ 1-30
1.11. RAS FSN(E)/FSV(E) ____________________________________________________ 1-31
Page 1-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.11.1. Installation Location (5 to 12 HP) __________________________________________ 1-31

1.11.2. Serial Units Installation (5 to 12HP)_________________________________________ 1-32
1.11.3. Multiple Installation Space ________________________________________________ 1-33
1.11.4. Foundation provision ____________________________________________________ 1-38
1.11.5. Center of Gravity _______________________________________________________ 1-39
1.12. CH-Unit ______________________________________________________________ 1-41
1.12.1. Transportation and handling ______________________________________________ 1-41
1.12.2. Factory supplied accessories _____________________________________________ 1-41
1.12.3. Initial check ___________________________________________________________ 1-41
1.12.4. Installation ____________________________________________________________ 1-42
1.13 Optional accessories ____________________________________________________ 1-43
1.13.1. Fresh air intake for 4-way type Outdoor Units _________________________________ 1-43
1.13.2. T-Tube connecting kit for 4-way cassette type Indoor Units_______________________ 1-44
1.13.3. Branch discharge for 4-way cassette Indoor type Units _________________________ 1-44
1.13.4. Directional air flow for 4-way cassette type Indor Units __________________________ 1-45
1.13.5. Filter box for 4-way cassette type Indoor Units ________________________________ 1-45
1.13.6. Anti-bacterial long life air filer for 4-way cassette type Indoor Unit _________________ 1-46
1.13.7. Deodorant air filter for 4-way cassette type Indoor Units_________________________ 1-46
Page 1-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
UNITS INSTALLATION
1/2
� WARNING: – Mount suspension bolts using M10 (W3/8) as size, as

– Check to ensure that the accessories are packed with shown below:
the indoor unit.
1
– Do not install the indoor units outdoors. If installed
outdoors, an electric hazard or electric leakage will
occur. Wooden Bar
For Concrete Slab (60 mm to 90 mm Square)
– Consider the air distribution from each indoor unit to 150~160mm
Nuts
Concrete
the space of the room, and select a suitable location Square
so that uniform air temperature in the room can be washers
I-Beam Wooden Beam
obtained. It is recommended that the indoor units be Suspension Bolts Steel Anchor Bolt Sling Bolt
installed 2.3 to 3 meters from the floor level. If the unit (W3/8 or M10) (W3/8 or M10)
is installed higher than 3 meters, it is also

recommended that a fan be utilized to obtain uniform
air temperature in the room.
– Avoid obstacles that may hamper the air intake or the
air discharge flow. � CAUTION:
– Pay attention to the following points when the indoor – Outdoor units must be installed in places not
units are installed in a hospital or other places where accessible to the general public. Install the outdoor
there are electronic waves from medical equipment, unit in an area where people except services
etc. engineers cannot touch the unit.
– Do not install the indoor units where electromagnetic – Do not install the indoor units in a flammable
wave is directly radiated to the electrical box, remote environment to avoid a fire or an explosion.
control cable or remote control switch. – Check to ensure that the ceiling slab is strong
– Install the indoor units and components as far as enough. If it is not strong enough, the indoor unit
practical or at least 3 meters from the electromagnetic may fall down on you.
wave radiator. – Do not install the indoor units, outdoor unit, remote
– Prepare a steel box and install the remote control control switch and cable within approximately
switch in it. Prepare a steel conduit tube and wire the 3 meters of strong electromagnetic wave radiators
remote control cable in it. Then connect the ground such as medical equipment.
wire with the box and tube. – Do not install the indoor units in a machinery shop
– Install a noise filter when the power supply emits or kitchen where vapor from oil or mist flows to
harmful noises. the indoor units. The oil will deposit on the heat
exchanger, thereby reducing the indoor unit
– This unit is exclusive non-electrical heater type indoor performance, and it may deform. In the worst case,
unit. It is prohibited to install an electrical heater in the the oil damages the plastic parts of the indoor unit.
field.
– To avoid any corrosive action to the heat exchangers,
do not install the indoor units in an acid or alkaline
environment.
Page 1-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1/4 UNITS INSTALLATION
1.1. TRANSPORTATION OF OUTDOOR UNIT

Transport the product as close to installation location as � For installation (5~16HP)
(5~16 HP)FSN(E)
FSN(E)(8~12HP)FXN(E)
(8~10 HP)FXN(E)
practical before unpacking. - Remove the wooden base.
- Apply two (2) ropes on the splints or corrugated
� CAUTION: paper to protect the unit, and hang the unit as shown
below.
– Do not put any material on the product.
1. Hanging method Rope
Do not remove Angle of wire

When hanging the unit, ensure a balance of the unit, check
paper frame and more than 60°
safety and lift up smoothly. plastic band
� For transportation
- Do not remove any packing materials.
Apply rope
- Hang the unit without removing the packaging with on the splints
ropes through each square hole and apply the splints or corrugated
or corrugated paper for unit protection. paper (their
minimum
thickness
� DANGER: must be
15mm.)
Do not tie ropes at the wooden base.
Do not apply any
force to this plate.
(Both sides)
Apply rope through the square hole
Rope
(Rope position)
Wooden Base
Rope Rope
Square Square
hole hole
� For installation (3~5 HP)
- Hang the unit under packing condition with four (4)
ropes. Push through the wire ropes into the hang hole
and clamp the wires by using shackle as shown below.
CORRECT INCORRECT
� For installation (18~32HP)

(20~30 HP)FSN(E) (16~32HP)FXN(E)
FSN (16~30 HP) FXN
- Hang the unit without removing the packaging with

four (4) ropes. Push through the wire ropes into the
hang hole and clamp the wires by using shackle as
shown below.
Wire rope
Do not remove
wooden frame and
plastic band
Angle of wire more

than 60°
Do not apply any

force to this plate
(Both Sides)
Push through wire

rope into the hang
clamp it by using
shackle
Page 1-4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
2. Before installation
Before
1/4 installation work, check the availability of the following parts that are packed inside the outdoor unit
UNITS INSTALLATION
 FSVNE
1
Accessory Qty Purpose
Special washer 4 Fixing anchor bolt
2. Before installation
Rubber bush 2
For Connection Hole of Operation Wiring
Forthe
Before installation work, check the availability of Connection Hole of Power Source Wiring
following parts that are packed inside the outdoor unit:
 FSN(E) / FXN(E)
Accessory
� RAS-8~12 HP FSN(E) FXN(E)
Quantity
10FSNE
12FSNE
10FXNE
12FXNE
Accessory Q'ty 8HRNE 10HRNE 12HRNE
8FSNE
8FXNE
14FSN
16FSN
18FSN
20FSN
22FSN
24FSN
26FSN
28FSN
30FSN
32FSN
16FXN
18FXN
20FXN
22FXN
24FXN
26FXN
30FXN
32FXN
5FSN
Compressed Sheet - 1 1 1
Pipe Flange of
- 1 1 1
Refrigerant Gas Piping
Compressed sheet -4 - - 1 1For 1 1 1 Hole
Connection 1 1 1 1 1Wiring
of Operation 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Rubber Bush
Pipe flange of refrigerant gas -1 - - 1 For
1 Connection
1 1 1Hole 1 of 1Power
1 Source
1 1 Wiring
1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
piping
Screw 3 Spare
Pipe with flare nut for - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
refrigerant gas piping
Pipe with flare nut for - - - - - - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
� NOTE:
refrigerant liquid piping
If any of these accessories are not packed with the
Rubberunit,
Bush 4 dealer.
please contact your For connection hole of operation wiring
1 For connection hole of power source wiring
Screw 3 Spare
1.2. RCI
1.2.1. FACTORY-SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES 1.2.2. INITIAL CHECK
Make sure that the following accessories are packed with – Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around it
the unit. paying careful attention to the installation direction for
the piping, wiring and maintenance working space, as
shown below.
� NOTE:
– Provide a service access door near the unit piping
connection area on the ceiling.
unit, please contact your dealer.
Accessory Qty. Purpose

Service Access Service Piping Connection
For Adjusting Space of Door Access
Paper Pattern Door
1 False Ceiling Opening
(Carton Board)
and Position of the Unit
Cross
Recessed 4 For Fitting Paper Pattern
Head Screws
Washer with Drain Piping
4 Connection
Insulation For Unit Installation
Washer (M10) 4
Drain Hose 1
For Drain Hose
Wire Clamp 2 Connection
(*) Piping connection side
For
Reducer 1 Service space
RCI-(4.0/5.0/6.0)FSN1E
� CAUTION:
The minimum distance between the wall and panel
edge must be 1500 mm to prevent short-circuiting.
Page 1-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
UNITS INSTALLATION 1/5
– Check space between ceiling and false ceiling is enough – Consider piping connection side before lift indoor unit.
as indicated below.
– Lift the indoor unit by hoist, and do not put any force on
– Check the ceiling surface is flat for the air panel the drain pain.
installation work.
– Secure the indoor unit using the nuts and washers.
Clearance: Unit HP A(mm)
10-20 mm Suspension bolts (4)
RCI-1.5 to 2.5HP 248
False ceiling
Unit High (A) RCI-3.0 to 6.0HP 298
In False Ceiling
Liquid piping
– Check down slope Pitch of Drain Piping is following the Gas piping connection
specifications indicated in chapter Drain Piping. Suspension Bracket
Panel (to be installed later, Open the knockout hole for
shown only as a reference) wiring (Ø32,5)
� Opening of false ceiling Drain piping
connection Wiring hole
– Cut out the area for the indoor unit in the false ceiling
and install suspension bolts, as shown below:
– Check the level of the drain pan by a water level to avoid
Dimension of Opening: 860 to 910 incorrect operation of the drain discharge mechanism in
the indoor unit.
Unit size: 840
Dimension of Suspension
Bolts: 760 4-Positions of
Dimension of Opening: 860 to 910
Suspension Bolts
� NOTE:
(mm) – If a false ceiling has already been installed, complete

Unit size: 840
all piping and wiring work inside the ceiling before

Bolts: 760
hooking-up the indoor unit.

– Secure the indoor unit using the nuts, flat washers
and spring washers. (These nuts and washers are
supplied, 4 pieces each).
Panel
Piping Connection Drain Piping
� Adjusting the space between indoor units and
Side Connection Side false ceiling opening
– Check to ensure that the ceiling is horizontally level,
otherwise water can not flow. – Adjust the indoor unit to the correct position while
checking with the pattern for installation.
– Strengthen the opening parts of the false ceiling.
Checking Scale for Dimension
of Opening Pattern Board for
Installation
1.2.3. INSTALLATION
� Mounting the suspension bolts
– Mount the suspension bolts, as shown. Packing
(Corrugated Board)
For concrete slab:
150 to 160 mm Insert (100 to 150Kg)
I Concrete
� For ceiling already completed with panels.
Steel
Anchor Bolt (W3/8 or M10)
Attach this side of the scale to the inner Attach this side of the scale to the
For steel beam: side of the opening of the ceiling lower side of the unit
Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
I-Beam Suspension Bolt Attach this side of

(W3/8 or M10) Attach this side
the scale to the
of the scale to
Ceiling ceiling Panel
the outer side
panel Checking
� Mounting the indoor unit of the unit Checking Scale
Scale
– Mount the nuts and the washers to the suspension bolts.
Check the dimension Check the height of the
– Put the washer so that the surface with insulation can of opening at each ceiling at each corner of
face downwards as shown below: side of the unit the unit
Suspension Bolts
(Field-Supplied)
Nut (Field-Supplied)
Washer with Insulation
(Field-Supplied)
Suspension Bracket
(Attached Indoor Unit)
Washer (Accessory)
Ceiling
Page 1-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
� Ceiling not completed with panels yet. � Removing the air intake grille from the air
panel
Pattern Paper for Installation 1. Open the air intake grille to an angle of approximately
45° from the surface of the air panel as shown below.
1
Dimension for Opening
Dimension for Opening
Take up the grille keeping it inclined
Ceiling
Suspension Bolt
Unit 45°
Air Panel
Correct
Wrong
Air Filter Air Intake Grille
Screw (M6)
Surface of Ceiling
2. Lift the grille keeping it inclined.
Pattern Board for Installation
3. Draw the grille towards the open space after lifting.
– Tighten the nuts of the suspension brackets after the

adjustment is completed. Apply LOCK-TIGHT paint � Installing the air panel
to the bolts and nuts in order to prevent them from 1. Remove the cover of the corner pocket (4 portions).
loosening. If not done, abnormal noises or sounds Fixing Nail
may occur and the indoor unit may come loose.
Fixing Nail
1.2.4. AIR PANEL INSTALLATION

Fixing Nail
P-G23WA2
� CAUTION:
When the air panel is unpacked, place it on insulation
material, etc. to protect the sealing insulation from L-Type Hook
scratches.
� Factory-supplied accessories 2. Pull the fixing nail towards the arrow mark according to
the order "a", "b" and "c".
Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed
with the air panel. 3. The corner pocket can be lifted. After lifting, move it in
"d" direction, disconnect the L type hook and dismantle
the corner pocket.
� NOTE: 4. Pull down theU-shaped hook (at 2 positions) located at
If any of these accessories are not packed with the the indoor unit side.
unit, please contact your dealer. 5. Set the corner fo the refrigerant connection portion of
the indoor unit to the position indicated as "Ref. Piping",
Accessory Quantity Purpose and hook the C-shaped hinge (2 positions) onto the
U-shapped hooks (2 positions) so that temporary
Long screw positioning is available.
4 For Fixing Panel
(M6×50) 6. Mount the air panel onto the air panel fixing position
by using the factory-supplied fixing screws (M6 cross
screws)
� Location of suspension brackets
Check to ensure that the suspension brackets of the indoor Electrical Control Indoor Unit
unit are located approximately 102 mm higher the false Box
ceiling. Refrigerant Pipe
U-shaped Hook
Connections
Fixing Plate
Stamp Air Panel

“Ref Pipe”
C-shaped Hinge
(Q’ty 2) Long Screw
(Q’ty 4)
Page 1-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
7. Check to ensure that there is no gap around the – When the panel is installed, you can adjust the indoor
contacting surface between the indoor unit and the unit height by using the wrench from the corner
air panel. Any gap may cause air leakage or dewing. pocket.
Fixing Plate
(Indoor Unit side)
Indoor Unit
Undersurface
*
Panel Sealing
False Ceiling
Long Gasket
Fixing Plate Screw
(Air panel side)
Wrench
*: Fix screw until this end touches it

– Too considerable adjustment of height cause dewing
from drain-pain.
8. Attach the corner pocket covers after mounting air
panel: – Do not turn the air louver by hand. Otherwise the
louver mechanism would be damaged.
8.1. Hook the band at the rear side of the cover for the
corner pockets onto the pin of the panel as shown
below.
Pin
Louver
Band
� NOTE:
In case that the corner pocket is dismantled after
8.2. Hook the L-shaped nail located at the rear side of the installing the air panel:
cover for the corner pockets onto the square hole of 1. The corner can be lifted when a coin or a "- "
the air panel. shaped driver is inserted into the dent part � and
twisted downward. With � lifted, twist a coin or a
"-" shaped driver at the positions � and �, the
whole receiver kit can be lifted.
2. After disconnecting the fixing nails (3 positions),
slide the receiver kit in the arrow direction � and
remove the receiver kit.
L-shaped Nail
Fixing Nail Coin or"-" Shaped Driver
(3 Portions)
� CAUTION:
– If tighten long screws insufficient, may cause
Lifting
something wrong as below.
Dent Part
Air Leakage
Smudge Dewing
– If any gap has even though tighten long screws

sufficient, readjust the height of indoor unit.
No gap
Page 1-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
� Wiring connection for the air panel
� CAUTION: 2. Connect the connectors as shown below (view of the

Before connecting connectors, firstly turn OFF power
UNITS
source. If the INSTALLATION
connectors are connected without electrical box)
1
1/8
turning OFF the power source, the auto-swing louver
cannot function.
Electrical Control Box
� Wiring connection for the air panel for Indoor Unit
1. The following connector is used with the air panel (view
PCB
� fromCAUTION:
lower surface of air panel without air intake grille)
2. Connect the connectors as shownConnector
belowfor(view of the
Before connecting connectors, firstly Connector
turn OFF for Auto
power Auto Swing Motor
Electrical Control Swing Motor (Low Voltage, 7Pin, Red)
source.
Box If the connectors are connected without
(Low Voltage,
electrical box)
7Pin, Red)
turning OFF the power source, the auto-swing louver
cannot function. CN17
for Indoor Unit
1. The following connector is used with the air panel (view
from lower surface of air panel without air intake grille) PCB
Connector for Auto Connector for Auto Swing Motor

Electrical Control Swing Motor (Low Voltage, 7Pin, Red)
 NOTE
Box (Low Voltage,
7Pin, Red)
1.3. RCIM-FSN For size and position of piping connection,

CN17
see
Technical Catalog - Chapter 10.
Make sure that the following accessories are packed with – Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around it
the unit. paying careful attention to the installation direction for the
1.3. RCIM-FSN piping, wiring and maintenance working space, as shown
below.
� NOTE: – Provide a service access door near the unit piping
– If any of these accessories are not packed with the
1.3.1. FACTORY-SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES connection
1.3.2. area CHECK
INITIAL on the ceiling.
Make sure that the following accessories are packed with – Install
Service Accessthe indoor unit with
Service Piping a proper clearance around it
Connection
the unit. Accessory Qty. Purpose Doorpaying carefulAccess
attention to the installation direction for the
Door
Checking Scale piping, wiring and maintenance working space, as shown
(Cut out from 1 below.
�
Carton NOTE:
Board)
For Unit with
Installation – Provide a service access door near the unit piping
Flat –
Washer
If anywith
of these accessories are4not packed the
insulation (M10) connection area on the ceiling.
Washer (M10) 4
Drain Piping
Service
Service Access Piping Connection
Connection
Drain Hose Accessory Qty.
1 Purpose Door Access
Door
Checking Scale For Drain Hose
(Cut out from 1 Connection
Wire Clamp
Carton Board) 1
Flat Washer with For Unit Installation
4
insulation (M10)
Insulation
1 For Refrigerant
(Big Size) (M10)
Washer 4 Piping Drain Piping
Insulation Connection Connection
Drain Size)
Hose 11
(Small
For Drain Hose
For Drain Hose
Insulation
Wire Clamp(5t) 11 Connection
Insulation � CAUTION:
For Fixing edge must be 1500 mm to prevent short-circuiting.
Insulation
Band 61 Refrigerant
(Big Size) For Refrigerant
Piping
PipingInsulation
Insulation Connection
1
(Small Size)
For Drain Hose

Insulation (5t) 1
Insulation � CAUTION:
For Fixing edge must be 1500 mm to prevent short-circuiting.
Band 6 Refrigerant
Piping Insulation
Page 1-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
Suspension Bolts
(Field-Supplied)
– Check space between ceiling and false ceiling is enough
as indicated below. Washer with Insulation
(Accessory)
– Check the ceiling surface is flat for the air panel
Suspension Bracket
installation work. (Attached Indoor Unit) Approx. 50
Washer (Accessory) 90
Clearance: Nut (Field-Supplied)
10~20 mm
Unit High in false Ceiling Approx. 45

ceiling
– Consider piping connection side before lift indoor unit.

– Lift the indoor unit by hoist, and do not put any force on
the drain pain.
– Check down slope Pitch of Drain Piping is following the
specifications indicated in chapter Drain Piping. – Secure the indoor unit using the nuts and washers.
Suspension bolts (4)

� Opening of false ceiling
– Cut out the area for the indoor unit in the false ceiling and
install suspension bolts, as shown below:
(mm)
Dimension of Opening: 660 Suspension Bracket
Electrical Box
Unit size: 570
Bolts: 530 4-Positions of
Suspension Bolts – Check the level of the drain pan by a water level to avoid
Dimension of Opening: 660
incorrect operation of the drain discharge mechanism in

the indoor unit.
Unit size: 570
Bolts: 530
� NOTE:
– If a false ceiling has already been installed, complete
all piping and wiring work inside the ceiling before
Panel
Piping Connection Drain Piping
– Secure the indoor unit using the nuts, flat washers and
Side Connection Side spring washers. (These nuts and washers are
– Check to ensure that the ceiling is horizontally level,
otherwise water can not flow. � Adjusting the space between indoor units and
– Strengthen the opening parts of the false ceiling. false ceiling opening
– Adjust the indoor unit to the correct position while
1.3.3. INSTALLATION checking with the pattern for installation.
� Mounting the suspension bolts
– Mount the suspension bolts, as shown.
For concrete slab: Indoor Unit
I Concrete
Steel
� For ceiling already completed with panels.
For steel beam:
Attach this side of the scale to the inner Attach this side of the scale to the
side of the opening of the ceiling lower side of the unit
I-Beam Suspension Bolt Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
(W3/8 or M10)
Attach this side of

� Mounting the indoor unit Attach this side
the scale to the
of the scale to
– Mount the nuts and the washers to the suspension bolts. the outer side
panel Checking
of the unit Checking Scale
– Put the washer so that the surface with insulation can Scale
face downwards as shown:
of opening at each ceiling at each corner of
side of the unit the unit
Page 1-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
� Ceiling not completed with panels yet.

� Removing Cover for Corner Pocekt (Positions)
1. Remove the screw at mark “a”.
– Tighten the nuts of the suspension brackets after the
adjustment is completed. Apply LOCK-TIGHT paint to the
1
bolts and nuts in order to prevent them from loosening. If
not done, abnormal noises or sounds may occur and the
indoor unit may come loose.
1.3.4. AIR PANEL INSTALLATION

P-N23WAM
� CAUTION:
material, etc. to protect the sealing insulation from 2. Pull the fixing hook towards the arrow mark “b”.
scratches. 3. The corner pocket can be removed to pull the corner
pocket toward the arrow mark “c”.
� Factory-supplied accessories
� Installing the air panel
Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed
with the air panel.
1. Fix the long screw to the fixing plate temporary.
2. Set the corner of the refrigerant connection portion of the
� NOTE: indoor unit to the position indicated as “PIPE SIDE”.
If any of these accessories are not packed with the 3. Hook the air panel onto the long screw (2 positions) so
unit, please contact your dealer. that temporary positioning is available.
Long screw
Accessory Quantity Purpose
Long screw
4 For Fixing Panel
(M6×50)
� Location of suspension brackets

Long screw
– Check to ensure that the suspension brackets of the
indoor unit are located approximately 90 mm higher
the false ceiling.
4. Mount the air panel onto the air panel fixing position by
using the factory-supplied fixing screws (M5 cross
screws).
Refrigerant Pipe Connections
Indoor Unit
Fixing Plate
Indoor Unit
Fixing Plate
Indication
“PIPE SIDE”
Long Screw
Air Panel
� Removing the air intake grille from the air panel
1. Open the air intake grille to an angle of approximately 45°
from the surface of the air panel as shown below.
Long Screw
Ceiling (Q’ty 4)
45°
Air Panel � NOTE:
Correct Fix the (A),(B) position and after fix the other side.
Wrong
Air Filter Air Intake Grille
 NOTE
2. Lift the grille keeping it inclined. For size and position of piping connection, see
3. Draw the grille towards the open space after lifting. Technical Catalog - Chapter 10.
Page 1-11
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.4. RCD

– Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around it
Make sure that the following accessories are packed with paying careful attention to the installation direction for
the unit. the piping, wiring and maintenance working space, as
shown below.
– Provide a service access door near the unit piping
� NOTE: connection area on the ceiling.
Separated installation Closed installation
Service access door Service access door
Paper pattern
(carton board)
1 For adjusting space
of false ceiling
Level scaler (take Piping
opening and connection
out of paper 1 position of the unit
pattern)
Cross recessed For fitting paper
head screws (M6)
6 pattern
Piping
connection
Flat washer 8 For unit suspension
For drain hose

Wire clamp 1 connection
Insulation Distance from wall side
(26IDx100 mm)
1
For refrigerant
Insulation
(28IDx85 mm)
1
piping connection � CAUTION:
For fixing remote edge must be 1500 mm to prevent short-circuiting.
Cord band control switch
8 wiring and – Check space between ceiling and false ceiling is enough
insulation of piping as indicated below.
Packing For covering wiring – Check the ceiling surface is flat for the air panel
(5Tx50x200) 1 connection installation work.
Only for
Reducer 1
RCD (4.0/5.0) FSN
Applicable air panel (option)

Indoor unit
Applicable air panel (option)

Indoor unit
For wired remote control switch
RCD-1.0 ~3.0 P-G23DWA1 Air panel (option)
RCD-4.0~5.0 P-G46DWA1
– Check that the down slope pitch of the drain piping
follows the specifications indicated in chapter "Drain
Piping".
� Opening of False Ceiling

– Cut out the area for the indoor unit in the false ceiling
and install suspension bolts, as shown below.
Page 1-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation

A (Opening)
B (Suspension) Drain Piping � Mounting the indoor unit
Connection
– Mount the suspension brackets to the suspension bolts
and fix them with nuts (factory -supplied), as shown
below.
530 (Suspension)
– Put the washer so that the surface with insulation can
650 (Opening)
face downwards as shown below:
(mm)
Suspension bolts (field-suppl.)
Nut (field-supplied)
~ 50
Washer (field-supplied)
Wireless receiver, Piping
Suspension with wireless receiver type Suspension bracket
Panel Washer (field-supplied)
115
View from top Nut (field-supplied)
~65
Model Model AA(mm)
(mm) B(mm)
B (mm)
Ceiling
RCD-1.0~3.0FSN 1060 889
RCD-1.5
RCD-4.0~6.0FSN
RCD-2.0 1620
1060 1450
889 – Lift the indoor unit by hoist, and do not apply any force
RCD-2.5 on the drain pan.
RCD-3.0
– Hook the indoor unit on the suspension brackets.
RCD-4.0
1620 1450 – Fix the unit using the nuts, flat washers and spring
RCD-5.0
washers (These nuts and washers are supplied
(4 pieces each)).
– Check to ensure that the ceiling is horizontal, otherwise
drain water cannot flow away.
– Strengthen the opening parts of the false ceiling.
Suspension
Adjustment range bracket
(3~4 mm)
1.4.3. INSTALLATION
� Mounting suspension bolts Fixing bracket
for panel
– Mount the suspension bolts, as shown.
For concrete slab:
M6 Screw
150 to 160 mm Insert (100 to 150Kg) Paper pattern (factory-supplied)
I Concrete
– Check the level of the drain pan by a water level to avoid

Steel incorrect operation of the drain discharge mechanism in
the indoor unit.
For steel beam:
� NOTE:
I-Beam Suspension Bolt – If a false ceiling has already been installed, complete
(W3/8 or M10) all piping and wiring work inside the ceiling before
– Secure the indoor unit using the nuts, flat washers
and spring washers. (These nuts and washers are
Page 1-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
– Adjust the indoor unit to the correct position while

� Adjusting space between indoor unit
checking with the checking scales (factory-supplied).
and false ceiling opening
– Adjust the indoor unit to the correct position while Drain pipe
checking with the installation pattern and gauge
(factory-supplied) as shown below.
� For ceiling already completed with panels
Attach this side of the scale to the inner Attach this side of the scale to the Bracket
side of the opening of the ceiling lower side of the unit for panel
Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
Adjust 4 corners
of the unit using
Attach this side of clear vinyl tube
Attach this side
the scale to the
of the scale to with water inside
the outer side
panel Checking
of the unit Checking Scale Clear vinyl tube
Scale

of opening at each ceiling at each corner of
side of the unit the unit
1.4.4. AIR PANELS INSTALLATION
Fixing bracket P-G23DWA1, P-G46DWA1
for panel
Touch to
ceiling � CAUTION:
material, etc. to protect the sealing insulation from
Unit scratches.
� Factory-supplied accessories
Ceiling Make sure that the following accessories are packed with
Opening the air panel.
� Ceiling not completed with panels yet

� NOTE:
(mm) unit, please contact your dealer.
Long screw
4 For fixing panel
(M6×50)
Long screw For fixing panel

2
(M6×30) (only for P-G46)
Unit � Location of suspension brackets
– Check to ensure that the suspension brackets of the
indoor unit are located approximately 115 mm higher
the false ceiling.
Suspension
bracket
Suspension
bracket
Ceiling
Ceiling
– Tighten the nuts of the suspension brackets after
adjustment is completed. Apply LOCK-TIGHT paint Wireless receiver
Auto swing motor Air discharge part
to the bolts and nuts in order to prevent them from
loosening. If not done, abnormal noises or sounds
may occur and the indoor unit may fall down.
� CAUTION:
Check the level of the unit using a water level or
transparent plastic tube containing water, as shown
below, to avoid incorrect operation of the drain
discharge mechanism in the indoor unit. The drain
piping side of the indoor unit must be approximately
5 mm lower than the other parts.
Air discharge
Page 1-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
UNITS INSTALLATION
Units installation 1/15
� Removing the air intake grille from the air panel:

1. Open the air intake grille to an angle of approx. 40°
� CAUTION:
Do not turn the air louver by hand. If moved, the louver
from the surface of the air panel.
mechanism will be damaged.
1
Ceiling
Air panel Approx. 40°
Wrong Correct Air louver

Air filter Air intake grille
2. Lift the grille keeping it inclined.

3. Draw the grille towards the open space after lifting.
� Wiring connection for air panel.
� Installing the air panel:
1. Hang the air panel from the indoor unit by hooking
the U-shaped wires of the air panel into the hook
� CAUTION:
Before connecting connectors, firstly turn OFF power
wires of the indoor unit.
source. If the connectors are connected without
2. Make sure that the location of the electrical box turning OFF the power source, the auto-swing louver
of the Indoor unit coincides with the location of the cannot function.
wiring outlet of the air panel.
The following connector is used with the air panel (view
3. Raise up the air panel onto the indoor unit, then fix from lower surface of air panel without air intake grille)
the air panel by using factory-supplied long screws.
Indoor unit
Outlet for electrical wiring
Hook wires
Electrical box of indoor unit
Long screw (A) x4

(M6x50)
Long screw (B) x4 Without air intake grille

(M6x30, only for P-G46)
Connect the connectors as shown below (view of the

electrical box).
4. Make sure that there is no gap around the contacting

surface between the indoor unit and the air panel. Any
gap may cause air leakage or dewing. Electrical box
of indoor unit
� CAUTION:
To protect the panel from being damaged, the long Outlet for
screws for securing the air panel have stoppers so that electrical wiring Printed circuit
tightening is stopped at the setting position. If the air board
panel does not reach the surface of the ceiling or air
leakage from the contacting surface occurs, readjust
the installation height level of the indoor unit.
Connector for auto swing motor

(low voltage 7 pin, RED) (CN17)
 NOTE
For size and position of piping connection, see
Technical Catalog - Chapter 10.
Page 1-15
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.5. RPC
1.5.1. FACTORY-SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Make sure that the following accessories are packed with

the unit. – Suspension bracket has the following two (2) possible
positions:
� NOTE: Case (a) Case (b)

Accessory Qty Purpose

Suspension For unit
2
bracket suspension
Fixing screw Same in
2 both case
(M4 x 10 mm)
Drain hose 1
For connecting
Wire clamp 2 drain hose and
drain pipe (mm)
Model A B C D E F
Insulation material For drain pipe RPC-2.0 1094 920 1010 150 220 255
1
(5Tx200x200 mm) connection RPC-2.5~3.5
RPC-2.5/3.0 1314 1140 1230 150 220 255
RPC-4.0 1314 1140 1230 110 280 235
Sealing plate For sealing
1 RPC-5.0/6.0 1574 1400 1490 110 280 235
(0.8Tx118x42 mm) knockout hole
For – Select the suspension bracket system depending of
Reducer 1 RPC-
your needs; for semi-concealed installation Case (a)
(4.0/5.0/6.0)FSNE
is recommended.
1.5.2. INITIAL CHECK – Mount the suspension brackets to the slings bolts or
anchor bolt and secure them with nuts (field-supplied),
– Install the indoor unit with proper clearance around it for as shown below.
operation and maintenance working space, as shown
below.
– Check down slope pitch of drain piping follows the
specification indicated in chapter "Drain Piping". Sling bolt (M10)
Indoor unit (field-supplied)
rear side
1.5.3.
1.5.3. INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION Suspension
bracket
� Mounting
 Mounting thethe
suspension bracket
suspension bracket
Indoor unit
When
� When installing thethe
installing indoor unit, use the installation pattern
indoor front side
printed on the inne side of the carton box. Follow the
unit, use the installation
printed instructions.
pattern printed on the inner Nuts and washers
side of the carton box, (field-supplied)
cutting the carton box along
dotted lines when unpacking Dotted line
is performed.
� NOTE:
– Installation pattern is giving the following information: Tighten the nuts of the sling bolts or anchor bolts
with the suspension brackets after the adjustment
is completed. Apply Lock-Tight paint to the bolts
–
– Installation pattern
Pitch of sling is case
bolt for giving(a)
the following
and information:
case (b) showed and nuts in order to prevent them from loosening.
– Pitch of sling bolt for Case (a) and Case (b) showed
below.
– below.
Hole positions of refrigerant piping.
–
– Hole
Hole positions
positions of
of refrigerant piping.
drain piping.
– Hole positions of drain piping.
Page 1-16
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
� Mounting the indoor unit � For semi-concealed installation.

Remove side covers of the unit. – Open a hole in the false ceiling.
To avoid damage to the resin side covers, before lifting
or moving the indoor unit, remove the resin side (mm)
≥ 300
1
covers as indicated in the following procedure:
≥A
≥8
Top side of unit
≥ 50
≥ 300
Models
Models A
A
RPC-2.0
RPC-2.0 1560
1560
RPC-2.5~3.5
RPC-(2.5/3.0) 1780
1780
RPC-5.0/6.0
RPC-4.0~6.0 2040
Hooking part 2040
≥ 605
Air inlet grille
1. Slide the resin side covers forward approximately – When installing the indoor unit as shown in the following
15 mm. figure, insulate the top part of the cabinet which will be
2. Carefully pull the bottom of the side covers away from concealed in the ceiling because dew may occur under
the indoor unit, approximately 10 mm. cooling operation.
3. Remove the resin side covers upward.
Insulation material
A
(field-supplied)
� CAUTION: Models
Models A A
The mechanism of the automatic swing louver is RPC-2.0~3.5
RPC-(2.0/3.0) 13 13
utilized. Do not move the swing louver by hand or RPC-4.0~6.0
RPC-(4.0~6.0) 75 75
other objects. This can damage the mechanism of
the automatic swing louver.
M4 Screw
– Secure the indoor unit with the suspension bolts.
Fixing screw Position the false ceiling panels along the indoor unit.
Do not hold
this louver
Hole
Connector
� For hanging type installation.

Attach false ceiling to seal space
– Hook the indoor units on the suspension brackets, by
setting the mounting bolts on the units with the
notches of the bracket, as shown below. Fix the units � Drain pan level
with the nuts, flat washers and spring washers. (Each
four nuts and washers are supplied.) – The level of the drain pan has to be checked by a
water level of a transparent plastic tube containing
water, as shown below so as to avoid the incorrect
position of the drain discharge.
Fix the unit with 0~3 mm

four M8 nuts
0~3 mm
Transparent plastic
tube containing water
UNITS INSTALLATION
1/18
Water level
– The unit should be installed so that the rear side of the

 NOTE: unit is slightly (approximately 3 mm) lower than the
When the false ceiling has been already installed, all front side, in order to avoid the incorrect position of the
piping work inside the ceilling has to be completed drain discharge.
before the indoor units is hooked – Tighten the nuts of the suspension bolts with the
suspension brackets after adjustment is completed.
Chapter 3.
Special plastic paint must be applied to the bolts in
order to prevent them from loosening.
� NOTE:
Page 1-17 When the false ceiling has been already installed, all
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006 piping work inside the ceiling has to be completed
Units installation
1.6. RPI
1.6.1. FACTORY-SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES RPI-0.8~1.5
(Models: RPI-0.8~1.5FSN1E) Service space of
(Models: RPI-2.0~6.0FSN1E) false ceiling
(Models: RPI-8/10FSNE)
Make sure that the following accessories are packed with From top
the unit.
 NOTE:
- If any of these accessories are not packed with the
- In case of 8/10HP, the pipe reduction for refrigerant
pipe connection pipe must be field supplied.
Distance between suspension brackets (A, B):
RPI-0.8~6.0
Models A (mm) B (mm)
RPI-0.8~1.5 969 1005
Wire Clamp 1 For drain
connection RPI-2.0~3.5 1113 601
RPI-4.0~6.0 1503 601
RPI-8.0~10.0 RPI-8~10 1433 637

Adjustment 8 Unit Hanging 1.6.3. UNIT INSTALLATION
Bolt for
Installation  Mounting the suspension bolts
Flat Washer 8 - Using the aforementioned dimension select the final
location and installation direction of the indoor unit paying
careful attention to the space for the piping, wiring and
Spring 8 maintenance.
Washer - Mount the suspension bolts, as shown.
For concrete slab:
1.6.2. INITIAL CHECK No. Description
Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around it for  Steel
operation and maintenance working space, as shown below.
 Insert (100 to
150 kg)
Recommended working space dimensions:
Service space of  Concrete
RPI-0.8~1.5 false ceiling
 Anchor Bolt
(W3/8 or M10)
For steel beam:

From bottom
No. Description
 I Beam
 Suspension Bolt
(W3/8 or M10)
Service space of
RPI-2.0~6.0 false ceiling
Rear side
From top
Page 1-18
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
 Mounting the indoor unit 1.6.4. CONNECTING FIELD SUPPLY DUCT AND
- Hook suspension bracket to the nut and washer of each SUCTION AIR FILTER SERVICING
suspension bolt, as shown, starting from one side.
 Field Supply Duct installation
- After checking that the nut and washer are correctly fixed
Fix the Flexible Air Duct to External Faces of unit flanges
1
by the retainers of the suspension bracket, hook the
(the unit is equipped with factory supply flanges for this
suspension bracket of the other side to nut and washer.
purpose).
It is recommended to use a Flexible field supply Duct
Suspension bolt portion in order to avoid any abnormal sound vibration.
Left side Suspension bracket RPI-units are supplied with standard Air Filter at the
suction side. This filter is provided for the cases in which
no Suction Duct is applied (or it is very short).
Inlet Air
It is recommended the following indications depending on
Washer the installation.
Nut
 Keep the standard Air Filter in case of no Suction Duct is
applied (fig.1) and (fig.3)
 In case of applying Suction Duct, it is recommended to

apply Air Filter at the inlet point of Suction Duct, removing
the standard Air Filter of the unit (fig. 2)and (fig.4)
Right side
(service cover)
RPI-0.8~6.0
Standard air filter
 Drain pan level (factory-supplied)
Make sure that the foundation is flat, taking into account

the maximum foundation gradient. Outlet air
Front view
≈ 5 mm
Outlet air Inlet air flow
Optional Air Filter

(Field-supplied)
Condensate drain (or adapted factory-supplied one)
connection
RPI-8.0/10.0
- The unit should be installed so that one side of the unit
is slightly (approximately 5 mm) lower than the other
Outlet air Inlet air
side, in order to avoid the incorrect position of the drain
discharge. Air filter (Factory-supplied)
- Tighten the nuts of the suspension bolts with the

suspension brackets after adjustment is completed.
Special plastic paint must be applied to the bolts and nuts
in order to prevent them from loosening. Air filter
- Fasten the pipe to the drain hose with an adhesive and Outlet air
Inlet air
the factory-supplied clamp (only 0.8~1.5 / 8.0-10.0HP)
 NOTE: Damper (field-supplied

Insulated Duct
Keep the unit as well as relevant equipment covered (Installed on the outer side of the flanges)
with the vinyl cover during installation work. Flexible Duct Installation
Optional Air Filter
(Rubber or Textil Material)
(Field supplied)
Page 1-19
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
RPI-8.0~10.0
 ATTENTION: (RPI-0.8~1.5/8.0-10.0 only).
– Optionally, if applying Suction Duct and keeping The Air Filter (3 panels) is fixed by frames. Pull up the Air
the standard Air Filter in its original location (not Filter and removed them as shown in the figure.
recommended), be aware to make a servicing gate
onto the Suction Air Duct, as shown in the figure
(Fig. 3). Keep the servicing gate properly sealed by
aluminium tape.
– Air Filter maintenance should be performed by
professional installer.
Air Filter
(3 panels)
Air Filter Guides
Air Duct
Duct gate Unit

1.6.5. AIR SUCTION DIRECTION CHANGE
For RPI-2.0~6.0FSN1E units, Air Suction direction could be

modified by changing Back Cover direction as shown in the
diagram.
 Suction Air Filter Servicing
RPI-0.8~1.5  
Inlet air direction
The Air Filter is fixed by clamps on the internal face of the

unit Air Duct flanges. Pull out the Air Filter by using the
strips located on the upper side. After maintenance when Optional Inlet air direction
assembling the Air Filter make sure that the Filter is well
located on the unit clamps and push it.  
Filter clamp
Filter strip
Change Back
Back cover cover side
RPI-2.0~6.0
Remove the stay support (3 screws) from the unit and pull
down the Air Filter.
Air filter
Air filter removing
direction
Air filter support
Page 1-20
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation UNITS INSTALLATION 1/21
1.7. RPK
1
– Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around
Make sure that the following accessories are packed with it for operation and maintenance working space as
the unit. shown below.
� RPK
� NOTE: (mm) Wall
B
unit, please contact your dealer. 2~5 mm
Indoor Diameter
Qty Qty Qty unit of 65 mm
Accessory Purpose (hole for
(M) (S) (SBF) piping)
Min. 1000
Mounting Outdoor
1 1 - A unit
bracket For mounting Min.
indoor unit 100
Mounting
- - 1 (Operation and installation space) (Hole for piping on the wall)
bracket
Screw
(mm)
Model AA B B
(Ø4.1× 6 6 8
25 mm) For mounting Model
Screw bracket RPK-1.0/1.5FSN1M
RPK-1.5FSN1M 100
100 150
150
(Ø4.1× 2 2 4
RPK-0.8~2.0FSNM
RPK-1.5/2.0FSNM 100
100 5050
40 mm)
RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM
RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM 200
200 5050
For drain hose
Plate 1 1 -
setting
Insulation
pipe
1 1 1 For pipe � NOTE:
– Consider the air distribution from the indoor unit to the
space of the room, and select a suitable location so
Insulation - 1 1 For pipe that uniform air temperature in the room can be
obtained.
Harness
Cable for
with 1 1 1
PC-P1HE
connector
Connector - 2 2
For RPK-
Reducer - 1
4.0FSNM
M: RPK Mini
S: RPK Summit
SBF: RPK Super Big Flow
Page 1-21
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation

� Removing the front panel � Putting back the front panel
– In order to connect the refrigerant piping, the wiring RPK-1.0/1.5FSN1M
RPK-1.5FSN1M
and to check the drain water flow, it is necessary to – Firstly put back the upper side of the front panel
remove the front panel. Perform this work according (three parts), and then fix the hook on bottom center
to the following instructions. Be careful not to scratch part
the resin components. – There are stoppers inside of the front panel. Check to
RPK-1.0/1.5FSN1M
RPK-1.5FSN1M ensure that there is no gap between front panel and
– Open the front panel and remove two screws unit body.
Front Panel
Body
RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM
– First put back the lower side of the front panel, and
– Slowly pull the lower side of the front panel at your then attach the three hooks at the upper side of the
side by paying attention to the air outlet part without front panel.
touching the outlet grille. Slightly lift the front panel
– There are three stoppers inside the front panel. Make
upward in order to release the combined parts
sure that there is no gap between the front panel, the
(three parts) of upper side of the front panel.
drain pan and the unit body.
� Removing the right side cover

RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM
– In order to connect the refrigerant piping, wiring and
to check drain water flow, removing the right side
cover is needed. Perform this work according to the
following instructions. Pay an attention to the resin
components not to scratch.
� NOTE:
Do not hit the front panel when removing it, otherwise
the body will be broken.
RPK-0.8~4.0FSNM
RPK 1.5~4.0FSNM
– Remove three bushings as shown and remove the
screws as shown below.
Detach hook
To loose screw
– Slowly pull the lower side of the right side cover and
detach the upper hook.
Hook
– Slowly pull the lower side of the front panel at your
side. The air outlet must not touch the outlet grille.
– Slightly lift the front panel upward in order to release

the three hooks of upper side of the front panel.
� CAUTION:
Any gap may cause air leakage or dewing.
 NOTE
For size and position of piping connection, see Technical
Catalog - Chapter 10.
Page 1-22
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.7.3.
1.7.4. DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS OF
OF THE
THE MOUNTING
MOUNTING BRACKET
BRACKET

� RPK-1.0/1.5FSN1M
RPK-1.5FSN1M
1
Mounting
bracket
Contour of
the unit

� RPK-0.8/2.0FSNM
RPK-1.5~2.0FSNM
Mounting
bracket
Contour of
the unit

� RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM
RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM
Mounting
bracket
Contour of
the unit
Page 1-23
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.8. RPF (FLOOR TYPE) / RPFI (FLOOR-CONCEALED TYPE)
1.8.1. FACTORY-SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – Service access panel

Provide a service access door or panel as shown below.
Make sure that the following accessories are packed with
the unit.
� NOTE:
A
unit, please contact your dealer. Unit
(inside)
Accessory Qty Purpose Floor

B
Adjustment bolt For adjusting the flat Service Service
for installation
4 level of the unit access panel
access panel
Screw 2 PC-P1HE (Space around indoor

(Space unit)
around indoor unit)
Model Size A Size B
Size
RPFI-1.0
Model 640 A 1260 B
1.8.2. INITIAL CHECK RPFI-1.5
RPFI-1.5 13801380
– Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around RPFI-2.0/2.5
RPFI-2.0 640 1634
1634
it for operation and maintenance as shown in Service RPFI-2.5
Access panel.
RPF � NOTE:
Consider the air distribution from the indoor unit to
the space of the room, and select a suitable location
so that uniform air temperature in the room can be
obtained.
Wall
Make sure that the foundation is flat, level and

sufficiently strong.
It is recommended that a service access panel for
630
floor- concealed type indoor units be provided. The

access panel must be fixed with screw(s) so that
Wall Wall service engineer(s) only is accessible.
More than 300 More than 300
1.8.3. INSTALLATION
RPFI
– Make sure that the fixing position of the unit is as
shown below.
Ceiling
Upward air outlet Fixing onto floor using wood screws (2-M8) Fixing onto wall
(view from top side) (view from front side)
Short flexible
Wall
duct
640
Fixing onto floor using wood screws (4-M5)

(view from top side)
Service space
for electrical Piping space
box
More than 240 More than 240
Provide a space so that air can flow smoothly.

Ceiling
(mm)
Front air Outlet
Model A B C D E F G
(mm)
Model A B C D E F G
RPFI-1.0 848 704 72 732 80 139 620
RPFI-1.5 973 829 72 857 50 139 620
RPFI-1.5
RPFI-2.0 973 829 72 857 50 139 620
620
1223 1079 72 1107 50 139 620

RPFI-2.0/2.5
RPFI-2.5 1223 1079 72 1107 50 139 620
Service space for – Adjust the flat level of the unit by loosening or
electrical box Piping space
tightening the bolts for installation that are attached in
More than 240 More than 240 the unit. Make the drain pipe side lower than the
opposite side for smooth drain.
Page 1-24
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
– Fix the base plate and back plate of the unit with � Air outlet direction change (RPFI)
field-supplied fixing bolts and screws. When attaching In case of changing the RPFI units air outlet direction from
the adjusting bolts for installation, remove the upward to front, follow the procedures below:
electrical wiring box.
– Remove the fixing screws of the air outlet flange and
1
– In case of the RPF unit, perform the above work after the upper front cover. Then, remove the flange and
removing the front cover and side cover of the unit. the cover.
– Reverse the side of the flange right and left.
– Put the cover on the top of the unit, and put the
flange
Side cover on the front side of the unit.
– Fix the flange and the cover.
Front cover
Air outlet flange

Fixing bolt
Fixing bolt
Adjustment bolt
for installation
Upper front cover
(accessories)
Fixing screw
(Installation unit)
– Install the optional air outlet grille of the RPFI unit

as shown in the following figure. If installed in a
comparatively high humid place, condensation may
occur. Therefore, attach a plate that can absorb
water, like SUNKEN AQ made by ASAHI Chemical
Co., around the grille.
� Optional location for PC-P1HE (RPF)
Air outlet flange Absorbent plate for water In case of RPF Unit, it is possible to install the PC-P1HE
under the plastic cover as shown in the figure below:
Ex.: SUNFINE AQ made by
ASAHI Chemical Co.
Polyurethane
foam for thermal
insulation
(field-supplied)
Floor-concealed unit
Air outlet duct (field-
supplied)
� WARNING:
Provide a service access cover that is fixed by
screws so that the fan runner is not directly touched
 NOTE
(Only RPFI model).

� CAUTION: Technical Catalog - Chapter 10.
The optional air outlet grille of the RPFI unit cannot
be used in a highly humid place like a kitchen,
because condensation may occur on the grille
surface.
Page 1-25
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.9 COMPLEMENTARY
1.8. COMPLEMENTARYSYSTEMS
SYSTEMS
1.9.1 KPI (TOTAL

1.8.1. - TOTAL HEAT
HEAT EXCHANGER)
EXCHANGER � Installation
� Factory-supplied accessories � Mounting the suspension bolts
Make sure that the following accessories are packed with - Mark the positions of the sling bolts, refrigerant piping
the unit. connections and drain connection.
- Installation dimensions are shown in the next figure.
� NOTE:
Accessory Appearance Qty
4 (double-flanges
at supply air (SA)
Flange
and exhaust air
(EA) sides)
Screw (M4X8) 16
� Initial check
- Install the unit with a proper clearance around it for
operation and maintenance working space, as shown
in the next figure:
EA RA
OA SA
Electrical control box

Service
space
Service panel
�
Service access panel (450x450-
600x600 mm)
Duct
Outer dimension For suspension bolt Duct Duct diameter
Models (dir. change)
A B C D E F G H J K
KPI-2521 735 780 275 765 700 530 63 142 160 102
KPI-5021 1016 888 317 1048 790 745 79 192 208 124
KPI-8021 1004 1164 398 1036 1030 690 79 242 258 149
KPI-10021 1231 1164 398 1263 1030 920 79 242 258 149
Page 1-26
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
� Attaching the duct connecting flanges

- Use the screws supplied to secure the duct connecting � NOTE:
flanges to the unit. In case of that the sling bolts are too short, re-attach
the suspension bracket in an alternative position.
Remove the screws at the top mounting position.
1
Remove the suspension brackets and attach them at
a higher mounting position.Tighten up the screws in
the screw hole where the suspension brackets were
removed in order to prevent air leaks.
Suspension
bracket
Mounting screw Remove and
tighten up
Duct connecting flange
� CAUTION: Tighten up to
Before attaching the duct connecting flanges, check original position
that no foreign matter (scraps of paper, vinyl, etc.)
has found its way inside the main unit.
Attach the duct connecting flanges with the packing
at the SA and RA sides. � Connecting the supply duct
The supply duct should be connected with the unit
� Mounting the indoor unit through flexible duct, in order to avoid abnormal sounds
- Preparing the sling bolts. and vibration. The unit is equipped with a pre-drilled duct
flange for the supply duct connection.
- Fit the ducts securely into the duct connecting flanges,
Nut* Sling Bolt (M12)* and wind aluminum tape (field-supplied) around them
to prevent air leaks.
- Suspend the ducts from the ceiling so that their weight
Washer* will not be applied to the unit.
- The two outdoor ducts must be covered with heat-
insulating material in order to prevent condensation
Nut* from forming.
* Field-supplied
- Hanging the unit. Duct
Hang the suspension bracket on the anchor bolts and

adjust in such a way that the unit is installed
horizontally.
Tighten up securely using double nuts in order to
prevent looseness.
Unit
Sling bolt
Taping
Aluminum
Heat-insulating
tape
material
Nut Suspension bracket

Washer
Outdoor duct Unit

� CAUTION:
When suspending the main unit from the ceiling, do
not handle it in such a way that force will be applied Duct connecting flange
to the control box.
Page 1-27
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
� CAUTION: 1.9.2
1.8.2. ECONOFRESH KIT
Before connecting the ducts, check that no sawdust
or any other foreign matter (scraps of paper, vinyl, � Factory-supplied accessories
etc.) has found its way inside the ducts. Make sure that the following accessories are packed with
Do not touch the damper plate inside the main unit the unit.
when connecting the ducts.
Do not install the ducts in the ways illustrated below.
Doing so will reduce the air volume and give rise to
� NOTE:
abnormal sounds.
unit, contact your dealer.
Extremely sharp bends Multiple bends Accessory Qty
Cord AS 1
Outdoor thermistor (8m) 1
Screw
(for RPI and Econo-Fresh 12
Extreme reduction in the diameter
Bends right next to the outlet flanges connection)
of the connected ducts
� Initial check
Before performing the Econo-Fresh kit installation, refer to
the indoor unit’s Installation and Operation Manual.
Install the indoor unit with a proper clearance around it
for operation and maintenance working space, as shown
below.
Upper view
� CAUTION:
When suspending the main unit from the ceiling, do
not handle it in such a way that a force will be applied
to the control box.
Sling bolt
(M8 to M10) (*)
Nut (*) Washer (*)
(*) Field-supplied
Page 1-28
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.10
1.9. RAS-FSVNE
RAS FSVNE
� WARNING: � CAUTION:
1
– Install the outdoor unit with sufficient clearance around it – Check to ensure that the foundation is flat, level and
for operation and maintenance as shown in the next sufficiently strong.
figures. – Install the unit in a restricted area not accessible by the
– Install the outdoor unit where good ventilation is available general public
– Do not install the outdoor unit where is a high level of oil – Aluminum fins have very sharp edges. Pay attention to
mist, salty air or sulphurous atmosphere. the fins to avoid injury.
– Install the outdoor unit as far as practical (being at least
3 meters) from electromagnetic wave radiator (such as
medical equipment).
– Keep clearance between the units of more than 50 mm,
and avoid obstacles that may hamper air intake, when
installing more than one units together.
– Install the outdoor unit in the shade or not exposed to
direct sunshine or direct radiation from high temperature
heat source.
1.10.1
1.9.1. INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION SPACE
SPACE
a) In case of front side and either of the sides are open
b) In case that surrounding wall exist (single unit)
(single unit)
*4/5HP
c) In case that upper side obstacles exist (single unit)
0 < L � 1/2H � A � 600

1/2H < L � H � A � 1200
*4/5HP
d) In case that upper side obstacles exist (serial units)
0 < L � 1/2H � A � 1000

1/2H < L � H � A � 350 0 < L � 1/2H � A � 600 0 < L � 1/2H � A � 1000
1/2H < L � H � A � 1200 1/2H < L � H � A � 350
Page 1-29
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
0 < L � 1/2H � A � 200
*4/5HP *4/5HP
(mm)
1/2H < L � H � A � 350
e) In case of front side and either of the sides are open

f) In case that surrounding wall exist (serial units)
(serial units)
g) Horizontal (multiple units) h) Vertical (multiple units)
0 < L � 1/2H � A � 200

*4/5HP *4/5HP 1/2H < L � H � A � 350
* *
(mm)
g) Horizontal (multiple units) h) Vertical (multiple units)
0 < L � 1/2H � A � 200
1/2H < L � H � A � 350
- Do not stack more than two units in height

- Close gap (*) to avoid recirculating discharge air flow
1.9.2. INSTALLATION PLACE PROVISION � Fix Unit to the wall

* *
- Fix the Unit onto the wall
� Concrete Foundation as the figure indicates.
(field supplied stay)
- Foundation could be on flat and is recommended be
0 < L � 1/2H � A � 200
100-300
mm higher than ground level. - Ensure the foundation so
1/2H < L � H � A � 350
that avoid the deforming
- Install a drainage around foundation for smooth drain. and noise.
- Do not stack more- than
When two units in the
installing height
outdoor unit fix the unit by anchor - In case of prevention from
- Close gap (*) to avoid recirculating
bolts of M10. discharge air flow vibration transfer to the
For 3HP, A = 511 m
- When installing the unit on a roof or a veranda, drain building, use rubber Mat. For 4/5HP, A = 796 m
1.10.2 INSTALLATION
1.9.2. INSTALLATION PLACE turns to ice on a cold morning.� Fix Unit to the wall
PLACE PROVISION
water sometimes PROVISION
Therefore, avoid draining in an area that people often
- Fix the Unit onto the wall
use because it is slippery. as the figure indicates.
� Concrete Foundation � Suspended unit
(field supplied stay)
- Foundation could be on flat and is recommended be - Suspended the unit as the following drawing ind
100-300 mm higher than ground level. - Ensure the foundation so Rubber
- Ensure that wall can resist the Mat
that avoid the deforming Outdoor unit weig
- Install a drainage around foundation for smooth drain. indicated in specification label (field
plate.
and noise. supplied)
- When installing the outdoor unit fix the unit by anchor - It isfrom
- In case of prevention recommended to select each foot support to
bolts of M10. vibration transfer tothe full weight of the unit (in order to consider str
the
- When installing the unit on a roof or a veranda, drain building, use rubber Mat. applied
fatigue when unit
For 3HP, is working
A = 511 mm
For 4/5HP, A = 796 mm
too).
water sometimes turns to ice on a cold morning.
Therefore, avoid draining in an area that people often  Suspended Unit
use because it is slippery. - Suspend the unit as the
� Suspended unit
following drawing indicate. Wall
- Suspended the unit as the following drawing indicate. Bracket
Anchor Bolt M10 - Ensure that wall can resist the
- Ensure
Outdoorthat wall
Unit can resist
weight the Outdoor unit weight
indicated
A indicated
Mortar Hole
ø100 x Depth 150) in the specification lable plate.plate.
in specification label
- It is recommended to select each foot support to bear
- It is recommended to select
the full weight of the unit (in order to consider stress Anchor
Outdoor unit A(mm) each foot
fatigue support
applied when to unit
bearisthe
working too).
Drainage full weight of the unit (inUNITS
orderINSTALLATION Bolts
Vibration proof rubber
HP
Drainage
1/28
3.0 530 to consider stress fartigue
4.0~6.0 630 applied when is 1.9.3.
working too. SHIPPING WASHER
REMOVE
- Remove the two shipping washer (yellow-painted)
- Securely tighten the nuts again
Wall
1.10.3 REMOVE SHIPPING WASHER
Bracket
- Remove shipping
A washer (yellow
Compressor
painted) Frame
Shipping Washer
Nut (yellow painted)
- Securely tighten Anchor
Outdoor unit A(mm) the nuts again Bolts
Rubber
HP isolator 1
3.0 530
4.0~6.0 600
630 Rubber
isolator 2
Page 1-30
1.10. RAS FSN(E)/FXN(E)
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Rubber
Rubber
isolator12
isolator
Units installation
Rubber
isolator 2
1.11.
1.10. RAS-FSN(E)/FXN(E)
RAS FSN(E)/FXN(E)
� WARNING:
1.10.Install
RASthe outdoor unit with sufficient clearance
FSN(E)/FXN(E) � CAUTION:
1
around it for operation and maintenance as shown Check to ensure that the foundation is flat, level and
in the next figures. sufficiently strong.
� WARNING:
Install the outdoor unit where good ventilation is
Install the outdoor unit with sufficient clearance
available. � Install the unit in a restricted area not accessible by
CAUTION:
the general public.
around it for operation and maintenance as shown Check to ensure that the foundation is flat, level and
Do not install the outdoor unit where is a high level of Aluminum fins have very sharp edges. Pay attention
in the next figures. sufficiently strong.
oil mist, salty air or sulphurous atmosphere. to the fins to avoid injury.
Install the outdoor unit where good ventilation is Install the unit in a restricted area not accessible by
Install the outdoor unit as far as practical (being at
available. the general public.
least 3 meters) from electromagnetic wave radiator
Do notas
(such install the outdoor
medical unit where is a high level of
equipment). Aluminum fins have very sharp edges. Pay attention
oil mist, salty air or sulphurous atmosphere. to the fins to avoid injury.
Keep clearance between the units of more than
Install
50 mm, theand
outdoor
avoid unit as far as
obstacles thatpractical (beingair
may hamper at
least 3 meters)
intake, from electromagnetic
when installing more than onewave unitsradiator
together.
(such as medical equipment).
Install the outdoor unit in the shade or not exposed to
Keep
directclearance
sunshine or between the units from
direct radiation of more
highthan
50 mm, and avoid
temperature obstacles that may hamper air
heat source.
intake, when installing more than one units together.
Install the outdoor unit in the shade or not exposed to
1.10.1. INSTALLATION LOCATION (5 TO 10 HP)
direct sunshine or direct radiation from high � Install the outdoor unit where there is good
temperature heat source. ventilation.
� Installation place
� Install the outdoor unit where it is in the shade or it
� Install the outdoor unit in a place where there is will not be exposed to direct sunshine or direct
1.11.1
1.10.1. INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION LOCATION
LOCATION(5 (5TO
TO12HP)
10 HP) � Install the outdoor unit where there is good
adequate space around the unit for operating and radiation from high temperature heat source.
maintenance as shown below. ventilation.
� Installation place � Install the outdoor unit where the falling ice from
� Install the outdoor unit where it is in the shade or it
the unit will not create a hazard, as in the case of
� Install the outdoor unit in a place where there is will not be exposed to direct sunshine or direct
installation on top of a building where ice may fall
adequate space around the unit for operating and radiation from high temperature heat source.
down on the pedestrians.
maintenance as shown below.
� Install the outdoor unit where the falling ice from
� Install the outdoor unit where the sound or discharge
the unit will not create a hazard, as in the case of
air from the outdoor unit does not affect neighbors or
installation on top of a building where ice may fall
Front environment.
side down on the pedestrians.
� Make sure that the foundation is flat and sufficiently
� Install the outdoor unit where the sound or discharge
strong.
air from the outdoor unit does not affect neighbors or
Front Do not install the outdoor unit where dust or other
� environment.
side contamination could block the outdoor heat
� Make sure that the foundation is flat and sufficiently
exchanger.
strong.
� When installing the outdoor unit in snow-covered
� Do not install the outdoor unit where dust or other
areas, mount the field-supplied hoods on the top of
contamination could block the outdoor heat
the outdoor unit and the inlet side of the heat
exchanger.
exchanger.
* Add the half of dimension h2 to 1500 for air intake space of front � When installing the outdoor unit in snow-covered
side when the wall front side is higher than 1500 mm areas, mount the field-supplied hoods on the top of
the outdoor unit and the inlet side of the heat
exchanger.
* Add the half of dimension h2 to 1500 for air intake space of front
side when the wall front side is higher than 1500 mm
Page 1-31
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation

� Do not install the outdoor unit where there are high-
levels of oil mist, salty air or aggressive gases such � CAUTION:
as sulfur. Aluminum fins have very sharp edges. Pay attention
to the fins in order to avoid any injury.
� Do not install the outdoor unit where electromagnetic
waves are directly radiated to the electrical box and
inverter components. � Basic space
� Install the outdoor unit as far as practical at least
3 meters from the electromagnetic wave radiation, as Air outlet
electronic noise can cause miss-operation of the unit.
Rear side intake space mm
� NOTE: Air intake
In certain cases, a fuse may be blown and the system
may stop in high electro-magnetic turbulence
environment. mm
Front side intake space
In certain cases, the system can get an alarm in high
electro-magnetic turbulence environment. In such (Top view)
case, stop and start the system to clear the alarm. Side view
Install the outdoor unit on a roof or in an area where

people, except service engineers, cannot touch the
outdoor unit.
1.11.2
1.10.2. SERIAL UNITS INSTALLATION
A1. In case that the front and either of the sides are open. RAS 5/8/10 16 (FSN) HP
RAS-5/8/10/12/14/16 FSN
No limit to wall height No limit to wall height
* A space of 900 mm is recommended for easier service work
A2. In case that the front and either of the sides are open. RAS 16 FXN 20/24/30 HP
RAS-16 FXN, 20~32HP No limit to wall height No limit to wall height (mm)
Page 1-32
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
B1. Rear to rear installation RAS 5/8/10 (16 FSN) HP

RAS-5/8/10/12/14/16 FSN
No limit to wall height No limit to wall height
B2. Rear to rear installation RAS 16 FXN 20/24/30 HP

RAS-16 FXN, 20~32HP
No limit to wall height
(Front)
(Top view)
1.11.3
1.10.3. MULTIPLE INSTALLATION SPACE
� In
In case
case of
of RAS-5/8/10/12/14/16
RAS 5/8/10 (16 FSN FSN
HP)
Keep the upper side open to prevent air short-circuiting.
� In case that the front and either of the sides are open.
- Installation in the same direction
No limit to wall height (mm)
(Front)
(Front)
(Max. 3 units in a row)

Provide a distance of min. 1000 mm to the next unit (Top view)
Page 1-33
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
- Refer to rear installation


(Top view)
Provide a distance of min. 1000 mm to the next unit
� In case that there is a surrounding wall.

(mm)
(Front)
(Front)
(Top view)
- Rear to rear installation (case 1)

(mm)
(Front)
(Front)
(Top view)
Page 1-34
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation

(mm)
(Front)
1
(Front)

(mm)
(Front)
(Front)
(Top view)
Min. 300
�Fence
Min.
300
� In case that the rear space is less
than 1600 mm and the side space
is less than 400 mm, apply a field-
supplied fence for each unit.
NOTE:

� InNote:
case of 16 FXN 20,24,and
 In 30HP
case there
of FXNare16~32HP there
two air outlets
are two air outlets
Page 1-35
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
� InIncase
caseofofRAS-16
RAS 16FXN, 20~32HP HP
FXN/20/24/30 No limit to wall height
(Front)
(Front)

(Top view)
- Refer to rear installation

(Front)
(Front)

(Top view)
� In case that there is a surrounding wall.

(mm)
(Front)
(Front)
(Top view)
Page 1-36
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation

(mm)
(Front)
1
(Front)
(Top view)

(mm)
(Front)
(Front)
(Top view)

(mm)
(Front)
(Front)
(Top view)
Min. 300
�Fence
Min.
300
� In case that the rear space is
less than 1600mm and the side
space is less than 400mm, apply
a field-supplied fence for each
unit.
Page 1-37
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.11.4 FOUNDATION PROVISION

1.10.4.
� Concrete foundations
– The height of the foundation should be 100~300 mm higher than the ground level.
– Install drainage around the foundation for smooth drain.
– When installing the outdoor unit, fix the unit by anchor bolts.
– Secure the outdoor unit with the anchor bolts.
– When installing the unit on a roof or a veranda, drain water sometimes turns to ice on a cold morning. Therefore, avoid
draining in an area that people often use because it is slippery.
Foundations
614 MODEL A B
100 100 RAS-5FSN
MODEL A 368 B
Refrigerant pipe Ø 30mm anchor bolt
RAS-5FSN
RAS-8FSN(E)/FXN(E) 688368
100~300mm
Mortar hole RAS-8FSN(E)/FXN(E)

Min.100 Min.100 RAS-10/12FSN(E)/FXN(E) 688688
(Ø 100mm x depth 200mm) RAS-10FSN(E)/FXN(E)
RAS-14/16FSN
RAS-16FSN 760 948948
Drainage RAS-16FXN
RAS-16FXN 760
824
Vibration-proof (width 100mm x depth 200mm) RAS-20FSN/FXN 824
rubber RAS-18~22FSN/FXN
RAS-24FSN/FXN
Drainage
RAS-24~32FSN/FXN
RAS-30FSN/FXN 723723
Position of anchor bolts
RAS-24~30FSN(E)/FXN(E)
RAS-24 / 30FSN/FXN RAS-18~22FSN/RAS-16~22FXN
RAS-20FSN/RAS16/20FXN RAS-5~16FSN(E)/RAS-8~12FXN(E)
RAS-5~16FSN(E)/ RAS-8/10FXN(E)
8-38 x 16 4-38 x 16
6-38 x 16
(Hole for anchor bolt)
(Hole for anchor bolt) (Hole for anchor bolt)
Correct foundation Incorrect foundation
� NOTE:
Design the foundation as shown above and make
sure that all the feet of the unit fall within the
foundation boundaries.
Page 1-38
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.11.5 CENTER OF GRAVITY
 FSN(E)
Model: RAS-5FSN Model: RAS-8FSNE
1
620
575
285 340
450 330
Model: RAS-10/12FSNE Model: RAS-14/16FSNE
581
575
571 325
450 330
Model: RAS-18FSNE Model: RAS-20/22FSNE

561
529
306 894 319

801
Model: RAS-24/26FSNE Model: RAS-28/30/32FSNE

550
580
1010 300 1120 310
Page 1-39
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
 FSN(E)
Model: RAS-8/10/12FXNE Model: RAS-16FXN
Model: RAS-18FXN Model: RAS-20/22FXN
Model: RAS-24/26FXN Model: RAS-28/30/32FXN
Page 1-40
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.12. CH-UNIT
1.11. CH-UNIT
The CH Unit is Installed indoors for the SET-FREE FXN(E) � Factory Supplied Accessories - For CH-12.0N
system, between the outdoor unit and Indoor unit. The
combination of the CH Unit and indoor Unit is as follows. Accessory Q´ty Purpose
1
Flange For Gas (High)
Piping Size 2 Piping from
Indoor Unit (�22.2) Outdoor Unit
Model Total Indoor Capacity (HP)
Quantity
Smaller than 4.0*
Smaller than 4.0 Packing for
CH-4.0NE 1 to 5 2 Flange sealing
(including 4.0) 4.0)
(excluding Flange
4.0~8.0*
4.0~8.0 (including 4.0
CH-8.0NE 1 to 8 (including 4.0 and 8.0) For Refrigerant
and excluding Insulation
1 Piping
8.0~12*
8.0~12.0 (including 8.0 (�38 ID)
Connection
CH-12.0NE
CH-12.0N 1 to 5 (including 8.0 and12.0)
and including 12.0)
Pipe Fixing To Fix Liquid
2
1.12.1. TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING Band Pipe
1.11.1. TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
Transport the product as close to the installation location To fix Insulation
as practical before unpacking. Band 8 for Refrigerant
Piping
� WARNING: 1.12.3.
1.11.3. INITIAL
INITIALCHECK
CHECK
Do not put any foreign material into the CH Unit and
check to ensure that none exists in the outdoor unit Install the CH unit with a proper clearance around it for
before the installation and test run. Otherwise, a fire maintenance working space, as shown in below figure
or failure, etc. may occur. Service Space
� CAUTION: No Description
Do not put any material on the product. � Electrical Box
Be careful not to damage on insulation materials of Service Access Panel
�
unit´s surface when lifting.
1.12.2.
1.11.2. FACTORY SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
FACTORY-SUPLIED ACCESSORIES
� Factory Supplied Accessories - For CH-4.0NE
Accessory Q´ty Purpose View from A
To Connect Mark Dimension (Min).
Reducer
�12.7 liquid Model CH-4-0/8.0 CH-12.0
(�15.88 to 1
piping of Indoor
�12.7) a 250mm 350mm
Unit
b 100mm
Pipe
To Fix Liquid
Fixing 2
Pipe
Band
� CAUTION:
– Flowing sound of refrigerant may be heard from the
� Factory Supplied Accessories - For CH-8.0NE CH unit when the solenoid valve in the CH unit is
activated. Therefore, take the following action to
Accessory Q´ty Purpose minimize the sound.
To Connect – Install the CH unit inside the ceiling. As for the ceiling
Reducer
�15.88 liquid material, select a material like a plaster board which
(�19.05 to 1
piping of Indoor minimizes operation sound.
�15.88)
Unit – Do not install the CH unit in near a bed room or
hospital room.
Pipe Fixing To Fix Liquid
2 – Do not install the CH unit in a hot or humid place like
Band Pipe
kitchen to prevent dew condensation on the outer
surface of the CH unit.
– Pay attention to the following points when the CH is
 Note: installed in a hospital or other facilities where there
* In case that the total capacity connected is 4.0HP, are electronic waves from medical equipment.
the capacity comes down 5% at cooling and 10% at – Do not install the CH unit where the electromagnetic
heating. wave is directly radiated to the electrical box or
** In case that the total capacity connected is 8.0HP, intermediate wiring (operating line).
the capacity comes down 5% at cooling and 10% at – Install the CH unit and components as far as practical
heating. or at least 3 meters from the electromagnetic wave
radiator.
– Install a noise filter when the power supply emits
harmful noises.
Page 1-41
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.12.4. INSTALLATION
1.11.4. INSTALLATION - Hook suspension bracket to the nut and washer of
each suspension bolt, as shown below.
� Mounting the suspension bolts Check that the nuts and washers are correctly fixed by
the retainers of the suspension bracket.
- Using the aforementioned dimension select the final
location and installation direction of the indoor unit
No Description
paying careful attention to the space for the piping,
wiring and maintenance. � Suspension Bolt
- Mount the suspension bolts, as shown. � Suspension Bracket
For concrete slab:

I Concrete
Steel
For steel beam:
I-Beam Suspension Bolt

(W3/8 or M10)
� Adjusting of the Unit Level
In order to avoid an incorrect unit operation, check the level
� DANGER: of the unit using a water level in a transparent Vinyl tube
containing water.
Do not install the Indoor Unit in a flammable
environment to avoid fire or an explosion.
No Description
� WARNING: � Vinyl Tube
- Check to ensure that the ceiling slab is strong � Level Scale
enough.
- Do not install the CH Unit Outdoors. If installed
Outdoors, an electric hazard electric leakage will
occur.
Check to ensure that the following accessories are packed Tighten the bolts of the suspension nuts with the
with the CH Unit. suspension brackets after adjustment is completed.
Special plastic paint must be applied to the bolts in order to
� Mounting the CH Unit prevent them from loosening.
- Put nuts on each of the four suspension bolts before
suspending the CH unit, as shown below.
No. NoDescription
Description
 �Suspension bolt
Suspension Bolt
Suspension
 �Suspension bracket
Bracket
 Nuy & Washer (field
Nut & Washer
�supplied)(Field-Supplied)
 �CH-Box CH-Box
Mark Dimension
Mark Dimension
L L 30~50mm
30~50 mm
Field-Supplied Parts CH-(4.0/8.0/12.0)N(E)

Suspension Bolts 4-M10 or W-3/8
Nut 8-M10 or W-3/8
Washer 8-M10 or W-3/8
Page 1-42
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.13.
1.11. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
– The maximum amount of fresh air intake is the 20% of
1.13.1.
1.11.1. FRESH AIR INTAKE FOR 4-WAY CASSETTE Indoor Unit Air Flow Rate. In the case that fresh air that
1
INDOOR UNITS (OACI-232) OR (PD-75) exceeds this amount is taken in, there is risk of water
condensing on the lower surface of the drain-pan (Air
– Connection position of fresh air intake duct. Fresh air can Intake Orifice), and in certain cases troubles such as dew
be taken in by connecting the duct to the position shown formation will occur. Always limit to the values shown in
in the next drawing. the table.
– Attach an air filter on the air suction side of the duct for
fresh air intake at a position where servicing may be
carried out easily. (Air passing through the duct does
not pass through the filter of the main unit.)
– Insulate the duct and the duct connection portion. In
Air Flow addition, use only non-combustible materials for the
duct and insulation.
Duct (To be made of only non-combustible materials)
OACI-232 or PD-75 Thermal insulation (Non-combustible materials)
Fresh Air Fresh Air
OACI-232 PD-75
(Only RCI) (RCI, RCIM)
Damper Air filter
Inspection panel Fresh air intake hood

Duct fan with gallery (Attached drip-
proof hood type)
(Duct fan attachment drawing)
� NOTE:
All parts of the above figure are field-supplied.
– Install an inspection panel below the duct fan for

servicing the air filter and the damper.
–– This
Thisunit
unitcannot
cannotdraw
drawininfresh
freshair
airbybyitself.
itself.ItItmust
mustbebe – In the case that a duct fan larger than the limit of fresh
connected
connected to a duct containing a fan and controldamper.
to a duct containing a fan and control damper. air intake amount, always use a damper and adjust the
–– Control
Controlthe
theduct
ductfan
fansosothat
thatititwill
willoperate
operateonly
onlywhen
whenthe
quantity of air.
the
main unit is operating. In following figure, an electrical
main unit is operating. In following figure, an electrical
– The duct resistance of the fresh air intake portion will be
control
controlexample
exampleisisshown
shown(more(moredetails
detailsin
inchapter
chapter6. of
as shown in the figure below. Use this as a guideline for
6.1.7.
picking up up
thethe
operation signals).
selecting the duct fan.
of picking operation signals).
Duct resistance of fresh air intake portion
Pass Resistence
(Pa) RCI 6.0FSN1E
Limit of fresh air
intake amount
Magnetic switch for

fresh air intake fan
 NOTE:
� The total height of the unit is increased by
NOTE:
approximately
The total height80ofmm
thewith
unit the fresh air intake
is increased by kit
(OACI-232) installed.
approximately 80 mm with the fresh air intake kit Air quantity (m³/min)
Use
Useaa3P3Pconnector
connectorCable
Cable(PCC-1A)
(PCC-1A)for forCN7
CN7ofofindoor
(OACI-232) installed.
indoor
printed
printed circuit board. For further information, referto
circuit board. For further information, refer
(*1): Installation of the connecting box at one side.
(*2): Installation of the connection box at both sides.
document
to ChapterTCGB0032.
9.6.3 in document TCGB0032.
Page 1-43
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
1.13.2.
1.11.2. T-TUBE CONNECTING KIT FOR 4-WAY 1.13.3.
1.11.3. BRANCH DISCHARGE FOR 4-WAY
CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS (TKCI-232) CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS (PDF-23C3;
The T-Tube Connecting Kit is intended to make easy the PDF-46C3)
connections between the Fresh Air intake and the If there are obstacles, such as partitions, inside a room
connection duct. Below, there are shown the two basic and they prevent air from circulating well, you can install
pieces of the kit. Therefore, T-Tube Connecting Kit can be branched ducts to provide uniform temperature air
installed only when both the fresh air intake kit (optional) conditioning. You must install the required return air grilles,
and filter box (optional) are used. depending on the amount of return air. If an adjoining room
is air-conditioned, install always a return grille.
Flexible Duct
(2 Pcs.) Flexible duct
(Max. length: 5 m)
Ø75
T-Tube Connection Partition

(TKCI-232) Small room
return grille
Galvanized
Steel Plate
(Example of branched duct)
Ø75
Polyethylene
The next drawing shows a RCI Unit with the T-Tube

Connecting Kit. Note that the diameter of the T is increased
(Ø90). Branch duct Flange
� Fitting the branched duct

1. The branched duct connections are shown in the Fig.
below. There are knockout holes. After cutting the
insulation material of the outside surface in a circular
Air Flow shape by aligning the notches of the four corners,
use a screwdriver or the similar and remove it.
As for the connection duct, prepare the square-shaped
duct (field-supplied) or use a flexible duct with a diameter
of Ø150 or Ø200.
Ø90
Connectable
3-Way Outlet Parts Set
Fresh Air (Accessory)
(Total Heat Exchanger)
Branch Duct Flange

Connectable
� NOTE:
When the T.Tube Connecting Kit is used, the duct
resistance of the fresh air intake portion will be
increased as shown in the figure below. Use this
as a guideline for selecting the duct fan.
Not Connectable
Duct resistance of fresh air intake portion For Connecting
Pass Flexible Duct
RCI 6.0FSN1E
Resistence
Limit of fresh air
(Pa) intake amount
Dimensions of duct connection
Model
Model a a b b c c d d
RCI-1.0~2.5 150 155 9 9 248
RCI-1.5~2.5 150 155 248
RCI-3.0~6.0 200 180 6 298
RCI-3.0~6.0 200 180 6 298
Air quantity (m³/min)
Page 1-44
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
2. Perform sufficient insulation treatment for the attachment 1.13.4.

1.11.4. DIRECTION AIR FLOW FOR 4-WAY
portion between the connection flange and the indoor unit CASSETTE TYPE INDOOR UNITS
main body as well as the attachment portion between the
duct and the connection flange. In the event that only three outlets are required, utilize the
Use a 3-Way Outlet Part set (Optional parts) and 3-way outlet parts set shown in the table below.
Model UnitUnit
model
1
completely block the air outlet of the branched duct side
of the panel. (For prevention of condensation and divert Model model
the air to the branched duct.) PI-23LS5
PI-23LS5 RCI-1.0~6.0
RCI-1.5~6.0
3-way outlet parts set

� NOTE:
Model
Model Unit model
Unit model Remarks
Remarks The blocking plates must be fitted as shown on the
drawing.
PI-23LS5 RCI-1.0~6.0 To be
To be attached
attached to
to the
the
PI-23LS5 RCI-1.5~6.0 outlet of
outlet of the
the panel.
panel.
See Chapter
See Chapter 1.9.2
1.13.1for Only one of the 4 outlets can be blocked as shown below.
for details
details
Blockable Outlet �
Refrigerant Piping In case of bloblocking this outlet,
3. Air quantity ratio of branched duct side is shown as a change the position of air outlet
ratio of the unit air quantity in the table below. If 2 branch temperature thermistor to ��
referring to Chapter 9.
ducts are connected to the unit, as shown by the*, the
branch duct side air quantity will become greater, and Electrical
the air velocity of the 3-way outlet side will drop. Control Box
Consequently the warm air throw distance will become
shorter.
– In the case that the branch duct is installed from the Blockable Outlet �
standpoint of prevention against accidents, keep the
dimensions shown in the following drawing.
– Use non-combustible materials for the duct.
– Install sufficient thermal insulation for the duct.
(This is to prevent condensation).
– Follow the local code in the field, or use the dimensions
shown in the next figure, if no code is applicable.
(Attachable position of 3-way outlet parts set)
� CAUTION:
In case 3 outlets are used, the decrease in air quantity
will be about 3 to 5%, and within the operation range
of the unit, there will be no major difference in
particular, in comparison with the 4-way outlet.
However, the noise will increase by about 1 to 2 dB.
Main body 1.13.5.

1.11.5. FILTER BOX FOR 4-WAY CASSETTE TYPE
INDOOR UNITS (B-23H4)
The dimensions of the Filter Box are described in the
(Space between the unit and the wall) drawing below.
Material of walls and pillars Filter Holder
Material of walls and pillars

Space Combustible Non-combustible
materials materials Packing
C 10 cm or above 5 cm or above
D 100 cm or above 60 cm or above
Packing
Long Hole
Air
Page 1-45
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
The total height of the unit is increased by approximately Specifications:

85 mm with the filter box installed. Therefore, pay attention
to the installation space. Item For 44-way
For Cassette Type
Way Cassette type
Note that the packing dimension before compression is
Item RCI-1.0~6.0
RCI-1.5~6.0
10 mm but, after compression is reduced to 5 mm. Dust
Collection % 50 (Gravimetric Method)
Efficiency
Air Flow m3/min. 37.0
Suction Grille Initial Pressure
Pa (mmAq) 17.7 (1.8)
Loss
Air Filter (optional) End Pressure
Pa (mmAq) 44.1 (4.5)
Long Life Air Filter Loss
(accesseried Filter/Frame/
with Air Panel)
Color White / Brown / -
Packing
Filter Box 4 Years (with maintenance per
Life Period
1250 hours)
Ceiling Cleaning Available (*)
Weight Kg 0.7
Air Panel (optional)
Prevent bacteria and mold from
Performance
Suction Grille multiplying
(accesseried Modified Acrylic Fiber 1
with Air Panel Antiabacterial
(Inorganic Antibacterial
Fiber
Substance Contained)
Filter material
Modified Acrylic Fiber 2
Model a Reinforce Net (Organic Antibacterial
RCI-1.0~2.5
RCI-1.5~2.5 328 Substance Contained)
RCI-3.0~6.0 378
� NOTE:
The life of this filter is the standard period and it may
1.13.6.
1.11.6. ANTI-BACTERIAL LONG LIFE AIR FILTER vary depending on the using conditions.
FOR 4-WAY CASSETTE TYPE INDOOR Wash this filter by using water or neutral detergent (*).
When using this filter, set the air flow mode at High
UNITS (F-23L4-K)
Speed by the remote control switch to maintain the
required air volume.
The dimensions of the Anti-Bacterial Long Life Air Filter are
described in the drawing below.
1.13.7.
1.11.7. DEODORANT AIR FILTER FOR 4-WAY
CASSETTE TYPE INDOOR UNITS
2 pieces (F-23L4-D AND F-46L4-D)
(reinforcement)
The dimensions of the Deodorant Air Filter are described in
Filter the following drawing.
Colored Steel
Plate 2 pieces
Packing (reinforcement)
Long Hole Filter
Air Aluminum frame
To mount the filter, put the filter’s long hole into the
protruded part of the suction grille as shown in the following
drawing.
Air
Note that the thickness depends on the models.

Antibacterial Filter
Model a
RCI-1.5~2.5 26
RCI-3.0~6.0 42
Panel
Protruded Part
Suction Grille
Model a
RCI-1.0~2.5
RCI-1.5~2.5 248
RCI-3.0~6.0 298
Page 1-46
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Units installation
To mount the filter, you need to use the Filter Box.
Specifications:
Item RCI-1.0~2.5 RCI-3.0~6.0
1
RCI-1.5~2.5 RCI-3.0~6.0
Item F-23L4-D
F-23L4-D F46-L4D
F-46-L4D
Dust
Collection % 50 (Gravimetric Method)
Efficiency
Air Flow m3/min. 20.0 37.0
Initial Pressure
Pa (mmAq) 15.7 (1.6) 16.7 (1.7)
Loss
End Pressure
Pa (mmAq) 42.2 (4.3) 33.3 (3.4)
Loss
3 Years (with maintenance per
Life Period
3~6 months)
Reuse Available (Dry by sunlight) (*1)
Cleaning Available (Wash by water) (*2)
Weight Kg 0.9 1.0
Dimensions a (mm) 26 46
Performance Absorbs smoke, body odor, etc.
Restriction on Washing by detergent is
usage prohibited
� NOTE:
– The life of this filter is the standard period, and the life
may be varied by the using conditions.
– Wash this filter by using water or neutral detergent for
prevention from adsorptive decrease(*2).
– When using this filter, set the air flow mode at High
Speed by the remote control switch to maintain the
required air volume.
– Some special odors (such as organic solvent and
sulfur gas) can not be absorbed.
– This filter is reusable by atmospheric emission of
absorbed odor by drying by sunlight (*1).
– This filter can be used with the deodorant long life filter
(optional).
– This filter is supplied by the quantity to be used for one
unit as 1 set.
Page 1-47
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
2. Piping installation
CONTENTS
2.
2.1.
Piping installation ________________________________________________________ 2-1
General notes __________________________________________________________ 2-2 2
2.2. Piping work connection considerations _______________________________________ 2-3
2.2.1. Piping materials ________________________________________________________ 2-3
2.2.2. Three principles on refrigerant work _________________________________________ 2-4
2.2.3. Suspension of refrigerant piping ____________________________________________ 2-5
2.2.4. Tightening torque ________________________________________________________ 2-5
2.2.5 Brazing work ___________________________________________________________ 2-7
2.3. Indoor Units and complementary systems _____________________________________ 2-8
2.3.1. RCI __________________________________________________________________ 2-8
2.3.2. RCIM _________________________________________________________________ 2-9
2.3.3. RCD _________________________________________________________________ 2-10
2.3.4. RPC _________________________________________________________________ 2-11
2.3.5. RPI__________________________________________________________________ 2-13
2.3.6. RPK _________________________________________________________________ 2-15
2.3.6. RPF(I) _______________________________________________________________ 2-17
2.3.8. CH-UNITS ____________________________________________________________ 2-18
2.4. Outoor Units ___________________________________________________________ 2-19
2.4.1. Factory supplied pipe accessories _________________________________________ 2-19
2.4.2. Position of piping connection _____________________________________________ 2-20
2.4.3. Flange piping connection for FSN(E)/FXN(E) _________________________________ 2-23
2.4.4. Piping connection for FSN(E)/FXN(E) _______________________________________ 2-24
2.4.5. Piping connection for FSVNE _____________________________________________ 2-24
2.4.6. Vacuum and refrigerant charge ____________________________________________ 2-25
2.4.7. Drain discharge boss ____________________________________________________ 2-26
Page 2-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
2/2 DRAIN PIPING
2.1
2.1. GENERAL
GENERAL NOTES
� CAUTION: � NOTE:
– Do not create an up-slope for the drain pipe. If you do Install the drainage in accordance with national
so, the drain water will flow back to the unit. Then, codes and local codes.
leakage to the room will occur when the unit
operation is stopped.
After installing the drain piping and the electrical wiring,
Incorrect: Up-slope
make sure that the water flows smoothly as the following
INCORRECT procedure explains.
� Checking the unit without the drain-up

mechanism
– Pour approximately 1.8 liters of water into the drain
pan.
Incorrect: rising part – Make sure that the water flows smoothly and that no
water leakage occurs. If you cannot find water at the
end of the drain pipe, once again pour approximately
1.8 liters of water into the drain pan.
– Do not connect the drain pipe with the sanitary piping,
the sewage piping or any other drainage piping.
– When the common drain piping is connected with � Checking the unit with the drain-up mechanism
other indoor units, the connected position of each and the float switch
indoor unit must be higher than the position of the – Turn on the power supply.
common drain piping. The pipe size of the common
drain pipe must be large enough according to the unit – Pour approximately 1.8 liters of water into the drain
size and the unit number. pan. Then, the float switch will be activated. The drain
pump will start working automatically.
– Make sure that the water flows smoothly and that no
Pitch of 1/25~1/100 Drain piping connection water leakage occurs. If you cannot find water at the
end of the drain pipe, once again pour approximately
CORRECT 1.8 liters of water into the drain pan.
– Turn off the power supply.
� NOTE:
Common drain piping Pay attention to the thickness of the insulation
material when the left-side piping is installed. If the
insulation material is too thick, you cannot install the
– The drain pipe will require insulation if it is installed piping in the unit.
in a location where condensation may form on the
outside of drain pipe. This condensation may drop
and cause damage.
 CAUTION:
– Use refrigerant R410A in the refrigerant cycle. Do
The insulation for the drain pipe must be selected in
order to ensure that the vapor is sealed and in order
to prevent the condensation from forming. not charge oxigen, acetylene or other flammable
or poisonous gases into the refrigerant cycle when
– The drain trap should be installed next to the indoor performing a leakage test or an air-tight test.
unit. The drain trap must be designed according to
good practice. For RPI 8/10, it is mandatory to install – This type of gases are extremely dangerous and
the drain trap. The drain trap must be also checked can cause an explosion. It is recommended that
with charged water in order to test the correct flow. compressed air, nitrogen or refrigerant be used for
Do not tie the drain pipe and the refrigerant pipe this types of test.
together. Do not clamp the drain pipe and the – Check to ensure that no pressure exists inside the
refrigerant pipe together. stop valve before removing the flange.
Page 2-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
REFRIGERANT PIPING AND REFRIGERANT CHARGE 10/17
2.2 PIPING
10.3. PIPINGWORK
WORKCONNECTION
CONNECTION CONSIDERATIONS
CONSIDERATIONS
2.2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
10.3.1. - Refrigerant Pipes thickness are indicated in
subchapter 10.3.4
1. Prepare locally-supplied copper pipes.
2. Select the piping size with the correct thickness and � Piping Connection
correct material which can have sufficient pressure When connecting liquid piping for the unit where the piping
strength, considering that R410A pressure is higher is longer than 15 meters, apply a piping size of Ø9.53. Fix
than R407C. Use the table below to select the the connecting pipe as shown in the following figure. Utilize
required pipe.
2
the insulation attached to the Indoor Unit.
Nominal Diameter
Thickness
Cooper type
(mm) Fix this part with
(mm) (in)
Utilize the flare nut Insulate this part the attached cord
6.35 1/4 0.80 Roll of the Indoor Unit with the attached band or with tape
9.53 3/8 0.80 Roll insulation
Field-Supplied
12.70 1/2 0.80 Pipe/Roll Refrigerant
15.88 5/8 1.00 Roll Piping
19.05 3/4 1.00 Pipe/Roll
22.23 7/8 1.00 Pipe/Roll Indoor
25.40 1 1.00 Pipel Unit
28.60 1 1/8 1.25 Pipel
34.93 1 3/8 1.25 Pipe
41.28 1 5/8 1.25 Pipe
� NOTE: Brazing
If copper pipe is used for piping bigger than φ19.05 Insulation Field-Supplied
Attached to Make flares after attaching Insulation
flaring work can not be performed. If necessary, use a Indoor Unit flare nut to the connecting
Joint Adapter pipe in the Multi-Kit
package
3. Select clean copper pipes. Make sure there is not dust

and moisture inside. Blow the inside of the pipes with
oxygen free nitrogen to remove any dust and foreign
materials before connecting pipes.
� NOTE:
A system with no moisture or oil contamination will
4. After connecting the refrigerant piping, seal the open give maximum performance and lifecycle compared to
space between Knockout hole and refrigerant pipes by that of a poorly prepared system. Take particular care
using insulation material as shown bellow: to ensure all copper piping is clean and dry internally.
Insulation material
� CAUTION:
- Cap the end of the pipe when pipe is to be inserted
Field-Supplied
Refrigeration Pipe through a hole
Unit
Side - Do not put pipes on the ground directly without a cap
or vinyl tape at the end of the pipe
Insulation material
Insulation material Correct Incorrect
� CAUTION: - If piping installation is not completed until next day or

- Utilize clean copper pipes without any moisture or
foreign material on the internal surface of pipes. over a longer period of time, braze off the ends of the
When connecting refrigerant piping, cut copper pipes piping and charge with oxygen free nitrogen through a
with a pipe cutter and blow the pipes with nitrogen. Schrader valve type access fitting to prevent moisture
and particle contamination.
- Do not use a saw and a grindstone or others which
cause copper powder. - Do not use insulation material that contents NH3
because can damage cooper pipe material and can be
- When cuting
cuttingpipes,
pipes,secure
securethe
thepart
partfor
forbrazing
brazinginas a source of future leakage
accordance with the national
shown in subchapter 10.3.5. and local regulations.
Page 2-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
10/18 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND REFRIGERANT CHARGE
� Insulation
Attach insulation packet with Multi-Kit to each branch
� NOTE:
When polyethylene foam is applied, a thickness of
utilizing vinyl tape. Also attach insulation to field supplied
10 mm for the liquid piping and 15 mm to 20 mm for
piping for prevention of the capacity decrease according to
the gas piping is recommended.
the ambient air conditions and dewing on the pipe surface
by the low pressure.
� For Line Branch
Field-Supplied
Insulation
� CAUTION:
Perform insulation work after the surface temperature
decreases to the room temperature, If not, insulation
cap material may melt.
If the ends of the piping system are open after
accomplishing piping work, securely attach caps or
Do not make vinyl bags to the ends of the piping, avoiding the
a gap
cap
invasion of moisture and dust.
cap
2.2.2 THREE PRINCIPLES ON REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK

10.3.2. THREE PRINCIPLES ON REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK
In case of the refrigeration cycle with refrigerant R410A, Due to this reason, pay much careful attention to basic
refrigeration oil should be of synthetic type. Therefore, the piping work control to avoid infiltration of moisture or dusts
oil absorbs moisture quickly when compared with R407C during refrigerant piping work.
systems and it will cause sludge and oxidation of the oil.
Three Principles Cause of failure Presumable Failure Preventive Action

1. Dry Water Infiltration due to insufficient Icing Inside Tube at Ex. Valve Pipe Protection
Keep good dryness protection at pipe ends. (Water Choking)
Dewing inside of Pipes
Insufficient Vacuum Pumping Time + � 1 Pinching
2 Taping
Flushing
Generation of Hydration and
Oxidation of Oil
�
� Vacuum Drying
Clogged Strainer, etc., Insulation One gram of water turns into gas
Failure and Compressor Failure (approx. 1000 lrs) at 1 Torr.
Therefore, it takes long time to
vacuum-pump by a small vacuum
pump
2. Clean Infiltration of Dusts, etc. from Tube Clogging of Ex. Valve, Capillary Pipe Protection
No dust Inside of Ends Tube and Filter 1 Mounting Caps
Pipes Oxidation Film during Brazing without
Blowing Nitrogen
Insufficient Flushing by Nitrogen after
� Oxidation of Oil
� Compressor Failure
� 2 Taping
3 Pinching
Brazing
� Flushing
Insufficient Cooling or Heating

Compressor Failure
3. No leakage Brazing Failure Refrigerant Composition Change, Careful Basic Brazing Work
No leakage shall Failed Flaring Work and Insufficient Refrigerant Shortage
exist Torque of Squeezing Flare
Insufficient Torque of Squeezing
� Performance Decrease
� Oxidation of Oil
�
Flanges � Overheating of Compressor Basic Flaring Work
�
� Basic Flange Connecting Work
Insufficient Cooling or Heating
Compressor Failure �
Air Tight Test
�
Holding of Vacuum
Page 2-4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
10
RAS-30FSN p
(As for wrenches of 5 mm and 10 mm, use field- e
Piping installation supplied wrenches.) s
REFRIGERANT PIPING AND
FXN Allen keyREFRIGERANT
Size (mm) CHARGE 10/19
Gas Valve Gas Valve
Model Liquid Valve
Low High
2.2.3. SUSPENSION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING TheRAS-8FXN
required tightening torque is as follows:
10.3.3. SUSPENSION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING TheRAS-10FXN
required tightening torque is as follows:
4
 Indoor
Indoor
�RAS-16FXNUnits
Uniits
10 10
Suspend the refrigerant piping at certain points and prevent RAS-20FXN Co
the refrigerant piping from touching the weak part of the RAS-24FXN Tightening Torque T
Pipe size 10
Pipe Size Tightening torque
building such as wall, ceiling, etc… RAS-30FXN (Nm) S
(If touched, abnormal sound may occur due to the vibration (mm) (Nm)
Ø(As
6.35
formm
wrenches of 5 mm20 and 10 mm, use field-
of the piping. Pay special attention in case of short piping ø 6.35 Ø 9.53 mm 20 supplied wrenches.)
40 Ø6.
length). Ø 12.7 mm 60
ø 9.53 40
Ø 15.88 mm 80
1~15m
�ø 12.7 Ø 19.05 mm60
CAUTION: 100
Ø9.
2
Do not apply
Outdoor
ø �15.88 force to the spindle valve at the end of
Units80
opening (5 Nm or smaller). The back seat construction Ø12
FSN(E)/FXN(E)
ø 19.05 100
is not provided.
Operation of the stop valve should be performed according
During the test run, fully open the spindle. If it is not Ø15
Fire-Proof to the figure below.
fully opened, the devices will be damaged.
Section
Treatment Allen key
(To open or close Ø19
FSVNE
the Spindle valve) A
CAP CAP
Tighten the cap with (Tighten the cap with a
a torque of D Closed
torque before
A Nm) Ab
Indoor Unit shipment
Check joint
(Only the Charging hose
2. Heat the
Spindle Valve evenly, res
can be connected)
Counterclockwise Open flow of fille
Do not fix the refrigerant piping directly with the metal fittings Clockwise Close
(The refrigerant piping may expand and contract). Hex 1

Some examples for suspension method are shown below. Tighten Torque A
Refrigerant
For Suspending For Piping Along The For Instant Installation Pressure
Heavies Wall Work C
Check Joint
(Only the charging
Seat surface hose can be B
connected. Tighten
(Fully closed position) CAP
CAP the cap with a O-Ring
(Tighten the cap with a
Tighten torque
the capofwith
C Nm) (rubber)
torque B NmCAP when it is Flare
a torque of C Nut, or apply B Nmthe
Tighten torque to
cap with
screw of flange)
a torque of B
Field supplied
Refrigerant Piping
B (N.m)
RAS-FSN(E) A(N.m) C(N.m)
Flare Screw of Flange
2.2.4. TIGHTENING
10.3.4. TIGHTENING TORQUE
TORQUE Liquid 16.5 40
5HP
Gas
Liquid
8HP (3~5HP)
29.4 Tighten
16.5 A
80 torque (N·m)
40 B C
-
D
Size (mm)
Hex 1 �
1. Flaring connections (smaller than a diameter of Ø19.05) Liquid Gas 44.17~9 10033~42 33~42 14~18 4
are generally used. However, if incorrect flaring is Gas (3~5HP)
Liquid 16.5
11~12 4014~18 68~82 8~12 4
performed, it will cause serious refrigerant leakage. 10HP
Gas 49.0 -
2. Shape after Flaring, it should be rectangular and flat, and �16HP
Liquid
CAUTION: 24.5 60
9.8
no uneven thickness, cracks and scratches should exist. DoGasnot apply49.0 - spindle valve at the end of
force to the
Liquid 30.0 80 53 to 75
20HPopening (5 N·m or smaller). The back seat
Nominal diameter Ød Dimension Gas
construction 58.8 -
is not provided.
Liquid 44.1 80
A+0.0 24HPDuring the test run, fully open the spindle. If it is not
(inches) (mm) -0.4 (mm) Gas 58.8 -
1/4 6.35 9.1 fully opened,44.1
Liquid the devices
100 will be damaged.
30HP
Gas 58.8 -
3/8 9.53 13.2
1/2 12.70 16.6 B (N.m)
RAS-FXN(E) A(N.m) C(N.m)
5/8 15.88 19.7 Flare Screw of Flange
3/4 19.05 (*) Liquid 16.5 40
(*) It is impossible to perform the flaring work. In this case, use a joint 8HP Gas High 44.1 80
selected from the table in point 3. Gas Low 49.0 100
Liquid 16.5 40
When tightening the flare nuts, use two spanners, as shown
10HP Gas High 44.1 100
in the figure. Gas Low 49.0 -
Liquid 24.5 60
Pipe Size B 16HP Gas High 49.0 -
Diameter (R410A) Gas Low 58.8 -
53 to 75 9.8
Ø6.35 17 Liquid 30.0 80
20HP Gas High 49.0 -
Ø9.53 22 Gas Low 58.8 -
Liquid 44.1 80
Ø12.70 26
24HP Gas High 49.0 -
Ø15.88 29 Gas Low 58.8 -
Liquid 44.1 100
Flare Nut Ø19.05 36 30HP Gas High 49.0 -
Gas Low 58.8 -
Page 2-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
FSN(E) / FXN(E) Flare nut / Bolt - FXN(E)

Model Liquid Gas valve Gas valve
Ref. pressure Cap valve low (N.m) high (N.m)
Allen key (to
open or close (Tighten the cap (N.m)
spindle valve) with indicated
torque. Attach RAS-8FXN
this after work)
49 44.1
RAS-10FXNE
RAS-12FXNE
38
RAS-16FXN
Spindle Valve RAS-18FXN
Counterclockwise...open
Clockwise...close RAS-20FXN
Closed before shipment O-ring
(rubber) RAS-22FXN 58.8 49.0
RAS-24FXN
RAS-26FXN 44.1
Check Joint
(Only the charging hose can RAS-30FXN
be connected. Tighten the cap
with a torque of 9.8 N·m) Refrigerant RAS-32FXN
piping
Spindle - FSN(E)
Model Liquid valve (N.m) Gas valve (N.m)
RAS-5FSN
10
Flare nut / Bolt - FSN(E) RAS-8FSNE
Model Liquid valve (N.m) Gas valve (N.m) RAS-10FSNE
RAS-5FSN 29.4 RAS-12FSNE
25
RAS-8FSNE 44.1 RAS-14FSN
RAS-10FSNE RAS-16FSN
RAS-12FSNE RAS-18FSN
49.0 8
RAS-14FSN 38.0 RAS-20FSN
RAS-16FSN RAS-22FSN
RAS-18FSN RAS-24FSN
47
RAS-20FSN RAS-26FSN
RAS-22FSN RAS-28FSN
RAS-24FSN RAS-30FSN
58.8
RAS-26FSN RAS-32FSN
RAS-28FSN 44.1
RAS-30FSN
Spindle - FXN(E)
Model Liquid Gas valve low Gas valve
RAS-32FSN
valve (N.m) high (N.m)
(N.m)
RAS-8FXN
RAS-10FXNE 10
RAS-12FXNE
RAS-16FXN
RAS-18FXN
RAS-20FXN 8 25
29
RAS-22FXN
RAS-24FXN
RAS-26FXN
RAS-30FXN
47
RAS-32FXN
Page 2-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
Allen key
FSNsize
Allen- FSN(E)
key Size (mm) 2.2.5 BRAZING
10.3.5. BRAZING WORK
WORK
Model Model Liquid valve
Liquid(mm)
Valve Gas
Gasvalve
Valve(mm)
RAS-5FSNRAS-5FSN 8 8 1. The most important work in the refrigerant piping work is
RAS-8FSN brazing work. If leakage due to careless mistakes
RAS-8FSNE 4
RAS-10FSN hydration generation accidentally occurs, it will cause
RAS-10FSNE
RAS-16FSN clogged capillary pipes or serious compressor failure.
4 10
RAS-12FSNE
RAS-20FSN 6 2. Pipe Dimensions after Expanding.
RAS-24FSN
RAS-14FSN It is important to control the clearance of the pipe fitting
10
RAS-30FSN portion as shown below. In the case that a cooper tube
RAS-16FSN
(As for wrenches of 5 mm and 10 mm, use field- expansion jig is used, the following dimensions should be
2
RAS-18FSN supplied wrenches.) secured.
FXN Allen key
RAS-20FSN 5 Size (mm) 10
RAS-22FSN Gas Valve Gas Valve
Model Liquid Valve
Low High
d1
RAS-24FSN
RAS-8FXN
RAS-26FSN
RAS-10FXN a
4
RAS-16FXN
RAS-28FSN 10 10 10
RAS-20FXN Cooper Cooper
RAS-30FSN
RAS-24FXN Tube Ø d1 Gap a Tube Ø d1 Gap a
RAS-32FSN 10
RAS-30FXN Size Size
(As for wrenches of 5 mm and 10 mm, use field- +0.08 +0.1 0.33 +0.09 +0.1 0.39
Allen key size - FXN(E)
supplied wrenches.) Ø6.35 Ø6.5 6 Ø22.22 Ø22.42 10
-0.08 0 0.07 -0.09 0 0.11
Model Liquid Gas valve low Gas valve +0.08 +0.1 0.35 +0.12 +0.1 0.42
valve (mm) (mm) high (mm)
� CAUTION:
RAS-8FXN
Ø9.53
-0.08
Ø9.7
0 0.09
8 Ø25.4
-0.12
Ø25.6
0 0.08
12
Do not apply force to the spindle valve at the end of +0.08 +0.1 0.38 +0.12 +0.1 0.42
RAS-10FXNE
opening (5 Nm or smaller). The back seat construction Ø12.7 Ø12.9 8 Ø28.58 Ø28.78 12
is not provided. -0.08 0 0.19 -0.12 0 0.08
RAS-12FXNE
4 +0.09 +0.1 0.41 +0.12 +0.1 0.47
During the test run, fully open the spindle. If it is not
RAS-16FXN Ø15.88 Ø16.1 8 Ø31.75 Ø32.0 12
RAS-18FXN
-0.09 0 0.13 -0.12 0 0.13
+0.09 +0.1 0.44 +0.12 +0.1 0.52
RAS-20FXN 10 10 Ø19.05 Ø19.3 10 Ø38.1 Ø38.3 14
FSVNE -0.09 0 0.16 -0.12 0 0.18
RAS-22FXN CAP
Tighten the cap with
RAS-24FXN a torque of D Closed before A basic brazing method is shown below.
shipment
RAS-26FXN
Check joint 10 2. Heat the outer tube
(Only the Charging hose Spindle Valve
RAS-30FXN
can be connected) evenly, resulting in good 1. Heat inner side tube evenly.
Counterclockwise Open flow of filler metal
Clockwise Close
RAS-32FXN Rubber Plug
Hex 1
Tighten Torque A
 Note
Refrigerant
Packless Valve
As for Allen keys of 5 and 10 mm, use field-supplied

Pressure
keys. High Pr. Hose

Nitrogen Gas Flow
Seat surface 0.05 m³/h or smaller
 Caution
(Fully closed position)
CAP O-Ring
Do notthe
Tighten apply force
to the spindle
cap with (rubber)valve at the
CAP
end of opening (5 Nm or smaller). The back
a torque of C Tighten seat
the cap with Reducer Valve: 0.03 to 0.05 MPa
a torque of B
construction is not provided. Open this valve only (0.3 to 0.5 Kg·cm² G)
Field supplied when supplying
Refrigerant Piping
During the test run, fully open the spindle. If it is not
A
Tighten torque (N·m)
B C D
Size (mm)
Hex 1 � ATTENTION:
Liquid (3~5HP) 7~9 33~42 33~42 14~18 4 - Use nitrogen gas for blowing during pipe brazing. If
Gas (3~5HP) 11~12 14~18 68~82 8~12 4 oxygen, acetylene or fluorocarbon gas is used, it will
cause an explosion or poisonous gas.
� CAUTION: - A lot of oxidation film will occur inside of tubes if no
Do not apply force to the spindle valve at the end of nitrogen gas blowing is performed during brazing
opening (5 N·m or smaller). The back seat work. This film will be flecked off after operation and
construction is not provided. will circulate in the cycle, resulting in clogged
During the test run, fully open the spindle. If it is not expansion valves, etc. This will cause bad influence to
fully opened, the devices will be damaged. the compressor.
- Use a reducer valve when nitrogen gas blowing is
performed during brazing. The gas pressure should be
maintained within 0.03 to 0.05 MPa. If a excessively
high pressure is applied to a pipe, it will cause an
explosion.
Page 2-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
2.3. INDOOR UNITS AND COMPLEMENTARY SYSTEMS

2.3.1 RCI 2.2. INDOOR UNITS
10.4. INDOOR UNIT PIPING WORK CONNECTION
 Refrigerant piping  Drain piping
10.4.1. RCI – 4 WAY CASSETTE TYPE 10.4.3. RPC – CEILING TYPE
2.2.1. RCI 2.2.2.
Position of piping connection is the following, which is – The position of the drain piping connection is shown – The
available from all directions, top, left or right. Piping Position
�below. belo
The refrigerant piping can be connected to some one of
two directions of the Indoor Unit: upper or rear side,
when facing the unit.
– The positions of piping are shown below
– Each direction has the prepared knockout hole as
shown in piping work sub-chapter.
– Cut the knockout hole for the required direction.
Drain piping
Liquid piping – Prep
Gas Piping diam
– Prepare a PVC pipe with a 32 mm outer diameter.
– Fas
– Fasten the pipe to the drain hose with an adhesive
and
and with the factory-supplied clamp. The drain piping
be p
must be installed with a pitch of 1/25 to 1/100.
Piping size – Do not apply excessive force to the drain piping
mm (in) connection. It could cause a damage.
� Gas Piping � Liquid Piping – Do not use a bent or twisted drain hose. ItDrain
will Piping
cause
RCI-1.0/1.5 Ø 12.70 (1/2)
∅ 6.35 (1/4) water leakage.
RCI-2.0 Piping size
∅ 15.88 (5/8)
RCI-2.5~6.0 ∅ 9.53 (3/8)
850 mm.
mm (in)
850 mm
Max.
Gas Piping Pitch of Liquid Piping

Max.
10.4.2. RCD – 2 WAY CASSETTE TYPE RPC-2.0 1/25~1/100∅ 6.35 (1/4) – Do n

∅ 15.88 (5/8)
RPC-2.5~6.0 ∅ 9.53 (3/8) conn
Gradient of drain piping
– Do n
� Piping Work Installation wate
– Insulate the drain pipe after connecting the drain
Piping
hose. Dowork should
not use be performed
adhesive betweenfrom the bottom
the drain piping side
– Con
of the unit. Remove the air
connection and the drain hose. inlet grille before beginning
the piping work, according to the following steps:
1. Slide the Knobs to the rear side.

Hose Band
(Accessory)
Do not use adhesive
Drain Pipe
Connection
� Slide Vinyl Chloride VP25

(Field Supplied
Knob
Drain Hose Use Vinyl Chloride type
(Accessory) adhesive
Piping size
mm (in)
– Insu
Do n
� Gas Piping � Liquid Piping
2. Open the air inlet grille, push up and slide the air inlet and
RCD-1.0/1.5 Ø 12.70 (1/2)
Hose Band (Accessory)
Ø 6.35 (1/4) grilles to the rear side.
RCD-2.0
Ø 15.88 (5/8) Unit
RCD-2.5~5.0 ∅ 9.53 (3/8) Insulation (Field supplied)
Rear Side
� Open
� Push
Air Inlet Grille
Page 2-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Insulation for Connection Parts:
The connection part must be insulated by the field supplied
insulation materials.
Piping installation
Nitrogen:
For Leakage Test and Brazing DRAIN PIPING 2/3
CTION
2.3.2 RCIM UNITS
2.2. INDOOR
 Refrigerant
9.4.2. piping
RCIM-4WAY CASSETTE TYPE  Drain piping
2.2.1. RCI 2.2.2. RCIM
Piping connection
– The position position is the
of the drain following,
piping whichisisshown
connection – The position of the drain pipe connection is shown
available from all directions, top, left or right.
below. below.
Drain Pipe Connection
2
View from A
Drain piping
– Prepare a polyvinyl chloride pipe with a 32 mm outer
diameter (VP25).
– Prepare a PVC pipe with a 32 mm outer diameter.
– Fasten the tubing to the drain hose with an adhesive
– Fasten the pipe to the drain hose with an adhesive
and the factory-supplied clamp. The drain piping must
and with the factory-supplied clamp. The drain piping
in)
be performed with a down-slope pitch of 1/25 to 1/100.
must be installed with a pitch of 1/25 to 1/100.
g
Piping
– Dosize
not apply excessive force to the drain piping
850 mm.
Piping size
connection. It could cause a damage. (mm)
(mm)(in)
Max.
� Gas Piping
piping � Liquid Piping
piping
– Do not use a bent or twisted drain hose. It will cause Pitch of
 Gas Liquid 1/25~1/100
water leakage.
RCI-1.5 Ø 12.70 (1/2)
RCIM-1.0/1.5 Ø12.80 (1/2) �Ø6.35 (1/4)
6.35 (1/4)
RCI-2.0 � 15.88 (5/8)
850 mm.

RCIM-2.0 Ø15.88 (5/8)
Max.
Pitch of
1/25~1/100 – Do not apply excessive force to the Drain Pipe
connection. It could cause a damage.
– Do not use a bent or twisted Drain Hose. It will cause
water leakage.
– Consider the following dimensions: a + b + c ≤ 780mm
hose. Do not use adhesive between the drain piping
connection and the drain hose.
Support Stick

Do not use adhesive
Hose Band
(Accessory)
Do not use adhesive Down Slope
Drain Pipe
Connection
Vinyl Chloride VP25 Drain hose (Accessory)

(Field Supplied
Drain Hose Use Vinyl Chloride type (Gradient of Drain piping)

(Accessory) adhesive
– Insulate the drain pipe after connecting the drain hose.

Do not use adhesive between the Drain Pipe connection
Hose Band (Accessory) and the drain hose.

Drain Pipe Do not use adhesive
Insulation (Field supplied) Connection
Vinyl Chloride VP25

20±5 (Field Supplied)
Use Vinyl Chloride type

Drain Hose
adhesive
(Accessory)
Insulation (Field supplied)
Page 2-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping size
Piping installation mm (in)
� Gas Piping � Liquid Piping Drain Piping
RCI-1.0/1.5 Ø 12.70 (1/2)
∅ 6.35 (1/4)
RCI-2.0 Piping
2/4 size
DRAIN PIPING
∅ 15.88 (5/8)
RCI-2.5~6.0
2.3.3 RCD ∅ 9.53 (3/8)
mm (in)
Gas Piping Liquid Piping
 Refrigerant
10.4.2. RCD piping
– 2 WAY CASSETTE TYPE  Drain piping
RPC-2.0 ∅ 6.35 (1/4)
∅ 15.88 (5/8)
RPC-2.5
2.2.3. RCD~6.0 ∅ 9.53 (3/8) 2.2
�–Piping WorkofInstallation
The position the drain piping connection is shown The
Piping work should be performed from the bottom side
below. righ
of the unit. Remove the air inlet grille before beginning
How
410
left
90 � F
1. Slide the Knobs to the rear side. –
–
260
–
� Slide
Knob
–
Piping size
– Prepare a PVC pipe with an outer diameter of 32 mm.
mm (in)
� Gas Piping � Liquid Piping – Fasten the pipe to the drain hose with an adhesive
2.andOpen
withthe
theair inlet grille, push up and slide thepiping
air inlet
RCD-1.0/1.5 Ø 12.70 (1/2) factory-supplied clamp. The drain
Ø 6.35 (1/4) grilles
mustto bethe rear side.
installed with a pitch of 1/25 to 1/100.
RCD-2.0
Ø 15.88 (5/8) UnitInsulation material
RCD-2.5~5.0 ∅ 9.53 (3/8)
(field-supplied)
Rear Side
W
� Open
Insulation material � Push
(factory-supplied)
Pitch of
1/25~1/100
Air Inlet Grille

PVC pipe
Clamp (field-supplied)
(factory-supplied)
Drain piping
� F
600 mm
Max.
Pitch of
1/25~1/100

hose.
Rem
as t
–
–
–
Page 2-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
EFRIGERANT PIPING AND REFRIGERANT CHARGE 10/21

2.3.4 RPC
TION
 Refrigerant piping
After select the piping direction proceeded to knockout 10.4
10.4.3. RPC – CEILING TYPE selected hole, install pipes and seal the piping with the
Piping position
factory supplied insulation as indicated below: Posit
� Piping Position
The refrigerant piping can be connected to some one of Upper side
� Upper Side � R
two directions of the Indoor Unit: upper or rear side, 1. Knockout hole
when facing the unit. Liquid Piping
2
– The positions of piping are shown below Open the Knockout hole Gas Piping
– Each direction has the prepared knockout hole as
shown in piping work sub-chapter. 50
– Cut the knockout hole for the required direction. Open the
Knockout hole
155 Ga
Liquid piping
Gas Piping
� R
2. Seal piping
M4 screw
Sealing Plate
n) Refrigerant Piping
g Drain Piping
A
Piping size Sealing Plate
B
mm (in)
Sealing with insulation
Gas Piping Liquid Piping Sec. A-B
RPC-2.0 ∅ 6.35 (1/4)
∅ 15.88 (5/8)
RPC-2.5~6.0 ∅ 9.53 (3/8) Pipin
Rear side
� Rear Side
Piping
� work
Piping installation
Work Installation 1. Knockout hole
Piping work should be performed from the bottom side RPI-
of the unit. Remove the air inlet grille before beginning RPI-
RPI-
1. Slide the Knobs to the rear side.

�
� Slide Keep
Knob Opti
n) 2. Seal Piping
2. Open the air inlet grille, push up and slide the air inlet Factory-Supplied
grilles to the rear side. Sealing Plate
(0.8x118x142 mm)
Unit
Knockout
Rear Side Refrigerant Gas Piping
� Open Opti
M4 Screw P Refrigerant Liquid Piping
� Push
Seal with
Sealing Plate insulation
83
38
54
Air Inlet Grille

95 P M4 Screw
125 Sec. P-P
*145
Page 2-11
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
2.2.4.
Drain piping
RPC
– Insert the drain plug into the drain boss on the right –
side by using a driver as shown below.
–
n The standard direction of drain pipe connection is to the
Drain plug Drain connection
right side looking at the unit from the discharge grilles. Driver
However, the pipe connection can be performed from the
left side if this is required due to the building construction.
For the the

� For rightright-side
side connection
connection Unit
Ba
side
– Insert the hose into the wire clamp.
– Push the drain hose onto the drain boss until the
hose reaches the end of the drain pan.
– Tighten the screw for the wire clamp in order to hold – After inserting the drain plug into the drain boss on
the hose around the drain connection without any the right side, seal the jointed part by using a
leakage of drain water as shown below. waterproof chloride-type sealing material and secure
– Insulate the drain hose around the wire clamp in the jointed part with a fastener. –
order to prevent any condensation from forming as
shown below. Sealing material
m.
g 2.2.
Wire clamp A � D
Drain hose Plug –
Wire clamp B
Drain boss – Wrap the insulation material around the drain RPI
connection.
Insulation
material – Connect the drain hose to the drain connection on the
Drain pipe
left side according to the same procedure for the
drain connection on the right side.
Connecting a drain
� Connecting piping
a drain piping
� For the left-side connection – Prepare a PVC pipe with an outer diameter of 26 mm.
(VP20). RPI
– Pay attention to the position of the drain pipe. Keep
Fan runner a down-slope pitch of 1/25 to 1/100. Do not create
Fan motor an up-slope for the drain piping.
Drain boss
– Seal the connecting part of the drain pipe by using
the waterproof chloride-type sealing material.
Drain plug
– Wrap the insulation material around the connecting
Rear side part perfectly.
– Fasten the drain pipe to the connecting part with
Fastener band the factory-supplied clamp.
Insulation plug
Drain plug Insulation material

Drain hose (field-supplied) RPI-8
Secure down-
slope
Remove the drain plug of the drain boss on the left side
as the following procedure explains.
– Cut the fastener. PVC pipe (outer
Clamp diameter 32 mm)
– Remove the insulation material.
– Remove the drain plug.
Wrapping the insulation material
Page 2-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
DRAIN PIPING 2/5

– Do not connect the drain pipe with the sanitary piping, 2.3.5 RPI
the sewage piping or any other drainage piping.
After select the piping direction proceeded to knockout  Refrigerant
10.4.4. RPI –piping
IN-THE-CEILING TYPE
selected hole, install pipes and seal the piping with the
– When you are installing the pipe, do not tie the drain
factory supplied insulation as indicated below:
pipe and the refrigerant pipe together. Tie the drain
pipe as shown below. Position of piping connection is the following:
� Upper Side � RPI (0.8~1.5)

1. Knockout hole
Liquid Piping
2
Band Band
Drain Pipe
Open the Knockout hole Gas Piping
50
Rear-side piping Rear-side piping Open the

Knockout hole
155 Gas Pipe Liquid Pipe
– After completing the installation of the drain pipe,

pour water into the drain pan and make sure that the
� RPI (2.0~6.0)
water flows smoothly as explained in section 2.1.
Liquid Pipe
2. Seal piping 35 Drain Pipe
2.2.5. RPI
M4 screw
�Sealing
Drain Plate piping position
Refrigerant Piping
– The position of the drain pipe connection is shown in
A the next figures.
Sealing Plate
B Gas Pipe
RPI-1.5
Sealing with insulation
Sec. A-B
e
Piping size
� Rear Side
mm (in)
1. Knockout hole
RPI-0.8~1.5 ∅ 12.70 (1/2)
∅ 6.35 (1/4)
RPI-2.0
.
∅ 15.88 (5/8)
Drain piping
RPI-2.5~6.0
RPI-2.0~6.0
∅ 9.53 (3/8)
� NOTE:
When installing pipes, make sure that enough space
is provided for servicing the electrical box.
Keep electrical box and drain pipe access free of piping.

Drain piping
Option 1
2. Seal Piping
RPI-8/10
Factory-Supplied
n- Sealing Plate
(0.8x118x142 mm)
Knockout
Refrigerant Gas Piping
Drain piping Option 2
M4 Screw P Refrigerant Liquid Piping
Seal with
Sealing Plate insulation
83
38
54
95 P M4 Screw
125 Sec. P-P
*145
Page 2-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Rear-side piping Rear-side piping
Piping installation
– After completing the installation of the drain pipe,
pour water into the drain pan and make sure that the
water flows smoothly as explained in section 2.1. 2/6 DRAIN PIPING
2.2.5. RPI
 Drain piping
� Drain piping position – Connecting
� Prepare a PVCa pipe
drainwith an outer diameter of 32 mm
pipe 2
– The position of the drain pipe connection is shown in –(RPI-0.8-6.0) or 25pipe
Prepare a PVC mm with
(RPIan
8/10).
outer diameter of 32 mm
the next figures. – Fasten the pipe to the drain hose
(RPI 1.5-6.0) or 25 mm (RPI with an adhesive and
8/10). �
–with the factory-supplied
Fasten the pipe to the clamp (For with
drain hose RPI 8/10 only). The
an adhesive
RPI-0.8~1.5
drain
andpiping must
with the be installed with
factory-supplied a downslope
clamp pitch of
(For RPI 8/10
1/25 to 1/100.
RPI-1.5
only). The drain piping must be installed with a down-
slope pitch of 1/25 to 1/100.
e
mm
500 mm
Max.
Max.
850
.
RPI-2.0~6.0 Drain piping 1/25~1/100
RPI-2.0~6.0 pitch
RPI-1.5~6.0 only
– –Insulate thethe
Insulate drain pipe
drain after
pipe connecting
after thethe
connecting drain hose
drain
(RPI-0.8~6.0 only).
hose (RPI-1.5~6.0 only).
Insulation material
(field-supplied)
H
R
Drain piping Insulation material R
(field-supplied)
1/25~1/100
pitch
�
RPI-8/10 PVC pipe

Clamp (field-supplied)
n- (field-supplied)
(Drain piping)
– Connect a syphon, as shown in the next figure

(for RPI 8/10).
Drain piping
>75 mm
Slope 2% �
Plug
� NOTE:
When the relative humidity of the inlet or the ambient
air exceeds 80%, place an auxiliary drain pan, which
is field-supplied, beneath the indoor unit as shown
below.
Indoor unit
Auxiliary drain pan

(field-supplied)
Page 2-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
2.3.6 RPK REFRIGERANT PIPING AND REFRIGERANT CHARGE 10/23
 Refrigerant piping
10.4.5. RPK – WALL TYPE When bending the tubes, firmly fix the tube at the heat
exchanger side.
Piping Direction for the Indoor Unit:
� RPK-0.8 ~ 4.0
Three directions of piping connection to the Indoor Unit Contour of the Unit
L3
can be performed; rear side, right side and left side of
the unit, respectively. Therefore, most appropriate piping
2
For Left Side
for a room can be selected. Piping Insulation For Right Side Piping
Right Side L2
Cover L1
1. Right Side Piping
Cut the corner using a Plastic Cutter For Rear Side Piping
plastic cutter as shown
below and remove sharp
edges completely. mm
Cut this corner Model RPK
HP L1 L2 L3
FSNM
0.8~1.5 410 268 142
2. Left Side Piping Left Side
Cover
Cut the corner at the left Right Gas Piping 2.0 440 298 142
Side
side using a plastic cutter Cover 2.5~4.0 550 645 125
as for the right side
piping. 0.8~2.0 470 328 142
Liquid Piping
2.5~4.0 480 575 125
Right Side Cover mm
Model RPK
HP L1 L2 L3
FSN1M
3. Rear Side Piping
Gas Piping 1.0/1.5 410 310 108
Make a hole by removing
the knock-out plate at the Liquid Piping 1.0/1.5 480 330 108
rear side.
Piping size
mm (in)
RPK-0.8~1.5 ∅ 12.70 (1/2)
� CAUTION: RPK2.0
∅ 6.35 (1/4)
Do not twist the pipe when bending the tube. ∅ 15.88 (5/8)
RPI-2.5~4.0 ∅ 9.53 (3/8)
10.4.6. RPF & RPFI – FLOOR TYPE & FLOOR CONCEALED TYPE
(mm)
Piping Connection of RPF Piping Connection of RPFI
mm (in)
RPF(I)-1.0/1.5 ∅ 12.7 (1/2)
∅ 6.35 (1/4)
RPF(I)-2.0
∅ 15.88 (5/8)
RPF(I)-2.5 ∅ 9.53 (3/8)
Page 2-15
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
2.2.6.
Drain piping
RPK
m
Right sideside
� Right connection
connection
– The standard direction of drain piping connection
is to the right side when the unit is viewed from
n- the discharge grilles. However, the connection can
be performed from the left side or the rear side.
Contour of the unit

Ø 65 hole on
C the rear side
for the wiring
Drain piping connection
connection
for the vinyl pipe
and the piping
connection
B
HP A B C (mm)
RPK-1.0~1.5FSN1M
HP 800
A 37.5
B 123
C
RPK-1.5 FSN1M 800 37.5 123
RPK-0.8~4.0FSNM
RPK-1.5~4.0 FSNM 890
890 45
45 115
115
Left sideside
� Left connection
connection
– When the drain piping connection is performed on the
left side, remove the cap of left-side drain pipe. Then,
attach this cap to the right-side drain pipe in order to
change the drain piping connection from the right side
to the left side.
Change of drain piping

connection
Connection a drain
� Connecting pipe pipe
a drain
– Prepare a PVC pipe with an outer diameter of 26 mm
(VP20).
– Connect a drain piping according to the figure below.
Provide a down-slope
to allow the drain
nt water to flow smoothly
h
Use adhesive tape

24 mm
VP20
– Do not create an up-slope from the unit.

– Use chloride-type adhesive for connecting the drain
pipe.
– Tightly squeeze the drain hose with the wire clamp
after inserting the drain pipe into the drain hose
completely.
– Pour water onto the drain pan and make sure that
the water flows smoothly.
Page 2-16
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Make a hole by removing
the knock-out plate at the Liquid Piping 1.0/1.5 480 330 108
rear side.
Piping installation
Piping size
mm (in)
RPK-0.8~1.5 ∅ 12.70 (1/2)
�
2.3.6CAUTION:
RPF(I)
RPK2.0
∅ 6.35 (1/4)
Do not twist the pipe when bending the tube. ∅ 15.88 (5/8)
 Refrigerant piping RPI-2.5~4.0 ∅ 9.53 (3/8)
10.4.6. RPF & RPFI – FLOOR TYPE & FLOOR CONCEALED TYPE
(mm)
Piping Connection of RPF Piping Connection of RPFI
mm (in)
RPF(I)-1.0/1.5 ∅ 12.7 (1/2)
∅ 6.35 (1/4)
RPF(I)-2.0
∅ 15.88 (5/8)
RPF(I)-2.5 ∅ 9.53 (3/8)
DRAIN PIPING
 Drain piping 2/7
2.2.7. RPF AND RPFI
– The position of the drain pipe connection is shown in
the figure.
– Prepare a PVC pipe with an outer diameter of 18.5
mm.
– Fasten the pipe to the drain hose with an adhesive.
– Insulate the drain pipe after connecting the drain Drain hose
hose as shown. Insulation material (field-supplied)
PVC pipe (field-supplied)
2.3. DRAIN DISCHARGING BOSS FOR OUTDOOR UNIT (DBS-26)
2.3.1. DRAIN DISCHARGING BOSS
When the base of the outdoor unit is temporarily utilized

as a drain receiver and the drain water in it is discharged, RAS-2~6H(V)RNE / H(V)NE
this drain boss is utilized to connect the drain piping.
Model Applicable Model
DBS-26
Page 2-17
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
2.3.8 CH-UNITS
10.4.7. CH UNIT
Piping Connection NOTE:

The factory-supplied flange should be welded with the
Position of piping connection is shown in SM0032. connection pipe before connecting the valve. Mount
the Insulation’s after the pipe brazing. Take particular
Connect the accessory reducer or flanges as shown in the care upon connecting flange so that Insulation is
next figures. correctly located.
CH-4.0/8.0NE
To To
Indoor Outdoor
�
To To Unit Unit
Indoor Outdoor
Unit Unit
No Description REMARKS
� Insulation - Field Supplied – CH-4.0NE unit
� Insulation - Field Supplied – CH-(4.0/8.0/12.0)NE units
No Description - Field Supplied – CH-(4.0/8.0)NE

� Insulation
- Included in CH-12.0N unit as accessory.
� Pipe Fixing Band
� Liquid Pipe Piping size

� Low Gas Pipe
Remarks
� High Gas Pipe Description
CH-4.0NE CH-8.0NE CH-12.0N
� Gas Pipe Low Gas ∅15.88 Flare ∅19.05 Flare ∅22.2 Flange
� Reducer Pipe connection Connection connection
Field-Supplied Piping High Gas ∅12.7 Flare ∅15.88 Flare ∅19.05 Flare
Pipe connection Connection connection
∅15.88 Flare ∅19.05 Flare ∅22.2 Flange
Gas Pipe
connection connection connection
CH-12.0NE
CH-12.0N
Factory supplied pipe accessories for CH-UNIT-12.0NE:

To
Indoor
Unit � � To
Outdoor
Unit
Accessory
Gasket
Qty.
1
No Description Pîpe flange of 1

� Pipe Fixing Band refrigerant gas piping
� Liquid Pipe
� High Gas Pipe
� Low Gas Pipe
� Gas Pipe
� Pipe Flange
Field-Supplied Piping
After connecting the refrigerant piping, seal the

refrigerant pipes by using the field-supplied insulation
materials as shown in figure below.
Use the factory-supplied pipe with a flange to connect
low-pressure gas piping. The gasket at the unit gas
piping inlet should be replaced to the one supplied with
your unit. (Thermal insulator over the flange connection
should be field-supplied).
Page 2-18
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
2.4 OUTDOOR UNITS
2.4.1. FACTORY SUPPLIED PIPE ACCESSORIES

Accessory Quantity
RAS-10FSNE
RAS-12FSNE
RAS-8FSNE
RAS-14FSN
RAS-16FSN
RAS-18FSN
RAS-20FSN
RAS-22FSN
RAS-24FSN
RAS-26FSN
RAS-28FSN
RAS-30FSN
RAS-32FSN
RAS-5FSN
Gasket
- - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2
Pipe flange of refrigerant gas
piping
- - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pipe with flare nut of

1 1 - - - - - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Rubber bush For connection hole of power

1
source wiring
For connection hole of
4
operation wiring
Screw Spare 3
Accessory Quantity
RAS-10FXNE
RAS-12FXNE
RAS-8FXNE
RAS-16FXN
RAS-18FXN
RAS-20FXN
RAS-22FXN
RAS-24FXN
RAS-26FXN
RAS-30FXN
RAS-32FXN
Gasket
1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Pipe flange of refrigerant gas

piping
1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 - - - - - - - -

- - - - - 1 1 1 1 1 1
Rubber bush For connection hole of power

1
source wiring
For connection hole of
4
operation wiring
Screw Spare 3
Page 2-19
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
REFRIGERANT
10/26 Piping installation PIPING AND REFRIGERANT CHARGE
10.5.2. POSITION OF PIPING CONNECTION

2.4.2. POSITION OF PIPING CONNECTION
FSN(E)/FXN(E) MODELS
� Pipes can be connected from 3 directions
– Remove the service cover as shown in fig. below
before piping connection.
Front Side
Front Side
Rear Side
Bottom Side
Bottom Base
(Example: 5 to 10HP)
� NOTE:
– Remove fixing screws on the lower position (4 pieces) Do not install piping in front of the screw of the service
and the upper position (3 pieces). panel. If not, the screw or the service panel can not
be removed
– Slightly open the upper side and lift the service cover
upward, then slowly pull it forward to the front side.
RAS-5/8FSN(E)
RAS-5/8FSN(E) RAS-10~32FSN(E)
RAS-10~30FSN(E)
FSN(E) Models
Model  Refrigerant Gas piping  Refrigerant Liquid piping A B C D E F
connection Ø connection Ø
The position of the connecting pipes is the following for each Outdoor Unit type:
RAS-5FSN 15.88 flare nut 9.53 flare nut 138 242 232 306 155 155
RAS-8FSNE 19.05 flare nut 9.53 flare nut 137 241 238 306 155 155
RAS-10FSNE
Model
�
22.2 brazing �
9.53 flare nut A B 137 C227 247
D 306 E 151 F 156
Refrigerant Gas Refrigerant Liquid
RAS-12FSNE 25.4 brazing
Piping Connection Ø 12.7 flare nut
Piping Connection Ø 137 241 238 306 151 156
RAS-14FSN
RAS-5FSN 25.4 brazing
15.88 flare nut 12.7 nut
9.53 flare flare nut 138 242 137 227
232 254
306 295155 171 155173
RAS-16FSN 28.6 brazing 12.7 flare nut 137 227 254 295 171 173
RAS-8FSN(E) 19.05 flare nut 241 238 306 155 156
RAS-18FSN 28.6 brazing 15.88nut
9.53 flare flare nut 137 137 233 247 287 141 150
RAS-10FSN(E)
RAS-20FSN 28.622.2 brazing
brazing 15.88 flare nut 227 137 247
233 306
247 287151 141 156150
RAS-22FSN
RAS-16FSN 28.628.6
brazing
brazing 15.88nut
12.7 flare flare nut 227 137 233
254 247
295 287171 141 173150
RAS-24FSN 28.6 brazing 15.88 flare nut 137 138 234 247 274 159 171
RAS-20FSN 28.6 brazing 15.88 flare nut 233 247 287 141 150
RAS-24FSN 28.6 brazing 15.88 flare nut 247 274 159 171
RAS-28FSN 31.75 brazing 19.05 flare nut 138 234 138 234 247 274 159 171
RAS-30FSN
RAS-30FSN 31.75
31.75 brazing
brazing 19.05 19.05
flare nut
flare nut 138 247
234 274
247 274159 159 171171
Page 2-20
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
RAS-8~12FXN(E)
RAS-8/10FXN(E) RAS-16~32FXN
RAS-16~30FXN
FXN(E) Models
Model
The position of theconnecting pipes isthe following for each A
 Outdoor Unit type: B C D E F G H I
Refrigerant Gas Refrigerant Gas Refrigerant Liquid
Model
�
(Low) piping �
(High) piping �
piping connection Ø A B C D E F G H I
Refrigerant
connection GasØ(Low) Refrigerant
connection GasØ(High) Refrigerant Liquid
Piping Connection Ø Piping Connection Ø Piping Connection Ø
RAS-8FXNE 19.05 flare nut 15.88 flare nut 9.53 flare nut 119 195 284 305 253 247 151 156 156
RAS-8FXN(E) 19.05 brazing pipes is the
15.88 flare nut for each9.53 flare nut 119 195 284 305 253 247 151 156 156
The position of
RAS-10FXNE the22.2
connecting
brazing 19.05following
flare nut 9.53Outdoor
flare nut Unit type:119 195 284 305 253 247 151 156 156
RAS-10FXN(E) 22.2 brazing 19.05brazing
flare nut 9.53flare
flare nut 119 195 284 305 253 247 151 156 156
RAS-12FXNE
Model
25.4
�
brazing 19.05
� 12.70
� nut 119
A
195
B
284
C
305
D
253
E
247
F
151
G
156
H
156
I
RAS-16FXN
RAS-16FXN 28.6 brazing
Refrigerant
28.6 22.2 brazing
Gas (Low) Refrigerant
brazing 22.2 Gas (High)
brazing 12.70
12.7flare
Refrigerant nut
flare Liquid
nut 118
118 186
186 295
295 385
385 253
253 246
246 139
139 146 150
RAS-18FXN Piping
28.6 Connection Ø
brazing Piping
22.2 Connection Ø
brazing Piping
15.88 Connection Ø
RAS-20FXN 28.6 brazing 22.2 brazing 15.88flare
flare nut
nut 118
118 186
186 295
295 385
381 253
253 246
246 139
139 146
146 150
146
RAS-8FXN(E)
RAS-20FXN 28.6 brazing
19.05 brazing 22.2 brazing
15.88 flare nut 15.88
9.53flare nut
flare nut 119
118 195
186 284
295 305
385 253
253 247
246 151
139 156
146 156
146
RAS-24FXN 28.6 brazing 25.4 brazing 15.88 flare nut 110 172 281 379 253 247 159 171 178
RAS-22FXN
RAS-10FXN(E) 28.6 brazing
22.2 brazing 25.4 brazing
19.05 flare nut 15.88 flare nut
9.53 flare nut 118
119 186
195 295
284 385
305 253
253 246
247 139
151 146
156 150
156
RAS-30FXN
RAS-24FXN 28.631.75 brazing
brazing 25.428.6 brazing
brazing 19.05flare
15.88 flare nut
nut 110
110 172
172 281
281 379
379 253
253 247
247 159
159 171
171 178
178
RAS-20FXN 28.6brazing
brazing 22.2 brazing 15.88flare
flare nut
nut 118 186 295 381 253 246 139 146 146
RAS-30FXN
RAS-32FXN
RAS-24FXN
31.75
31.7528.6brazing
brazing
28.6
28.6
brazing
brazing
25.4 brazing
19.05
19.05
15.88flare �
flare nut
nut
110
NOTE:
110
110
172
172
172
281
281
281
379
379
379
253
253
253
247
247
247
159
159
171
171
178
178
After piping and wiring work are completed, remove
RAS-30FXN 31.75 brazing 28.6 brazing 19.05 flare nut two110 172
yellow 281 washers
shipping 379 253for compressor(s).
247 159 171 178
Shipping Washer Fix the pipes not to apply a force to stop valves and to
(yellow-Painted)
minimize vibration.
Foot of
Compressor
� NOTE:
After piping and wiring work are completed, remove
Nut Vibration-proof two yellow shipping washers for compressor(s).
Shipping Washer rubber
Fix the pipes not to apply a force to stop valves and to
(yellow-Painted)
minimize vibration.
Foot of
Compressor Vibration-proof
rubber
Vibration-proof
Nut
rubber
Vibration-proof
rubber
Page 2-21
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
FSVNE MODELS
Pipes can be connected from four directions as shown. Remove the service cover as shown in fig. below before
Make a hole at the front pipe cover or rear pipe cover piping connection.
to pass through the hole. – Remove fixing screws.
– Slightly open the upper side and lift the service cover
upward, then slowly pull it forward to the front side.
Rear Side Piping Work

Stop Valve
Connecting Pipe
Pipe Cover
Right Side Piping Work

Front Side
Piping Work Bottom Side Piping Work
(Knock Out Hole)
Removing Direction
for Service Cover
RAS-3/4/5FSVNE
The position of the connecting pipes is the following for each Outdoor Unit type:
Model
� � A B C D E F
Refrigerant Gas Refrigerant Liquid
Piping Connection Ø Piping Connection Ø
RAS-3FSVNE 254 314 57 42
RAS-4FSVNE 15.88 flare nut 9.53 flare nut 39 89
403 461 60 44
RAS-5FSVNE
Page 2-22
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
10.5.3. FLANGE PIPING CONNECTION FOR FSN(E)/FXN(E) MODELS

2.4.3 FLANGE PIPING CONNECTION FOR FSN(E)/FXN(E)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3

2
Figure 4 Figure 5
(ID) Inner Diameter
FSN(E) Models
Dimensions (mm)
Outdoor UnitDimensions
Model (mm) Figure
A B C ØD(ID) ØE(ID)
Model Figure A B C ØD (ID) ØE (ID)
RAS-10FSN(E)
RAS-10FSNE Gas 2 Gas 95 27 297 95
22.2 27– 97 22.2 –
RAS-16FSN
RAS-12FSNE Gas 3 Gas 95 27 385 95
25.4 27– 85 28.6 –
RAS-14FSN Gas 3 Gas
RAS-20FSN 95 27 485 25.4
100 29– 87 28.6 –
RAS-16FSN Gas 3 95 27 85 28.6 –
RAS-24FSN
RAS-18FSN Gas 4 Gas 100 29 487 100
28.6 29– 87 28.6 –
RAS-30FSN
RAS-20FSN Gas 4 Gas 100 29 587 100
28.6 29– 117 31.75 34.92
RAS-22FSN Gas 4 100 29 187 28.6 27–
RAS-8FXN(E)
RAS-24FSN Gas 4
Low Gas
100 29 87
95
28.6 –
87 19.05 (OD) –
RAS-10FXN(E)
RAS-26FSN Gas 5 Low Gas
100 29 2117 95
31.75 2934.92 70 22.2 –
RAS-16FXN
RAS-28FSN Gas 5 High Gas
100 29 2117 31.75
95 2734.92 70 22.2 –
RAS-30FSN Gas 5 100 29 117 31.75 34.92
RAS-16FXN
RAS-32FSN Gas 5 Low Gas
100 29
2117 100
31.75
2934.92 58 28.6 –
RAS-20FXN High Gas 2 95 27 70 22.2 –
FXN(E) ModelsRAS-20FXN Low Gas 2 100 29 58 28.6 –
RAS-24FXN High Gas
Dimensions (mm)
3 95 27 58 25.4 –
RAS-24FXN Low Gas 3 100 29 58 28.6 –
Model Figure A
RAS-30FXN High Gas B 3C ØD (ID)
95 27ØE (ID) 58 28.6 –
RAS-8FXNE Low Gas 1 95 27
RAS-30FXN Low Gas 587 19.05(OD)
100 29– 88 31.75 34.92
RAS-10FXNE Low Gas 2 95 29 70 22.2 –
RAS-12FXNE High Gas 2 95 27 97 22.2 –
RAS-12FXNE Low Gas 3 95 27 85 25.4 –
�
RAS-16FXN
NOTE: High Gas
RAS-16FXN Low Gas
2
2
95
100
27
29
70
58
22.2
28.6
–
–
- For connecting
RAS-18FXN High Gas the 2lower piping
95 diameter
27 for the 70 22.2 –
Outdoor
RAS-18FXN Low Units
Gas having2 two piping
100 dimensions,
29 cut off
58 28.6 –
RAS-20FXN
the end Highpart
Gasof pipe2 flange (factory
95 27
supplied), which70is 22.2 –
RAS-20FXN Low Gas 2 100 29 58 28.6 –
for connecting
RAS-22FXN High Gas the higher
2 piping
95 diameter.
27 70 22.2 –
RAS-22FXN Low Gas 2 100 29 58 28.6 –
- If it is necessary,
RAS-24FXN High Gas
use
3
the reducer.
95 27 58 25.4 –
RAS-24FXN Low Gas 3 100 29 58 28.6 –
RAS-26FXN High Gas 3 95 27 58 25.4 –
RAS-26FXN Low Gas 5 100 29 88 31.75 34.92
RAS-30FXN High Gas 3 95 27 58 28.6 –
RAS-30FXN Low Gas 5 100 29 88 31.75 34.92
RAS-32FXN High Gas 3 95 27 58 28.6 –
RAS-32FXN Low Gas 5 100 29 88 31.75 34.92
 NOTE:
– For connecting the lower piping diameter for the Outdoor Units having two piping dimensions, cut off the end part of
pipe flange (factory supplied), which is for connecting the higher piping diameter.
– If it is necessary, use the reducer.
Page 2-23
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
2.4.4
10.5.4. PIPING
PIPING CONNECTION
CONNECTION FOR FSN(E)/FXN(E)
FSN(E)/FXN(E) 2.4.5 PIPING
10.5.5. PIPINGCONNECTION
CONNECTIONFSVNE
FOR FSVNE
– For RAS-5~12FSN(E)
- For RAS-5/8 HP FSN(E) � Select the most suitable piping direction.
� Confirm that the valve is closed
� Remove the pipe cover and the service cover from
� Prepare a field-supplied bend pipe for liquid and gas the unit, cut off the part of the holes along the
line. Connect they to the liquid and gas valve by flare guideline (on the rear side of the pipe cover) and cut
nut through the square hole of bottom bore. the edge of the holes.
� Solder the bend pipes and field piping � Attach the rubber bush (Factory-Supplied) and
insulation before connecting the pipe in the flare nut.
Later, it would be impossible to pass the insulation or
– For RAS-8FXN(E) and 12~32FSN(E)/FXN(E) the rubber bush through the pipe and it would remain
- For RAS-8 FXN(E) and 10 ~ 30 HP FSN(E)/FXN(E)
� Confirm that the valve is closed. an undesired gap for where water or animals could
enter inside the unit.
� Prepare a field-supplied bend pipe for liquid line.
Connect it to the liquid valve by flare nut through the � Connect the Pipes and the Wiring to the unit.
square hole of bottom base. � If the field-supplied piping is connected with stop
� Prepare a field-supplied bend pipe for gas line. Solder valves directly, it is recommended to use a tube
it and the factory-supplied pipe flange at the outside bender.
of the unit. � Fix the Service Cover and the Pipe Cover.
� Finally, seal the open space between knockout hole
Factory-Supplied Pipe Flange and refrigerant pipes by using insulation material.
If not, animals or water will enter inside the unit and
electrical parts will be damaged.
Solder by
Bottom
Side Up
Field-Supplied Bend Pipe Stop Valve
Connecting Pipe
� Remove the flange and the gasket attached to the
unit before shipping and attach the new gasket
(factory supplied) before connecting the pipe flange to
the gas valve.
Gas Valve
Nut
(only for Removing Direction
10/16FSN) for Service Cover
Remove
Gasket Gasket
Pipe
Flange
Flange
Bolt
� Solder the bend pipes and field piping.
Page 2-24
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Piping installation
2.4.6 VACUUM AND REFRIGERANT CHARGE

10.7. VACUUM AND REFRIGERANT CHARGE
Evacuation and refrigerant charging procedure should be Outdoor Unit Nitrogen tank
performed according to the following instructions: (For Air Tight Test &
Nitrogen Blow
during Brazing)
Stop valve (Liquid Line)

� Apply two hoses for FSN(E) and two or three hoses for Manifold
FXN(E) for evacuation work or nitrogen blow in air tight Stop Valve (Gas Line)
Gauge
test. In case of two hoses are applied for FXN(E) units,
2
consider the following points.
- For vacuum work: connect hoses to the check joint
of the liquid valve and the gas low valve. Vacuum Pump
Refrigerant tank
- For air tight test: connect hoses to the liquid stop (R410A)
valve and the gas high valve. Oil trap is recommended
at every 10 meters lift
� The stop valve has been closed before shipment.
Gas Line
However, make sure that the stop valves are closed Liquid Line Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
completely.
� Connect the Indoor Unit and the Outdoor Unit with
field-supplied refrigerant piping.
Insulation
� Connect the gauge manifold using charging hoses with
a vacuum pump or a nitrogen cylinder to the check Multi-Kit
joints of the liquid line and the gas line stop valve.
� Check for any gas leakage at the flare nut connection, Example of Evacuation and Refrigerant Charge for FSN
by using nitrogen gas to increase the pressure at
4.15MPa for FSN(E) / FXN(E) / FSVNE Outdoor Units
inside of the field-supplied piping.
� NOTE:
- Charge the refrigerant correctly after calculation.
� Operate the vacuum pump for 1 to 2 hours until the Overcharge and insufficient charge of the refrigerant
pressure decreases lower than a pressure of may cause the compressor failure.
-756 mm Hg in vacuum. After vacuuming, cover the
- Check to ensure that there is no gas leakage. When
check joint with the cap and tighten with the torque of
large amount of the refrigerant leaks, the troubles as
12.5~16 N·m (1.25~1.6 kg·m).
follows may occur:
� For charging refrigerant, connect the gauge manifold 1. Oxygen deficiency
using charging hoses with a refrigerant charging 2. Generation of Harmful gas Due to Chemical
cylinder to the check joint of the liquid line stop valve. Reaction with fire.
Charge the proper quantity of refrigerant according to
the piping length (Calculate the quantity of the
refrigerant charge).
� CAUTION:
Check for refrigerant leakage in detail. If a large
� Fully open the gas line stop valve, and slightly open the refrigerant leakage occurs, it will cause difficulty with
liquid line stop valve. breathing or harmful gases would occur if a fire was
� Charge refrigerant by opening the gauge manifold being used in the room.
valve. An excess or a shortage of refrigerant is the main
cause of trouble to the units. Charge the correct
� Charge the required refrigerant within the difference refrigerant quantity.
range of ±0.5 kg by operating the system in cooling.
� Fully open the liquid line stop valve after completing
refrigerant charge.
Check to ensure that there is no gas leakage by the
leak detector or bubbling test liquid.
In case of using bubbling test liquid, choose the test
liquid which does not generate ammonia (NH3) by the
chemical reaction
� Continue cooling operation for more than 10 minutes to
circulate the refrigerant.
� Remove the “close” plate from the stop valve and hook
the attached “Open” plate at the stop valve.
Page 2-25
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
– Prepare a PVC pipe with an outer diameter of 18.5
mm.
Piping
– Fasten theinstallation
pipe to the drain hose with an adhesive.
2.3. DRAIN
– Insulate theDISCHARGING BOSS the
drain pipe after connecting FOR OUTDOOR UNIT (DBS-26)
drain Drain hose
hose as shown. Insulation material (field-supplied)
PVC pipe (field-supplied)

2.4.7
2.3.1. DRAIN
DRAIN DISCHARGING
DISCHARGING BOSS
BOSS

2.3.
as DRAIN
a drain DISCHARGING
receiver and the drain waterBOSS FOR OUTDOOR
in it is discharged, RAS-2~6H(V)RNE / H(V)NE
UNIT (DBS-26)
Model Applicable Model

2.3.1. DRAIN DISCHARGING BOSS

as a drain receiver and the drain water in it is discharged, RAS-2~6H(V)RNE / H(V)NE
DBS-26
Model Applicable Model Drain Hole

of Base
Model
Model Drain kit
Drain kit quantity
quantity(units)
(units) Drain Pipe
RAS-3~5FSVNE
RAS-2~6H(V)RNE 1 1
DBS-26 Extruded
RAS-5FSN
RAS-8~12HRNE 3 4
portion
RAS-2.5~5H(V)NE 1
RAS-8~16FSN(E) 4 Drain Hole
Drain Hole
RAS-24~32FSN
� 8 discharging boss
Connecting the drain Drain of
Boss
Base of Base
RAS-8~12FXN(E) 4 into the drain boss up

– Insert the rubber cap
Model Drain kit quantity (units) Drain Pipe
RAS-16~32FXN 8
to the extruded portions Rubber Cap
RAS-2~6H(V)RNE 1
– Insert the
RAS-8~12HRNE boss into the unit base and
4 turn Extruded
approximately 40 degree counterclockwise. portion
RAS-2.5~5H(V)NE 1
– Size of the drain boss is 32 mm (O.D.) Drain Hole
� –Connecting of Base
A drain pipethe drain
should be discharging
field-supplied boss Drain Boss
– Insert the rubber cap into the drain boss up
to the extruded portions Rubber Cap
�– NOTES:
Insert the boss into the unit base and turn
– Do not use this40
approximately drain bosscounterclockwise.
degree set in a cold area, because
the drain water may freeze.
– Size of the drain boss is 32 mm (O.D.)
– This drain boss is not sufficient to collect all the drain
– A drain pipe should be field-supplied
water. If collecting drain water is completely required,
provide a drain-pan that is bigger than the unit base
and install it under the unit with drainage.
�– NOTES:
In
– Doorder to guarantee
not use the proper
this drain boss set in condensate
a cold area, draining,
because
the siphon installation is
the drain water may freeze. very important.
– This drain boss is not sufficient to collect all the drain
water. If collecting drain water is completely required,
provide a drain-pan that is bigger than the unit base
and install it under the unit with drainage.
– In order to guarantee the proper condensate draining,
the siphon installation is very important.
Page 2-26
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
3. Electrical wiring
This chapter describes the procedures that you must follow to create the electrical wiring connections for the Set-Free
FSN(E)/FXN(E)/FSVNE outdoor units and for the full range of Hitachi indoor units.
CONTENTS
3. ELECTRICAL WIRING ___________________________________________________ 3-1

3.1. General Check __________________________________________________________ 3-2
3.2. Electrical Wiring for the Outdoor Unit ________________________________________ 3-2

3.2.1. Electrical Wiring Connection for Outdoor Unit _________________________________ 3-2
3
3.2.2. Setting the DIP Switches for the Outdoor Unit _________________________________ 3-3
3.3. Electrical Wiring for the Indooor Unit _________________________________________ 3-7

3.3.1. Electrical Wiring Connection _______________________________________________ 3-8
3.3.2. Setting the DIP Switches for the Indoor Unit _________________________________ 3-12
3.4. Common Wiring _______________________________________________________ 3-18

3.4.1. Electrical Wiring Between the Indoor Unit and the Outdoor Unit __________________ 3-18
3.4.2. H-LINK System ________________________________________________________ 3-23
3.4.3. PSC-5HR ____________________________________________________________ 3-25
3.5. Electrical wiring diagrams ________________________________________________ 3-27
Page 3-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
3/2 ELECTRICAL WIRING
3.1. GENERAL CHECK
3.1. GENERAL CHECK

� ATTENTION: 2. Following the Council Directive 89/336/EEC and its
amendments 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC, relating to
– Before installing the electrical wiring or before
electromagnetic compatibility, next table indicates
� performing a periodical check, turn OFF the main
ATTENTION:
switch to the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
2. Following
maximumthe
amendments
interface point
Council Directive
permissible
92/31/EEC
89/336/EECZ and
system impedance
andsupply,
of the user’s 93/68/EEC,
max
at its
relating to
in accordance
the
– Before installing the electrical wiring or before
– Before installing the electrical wiring or before electromagnetic
with EN61000-3-11 compatibility, next table indicates
performing a periodical check, turn OFF the main
performing a periodical check, make sure that maximum permissible system impedance Zmax at the
switch to the indoor unit and the outdoor unit. MODEL Zmax (W)
the indoor fan and the outdoor fan have stopped. interface point
MODEL of the user’s supply, in accordance
Zmax (�)
– Before installing the electrical wiring or before with EN61000-3-11
RAS-8FSN(E)/FXN(E) 0.17
– Protect the wires, the drain pipe, the electrical
performing a periodical check, make sure that RAS-3FSVNE 0.35
components and any other parts from rats or other RAS-10FSN(E)/FXN(E) 0.16
the indoor fan and the outdoor fan have stopped. RAS-4FSVNE MODEL Zmax (�)
0.27
small animals. If all these parts are not protected, RAS-12FSN(E)/FXN(E) 0.16
– Protect
rats or the wires,
other smallthe drain pipe,
animals the electrical
may gnaw at these RAS-3FSVNE
RAS-5FSVNE
RAS-14FSN 0.35
0.26
0.16
components and any other parts
parts. In the worst case, a fire may from rats or other
occur.
small animals. If all these parts are not protected, RAS-4FSVNE
RAS-16FSN/FXN
RAS-8FSN(E)/FXN(E) 0.27
0.15
0.17
– Prevent the wires from touching the refrigerant pipes,
rats or other small animals may gnaw at these RAS-18FSN/FXN
RAS-5FSVNE
RAS-10FSN(E)/FXN(E) 014
0.26
0.16
the plate edges and the electrical components inside
parts. In the worst case, a fire may occur. RAS-20FSN/FXN 0.13
the unit. Otherwise, the wires will be damaged. In the RAS-8FSN(E)/FXN(E)
RAS-16FSN/FXN 0.17
0.14
– Prevent the wires
worst case, a firefrom
may touching
occur. the refrigerant pipes, RAS-22FSN/FXN 0.12
the plate edges and the electrical components inside RAS-10FSN(E)/FXN(E)
RAS-20FSN/FXN 0.16
0.13
RAS-24FSN/FXN 0.12
� the unit. Otherwise, the wires will be damaged. In the
CAUTION:
worst case, a fire
RAS-16FSN/FXN
RAS-24FSN/FXN
RAS-26FSN/FXN
0.14
0.12
0.11
Tightly secure themay occur.
wires with the cord clamp inside RAS-20FSN/FXN
RAS-30FSN/FXN
RAS-28FSN 0.13
0.10
0.11
� the indoor unit.

CAUTION: RAS-24FSN/FXN
RAS-30FSN/FXN 0.12
0.10
3. Make sure that the power supply voltage is within ±10%
� Tightly secure the wires with the cord clamp inside
NOTE:
the indoor unit.
RAS-32FSN/FXN
of the rated voltage.
RAS-30FSN/FXN 0.10
0.10
Fix the rubber bushes with adhesive when the 3.4.Make
Check surethethat
capacity of thesupply
the power electrical wires.
voltage is Ifwithin
the power
±10%
� conduit tubes to the outdoor unit are not used.
NOTE: ofsource
the ratedcapacity is too low, you cannot start the system
voltage.
due to the voltage drop.
Fix the
1. Make surerubber
that the bushes with adhesive
field-selected when
electrical the
components 4. Check the capacity of the electrical wires. If the power
conduit tubes circuit
to thebreakers,
outdoor unit areconduit
not used. 5.source
Make sure that is
capacity thetoo
ground wirecannot
low, you is connected.
start the system
(main switches, wires, connectors
and wire terminals) have been properly selected according 6.due
Mainto Switch
the voltage drop.
1. Make
to thesure that the
electrical field-selected
specifications in electrical components
this service manual. Make Installsure
a multi-pole main switch with a distance of 3.5mm
5. Make that the ground wire is connected.
(main switches,
sure that circuit breakers,
the electrical componentswires, conduit
comply connectors
with the or more between each phase.
and wire terminals) have been properly selected according 6. Main Switch
National Electrical Code (NEC).
to the electrical specifications in this service manual. Make Install a multi-pole main switch with a distance of 3.5mm
sure that the electrical components comply with the or more between each phase.
National Electrical Code (NEC).
3.2. ELECTRICAL WIRING FOR THE OUTDOOR UNIT
3.2.
3.2.1.ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICALWIRING
WIRING FOR THE OUTDOOR UNIT3. Do not run the wires in front of the fixing screw of the
CONNECTION
FOR OUTDOOR UNIT service access panel. If you do so, you cannot remove
the fixing screw.
3.2.1. ELECTRICAL WIRING CONNECTION
� FSN(E)/FXN(E) 3. Do not run the wires in front of the fixing screw of the
FOR OUTDOOR UNIT service access panel. If you do so, you cannot remove
The electrical wiring connection for the outdoor unit is shown RAS-5~22HP
The electrical wiring connection for the outdoor unit the fixing screw.
RAS-5~20HP
below.
�is FSN(E)/FXN(E)
1. shown
Connect below.
the power supply wires to L1, L2, L3 and N (for
1. Connect the power supply wires to L1, L2, L3 and N
The400V\50Hz)
electrical for the
wiring three-phase
connection power
for the source
outdoor uniton the RAS-5~20HP
terminal
is shown board.\50Hz)
(for 380-415V
below. Connectfor the
the three-phase
ground wirespower
to the source
terminals
onthe
in theelectrical
terminal box.
board. Connect the ground wires to the
1. Connect
terminalsthe in power supply box.
the electrical wires to L1, L2, L3 and N
2. (for 380-415V
Connect \50Hz)between
the wires for the three-phase power
the outdoor unit andsource
the
2.on Connect the wires
the terminal between
board. the outdoor
Connect unit and
the2ground the
wires toindoor
the
Electrical box
indoor unit to the terminals 1 and on the terminal board. Earth terminal
unit to theinterminals
terminals 1 andbox.
the electrical 2 on the terminal board.
2. Connect the wires between the outdoor unit and the indoor Electrical box
Earth Wiring
terminalconnection
unit to the terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal board. holes
L1 L2 L3 N 1 2
Wiring connection
holes
� L2
L1 � L3
� N� 1� 2�
Operation wiring
- Between I.Us. and O.Us
- Between O.Us. and O.Us Power supply wiring
- DC5V (non pole)
� � � � � � Operation wiring
- Between O.Us. and O.Us Power supply wiring
- DC5V (non pole)
380-415 V
Supply
Control cable (SV)

PowerSupply
V V
AC400
Power
Power Supply
Control cable (SV)

AC 380-415
AC
Page 3-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
Earth terminal wiring
Make sure that the earth ELECTRICAL WIRING 33/3/3
wiring is connected ELECTRICAL WIRING
Cord clamp
RAS-24~32
RAS-24~30 HP
(fixed on valve stay)
Instructions for wiring and electrical Board
RAS-24~30 HP Instructions for wiring and electrical Board
Hermetically seal the
entry of conduit tube by
using putty or a similar
Power supply wiring
material.
(for water protection)
Operation wiring DC5V (non pole) Transmission Wires
- Between O.Us. and O.Us
Earth terminal wiring
Earthsure
Make terminal
that wiring
the earth
Refrigerant Piping Power Wires
Make issure that the earth
� CAUTION:
wiring connected
wiring is connected
4. Before turning ON the main switch, check the item
Fix the shielded operation wires between the indoor
Cord clamp
Cord on
(fixed clamp
valve stay)
below. If the nominal voltage for the outdoor unit
unit and outdoor unit with a cord band at only one
(fixed on valve stay) is 240V, change the connectors CN1 to CN2 of the
point. You must connect the shielded operation transformers TF1 in the electrical box as shown in
wires to the earth of the indoor unit only. Hermetically
Hermetically
entry
seal the
seal
of conduit theby
tube
figure below.
entry putty
using of conduit tube by
or a similar
4. Before turning
Power supply wiring
Power supply wiring ON the main switch, check thematerial. item
using putty or a similar
material.
below. If wiring
Operation the DC5Vnominal
(non pole)voltage for the outdoor unit
Transmission Wires
Transmission Wires
3
-Operation wiringand
Between I.Us. DC5V
O.Us(non pole)
is 415V,
Betweenchange
--Between I.Us. and
O.Us. and O.Us
O.Usthe connectors CN4 & CN6 to
CN5- Between
& CN7 of the transformers TF1 & TF2 in
O.Us. and O.Us
the electrical box as shown in the figure below.
�
� CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Fix the shielded operation wires between the indoor below. If the nominal voltage for the outdoor unit
Fix the shielded operation wires between the indoor below. If the nominal voltage for the outdoor unit
unit and outdoor unit with a cord band at only one is 240V, change the connectors CN1 to CN2 of the
unit and outdoor unit with a cord band at only one is 240V, change the connectors CN1 to CN2 of the
wires to the earth of the indoor unit only. figure below.
wires to the earth of the indoor unit only. figure below.
is 415V, change the connectors CN4 & CN6 to
is 415V, change the connectors CN4 & CN6 to
CN5 & CN7 of the transformers TF1 & TF2 in
CN5 & CN7 of the transformers TF1 & TF2 in
� FSVNE 3.2.2. SETTING THE DIP SWITCHES
FOR THE OUTDOOR UNIT
The electrical wiring connection for the outdoor unit  Quantity and position of DIP switches
is shown below.
� Quantity and position of DIP switches
FSN(E)/FXN(E)
1. Connect the power supply wires to L1 and L2/ N
(for 220-240V\50Hz) for the single phase power TheFSN(E)/FXN(E)
� PCB in the Outdoor Unit is operating with eight types of
source on the terminal board. Connect the ground DIP
The PCB in and
switches, three types
the Outdoor Unitofispush switches.
operating with eight
wires to the terminals in the electrical box. Position of DIP
types of DIP switches
switches,for
andRAS-5~22FSN(E);
three types of push switches.
RAS-8~12FXN(E)
Position of DIP switches for RAS-5~20FSN(E);
2. Connect the wires between the outdoor unit and the indoor
RAS-8~10FXN(E)
unit to the terminals 1 and 2 onOnlythe for
terminal board.
RAS-14~32FSN/FXN
The electrical L2 FOR THE OUTDOOR UNIT
L1 wiring 1connection
2 for the outdoor unit is shown FOR THE OUTDOOR UNIT
The electrical wiring
below. N connection for the outdoor unit
The electrical wiring connection for the outdoor unit
is shown
1. Connect below.
the power supply wires to L1, L2 and L2/ N (for
is shown below. � Quantity and position of DIP switches
1. 230V/50Hz)
Connect�the � power
� supply
� wires to L1 and L2/ Non the � Quantity and position of DIP switches
1. Connect thefor the single-phase
power supply wires power source
to L1 and L2/ N � FSN(E)/FXN(E)
(for 220-240V
terminal \50Hz)
board.\50Hz) for
Connect the single phase power � FSN(E)/FXN(E)
(for 220-240V for the
the ground wires power
single phase to the terminals
The PCB in the Outdoor Unit is operating with eight
source
in on the terminal
the electrical box. board. Connect the ground
source on the terminal board. Connect the ground The PCB in the Outdoor Unit is operating with eight
wires to the terminals in the electrical box. types of DIP switches, and three types of push switches.
wires to the
2. Connect the terminals in thethe
wires between electrical
outdoor box.
unit and the types of DIP switches, and three types of push switches.
Position of DIP switches for RAS-5~20FSN(E);
2. Connect the wires between the outdoor unit and the indoor Position of DIP switches for RAS-5~20FSN(E);
AC 220-240 V
Power Supply
2. indoor unit
thetowires
the terminals 1 and 2 on unit
the terminal board.
Control cable (SV)
Connect between the outdoor and the indoor RAS-8~10FXN(E)

unit to the terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal board. RAS-8~10FXN(E)
unit to the terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal board.
L2
L1 L2 1 2
L1 N 1 2
N
� � � �
� � � �
3. Do not run the wires in front of the fixing screw of
the service access panel. If you do so, you cannot
remove the fixing screw.
VV
Supply
(SV)
Supply
Supply
(SV)
220-240
220-240
cable
V
cable
230
Power
Power
Power
AC
Control
AC
AC
Control

Page 3-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring

FSN(E)/FXN(E)
� FSN(E)/FXN(E) � DSW2: Capacity setting
Position of DIP switches for RAS-24~32FSN; No setting is required. Before the shipment, each outdoor
Position of DIP switches for RAS-24~30FSN;
RAS-16~32FXN unit is set as shown setting
below.
� RAS-16~30FXN
FSN(E)/FXN(E) � DSW2: Capacity
Position of DIP switches for RAS-24~30FSN; No setting isSetting
Model required. Before the
Model
Setting shipment,
Setting eachSetting
Model outdoor
Setting
Model
RAS-is set as shown
unit RAS-
below. Model RAS-
RAS-16~30FXN Position Position
5FSN ON16FSN 26FSN ON
RAS-5FSN Setting
16FXN RAS-8FSN(E)26FXN Setting
Model Model
RAS-8FXN(E)
Position
1 2 3 4 Position
1 2 3 4
8FSN(E) ON ON
ON18FSN RAS-8FSN(E)28FSN ON
RAS-10FSN(E)
RAS-5FSN RAS-16FSN
8FXN(E 18FXN RAS-8FXN(E)
RAS-10FXN(E) 1 2 3 4 RAS-16FXN 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON ON
10-FSN(E)
RAS-10FSN(E)
RAS-20FSN
ON20FSN
RAS-24FSN 30FSN
RAS-16FSN ON
10-FXN(E)
RAS-10FXN(E)
RAS-20FXN 20FXN RAS-24FXN 30FXN
RAS-16FXN
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
FSVNE
� FSVNE 12FSN(E) ON ON
RAS-20FSN ON22FSN RAS-24FSN 32FSN
RAS-30FSN
12FXN(E) 22FXN
The PCB in the Outdoor Unit is operating with five types RAS-20FXN RAS-24FXN 32FXN
RAS-30FXN 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
� of DIP switches, one slide Switch and three types of
FSVNE 14FSN ON24FSN
push switches. RAS-30FSN
The PCB in the Outdoor Unit is operating with five types 24FXN
DSW3: Height
�RAS-30FXN difference
1 2 3 4
of DIP switches, one slide Switch and three types of
Setting is required
push switches.
� DSW3: Height difference
FSN(E)
Setting is required
FSN(E)
The Outdoor Unit is located higher than
ON
Indoor Unit (0~50m)
The Outdoor Unit is located lower than 1 2
The Outdoor
Indoor Unit is located higher than
Unit (0~20m) ON
Indoor Unit (0~50m)
The Outdoor Unit is located lower than ON
1 2
The Outdoor
Indoor Unit is located lower than
Unit (0~20m)
� NOTE: Indoor Unit (20~40m) 1 2
ON
The mark "�" indicates position of dips switches. The Outdoor Unit is located lower than
� NOTE:
Figures show setting before shipment or after
selection.
Indoor Unit (20~40m)
FXN(E) 1 2
The mark "�" indicates position of dips switches.
Not mark "�" indicates pin position is not affecting FXN(E)
Figures show setting before shipment or after The Outdoor Unit is located higher than
ON
selection. Indoor Unit (0~20m) 1 2
� Not mark "�" indicates pin position is not affecting
CAUTION: The Outdoor Unit is located higher than
The Outdoor Unit is located higher than
ON
ON
Before setting dips switches, firstly turn off power Indoor Unit (0~20m) 1 2
� source and set the position of the dips switches.
CAUTION:
If the switches are set without turning off the power
The Outdoor
Outdoor Unit
Unit is
is located
located lower
higherthan
than
1 2
ON
ON
Before setting dips switches, firstly turn off power The
source, the contents of the setting are invalid. Indoor Unit
Unit (0~20m)
(20~50m)
source and set the position of the dips switches. Indoor 1 2
2
1
If the switches are set without turning off the power ON
� FSN(E)/FXN(E)
source, the contents of the setting are invalid. The Outdoor
The Outdoor Unit
Unit is
is located
located lower
lower than
than ON
Indoor Unit
(0~20m) 1 2
2
� DSW1: Setting the refrigerant cycle number 1
ON
If FSN(E)/FXN(E)
� the H-LINK is used, setting the refrigerant cycle number The Outdoor Unit is located lower than
is
� required. Beforethe
DSW1: Setting therefrigerant
shipment, cycle
all thenumber
setting positions DSW4:
� Indoor Setting
Unit for the test operation and service
(20~40m) 1 2
are OFF. (The refrigerant cycle number is 0). The setting for the test operation and service is required.
If the H-LINK is used, setting the refrigerant cycle number
In the same refrigerant cycle, set the same refrigerant This DIP switch
� DSW4: is for
Setting usedthefor servicing.
test operation and service
is required. Before the shipment, all the setting positions
cycle number for the outdoor unit and for the indoor units
are OFF. (The refrigerant cycle number is 0). The setting for the test operation and service is required.
as shown below. ON
In the same refrigerant cycle, set the same refrigerant This DIP switch is used for servicing.
Setting before the shipment
cycle number for the outdoor unit and for the indoor units 1 2 3 45 6
Cycle No. 0 1 2 3
as shown below. ON
ON
ON ON ON ON Setting
Test thebefore the
cooling shipment
process
Setting
Cycle Position
No. 0 1 2 3 1 2 3 45 6
1 2 3 45 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON
ON ON ON ON ON
CyclePosition
No. 4 5 6 7 Test the
Test the heating
cooling process
process
Setting
1 2 3 45 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 45 6
ON ON ON ON
ON
Setting Position ON
Cycle No. 4 5 6 7 Test the heating process
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Enforced compressor stoppage
1 2 3 45 6
ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 45 6
CyclePosition
Setting No. 8 9 10 11 ON
ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Enforced compressor stoppage
ON ON ON ON Combination of more than 16 indoor units
1 2 3 45 6
Setting
Cycle Position
No. 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 45 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ON
ON
ON ON ON ON Combination of more than 16 indoor units
CyclePosition
No. 12 13 14 15 Operation for Exchange Compressor
Setting 1 2 3 45 6
1 2 3 45 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON ON ON ON ON
Setting
Cycle Position
No. 12 13 14 15 Operation for Exchange Compressor
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 45 6
ON ON ON ON
Setting Position
Page 3-4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
ELECTRICAL WIRING 3/5
� DSW5: Setting for the emergency operation of the � DSW10: Setting for transmitting
compressor The setting for transmitting is required for the cancellation
The setting for the emergency operation of the compressor of end terminal resistance.
is not required. All compressors are running except the
selected compressor. ON
Before the shipment, the No.1 pin
of DSW10 is set at the ON side. 1 2
ON
Setting before the shipment
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
If the quantity of outdoor units in the same
ON
H-LINK is two or more, set the No.1 pin ON
Except compressor Nº1
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
of DSW10 in the 2nd unit to OFF. If only
one outdoor unit is used, no setting is 1 2
ON required.
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
ON If you apply high voltage to the terminals
3
1 and 2 of the TB1, the fuse on the PCB ON
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
is blown out.
If that is the case, first connect the wiring 1 2
ON
Except compressor Nº4 to the TB1. Then, turn on #2.
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
ON
Except compressor Nº5 � FSVNE
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
ON � DSW1: For Test Run
1 2 3 45 6 7 8 ON
ON Setting before shipment
Selection of the input signal 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 45 6 7 8 ON
ON Test Run (Cooling)
Function setting 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
ON
Test Run (Heating)
� DSW6: Piping length setting 1 2 3 4
ON ON
Setting before the shipment and total
Compressor Forced Stop
length < 25m 1 2 1 2 3 4
ON
25m � Total length < 50m � DSW2: Optional Function Setting
1 2
ON ON
50m � Total length < 75m Setting before shipment
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
ON ON
Night-Shift Mode (Low Sound)
75m � Total length
1 2 (OFF: No set; ON: Set) 1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
� DSW7: Power supply setting Cancellation of Outdoor Ambient
Temp. limit (OFF: No set; ON: Set 1 2 3 4 5 6
ON *
Setting before the shipment (380V) ON
1 2 Cancellation of Fan Stop Operation
ON
during Defrost (OFF: No set; ON: Set) 1 2 3 4 5 6
220V
1 2
� DSW3: Capacity (Unit type)
ON
415V Model RAS-3FSVNE RAS-5FSVNE
1 2
ON ON
(*) For RAS-8~12FSNE/FXNE the nominal 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
voltage is 400V.
Setting RAS-4FSVNE
position
ON
1 2 3 4
Page 3-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
� DSW4: Refrigerant Cycle No. Setting � DSW6: Piping Length and High Difference Setting
In the same refrigerant cycle, set the same refrigerant Setting before the shipment and total
ON
cycle No. for the outdoor unit and the indoor units as length < 25m
shown below. 1 2 3
ON
Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 25m � Total length < 50m*
1 2 3
Setting ON ON ON ON ON
position Outdoor unit is higher than the indoor unit
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 (0 ~ 25m) 1 2 3
Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 ON
Outdoor unit is lower than the indoor unit
Setting ON ON ON ON (0 ~ 20m) 1 2 3
position
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ON
Outdoor unit is lower than the indoor unit
Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 11 (20 ~ 25m) 1 2 3
Setting ON ON ON ON * For (4/5) is 75m.
position
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
� Push switch
Unit No. 12 Unit No. 13 Unit No. 14 Unit No. 15
Setting ON ON ON ON Manual Defrost PSW1
position
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 PSW2
To check
PSW3
Set each outdoor unit from No. 0, 1, 2, etc. at site.
(factory set: No. 0)
� SW1: Simple switch
� DSW5: Transmission Setting of End Terminal
Resistance
Before shipment, No. 1 pin of DSW5 is set at the ON Before shipment
ON OFF
side. In the case that the outdoor units quantity in the
same H-link is 2 or more, set No. 1 pin of DSW5 at
the OFF side from the 2nd unit. If only one outdoor
unit is used, no setting is required.
ON
Before shipment
1 2
ON
Cancellation
1 2
Page 3-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
ON 1 and 2 of the TB1, the fuse on the PCB ON
Setting before the shipment (400V) is blown out.
1 2
Electrical wiring
If that is the case, first connect the wiring 1 2
to the TB1. Then, turn on #2.
3.3.
3.5. ELECTRICAL WIRING
ELECTRICAL WIRING FOR
FOR THE
THE INDOOR
INDOOOR UNIT
UNIT
� ATTENTION: � ATTENTION:
– Before turning ON the main switch, check the item – To prevent the screws from falling, you cannot
below. If the nominal voltage for the indoor unit is remove the screws from the terminal box. When you
240V, change the connectors CN of the transformers are fastening the terminal, make sure that you fasten
TF in the electrical box as shown in the figures below. the screw through the hole of the terminal.
CN27 and CN28 in case of RCD and RPK-1.5/2.0FSNM;
Screw
3
Connector for
240V
Connector for
220V
– Make sure that you apply the terminal specification
to the following screws of the terminal box:
M4 screw for the power supply and M3.5 screw
for the operating line.
CN20
CN20 and
and CN21
CN21 in
in case
case of
of RCIM, RPK-FSN1M,
RCI, RCIM, RPI, RPC, RPF(I),
RPK2.5~4.0FSNM
RPK-FSN1M, RPK2.5~4.0FSNM:
Connector for
240V
Connector for
220V
 Note
For RCI, RPI, RPC, RPF(I) the nominal voltage is
230V.
Page 3-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
3.3.1.
3.5.1. ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICALWIRING
WIRINGCONNECTION
CONNECTION
� RCI units
– The electrical wiring connection for the indoor unit is

shown in the following figures. For the intermediate Power Source
connection between the indoor unit and the air panel,
refer to chapter 1.2.
� RCIM Units
– The electrical wiring connection for the indoor unit is
shown in the following figures. For the intermediate
connection between the indoor unit and the air panel,
Power source Wiring
Operating Wiring
refer to chapter 1.3.
Remote Control Switch Cable
Hole for Wiring Connection 30x39

(for Cable) Hole for Wiring Connection Ø 32.5
Hole for Wiring Connection
(for Spare)
(Knock-Out Hole) (Knock-Out Hole)
Power source Wiring
Operating Wiring
– Through the wiring connection hole in the cabinet,
connect the cable of the remote control switch or an
optional extension cable to the connectors on the – Through the wiring connection hole in the cabinet,
printed circuit board inside the electrical box. connect the cable of the remote control switch or an
– Connect the power supply and earth wires to the optional extension cable to the connectors on the
terminals in the electrical box. printed circuit board inside the electrical box.
– Connect the wires between the indoor unit and the – Connect the power supply and earth wires to the
outdoor unit to the terminals in the electrical box. terminals in the electrical box.
– Connect the wires between the indoor unit and the
outdoor unit to the terminals in the electrical box.
Electrical Box
Stopper (Metal)
Power Source Wiring

Transmission Wiring
Screw
Printed Circuit Board (TB2)

Terminal Board
Earth Screw
Terminal Board (TB1)
Transmission Wiring
(between Indoor Unit Printed Circuit Board Power Supply Cable
and Outdoor Unit) Control Cable
Remote Control Switch Cable Remote Control
Switch Cable
Power Source Wiring
Transmission Wiring
(between Indoor Unit and Indoor Unit) Support Plate for Electrical
Wiring
Hold the cables by the support
plate as shown
Cord Clamp
Transmission Wiring
(Outdoor Unit to Indoor Unit
and Indoor Unit to Indoor Unit)
Operation Wiring
In case of group control
operation by using a Remote
Control Switch
Page 3-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
RCIM (cont.) � RCD units

Connector for Auto Swing Motor
The electrical wiring connection for the indoor unit is shown

in the following figures. For the intermediate connection
between the indoor unit and the air panel, refer to
chapter 1.3.

445
Cord Clamp
90
Earth Screw PCB PCB

Transmission Wiring
50
3
Power Source Wiring
Wiring connection hole

(30x39)
Wiring connection hole
(Ø35.5 knockout hole)
- Through the wiring connection hole in the cabinet,

connect the cable of the remote control switch or
an optional extension cable to the connectors on
the printed circuit board inside the electrical box.
- Connect the power supply wires and the ground
Power Source
wire to the terminals in the electrical box.
PCB:Printed Circuit Board
- Connect the wires between the indoor unit and the
outdoor unit to the terminals in the electrical box as
shown below.
Phase connection
Control cable
(shielded twisted pair cable)
Main power
Remote control cable 1N 220-240V\50Hz
Cord Clamp (shielded twisted pair cable)
Transmission Wiring
(Outdoor Unit to Indoor Unit Power source cable
and Indoor Unit to Indoor Unit)
In case of group control

operation by using a Remote
Control Switch
Earth screw
Wiring
Terminal board
Power source
Fan motor cable
Louver motor cable
Page 3-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
� RPC units
RPI-1.5
in the following figures.
RCS PC-P1HE
Optional
Transmission
Knockout hole wires
Connector
for the wirings
Grille Power
wires
RCS PC-2H2
Optional
Cord Clamp Electrical box

Electrical Box Service cover
RCS-PC-P1HE
(optional)
Wiring connection
Transmission holes
cables
Wires
Power supply wires

– Connect the power supply wires and the ground RPI-2.0~6.0
– Connect the wires between the indoor unit and the
� RPI units

– Open the service access panel.
– Cut out the center of the rubber bushing in the wiring
Connector RCS PC-1H(E)
connection hole as shown in the next figures. RCS PC-2H2 optional
optional
connect the cable of an optional remote control Power supply wires
Transmission cables
switch or an optional extension cable to the
Drain hose
connectors on the printed circuit board inside the
electrical box. Liquid piping
– Connect the ground wire to terminal ground wire in

the electrical box.
– Connect the power supply wires L1 and N or L2 and
N in the electrical box. Gas piping
– Connect the transmission wires between the indoor

unit and the outdoor unit to the terminals 1 and 2 in Wiring connection Service access panel for
the electrical box
the electrical box.
– Connect the wires of the remote control switch to RPI-8/10
terminals A and B in the electrical box.
– Tightly clamp the wires with the cord clamp inside the
electrical box.
– To protect the unit from the condensate water and the
Electrical connector
insects, run the cables with the sealing material
(cover plate). Then, seal the wiring connection hole.
Page 3-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring

� RPK
RPKUnits
units The
Thefollowing
followingpicture provides further
figure provides further details
details of
of the
the wiring
wiring
The electrical wiring connection for the indoor unit is shown connection
connectionfor
forRPK-0.8~4.0FSNM
RPK-1.5~4.0FSNMunits:
units:
in the following figures. PCB1 for
indoor unit CN13
- Through the wiring connection hole in the cabinet, Caulking work

connect the cable of an optional remote control Remote control shall be performed
switch (field wiring)
switch or an optional extension cable to the connecting
connectors on the printed circuit board inside the cable
electrical box. 2 wires non-polarity
- Connect the power supply wires and the ground wire
to the terminals in the electrical box.
- Connect the wires between the indoor unit and the
3
Main power operating wires
� NOTE:
If
If you
you are
are using
using PC-P1HE, PC-P5H oror PC-RLH11,
PC-RLH11,
Terminal board (TB) for wiring connections
PC-P1HE,PC-P5H
remove
remove the
the wiring
wiring of
of the
the connector
connector CN25
CN25 for
for The
Thefollowing
followingpicture provides further
figure provides further details
details of
of the
the wiring
wiring
RPK-0.8~2.0
RPK-1.5~2.0 or or CN25
CN25 & & CN12
CN12 for
for RPK-2.5~4.0.
RPK-2.5~4.0. connection
connectionfor
forRPK-1.0/1.5FSN1M
RPK-1.5FSN1M units:units:
Otherwise,
Otherwise, the
the system
system cannot
cannot function.
function.
In case of wireless remote control

� RPK-0.8~2.0FSNM
RPK-1.5~2.0FSNM
Electrical box
Wired
Wireless
Remote control switch

connector cable for PC-
P1HE which connects to
CN13 on PCB1
Power
Terminal board Remote control cable
source wire
(Non polarity)
Fasten cord with clamp
Hole for the right side Power source wire
In case of wired remote control

Operating line
Hole for the piping
and the wiring Hole of electrical box
Screw for ground wire
Remote control switch Wired
Wireless

� RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM
RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM
Electrical box
Operating wires
(to Outdoor Unit)
Remote control cable

Remote control switch (Non polarity)
connector cable for PC-P1HE Power source wire
which connects to CN13 on
PCB1
Power
Terminal board
source wire
Fasten cord with clamp
Hole for the right side
Operating line
Hole for the piping
and the wiring Hole of electrical box
Screw for ground wire Remote control switch
Page 3-11
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
� RPF\RPFI units
3.3.2
3.5.2. SETTING THE DIP SWITCHES
Remove the front panel and the side panel. FOR THE INDOOR UNIT
– The wiring from the left-rear side to the RPF is shown � Quantity and position of the DIP switches
below.
The PCB in the indoor unit operates with DIP switches and
rotary switches.
Wiring
Side The position of the DIP switches and rotary switches for
Wall panel each Indoor Unit is the following:
Front
panel
Electrical
box Opening RCI-FSN1E, RCIM-FSN
(rear)
RSW
– The wiring from the left-rear side to the RPFI is DSW3

shown below.
SW1 DSW5
Wiring DSW7 DSW6

Front panel
Wall
RCD-FSN
Electrical
box
RSW
DSW5 SW1
DSW7
DSW6
– The wiring from the right-rear side is shown below. DSW3
Electrical box
RPC/RPF(I)/RPI1.5~6.0FSNE
� Intermediate cable
� Remote control RSW
switch cable
DSW3 DSW5 DSW6

Power supply cable
Through holes DSW7

SSW
– The wiring connection is shown below.

RPI-8/10FSNE
Terminal board
DSW5
DSW8
DSW7 DSW6
RSW DSW3
Connector
RCS PC-2H2 (optional)
RCS PC-P1HE (optional)
Power supply cable
Transmission cable
RPK-FSNM
DSW3
RSW
DSW5
DSW2
DSW7
Page 3-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
ELECTRICAL WIRING3/13
RPK-FSN1M DSW2: optional functions setting (only RPK FSNM)
No setting is required. Use this switch for setting

DSW5 RSW
RPK-FSN1M the optional
DSW2: functions
optional as shown
functions below.
setting (only RPK FSNM)
DSW3 DSW2
No setting is required. Use this switch forONsetting
DSW5 RSW Factory setting
the optional functions as shown below.
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
DSW3 DSW2 ON
ON
Self-inspection function
Factory setting
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
ON
ON
Room thermostat is used
Self-inspection function
DSW7 1 2 3 45 6 7 8
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
ON
Automatic operation when power ON
3
Room
supplythermostat
is ON is used
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
DSW7 1 2 3 45 6 7 8
� NOTE: Remote On\Off control which uses
Automatic operation when power
pulse signal is available
ON
ON
The mark "�" indicates the position of the DIP supply is ON 1 2 3 45 6 7 8
switches. The figures show the settings before 1 2 3 45 6 7 8
ON
� the shipment.
NOTE: Remote
AutomaticOn\Off control
restart after which
pulse signal is available
poweruses
failure ON
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
The mark "�" indicates the position of the DIP 1 2 3 45 6 7 8
� switches.
CAUTION: The figures show the settings before
DSW3: capacity code setting
ON
the shipment.
Before setting the DIP switches, first turn off the Automatic restart after power failure
power source and set the position of the DIP 1 2 3 45 6 7 8
� switches. If you do not turn off the power source
CAUTION: No setting is required because the DIP switch was set
and you
Before set the
setting theDIP
DIPswitches,
switches,the contents
first turn offof
the before the
DSW3: shipment.
capacity codeUse this DIP switch for setting the
setting
the setting
power sourceareand
invalid.
set the position of the DIP capacity code that corresponds to the horsepower of
switches. If you do not turn off the power source thesetting
No indoor is
unit.
required because the DIP switch was set
before the shipment. Use this DIP switch for setting the
and you set the DIP switches, the contents of HP 0.8
HPcode that corresponds
1.5 1.0
1.8 1.3
2.0 1.5
the setting are invalid. capacity to the horsepower of 2.3
ON ON ON ON
RSW: unit number setting Seting position
the indoor unit.
Setting position
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
The unit number setting is required. Set the unit number HP
HP
HP 1.8
1.5
2.5 2.0
1.8
2.8 2.3
2.0
3.0 2.5
2.3
4.0
ON ON ON ON
of all the indoor unitssetting
respectively and serially, according
RSW: unit number Seting position
ON ON ON ON
Setting position
to the setting position that is shown in the table below. Setting position 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
HP 2.8 3.0 3.5 4.0
Numbers must start fromis"1" for every 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
The unit number setting required. Setoutdoor
the unitunit.
number HP 2.5 2.8 3.0 4.0
of all the indoor units respectively and serially, according HP 5.0 6.0 8.0 10
ON ON ON ON
to the setting position that is shown in the table below. Seting position
Setting position ON ON ON ON
Setting position 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Numbers must start from "1" for every outdoor
Setting position unit.
HP
HP
15.0
2 3 4
5.0
16.0
2 3 4
6.0
18.0
2 3 4
8.0
1 10
2 3 4
10
Set by inserting
Seting position
a screwdriver ON ON ON ON
into the groove.
DSW5:
Setting setting the refrigerant cycle number
position
Setting position
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Set by inserting Setting the refrigerant cycle number is required.
Master 1st unit 2nd unit 3rd unit 4th aunit 5th unit 6th unit
screwdriver 7th unit Before the shipment, all the setting positions
unit into the groove.
DSW5: setting the refrigerant cycle numberare OFF.
(The refrigerant cycle number is 0).
Setting the refrigerant cycle number is required.
Master 1st unit 2nd unit 3rd unit 4th unit 5th unit 6th unit 7th unit BeforeCycle
theNo.
shipment, all0 the setting1 positions2are OFF. 3
unit (The refrigerant cycleONnumber is ON0). ON ON
8th unit 9th unit 10th unit 11th unit 12th unit 13th unit 14th unit 15th unit
Setting position
Cycle No. 1 20 3 4 1 21 3 4 1 22 3 4 1 23 3 4
Cycle No. ON 4 ON 5 ON 6 ON 7
8th unit 9th unit 10th unit 11th unit 12th unit 13th unit 14th unit 15th unit
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Setting position
Cycle No. 1 24 3 4 1 25 3 4 1 26 3 4 1 27 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Setting position
Cycle No. 1 28 3 4 1 29 3 4 1 10
2 3 4 1 11
2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Setting position
Cycle No. 1 12
2 3 4 1 13
2 3 4 1 14
2 3 4 1 15
2 3 4
ON ON ON ON
Setting position
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Page 3-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Setting the refrigerant cycle number is required.
Electrical all
Before the shipment, wiring
the setting positions are OFF. No setting is required. Before the
(The refrigerant cycle
ELECTRICAL number is 0).
WIRING shipment, all the setting positions are ON OFF
3/14 OFF.
Cycle No. 0 1 2 3 If you apply high voltage to the terminals
setting ON ON codeON ON 1 and 2Notof the TB1, theonly)
fuse on the
Setting
DSW6: the unit model DSW8: used (RCI
PCB1(M) is blown out.
position
(Not available for RCI
1 2 3 4
and RPK)
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 If that is the case, first correct the wiring to ON OFF
ON
No Cycle No. is required.
setting 4 Use this5 switch for6 setting the
7 the TB1.
Setting Then,shipment.
before set the ON pin as shown
model code thatON beside. 1 2
ON
corresponds to the ON
indoor unit ON
type.
Setting
position
Indoor unit 1 model
2 3 4 code
1 2 3 4 1 2 DSW6
3 4 1 2 3 4
setting DSW8: Not used (RCI only)
SSW: remote control system
Cycle No. 8 9 10 ON 11
RCD-1.0~6.0
RCD-1.5~5.0 ON
ON ON ON 1 2 ON Setting before shipment.
Setting 3 4
PC-P1HE
New
1 2
Old
position 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
RPC-2.0~6.0
Before shipment.
RPC-2.0~6.0
Cycle No. 12 13 14 1 2 3 415 SSW: remote control
PC2H2 system
ON (Refer to the DSW7 settings)
RPI-0.8~1.5 ON ON ON ON
Setting
RPI-1.5
PC-P1HE
New Old
position 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 Before shipment.
ON
RPI-2.0~6.0
RPI-2.0~6.0 PC2H2
DSW6: setting the unit model code 1 2 3 4 (Refer to the DSW7 settings)
(Not available for RCI and RPK) ON
RPI-8.0/10
RPI-8/10 KPI
No setting is required. Use this switch for setting
1 2 3the
4
model code that corresponds to the indoor unitON type. DSW2, DSW4 and DSW6 do not have any function.
RPF(I)-1.0~2.5
RPF(I)-1.5~2.5
Indoor unit model code DSW6 setting
1 2 3 4
ECONOFRESH KIT
ON
RCD-1.0~5.0
DSW7: setting the fuse recover and the remote control You need to set the DIP switches at the RPI PCB.
selection 1 2 3 4
ON RPI-5HP RPI-5HP + Econofresh kit
RPC-2.0~6.0
No setting is required. Before the DIP switch installation DIP switch setting
shipment, all the setting positions 1 2 3 4
ON
factory setting
are OFF. PC-P1HE: Remote ON
1 2 ON ON
RPI-0.8~1.5
control switch selected. DSW6
1 2 3 4
If you apply high voltage to the Except Only 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
RPK ONRPK-FSNM
RPI-2.0~6.0
terminals 1 and 2 of the TB1, the
1 2 3ON
4
� CAUTION:
fuse on the PCB1(M) is blown out.
ON
If that is the case, first correct the ON
RPF(I)-1.0~2.5
wiring to the TB1. Then, set the 1 2 1 2 Turn OFF all power sources before setting the DIP
ON pin as shown beside. 1 2 3 4 switches. Without turning OFF, the contens of setting
PC-2H2: Remote control switch will be invalid.
DSW7:
selectedsetting
(exceptthe fuse
RCI, RCDrecover
and and the remote control
ON You cannot use the enthalphy sensor together with
selection
RPK). 1 2
CO2 gas sensor, in the same Econofresh kit.
(See also SSW)
No setting is required. Before the
ON
shipment, all the setting positions
are
DSW7: OFF.Fuse
PC-P1HE: Remote
Recover control
(RPK-FSN1M only) 1 2
switch selected.
If you apply high voltage to the Except Only
terminals
No setting 1 and 2 of theBefore
is required. TB1, the
the RPK RPK-FSNM
fuse on the all
shipment, PCB1(M) is blown
the setting out. are
positions ON OFF
ON ON
If that is the case, first correct the
OFF.
wiring to the TB1. Then, set the
If you apply high voltage to the terminals 1 2 1 2
ON pin 2asofshown
1 and beside.
the TB1, the fuse on the
PCB1(M) is blown out.
PC-2H2:
If that is Remote
the case,control switchthe wiring to
first correct ON
ON OFF
selected
the TB1.(except RCI,
Then, set theRCD
ON and RPK).
pin as shown
(See also SSW) 1 2
beside.
Page 3-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
KPI units (Total Heat Exchanger)

The electrical wiring connection for the KPI unit is shown
- Through the wiring connection hole in the cabinet,
- Connect the power supply wires and the ground
- Connect the wires between the KPI unit and the
indoor unit to the terminals in the electrical box.
Controlled network system (CS-Net, H-Link)

POWER
3
SUPPLY
INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT TOTAL HEAT EXCHANGER
POWER
SUPPLY
Total Heat Exchanger + PC-P1HE

POWER POWER
SUPPLY SUPPLY
TOTAL HEAT EXCHANGER TOTAL HEAT EXCHANGER
INDOOR UNIT
Page 3-15
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
Simultaneous operation (Set-Free + Total Heat Exchanger)

POWER
SUPPLY
Simultaneous operation (Set-Free + Total Heat Exchanger)

Example for PC-2H2
POWER
SUPPLY
Page 3-16
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
ECONOFRESH KIT RPI PCB

RPI PCB Connector
Connector
The electrical wiring connection for the Econofresh unit
CN17
is shown in the following figures. AS
AS motor
Motor
- Mount the outdoor thermistor at a position near the DSW6
outdoor air inlet. THM4
CN3
- Pay attention to the place of the outdoor thermistor.
Econofresh
Econo FreshKit
Kit
The outdoor thermistor must not be in contact with Enthalpy
Enthalpysensor
Sensor
direct sunshine or rainwater. GasSensor
Gas sensor
Outdoor thermistor
Thermistor
CH-UNIT
The electrical wiring connection for the CH-unit is shown in the following figures.
No
�
Description
Electrical Box Cover
3
� Fixing Screw
� Printed circuit Board
� Noise Filter
� Cord Clamp
� Terminal Board
� Operating Line
� Power Supply Line
NOTE:
At the terminal board 2,
the connectors 1 and 2
are for H Link system,
and the connectors 3
and 4 are for going to
the Indoor Unit from the
CH-Box setting of dip
switches
- Turn OFF the main power switch and take off the 3.3.2. SETTING THE DIP SWITCHES
electrical box cover of CH unit. FOR THE INDOOR UNIT
- Cut out the center of the rubber bushing in the wiring
connection hole, as shown below. � Quantity and position of the DIP switches
- Connect the power supply and earth wires to the
terminals in the electrical box. The PCB in the indoor unit operates with five types of
DIP switches and rotary switches.
- Connect the wires of the operating line to the terminals The position of the DIP switches is the following:
in the electrical box.
- Tightly clamp the wires using the cord clamp inside the Indoor unit PCB
electrical box.
- Fix the electrical box cover after wiring work. RCD
No Description
� Rubber Bushing
� Cut Inside
RPI, RPF, RPFI, RPC
Page 3-17
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
3.4. COMMON WIRING

– Connect the operating line to the units in the same
3.4.1. ELECTRICAL WIRING BETWEEN THE refrigerant cycle. (You must connect the refrigerant
INDOOR UNIT AND THE OUTDOOR UNIT line to the indoor units that have the refrigerant piping
connected to the same outdoor unit). If you connect
each refrigerant piping and the operating line to the
� CAUTION: units of different refrigerant cycle, an abnormal
operation may occur.
– Use the shielded twisted pair cable or the shielded
pair cable for the transmission cables between the – If there are multiple outdoor units that are connected
indoor unit and the outdoor unit. Connect the shielded to one power supply wire, open a hole near the
part to the earth screw in the electrical box of the connection hole for the power supply wiring.
indoor unit as shown below. Also use these cables The recommended breaker sizes are shown in the table
for the operation wiring between one indoor unit of electrical data and recommended wiring, breaker
and another indoor unit (H-LINK connection). size\1 O.U.
– If a conduit tube for the field wiring is not used, fix
Shielded part the rubber bushes on the panel with adhesive.
– All the field wiring and the equipment must comply
with the local codes and the international codes.
Transmission – Make sure that the power source voltage is correct.
cables
– An incorrect wiring may cause a breakdown of the
transformer PSC-5HR or the units
Power supply
– Especially, DO NOT connect the power source to
wires the terminal board for transmission.
– DO NOT install the H-LINK wires along the power
supply wire, other signal wires, and others. If you
install the H-LINK wires along those wires, there may
be a malfunction due to the electrical noise. If you
need to install the H-LINK wires near those wires,
provide a distance of 15cm or more. Or alternatively,
insert the wires into the steel pipe and ground one
end of the pipe.
Earth screw
–
– Connect
Connect the
the electrical cables between
electrical cables between the
the indoor
indoor unit
unit Unit
Name of DIP
Mark
Setting before
Function
switch the shipment
and the outdoor
and the outdoor unit
unit as
as shown
shown in
in the
the wiring
wiring diagram.
diagram.
For setting the refrigerant cycle
–
– Make
Make sure that the
sure that the terminals
terminals for for the
the power
power supply
supply ON address of the outdoor unit.
Refrigerant Make sure that the setting of
wiring and the terminals for the intermediate wires cycle
DSW1 the DSW1 does not overlap the
between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit coincide 1 2 3 4 setting of other outdoor units in
the same H-Link system.
correctly. For
correctly. For AC
AC 400V,
380-415V, the terminals
the terminals for theforpower
the
power supply
supply wiring
wiring are “L1”are
to "L1"
“L1”,to“L2”"L1",
to "L2"
“L2”,to "L2",
“L3” to "L3" For matching the impedance
of the transmission circuit. Set
to "L3"
“L3” and and
“N”"N" to "N"
to “N” of each
of each terminal
terminal board.
board. ForFor
ACAC the DSW10 according to the
Outdoor unit
220-240V,
230V, the terminals
the terminals for theforpower
the power supply
supply wiringwiring
are
quantity of the outdoor units in
the H-Link system. Setting of
are "L1" to "L1" and "N" to "N". For the operating line,
“L1” to “L1” and “N” to “N”. For the operating line, the DSW10-1P the end terminal resistance.
the terminals for the intermediate wires are "1 and 2"
terminals for the intermediate wires are “1 and 2” to “1 End terminal
(FSN(E)/ ON Before the shipment, the No.1
to "1 and 2" of each terminal board for DC 5V. FXN(E)) pin of DSW10 is set at the ON
and 2” of each
Otherwise, youterminal
may damage boardsome for DC 5V. Otherwise,
components.
resistance
DSW5-1P 1 2 side.
you may damage some components. FSVNE If the quantity of indoor units
– When you are installing the electrical wiring, follow in the same H-LINK is two or
– When youcodes
the local are installing the electrical
and the local wiring, follow the
regulations. more, set the No.1 pin of
local codes and the local regulations.
– Connect the operation wiring to the units in the same
DSW10 in the second unit to
OFF. If only one outdoor unit is
used, no setting is required.
refrigerant
– Connect cycle.
the (You should
operation wiring to connect
the unitstheinrefrigerant
the same
piping and cycle.
refrigerant the control
(You wiring
shouldtoconnect
the same theindoor
refrigerant
units). and
piping If you
theconnect
controlthe refrigerant
wiring to the samepipingindoor
and theunits). ON
For setting the refrigerant cycle
address of the indoor unit.
control wiring to the units in the different
If you connect the refrigerant piping and the control refrigerant Refrigerant
DSW5 Set the DSW5 according to the
cycle
cycle, an abnormal operation may occur. 1 2 3 4 address of the outdoor unit in
wiring to the units in the different refrigerant cycle, an the same refrigerant cycle.
– abnormal
You must operation
connect the shielded
occur. part to earth only in
Indoor unit
may
one cable side. For setting the address of the
– You must connect the shielded part to earth only in indoor unit. Make sure that
– Do not use more than three cores for the operation 0
one cable side. the setting of the RSW does
wiring (H-LINK). Select the core sizes according to Address of
RSW
not overlap the setting of
– Do
the not use more
national than three cores for the operation
regulations. indoor unit other indoor units in the same
refrigerant cycle. (If you do
wiring (H-LINK). Select the core sizes according to the not set the RSW, the automatic
national regulations. address function is performed).
� ATTENTION:
Pay attention to the connection of the operating line.
An incorrect connection may cause the failure of the
PCB.
Page 3-18
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
� FSN(E)
Models: RAS-5FSN
RAS-8FSN(E)
RAS-10FSN(E)
RAS-12FSN(E)
RAS-14FSN
Models: RAS-5FSN
RAS-16FSN
RAS-8FSN(E)
RAS-18FSN
RAS-10FSN(E)
RAS-20FSN No.0 system No.1 system No.2 system
RAS-16FSN
RAS-22FSN outdoor unit outdoor unit outdoor unit
RAS-20FSN
RAS-24FSN
RAS-24FSN
RAS-26FSN
RAS-30FSN
RAS-28FSN
RAS-30FSN
RAS-32FSN
Earth leakage
breaker
Operating line
(shielded twisted pair cable or
twisted cable)
3
Main switch DC5V (non-pole transmission,
H-LINK system)
Indoor unit Indoor unit
No.1 system
indoor units
Remote Remote
control control
switch switch
: Terminal board
No.0
No.0System
system Indoor Units
indoor units
: Printed circuit board Max. 8 Units per Refrigerant Cycle 5HP
: Field wiring Maximum 8 units per refrigerant cycle (5HP)
Max. 13 Units per Refrigerant Cycle 8HP
: Field wiring Maximum
Max. 16 Units13
perunits per refrigerant
Refrigerant cycle (8HP)
Cycle 10~14HP
: Field-supplied
Maximum
Max. 20 Units16
Cycle 16~20HP
Maximum
Max. 27 Units20
Refrigerant cycle (16-20HP)
Cycle 24HP
: Optional accessory
Maximum
Max. 29 Units27
Cycle 26HP
Max. 31 Units32
Maximum per Refrigerant
units Cycle 28HP
per refrigerant cycle (30HP)
Max. 32 Units per Refrigerant Cycle 30/32HP
Page 3-19
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
� FXN(E)
Models: RAS-8FXN(E)
RAS-10FXN(E)
Models: RAS-8FXN(E)
RAS-12FXN(E) No.0 System No.1 System No.2 System
RAS-10FXN(E)
RAS-16FXN Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit
RAS-16FXN
RAS-20FXN
RAS-20FXN
RAS-22FXN
RAS-24FXN
RAS-24FXN
RAS-26FXN
RAS-30FXN
RAS-30FXN
RAS-32FXN
Earth Leakage
Breaker
No.1 System
No.0 Group No.0 Group CH Unit
Earth Leakage CH Unit CH Unit
Breaker
Operating Line (*)
Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
Remote Control Remote Control Remote Control

No.1 System
: Terminal Board Switch Switch Switch
Indoor Units
: Printed Circuit Board
: Field Wiring
: Field Wiring No.0System
No.0 system indoor
Indoor units
Units
Max. 13 Units13
Maximum per Refrigerant
units Cycle 8HP
per refrigerant cycle (8HP)
: Field-Supplied Max. 16 Units16
per Refrigerant Cycle 12HP
Maximum units per refrigerant cycle (10HP)
: Optional Accessory Max. 20 Units20
per Refrigerant Cycle 16~20HP
Maximum units per refrigerant cycle (16-20HP)
Maximum 27 units per refrigerant cycle (24HP)
Maximum
Max. 32 Units32
Refrigeant cycle (30HP)
Cycle 30/32HP
(*) Operating Line (shielded twisted pair cable or twisted cable).

DC5V (Non-pole transmission, H-Link system).
Page 3-20
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
� FSVNE
Electrical wiring
No.0 System
� FSVNE Outdoor Unit
Operating Line (*) Ope
No.0 System No.0 System

Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit
Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit

Operating Line (*) Operating Line (*)
Remote Remote
Control Control
Switch Switch
Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Indoor Unit

(Max.4 units per refrigerant Cycle) 3FSVNE (Max.4 units pe
3
Remote Remote Remote Remote
Control Control Control Control
Switch Switch Switch Switch
: Terminal Board
(Max.4 units per refrigerant: Printed
Cycle) 3FSVNE (Max.4 units per refrigerant Cycle) 3FSVNE
Circuit Board (Max.6 units per refrigerant Cycle) 4FSVNE
(Max.6 units per refrigerant: Field
Cycle) 4FSVNE
Wiring
(Max.7 units per refrigerant: Field
Cycle) 5FSVNE (Max.7 units per refrigerant Cycle) 5FSVNE
Wiring
: Field-Supplied
: Optional Accessory
: Terminal Board
ELB: Earth Leakage Breaker
: Printed Circuit Board
CB: Circuit Breaker
: Field Wiring
(*) Operating Line (shielded twisted pair cable or twisted cable).
: Field Wiring
DC5V (Non-pole transmission, H-Link system).
: Field-Supplied
: Optional Accessory
Model Power Source Max. Current Power Source Cable Size Transmitting Cable Size
ELB: Earth Leakage Breaker EN60 335-1 (1) MLFC (2) EN60 335-1 (1) MLFC (2)
CB: Circuit Breaker Power Source Cable Size Tran
All Indoor Units Model
5 A
(*) Operating Line (shielded twisted pair cable or twisted cable). 0.75Power
mm² Source 0.5 mm² Max. Current
RPI-8/10 FSNE transmission, H-Link system).6A 1.5 mm² 0.75 mm²
EN60 335-1 � MLFC � EN60
DC5V (Non-pole All indoor units 220-240V/1�/50Hz 3 A 0.75 mm² 0.5 mm²
RAS-3FSVNE 230V/1f/50Hz 25 A 4. mm² 3.5 mm²
RAS-4FSVNE RAS-3FSVNE
32 A 4. mm² 3.5 mm² 25 A 4.0 mm² 3.5 mm²
RAS-5FSVNE RAS-4FSVNE
32 A 220-240V/1�/50Hz
4. mm² 3.5 mm² 32 A 6.0 mm² 3.5 mm²
RAS-5FSN RAS-5FSVNE
10 A 2.5 mm² 2 mm² 32 A 6.0 mm² 3.5 mm²
RAS-8FSN(E) 14 A 2.5 mm²Power Source Cable Size
2 mm² Transmission Cable Size
Model Power Source RAS-5FSN Max. Current 8A 2.5 mm² 0.75 mm²
EN60 335-1 � 2 mm² MLFC 14 � A EN60 335-1 MLFC �
RAS-10FSN(E) 18 A
RAS-8FSN(E) 2.5 mm² 2.5� mm² 0.75 mm²
All indoor units
RAS-12FSN(E) 220-240V/1�/50Hz
21 A 3 A 2.5 mm² 0.75 mm²2 mm² 0.5 mm²
RAS-3FSVNE RAS-10FSN(E) 25 A 4 mm² 4.0 mm² 3.5 mm²3.5 mm² 17 A 2.5 mm² 1.25 mm²
RAS-14FSN 30 A
RAS-16FSN
RAS-4FSVNE RAS-16FSN
33
220-240V/1�/50Hz A 32 A 6 mm² 6.0 mm² 3.5 mm² 31
3.5 mm² A 6 mm² 3.5 mm²
RAS-18FSN
RAS-5FSVNE RAS-20FSN
32 A 32 A 6 mm² 6.0 mm² 4 mm² 3.5 mm² 34 A - 3.5 mm² 0.
RAS-20FSN
RAS-5FSN RAS-24FSN
37 A
8A 6 mm²
2.5 mm² 3.5 mm² 46
0.75 mm² A - 5.5 mm²
RAS-22FSN 42 A
RAS-30FSN 10 mm²
380-415V/3�/50Hz3.5 mm² 64 A - 8 mm²
RAS-8FSN(E)
RAS-24FSN 50 A 14 A 10 mm² 2.5 mm² 5.5 mm²0.75 mm²
RAS-10FSN(E) RAS-8FXN(E) 17 A 10 mm² 2.5 mm² 5.5 mm²1.25 mm² 14 A 0.75 mm² 2.5 mm²0.5 mm² 0.75 mm²
RAS-26FSN 54 A
RAS-16FSN RAS-10FXN(E) 31 A 10 mm² 6 mm² 5.5 mm²3.5 mm² 18 A 2.5 mm² 1.25 mm²
RAS-28FSN 59 A
RAS-30FSN
RAS-20FSN 400V/3f/50Hz RAS-16FXN(E)
67 A 34 A - - 8 mm² 3.5 mm² 33 A 6 mm² 3.5 mm²
0.75mm² 0.5mm²
RAS-32FSN
RAS-24FSN RAS-20FXN(E)
70 A 46 A - - 8 mm² 5.5 mm² 37 A - 3.5 mm²
RAS-8FXN(E)
RAS-30FSN RAS-24FXN(E)
14 A
380-415V/3�/50Hz 64 A 2.5 mm² - 2 mm²
8 mm²50 A - 5.5 mm²
RAS-10FXN(E) 18 A
RAS-30FXN(E) 2.5 mm² 2 mm² 66 A - 8 mm²
RAS-8FXN(E)
RAS-12FXN(E) 18 A 14 A 2.5 mm² 2.5 mm² 2 mm² 0.75 mm²
RAS-10FXN(E)
RAS-16FXN The33above
A 18 Amarked
wire sizes 6 mm² with2.5� mm² 3.5 mm²1.25
are selected mm²
at the maximum current of the unit according to the
RAS-16FXN(E)
RAS-18FXN 32 A335-1.
EN60 33 A 6 mm² 6 mm² 3.5 mm²3.5 mm²
RAS-20FXN
RAS-20FXN(E) The37above
A 6 mm² with � -are selected
37 Amarked
wire sizes 3.5 mm²3.5 mm²maximum current of the unit according to the
at the
RAS-22FXN
RAS-24FXN(E) 42 A
Retardant A 10manufactured
Polyflex50Wire) mm² - by3.5 mm²5.5Cable
HITACHI mm² Ltd. Japan.
RAS-24FXN 50 A
RAS-30FXN(E) 66 A 10 mm² - 5.5 mm²
8 mm²
RAS-26FXN 54 A 10 mm² 5.5 mm²
RAS-30FXN
The above wire sizes marked with � are 66selected
A -
at the maximum 8 mm²
current of the unit according to the European Standard,
RAS-32FXN
EN60 335-1. 70 A - 8 mm²
Theabove
The abovewirewire
sizessizes marked
marked with
with (1) are � areat selected
selected at current
the maximum the maximum current of
of the unit according theEuropean
to the unit according
Standard, to the335-1.
EN60 wire, MLFC (Flame
Retardant
The Polyflex
above wire Wire)
sizes marked manufactured
with (2) are selected by HITACHI
at the maximum Cable Ltd.
current of the Japan.
unit according to the wire, MLFC (Flame Retardant Polyflex Wire) manufactured by
HITACHI Cable Ltd. Japan.
Page 3-21
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
If the power cables are connected in series, add each unit maximum current and select according to the next table.
Selection according to Selection according to MLFC

EN60 335-1 (at cable Temp. Of 60 °C)
Wire Size Wire Size
Current i (A) Current i (A)
(mm²) (mm²)
I�6 0.75 I � 15 0.5
6 < i � 10 1 15 � i � 18 0.75
10 < i � 16 1.5 18 � i � 24 1.25
16 < i � 25 2.5 24 � i � 34 2
25 < i � 32 4 34 � i � 47 3.5
32 < i � 40 6 47 � i � 62 5.5
40 < i � 63 10 62 � i � 78 8
63 < i � 78 � i � 112 14
112 � i � 147 22
� In case that current exceeds 63 A do not connect cables in series
� NOTE:
Follow local codes and regulations when selecting field wires, Circuit breakers and Earth Leakage breakers
Use wires that are not lighter than the ordinary polychloroprene sheathed flexible cord (code designation H05RN-F)
The earth cable size complied with local code: IEC 245, No. 571.
� Main switches protection

Select the main switches according to the next table
Select the main switches according to the next table: CB ELB
Model Power Source Max. Current
(A) no. poles/A/mA
All indoor units
Model 220-240V/1�/50Hz
Power Source 3A 5
Max. Current2/40/30 CB ELB
RAS-3FSVNE 25 A 25 2/40/30 (A) no. poles/A/mA
RAS-4FSVNE 220-240V/1�/50Hz 32 A 32 2/40/30
All Indoor Units 5A 6
RAS-5FSVNE 230V/1f/50Hz 32 A 32 2/40/30 2/40/30
RPI-8/10FSNE
RAS-5FSN 8A 610
A 10
RAS-5FSN
RAS-8FSN(E) 14 A 10
15A 10
RAS-10FSN(E)
RAS-8FSN(E) 18 A 20A
14 4/40/30 15
RAS-16FSN
RAS-10FSN(E) 33 A 40A
18 20
RAS-20FSN 37 A 40
RAS-12FSN(E) 21 A 25
RAS-24FSN 50 A 60 4/63/30 4/40/30
RAS-14FSN
RAS-30FSN 380-415V/3�/50Hz 66 A 30
75A 4/100/30
RAS-16FSN
RAS-8FXN(E) 14 A 33
15A
40
RAS-10FXN(E)
RAS-18FSN 18 A 20A
32 4/40/30
RAS-16FXN 33 A 40
RAS-20FSN 37 A
RAS-20FXN 37 A 40
RAS-22FSN 42 A
RAS-24FXN 50 A 60 4/63/30
RAS-24FSN
RAS-30FXN 66 A 50
75A 4/100/30 60 4/63/100
RAS-26FSN 54 A
ELB: Earth Leakage Breaker
RAS-28FSN 59 A
CB: Circuit Breaker
RAS-30FSN 400V/3f/50Hz 66 A 75 4/100/100
RAS-32FSN 67 A
RAS-8FXN(E) 14 A 15
RAS-10FXN(E) 18 A
20
RAS-12FXN(E) 18 A
4/40/30
RAS-16FXN 33 A
RAS-18FXN 32 A 40
RAS-20FXN 37 A
RAS-22FXN 42 A
RAS-24FXN 50 A 60 4/63/100
RAS-26FXN 54 A
RAS-30FXN 66 A
75 4/100/100
RAS-32FXN 70 A
ELB: Earthleakage breaker

CB: Circuit breaker
Page 3-22
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
� Specifications:
3.4.2. H-LINK SYSTEM
– Transmission Wire: 2-Wire
– Polarity of Transmission Wire: Non-Polar Wire
� NOTE: – Maximum Outdoor Units To Be Connected: 16 Units
The H-LINK system cannot be applied to the cycle
per H-LINK system.
with the old unit models or with the units that have
an old transmission. – Maximum Indoor Units To Be Connected: 2 Units per
cycle and 128Units per H-LINK system (in case of all
SET FREE Series).
� Application
– Maximum Wiring Length: Total 1000m (including
The new H-LINK wiring system requires only two
CS-NET).
transmission cables that connect each indoor unit and
the outdoor unit for up to 16 refrigerant cycles. This – Recommended Cable: Twist Shielded Pair Cable
new wiring system also requires the connect wires for or Shielded pair cable over 0.75mm
all the indoor units and all the outdoor units in series. – Voltage: DC5V
You can apply this H-LINK system to the following
3
models.
� System Example of H-LINK
Indoor unit
Indoor unit Outdoor unit unit
Outdoor There are two typical cases of using H-LINK system;
RCI RCI RAS-5~30FSN(E)
RAS-5~32FSN(E) 1 Using H-LINK System with Air Conditioners only, and
RDC RCD RAS-8~30FXN(E)
RAS-8~32FXN(E)
RPI RPI RAS-3~5FSVN(E)
RAS-3~5FSVNE 2 Using H-LINK System with Air Conditioners with
RPK RPK Central Control Device, and the system examples
RPF RPF are as shown
RPFI RPFI
RPC RPC � Using H-Link connection with Air Conditioners
only
� Features
The H-LINK has the following features and specifications: - Line connection with all the units
Features:
The total wiring length is remarkably reduced.
Only one (1) connection is required for the wiring Outdoor units
between the indoor unit and outdoor unit.
Easy wiring connection to the central controllers
Example of H-LINK System:

Indoor units
Do not
Outdoor
install wiring
unit
in a loop
Transmission
cables
Refrigerant piping
Indoor units
: One refrigerant cycle

CS-NET
Page 3-23
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
- Line connection for each floor - In case that H-LINK is not applied when you are
installing the electrical wiring
Outdoor units
Outdoor
unit
Indoor units
Indoor units
CS-NET
� NOTE:
The maximum quantity of units to be connected
is 16 outdoor units and 128 indoor units.
Do not make a wiring in a loop.
- Connection with one main line and with the branch � DIP Switch setting of indoor PCB and Outdoor PCB.
lines for the units It is required to set DIP switches of every indoor unit and
outdoor unit.
Outdoor units
� Example of the settings of the DIP switches
Cycle No. 0 Cycle No. 1 Cycle No. 2
Setting
Indoor units before the Cancellation Cancellation
shipment
� Using H-Link connection for conditioning

with central control device
- In case that H-LINK is applied when electrical wiring
is performed.
Outdoor unit
Mark Description
�
 DSW10 (end terminal resistance)
�
 DSW1 (refrigerant cycle)
Indoor units �
 Outdoor unit
�
 Indoor units
�
 DSW5 (refrigerant cycle)
�
 RSW (address of indoor unit)
CS-NET
Page 3-24
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
� Internal layout
3.4.3. PSC-5HR
Terminal board
� Installation of PSC-5HR
Transfor
for transmission \ Ring core
Refer to "Installation & Operation Manual of PSC-5HR H-LINK
CN
DSW1
\
CN
(PMML 0094A)" for details concerning the safety to the unit to
be connected 1 2 Power source
CN
summary and the installation work. DSW2
\ terminal board
CN3 PCN
� DSW \
H-LINK
1
2 1 Power
to the unit to
be connected \ source
Control PCB
Terminal board
\ Earth screw AC220V
for transmission or AC240V
� Setting the DIP switches
3
� If there is an outdoor unit in the drived H-LINK, set the
end terminal resistance at one of the outdoor units.
� If there is a HARC-40E system, set the end terminal
� Electrical wiring resistance at the HARC-40E.
DSW3 (HARC-40E)
� SYSTEM
ON
Outdoor unit 1 2
P\C Control station
H-LINK 1
Indoor unit � If there is a central control device (PSC-5S), set the
H-LINK H-LINK 2
relay H-LINK 3 end terminal resistance at the PSC-5S.
H-LINK
relay
DSW3 (PSC-5S)
ON
H-LINK H-LINK
relay relay
1 2
� If there are only indoor units, set the end terminal

H-LINK 4 H-LINK 5 resistance at the H-LINK relay. If the H-LINK relay is
connected to CN1, set the No.1 pin of DSW1 at the
ON side. If the H-LINK relay is connected to CN2,
� NOTE: set the No.1 pin of DSW2 at the ON side.
You can install a maximum of Four H-LINK relays DSW1 DSW2
in one system.
ON ON
Make sure that the quantity of connections is the
following: 1 2 1 2
Ref. System Quantity: within 16
(CN1 Side) (CN2 Side)
Indoor Unit Quantity: within 128
Total Length of each divided H-LINK: up to 1000m
If the H-LINK is divided into five blocks as shown � If the H-LINK relays are directly connected to each
beside, set the end terminal resistance in each other, set the end terminal resistance at one of the
H-LINK relay.(For details, refer to the DIP switches H-LINK relays. If the H-LINK relay is connected to
below). CN1, set the No.1 pin of DSW1 at the ON side. If the
H-LINK relay is connected to CN2, set the No.1 pin
of DSW2 at the ON side.
Page 3-25
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
� Fuse recovery setting � Test run

If the fuse is blown out, you can recover by setting the
No. 2 pin of DSW1 (at CN1 side) at the ON side or by After completing the installation of the H-LINK, you need
setting the No. 2 pin of DSW2 (at CN2 side) at the ON to perform the test run of the PSC-5HR. Check the
side. following items:
DSW1 DSW2 - Connection conditions of the air conditioning systems:
ON ON - Check the model code and the quantity of connected

units by means of the remote control switch.
1 2 1 2 - If control equipment is used, perform the
connection check at the central control device.
� Setting the main\sub relays - Transmission alarm:
- Set the main\sub relays by means of the No.1 pin - Perform the RUN\STOP procedure by means of the
of DSW3 on the control PCB as shown below. (The central control device or the remote control switch.
No.2 pin, the No.3 pin and the No.4 pin are not used). - Make sure that no transmission alarm, such as
- The setting of the main\sub relays depends on the alarm numbers 03, 32, 35, 60, 61 and 256, occurs.
number of H-LINK relays. Set the main\sub relays The alarm numbers 60, 61 and 256 correspond
as follows: only to the central control device.
- If the number of H-LINK relays is only one, then - Activation state:
choose Main. (No setting is required). - Monitor the activation state of the LED on the
- If the number of H-LINK relays is more than one, Control PCB.
then choose Main for one H-LINK relay and - Make sure that the LED1 does not stay ON due
choose Sub for the other H-LINK relays. to the continuous collision. The LED can stay ON
due to the following causes: Incorrect setting of the
DSW3 DSW3 master H-LINK relay, incorrect setting of the slave
ON ON H-LINK relay, incorrect setting of the end terminal
resistance, presence of wiring loops, and others.
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Make sure that setting is correctly performed. Also,
Main Sub make sure that the wiring is correctly installed.
- Make sure that the LED2, the LED3 and the LED4
� ATTENTION: are flickering. If those LED are not flickering, check
If you do not set this pin correctly, there may appear the transmission state on the LED of the PCB in
communication alarms. the other unit. If the above LED on the H-LINK
relay is not flickering despite the sending signal
from the other unit, check the wiring connection,
the setting of the end terminal resistance, the
types of wires and the wiring length. If the fuse
in the transmission circuit is blown out due to the
incorrect wiring, refer to "Fuse Recovery Setting"
in item 4.
Page 3-26
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical wiring
3.5 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

This sub-chapter shows the Electrical Wiring Diagram for each unit of the new Hitachi Set Free FSN(E)/FXN(E)/FSVNE Series.
Unit model Page number

RCI-1.0~6.0FSN1E 3-28
RCIM-1.5~2.5FSN 3-29
RCD-1.0~3.0FSN 3-30
3
RCD-4.0~6.0FSN 3-31
RPC-2.0~6.0FSNE 3-32
RPI-0.8~1.5FSN1E 3-33
RPI-2.0~6.0FSN1E 3-34
RPI-8.0/10.0FSNE 3-35
RPK-1.0/1.5FSN1M 3-36
RPK-0.8/2.0FSNM 3-37
RPK-2.5/4.0FSNM 3-38
RPF(I)-1.0~2.5FSNE 3-39
CH-UNIT (4.0/8.0/12.0) 3-40
KPI 3-41
RAS-5FSN 3-42
RAS-8/10/12FSNE 3-43
RAS-14/16FSN 3-44
RAS-18/20/22FSN 3-45
RAS-24~32FSN 3-46
RAS-8~12FXN(E) 3-47
RAS-16~22FXN 3-48
RAS-24~32FXN 3-49
RAS-3FSVNE 3-50
RAS-4/5FSVNE 3-51
Page 3-27
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical Wiring
Electrical wiringDiagram
diagram Models:
For for RCI-1.5~6.0FSN1E
models: RCI-1.0~6.0FSN1E
9/2
Noise
Filter
Air Panel
Supply
Circuit
Main
Switch
ELECTRICAL
Page 3-28
Electrical wiring
*Field connection
Inlet Outlet Liquid Gas
Alarm
WIRING DIAGRAMS
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Operation Line
DC 5V
Remote Control
Switch (PC-P1HE)
* Field Connection
Mark Name Remarks

CA Capacitor
CN Connector
DSW 3 Unit Capacity Code On PCB1
DSW5 Refrigerant Cycle No. On PCB1
DSW7 Fuse recover/ Remote Contro Selector On PCB1
EFR1, Fuse On PCB2
EF1, Fuse On PCB1
FS Float Switch
MD Motor for Drain Discharge Mechanism
MIF Motor for Indoor Fan
MS Motor for Automatic Swing Louver
MV Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve
LED1~4 Alarm code On PCB1,2
Service Connector for Drain Discharge Mechanism
Printed Circuit Board NF Noise Filter
Electrical Control Box of Indoor Unit PCB1,2,3 Printed Circuit Board
PCN 1~203 Connector on PCB On PCB
RSW Indoor Unit No. Settings On PCB1
TB1,2 Terminal Board
TF Transformer
THM1 Inlet Air Thermistor
THM2 Outlet Air Thermistor
THM3 Liquid Pipe Thermistor
THM5 Gas Pipe Thermistor
YH2 Relay On PCB1
� Terminals
—X— Close-end Connector
Optional Parts
– ·· – ·· – Field Wiring
––––– Earth Wiring
––––––– Factory Wiring
Field Connection
*
� NOTE: All the field wiring equipment must comply with local codes
ELECTRICAL
Electrical WIRING
wiring DIAGRAM
diagram forFOR MODELS:
models: RCIM-1.5/2.0FSN1E
RCIM-1.5~2.5FSN
Page 3-29
Electrical wiring
Connection For 240 V

Connection For 220 V
Alarm
Service Connector for

Drain Discharge Mechanism
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Operation Line
DC 5V
Field Connection Remote Control Switch
PC-P1H
Mark Name
CN1~202 Connector on PCB
CN27~38 Connector (on PCB 1)
DSW 3~8 Dip Switch for setting (on PCB 2)
EFR1, EFS1 Fuse (on PCB 2)
EF1,EF2 Fuse
FS Float Switch
PCB1,2,3 Printed Circuit Board
PCN 1~203 Connector on PCB
RSW Rotary Switch
TF Transformer
THM3 Freeze Protection Thermistor
YH2 Relay on PCB
� Terminals
Optional Parts
ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS
Field Connection
*
9/3
3
Electrical Wiring
Electrical wiringDiagram For Models:
diagram RCD-1.5~3.0FSN
for models: RCD-1.0~3.0FSN
Connector for 220V
9/4
Connector for 240V

Field Connection
ELECTRICAL
Page 3-30
Electrical wiring
Alarm
WIRING DIAGRAMS
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Remote
Control
Switch
(PC-P1HE)
Field Connection
Operating
Line DC5V
Mark Name Remarks

CA Capacitor for indoor fan
CN Connector
Printed Circuit Board DSW5 Refrigerant Cycle No. On PCB1
DSW6 Model code On PCB1
DSW7 Fuse recover/ Remote Controller Selector On PCB1
EFR1, Fuse On PCB2
EF1, Fuse On PCB1
FS Float Switch
ITI Internal thermostat for indoor fan motor
NF Noise Filter
Service Connector for
TF Transformer
Drain Diacharge Mechanism
YH2 Relay On PCB1
� Terminals
Optional Parts
Field Connection
*
Electrical
Electricalwiring Diagram For
Wiring diagram forModels:
models:RCD-4.0/5.0FSN
RCD-4.0~6.0FSN
Connector for 220V
Connector for 240V

Field Connection
Page 3-31
Electrical wiring
Alarm
Printed Circuit Board
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Remote
Control
Switch
Field Connection
Operating
Line DC5V
Mark Name Remarks

CA Capacitor for indoor fan
CN Connector
Service Connector for Drain
Diacharge Mechanism
DSW6 Model code On PCB1
DSW7 Fuse recover/ Remote Controller Selector On PCB1
EFR1, Fuse On PCB2
EF1, Fuse On PCB1
FS Float Switch
ITI Internal thermostat for indoor fan motor
NF Noise Filter
TF Transformer
YH2 Relay On PCB1
� Terminals

Optional Parts
Field Connection
9/5
3
Electrical Wiring
diagram RPC-2.0~6.0FSNE
for models: RPC-2.0~6.0FSNE
9/6
PCB Sockets location
Taps Control Power Source

Louver Sensor
For Communication
Page 3-32
Electrical wiring
Indoor-Outdoor.
For RCS PC-P1HE
INPUT OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2
HIGH VOLTAGE
for RCS
Main Switch PC-2H2

Mark Name Remarks
CA Capacitor for Indoor Fan
CN Connector
DSW3 Unit Capacity Code On PCB
DSW5 Refrigerant Cycle No. On PCB
DSW6 Unit Code On PCB
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
DSW7 Fuse Recover/ Remote Controller Selector On PCB
EFR1,EFS1,EF1 Fuse On PCB
EHW(H2) Electric Heater for Condensate Air Protection
FS Float Switch
ITI Internal Thermostat for Indoor Fan Motor
Main Switch MV Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve
LED1~3 Alarm Code On PCB
PCB Printed Circuit Board
RCS Remote Control Switch Optional Part
RSW Indoor Unit No. Settings On PCB
SA Surge Absorber
SSW Slide Switch On PCB
TB Terminal Board
TF Transformer
THM1 Inlet Air Thermistor On PCB
THM2 Outlet Air Thermistor On PCB
THM3 Liquid Pipe Thermistor On PCB
THM5 Gas Pipe Thermistor On PCB
YH2 Relay for HI Fan Motor Tap DC Coil
Electrical Control Box of Indoor Unit (for 2.0, 2.5 and 3.0 HP) YME Relay for ME Fan Motor Tap DC Coil
YLO Relay for LO Fan Motor Tap DC Coil
YSLO Relay for SLO Fan Motor Tap DC Coil
� Terminals
·X· Field Supplied
-–-–-– Earth Wiring
Electrical Control Box of Indoor Unit (for 4.0 to 6.0 HP)
ELECTRICAL
Electrical WIRING
wiring DIAGRAM
diagram FOR MODEL:
for models: RPI-1.5FSNE
RPI-0.8~1.5FSN1E
PCB
socketslocation
Page 3-33
Electrical wiring
Louver Sensor Taps Control Power Supply

For Communication
For communication
Indoor-Outdoor.
Indoor-Outdoor.
For RCS
ForPC-P1HE
RCS-PC-P1HE
Input Output1 Output2

RCS
forFor RCS High Voltage
Main Main
Switch switch PC-2H2
PC-2H2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Mark Name Remarks
CN Connector
Main FS Float Switch
Main switch ITI Internal Thermostat for Indoor Fan Motor
Switch
TB Terminal Board
TF Transformer
Electrical control box of Indoor unit
Electrical Control Box of Indoor Unit THM2 Outlet Air Thermistor On PCB
YME Relay for ME Fan Motor Tap DC Coil
� Terminals
9/7
3
Electrical Wiring
diagram RPI-2.0~6.0FSNE
for models: RPI-2.0~6.0FSN1E
9/8

ELECTRICAL
Louver Sensor Power Supply

For Communication
Page 3-34
Electrical wiring
Indoor-Outdoor.
For RCS PC-P1H
for RCS High Voltage

PC-2H2
Main
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Switch
Mark Name Remarks
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
CN Connector
Main DSW5 Refrigerant Cycle No. On PCB
Switch
FS Float Switch
ITI Internal Thermostat for Indoor Fan Motor
TB Terminal Board
TF Transformer
Electrical Control Box of Indoor Unit THM5 Gas Pipe Thermistor On PCB
Standard Static
Pressure YH2 Relay for HI Fan Motor Tap DC Coil
� Terminals
Electrical Wiring
diagram RPI-8.0/10.0FSNE
for models: RPI-8.0/10.0FSNE
Air Air Liquid Gas

inlet Outlet Pipe Pipe
Page 3-35
Electrical wiring
Alarm
Main
Switch
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Mark Name Remarks
AR1 Auxiliary Relay
CN 20~n Connector
EF2,EFR1,EFS1 Fuse On PCB
FS Float Switch
Main ITI Internal Thermostat for Indoor Fan Motor
Switch (Option) MD Motor for Drain Discharge Mechanism Option
TB Terminal Board
TF Transformer
LSP Connector
HSP Connector THM1 Inlet Air Thermistor On PCB
(factory supplied)
THM3 Freeze Protection On PCB
Electrical Control Box for THM4 Liquid Pipe Thermistor
PCB Sockets Location Indoor Unit THM5 Gas Pipe Thermistor On PCB
YH2 Relay for Drain Motor DC Coil
Y52H Relay for Electric Heater DC Coil
� Terminals

9/9
3
Electrical Wiring
Electrical wiringDiagram For Model:
diagram RPK-1.5FSN1M
for models: RPK-1.0/1.5FSN1M
Service Connector
9/10
Inlet Outlet Freeze Protection Gas
Page 3-36
Electrical wiring
Remote Operating
Control Line DC5V
Switch
(RCS)
Wireless Receiver Port
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
PC-P1HE
(set SW1 to Wired)
Mark Name Remarks

CN Connector
DSW2 Optional functions On PCB2
DSW3 Unit Capacity Code On PCB2
EF1, EF2 Fuse
PCB Sockets Location MIF Motor for Indoor Fan
PCB1,2,3,4 Printed Circuit Board
PSW301 Switch for emergency operation On PCB3
SW1 Wired RCS / Wireless RCS (Remote Controller Switch) On PCB3
TB1,2 Terminal board
THM3 Freeze Protection Thermistor
� Terminals
Optional Parts
Field Connection
*
Electrical Wiring
diagram RPK-1.5~2.0FSNM
for models: RPK-0.8/2.0FSNM
Connector for 240V
Connector for 220V Inlet Outlet Liquid Gas
Page 3-37
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Remote
Control
Switch
Operating
Electrical Control Box Line DC5V
Mark Name Remarks
Field Connection
C Capacitor
CN Connector
DSW2 Optional functions
DSW3 Unit Capacity Code On PCB1(M)
Wireless Receiver Part DSW5 Refrigerant Cycle No. On PCB1(M)
EF1, EF2, Fuse On PCB(P)
Printed Circuit Board MS Motor for Automatic Swing Louver
LED1~3 Alarm code On PCB3
PCB1(P),1(M) Printed Circuit Board
PCN Connector on PCB
PSW301 Switch for emergency operation
RSW Indoor Unit No. Settings On PCB1(M)
TF Transformer
TB Terminal board
YH2 Relay On PCB1(M)
� Terminals
Optional Parts
Field Connection
*
9/11
3
Electrical Wiring
Electrical wiring Diagram
diagram Models:
For for RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM
models: RPK-2.5/4.0FSNM Operating
Line DC5V
9/12
High-Voltage
Page 3-38
Electrical wiring
Supply Circuit
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Remote Control
Switch
PCB Sockets Location
Wireless Receiver Port
PC-P1HE (Option)
Mark Name Remarks

C Capacitor
CN Connector
DSW2 Optional functions
DSW3 Unit Capacity Code On PCB1(M)
DSW5 Refrigerant Cycle No. On PCB1(M)
EF1, EF2, Fuse On PCB(P)
LED1~3 Alarm code On PCB3
PCB1(P),1(M),2, Printed Circuit Board
PCN Connector on PCB
PSW301 Switch for emergency operation
RSW Indoor Unit No. Settings On PCB1(M)
TF Transformer
TB1 Terminal board
YH2 Relay On PCB1(M)
� Terminals
Optional Parts
Field Connection
*
Electrical
Electrical Wiring
wiring diagram
Diagramfor Models: RPF(I)-1.5~2.5FSNE
Formodels: RPF(I)-1.0~2.5FSNE
Electrical Control Box of Indoor Unit
for Communication
2 wire RCS (PC-P1H)
Page 3-39
Electrical wiring
Main Switch
for RCS
PC-2H2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Mark Name Remarks
Main Switch CN Connector
DSW6 Unit Models Code On PCB
RSW Indoor Unit no. Setting On PCB
ITI Internal Thermostst for Indoor Fan Motor
LD1~3 Alarm Code On PCB
MV Expansion valve On PCB
Printed Circuit Board
SSW Slide Switch
Taps Control Power Source TB Terminal Board
Louver Sensor THM2 Outlet Air Thermistor On PCB
TF Transformer
YH1 Relay for Hi Fan Motor Tap DC Coil
HIGH VOLTAGE � Terminals
·X· Field Connection
9/13
3
ELECTRICAL
Electrical WIRING
wiring DIAGRAM
diagram forFOR CH-UNIT(4.0/8.0/12.0)
models: CH-UNIT (4.0/8.0/12.0) 7/12
to Outdoor Unit
or the other
Changeover
Operating Line Unit
DC5V
to Indoor Unit
Page 3-40
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Arrangement of Solenoid Valve (Top View) Mark Name Remarks
Location of Main Parts PCB Sockets Location
CN Connector
EF Fuse 1A
NF Noise Filter
SVD1~SVS2 Solenoid Valve AC220-240V
TF Transformer
� Terminals
Electrical Control Box – ·· – ·· – Field Wiring
ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR KPI
Electrical wiring diagram for models: KPI
Connector for 240 V
Connector for 220 V
Page 3-41
Electrical wiring
Inlet Outlet
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Supply for Motor Exhaust for Motor
Printed Circuit Board Mark Name Remarks

CN Connector
DSW6 Unit Models Code On PCB
RSW Indoor Unit no. Setting On PCB
ITI Internal Thermostst for Indoor Fan Motor
LD1~3 Alarm Code On PCB
MIF1,2 Motor for Indoor Fan
GM Motor (bypass damper)
lLS Magnet for gas by pass damper
PCB1,2 Printed Circuit Board
SSW Slide Switch
TB Terminal Board
TF Transformer

YH1 Relay for Hi Fan Motor Tap DC Coil
� Terminals
7/13

3
ELECTRICAL
Electrical WIRING
wiring DIAGRAM
diagram FOR
for MODEL:
model: RAS-5FSN
RAS-5FSN
Main Main
Switch Fuse
7/14
Connector for 240V

Connector for 220V
Operating Line to
Indoor Unit
Ambient Discharge Evaporation Pipe
Gas
Page 3-42
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Mark Name
Right Side
C1 Capacitor
C1~ 3 Capacitor
Electrical Box CH1 Cranckcase Heater
CMC1 Contactor for Compressor Motor
CN, PCN Connector
DCL Reactor
Elecrical Control Box of Outdoor Unit DSW1~10 Dip Switch on PCB
Location of Main Parts:
EF1,2,13 Fuse
FANM Fan Module
Front Side
ISPM Inverter Module
The interior of the Electrical Control Box Front Side LED Light Emitting Diode
MC1 Motor for Compressor
MOF1 Motor for Outdoor Fan
MV1 Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve
NF1~12 Noise Filter
PCB1 Printed Circuit Board
Pd,s Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure
PSH1 Pressure Switch for Protection
PSW1~3 Push Switch on PCB1
R1,2 Resistor
RVR2 Reversing Valve Relay
SVA Solenoid Valve for Hot Gas Bypass
TF1 Transformer
THM7~10 Thermistor
Y Auxiliary Relay on PCB1
Z Surge Absorber
� Terminals
�· Field Supplied
� NOTE: All the field wiring equipment must comply with local codes ––––––– Factory Wiring
Electrical Wiring
diagram RAS-8/10/12HRNE
for model: RAS-8/10/12FSNE
Main Main
Switch Fuse
Operating Line
to Indoor Unit RAS-10/12FSNE
RAS-10HP Only only
Ambient
Discharge Evaporation
Gas Pipe
Page 3-43
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Mark Name
C1 Capacitor
Right Side CB1~ 3 Capacitor
CH1, 2 Cranckcase Heater
CMC1, 2 Contactor for Compressor Motor
CN, PCN Connector
DCL Reactor
Electrical Box DSW1~10 Dip Switch on PCB1
EF1~13 Fuse
Location of Main Parts: FANM Fan Module
Elecrical Control Box of Outdoor Unit
LED Light Emitting Diode
Front Side
MC1~ 2 Motor for Compressor
Front Side The interior of the Electrical Control Box MV1,B Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve
NF1~12 Noise Filter
PSH1, 2 Pressure Switch for Protection
PSW1~ 3 Push Switch on PCB1
R1,2 Resistor
RVR1, 2 Reversing Valve Relay
SVA, F, G Solenoid Valve
TF Transformer
THM7~13 Thermistor
Z Surge Absorber
� Terminals
RAS-10/12FSNE
RAS-10HP Only only —X— Close-end Connector
9/17
3
ELECTRICAL
Electrical WIRING
wiring DIAGRAM
diagram forFOR
models: RAS-16FSN
MODEL:RAS-14/16FSN
Main Main
Switch Fuse
7/16
Operating Line to
Indoor Unit
Connector for 220V
Ambient Discharge Evaporation Discharge
Connector for 240V Gas Pipe Gas
Page 3-44
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Mark Name
Right Side C1~5 Capacitor
CB1~ 3 Capacitor
CH1~3 Cranckcase Heater
CMC1~3 Contactor for Compressor Motor
Electrical Box CN, PCN Connector
DCL Reactor
DSW1~10 Dip Switch on PCB1
EF1~13 Fuse
FANM Fan Module
Location of Main Parts: ISPN Inverter Module
Elecrical Control Box of Outdoor Unit MC1~3 Motor for Compressor
Front Side MOF1 Motor for Outdoor Fan
The interior of the Electrical Control Box
MV1,2, B Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve
NF1~12 Noise Filter
PSH1~3 Pressure Switch for Protection
R1,2 Resistor
RVR 2 Reversing Valve Relay
TB1, 2 Terminal Board
TF Transformer
THM7~12 Thermistor
Z1 Surge Absorber
� Terminals
� Field Supplied
Electrical WIRING
ELECTRICALwiring DIAGRAM
diagram FOR
for models: RAS-20FSN
MODEL:RAS-18/20/22FSN
Main Main
Switch Fuse
Operating Line to
Connector for 220V Indoor Unit
Ambient Discharge Evaporation Discharge

Connector for 240V Gas
Gas Pipe
to CT2 to CT3 to CT4
Page 3-45
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical Control Box of Outdoor Unit Mark Name
Right Side C1 Capacitor
Front Side
CB1~ 3 Capacitor
CN, PCN Connector
CT2~4 Current Transformer
Electrical Box DCL Reactor
EF1~13 Fuse
ITO1 Internal Thermostat for O.U. motor
FANM Fan Module
ISPN Inverter Module
Location of the main parts MC1~4 Motor for Compressor
Front Side MOF1,2 Motor for Outdoor Fan
The interior of the MV1,2, B Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve
Electrical Control Box NF1~12 Noise Filter
R1,2 Resistor
RVR 1,2 Reversing Valve Relay
TF Transformer
THM7~13 Thermistor
Z Surge Absorber
� Terminals
7/17
�· Field Supplied
3
ELECTRICAL
Electrical WIRING
wiring DIAGRAM
diagram forFOR MODELS:
models: RAS-24/30FSN
RAS-24~32FSN
Main Main
Switch Fuse
7/18
Operating Line to RAS-30/32FSN

(RAS-30FSN only)
Connector for 220V
Indoor Unit Ambient Evaporation Discharge Discharge
Connector for 240V Pipe Gas Gas
Page 3-46
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
RAS-30/32FSN
(RAS-30FSN only)
(RAS-30FSN only)
RAS-30/32FSN
RAS-30/32FSN
(RAS-30FSN only)
Electrical Control Box of Outdoor Unit
Front Side ( For Inverter) RAS-30/32FSN Mark Name

(RAS-30FSN only)
C1~5 Capacitor
CB1~ 3 Capacitor
Right Side CH1~6 Cranckcase Heater
CN, PCN Connector
DCL Reactor
EF1~13 Fuse
Electrical Box ITO1 Internal Thermostat for O.U. Fan Motor
ISPN Inverter Module
Location of the main parts LED Light Emitting Diode
MC1~6 Motor for Compressor
Front Side RAS-30/32FSN MOF1,2 Motor for Outdoor Fan
(*)Ras-30FSN only
MV1,2,3,4, Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve
NF1~12 Noise Filter
Front side (for Contactor) PSH1~6 Pressure Switch for Protection
R1,2 Resistor
TF1 Transformer
THM7~16 Thermistor
Z Surge Absorber
� Terminals
� Field Supplied
Electrical wiring diagram for models: RAS-8~12FXN(E)
Operating line to
Indoor Unit
Discharge Evaporation
Ambient gas pipe
Page 3-47
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Electrical control box of Outdoor Unit
Mark Name
C1 Capacitor
Location of the main parts Front Side CB1~3 Capacitor
CH1,2CMC1~2 Canckcase heater
Right Side CN, PCN Connector
CT2 Current transformer
DCL Reactor
DSW1~10 Dip switch on PCB
EF1~13 Fuse
Electrical box FANM Fan module
ISPM Inverter module
MC1.2 Motor for compressor
MOF2 Motor for outdoor fan
Front Side MV1,2B Micro-Computer control expansion valve
NF1~12 Noise filter
PCB1 Printed circuit board
The interior of the electrical control box PSH1,2 Pressure Switch for Protection
R1,2 Resistor
SVA, B,C,F, Solenoid Valve
TF1 Transformer
THM7~11 Thermistor
Z Surge Absorber
 Terminals
-- Close-end Connector
 Field Supplied
_.._.._.._.._.._.. Field Wiring
________ Earth Wiring
____________
Factory wiring
 NOTE: All the field wiring equipment must comply with local codes
3
ELECTRICAL
Electrical wiring
WIRINGdiagram
DIAGRAMfor
FORmodels: RAS-16/20FXN
MODELS:RAS-16~22FXN
Main Main
Switch Fuse
Operating Line to
7/20
Connector for 220V

Indoor Unit Discharge Evaporation
Ambient Discharge Evaporation
Connector for 240V Gas Pipe
Gas Pipe
Page 3-48
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Mark Name
C1,CA1 Capacitor
Electrical Control Box of Outdoor Unit Right Side CB1~ 3 Capacitor
Front Side CMC1~4 Contactor for Compressor Motor
CN, PCN,CE Connector
Location of the main parts CT2~4 Current Transformer
DCL Reactor
EF1~13 Fuse
Front Side FANM Fan Module
ITO1 Internal Thermostat for Outdoor Fan Motor
MOF1,2 Motor for Outdoor Fan
MV1~3,B Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve
NF1~14 Noise Filter
The Interior of the Electrical Control Box PSW1~3 Push Switch on PCB1
R1,2 Resistor
SVA,B,C,D,E,F Solenoid Valve
TF1 Transformer
THM7~15 Thermistor
Z Surge Absorber
� Terminals
� Field Supplied
(*) RAS-20/22FXN
(*) RAS-20FXN Only ––––––– Factory Wiring
Electrical
ELECTRICALwiring
WIRINGdiagram
DIAGRAMfor
FORmodels: RAS-24/30FXN
MODELS:RAS-24~32FXN
Main Main
Switch Fuse
Operating Line to
Indoor Unit
Connector for 220V Ambient Discharge Evaporation Discharge Evaporation
Gas Pipe Gas Pipe
Connector for 240V
Page 3-49
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Mark Name
C1~5,,CA1 Capacitor
CB1~ 3 Capacitor
Electrical Control Box of Outdoor Unit CMC1~6 Contactor for Compressor Motor
Right Side CN, PCN, Connector
CT2~6 Current Transformer
DCL Reactor
Front Side (for Inverter) DSW1~10 Dip Switch on PCB1
EF1~13 Fuse
FANM Fan Module
Electrical Box ITO1 Internal Thermostat for Outdoor Fan Motor
Location of the main parts ISPM Inverter Module
LED1~3 Light Emitting Diode
MOF1,2 Motor for Outdoor Fan
MV1~3,B Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve
NF1~14 Noise Filter
R1,2 Resistor
SVA,B,C,D,E,F Solenoid Valve
TB1~4 Terminal Board
Front Side (for Contactor) TF1 Transformer
THM7~16 Thermistor
Z Surge Absorber
� Terminals
� Field Supplied

7/21
(*) RAS-30/32FXN
(*) RAS-30FXN Only
3
Electrical wiring diagram for models: RAS-3FSVNE
THM7 THM8 THM9 Pd Ps

(Ambient) (Evap. pipe) (Disch. gas) (Disch. (Suction
Pressure) Pressure)
Main
switch
()
Page 3-50
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Mark Name
C1, 2 Capacitor
CB Capacitor
CH1, 2 r Crankcase Heate
CMC Contactor for Compressor Motor
DCL Reactor
EF1 Fuse
ISPM Inverter System Power Module
MC Motor for Compressor
NF1~5, 7, 8 Noise Filter
Location of the main parts Pd, Ps Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure
PSH High Pressure Switch for Protection
RS Resistor for Starting
RVR Reversing Valve Relay
SVA Solenoid Valve
Electrical control box of the Outdoor Unit SW1 Switch
TF1 Transformer
THM7~9 Thermistor
ZNR Surge Absorber
 Terminals
 Field Supplied
_.._.._.._.._.._.. Field Wiring
____________ Factory wiring
Electrical wiring diagram for models: RAS-4/5FSVNE
THM7 THM8 THM9 THM10 Pd Ps

(Ambient) (Evap. pipe) (Disch. gas) (Suction) (Disch. (Suction
Pressure) Pressure)
Main
switch
Page 3-51
()
Electrical wiring
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Mark Name
C1, 2 Capacitor
CB Capacitor
CH1, 2 r Crankcase Heate
CMC Contactor for Compressor Motor
DCL 1,2 Reactor
EF1 Fuse
ISPM Inverter System Power Module
MC Motor for Compressor
MOF1 ,2 Motor for Outdoor Fan
MV1,2 Micro-Computer Control Expansion Valve
Location of the main parts NF1~5 Noise Filter
Pd, Ps Sensor for Refrigerant Pressure
PSH High Pressure Switch for Protection
RS Resistor for Starting
RVR Reversing Valve Relay
SVA, B Solenoid Valve
SW1 Switch
TF1 Transformer
Electrical control box of the Outdoor Unit THM7~10 Thermistor
ZNR Surge Absorber
 Terminals
 Field Supplied
_.._.._.._.._.._.. Field Wiring
____________ Factory wiring
3
installation
4. Remote control switch installation
This chapter describes the procedures that you must follow to install the optional remote control switches that work with the
Set-Free FSN(E)/FXN(E)/FSVNE outdoor units and the full range of Hitachi indoor units.
CONTENTS
4 INSTALLATION OF THE OPTIONAL REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH ________________ 4-1

4.1. Installation of the Remote Control Switch <PC-P1HE> ___________________________ 4-3
4.1.1. Before the Installation ____________________________________________________ 4-3
4.1.2. Installation Area _________________________________________________________ 4-3
4.1.3. Installation Procedure ____________________________________________________ 4-4
4.1.4. Electrical Wiring ________________________________________________________ 4-5
4
4.2. Installation of the Remote Control Switch (Core-Function) <PC-P5H> _______________ 4-6
4.2.1. Before the installation ____________________________________________________ 4-6
4.2.2. Installation area ________________________________________________________ 4-6
4.2.3. Installation procedures ___________________________________________________ 4-6
4.3. Installation of the Central Station <PSC-5S> __________________________________ 4-9
4.3.1. Accessories ___________________________________________________________ 4-9
4.3.2. Installation Area _________________________________________________________ 4-9
4.3.3. Installation Procedure ____________________________________________________ 4-9
4.3.4. Electrical Wiring _______________________________________________________ 4-10
4.3.5. Input/Output Function ___________________________________________________ 4-14
4.3.6. Option Setting _________________________________________________________ 4-16
4.3.7. Initialization of the Central Station __________________________________________ 4-17
4.4. Installation of the 7-Day Timer <PSC-5T> ___________________________________ 4-18
4.4.1. Accessories __________________________________________________________ 4-18
4.4.2. Installation Area _______________________________________________________ 4-18
4.4.3. Installation Procedure ___________________________________________________ 4-18
4.4.5. Setting the Dip Switches _________________________________________________ 4-21
4.5. Installation of the Receiver Kit <PC-RLH8> __________________________________ 4-22
4.5.1. Installation of the Wireless Receiver Kit _____________________________________ 4-22
4.6. Installation of the Receiver Kit <PC-RLH9> ___________________________________ 4-24
4.7. Installation of the external Receiver Kit <PC-RLH11> ___________________________ 4-25
4.8. Installation of the Receiver Kit <PC-RLH13> _________________________________ 4-26
Page 4-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
installation OF THE OPTIONAL REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
4/2 INSTALLATION
� DANGER: � CAUTION:
– DO NOT pour water into the remote control switch. – DO NOT use the multi-core wire for the electrical
These products are equipped with electrical wiring. If you use the multi-core wire, some signals of
components. If you pour water into these products, one system will transfer to the other system and the
you may cause a serious electrical shock. signals will interfere with each other. This will cause
– If your hands are wet, DO NOT operate the switches. a malfunction.
You may cause an electrical shock. – DO NOT use thin-shielded cable such as the CPEVS.
– If the protection devices function often or if the These cables have a high electrostatic capacity and
operation switches do not function well, turn OFF can make the transmission signal dull. Also, if you
the main power source. Then, contact your HITACHI use long cables, transmission errors may occur.
distributor or your HITACHI dealer. – DO NOT run any transmission cable and any
– If you find any other abnormal operations, stop the signal cable along the power supply wire
system and turn OFF the main power source. Then, (220-240V, 380-415V).
contact your HITACHI distributor or your HITACHI – DO NOT run any transmission cable and any signal
dealer. cable along other transmission cables and other signal
cables.
� WARNING: If you need to run all these cables along, keep a
distance of more than 30cm between each cable.
– DO NOT perform the installation work and the
electrical wiring connection. Alternatively, insert the cables for each transmission
system into the metal conduit tube and ground one
– If the repair work, the maintenance work or other end of the conduit tube.
service work is required, contact your HITACHI
distributor or your HITACHI dealer.
� Location of the remote control switch
– DO NOT modify the electrical wiring. You may cause
serious accidents. 1. With the customer’s acceptance, select a suitable
handling place and determine the installation place for
the remote control switch.
� CAUTION: 2. If the installation includes a remote control thermostat,
– DO NOT install the remote control switch and the
cable in the following places: select the installation place according to the following
considerations:
– Places where there is oil vapor and the oil is
dispersed. – A place where the average room temperature can be
detected.
– Places that are near hot springs (in a sulfuric
environment). – A place that is out of the reach of children.
– Places where the generation of flammable gas, the – A place where the thermostat is not directly exposed
flowing of flammable gas, the leaking of flammable to the sun.
gas or the existence of flammable gas is detected. – A place where there are no heat sources nearby.
– Places that are near the sea (in a salty – A place where the outdoor air that is caused by the
environment). opening and the closing of doors does not affect the
– Places in an acid environment or an alkaline thermostat.
environment. – A place where the air from the air conditioning system
– Places within the reach of children. is not directly discharged.
– Places where the air from the air conditioning – If you are installing the wireless remote control onto
system is directly discharged. the wall, keep a distance of more than 30cm from the
power supply wire.
– DO NOT install the indoor unit, the outdoor unit,
the remote control switch and the cable within
approximately three meters from strong electromagnetic
radiators, such as those that are used in medical � NOTE:
equipment. – To extend the 2-core connector cable between the
– If you install the remote control switch in a place where units for the simultaneous operation of multiple
there is electromagnetic radiation, shield the remote units, use the field-supplied control cable or the
control switch and the cable as follows: cover the optional extension cable.
remote control switch and the cable with the steel box; – To connect the wires, cut the remote control cable
also, run the cable through the metal conduit tube. in the middle. Then, solder the wires and insulate
– If there is electric noise at the power source of the the wires.
indoor unit, provide a noise filter. – For one remote control switch, the maximum total
cable length (including the signal cable between the
units) is the following: if you are using a cable that
is 0.3mm² thick, 30m; if you are using a cable which
is thicker than 0.75mm², 500m.
Page 4-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
installation INSTALLATION OF THE OPTIONAL REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH 4/3
Standard capable distance for receiving the air panel Standard efficient distance for receiving the air panel
signal for the wireless control. signal for the wireless control.
(Example with the 4-way cassette) (View from above)
(Example with the 4-way cassette)
Conditions:
� Typical office room. Conditions:
� No electronic lamp within 1m around the receiver part of � Operation of the wireless remote control from the
the panel or the receiver kit. following position: 2.6m from the ceiling level and 1m
from the floor level.
1 - Direction of receiver Ceiling � Typical office room.
� No electronic lamp within 1m around the receiver part
of the panel or the receiver kit.
Capable Distance for Receiving the Signal
Floor
4
1 - Direction of receiver Ceiling
Capable Distance for Receiving the Signal
Floor
4.1. INSTALLATION OF THE REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH <PC-P1HE>
4.1.1. BEFORE THE INSTALLATION 4.1.2. INSTALLATION AREA

Check the contents and the number of accessories in the If you are installing the remote control switches vertically,
packing. keep a distance of more than 10 mm between the remote
control switches. If the distance is shorter than 10 mm, the
front panel of the remote control switch cannot open wide
enough.
Remote control Two screws One band Ring core

switch for the Ø4x16L for fixing the
operation control for fixing the cable to the
holding bracket ring core
onto the Wall
More than 50mm
Page 4-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/4 INSTALLATION
4.1.3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Band (field-supplied) Cable
– Insert the edge of the flat-headed screwdriver into the

dent parts at the bottom of the holding bracket. Next,
push and turn the screwdriver. Then, remove the remote
control switch from the holding bracket as shown in the
figure below.
Dent part
– Peel the sheath of the cable and lead the cable

Dent Screwdriver through the groove.
part Holding
Holding bracket – Peel back the insulation material from the end of
Dent bracket the cable and clamp the M3 solderless terminals.
part
� If you are using the switch box

Screwdriver Bottom view – Field-supplied JIS Box (JIS 8336-1998).
The following five types are available:

1. Switch box for one remote control switch
(without panel)
2. Switch box for two remote control switches
(without panel)
Holding bracket 3. Switch box for one remote control switch
(with panel)
(with panel)
5. Outlet box (with panel)
Run the cable through the conduit tube in

the wall.
Dent part – Fix the holding bracket to the switch box.
– Attach the remote control switch to the holding bracket as

follows. Fix the holding bracket with
the mark "UP" upward
� If you are exposing the remote control cable

– Fix the holding bracket onto the wall as shown in the
figure below.
Screws
Fix the holding bracket with (accessory)
the mark "↑UP" upward
– Peel back the insulation material from the end of the

Screw (accessory) cable and clamp the M3 solderless terminals.
– Attach the stopper to the cable inside the draw-out

hole.
Connect the terminals
Page 4-4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
– Mounting procedures.
Max. 16 indoor units

1. Insert the hooks of the remote control switch
into the holes at the top of the holding
bracket. Remote control Electrical box Electrical box Remote control
2. Push the lower part toward the holding switch of indoor unit of indoor unit switch (subsidiary)
bracket.
3. When you hear a clicking sound, the remote
control switch is already attached to the
holding bracket. You have finished the
mounting work.
� CAUTION:
Make sure that the cable is not slack. If the cable is Twisted pair cable 1P-0.75mm²
slack as shown in the above figure, the cable cord
(especially the naked part) may be clamped at the
hole. This may cause a faulty operation. There are optional cables of 0.75 mm² wire. The cables
have different lengths. The cables are also fitted with
connectors.
4.1.4. ELECTRICAL WIRING Remote control cable (optional)
4
� Standard wiring Cable model PRC-10E1 PRC-15E1 PRC-20E1 PRC-30E1
Band Length (m) 10 15 20 30

Ring core
Solderless terminal
Twisted pair cable: 1P-bigger than 0.75mm² (X type) 1.25-3X
Diameter: ∅ 7
Remote Color: ivory
control
switch
cable
To connect the shielded part to earth at the side of the

� ATTENTION: electrical box, you can also use the standard shielded cable
(2×0.75mm²). The maximum total length is 500m.
– When you are installing the unit, attach the black ring
core (accessory).
Standard shielded cable: (2x0.75mm²)
– Before connecting the cable of the remote control Solderless terminal
switch to the terminal board, insert this cable into the (X type) 1.25-3X
ring core with two turns as shown in the figure above.
If the wiring is 0.75 mm², you need to peel off the
outside cover.
– Fix the cable with the band (accessory).
� Electrical wiring for multiple units

(Terminal board side) (Remote control switch side)
This remote control switch can control up to a maximum
of sixteen units.
If you are going to modify the electrical wiring, perform
the wiring connection and other works as the following � CAUTION:
procedures explain. – To prevent a malfunction, use the twisted pair cable
You can connect two remote control switches in the same (1P-0.75 mm²) as a transmission cable. The maximum
unit or the same unit groups. The second remote control total length is 500 m.
is the subsidiary remote control switch as shown below. If the total cable length is within 30 m, you can use
Refer to chapter 6 "Available optional functions" for details. cables that are bigger than 0.3 mm².
– Keep a distance of more than 30 cm between the
remote control cable and the transmission cable
of the indoor units.
Page 4-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
installation
4/6 INSTALLATION OF THE OPTIONAL REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
If multiple indoor units are controlled simultaneously, set the

refrigerant cycle number and the address of the indoor units
as shown below.
Address of the indoor units:

st nd rd th th th th
Master unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 unit 8 unit 9 unit 10 unit 11 unit
th th th th th th th th
4 unit 5 unit 6 unit 7 unit 12 unit 13 unit 14 unit 15 unit
4.2. INSTALLATION OF THE REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (CORE-FUNCTION) <PC-P5H>
4.2.1. BEFORE THE INSTALLATION 4.2.3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

Check the contents and the number of accessories in the – Insert the edge of the screwdriver into the grooves at the
packing. bottom of the holding bracket. Next, push and turn the
screwdriver. Then, remove the remote control switch from
the holding bracket.
Bottom view
Remote control Two screws Ring Band for Cable

switch for the ø4x16 for fixing core1 fixing the (20 cm)
operation control the holding cable to
bracket onto the ring
the wall core
Groove Screwdriver
– Connecting the cables

4.2.2. INSTALLATION AREA
Connect the accessory cable to the field-supplied cable
– If you are installing the remote control switches vertically, by soldering the accessory cable.
keep a distance of more than 50 mm between the remote
control switches. Accessory cable Field-supplied cable
If the distance is shorter than 50 mm, the front panel of
the remote control switch cannot open wide enough.
(Insulate the connecting end with the chloride-type adhesive)

More than
50 mm – Attach the remote control switch to the holding bracket
and connect the cable as follows.
If you are exposing the remote control cable:
Fix the holding bracket

onto the wall with screws
(accessory)
Page 4-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4.2.4. ELECTRICAL WIRING

� Standard wiring
Band
Ring core
Lead the cable through

the groove
Insert the connector
Remote
control
switch
cable
If you are using the switch box:

Prepare the field-supplied JIS Box (JIS C8336-1988).
� ATTENTION:
– When you are installing the unit, attach the black ring
4
core (accessory.
– Before connecting the cable of the remote control
JIS box switch to the terminal board, insert this cable into the
(JIS C8336–1988) ring core with two turns as shown in the figure above.
2
If the wiring is 0.75 mm , you need to peel off the
outside cover.
– Fix the cable with the band (accessory).
� Electrical wiring for multiple units

M4 screws (field-supplied) This remote control switch can control up to a maximum of
sixteen units.
If you are going to modify the electrical wiring, perform the
wiring connection and other works as the following
procedures explain.
You can connect two remote controls in the same unit or
the same unit groups. The second remote control is the
subsidiary remote control switch as shown below.
Maximum 16 indoor units

Insert the connector
Remote control Electrical box Electrical box Remote control

– Attach the remote control switch to the holding bracket. switch of indoor unit of indoor unit switch (subsidiary)
First, attach the upper side. Then, attach the lower side.
?
?
Twisted pair cable 1P-0.75mm²
Page 4-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/8 INSTALLATION
There are optional cables of 0.75 mm² wire. The cables

have different lengths. The cables are also fitted with
connectors.
� CAUTION:
If multiple indoor units are controlled simultaneously,
set the refrigerant cycle number and the address of
Remote control cable (optional) the indoor units as shown below.
Cable model PRC-10E1 PRC-15E1 PRC-20E1 PRC-30E1
Address of the indoor units:
Length (m) 10 15 20 30
Master unit 1st unit 2nd unit 3rd unit
Twisted pair cable: 1P-bigger than 0.75mm² Solderless terminal

(X type) 1.25-3X
Diameter: ∅ 7
Color: ivory 4th unit 5th unit 6th unit 7th unit
8th unit 9th unit 10th unit 11th unit
To connect the shielded part to earth at the side of the

electrical box, you can also use the standard shielded cable
(2×0.75mm²). The maximum total length is 500m.
12th unit 13th unit 14th unit 15th unit
Standard shielded cable: (2x0.75mm²) Solderless terminal
(X type) 1.25-3X
(Terminal board side) (Remote control switch side)
� CAUTION:
– To prevent a malfunction, use the twisted pair cable
(1P-0.75 mm²) as a transmission cable. The maximum
total length is 500 m.
If the total cable length is within 30 m, you can use
cables that are bigger than 0.3 mm².
– Keep a distance of more than 30 cm between the
remote control cable and the transmission cable
of the indoor units.
Page 4-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4.3. INSTALLATION OF THE CENTRAL STATION <PSC-5S>
4.3.1. ACCESSORIES
Check the contents and the number of accessories in the Holding bracket
packing.
HITACHI
GROUP
Two screws M4x16L. for fixing

Central station the holding bracket onto the
wall
� NOTE:
The central station is divided into two parts: the linked Dent part
4
control part and the power supply part.
4.3.2. INSTALLATION AREA 2. Attach the power supply part to the switch box.
If you are installing the remote control switches vertically,
keep a distance of more than 50mm between the remote
control switches. If the distance is shorter than 50mm, the � NOTE:
front panel of the remote control switch cannot open wide Do not run the power supply wire and the control cable
enough. through the same conduit tube.
Power supply
wire
Power supply part

More than 50 mm
Screw x2
4.3.3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Switch box

1. Insert the edge of the flat-headed screwdriver into the Control cable
push and turn the screwdriver. Then, remove the linked
control part from the power supply part as shown in the 3. Attach the linked control part to the power supply part.
next figure. First, attach the upper side. Then, attach the lower side.
Bottom view
Dent part
Dent
part
Holding
Dent bracket
part
Holding
bracket
Screwdriver Screwdriver
Page 4-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/10 INSTALLATION
4.3.4. ELECTRICAL WIRING

� Wiring connection
You can connect up to eight central stations to the H-LINK.
To be connected to the
terminal boards 1 and 2
of the indoor unit or the
Outdoor unit
outdoor unit
H-LINK
Power supply
(AC220V or AC240V)
Indoor unit
Shielded twisted pair

cable (1p-0.75mm²)
or shielded pair cable
� Setting the DIP switch

� CAUTION:
Set the DSW1 as shown below. Make sure that the wiring is correct. An incorrect
When you connect more than one central station (maximum wiring may cause a malfunction of the central station.
eight units) to the H-LINK, the address setting is required.
Before installing the wiring, turn OFF the power supply
of the air conditioning system and the central station.
� NOTE: If you install the wiring while the power supply of the
central station is being supplied, you may cause a
Before the shipment, all the setting positions of the
DIP switches are OFF. malfunction of the central station.
Do not run the transmission cable for the central
� Address setting of the DSW1 station along the power supply wire and other
transmission cables. If you do so, you may cause a
malfunction due to the electrical noise. If you need to
Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4
run the transmission cable for the central station along
ON ON ON ON the power supply wire and other transmission cables,
keep the cable at a distance of more than 30cm away
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 from other cables. Alternatively, run the cable through
a metal conduit tube and ground one end of the
Address 5 Address 6 Address 7 Address 8 conduit tube.
ON ON ON ON If you apply high voltage to the TB2, you may blow out
the fuse on the PCB. If that is the case, first correct the
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 wiring to the TB1. Then, set the No.2 pin to ON.
Divide the power supply wire for the central station from the
main power supply wire with a pull box as shown in the next
figure.
AC220V or
AC240V
To outdoor unit or the breaker
Pull box
Central station Indoor unit
Page 4-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
� System layout Otherwise, the display is the following:

Each central station can control up to 16 indoor units or
16 groups of indoor units. (One group of indoor units is all
the units that are controlled by the same remote control
switch).
Master unit: The indoor unit that defines a group. The

central station sends the orders for one group only to the
master unit of that group. You can set as the master unit 1. Changing to the group setting mode
only one unit from the group of units that are controlled - Press the CHECK switch for three seconds.
by the same remote control switch. During this time the units of all groups are stopped.
Then, the central station changes to the check
Slave unit: The indoor unit that is controlled by the same mode, the CHECK indication is turned ON, and "1"
remote control switch that controls the master unit. You (mode for setting the master unit) is displayed at
must set in the same group number all the units that are the 7-segment display for checking.
controlled by the same remote control switch. The central - Press the CHECK switch. Then, "1" changes to "2"
station will not send any order to the slave units. Instead, (mode for setting the subgroup unit) at the 7-
the central station will send orders to the master unit, segment display for checking.
which will then forward the orders to the other units. You
- Press the RESET switch. Then, the check mode
should not set as slave units the units that have a unique
changes to the normal mode.
remote control switch or the units that do not have a
4
remote control switch.
� ATTENTION:
- If there is a group in operation, you cannot change
� Automatic group configuration
the central station to the check mode.
When you first power ON the unit and when you need to - When you perform the group setting, use the check
initialize, the automatic group configuration is performed. table for the group setting. You can also write down
(Refer to the procedure in section 4.3.7). the group number on the surface inside of the
switch cover.
During the automatic configuration, the LCD (Liquid
Crystal Display) of the central station is the following: 2. Setting the master unit
� Display of the mode for setting the master unit
When the central station changes to the mode for
setting the master unit, the LCD of the central station
is the following. The number of the group that you
need to set is flickering �. The refrigerant cycle
number � and the address of indoor unit � indicate
� the address of the indoor unit that is set as the master
� unit of the group that you need to set. If the master
unit of the group is already set, the group number
indicator "�" flickers. When the SET indication appears
� Refrigerant cycle on the connection check �, the indoor unit that is displayed on the LCD is set
� Number of checked indoor units that are connected as the master unit. If the master unit is not set, the
in the refrigerant cycle on the connection check indicator "--" is displayed at the refrigerant cycle
number � and the address of indoor unit �.
Also, the SET indication � does not appear.
The instructions for the automatic group configuration from
group 1 to group 16 are the following: � � �
1 For the group 1, check all the units whose address of �
indoor unit is 0. The unit that has the lowest refrigerant
cycle address is set as the master unit. �
2 Repeat the step 1 for all the groups until the group 16.
The automatic group configuration can last several minutes

� �
because the central station is checking all the possible units. � "1" means the mode for setting the master unit.
If all the units have unique addresses of indoor unit and all
� The refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit
which you need to set. (You can change the
the units are controlled by different remote control switches,
no additional group setting is required. If that is the case, number by pressing the "∇" TEMP switch).
the display after the automatic group configuration is the � When the SET indication appears, the indoor unit
following: that is displayed on the LCD is set as the master
unit. (When the SET indication does not appear,
the master unit is not set).
� The address of the indoor unit which you need
to set. (You can change the address by pressing
the "∆" TEMP switch).
� When the CHECK indication appears, the central
station is in the check mode.
Page 4-11
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/12 INSTALLATION
� The condition of the master unit setting for each

group: (� is ON: The master unit is set; � is OFF:
� CAUTION:
- You can set only one indoor unit as the master unit in
The master unit is not set). one group. If the master unit is already set, you cannot
� The group number which you need to set. set another indoor unit as the master unit for the
group. In order to set the present master unit as the
� Instructions for setting the master unit
master unit for another group, cancel the present
Set the master unit for each group as follows: master unit setting and perform the setting for another
a. Selection of the group that you need to set group.
Select the group that you need to set by
pressing the GROUP switch. Every time you - If there are indoor units with the auto-louver and
press the GROUP switch, you move the indoor units without the auto-louver in the same group,
flickering group number indicator. set the indoor unit with the auto-louver as the master
unit. If you set the indoor unit without the auto-louver
as the master unit, the auto-louver setting will not be
available for all the units of the group.
3. Setting the slave unit

The flickering group number indicator moves,
for example when you are selecting the group � Display of the mode for setting the slave unit
number 6. When the central station changes to the mode for
setting the slave unit, the LCD of the central station
b. Selection of the indoor unit that you need is the following. The number of the group that you
to set need to set is flickering �. The refrigerant cycle
Change the refrigerant cycle number � by number � and the address of indoor unit � indicate
pressing the "∇" TEMP switch. Change the the address of the indoor unit that has the smallest
address of indoor unit � by pressing the "∆" address among the slave units of the group that
TEMP switch and select the indoor unit which you need to set. If the slave units of the group are
you need to set. The indication changes in the already set, the group number indicator "�" flickers.
order that is shown below: If the slave unit is not set, the indicator "--" is
displayed at the refrigerant cycle number �
and the address of indoor unit. �
00 01 ... 15
� � �
� �
�
� �
� "2" means the mode for setting the slave unit.
� ATTENTION:
- When the indicator of the refrigerant cycle number � � The refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit that
is "--", the indicator of the address of indoor unit � you need to set. (You can change the number by
is also "--". In such a case, you cannot change the pressing the "∇" TEMP switch).
address of indoor unit although you press the "∆"
TEMP switch. � When the SET indication appears, the indoor unit
that is displayed on the LCD is set as the slave unit.
- The following items are not displayed: the refrigerant (When the SET indication does not appear, the
cycle number that does not have an indoor unit slave unit is not set).
connected; the address of indoor units that are
not connected. � The address of the indoor unit which you need to
- The indoor unit that is already set as the master set. (You can change the address by pressing the
unit is not displayed. "∆" TEMP switch).
c. Setting procedure � When the CHECK indication appears, the central

After selecting the indoor unit, press the station is in the check mode.
RUN/STOP switch. The displayed unit is set as
the master unit. The indicator "�" and the SET
� "�" means the group with indoor units which you
need to set. (The above figure shows that the
indication appear.
indoor unit with the refrigerant cycle number 1 and
(Every time you press the RUN/STOP switch,
with the address of indoor unit 2 is set as the slave
the master unit is set and cancelled alternately.)
unit of the group number 4).
� Only the group which has the master unit already
set is displayed. The group that you need to set is
flickering.
Page 4-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
� Instructions for setting the slave unit

� CAUTION:
– You can set up to 15 slave units in one group.
Set the slave unit for each group as follows. (The maximum in one group is 16 units, including
the master unit).
a. Selection of the group that you need to set
Select the group that you need to set by – In order to change the setting of a slave unit to another
pressing the GROUP switch. Every time you group, cancel the present slave unit setting and
press the GROUP switch, the flickering group perform the setting for another group.
number indicator changes to the next group. – If all the units are set as master units, you cannot
You cannot select the group that does not have change the central station to the slave unit setting.
the master unit setting. Example A:
A system where all the units have a unique address of
indoor unit and all the units are controlled by different
remote control switches. The result is the following:
b. Selection of the indoor unit that you need

to set
Change the refrigerant cycle number by pressing
4
the "∇" TEMP switch. Change the address of
indoor unit by pressing the "∆" TEMP switch and
select the indoor unit which you need to set.
The indication changes in the order that is
shown below:
Setting of I.U.
0 1 2 3
Rotary Switch:
Group Number: 1 2 3 4
00 01 ... 15
You do not need to perform additional group settings.
Example B:
A system where the units have a repeated address of indoor
unit and some units are controlled by the same remote
control switch.
� ATTENTION:
– The following items are not displayed: the refrigerant
cycle number that does not have an indoor unit Refrigerant System: 0 1 1 2 2 3
connected; the address of indoor units that are not Setting of I.U.
0 0 1 0 1 0
connected. Rotary Switch:
Group Number: 1 X 2 X X X
– When the selected unit is already set as the slave unit,
the group number indicator "�" of the unit and the SET You need to perform additional settings in order to include
indication appear. units that are not set in the automatic group configuration.
You also need to perform additional settings in order to set
– The indoor unit that is already set as the master unit
the indoor units that are controlled by the same remote
is not displayed.
control switch in the same group.
c. Setting procedure
After selecting the indoor unit, press the In the manual group setting, you can set the system as follows:
RUN/STOP switch. The displayed unit is set
as the slave unit. The indicator "�" and the
SET indication appear.
(Every time you press the RUN/STOP switch,
the slave unit is set and cancelled alternately.)
Refrigerant system: 0 1 1 2 2 3
Setting of I.U.
0 0 1 0 1 0
rotary switch:
Group number: 1 2 2 3 3 4
Page 4-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/14 INSTALLATION
4.3.5. INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION 2. Simultaneous operation, pulse signal; simultaneous

stoppage, pulse signal
The central station has two input functions and two output
functions as shown below. This is a remote ON/OFF function that uses the pulse
signal.
Input setting mode, output setting mode and connector. The basic wiring and the time chart are shown below.
Setting of the DSW2
Mode Port ON ON ON OFF ON

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 CN2
Simultaneous
Simultaneous operation /
Input 1 CN2 1-2 operation,
stoppage level signal
pulse signal
Simultaneous
Emergency
Input 2 CN2 2-3 Demand stoppage,
stoppage
pulse signal
Output 1 CN3 1-2 Simultaneous operation output .
Output 2 CN3 1-3 Simultaneous alarm output
� Time chart
Signal to 1 & 2 of CN2

Specifications of the required components:
- DC12V non-Voltage A connection Control by RCS

- OMRON MY relay
Unit operation
- PCC-1A
Time
1. Simultaneous operation / stoppage level signal
This is a remote ON/OFF function that uses the level
3. Emergency stoppage
signal (ON/OFF).
The basic wiring and the time chart are shown below. This is a remote emergency OFF function that uses the
pulse signal. All units that are controlled by the central
station are forced to stop. Then, further setting with RCS
is not enabled until the remote emergency OFF function
is removed.
The basic wiring and the time chart are shown below.
S1
CN2
� Time chart
.
Control by R.C.S.
� Time chart
Unit operation
Control by RCS
Time
Unit operation
Time
Page 4-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4. Demand
This is a remote thermostat signal for the selected units.
� The group that is already set with the demand
Only the units with the DEMAND indication will follow this control is displayed: (� is ON: the demand is set; �
order. Refer to the section "Demand setting procedure" is OFF: the demand is not set).
below. � Only the group which has the master unit already
The basic wiring and the time chart are shown below. set is displayed. The group that you need to set is
flickering.
S1 – Selection of the group that you need to set

CN2 Select the group that you need to set by pressing any
of the GROUP switches. Every time you press the
GROUP switch, you move the flickering group number
indicator.
� Time chart

The flickering group number indicator moves, for
example when you are selecting the group number. 4
Control by central station
Unit operation
THERMO ON
Time
The indicator "�" and DEMAND indication: ON.

(The demand control is set).
� NOTE:
The units with the DEMAND indication are always
The following is displayed: the refrigerant cycle
controlled by the central station.
number and the address of the indoor unit which is
set as the master unit of the selected group which
you need to set. The indicator "�" appears at the
� Demand setting procedure
group which is already set with the demand control.
– Changing to the change mode The DEMAND indication also appears.
Press the CHECK switch for more than 3 seconds.
The central station changes to the check mode. – Setting procedure
Press the RUN/STOP switch. The selected group
– Changing to the demand setting mode is set with the demand control. The indicator "�"
and the DEMAND indication appear.
Press the CHECK switch. Then, "5" (demand setting (Every time you press the RUN/STOP switch, the
mode) is displayed at the 7-segment display for demand control is set and cancelled alternately.)
checking. The LCD of the central station is the
following. 5. Simultaneous operation output
You use this function in order to check the operation
� � status of the units that are controlled by the central
� station. If any unit is turned ON, the simultaneous
operation output will be ON.
The basic wiring is shown below.
�
� �
� "5" means the demand setting mode.

� The refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit that
is set as the master unit of the group that you need
to set.
� The address of the indoor unit that is set as the
master unit of the group that you need to set.
.
� When the CHECK indication appears, the central
Page 4-15
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/16 INSTALLATION
6. Simultaneous alarm output 2. Display of the option setting mode

You use this function in order to check the alarm When the central station changes to the option setting
status of the units that are controlled by the central mode, the LCD of the central station is the following.
station. If any unit is under alarm status, this output The number of the group that you need to set is
will be ON. flickering. The refrigerant cycle number and the
The basic wiring is shown below. address of indoor unit indicate the address of the
indoor unit that is set as the master unit of the group
that you need to set. If the option setting is already
done, the group number indicator "�" flickers. When
the SET indication appears, the indoor unit that is
displayed on the LCD is already set as the optional
function.
� � �
�
. �
4.3.6. OPTION SETTING � �

� "A" means the option setting mode.
1. Changing to the option setting mode
a. Press the CHECK switch for three seconds. � The refrigerant cycle number of the indoor unit that
During this time the units of all groups are stopped. is set as the master unit of the group that you need
The central station changes to the option setting to set.
mode. Then, the CHECK indication is turned ON � When the SET indication appears, the indoor unit
and the "1" (mode for setting the master unit) is that is displayed on the LCD is set with the optional
displayed at the 7-segment display for checking. function.
� ATTENTION: � The address of the indoor unit that is set as the

master unit of the group that you need to set.
If there is a group in operation, you cannot change
the central station to the check mode. � When the CHECK indication appears, the central
b. Press the CHECK switch and change the display
of the 7-segment display. � The condition of the option setting for each group:
("�" is ON: the option is set; "�" is OFF: the option
7–Segment Function is not set).
� Fixing the operation mode � The group number that you need to set.
� Fixing the setting temperature
� Fixing the cooling only
� Fixing the air volume
� CAUTION:
– If the optional functions are set by the central station,
Automatic cooling/heating you need to set the same optional functions for the
� operation group controlled by means of the remote control
switch.
c. Setting procedure: – If the optional functions, which are the setting
– Press the CHECK switch and select the options items A - E as shown above, are set by the remote
A - E. control switch, you need to set the same optional
functions for the group controlled by means of the
– Select the group that you need to set by central station.
pressing the GROUP switch.
– Press the RUN/STOP switch. The option setting
is done. Then, the indicator "�" appears. The
SET indication also appears. (Every time you
press the RUN/STOP switch, the optional
function is set and cancelled alternately).
d. Press the RESET switch. Then, the central station
changes to the normal mode.
� NOTE:
Refer to section 6.3.2. for a description of the option
setting.
Page 4-16
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4.3.7. INITIALIZATION OF THE CENTRAL 2. Initialization

STATION When the central station changes to the initialization
The instructions for initializing the group setting and the mode, the LCD of the central station is as shown
optional setting are as follows. below. In this condition, press the RESET switch.
The flickering 06 indication changes to ON. Then,
1. Changing to the self-check mode the initialization is performed.
(If the initialization is not required, press the CHECK
Press the GROUP (� and �) switch and the MODE switch. Then, the LCD automatically changes as
switch simultaneously. Then, the central station shown below).
changes to the self-check mode. If there is a group in
operation, the NO FUNCTION indication appears and
you cannot change the central station to the self-check "06" flickers. Press RESET
mode. switch and "06" changes to ON.
When the central station changes to the self-check In case of EEPROM
mode, the LCD changes from (i) to (vii) as shown initialization, it takes
below. approximately 30 - 60 seconds
Before the LCD changes to (vii), press the GROUP
Press RESET switch or
(� and �) switch and the MODE switch
CHECK switch
simultaneously again. Keep the switches pressed
until the initialization starts. Then, the central station
4
changes to the initialization mode.
To connection check
(i)
(ii)
Group setting table of central station
RSW of
(iii) indoor 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
unit
Indication
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
of PSC-5S
00
(iv) 01
02
03
04
(v) 05
(All indications: OFF) 06
07
08
09
(vi) 10
(All indications: ON) 11
12
13
14
(vii) 15
(All indications: OFF)
Fill the gap number (1-16) in the above table.
Circle the unit number of the master unit.
� NOTE:
If you do not press the GROUP (� and �) switch
and the MODE switch again, the self-check operation
continues.
Page 4-17
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/18 INSTALLATION
4.4. INSTALLATION OF THE 7-DAY TIMER <PSC-5T>
4.4.1. ACCESSORIES
The packing contains the following items:
HITACHI
GROUP
Holding bracket
Two screws M4x16L.

Cable (1m)
Control timer for fixing the holding
bracket onto the wall.
Dent part
4.4.2. INSTALLATION AREA
If you are installing the remote control switches vertically,
keep a distance of more than 50mm between the remote 2. Attach the timer to the holding bracket and connect the
control switches. If the distance is shorter than 50mm, the cable as follows.
front panel of the remote control switch cannot open wide
enough.
� If you are exposing the remote control cable
1. Fix the holding bracket onto the wall as shown in the
figure below.
Fix the holding bracket with

the mark "↑UP" upward
More than 50mm
Screw (accessory)
4.4.3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Insert the edge of the flat-headed screwdriver into the
push and turn the screwdriver. Then, remove the remote
2. Select and cut the knockout hole according to the
control switch from the holding bracket as shown in the
direction for drawing out the cable.
next figure.
According to the cable

Bottom view
arrangement, determine the
direction for drawing out the
cable and cut the knockout
hole. (The knockout hole is
one of the positions that is
Dent Dent part marked with * in the left
part figure).
If you are using an accessory
Holding
Dent bracket
cable, draw out the cable
part from one of the knockout
holes at the lower side.
Screwdriver
Screwdriver Holding
bracket
Page 4-18
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
3. Lead the cable through the groove. 4. Attach the timer onto the holding bracket.
Attach the stopper to

the cable at the inside
of the draw-out hole
Twisted pair cable
Band
Cable
Step 1:
Insert the hooks of the timer to the
holes at the top side of the holding
4
(field-supplied) bracket.
Step 2:
Push the lower part of the timer toward
the holding bracket.
Accessory cable Step 3:
When you hear a clicking sound,
the timer is already attached to the
Band
holding bracket. You have finished the
(field-supplied)
mounting work. Make sure that four
hooks at the position * are correctly
inserted.
Cable
If you are connecting the accessory cable to the � If you are using the switch box
connector, remove the protection case. 1. Field-supplied JIS box (JIS 8336-1998).
Connector The following five types are available:

(without panel)
(without panel)
(with panel)
(with panel)
5. Outlet box (with panel)
2. Run the cable through the conduit tube in the wall.
The cable is not exposed.

Run the cable through the
conduit tube in the wall and
Terminal connect the cable inside the
switch box.
Page 4-19
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
installation
4/20 INSTALLATION OF THE OPTIONAL REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
3. Attach the holding bracket onto the switch box. 2. If you are using a timer with PC-2H2:
Transmission cable
between outdoor unit and
CN13
indoor unit (H-LINK)
↑ Fix the holding
bracket with the
mark "UP" upward
Indoor unit
PSC-5T PC-2H2
Connector
TIMER REMOCON
Screw
(white) (yellow)
(accessory)
Accessory cable (1m)
3. If you are using a timer with PSC-5SE (central station):
– You can connect up to eight units of central station

(PSC-5S) and timer (PSC-5T) to the H-LINK system.
One timer can control only one central station.
PSC-5T PSC-5SE
4.4.4. ELECTRICAL WIRING Connector
Use this timer with the remote control switch or the central
station.
Power supply:
AC220V or AC240V
� CAUTION:
To prevent a malfunction, use the twisted pair cable Available for H-LINK
Accessory cable (1m)
(1P-0.75mm²) as a transmission cable. connection (to be
To other central connected to the terminal
Keep a distance of more than 30 cm between the Twisted pair cable 1P-
boards 1 and 2 of
stations 0.75mm² (Max. 1000m)
remote control cable and the transmission cable the indoor unit or the
of the indoor units. outdoor unit)
1. If you are using a timer with PC-P1HE:
Transmission cable
between outdoor unit
and indoor unit (H-LINK)
Indoor unit
PSC-5T PC-P1H
Twisted pair cable 1P-0.75mm²

(Max. 100m) field-supplied
Page 4-20
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4.4.5. SETTING THE DIP SWITCHES

Set the two DIP switches on the PCB as follows.
(The factory settings of the DSW1 and the DSW2
are all OFF).
Setting of the DSW1 (For the address setting)
Address 0 1 2 3
ON ON ON ON
Setting of
the DSW1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DSW2 Address 4 5 6 7
ON ON ON ON
DSW1 Setting of
the DSW1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
4
Settings of the DIP switches
Pin Contents of the Settings of the DSW

Remarks
No. settings OFF ON
1
For the address Setting is required only when the central station (PSC-5S) is used
2 Refer to the table above
setting together. Set the address of the central station to be controlled.
DSW1 3
For the remote
Except for When the remote control switch PC-P1HE is used together,
4 control switch PC-P1HE
PC-P1HE set the No.4 pin to ON.
used together
Setting for
Remote control operation is not available after stopping at
prohibition of the
OFF TIME. Remote control operation is available again
remote control Setting is not Setting is
1 at ON TIME while the unit is stopped.
operation after available available
(This setting is available only when the remote control switch
stopping at
(PC-P1HE) or the central station (PSC-5S) is used together).
OFF TIME
DSW2
For the remote
Except for Set the No.2 pin according to the other remote control switch
2 control switch PSC-5S
PSC-5S used together.
used together
3 Not used - - Do not change the setting. (No.3 pin set to OFF).
4 Not used - - Do not change the setting. (No.4 pin set to OFF).
Page 4-21
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/22 INSTALLATION
4.5. INSTALLATION OF THE RECEIVER KIT <PC-RLH8>

(for RCI-FSN1E Units)
5) Draw out the connecting cable from the wiring
� The packing contains the following parts. Check the hole of the indoor unit, and lead the cable over the
contents and the number of the parts. suspension bracket of the indoor unit to the installing
Mod. Name Qty Remarks position of the receiver kit. Bundle the extra cable with
a band.
With Connection
Receiver Kit 1 Connecting cable
Wire Suspension Bracket
PC-RLH8
Connecting With Connection

3
Cable Wire
100~200 mm
For Fixing
Band 1
Cable
For Protection
Cover 1 of Connecting
Wiring hole of
Cable
Indoor Unit
Connector
4.5.1. INSTALLATION OF THE WIRELESS

RECEIVER KIT
6) Install the air panel (option) onto the indoor unit.
� CAUTION: 7) Attach the receiver kit in the following procedure.
Pay attention to the following installation procedures.
If not, it may drop from the panel, resulting in a serious a) Draw out the connecting cable from the pocket and
accident. connect the connecting cable and the wire of the
receiver kit. After connecting the cable, wrap the
connector with the cover and fix them with a band.
� PC-RLH8
1) Install the wireless receiver kit, the indoor unit and the Air Panel
air panel at the same time. Corner Pocket
2) In case that the wireless receiver kit is installed after Connecting
Connecting Cable Band
Cable
installing the indoor unit, turn off the power source of
the indoor unit and remove the air panel. Cover
3) This receiver kit can be installed at the position 1, 2,

3 or 4. Receiver Kit Band
Air Panel
b) Hook the band on the rear side of the receiver kit

at the pin of the air panel as shown bellow.
Pin
Band
4) Remove the cover of indoor unit electrical controlbox

and connect the cable to the terminal board (white)
as shown below.
c) Hook L- shaped nail on the rear side of receiver kit
Terminal Board
at the square hole of the air panel.
(White)
PCB Indoor Unit
Mark Band "B"

Connecting Cable
Mark Band "A"
Page 4-22
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
8) Hook the other fixing nails (3 positions) at the square

holes of air panel.
� NOTE:
When removing the receiver kit after installing the air
panel:
– The corner position of the receiver kit can be lifted
when a coin or a "-" shaped driver is inserted into
the dent part � and twisted downward. With �
lifted, twist a coin or a "-" shaped driver at the
positions of � and �, the whole receiver kit
can be lifted.
– After disconnecting the fixing nails (3 positions),
slide the receiver kit in the arrow direction �
and remove the receiver kit.
Coin or"-" Shaped Driver
Lifting
4
Dent Part
Page 4-23
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/24 INSTALLATION

(for RCD-FSN Units) 5. Remove the panel of the electrical box of the indoor unit.
Then, connect the cable to the terminals A and B of the
The packing contains the following items. Check the white terminal board.
contents and the number of items in the packing. Mark band "B"
Connector cable
Mod. Name Qty Remarks
Receiver With the White terminal board
Indoor unit
1 electrical box
kit connector cable
PC-RLH9
For fixing the

Screw 2
receiver kit
For fixing
Band 2
the cable
Printed Mark band "A"
circuit board

RECEIVER KIT
� NOTE: � NOTE:
Install the wireless receiver kit into the indoor unit. After connecting the cable, tie the remaining cable
length with the factory-supplied band. Then, place the
cables in the electrical box.
1. Install the wireless receiver kit, the indoor unit and the air
panel at the same time.
6. Remove the remote control panel of the air inlet grille.
2. If you install the wireless receiver kit after installing the
indoor unit, turn off the power source of the indoor unit. � Press the hooks of the remote control panel by hand.
Then, remove the air inlet grille.
3. Fix the wireless receiver kit to the air panel by means of
the screws. (The tightening torque must be 0.8Nm).
Hook Hook
Ø7 Drain Cable for wireless Screw
Air panel (135) boss receiver kit (factory-supplied)
Remote control
panel Air inlet grille Remote control
panel
Cable for Wireless

Air inlet grille
Flange Electrical box
for indoor unit auto-swing motor receiver kit
4. Lead the cable along the cable for the auto-swing motor.
Then, tie the cables with the band.
Remote control panel
Cable for wireless receiver kit

7. After fixing the air panel, attach the air inlet grille to the
air panel.
� Make sure that the location of the square hole of the
air inlet grille coincides with the location of the wireless
receiver kit of the air panel.
� Make sure that the square hole of the air inlet grille
does not clamp the cable of the wireless receiver kit.
Cable for auto-swing motor

Air inlet Air panel
Band grille
(factory-supplied)
Wireless
receiver kit
Page 4-24
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4.7. INSTALLATION OF THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER KIT <PC-RLH11>
The packing contains the following items. Check the

contents and the number of items in the packing. 2) Cut one of the knockout holes (*) at the panel.
Mod. Name Qty Remarks

With the
Receiver
1 connector
kit
cable
For fixing
Band 1
PC-RLH11
the cable
For fixing the
Screw 4
receiver kit
For fixing
Screw 2
the clamp 3) Lead the cable through the groove and draw out the
cable from the knockout hole.
For fixing
4
Clamp 2
the cable

RECEIVER KIT
� NOTE:
Install the receiver kit onto the wall or the ceiling near
the indoor unit.
1. Install the wireless receiver kit and the indoor unit at the 4) Attach the panel. Do not clamp the cable when you
same time. are attaching the panel.
2. If you install the wireless receiver kit after installing the � Hook
indoor unit, turn off the power source of the indoor unit.
Panel
3. Make sure that the distance between the wireless
receiver kit and the indoor unit is less than 5m.
4. Remove the panel by using a minus screwdriver.
� Clicking sound
Fixing bracket
B. If you are concealing the cable

5. Install the wireless receiver kit onto the wall or the ceiling
as follows: 1) Prepare the following field-supplied box.
A. If you are exposing the cable JIS box (JIS C8336-1991)
1) Fix the fixing bracket of the wireless receiver kit by (without panel)
2. Small switch box for one remote control switch
means of the screw (A) at the four locations. (without panel)
(with panel)
� Rigid metal conduit tube (more than ø20)

� M4 screw (field-supplied)
Screw (A)
Page 4-25
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/26 INSTALLATION
2) Insert the cable into the rigid metal conduit tube. 6. Remove the panel of the electrical box of the indoor unit.
Then, connect the cable to the terminals A and B of the
white terminal board.
Cable
3) Fix the fixing bracket of the wireless receiver kit by

means of the field-supplied screws.
RCS PC-1H(E)
optional
Cable Power supply wires

Transmission cables
Example: RPI-3.0
Screws (field-supplied)
This figure shows the case of the switch box for one remote control switch.
4) Attach the panel that is the same as A 4

(for RCIM-FSN Units)

The packing contains the following parts. Check the RECEIVER KIT
contents and the number of the parts.
Name Qty Remarks � PC-RLH13

1 Install the wireless receiver kit, the indoor unit and the
air panel at the same time.
Receiver Kit 1 With Connection Wire 2 In case that the wireless receiver kit is installed after
installing the indoor unit, turn off the power source of
the indoor unit and remove the air panel.
Connecting
1 With Connection Wire 3 This receiver kit can be installed only at one position.
Cable
Band 2 For Fixing Cable 4 Remove the cover of indoor unit electrical control box
and connect the cable to the terminal board (white) as
For Protection of shown below.
Cover 1
Connecting Cable
Terminal Board
Indoor Unit Electrical control box
� CAUTION: PCB
Pay attention to the following installation procedures. If

not, it may drop from the panel, resulting in a serious
accident.
Connecting Cable
Mark Band "A" Mark Band "B"
Page 4-26
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
5 Draw out the connecting cable from the wiring hole of

the indoor unit, and lead the cable over the to the � NOTE:
installing position of the receiver kit. When removing the receiver kit after installing the air
panel:
6 Install the air panel (option) onto the indoor unit.
1 Remove the screws of � (4 positions) from the
7 Attach the receiver kit in the following procedure.
front side of the air panel.
a) Draw out the connecting cable from the pocket and
2 Move the receiver kit with hands in the arrow
connect the connecting cable and the wire of the
direction � and remove the nails (2 position) of
receiver kit. After connecting the cable, wrap the
pocket cover for corner, and slide the receiver kit in
connector with the cover and fix them with a band.
the arrow direction �.
Air Panel
Corner Pocket
Connecting
Cable
Receiver Kit
Connecting
Cable
Band
Cover 4
Band
b) Hook the band on the rear side of the receiver kit at

the pin of the air panel as shown bellow.
Pin
Band
c) Hook L- shaped nail on the rear side of receiver kit

at the square hole of the air panel, and fix it with the
screw.
L-shaped nail
Screw
Nail (2 position)
8 Hook the other fixing nails (3 positions) at the square

holes of air panel.
Page 4-27
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/28 INSTALLATION
4.9. HARC-BX(A/B)
4.9.1. PART NAMES 4.9.2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Each part name of the HARC-BX E is shown in the next 1. Install the HARC-BX E by keeping the screw terminal
figure. board at the lower side.
� Power source terminal Upward

to be connected to the
AC220V~AC240V power
source.
� Earth terminal to be
grounded.
� Terminal board for the Downward (Horizontal
unit transmission to installation)
connect the H-LINK. Correct Incorrect Correct
� Terminal board for the
upper monitoring system
2. Fixing method by means of the M4 screws
to connect the
(field-supplied).
transmission line for the
upper monitoring system. Fix the HARC-BX E onto the wall by means
of the M4 screws at the four locations.
� Board
� PSW1 (MCLR): the push

switch for checking the
quantity of connected
units.
� 7-Segment Display(*):
the present state of the
HARC-BX E.
� PSW2 (LON-SERV):
the push switch for the
transmission neuron ID.
(Service pin).
� 8P DSW1 (S201) (**):
the DIP switch for
setting the system of
the HARC-BX E.
� 8P DSW2 (S202) (***): the DIP switch for setting the

functions of the HARC-BX E.
� LED of the power source (PWR): the LED is ON when
the power is supplied.
� LED of the transmission (H-L): the transmission
status with the H-LINK.
� LED of the transmission for the upper monitoring
system (LON): the transmission status with the upper
monitoring system.
(*) 7-segment display:
Read 4.9.5 "Test run" and 4.9.6 "Maintenance and service" for the
details of 7-segment display.
(**) 8P DSW No.1 S201:
Refer to "Setting the DIP switch" in section 4.9.5 for details and the
functions of the HARC-BX E.
(***) 8P DSW2 (S202):
Refer to "Setting the DIP switch" in section 4.9.5: (8P DSW1 and
8P DSW2).
Page 4-28
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
1. You need to install the power supply wiring for the 4.9.3. ELECTRICAL WIRING
HARC-BX E, the transmission cable between the
1. To install the wiring, turn OFF the main switch that
packaged air conditioners, and the transmission
is connected to the wire of the HARC-BX E and the
cable between the upper monitoring systems.
surrounding equipment.
2. Wiring method. 2. You should install the wiring according to the table below.
The "No." in the table indicates the wire in the section
"Wiring method".
AC100V-AC240V Top monitoring
power source system � Electrical wiring
Section No. Wiring method Remarks

1~220V/240
Power supply wire

V power
source �
HARC-BX E
Ground wire �
4
Upper
monitoring
Packaged air conditioner Packaged air conditioner � Non-polar
Control circuit system
HARC-BX E
Connecting Specifications of the HARC-BX E

No.
equipment wiring Packaged air Non-polar
Power supply wiring AC100V, 2mm ,
2 �
conditioner
� for the HARC-BX E 2 cores, shielded
Follow the local
� Ground cable
standards
Follow the instructions
Upper monitoring
� of the management 4.9.4. ARRANGEMENT OF THE INSTALLATION
system
personnel (**) OF PCB AND H-LINK TERMINALS
2
Transmission line for 1P-0.75mm twisted As described in the figure below, 8 PCBs which are built into
� the packaged air pair cable (*) HARC-BX E and H-LINK Terminals correspond to the both
conditioners sides of the same numbers, 1 to 8 within � and �
(*) Make sure that you apply the twisted cables.
respectively.
In order that PCB would be able to communicate with unit
it must be connected to same H-LINK than unit.
Recommended types of cables:
Japan Cable Integral

Hitachi Cable Japan Cable
Industrial power
Co., Ltd. Co., Ltd.
Associations consumption
Non-
JKEV KPEV KNPEV KPEV
shielded
Shielded
JKEV-S KPEV-S KNPEV-S KPEV-S
(copper foil)
Shielded
JKEV-SB KPEV-SB KNPEV-SB KPEV-SB
(twisted)
Page 4-29
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4/30 INSTALLATION
4.9.5. TEST RUN 4.9.6. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

� Setting the DIP switch � Self-Inspection of the HARC-BX E
1. Set the DIP switch before turning on the power supply. In order to identify the abnormal operation of the HARC-BX E,
2. Remove the front board in order to set the DIP switch. perform the self-inspection according to the following
3. The setting of the DIP switches for each PCB is different. instructions.
4. Setting the 8-pin DIP switch (S201) 1. Set all the pins of DSW S201 and DSW S202 to OFF.
The settings of the 8-pin DIP switch (S201) depend
on the system numbers and the unit numbers of
the applicable indoor units that the PCB controls. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON ON
The setting procedures for the system number
and the unit number are shown in the table below. 8-Pin DSW (S201) 8-Pin DSW (S202)
2. Turn ON the power supply.

Setting of the 8-pin DIP "�" is displayed on the 7-segment display and OFF is lit.
Description
switch (S201)
3. Set to ON only the No.1 pin of DSW S201.
The settings of the 8-pin DIP
ON switch (S201) depend on the
system numbers and the unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 numbers of the applicable indoor ON ON
units that the PCB controls. 8-Pin DSW (S201) 8-Pin DSW (S202)
In case of the standard
System Unit
specification and the specification
With this setting, the communication between the
No. No. HARC PCB and the LONWORKS network is performed.
of the option A, the PCB will
control eight units from the 7-segment display
system numbers and unit
numbers that you have set. For The results are
example, if you set the system the following: ��
No.1 along with the unit No.1, the
relevant PCB will control the units OK Abnormal
No.1 to No.8 from the system
No.1. You should set the unit In case of abnormal operation, either there is some
number from either No.1 or No.9. problem with the LONWORKS network or the HARC
In case of the specification of the PCB is damaged.
option B, the PCB will control four
units from the system numbers
4. Set the No.1 pin of the 8-pin DSW S201 to OFF.
and unit numbers that you have Then, set to ON only the No.2 pin.
set. For example, if you set the
system No.1 along with the unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.1, the relevant PCB will ON ON
control the units No.1 to No.4
8-Pin DSW (S201) 8-Pin DSW (S202)
from the system No.1. You should
set the unit number from No.1, 7-Segment Display
No.5, No.9 or No.13.
The results are
The details are outlined below. the following: ��
The settings for the required system numbers are shown
OK Abnormal
in the table below.
In case of abnormal operation, either the HARC PCB is
System Setting pin System Setting pin damaged or there is some problem with the H-LINK line,
No. No.1 to No.4 No. No.1 to No.4 for example an incorrect wiring or an incorrect setting of
ON ON the end terminal resistance.
1 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5. Set the No.2 pin of the 8-pin DSW S201 to OFF.
ON ON
2 10 Then, set to ON only the No.3 pin.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON ON
3 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON ON
ON ON 8-pin DSW (S201) 8-pin DSW (S202)

4 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
With this setting, you perform the checking procedure of
ON ON the No.1 pin, the No.2 pin, the No.3 pin, the No.4 pin and
5 13 the No.5 pin of DSW S202. The number below shows the
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
number of pins that are set to ON.
ON ON
6 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The results are the following:
ON ON
7 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ��
ON ON 0 pin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 5 pin
8 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
In case of abnormal operation, the HARC PCB is
damaged.
Page 4-30
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
4.10. CS-NET INTERFACE (HARC40) CONNECTION
� HARC40 with the USB connection � Layout of the HARC40 interface
Since the ISA Board connections have been phased out On the opposite side you can see the layout of the printed
in the computer design, an external interface with a USB circuit board of the HARC40 interface. The layout, which is a
connection has been developed for the H-LINK connection bottom view, includes the positions of the DIP switches and
to the CS-NET system. This external interface also makes the connections.
the application more flexible because the external interface If you install more than one interface, you must set the DIP
can be connected to a portable computer. A service switch DSW1. Refer to page 24 in TCGB0028 to get further
engineer can then use the portable computer in order to details.
monitor the systems that are not connected to a CS-NET You must not change the DSW2.
system.
You must perform the installation as shown below.
� NOTE:
All the cables must be shielded and must have a Input H-Link to
cross-section of at least 0.75mm². The maximum System USB
total length is 1000m. Connection
� Installation
Before starting the HARC installation, install the CS-NET

4
program.
Turn off the computer.
Connect the HARC40 interface to the computer by means
of the USB connector cable.
Turn on the computer. Windows will automatically detect
that the interface is connected and that the device DSW2 S2
"HARCUSB" is available at the CD/CDROM. Windows will
automatically complete the installation of the device.
Connect the CS-NET cable of the interface to the H-LINK
DSW1 S1
connection on any of the indoor units or any of the outdoor
units.
� Interface connections
The available interface connections are the following:

Terminal board TB1. (Refer to the opposite diagram).
1. Main H-LINK connection for the 2-core cable to the

system.
2. USB connection to the USB port on the computer.
� LED indicators
� NOTE: POWER When the power from the computer is applied,

POWER is continuously lit.
The power supply for the HARC40 is provided by the
USB connection. Therefore, you do not need any USB When the transmission between the computer
external power supply. and the interface is available, USB blinks.
H-Link When the transmission between the interface
Rear view of the HARC40 interface
and the system is available, H-Link blinks.
HARC1 Communication status (not used).
HARC2 Communication status (not used).
TB Power
1
USB
H-Link
H-Link USB
connection HARC1
HARC2
Page 4-31
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5. Control system
This chapter presents the control system flowcharts for the Set-Free FSN(E)/FXN(E)/FSVNE operations.
CONTENTS
5. CONTROL SYSTEM _____________________________________________________ 5-1

5.1. Device Control System ___________________________________________________ 5-2
5.1.1. RAS 5~30FSN(E) Refrigerant Cycle Control __________________________________ 5-2
5.1.2. RAS 8~30FXN(E) Refrigerant Cycle Control __________________________________ 5-4
5.1.3. RAS 3~5 FSVNE Refrigerant Cycle Control ___________________________________ 5-7
5.2. Indoor Unit PCB ________________________________________________________ 5-8
5.2.1. Layout of the Printed Circuit Board for RCI ___________________________________ 5-8
5.2.2. Layout of the Printed Circuit Board for RCD ___________________________________ 5-9
5.2.3. Layout of the Printed Circuit Board for RPI1.5~6.0, RPC, RPF(I) _________________ 5-10
5.2.4. Layout of the Printed Circuit Board for RPI-8/10 _______________________________ 5-11
5.2.5. Layout of the Printed Circuit Board for RPK FSNM ____________________________ 5-12
5
5.2.6. Layout of the Printed Circuit Board (Only RPK 1.5 FSN1M) _____________________ 5-13
5.3. Complementary System _________________________________________________ 5-14
5.3.1. KPI _________________________________________________________________ 5-14
5.4. Outdoor Units PCB _____________________________________________________ 5-15
5.4.1. FSVNE ______________________________________________________________ 5-15
5.4.2. FSN(E)/FXN(E) ________________________________________________________ 5-16
5.5. Protection and Safety Control _____________________________________________ 5-17
5.7. Standard Operation Sequence ____________________________________________ 5-19
5.7.1. Cooling Process _______________________________________________________ 5-19
5.7.2. Dry Operation _________________________________________________________ 5-25
5.7.3. Heating Process _______________________________________________________ 5-31
5.7.4. Cooling and Heating SimulTaneously Process ________________________________ 5-37
5.7.5. Defrost Operation Control ________________________________________________ 5-40
5.8. Standard Control Functions ______________________________________________ 5-42
5.8.1. Freezing Protection Control During the Cooling Process or the Dry Operation _______ 5-42
5.8.2. Overheating Protection Control of the Outlet Temperature _______________________ 5-43
5.8.3. Control of Expansion Valve for the Plate Heat Exchanger _______________________ 5-44
5.8.4. Compressor Operation Control ____________________________________________ 5-45
5.8.5. Control for Automatic Cooling/Heating Process _______________________________ 5-48
5.8.6. Outdoor fan control during cooling operation _________________________________ 5-49
5.8.7. High pressure increase protection control in cooling operation ___________________ 5-49
5.8.8. Outdoor fan control during heating operation _________________________________ 5-50
5.8.9. Preheating Control of compressor _________________________________________ 5-50
5.8.10. Activation for protection device ____________________________________________ 5-51
5.8.11. Standard Control Functions for the KPI System _______________________________ 5-52
5.8.12. Standard Control Functions for Econofresh __________________________________ 5-53
5.8.13. Solenoid Valve control for CH Unit (CH-4.0N(E); CH-8.0N(E); CH-12.0 N) __________ 5-57
5.9. Restricted control for Outdoor units _________________________________________ 5-58
Page 5-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/2 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.1. DEVICE CONTROL SYSTEM
5.1.1.
5.1.1. RAS-5~32FSN(E)
RAS REFRIGERANT CYCLE
5~30FSN(E) REFRIGERANT CYCLE CONTROL
CONTROL
Cooling process Heating process Defrost operation

Control subject
Purpose Contents Purpose Contents Contents
Inverter frequency 1. Total operation 1. 15 Hz/HP 1. Total operation 1. 15 Hz/HP All compressors
of the compressor capacity of the capacity of the while they
indoor unit indoor unit are running
2. Connection 2. 18 Hz/HP (when 2. Collection 2. 18 Hz/HP (when
according to you are setting according to you are setting
piping length the optional piping length the optional
function) function)
3. Pd 3. Pd� 1.0 MPa 3. Pd 3. Pd� 2.1 MPa
Change of the 1. Capacity control 5. Define the 1. Capacity control 5. Define the -
running compressor number of Number of
number the running the Running
compressor compressor
according to according to
the required the required
frequency when frequency when
you are changing you are changing
2. Changeover of 2. Changeover of
total indoor unit total indoor unit
capacity capacity
Expansion valve 1. Capacity control Fully open (unused TdSH Td0 = Tc + 30 � 90 Fully open
for the outdoor heat heat exchanger:
exchanger fully close)
2. Changeover of
total indoor unit
capacity
Expansion valve 1. TdSH (when you 1. Td0=Tc+40�95 1. For comp. Td>100°C and Control
for the plate heat are using the Protection EVO>430 pls
exchanger plate heat continues for 5 min.
(only 10-30 fsn) exchanger)
2. For comp. 2. Td>100°C and
protection EVI>1500 pls
and over
5 minutes
Expansion valve 1. TdSH 1. Td0=Tc+40�95 1. Temperature 1. For controlling Opening fixed
for the indoor heat difference the temperature
exchanger between the air difference
outlet and the between the air
air inlet of the outlet and the
indoor unit air inlet of the
indoor unit
2. For controlling 2. Temperature 2. For balancing the 2. For balancing
the temperature difference temperature the temperature
difference between the between indoor differences
between the gas pipe and the units between the
gas pipe and liquid pipe of gas pipe and
the liquid pipe of each indoor the liquid pipe of
the indoor heat unit = 4 deg each indoor unit
exchanger
3. For balancing
the temperature
differences
between the
gas pipe and
the liquid pipe of
each indoor unit
Page 5-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/3

Control subject
Outdoor fan Pd 1. 2.3�Pd�2.7 1. Fix according 1. PWM control Stoppage
(MPa) to the outdoor by DC motor
PWM control temperature and outdoor Temp.
by DC the operation + constant speed
motor + constant capacity fan
speed fan
Solenoid valve 1. For equalizing 1. When you are 1. For equalizing 1. When you are -
equalized pressure the pressure of turning on the the pressure turning on the
(SVA) the inverter power supply, of the inverter power supply,
compressor the inverter compressor the inverter
during the stop compressor during the stop compressor
run � stop run � stop
Solenoid valve for 1. For controlling 1. SVF 1. For controlling 1. SVF Same as
the oil return (SVF) the oil circulation ON at run/ OFF the oil circulation ON at run/ OFF cooling/heating
volume from the at stop volume from the at stop
oil separator to oil separator to
each compressor each compressor
High-pressure/ 1. For shutting off 1. SVG 1. For shutting off 1. SVG OFF
low-pressure the high-pressure ON at run/ OFF the high-pressure ON at run/ OFF
shut-off Valve part and the low- at stop part and the low- at stop
5
(only 20-30 HP) pressure part in pressure part in
the cycle during the cycle during
the stop the stop
The figure below shows the outline of the control system.

Suction gas pressure sensor
Thermistor for the air inlet Discharge gas pressure sensor
Wireless remote
Thermistor of the discharge air Thermistor of the outdoor temperature Multiple signals
control switch
Thermistor of the gas pipe Discharge gas thermistor
Transmission
Single signals
Thermistor of the liquid pipe Thermistor for the evaporating temperature
circuit
Remote
control Operation signals
MCU
380/415V
Power source
Protection
Wireless transmission circuit
A+D A+D
circuit conversion conversion
circuit circuit
Transmission
Transmission
Inverter power
Transmission
circuit
section
circuit
Remote Inverter
circuit
Indoor unit Outdoor unit

control control MCU
MCU MCU
MCU
Relay drive Fan Protection Electrical control

Expansion valve Relay drive
control expansion valve
control circuit circuit circuit circuit
drive circuit
Indoor unit Outdoor unit

To the transmission circuit of the next indoor
unit or the next outdoor unit (H-LINK)
Symbol Name Symbol Name

MC Motor (for the compressor) CMC Magnetic contactor
MIF Motor (for the indoor fan) RVR 1, 2 4-way valve
MOF 1, 2 Motor (for the outdoor fan) SV A, F, G Solenoid valve (for the gas bypass)
MS Motor (for the auto-louver) PSC Pressure switch
MV 1, 2, B Electronic expansion valve CT Current transformer
CH Crankcase heater
Page 5-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/4 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.1.2. RAS-8~32FXN(E)
RAS 8~30FXN(E) REFRIGERANT CYCLE CONTROL
Only Cooling, Mainly Cooling Only Heating, Mainly Heating Defrosting
Control Subject
Inverter frequency For controlling 1. Collection according For controlling Pdo is setted by piping 1. Comp.: All runing
of the compressor suction to piping length and discharge length: 2. Within 1 minute at
Pre.: Ps piping lift. Pre.: Pd Pdo=2.80 ~ 2.95MPa starting of defrost
2. Outdoor Temp. operation, const.
3. Pso is setted by inverter Comp. + inv.
frequency of comp.: Comp. (30Hz)
0.53 ~ 0.82MPa 3. After 1 minute,
(Outdoor Temp. � 5°C specified
(Ps changes according comp. freq.
to (1), (2), (3) and
indoor temp.)
Expansion valve For controlling 1. Basically fully open For controlling Td0 = Tc + 30 � 90 Fully open
for the outdoor discharge temp. of discharge
heat exchanger Pre.: Pd gas
Td (TdSH)
2. After O.U. reaching
minimum fan step,
controls Pd
(Pdo is shown in
“Outdoor Fan”)
Expansion valve For controlling temp. Td0 = Tc + 30 � 90 Fully close Fully close
for the plate heat of discharge gas
exchanger Td (TdSH)
Opening degree of 1. For controlling 1. Capacity control 1. For controlling 1. Capacity control Constant opening
expansion valve of temp. of heat according to temp. temp. difference according to temp. degree
indoor unit exchanger difference between I.U. between setting difference between I.U.
super-heat setting air temp. and air temp. and setting air temp. and
inlet air temp. inlet air temp. inlet air temp.
2. For controlling 2. Capacity control 2. For Balancing 2. Balancing between the
temp. difference according to temp. temp. difference other I.U.
between setting difference between I.U. between I.U.
air temp. and inlet setting air temp. and
air temp. inlet air temp.
3. For Balancing 3. Balancing between
temp. difference cooling I.U. and
between I.U. heating I.U.
4. For preventing Td 4. When Td � 90°C, drops
excessive uprise target TdSH
Outdoor fan For controlling Target discharge Pre.: Pdo Constant fan Fan speed is setted by Stop
discharge Pdo= 2.5 ~ 2.9Mpa speed outdoor temp. and
Pre.: Pd Cooling: operating I.U. capacity
Pdo- 0.48 ~
Pdo+0.4MPa
Mainly cooling:
(Pdo+0.2)- 0.48 ~
0.40MPa
Solenoid valve 1. For keeping TdSH 1. Keeping TdSH and Ps 1. For keeping 1. Keeping TdSH Close
equalized pressure and Ps at starting TdSH and Ps at and Ps
(SVA) operation starting
operation
2. For Balancing Ps 2. Balancing Ps and Pd 2. For Balancing 2. Balancing Ps
and Pd at stopping Ps and Pd at and Pd
operation stopping
operation
3. Low off coil 3. Keep off coil 3. Low outdoor 3. Ta < 4°C: ON
temperature temperature temperature
Page 5-4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/5
Only Cooling, Mainly Cooling Only Heating, Mainly Heating Defrosting

Control Subject
Solenoid valve for For Keeping inner 1. Pd Close Close
liquid-gas bypass Pre, of liquid pipe 2. Piping lift
(SVB, SVC) 3. Operation cap.
According to (1) ~ (3),
turn ON
Solenoid valve for For controlling heat In operating: tunr OFF For controlling heat In operating: tunr OFF Open
capacity control exchanger number when heat exchanger exchanger number when heat exchanger
(SVD) is out of use is out of use
In stopping: turn ON In stopping: turn ON
or OFF or OFF
according to stopping according to stopping
condition condition
Solenoid valve for For connection 1. Turn ON at SVD OFF Close Close
refrigerant return between stopping 2. Turn OFF when Td
(SVE) heat exchanger is low
and Ps
Solenoid valve for For controlling oil Turn ON/OFF according For controlling oil Turn ON/OFF according Turn ON/OFF
oil return (SVF) circulation volume to number of operating circulation volume to number of operating according to
from oil separator to compressor from oil separator compressor number of operating
each comp. to each comp. compressor
5
Suction Gas Pressure Sensor
Wireless Remote Thermistor for Air Inlet Discharge Gas Pressure Sensor
Control Switch Multiple Signals
Thermistor of the Discharge Air Thermistor of the outdoor temperature
Thermistor of the Gas Pipe Discharge Gas Thermistor
Transmission
Single signals
Thermistor of the Liquid Pipe Thermistor for Heating Evaporating
circuit
Remote
Control Temperature Operation signals
MCU
380/415V
Power Source
Protection
Wireless Transmission Circuit
Circuit A+D A+D
Conversion Conversion
Circuit Circuit
Remote Control Switch
Transmission
Transmission
Transmission
Inverter Power
Transmission
Transmission
circuit
Remote Outdoor Unit Inverter Section

circuit
Indoor Unit
circuit
circuit
circuit
Control CH-Unit MCU Control MCU

MCU MCU
MCU
Relay Relay Electrical Control Relay

Expansion Valve Fan Protection
Drive Drive Expansion Valve Drive
Control Circuit Control Circuit Drive Circuit
Circuit Circuit Circuit
Indoor Unit To transmission circuit To transmission circuit Outdoor Unit

to the next unit to the next CH Unit
of the same CH-Unit or outdoor unit (H-Link)

MIF Motor (for the indoor fan) RVR 1, 2 4-way valve
MOF 1, 2 Motor (for the outdoor fan) SV A, B, C, D, E, F Solenoid valve
MV 1, 2, 3, B Electronic expansion valve CT Current transformer
SVD 1, 2 Solenoid valve (DC) CH Crankcase heater
SVS 1, 2 Solenoid Valve
Page 5-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
� Heat exchanger mode control (FXN(E) Series only)
� 8 FXN(E)/10 FXN(E)
Control system
1 2 3 4 5 6
5/6 CONTROL SYSTEM
Simultaneously
Cooling mode Heating mo
Heat exchanger mode cooling/heating mode
Mainly Mainly
� Heat exchanger mode control (FXN(E) SeriesCooling
only) 2 Cooling 1 Heating 1 H
Cooling Heating
 RAS-8~12FXN(E)
� 8 FXN(E)/10 FXN(E)
C Cout C Cout Eout
1
Heat exchanger status 2 3 4 5 6
C C Eout C C
Simultaneously
Cooling mode Heating mode
Heat exchanger mode
4-way valve 211 ON cooling/heating
ON mode
OFF OFF OFF OFF
212 OFF Mainly
OFF Mainly
OFF OFF OFF ON
Cooling 2 Cooling 1 Heating 1 Heating 2
Expansion valve of MV1 Pd Cooling
Pd Heating
0 TdSH TdSH TdS
outdoor unit C MV2 Cout
Pd 80
C Pd
Cout 55
Eout 0E TdS
Heat exchanger status
Expansion valve C for C
MVB TdSH TdSH
Eout 0C 0C 0E 0
plate heat exchanger
4-way valve 211 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
212 OFF OFF OFF OFF
� Heat exchanger and valve location of 8FXN(E)/10FXN(E) OFF ON
Expansion valve of MV1 Pd Pd 0 TdSH TdSH TdSH
outdoor unit MV2
211 Pd 80 Pd 55 0 TdSH
Expansion valve for MV1
MVB TdSH TdSH 0 0 0 0
plate heat exchanger 212
MV2 (Pulse)
� Heat
 Heatexchanger
exchanger and valve
and location
valve of RAS-8~12FXN(E)
location of 8FXN(E)/10FXN(E)
� 16~30 FXN
211 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MV1 Cooling mode Simultaneously cooling/heating Heating mode
Heat exchanger mode mode
212
MV2 Mainly Mainly Mainly
Cooling 2 Cooling 1 Heating 1 Heating 2
Cooling2 Cooling1 Heating
� RAS-16~32FXN(E)
 16~30 FXN
C C C C Cout E E
1 exchanger 2status
Heat C3 Eout 4 Eout 5 Eout 6 E 7 Eout 8 Eout
Cooling mode C
Simultaneously C cooling/heating
C Eout
Heating mode E
Eout E
Heat exchanger mode 211 ON ON mode OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF O
4-way valve
212 OFF MainlyOFF MainlyOFF MainlyOFF OFF ON ON O
Cooling 2 Cooling 1 Heating 1 Heating 2 Heating 3
MV1 Pd Cooling2
Pd Cooling1
Pd Heating0 0 TdSH TdSH T
Expansion
valve for C MV2 CPd CPd CPd Pd
Cout E55 ETdSH ETdSH T
Heat exchanger status
OutdoorC unit Eout Eout Eout E Eout Eout E
C MV3 CPd C0 0
Eout
0
Eout ETdSH E0 E0 T
Expansion
211 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4-way valve valve for plate MVB TdSH TdSH 0 0 0 0 0 0
212 heatOFF
exchanger OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
Expansion MV1Solenoid
Pd valve Pd SVD1 ON Pd ON 0 ON 0 OFFTdSH OFFTdSH OFFTdSH ON O
valve for MV2for capacity
Pd Pd Pd Pd 55 TdSH TdSH TdSH
Outdoor unit SVD2 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF O
MV3control
Pd 0 0 0 TdSH 0 0 TdSH
Expansion Solenoid valve SVE1 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF O
valve for plate MVBfor refrigerant
TdSH TdSH 0 0 0 0 0 0
heat exchanger return SVE2 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF O
Solenoid valveSVD1 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
for capacity � Heat exchanger and valve location of 16 FXN~30FXN
control SVD2 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
Solenoid valve 212
SVE1 211OFF MV2 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
for refrigerant
return MV3
SVE2 OFF 212 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
SVD2 MV1 (pulse)
SVE2 SVD1of RAS-16~32FXN(E)
� Heat
 Heatexchanger
exchangerand valve
and location
valve location of 16 FXN~30FXN
SVE1
211
212
MV2
� NOTES:
1. Heat Exchanger Status
MV3 212 C: Used as Condensor
SVD2 MV1 E: Used as Evaporator
SVE2 SVD1 Cout/Eout: Out of use
SVE1 2. Control Method
� NOTES:
Pd: PID control of Pd
TdSH: PID control of Td superheat
1. Heat Exchanger Status
C: Used as Condensor
E: Used as Evaporator
Cout/Eout: Out of use
2. Control Method
Pd: PID control of Pd
TdSH: PID control of Td superheat
Page 5-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/7
5.1.3. RAS 3~5FSVNE REFRIGERANT CYCLE CONTROL

Control subject
Inverter frequency 1. Total operation 1. 15 Hz/HP 1. Total operation 1. 15 Hz/HP Fixed frequency
of the compressor capacity of the capacity of the
indoor unit indoor unit
2. Pd 2. Pd� 1.0 MPa 2. Pd 2. Pd� 2.35 MPa
Expansion valve - Fully open TdSH Td0 = Tc + Tdc � 90 Fully open
for the outdoor heat Tdo = Target Td
exchanger Tc = condensing
temperature
Tdc = Target SH
Expansion valve - Fully close 1. TSSH control Controled according Fully close
for liquid injection to the expansion
valve for the outdoor
heat exchanger
Expansion valve 1. TdSH Td0=Tc+Tdc�90 1. Temperature Air outlet temperature - Opening fixed
for the indoor heat Tdo = Target Td difference Aire inlet temperature
exchanger Tc = condensing between the air � 24 deg
temperature outlet and the
Tdc = Target SH air inlet of the
indoor unit
Outdoor fan Pd 1. 2.3�Pd�2.7 1. Fix according 1. Controled by Stoppage
(MPa) to the outdoor outdoor Temp.
temperature and
the operation
capacity
5
Equalized pressure 1. For equalizing 1. ON at �Pd� 1. For equalizing 1. ON at �Pd� -
valve (SVA) the pressure of 0.29Mpa when the pressure of 0.29Mpa when
the inverter stopping the inverter stopping
during the stop during the stop
2. Ps control 2. ON at starting 2. Ps control 2. ON at starting
3. Pd control 3. On at Pd� 3.7MPa 3. Pd control 3. On at Pd� 3.7MPa
Liquid injection valve - OFF - ON (During special -
condition)

Suction Gas Pressure Sensor
Wireless Remote Thermistor for Inlet Air Discharge Gas Pressure Sensor
Thermistor of Discharge Air Multiple Signals
Control Switch Thermistor of the Outdoor Temperature
Thermistor of Gas Pipe Discharge Gas Thermistor Single signals
Transmission
Thermistor of Liquid Pipe Thermistor for the Evaporation Temperature

circuit
Remote
Control Operation signals
MCU
220/240V
Power Source
Protection
Wireless Transmission Circuit
Circuit A+D
Conversion
A+D Conversion
Circuit Circuit
Remote Control Switch
Transmission
Inverter Power
Transmission
Transmission
Section
circuit
Remote Indoor Unit Outdoor Unit

circuit
Inverter
circuit
Control
MCU MCU Control MCU
MCU
Relay Drive Fan Protection Electrical Control

Expansion Valve Relay Drive
Control Circuit Expansion Valve
Control Circuit Circuit Circuit
Drive Circuit
Indoor Unit To Transmission Circuit of the next CH Unit or Outdoor Unit

Outdoor Unit (H-Link)

MIF Motor (for the indoor fan) RVR 4-way valve
MOF 1, 2 Motor (for the outdoor fan) SV A, B Solenoid valve (for the gas bypass)
MV 1, 2 Electronic expansion valve CH Crankcase heater
Page 5-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/6 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.2. INDOOR UNIT PCB
5.2.1. LAYOUT OF THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD FOR RCI
� PCB drawing
The PCB in the indoor unit operates with three types of
DIP switches, and one rotary switch. The location is
as follows:
LED INDICATION
This LED indicates the
LED1 Red transmission status between
the indoor unit and the RCS

transmission status between
LED3 Yellow
the indoor unit and the
outdoor unit
LED4 Red Power source for the PCB
CONNECTOR INDICATION CONNECTOR INDICATION

PCN1 Transformer 220V CN19 PCB2 Connection
PCN5 Electrical Heater for the dew prevention CN25 (Not used)
PCN6 Drain Pump Motor CN202 PCB1 Connection
PCN7 Power source (1-R, 3-S) EFS1 PCB2 Fuse
PCN201 Power source (1-R, 3-S) EFR1 PCB2 Fuse
PCN203 DC-Motor control EFR2 PCB1 Fuse
PCN301 Terminal Board Connection SWITCH INDICATION
PCN302 PCB2 Connection DSW3 Capacity code
THM1 Air inlet DSW5 Ref. cycle N°
THM2 Air outlet DSW7 Fuse recovery
THM3 Liquid pipe RSW Setting of the indoor unit number
THM4 Remote Thermistor
THM5 Gas pipe
CN1 Transformer (pin 1-2: 17.3V / pin 3-4: 20.8V) � NOTE:
CN2 Control circuit for the outdoor unit H-LINK
Figures show setting before shipment or after
CN3 Input optional functions selection.
CN4 Input optional functions Not mark "�" indicates pin position is not affecting.
CN7 Output optional functions
CN8
CN11
Output optional functions
Expansion valve control
� CAUTION:
Before setting dips switches, firstly turn off power
CN14 Float Switch source and set the position of the dips switches. If the
CN17 Swing louver motor 4 switches are set without turning off the power source,
the contents of the setting are invalid.
Page 5-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/7
5.2.2. LAYOUT OF THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD FOR RCD
� PCB drawing
The PCB in the indoor unit operates with four types of
DIP switches, one sliding switch and one rotary switch.
The location is as follows:
LED INDICATION

LED2 Yellow
outdoor unit
CONNECTOR INDICATION
PCN1 Transformer 220V CONNECTOR INDICATION
PCN2 Internal thermostat for the indoor fan motor CN19 PCB1 Connection
PCN3 PCB2 connection CN25 PCB2 wireless receiver part connection
PCN4 (Not used) CN201 PCB1 Connection
PCN5 Relay on PCB EFS1 PCB1 Fuse
PCN6 Drain Pump Motor EFR1 PCB1 Fuse
PCN201 Power source (1-R, 3-S) EFR2 PCB1 Fuse
PCN202 Fan Motor SWITCH INDICATION
PCN203 Capacitor DSW3 Capacity code
PCN301 Terminal Board Connection DSW5 Ref. cycle N°
PCN302 PCB1 Connection DSW6 Model code
THM1 Air inlet DSW7 Fuse recovery
THM2 Air outlet RSW Setting of the indoor unit number
THM3 Liquid pipe
THM4 Remote Thermistor
THM5 Gas pipe
� NOTE:
CN1 Transformer (pin 1-2: 17.3V / pin 3-4: 20.8V) Figures show setting before shipment or after
CN2 Control circuit for the outdoor unit H-LINK selection.
CN3 Input optional functions Not mark "�" indicates pin position is not affecting.
CN4 Input optional functions
CN7 Output optional functions � CAUTION:
CN8 Output optional functions Before setting dips switches, firstly turn off power
CN11 Expansion valve control source and set the position of the dips switches. If the
CN14 Float Switch switches are set without turning off the power source,
CN17 Swing louver motor 1 the contents of the setting are invalid.
Page 5-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/8 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.2.3. LAYOUT OF THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD FOR RPI 1.5~6.0, RPC, RPF(I)
� PCB drawing
DIP switches, one sliding switch, and one rotary switch.
The location is as follows:
LED INDICATION
LED1 Green Power source for the PCB

LED2 Yellow
outdoor unit

PCN1 Transformer (220V) CN1 Transformer (pin 1-2: 17.3V / pin 3-4: 20.8V)
PCN2 Internal thermostat for the indoor fan motor CN2 Control circuit for the outdoor unit H-LINK
PCN3 (Not used) CN3 Input optional functions (only two)
PCN5 (Not used) CN7 Output optional functions (only two)
PCN6 Drain pump motor (RPI) CN8 Output optional functions (#1 #2, only one)
PCN7 Power source (1-R, 2-S, 3-N, 4-E) CN11 Expansion valve control
PCN8 Capacitor CN12 Remote control bridge connector for multiple units
PCN10 Fan motor power CN13 Remote control SW
PCN11 Fan motor speed control CN14 Float switch (/RPI)
THM1 Air inlet CN17 Swing louver motor
THM2 Outlet air SWITCH INDICATION
THM3 Liquid pipe DSW3 Capacity code
THM4 Remote thermistor (THM-R2 AE) DSW5 Ref. cycle N°
THM5 Gas pipe DSW6 Model code
EF1 Fuse DSW7 Fuse recovery and remote control selector
EF2 Fuse RSW Setting of the indoor unit number
EFS1 PCB2 Fuse SSW Selector SW (PC-2H2/PC-P1HE)
EFR2 PCB2 Fuse
� NOTE: � CAUTION:
The mark "�" indicates position of dips switches. Before setting dips switches, firstly turn off power
Figures show setting before shipment or after source and set the position of the dips switches. If the
selection. switches are set without turning off the power source,
Not mark "�" indicates pin position is not affecting. the contents of the setting are invalid.
Page 5-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/9
5.2.4. LAYOUT OF THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD FOR RPI 8/10
� PCB drawing
DIP switches and one rotary switch. The location is as
follows:
LED INDICATION

LED3 Yellow
outdoor unit
PCN1 Transformer (220V)
CN1 Transformer (pin 1-2: 17.3V / pin 3-4: 20.8V)
5
PCN2 Internal thermostat for the indoor fan motor CN2 Control circuit for the outdoor unit H-LINK
PCN3 (Not used) CN3 Input optional functions (only two)
PCN5 (Not used) CN7 Output optional functions (only two)
PCN6 Drain pump motor (RPI) CN8 Output optional functions (#1 #2, only one)
PCN7 Power source (1-R, 2-S, 3-N, 4-E) CN11 Expansion valve control
PCN8 Capacitor CN12 Remote control bridge connector for multiple units
PCN10 Fan motor power CN13 Remote control SW
PCN11 Fan motor speed control CN14 Float switch (/RPI)
THM1 Air inlet CN17 Expansion Valve Control
THM3 Liquid pipe DSW3 Capacity code
THM4 Remote thermistor (THM-R2 AE) DSW5 Ref. cycle N°
THM5 Gas pipe DSW6 Model code
EF1 Fuse DSW7 Fuse recovery and remote control selector
EF2 Fuse RSW Setting of the indoor unit number
EFS1 PCB2 Fuse
EFR2 PCB2 Fuse
Page 5-11
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/10 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.2.5. LAYOUT OF THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD FOR RPK FSNM
� PCB drawing
The PCB in the indoor unit operates with four types
of DIP switches, one sliding switch, one rotary switch
and one push switch. The location is as follows:
LED INDICATION

LED3 Yellow
outdoor unit

PCN1 Transformer 220V CN22 Swing louver motor 2
PCN7 Power source (1-R, 3-S) CN25 PCB2 wireless receiver part connection
THM1 Air inlet CN26 PCB1 (P) connection
THM2 Air outlet CN27 Not used
THM3 Liquid pipe CN28 PCB1 (M) connection
THM5 Gas pipe CN29 Fan motor
EF1 PCP1(P) Fuse CN201 PCB1 wireless receiver part connection
EF2 PCP1(P) Fuse CN202 LEDs checking control
EF4 PCP1(M) Fuse CN303 Not used
EF5 PCP1(P) Fuse SWITCH INDICATION
CN1 Transformer (pin 1-2: 17.3V / pin 3-4: 20.8V) PSW301 Switch for the emergency operation
CN2 Control circuit for the outdoor unit H-LINK DSW2 Optional functions
CN3 Input optional functions DSW3 Capacity code
CN4 Input optional functions DSW5 Ref. cycle N°
CN7 Output optional functions DSW7 Fuse recovery
CN8 Output optional functions RSW Setting of the indoor unit number
CN11 Expansion valve control
CN13 Remote control SW
CN17 Swing louver motor 1
Page 5-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/11
5.2.6. LAYOUT OF THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ONLY RPK-1.5FSN1M)
� PCB drawing
The PCB in the indoor unit operates with four types
of DIP switches, one sliding switch, one rotary switch
and one push switch. The location is as follows:
LED INDICATION

LED2 Yellow transmission status between
LED4 Red
outdoor unit
CONNECTOR INDICATION SWITCH INDICATION

THM1 Air inlet PSW301 Switch for the emergency operation
THM2 Air outlet DSW2 Optional functions
THM3 Freeze Protection DSW3 Capacity code
THM5 Gas pipe DSW5 Ref. cycle N°
CN2 Control circuit for the outdoor unit H-LINK DSW7 Fuse recovery
CN3 Input optional functions RSW Setting of the indoor unit number
CN7 Output optional functions
CN14 Expansion valve control
CN17 Swing louver motor
CN25 PCB3 wireless receiver part connection
CN29 Fan motor
Page 5-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/13
5.3. COMPLEMENTARY SYSTEM
5.3.1. KPI
� PCB drawing
LED INDICATION

transmission status
LED2 Yellow
between the indoor unit
and the RCS
transmission status
LED4 Red
between the indoor unit
and the outdoor unit

PCN1 Transformer (220V) CN401 Fan motor relay
PCN5 Relay on PCB1 CN402 Fan motor relay
PCN7 Power source (1-R, 2-S, 3-N, 4-E) CN403 Fan motor relay
THM1 Air inlet CN404 Fan motor relay
EF1 Fuse DSW3 Capacity code
EF2 Fuse DSW5 Ref. cycle N°
EFS1 Fuse DSW6 Model code
EFR1 Fuse DSW7 Fuse recovery and remote control selector
CN1 Transformer (pin 1-2: 17.3V / pin 3-4: 20.8V) RSW Setting of the indoor unit number
CN2 Control circuit for the outdoor unit H-LINK SW1 Selector SW (PC-2H2/PC-P1HE)
CN3 Input optional functions (only two)
CN4 Input optional functions
CN7 Output optional functions (only two)
CN8 Output optional functions (#1 #2, only one)
CN11 PCB3 Connection
CN12 Remote control bridge connector for multiple units
CN17 PCB2 Connection
Page 5-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/14 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.4. OUTDOOR UNITS PCB
5.4.1. FSVNE
LED INDICATION
Power source for PCB1
LED1
Normal condition: activated
(red)
Abnormal condition: deactivated
SEG1 SEG2 This LED2 indicates the transmission status between
DSW3 DSW4
LED2 PCB1 and PCB3
(green) Normal condition: flickering
DSW6 DSW1 DSW2 Abnormal condition: activated or deactivated
This LED3 indicates the transmission status between
LED3 the indoor unit and the outdoor unit
(yellow) Normal condition: flickering
DSW5
Abnormal condition: activated or deactivated
DIP SWITCH INDICATION

DSW1 Setting of the test run
DSW2 Setting of the optional funtions
5
Setting of the capacity code
DSW3 Outdoor unit capactity is set acording tp the nominal
capacity (HP)
DSW4 Setting of the outdoor unit number
DSW5 Transmission setting of End of terminal resistence
DSW6 Setting Conditions for piping length & lift Piping length
SWITCH INDICATION
Manual defrost operation switch
PSW1 The defrost operation is manually available under the
forced defrost area
Available optional function
PSW2
Settings can be selected by means of the 7-segment
PSW3
display
Page 5-15
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/15
5.4.2. FSN(E)/FXN(E)
� PCB drawing
The PCB in the outdoor unit is operating:
5~22
5~20 FSN(E)/FXN(E) 24~32
24/30 FSN(E)/FXN(E)
FSN/FXN
DIP SWITCH INDICATION SWITCH INDICATION

DSW1 Setting of the outdoor unit number Manual defrost operation switch
Setting of the capacity code PSW1 The defrost operation is manually available under the
DSW2 Outdoor unit capacity is set according to the nominal forced defrost area
capacity (HP) Available optional function
PSW2
Setting of the height difference PSW3 Settings can be selected by means of the 7-segment
DSW3 The height difference between the outdoor unit and the display
indoor unit LED INDICATION
A. Test run for the cooling or the heating Power source for PCB1
an outdoor unit can be run for testing. When LED1
Normal condition: activated
you have finished the testing, reset the function (red)
Abnormal condition: deactivated
DSW4 B. Enforced stoppage compressor This LED2 indicates the transmission status between
When you are performing the test run or the PCB1 and PCB3
LED2
inspection, you can force the compressors
(green) Normal condition: flickering
to stop in order to ensure your safety
Abnormal condition: activated or deactivated
DSW5 Emergency operation of the compressor
This LED3 indicates the transmission status between
DSW6 Piping length
LED3 the indoor unit and the outdoor unit
DSW7 Power supply setting (yellow) Normal condition: flickering
DSW10 Transmission setting Abnormal condition: activated or deactivated
CN16 Output setting of the outdoor unit
CN17
Input setting of the outdoor unit
CN18
Page 5-16
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/16 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.5. PROTECTION AND SAFETY CONTROL
Compressor protection
The following devices and their combinations protect the
compressor:
This switch cuts out the operation of the compressor when the discharge pressure exceeds
High-Pressure switch
the setting.
This band heater protects against the oil carry-over during the cold starting, as the band heater is
Oil heater
energized while the compressor is stopped.
Internal thermostat that is embedded in the fan motor winding: this internal thermostat cuts out the
Fan motor protection
operation of the fan motor when the temperature of the fan motor winding exceeds the setting.
5.6. SAFETY AND CONTROL DEVICE SETTING

� RAS-FSN(E)/FXN(E)
RAS-FSN(E)/FXN(E)
Model
Model RAS-5
RAS-5FSN RAS-8
RAS-8 RAS-10
RAS-10 RAS-12
RAS-16 RAS-14
RAS-20 RAS-16
RAS-24 RAS-18
RAS-30
For compressor
Compressor Automatic reset, non-adjustable
Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable (each one for each compressor)
Pressure
pressure switchesSwitches (each one4.15
for each
-0.05 compressor)
High Cut-Out MPa -0.15
High Cut-out MPa - 0 .05
4.15 .15
5
Cut-In MPa 3.20 ±-00.15
Fuse
Cut-in MPa 3.20 � 0.15
Fuse 3~, 400V, 50Hz A 20x2 20x4 20x4 20x4 20x6 20x6 20x6
3~, 380/415, 50Hz A 20x2 20x4 20x4 20x6 20x8 20x10 20x12
FSN(E) 40 40x3 40x3 40x3
Oil Heater
OilCapacity
heater FSN(E) W 40 40x2
40x2 40x2
40x2 40x2
40x3 40x4 40x5 40x6
FXN(E) W - - 40x5 40x5
capacity FXN(E) - 40x2 40x2 40x4 40x5 40x6 40x7
CCP Timer Non-Adjustable
CCP timer Non-adjustable
Setting timeTime min
Setting min 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
For the condenser
Condenser fanMotor
Fan motor Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable
Automatic reset, non-adjustable
(each one for each compressor)
InternalInternal Thermostat
thermostat (each one for each compressor)
Cut-Out ºC 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5
Cut-In Cut-out °C 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5
ºC 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15
Cut-in °C 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15
For Control Circuit
ForFuse
controlCapacity
circuit on PCB A 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Fuse capacity on PCB A 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
CCP Timer: Enforced 3 minutes operation and stoppage.
� RAS-FSVNE
Model RAS-3FSVNE RAS-(4/5)FSVNE
For Compressor Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable
Pressure Switches (each one for each compressor)
-0.05 -0.05
High Cut-Out MPa 4.15 4.15
-0.15 -0.15
Cut-In MPa 3.20 � 0.15 3.20 � 0.15
For Control
Fuse
1~,220/240V,50Hz A 40 50
Setting Time min. 3 3
For Condenser Fan Motor Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable
Internal Thermostat (each one for each motor)
o
Cut-Out C 120 � 5 120 � 5
For Condenser Fan Motor
Fuse capacity on PCB A 5 5
Page 5-17
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
compressor:
This switch cuts out the operation of the compressor when the discharge pressure exceeds
High-Pressure switch
the setting.
Control system
This band heater protects against the oil carry-over during the cold starting, as the band heater is
Oil heater
energized while the compressor is stopped.
Internal thermostat that is embedded in the fan motor winding: this internal thermostat cuts out the
Fan motor protection
operation of the fan motor when the temperature of the fan motor winding exceeds the setting.
Model RAS-20 RAS-22 RAS-24 RAS-26 RAS-28 RAS-30 RAS-32
5.6.ForSAFETY
Compressor AND CONTROL DEVICE SETTING
Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable (each one for each compressor)
Pressure Switches
High Cut-Out MPa
� RAS-FSN(E)/FXN(E)
Cut-In MPa 3.20 ± 0.15
Fuse Model RAS-5FSN RAS-8 RAS-10 RAS-16 RAS-20 RAS-24 RAS-30

For compressor 3~, 400V, 50Hz A 20x8 20x8 20x10 reset, non-adjustable
Automatic 20x10 20x12 20x12 20x12
pressure switches (each one for each compressor)
High Cut-outFSN(E)
MPa 40X4 40x4 40x5 4.15
- 040x5
.05 40x6 40x6 40x6
Oil Heater -0 .15
W
Capacity
Cut-inFXN(E)
MPa 40X5 40X5 40X6 40X6
3.20 � 0.15 - 40x7 40x7
Fuse CCP Timer Non-Adjustable

3~, 380/415, 50Hz A 20x2 20x4 20x4 20x6 20x8 20x10 20x12
Setting Time min 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
For CondenserFSN(E)
Fan Motor Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable
Oil heater Internal Thermostat 40 40x2 40x2 (each one40x3 40x4
for each compressor) 40x5 40x6
W
capacity Cut-Out FXN(E) ºC - 130±5 40x2130±5 40x2130±5 40x4130±5 40x5130±5 40x6130±5 40x7130±5
Cut-In ºC 83±15 83±15 83±15 Non-adjustable
83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15
CCP timer
min
ForSetting
Controltime
Circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Fuse Capacity on PCB
For the condenser fan motor Automatic reset, non-adjustable
Internal
CCP thermostat
Timer: Enforced 3 minutes operation and stoppage. (each one for each compressor)
Cut-out °C 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5 130±5
Cut-in °C 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15 83±15
For control circuit
Fuse capacity on PCB A 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
 RAS-FSVNE
� RAS-FSVNE
Model RAS-3FSVNE RAS-(4/5)FSVNE
For Compressor Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable
Pressure Switches (each one for each compressor)
-0.05 -0.05
High Cut-Out MPa 4.15 4.15
-0.15 -0.15
Cut-In MPa 3.20 � 0.15 3.20 � 0.15
For Control
Fuse
1~,220/240V,50Hz A 40 50
Setting Time min. 3 3
For Condenser Fan Motor Automatic Reset, Non-Adjustable
Internal Thermostat (each one for each motor)
o
Cut-Out C 120 � 5 120 � 5
For Condenser Fan Motor
Fuse capacity on PCB A 5 5
Page 5-18
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/17
5.7. STANDARD OPERATION SEQUENCE
5.7.1. COOLING PROCESS

� FSN(E) I.U.: Indoor unit
O.U.: Outdoor unit
Power to CH2: ON (8, 10, 12HP)
Power to CH2, CH3: ON (14, 16HP)
Power to CH2, CH3, CH4: ON (18, 20, 22HP)
Power to CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5: ON (24, 26HP)
Power to CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6: ON (28, 30, 32HP)
(16~32HP)
(30/32HP)
(24~32HP)
(18~32HP)
(14~32HP)
(8~32HP)
(8~32HP)
Page 5-19
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/18 CONTROL SYSTEM
� Cooling process (FSN(E), cont.)
(16~32HP)
Page 5-20
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/19
� FXN(E) I.U.: Indoor unit

O.U.: Outdoor unit
Power to CH2, CH3: ON (16HP)
Power to CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6: ON (30, 32HP)
(16~32HP)
(32HP)
(24~32HP)
(20~32HP)
(16~32HP)
(8~32HP)
(8~32HP)
Page 5-21
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/20 CONTROL SYSTEM
� Cooling process (FXN(E), cont.)
(16~32HP)
Page 5-22
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/21
� FSVNE I.U.: Indoor unit

O.U.: Outdoor unit
(*) Td: Top compressor temp
Page 5-23
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/22 CONTROL SYSTEM
� Cooling process (FSVNE, cont.)
(16~32HP)
Page 5-24
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/23
5.7.2. DRY OPERATION

O.U.: Outdoor unit
(16~32HP)
(30/32HP)
(24~32HP)
(18~32HP)
(14~32HP)
(8~32HP)
(8, 32HP) (8, 32HP) (8, 32HP)
Page 5-25
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/24 CONTROL SYSTEM
� Dry operation (FSN(E), cont.)
(16~32HP)
Page 5-26
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/25

O.U.: Outdoor unit
5
(16~32HP)
(32HP)
(24~32HP)
(20~32HP)
(16~32HP)
(8~32HP)
Page 5-27
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/26 CONTROL SYSTEM
� Dry operation (FXN(E), cont.)
(16~32HP)
Discharge pressure value (MPa)

Discharge Pressure
8FXNE
Value (MPa)
16FXN 24FXN
10FXNE 16FXN(E)
8FXN(E) 18FXN 26FXN
24FXN(E)
12FXNE 20FXN(E)
10FXN(E) 20FXN 30FXN
30FXN(E)
22FXN 32FXN
Cooling 2.7 2.7 2.65
a Cooling 2.7 2.7 2.65
a Mainly
Mainly cooling 2.9
2.9 2.9
2.9 2.85
2.85
cooling
b Cooling 2.3 2.15 2.02
Cooling 2.3 2.15 2.02
b Mainly
Mainly
cooling 2.5 2.5 2.5
2.5 2.5 2.5
cooling
Page 5-28
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/27

O.U.: Outdoor unit
Page 5-29
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/28 CONTROL SYSTEM
� Dry operation (FSVNE, cont.)
Page 5-30
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/29
5.7.3. HEATING PROCESS

O.U.: Outdoor unit
Power to CH2, CH3: ON (14, 16HP)
Power to CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6: ON (28, 30, 32HP)
(30/32HP)
(24~32HP)
(18~32HP)
(14~32HP)
(8~32HP)
(8~32HP)
Page 5-31
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/30 CONTROL SYSTEM
� Heating Process (FSN(E), cont.)
Page 5-32
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/31

O.U.: Outdoor unit
5
(32HP)
(24~32HP)
(20~32HP)
(16~32HP)
(8~32HP)
Page 5-33
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/32 CONTROL SYSTEM
� Heating Process (FXN(E), cont.)
Page 5-34
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/33

O.U.: Outdoor unit
Page 5-35
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/34 CONTROL SYSTEM
� Heating Process (FSVNE, cont.)

EVJ: (Liquid Injection Expansion Valve)
(1) Possibility can open for definite
periode of time when outdoor temp
�-6 °C at compressor start
Page 5-36
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/35
5.7.4. COOLING AND HEATING SIMULTANEOUSLY PROCESS

O.U.: Outdoor unit
(16~32HP)
(32HP)
(24~32HP)
(20~32HP)
(16~32HP)
(8~32HP)
Page 5-37
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/36 CONTROL SYSTEM
� Cooling and Heating Simultaneously Process (FXN(E), cont.)
Page 5-38
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/37
� Cooling and Heating Simultaneously Process (FXN(E), cont.)
Page 5-39
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/38 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.7.5. DEFROST OPERATION CONTROL

� FSN(E)/(FXN(E)
RAS-16~32FSN only)
RAS-16~32FSN only)
Page 5-40
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/39
� FSVNE
Page 5-41
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/40 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.8. STANDARD CONTROL FUNCTIONS
5.8.1. FREEZING PROTECTION CONTROL DURING THE COOLING PROCESS OR THE DRY OPERATION
Page 5-42
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/41
5.8.2. OVERHEATING PROTECTION CONTROL OF THE OUTLET TEMPERATURE
Page 5-43
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/42 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.8.3. CONTROL OF EXPANSION VALVE FOR THE PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
� FSN(E)/(FXN(E)
� NOTE:
1. Td. (*1): temperature at the top of the compressor.
2. TD (*2): Td entered the suitable temperature area by
means of PID control of expansion valve for plate heat
exchanger as shown in the graph.
Page 5-44
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5.8.4 COMPRESSOR OPERATION CONTROL
RAS-8FSN/FXN
Constant OFF
speed
compressor ON
RAS-5FSN 100
100 95
Inverter compressor
Inverter compressor
frequency (Hz)
frequency (Hz)
31 31
31 100 31 63 95 165
Target frequency (Hz) Target frequency (Hz)
RAS-10FSN/FXN RAS-12FSN/FXN
Constant
speed
compressor
OFF
ON
Constant
speed
compressor
OFF
ON
5
100 100
Inverter compressor
Inverter compressor
frequency (Hz)
frequency (Hz)
31 30
31 76 108 178 30 85 117 217

RAS-14FSN RAS-16FSN/FXN
Constant OFF Constant OFF

speed speed
compressor
ON compressor ON
100 100
Inverter compressor
Inverter compressor
frequency (Hz)
frequency (Hz)
31 31
31 63 95 128 160 230 31 76 108 154 186 256

Page 5-45
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
RAS-20FSN/FXN
No. of Units running 3

RAS-18FSN/FXN 2
1
Constant OFF Constant OFF
speed speed
compressor ON compressor ON
100 100
Inverter compressor
Inverter compressor
frequency (Hz)
frequency (Hz)
31 31
31 85 117 172 204 274 31 76 108 154 186 232 264 334
Target frequency (Hz)
RAS-22FSN/FXN RAS-24FSN
4
No. of Units running 3 No. of Units running 3
2 2
Constant 1 Constant 1
speed OFF speed OFF
ON ON
100 100
Inverter compressor
Inverter compressor
frequency (Hz)
frequency (Hz)
31 31
31 85 117 172 204 259 291 361 31 76 108 154 186 232 264 310 342 412
RAS-24FXN
4
Constant 1
speed
OFF
compressor ON
100
Inverter compressor
frequency (Hz)
31
31 85 117 172 204 259 291 316 378 448

Page 5-46
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
RAS-26FSN/FXN
4
2
Constant 1
speed OFF
compressor
ON
100
Inverter compressor
frequency (Hz)
31
31 85 117 172 204 259 291 346 378 448

RAS-28FSN
5
2
Constant 1
speed OFF
compressor
ON
100
Inverter compressor
frequency (Hz)
31
31 76 108 154 186 232 264 310 342 388 420 490
RAS-30/32FSN/FXN

3
2
Constant
1
speed
OFF
compressor
ON
100
Inverter compressor
frequency (Hz)
31
31 85 117 172 204 259 291 346 378 433 465 535
Page 5-47
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/44 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.8.5. CONTROL FOR AUTOMATIC COOLING/HEATING PROCESS
� FSN(E)
Page 5-48
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/45
5.8.6. OUTDOOR FAN CONTROL DURING COOLING OPERATION
� FSVNE
Fan stepstep
*1 Fan at start
at start
Outlet Air Temp (Tao) Air flow (%)

Tao < 5 °C 15
(see table) 5 °C � Tao < 11 °C 20
11 °C � Tao < 23 °C 30
23 °C � Tao < 30 °C 65
30 °C � Tao 100
Discharge
pressure
Pd<2.3 MPa (*1)
5
Discharge
pressure
Pd>2.7 MPa
(*2)
No step change

Notes:Notes:
(*1) In the case that DSW6-2 (Dip Switch for setting Piping length, lift) is � ON
(*1) In case
Pd < that DSW6-2 (Dip switch for setting
2.5Mpa
piping length, lift)
(*2) In the case thatis ON, Pd < 2.5MPa
DSW6-2 (Dip Switch for setting Piping length, lift) is � ON
Pd < 2.9MPa
(*2) In case that DSW6-2 (Dip switch for setting
piping length, lift) is ON, Pd > 2.9MPa
5.8.7. HIGH PRESSURE INCREASE PROTECTION CONTROL IN COOLING OPERATION
� FSVNE
Page 5-49
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/46 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.8.8. OUTDOOR FAN CONTROL DURING HEATING OPERATION
� FSVNE
Table 1
Outlet Air Temp (Tao) Airflow Rate (%)

Tao < 15 °C 100
15 °C � Tao < 18 °C 90
18 °C � Tao < 22 °C 65
22 °C � Tao 45
Table 2
Outlet Air Temp (Tao) Airflow Rate (%)

Tao < 5 °C 100
5 °C � Tao < 10 °C 90
10 °C � Tao < 14 °C 45
14 °C � Tao < 18 °C 33
18 °C � Tao 30
5.8.9. PREHEATING CONTROL OF COMPRESSOR
� FSVNE
Page 5-50
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/47
5.8.10. ACTIVATION FOR PROTECTION DEVICE
� FSVNE
Page 5-51
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/48 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.8.11. STANDARD CONTROL FUNCTIONS FOR THE KPI SYSTEM
� Automatic ventilation mode
� Fan mode total heat exchanger ventilation mode

� Other than fan mode (cooling/dry/heating)
a. Total heat exchange ventilation mode �Normal ventilation mode

If i) or ii) is met
i) All the following three conditions should be met

A. Indoor temperature � Outdoor temperature +4°C
B. Indoor temperature � Setting temperature +5°C
C. Outdoor temperature � 8+2°C
ii) All the following three conditions should be met

A. Outdoor temperature � Indoor temperature +4°C
B. Unit setting temperature � Indoor temperature +5°C
C. Outdoor temperature � 8+2°C
b. Normal ventilation mode � Total heat exchanger ventilation mode

If i) or ii) or iii) is met
i) The following two conditions should be met

A. Indoor temperature � Setting temperature
B. Indoor temperature � Outdoor temperature
ii) The following two conditions should be met

A. Indoor temperature > Setting temperature
B. Indoor temperature � Outdoor temperature
iii) Outdoor temperature < 8 °C
Page 5-52
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/49
5.8.12. STANDARD CONTROL FUNCTIONS FOR ECONOFRESH
� Standard process (economizer)
Page 5-53
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/50 CONTROL SYSTEM
� Standard process (economizer) (cont.)
Page 5-54
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/51
� All fresh control
Page 5-55
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/52 CONTROL SYSTEM
� CO2 gas sensor control

CO2 gas sensor control should be connected to CN3# 1~2 of indoor unit PCB.
We consider CN3# 1~2 ON when contact is closed, then damper is activated and the CO2 quantity is reduced.
We consider CN3# 1~2 OFF when contact is open, then CO2 reduction is not necessary.
� Enthalpy sensor control

Enthalpy sensor control should be connected to CN3# 1~2 of indoor unit PCB, and installed outside, to detect if external
ambient humidity is too high.
We consider CN3# 1~2 ON when contact is closed, then not outside air is accepted, due to humidity is too high.
We consider CN3# 1~2 OFF when contact is open, then outside air can be used, due to humidity is accepted.
Page 5-56
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
CONTROL SYSTEM 5/53
5.8.13. SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL FOR CH UNIT (CH-4.0N(E), CH-8.0N(E), CH-12.0N(E))

5.8.13. SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL FOR CH UNIT (CH-4.0N(E); CH-8.0N(E); CH-12.0 N)
Compressor of Compressor O.U.: RUN

Solenoid connected O.U.: Stop
Outdoor Unit Status of connected I.U.
Valve of
Status
CH-Unit All I.U. All I.U. Cooling Heating
Cooling Heating OFF
Stop Thermo-Off Thermo-Off Thermo-Off
20S1 ON ON ON ON
20S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF
All Cool
20D1 OFF OFF OFF OFF
20D2 ON ON ON ON
20S1 OFF OFF OFF ON
20S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF
All Heat
20D1 OFF ON OFF OFF
20D2 ON OFF ON ON
20S1 ON OFF ON OFF ON
Cool/Heat 20S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Simultaneously
operation 20D1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
20D2
20S1 OFF
ON OFF ON ON ON
5
20S2 OFF
Stop
20D1 OFF
20D2 OFF
� NOTES:
1. This table shows steady state. In transition period, activation of values may be different.
In such case, check after 4 minutes or more.
2. 20S2 is ON only at the transition period.
Page 5-57
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Control system
5/54 CONTROL SYSTEM
5.9. RESTRICTED CONTROL FOR OUTDOOR UNITS
� FSN(E)/FXN(E)
1. Purpose 3. Applicable case
Minimize the frequency of the operation stoppage (1) Decrease in the discharge gas superheat
because of an alarm. (2) Increase in the discharge gas temperature
(3) Pressure ratio decrease
2. Procedure (4) Discharge pressure increase
(5) Inverter overcurrent
Modify the protection control after the retry operation.
(Activate the protection control quickly).
Restricted control
4. Example
Page 5-58
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Available optional functions
6. Available optional functions
Contents of parts
6.1. Indoor Units ______________________________________________________________ 2

6.1.1. Available ports ____________________________________________________________ 2
6.1.2. Configuration _____________________________________________________________ 3
6.1.3. Description of optional input signals ___________________________________________ 6
6.1.4. Description of optional output signals __________________________________________ 8
6.2. RPK(0.8~4.0)FSNM unit ____________________________________________________ 9
6.2.1. Description of optional input signals __________________________________________ 10
6.2.2. Description of optional output signals _________________________________________ 12
6.3 Econofresh Kit ___________________________________________________________ 13
6.3.2. Compatibilities ___________________________________________________________ 13
6.4. FSN(E)/FXN(E) Outdoor Units _______________________________________________ 14
6.4.1. Available ports __________________________________________________________ 14
6.4.2. Configuration ____________________________________________________________ 15
6.4.4. Description of optional output signals _________________________________________ 18
6.4.5. For FSN(E)/FXN(E) _______________________________________________________ 18
6.5. FSVNE Outdoor Units _____________________________________________________ 22
6.5.1. Available ports __________________________________________________________ 22
6.5.2.
6.5.3.
6.5.4.
Configuration ____________________________________________________________
Description of optional input signals __________________________________________
Description of optional output signals _________________________________________
23
23
24
6
6.5.5. Optional functions for FSVNE _______________________________________________ 24
6.6. Optional Functions available through Remote Control Switch ______________________ 26
6.6.1 Setting of the optional funtions ______________________________________________ 26
6.6.2. Optional Functions of Remote Control Switch ___________________________________ 30
6.7. Optional Functions Available through the Remote Control Switch (PC-P5H) ___________ 33
6.8 Optional Functions available through Wireless Remote Control Switch
(PC-LH3A + Receiver) _____________________________________________________________ 34
Page 6-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.1. INDOOR UNITS

The system has eight input and eight output optional
signals. Both signals are programmed in the PCB of the  Output connections
indoor unit: with the CN3 connector for the input signals and Indication Connections
the CN7 and CN8 connectors for the output signals.
Input connector CN3 has two ports to configure two input
options out of the eight options the system has.

The output connectors have two ports (CN7) and one port
(CN8) respectively to configure three output options out of
the eight options the system has
6.1.1. AVAILABLE PORTS

The system has the following input and output ports.
Content 
Setting of the port in the Remarks Outlet
Indication PCB of the indoor unit
 1-2 of CN3 Contact
 2-3 of CN3 Contact

Inlet.
 1-2 of CN7 DC 12V


 1-3 of CN7 DC 12V
Outlet
 1-2 of CN8 DC 12V
Connection:
The system has the following connections.
Specification of the components for a correct
 Input connections installation
Indication Connections
Component Manufacturer or Remarks
 Auxiliary relay (X2)

Specifications
OMRON Mini Power Voltage between
Relay Model: MY1F relay terminals 12
or Equivalent Vdc - 75 mA
(SS1) (X1) contact Manual Type Voltage between
(Example) terminals of the
230V - 5 mA con-
tactor
3P Connector cable De Optional part Five cords with con-
 PCC-1A (capable of nectors as one set
connecting the JST
Connector XHP-3)
Wire Voltage: 0.5 mm²
(control 12V DC.
Wire Voltage 2.0 mm²
(power) 230V
 Notes:
– The connection of the input signal is only an example. – If you install the wires along a power supply wire,
insert the wires in a metal conduit tube and ground
– Make the CN3 wires as short as possible.
one end of the tube.
– Do not run the wires along 230 V/400 V AC power
– If you use this function, it is recommended that you
cables. Separately install them at a distance of more
use safety devices such as an electrical leakage
than 30cm. (Intersecting as applicable.)
breaker or a smoke detector.
Page 6-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.1.2. CONFIGURATION
Available optional signals
Indoor units have optional signals that are described in the
following table. The configuration of the signals is performed
via remote control, except for RPK-(0.8~4.0)FSNM units
where the configuration is performed via DIP switches.
 Optional input signals
Indic. Input signal Application Display Remote Control Port

(Input signal)
 Not Set Not Set CN3


 Control by means of This signal allows to control the unit by means CN3
the field-supplied room of an external thermostat. This could reduce
thermostat (cooling) cooling problems in summer for certain


applications.
 Control by means of This signal allows to control the unit by means CN3
the field-supplied room of an external thermostat. This could reduce the
thermostat (heating) problems due to stratification of indoor air


 Function 1 - remote This signal allows to control the stoppage and CN3
ON/OFF of the unit start-up of the system from a remote place. This
optional function is very useful to hotels and


0 Function2 - turns unit

offices buildings to control the indoor units from
building management system.
This signal allows to control the start-up of CN3
6
ON. the system from a remote place. This optional
function is very useful in hotels and office


buildings to control the indoor units from the
building management system.
 Function2 - turns unit This signal allows to control the stoppage of CN3
OFF. the system from a remote place. This optional
function is very useful in hotels and offices


to control the indoor unitsfrom the building
management system.
 Cancellation of This signal stops the indoor unit and cancels the CN3
Commands from commands from the remote controll while it is
Remote Control Switch activated.


After Forced Stoppage
 Setting of the cooling This signal provides a control to change the CN3
mode or the heating operation mode from a remote place.


mode
 Input signal for the Not Available CN3

UP/DOWN grille (not
available)


 Note:
After setting an input signal, the next signal to set shown on the display changes from ”” to ””.
Page 6-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
 Optional output signals

Indic. Output signal Application Remote Control Display Port
(Output signal)
 Not Set Not Set CN7 or
CN8


 Operation Signal This signal allows to control the status of CN7 or

the machine at all times;it is very useful for CN8
centralized applications


 Alarm Signal This signal allows to activate mechanisms that CN7 or

protect from and warn of possible failures in the
unit; it is very useful for rooms that must always

 CN8
be air-conditioned
 Cooling Signal EThis signal allows to control the status of the CN7 or
machine at all times when it is cooling; it is very CN8
useful for centralized applications.


 Thermo-ON signal It is very useful to control requests from the CN7 or

during cooling indoor unit to activate the compressor. CN8


 Operation signal in EThis signal allows to control the status of CN7 or

heating mode the compressor. It is very useful to control the CN8
THERMO-OFF of the indoor units.


 Thermo-ON signal This function allows to control the status of CN7 or

during heating the compressor. It is very useful to control the CN8
THERMO-OFF of the indoor units


 Note:
After setting an output signal, the next signal to set
shown on the display changes from ”” to ”” and
to ””.
Page 6-4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
Programming with the PC-P1HE c. After selecting the indoor unit, leave the condition for
7 seconds or press the “CHECK” switch, the remote
The optional signals are programmed using the remote control switch is changed to the optional setting mode.
control switch.
 Changing the optional signals and setting conditions
 Programming and setting mode a. At the optional setting mode, the indication on the remote
control switch is changed as shown below.
Make sure the unit is stopped. Press the “CHECK” and
the “RESET” switches on the remote control switch
simultaneously more than 3 seconds, and the remote
control switch is changed to the field setting mode.
The “SERVICE” indication is displayed, and “” flickers
below it.
  The allocated port for the input signal and the output
 signal is displayed in the segments of the time indication
of the timer setting.
Refer to the table below for the displayed port and the
 Selecting SERVICE  connector of the indoor unit PCB.
When in the programming and setting mode, press the  The codes of the input and output signals are indicated in
“TEMP ” or the “TEMP ” switch, and the number the segments for setting temperature indication.
that flickers below the “SERVICE” indication will change
(  ). Set the flickering number to “”, maintain
it during 7 seconds or press the “CHECK” switch, and b. Press the Time ∇ switch or the Time ∆ switch. Then, the
the remote control switch will change to optional setting port indication at the segments for time indication of the
mode. timer setting changes as shown below. Select the port for
allocating the input signal and the output signal.
 Selection of indoor unit
6
When pressing “Time ∆”
a. In SERVICE selection mode, the indication of the
remote control switch will change as shown in the figure
below.
    
When pressing “Time ∇”
c. Press the “CHECK” switch. Then, the input signal code

and the output signal code at the segments for the setting
temperature indication changes as shown below. Select
the input signal and the output signal that you need to
 The “” indication is activated. allocate to the port.
 The address of the indoor unit for which the optional When pressing the
function is to be set is indicated in the segments for timer “CHECK” switch.
setting time indication and “ADDS” is indicated below.
  ... 
 The refrigerant cycle number of the outdoor unit for
which the optional function is to be set is indicated in the
segments for timer setting time indication and “RN” is
indicated below.  Return from optional function setting mode
Press the “RESET” switch to memorize the optional
 The indication of the setting temperature is turned OFF. functions settings and return to normal mode.
b. In previous point (a), press the “TEMP “ switch  or the
“TEMP “ switch  of the remote control switch and the
indoor unit for which the optional function is to be set, can
be changed.
 Note:
– The indoor unit can be selected among the indoor
units connected to the remote control switch.
– If both the indication of the address and the refrigerant
cycle number is “”, the settings of all the indoor
units are the same.
Page 6-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
 Selection of other Indoor Unit

When in optional settings mode, press the “TEMP ”
 Note:
– When you use a field-supplied room thermostat, select
switch or the “TEMP ” switch, the condition of the the specified thermostat as explained below:
remote control switch is changed so that the Indoor Unit
can be selected to set the optional function described Contactor Load: DC 12V
above. Differential more than 1.5 degrees
Connectors CN3, CN7 and CN8 are factory set with the – Do not use a thermostat utilizing mercury.
following optional functions
– The remote control switch must remain connected
Connector Function Factory fixed settings to the unit. When the power supply is restored, you
must start the unit by pressing the RUN button. The
N0. Pin
compressor will then operate under the control of
CN3 1-2 (*)  Function 1 - remote ON/OFF the field supplied thermostat. All other functions are
of the unit controlled by the remote control in the usual way.
2-3  Cancellation of commands
from the remote control swit-
Inlet.
ch after forced stoppage  Function 1 - remote ON/OFF of unit ()

CN7 1-2  Operation Signal This is a remote ON/OFF optional signal that uses the
1-3  Alarm Signal level signal (ON/OFF). Connect the cabling and use the
materials as shown in section 6.1.1.
Outlet
CN8 1-2  Thermo-ON Signal during

Heating
 Note:
 Caution When you start the unit by means of the remote ON/
If you connect the Econofresh kit, pins 1 and 2 of CN3 OFF switch, the fan speed is subject to the mode that
are locked for the enthalpy sensor or CO2 sensor. is memorized in the remote control switch.
Time Chart:
6.1.3. DESCRIPTION OF OPTIONAL INPUT CN3 signal
SIGNALS
Press the RUN/STOP switch
 Control by field-supplied room thermostat (/) Control by means
of the RCS
When operating with a field supplied room thermostat
instead of the inlet thermistor of the indoor unit Connect Unit operation
the cabling and use the materials as shown in section
6.1.1.
Time
Cooling:
Signals 2 and 3
of CN3
 Note:
Operation priority is given to the remote ON/OFF
Compressor
signal or the signal of the remote control switch that is
given last.
Time
Due to the initialization of the components, picking up
the signal within 10 seconds after turning ON the main
Heating: switch is not available.
Signals 1 and 2
of CN3  Function 2 - Remote ON of the unit () (pulse signal
input)
Compressor This is a remote ON/OFF optional signal that uses the
pulse signal.
Time Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in
section 6.1.1.
Component Manufactured or Specifications

Thermostat Equivalent of YAMAKATE R7031P005,
R7031Q005
Page 6-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
 Function 2 - Remote OFF of the unit () (pulse

signal input) Time chart
CN3 signal
This is a remote OFF optional signal that uses the pulse
signal.
Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in Control by means
section 6.1.1. of the RCS
A time chart with the uses of functions 04/05 is shown

Unit operation
below. Time
Time chart
CN3 signal
CN3 signal
 Setting the cooling mode or the heating mode ()
By utilizing this optional signal, the cooling or heating
Control by means operation mode can be changed by sending a contact
of the RCS
signal from outside the unit. The operation mode is
followed by the field-supplied switch or the remote control
Unit operation
switch, which is used last.
Time
Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in
section 6.1.1.
Time Chart:
 Note: CN3 signal
Due to the initialization of the components, picking
Control by means
up the signal within ten seconds after turning ON the of the RCS
main switch is not available. (Heating)
Control by means
of the RCS (Cool)
 Cancellation of the commands from the remote
6
control switch following a forced stoppage () Unit operation
You can stop the air conditioning systems by means of Time

the signal from a building management system. Then, the
individual commands from the remote control switch are
cancelled.
section 6.1.1.
 Control by means of a remote temperature sensor
()
Time chart
By using an optional remote temperature sensor, the
CN3 signal following functionalities are available:
1. The unit is controlled by the average temperature of
Control by means
the air inlet thermistor and the remote temperature
of the RCS sensor.
2. When the discharge Air temperature exceeds 60 ºC,
Unit operation
the fan speed is increased from Medium to High or
from Low to Medium.
Time
PCB
 Note: Remote
control
Due to the initialization of the components, picking switch
up the signal within ten seconds after turning ON the
main switch is not available.
With this optional signal, you can use the B contact
THM4
by means of the optional setting of the remote control THM1
switch. The time chart, which provides the information
about when you can use the B contact, is shown below.
Refer to section 6.6 “Optional Functions available through Remote control switch Air Inlet Temperature
the remote-control switch” for more details about contacts

A and B.
Page 6-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
 Thermo-ON signal during the cooling process ()

 Notes: You use this optional signal to pick up the Thermo-ON
– The remote control thermistor cannot be used if a
remote temperature sensor is being used signal of the running compressor during the cooling
process.
– During the heating process, the function “Heating
Temperature Calibration” is automatically cancelled. Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in
(Refer to section 6.5.2). section 6.1.1.
– If you are using this remote sensor, select the location The contact of auxiliary relay X is closed when the
for installing the remote sensor according to the thermostat signal is ON during cooling mode.
following requirements:
– A location where the average room temperature  Heating operation signal ()
can be detected.
This optional signal is used to pick up the heating
– A location where the thermistor (sensor) is not operation signal. The contact of auxiliary relay X2
directly exposed to the sunlight. is closed when the heating operation signal is ON,
– A location where a heat source is not near the regardless of whether the thermostat signal is ON or OFF
thermistor. Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in
– A location where the outdoor air that is caused by section 6.1.1.
opening and closing the doors does not affect the The contact of auxiliary relay X2 is closed when the
room temperature. cooling operation signal is ON, regardless of whether the
thermostat signal is ON or OFF
6.1.4. DESCRIPTION OF OPTIONAL OUTPUT

 Thermo-ON signal during the heating process ()
SIGNALS
You use this optional signal to pick up the Thermo-ON
 Picking up the operation signal () signal of the running compressor during the heating
process. You use this function in order to control a
This optional signal is utilized to pick up the operation
circulator or a humidifier.
signal. By means of this function, you can check the
operation signal at a remote place. Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in
section 6.1.1.
You can use it to lock the operation of the fresh air intake
fan. The contact of auxiliary relay X2 is closed when the
thermos that indication is ON during the heating mode.
section 6.1.1.
Note that the contact of auxiliary relay X2 is closed when
an operation signal is issued.
 Alarm Signal ()

This optional signal is used to pick up the activation of
safety devices. The signal is normally displayed on the
However, this function is not available under abnormal
transmission conditions. Connect the wires as shown
below.
section 6.1.1.
an operation signal is issued
 COOLING OPERATION SIGNAL ()

This optional signal is utilized to pick up the cooling
operation signal.
The contact of auxiliary relay X2 is closed when the
cooling operation signal is ON, regardless of whether the
thermostat signal is ON or OFF.
section 6.1.1.
The contact of auxiliary relay X2 is closed when the
cooling operation signal is ON, regardless of whether the
thermostat signal is ON or OFF
Page 6-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.2. RPK(0.8~4.0)FSNM UNIT
The following table shows the optional input and output

signals available for the RPK-(0.8~4.0FSNM) units.
These Signals are set up using DIP switches
Setting option Connector No. Wireless PC-P1HE

Pin Nº DSW2 optional
function
Function 1 - remote ON/OFF of CN4 2-3 -
the unit
Function2 - remote OFF of the CN4 1-2-3 -

unit.
Function2 - remote OFF of the CN4 2-3 -

unit.
Cancellation of Commands from CN4 1-2 (Turn OFF JP2) -

Remote Control Switch After
Forced Stoppage
Setting of the cooling mode or the CN4 1-2 - -

Inputs
heating mode
FAutomatic operation when power - - d1

6
supply is ON
Restarting Function after Power - - d3

Failure
Control by means of the field- CN3 1-2 -

supplied room thermostat (cooling)
Control by means of the field- CN3 2-3 -

supplied room thermostat
(heating)
Operation Signal CN7 1-2 - -

Outputs
Alarm Signal CN7 1-3 - -
 Note:
– When the PC-P1HE is used, the power ON/OFF – All the other functions are set by the DSW2.
functions are only available by means of the Service 2 of PC-P1HE is not available for the RPK.-
configuration (d1 and d3) of the remote control switch. (0.8~4.0)FSNM units.
The DSW2 is cancelled for this function.
Page 6-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.2.1. DESCRIPTION OF OPTIONAL INPUT  Function 2: Remote OFF of the unit () (pulse signal
SIGNALS input)
This is a remote OFF optional signal that uses the pulse
 Function 1: Remote ON/OFF of the unit signal.
This is a remote ON/OFF function that uses the level
signal (ON/OFF). Connect the cabling and use the
section 6.1.1. Set the DIP switches as shown below:
materials as shown in section 6.1.1.
If an input signal is ON four numbers 2 and 3 of CN4, set
the DIP switch as shown below:
A time chart with the uses of the functions is shown below

Time chart
CN4 signal
 Note: CN4 signal

When you start the unit by means of the remote ON/
OFF switch, the fan speed is subject to the mode that
Control by means
is memorized in the remote control switch. of the RCS
Time Chart:
Unit operation
Signals �2 and 3
of CN4
Time
Press the RUN/STOP switch
Control by means
of the RCS
 Note:
Due to the initialization of the components, picking
Unit operation
up the signal within ten seconds after turning ON the
main switch is not available.
Time
The duration of the pulse must be greater than 200ms.
 Cancellation of commands from the remote control

 Note: switch after forced stoppage
Operation priority is given either to the remote ON/
This function, which uses the level signal, provides a
OFF signal or to the signal of the remote control
control to stop the system and to lock the remote control
switch, whichever was last issued.
switch automatically from a remote place.
Due to the initialization of the components, picking up
the signal within 10 seconds after turning ON the main
switch is not available.
 Note:
– You cannot use this option with the “Remote Control 1”
function nor with the “Remote Cooling/Heating Mode
 Function 2: Remote ON of the unit () (pulse signal ChangeOver” function.
input)
This is a remote ON/OFF optional signal that uses the – After setting #1 and #2 of CN4 to OFF, the unit
pulse signal. remains stopped and the remote control switch is
available.
section 6.1.1. Set the DIP switches as shown below: Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in
section 6.1.1.
Turn OFF the main switch before cutting
the jumper JP2 of the indoor unit PCB.
JP1 JP2
Time chart
Signal to 1 and 2
of CN4
Control by means
of the RCS
Unit operation
Time
Page 6-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
 Setting of the cooling mode or the heating mode  Control by means of the field-supplied room
By utilizing this function, the cooling or heating operation thermostat
mode can be changed by giving a contact signal from the When operating with a field supplied room thermostat
outside to the unit. instead of the inlet thermistor of the indoor unit. Connect
Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in the cabling and use the materials as shown in section
section 6.1.1. 6.1.1.
In case of “Cooling or Heating Operation mode Setting In case of “Room Thermostat (Cooling) Function 01”, the
Change by External Input”, the signal input must be by signal input to numbers 2 and 3 of CN3; in case of “Room
number 1 and 2 of CN4. Thermostat (Heating) Function 02”, the signal input to 1
and 2 of CN3.
Time Chart:
Set the DIP switch as shown below.
Signal to 1 & 2
of CN4
Control by means
of the RCS
(Heating)
Control by means
of the RCS (Cool)
Cooling:
Unit operation
Signals 2 and 3
of CN4
Time
Compressor
 Automatic operation when power supply is ON Time
If the power supply is interrupted for short periods of time

(up to two seconds), the remote control switch will retain Heating:
the settings. The unit will start when power is restored.
Signals 1 and 2
If the power supply is interrupted for periods of time that of CN4
are longer than two seconds, the automatic restart is

required. You can set the automatic restart by changing
6
Compressor
the setting of DIP switches DSW 2 as shown below.
Time
Component Manufacturer or specifications

Thermostat Equivalent of YAMAKATE R7031P005,
 Note: R7031Q005
– All other DIP switches must correspond to the factory
settings for the particular Indoor Unit.
 Note:
– The unit will start even if you turned OFF the unit – When you use a field-supplied room thermostat, select
before the power failure. it with the DIP switch as explained above.
– All other DIP switches must keep the factory settings
for each Indoor Unit
 Restarting function after power failure
If the power supply is interrupted for short periods of time
(up to two seconds), the remote control switch will retain
the settings. The unit will restart when power is restored if
the unit was ON before the power failure.
If the power supply is interrupted for periods of time that
are longer than two seconds, the automatic restart is
required. You can set the automatic restart by changing
the setting of the DIP switches as shown below.
 Note:
– All other DIP switches must correspond to the factory
settings for the particular Indoor Unit.
Page 6-11
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.2.2. DESCRIPTION OF OPTIONAL OUTPUT

SIGNALS
 Operation Signal  Alarm Signal

This optional signal is utilized to pick up the operation This optional signal is used to pick up the activation of
signal. By means of this function, you can check the safety devices. The signal is normally displayed on the
operation signal at a remote place. remote control switch.
You can use it to lock the operation of the fresh air intake However, this function is not available under abnormal
fan. transmission conditions. Connect the wires as shown
Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in below.
section 6.1.1. Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in
Note that the contact of auxiliary relay X2 is closed when section 6.1.1.
an operation signal is issued. Note that the contact of auxiliary relay X2 is closed when
an operation signal is issued.
Page 6-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.3. ECONOFRESH KIT
The system has three optional input signals that are The signal has the following control logic.
programmed in the PCB of the indoor unit by means of
Connector Pin No. X1 Sluice valve
connector CN3 of the RPI unit.
The CN3 connector has two ports to configure the optional CN3 #1 #2 ON –
input signals the kit has. OFF On
Outdoor cooling function  does not require setting
connector CN3
These signals are set up using the remote control switch, as
explained in section 6.6.2 of this chapter.  CO2 gas sensor ()
When DSW6 of the RPI unit is set to use the Econofresh Kit, This signal allows to control the fresh air intake
connectors 1 and 2 of CN3 in the PCB of the RPI unit are depending on the concentration of CO2 inside the room.
locked Connect the cabling as shown in item  of section
6.1.1. Only pins 1 and 2 of the CN3 can be connected.
The signal has the following control logic.
6.3.1. DESCRIPTION OF OPTIONAL INPUT
SIGNALS Connector Pin No. X1 Sluice valve
 Enthalpy sensor () CN3 #1 #2 ON –

This is a signal that opens and closes the air intake and OFF On
outlet sluice valves, which provides for mixing fresh air The specifications of the components required for a
and return air from the econofresh kit, based on the air correct installation are shown in section 6.1.1.
quality parameters, thus allowing a more precise control
of the air quality.
6.3.2. COMPATIBILITIES
Connect the cabling as shown in item i2 of section 6.1.1.
Only pins 1 and 2 of the CN3 can be connected. The next table shows the compatibility between the different
optional signals.
6
Optional Room ther- Thermistor Remote Wireless All fresh Enthalpy CO2 gas
function mostat of Remote thermistor Remote control sensor sensor
of the Control Control
PC-P1HE Switch Switch
Room thermostat        
Thermistor of Remote        
Control Switch
Remote thermistor        
Wireless Remote        
Control Switch
All fresh control        
Enthalpy sensor        
Gas sensor        
 : Available
- : Not Available
Page 6-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.4. FSN(E)/FXN(E) OUTDOOR UNITS

The system has 9 input and four output signals that are  Output connections
programmed in the PCB of the outdoor unit by means of
Indication Connections
connectors CN17 and CN18 for the input signals and CN16
for the output signals.
Connectors CN17 and CN18 have two and one ports 
respectively to configure three input options out of the nine
options the system has.
Input connector CN16 has two ports to configure two input
options out of the four options the system has.
The system has 11 optional functions that are programmed
in the PCB of the outdoor unit.
6.4.1. AVAILABLE PORTS.

The system has the following input and output ports.
Indication

Setting of the port in the Remarks Outlet
Content PCB of the indoor unit
 1-2 of CN17 Contact
 2-3 of CN17 Contact
1-2 of CN18 Contact

Inputs

 1-2 of CN7 DC 12V Specification of the components for a correct

installation
Outputs
 1-3 of CN8 DC 12V

Component Manufacturer or Remarks
specifications
Auxiliary relay (X3) OMRON Mini Power Voltage between
Connection: or Equivalent Vdc - 75 mA
The system has the following connections.
(SS1) (x1), (x2) Manual Type Voltage between
 Input connections contact example terminals of the
230V - 5 mA con-
Indication Connections tactor
3P Connector cable Optional part PCC- Five wires with con-
 1A (capable of
connecting the JST
nectors as one set
XHP –3 connector)
(control 12V DC.
(power) 230V

 Notes:
– The connection of the input signal is only an example.
– Keep the CN17 and CN18 wires as short as possible.
– Do not run the wires along 230 V/400 V CA power
cables Separately install them at a distance of more
 than 30cm. (The cables may intersect.)
– If you install the wires along a power supply wire,
– The maximum wiring length is 70 m. If you use this
function, it is recommended that you use safety
devices such as an electrical leakage breaker or a
smoke detector.
Page 6-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.4.2. CONFIGURATION.
Available optional signals
FSN(E)/FXN(E) units have the following signals that are
described in the following table.
These signals are set up through the PCB of the outdoor
unit.
 Input signals
Ind. Output signal Application Port
 Fixing the heating This signal allows to pre-fix the operation mode, in this case the heating mode, CN17 and CN 18
mode independently of what the indoor unit requests. . This is very useful to set up
an unique operation mode
 Fixing the Cooling This signal allows to pre-fix the operation mode,in this case the cooling CN17 and CN 18
mode mode, independentlyof what the indoor unit requests. .This is very useful for
computer rooms where the cooling mode is fixed throughout the year.
 Demand This signal allows to stop the compressor if it reaches a certain power as well CN17 and CN 18
as to put the indoor unit in Thermo-OFF. This is very useful for installations
with high power consumption.
 Snow sensor This signal allows to plug in the fans even if the compressor is turned off. This CN17 and CN18
is very useful for cold regions where it snows, which could cause the machine
to break due to weight or ice...
 Enforced This signal allows tocontrol the stoppage of the compressor and the fans of CN17 and CN18
stoppage the indoor as well as outdoor units. This is very useful when used with the
alarm signals of the fire prevention systems.
 Current control This signal allows to regulate Current consumption and establish a maximum CN17 and CN18
demand60% consumption of 60% of the rate point. This is very useful for installations that
run 24 hours a day.
6
 Current control This signal allows to regulate Current consumption andestablish a maximum CN17 and CN18
demand 70% consumption of 70% of the rate .This is very useful for installations that run 24
hours a day.
 Current control This signal allows to regulate Current consumption and establish a maximum CN17 and CN18
demand 80% consumption of 80% of the rate point. This is very useful for installations that
run 24 hours a day.
 Current control This signal allows to regulate Current consumption and establish a maximum CN17 and CN18
demand 100% consumption of 100% of the rate point. This is very useful for installations that
run 24 hours a day
 Output signals
Ind. Output signal Application Port
 Operation Signal This signal allows to pick up the machine’s operation signal. This is very useful CN16
to start up additional systems such as humidifiers, fans and other additional
air-conditioning systems.
 Alarm Signal This signal picks up the machine’s alarm. This is very useful to warn that an CN16
alarm has been tripped.
 Compressor ON This single allows to pick up the compressor’s operation signal. It is very useful CN16
signal for checking signals during remote-control operation and for the interlock of the
outdoor unit.
 Defrost operation This signal allows to pick up the defrosting of the unit. This is very useful to CN16
signal know how the indoor unit is operating if there is an abnormal situation. .
Page 6-15
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
Programming
The optional signals are programmed through the PCB of
the outdoor unit.
SEG2 SEG1
Setting of the optional signals Input setting 1 Factory setting
The optional signals of the outdoor unit are set up from the
CN17, 1-2  
PCB of the outdoor unit and push switches PSW1, PSW2 PSW1
and PSW3 SET*
 Selection of the input signal 

If the below setting change is required on-site, perform Input setting 2 Factory setting
the following instructions: CN17, 2-3  
1. While the outdoor unit is ON, set the following DIP PSW1
switches on the printed circuit board of the indoor
SET*
unit as follows: set pin 4 of DSW4 to ON; set pin 7 of
DSW5 to ON. Because of these settings, the function
selection mode becomes available and the following  
indication appears on the 7-segment display.
Input setting 3 Factory setting
CN18, 1-2  
SEG2 SEG1 PSW1
SET*
  
Input/output Function No.  
terminal
Output setting 1 Factory setting
This indicates that function No.1 (set heating mode) is

CN16, 1-2  
PSW1
set at input 1.
SET*
2. By pressing the push switches PSW2 and PSW3, you

change the input/output terminal name. The flowchart 
shown on the side reflects the changes on the 7-
segment display when you press PSW2 and PSW3. Output setting 2 Factory setting
3. After selecting the input/output terminal name, select

CN16, 1-3  
PSW1
your required function by pushing the PSW1.
SET*
SEG2 SEG1*
 
  
*) This number is increased by 1 by pushing the
PSW2 while you are pushing the PSW1. This (*) Set
number is decreased by 1 by pressing PSW3 while
pressing PSW1
4. After setting the pin 4 of DSW4 and pin 7 of DSW5 to
OFF, the selected contents are memorized in the PCB
of the outdoor unit, and, immediately afterwards, the
function selection mode is set to OFF. The memorized
data is maintained even when the power supply wires
are disconnected. The connection details of each
function, as well as the required parts, are described in
the first section.
Page 6-16
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.4.3. DESCRIPTION OF OPTIONAL INPUT  Demand ()

SIGNALS. This is an input function to control the maximum power
that the compressor can consume. When this option
 Fixing Operation Mode (Heating / �Cooling) is turned on, the outdoor units are stopped completely,
This input function is fixed in terminals CN 17 or CN18 and the indoor units go into THERMO-OFF. Alarm “10”
of the PCB of the outdoor unit, to use it as a cooling and is displayed on the remote control. If the switch of this
heating mode. CN1 must be set up as follows function is disconnected it becomes available again.
Short circuit between the terminals 1 and 2 of CN17: set Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in
heating mode. section 6.4.1
Short circuit between the terminals 2 and 3 of CN17: set
cooling mode.  Snow sensor ()
After having pre-fixed the established mode, the remote This is an input function that turns on when the sensor
control can only be used to adjust the temperatures. detects snow on the fans. At that time the fans turn on at
Stoppage code “d1” “20”will be displayed if an attempt is full speed although the compressor is stopped.
made to change the operation mode of any of the indoor Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in
units with the remote control. section 6.4.1
Example of wiring diagram of fixing the operation mode.
 Forced stoppage ()
Outdoor Unit PCB:
This is an input function that turns on when the switch
receives a signal that causes the compressor and the fan
motor of the indoor unit to stop; alarm “10” displays on a
remote-controlled when this option turns on. If the switch
of this function is disconnected it becomes available
again.
(Cool) section 6.4.1
 Current control demand (///)

This is an input function that turns on when it detects
6
that the frequency of the compressor reaches 60% or
70% or 80% or 100%. The frequency of the compressor
is determined when the maximum current reaches the
3P Connector cable Heating established limit
section 6.4.1
If the running current of the outdoor unit exceeds the
maximum limit, the unit changes to the Thermo-OFF
condition. Stoppage cause code “10” will appear. When
the input terminal is opened during the demand current
control, the control of the input terminal is reset.
Power Supply.
SS1: Fixing operation mode switch

SS2: Changeover switch
X2: Cooling
:1 Heating
Page 6-17
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.4.4. DESCRIPTION OF OPTIONAL OUTPUT 6.4.5. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS FOR FSN(E)/

SIGNALS FXN(E)
 Operation signal () Programming

This optional signal is utilized to pick up the operation The optional signals are programmed through the PCB of
signal. It can be used to turn on or off complementary the outdoor unit.
units of the air-conditioning system,such as fans, Setting of the optional signals
humidifiers, etc.
The optional signals of the outdoor unit are set up from
Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in the PCB of the outdoor unit and push switches PSW1,
section 6.4.1. PSW2 and PSW3
an operation signal is issued  Selecting the optional function
1. While the outdoor unit is ON, set the following DIP
 Alarm signal () switches on the printed circuit board of the indoor
This optional signal is used to pick up the activation of unit as follows: set pin 4 of DSW4 to ON; set pin 8 of
safety devices. DSW5 to ON. Because of these settings, the function
selection mode becomes available and the following
Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in indication appears on the 7-segment display.
section 6.4.1.
an operation signal is issued SEG2 SEG1
 Operation signal of the compressor ()   

This optional signal is used to pick up the signal when Input/output Function No.
the compressor is ON. It can be used to check how the terminal
compressor is running at all times. It is very useful for
locking the compressor when the fans are locked. This indicates that the “Control of the indoor unit fan
Connect the cabling and use the materials as shown in during Thermo-OFF” function is available.
section 6.4.1.
Note that the contact of auxiliary relay X3 is closed when 2. By pressing push switches PSW2 and PSW3, you
an operation signal is issued change the input/output terminal name. The flowcharts
shown on the next page reflects the changes on the
 Defrosting signal () 7-segment display when you press PSW2 and PSW3.
This optional signal is used to pick up when defrosting (See the flowcharts on the next page)
turns on. It is very useful to check if the indoor unit is in
3. After selecting the terminal of the function setting,
Thermo-OFF.
select the availability function by pressing the PSW1.
4. After setting the pin 4 of DSW4 and pin 8 of DSW5 to
section 6.4.1.
OFF, the selected contents are memorized in the PCB
Note that the contact of auxiliary relay X3 is closed when of the outdoor unit, and, immediately afterwards, the
an operation signal is issued function selection mode is set to OFF. The memorized
data is maintained even when the power supply wires
are disconnected.
Page 6-18
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
   
SEG2 SEG1 SEG2 SEG1
Control of the Not Available Not Prepared Not Available

indoor unit fan
during Thermo-    
OFF in heating PSW1 PSW1
mode
SET* SET*
Available Available
 
Night mode (Low Not Available Piping length Not Available
noise)
  setting
 
PSW1 PSW1
SET* SET*
Available
 
Available
Cancellation Not Available

of outdoor
temperature limit in   Low noise setting
 
Not Available
heating mode PSW1

PSW1
SET*
SET*
Available
 
Available
Cancellation Not Available

of outdoor
temperature limit of   Fixing the Demand
function
 
Not Available
cooling
6
PSW1
PSW1
SET*
SET*
Available
 
Available
Change of Not Available

defrost operation
conditions   Wave function
setting
 
Not Available
PSW1
PSW1
SET*
SET*
Available
 
Available
Slow defrost Not Available

setting
  Not Prepared
 
Not Available
PSW1
PSW1
SET*
SET*
Available
 
Available
Cancellation of Not Available

Hot-start limit
  
PSW1
SET*
Available

(*) Set
 (*) Set



Page 6-19
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
Control of the indoor unit fan during Thermo-  Frequency range

OFF in heating mode. Outdoor unit Frequency Minimum
This optional function is used to set up the indoor unit fan capacity (HP)
conditio- maxi-
during Thermo-OFF in heating mode.
ns mum.
If it is used in standard mode, the indoor unit fan will run 5 30Hz 82Hz Except for the
conditions below
until the activation conditions of the outdoor unit are met. 8 132Hz
10 165 Hz
This optional function allows to create a cycle in which the
When Night Shift Is Not Set

12 187 Hz
unit fan runs cyclically for 2 minutes and then stops for 6
minutes until the activation conditions are met. 14 230 Hz
16 256 Hz
18 274 Hz
Operation con- Operate
20 330 Hz
dition
22 361 Hz
Under compres- When the indoor unit is at thermo-OFF during
sor operation heating operation, the indoor fan operates for 24 396 Hz
except defrost 2 minutes and stops for 6 minutes, and then 26 429 Hz
operation. repeats this cycle.
28 465 Hz
30 510 Hz
Standard mode 32 528 Hz
5 30Hz 50Hz 1. Night shift operation
2. Cooling process
8 80 Hz
3. Outdoor fan: below
Optional mode 10 100 Hz 70%
Start at random
12 120 Hz
When Night Shift Is Set
14 140 Hz
16 160 Hz
18 180 Hz
20 200 Hz
 Note: (min.)
22 220 Hz
When the indoor fan is stopped by another control, the 24 240 Hz
operation of the indoor fans is not available. 26 260 Hz
28 280 Hz
Night mode, (Low noise) 30 300 Hz
When you set the operation mode to night mode (low noise), 32 320 Hz
which is used especially during the nighttime, the cooling
capacity is decreased to 60%. You should use the night shift Frequency of the constant speed inverter compressor
operation only when the remaining cooling capacity can
Outdoor unit capacity Frequency of the 50 Hz power supply
supply the requested temperature. (HP)
 Outdoor Fan 8 65Hz
10 78 Hz
12 78 Hz
Maximum rotation
(rotating speed) 14 78x2 Hz
16 78x2 Hz
18 78x2 Hz
20 78x3 Hz
22 78x3 Hz
Outdoor Temp (ºC) 24 78x4 Hz
26 78x4 Hz
 Note: 28 78x5 Hz
The maximum rotation (rotating speed) is always
100% for the standard unit. (No limitation of the 30 78x5 Hz
outdoor temperature). 32 78x5 Hz
 Note
The maximum frequency for the 8~32 HP outdoor unit
is the following: frequency of the Inverter + frequency
of the constant speed compressor.
Page 6-20
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
 Cancellation of outdoor temperature limit in heating  Change of defrost operation conditions

mode This function allows to change the operation conditions in
This function allows to operate in heating mode without any defrosting mode.
outdoor temperature limit.
The change is shown in the following illustrations:
Operation
Normal Defrosting Condition
The factory-set Area of operation
limitation of the stoppage Temperature
range of permissible
conditions under Normal Defrosting Condition
outdoor temperature
defrost operation
in the heating 15 Defrosting Area
process, which is Operation Operation Area
Defrosting
shown in the right Outdoor heat exchanger 10
figure, is cancelled. liquid temperature °C
Suction air Outdoor heat exchanger
(pipe)
liquid temperature C (pipe)
temperature (°C) ˚ 5
-20 -15 -10 -5 56 10 15
-2
Outdoor -5
Outdoor Air temp
Air temp ( C)(°C) - 10
˚ - 13 Defrosting Operation
Starting Area
Defrosting Operation
Outdoor Temp (°C) - 15
Starting Area
- 20
 Note: Optional Defrosting Condition

Due to the protection control against the high outdoor
temperature, the operation may be OFF because the Temperature
conditions under Optional Defrosting Condition
protection control is not cancelled. defrost operation
20
Defrosting Area
Operation
 Cancellation of outdoor temperature limit in cooling Outdoor heat exchanger
15
Stop Area
mode liquid temperature °C 10
(pipe)
6
5
This function allows to operate in cooling mode without any -20 -15 -10 -5 56 10 15
outdoor temperature limit. -2

Outdoor
OutdoorAir temp -5
Operate (°C)
Air temp ( C)
˚ - 15
- 10 Defrosting Operation
Starting Area
Defrosting Area
- 20
The factory-set Operation
- 27
limitation of �the
outdoor temperature
in the heating
process, which is Area of operation
shown in the right
figure, is cancelled.
stoppage
Suction air  Setting defrosting at low-speed
temperature (°C)
By means of this option, you can select the speed of the
indoor unit fan during the defrost period.
Fan speed during defrosting

Outdoor Temp (°C)
 Discharge Air
Standard situation: Temperature (°C)
Indoor Unit fan
stoppage during
defrosting.
 Note:  Setting
Due to the protection control against the high outdoor Optional situation: airflow
temperature, the operation may be OFF because the Speed of the indoor
unit fan at slow
protection control is not cancelled. mode during the Low
defrosting. Slow
Stoppage
byThermostat
Comp.Stop
Defrosting
Heating
Heating
Heating
Page 6-21
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
 Cancellation of outdoor unit Hot-start limit External signal

External signal
By means of this function, you do not need to wait for the
compressor temperature to rise above 40 °C in order to start
Trimming
the outdoor unit.
Power consumption
 Setting according to piping length
This function tells the unit the distance between the outdoor
unit and the farthest indoor unit.
If it exceeds 100 m, a bigger diameter has to be installed
(greater than 100 m).
Time
 Setting due to low noise
This function reduces the maximum speed of the fan motor,
consequently the noise level is reduced. There are 14 steps The external signal can be generated with different
for the regulation. switches, such as that of the timer switch.
 Demand function Internal input

This function regulates the running current of the outdoor
unit. If the demanded current is above the set current, the
indoor unit capacity is reduced. The running current can be Trimming
regulated both from an external signal or an internal signal.
Power consumption
The capacity regulation is between 60% and 100%.
Time
The PCB can control the internal input.
6.5. FSVNE OUTDOOR UNITS

The system has two input and one output signals that are Specification of the components for a correct
programmed in the PCB of the outdoor unit by means of installation
connectors CN2 and CN1 for the input signals and CN7 for Component Manufacturer or Remarks
the output signals. specifications
Auxiliary relay (X3) OMRON Mini Power Voltage between
The system has 8 optional functions that are programmed in
the PCB of the outdoor unit. or Equivalent Vdc - 75 mA
(SS1) (X1), (X2) Manual Type Voltage between
6.5.1. AVAILABLE PORTS. contact example terminals of the 230
The system has the following input and output ports. V - -5 mA contactor
Settings of the port in the PCB Remarks Outlet 3P Connector cable Optional part PCC- Five wires with con-
of the outdoor unit 1A (capable of nectors as one set
CN2 Contact connecting the JST
XHP –3 connector)
Inputs
CN1 Contact
(control 12V DC
CN7 DC 12V (power) 230V
Outlet
 Notes: – If you install the wires along a power supply wire,

– The connection of the input signal is only an example.
– Keep the CN1 and CN2 wires as short as possible.
– Do not run the wires along 230 V/400 V CA power
– The maximum wiring length is 70 m. If you use this
cables Separately install them at a distance of more
function, it is recommended that you use safety
than 30cm. (The cables may intersect.)
devices such as an electrical leakage breaker or a
smoke detector.
Page 6-22
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.5.2. CONFIGURATION.
Example of wiring diagram of fixing the operation mode.
Available optional signals Outdoor Unit PCB:
FSVNE units have the following signals that are described
in the following table. These signals are set up through the CN1
PCB of the outdoor unit. No programming is required.
 Input signal
(Cool)
Ind. Output Application Port
signal
 Fixing the This signal allows to pre-fix CN1
heating mode the operation mode, in this
case the heating mode, inde-
pendently of what the indoor
unit requests. .This is very
useful to set up an unique 3P Connector cable Heating
operation mode
 Fixing the This signal allows to pre-fix CN1

Cooling mode the operation mode, in this
case the cooling mode, inde-
pendently of what the indoor
unit requests. .This is very
useful for computer rooms
where the cooling mode is
Power Supply.
fixed throughout the year.
 Demand This signal allows to stop the CN2

compressor if it reaches a
certain power as well as to
put the indoor unit in Thermo-
OFF. This is very useful for
installations with high power
 Output signal
consumption.
SS1: Fixing operation mode switch
SS2: Changeover switch
6
X2: Cooling
Ind. Output Application Port X1: Heating
signal
Alarm Sig- This signal picks up the CN7

nal machine’s alarm. This is very
 Demand ()
useful to warn that an alarm This is an input function to control the maximum power that
has been tripped. the compressor can consume. When this option is turned
on, the outdoor units are stopped completely, and the indoor
units go into THERMO-OFF. Alarm “” is displayed on the
remote control.
If the switch of this function is disconnected it becomes
6.5.3. DESCRIPTION OF OPTIONAL INPUT
available again.
SIGNALS. If this input signal is to be fixed, it must be fixed in terminal
CN2 of the PCB of the outdoor unit as follows:
 Setting the operation mode (Heating  / Cooling )
If this input signal is a set, it is fixed in CN1 of the PCB of
the outdoor unit, to use it for cooling and heating. CN1 must
be set up as follows:
– Short-circuit between Terminals 1 and 2 of CN1: set
heating mode.
– Short-circuit between Terminals 2 and 3 of CN1: set
cooling mode.
After having pre-fixed the established mode, the remote
control can only be used to adjust the temperatures.
Stoppage code “” “” will be displayed if an attempt is
made to change the operation mode of any of the indoor
units with the remote control.
Page 6-23
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.5.4. DESCRIPTION OF OPTIONAL OUTPUT Setting option DIP Location

SIGNALS.
Setting according to piping length - -
 Alarm signal ()
This optional signal is used to pick up the activation of safety
devices. R407C Piping DSW2
This function must be set in terminal CN7 as follows:
Simultaneous defrosting prevention - (Turn OFF JP5)
 Control of the indoor unit fan during Thermo-OFF in

heating mode.
This optional function is used to set up the indoor unit fan
during Thermo-OFF in heating mode.
If it is used in standard mode, the indoor unit fan will run

until the activation conditions of the outdoor unit are met.
 Note: This optional function allows to create a cycle in which the
Pin 3 of the CN7 connector is not used
unit fan runs cyclically for 2 minutes and then stops for 6
minutes until the activation conditions are met.
6.5.5. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS FOR FSVNE Operation con- Operation

dition
Programming
Compressor run- When the indoor unit is at thermo-OFF during
The optional signals are programmed in the PCB of the
ning except when heating operation, the indoor fan operates for
outdoor unit by means of the DIP switches. defrosting. 2 minutes and stops for 6 minutes, and then
repeats this cycle.
Setting the optional functions for FSVNE
The optional functions of the outdoor unit are set up by
means of the PCB of the outdoor unit and the DIP switches Standard mode
Setting option DIP Location

Indoor unit fan during Thermo-OFF DSW1 Optional mode
in heating mode Start at random
Night mode (Low noise) DSW2

(min.)
Cancellation of outdoor temperature DSW2

limit in heating mode  Note:
When the indoor fan is stopped by another control, the
operation of the indoor fans is not available.
Cancellation of outdoor temperature DSW2
limit in cooling mode
Change of defrost operation con- - (Turn OFF JP4)

ditions
Setting defrosting at low-speed DSW2
Page 6-24
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
 Night mode, (Low noise)  Cancellation of outdoor temperature limit in heating

When you set the operation mode to night mode (low noise), mode
which is used especially during the nighttime, the cooling This function allows to operate in heating mode without any
capacity is decreased to 60%. You should use the night shift outdoor temperature limit.
operation only when the remaining cooling capacity can
supply the requested temperature. Operation
 Outdoor Fan The factory-set
limitation of the Area of operation
range of permissible stoppage
outdoor temperature
in the heating
process, which is
shown in the right
Maximum rotation figure, is cancelled.
(rotating speed)
Suction air
temperature (°C)
Outdoor Temp (°C)

Outdoor Temp (ºC)
 Note:
The maximum rotation (rotating speed) is always  Note:
100% for the standard unit. (No limitation of the Due to the protection control against the high outdoor
outdoor temperature). temperature, the operation may be OFF because the
protection control is not cancelled.
 Frequency range
Outdoor unit Frequency
capacity (HP)
 Cancellation of outdoor temperature limit in cooling
minimum maxi- mode
mum.
When Night Shift Is
Not Set
3
4
30Hz 82Hz
70 Hz
This function allows to operate in cooling mode without any
outdoor temperature limit. 6
5 90 Hz Operate
When Night Shift Is Set 3 50Hz The factory-set
limitation of the
4 40 Hz
5 50Hz outdoor temperature
in the heating
process, which is Area of operation
shown in the right stoppage
figure, is cancelled. Suction air
temperature (°C)
Outdoor Temp (°C)
 Note:
Due to the protection control against the high outdoor
temperature, the operation may be OFF because the
protection control is not cancelled.
Page 6-25
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
 Change of defrost operation conditions  Setting defrosting at low-speed

This function allows to change the operation conditions in Withthis option, you can select the speed of the indoor unit
defrosting mode. fan during the defrosting period.
The change is shown in the following illustrations:
Fan speed during defrosting
Standard specification (factory setting)
(with jumper wire JP4)  Discharge Air
Standard situation: Temperature (°C)
Defrost Operation
Defrosting Operation Indoor Unit fan
Stop Area stoppage during
defrosting.
 Setting
Optional situation: airflow
Speed of the indoor
unit fan at slow
mode during the Low
defrosting. Slow
Stoppage
byThermostat
Outdoor Air temp (°C) Starting Area
Comp.Stop
Defrosting
Heating
Heating
Heating
Warm Climate Specification
(with jumper wire JP4)
Defrost Operation  Setting according to piping length
Defrosting Operation This function tells the unit the distance between the outdoor
Stop Area unit and the farthest indoor unit.
Outdoor evaporating
temperature °C  R407C Piping
(Pipe)
If is using conventional R407C refrigerant instead of R410A
refrigerant the pressure will be increased. To avoid pressure
increase will activate this function.
 Simultaneous defrosting prevention

Outdoor Air temp
(°C)
Starting Area Avoid simultaneous defrosting of several outdoor units
within the same installation. This is very useful for rooms
where there are several outdoor units.
6.6. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE THROUGH THE REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
6.6.1. OPTIONAL FUNCTION SETTING

The remote control switch is changed to the optional setting
mode by the following procedures. 

Programming with the PC-P1HE
The optional signals are programmed using the remote
control switch.
 Selecting SERVICE 
 Programming and setting mode When in the programming and setting mode, press the
Make sure the unit is stopped. Press the “CHECK” and “TEMP ” or the “TEMP ” switch, and the number
the “RESET” switches on the remote control switch that flickers below the “SERVICE” indication will change
simultaneously more than 3 seconds, and the remote (  ). Set the flickering number to “”, maintain
control switch is changed to the field setting mode. it during 7 seconds or press the “CHECK” switch, and
The “SERVICE” indication is displayed, and “” flickers the remote control switch will change to optional setting
below it. mode.
Page 6-26
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
 Selection of indoor unit b. Press the Time ∇ switch or the Time ∆ switch. Then, the
port indication at the segments for time indication of the
a. In SERVICE selection mode, the indication of the
timer setting changes as shown below. Select the port for
remote control switch will change as shown in the figure
allocating the input signal and the output signal.
below.
When pressing “Time ∆”
switch
When pressing “Time ∇”

  ...  
switch
 The “” indication is activated. c. Press the “CHECK” switch, and the setting condition of
the optional function is changed as shown below.
 The address of the indoor unit for which the optional
function is to be set is indicated in the segments for timer When pressing the
“CHECK” switch.
setting time indication and “ADDS” is indicated below.
 The refrigerant cycle number of the outdoor unit for   ... 

which the optional function is to be set is indicated in the
segments for timer setting time indication and “RN” is
indicated below.
 Return to normal mode from the optional functions
 The indication of the setting temperature is turned OFF. setting mode
b. In previous point (a), press the “TEMP “ switch  or the Press the “RESET” switch to memorize the optional
“TEMP “ switch  of the remote control switch and the functions settings and return to normal mode.
indoor unit for which the optional function is to be set, can
be changed.  Selection of other Indoor Unit
When in optional settings mode, press the “ TIME ∇”
 Note: switch or the “TIME ∆” switch, the condition of the remote
6
– The indoor unit can be selected among the indoor control switch is changed so that the Indoor Unit can be
units connected to the remote control switch. selected to set the optional function described above.
– If both the indication of the address and the refrigerant
cycle number is “”, the settings of all the indoor
units are the same.
c. After selecting the indoor unit, leave the condition for
7 seconds or press the “CHECK” switch, the remote
control switch is changed to the optional setting mode.
 Changing the optional signals and setting conditions

a. At the optional setting mode, the indication on the remote
control switch is changed as shown below.
 The indications of “ADDS” and “RN” are turned OFF

 The setting condition of the optional function is indicated
in the segments of the time indication of the timer setting.
 The item number of the optional function is indicated in

the segment for the set temperature indication.
Page 6-27
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
Setting items of the optional functions

Item. Optional functions Setting Contents of parts Content
 Removal of Heating temperature 00 Not Available This function is used to eliminate the
Calibration 4 °C shift.
01 Available
 Circulator Function at Heating Ther- 00 Not Available This function is to avoid the stratifica-
mo-OFF tion of air.
01 Available
 Enforced 3 Minutes Minimum Opera- 00 Not Available This function is used to guard the
tion Time of Compressor compressor when it frequently starts
01 Available
and stops
 Change of Filter Cleaning Time 00 Std. With this function is possible to chan-
ge the time when the remote contro-
01 100 Hours
ller advise about when is necessary
02 1200 Hours to change the air filter.
03 2500 Hours
04 No indication.
 Fixing the operation mode 00 Not Available This function eliminates the possibili-
ty of changing operation mode.
01 Available
 Fixing the setting temperature 00 Not Available This function eliminates the possibili-
ty of changing setting temperature.
01 Available
 Fixing of Operation as Exclusive 00 Not Available This function eliminates Heating

Cooling Unit mode.
01 Available
 Automatic COOL/HEAT Operation 00 Not Available This function changes automatically

from Cool to Heat
01 Available
 Fixing the air volume 00 Not Available This function eliminates the possibili-
ty of changing fan speed.
01 Available
 Not Prepared
 Not Prepared
 Not Prepared
 Drain pump in heating 00 Not Available This function is used to activate the
drain pump in Heating mode.
01 Available
 Static Pressure Selection 00 Medium static pressure (factory setting) This function is used to change the
static pressure levels from the remo-
01 High Static Pressure
te controller on the RPI units.
02 Low Static Pressure
Increasing fan speed (RCD) (RCI) 00 Normal. This function is used to change the
fan speed due to the high ceiling.
01 Increasing speed 1
02 Increasing speed 2
 Hi Speed at Heating Thermo-OFF 00 Not Available This function is used to increase the
fan speed when Thermo-OFF
01 Available
 Cancelling of Enforced 3 Minutes Mi- 00 Not Available This function is used to cancel the
nimum Operation Time of Compressor “enforced 3 minutes minimum opera-
01 Available
tion time of compressor”.
 Thermistor of Remote Control Switch 00 Control by Indoor Suction Thermistor This function is used to control the
unit with the thermistor of remote
01 Control by Thermistor of Remote Control
control.
Switch
02 Control by Average value of Indoor Suc-
tion Thermistor and Thermistor of Remote
Control Switch
 Not Prepared
 Not Prepared
Page 6-28
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
Item. Optional functions Setting Contents of parts Content
 Selection of Forced Stoppage Logic 00 Forced Stoppage Input A Contact With this function we select the for-
ced stoppage logic.
01 Forced Stoppage Input B Contact
 Not Prepared
 Power supply ON/OFF 1 00 Not Available This function retains the settings of
the unit if power supply is interrup-
01 Available
ted. The unit will start when power is
restored.
 Not Prepared
 Power supply ON/OFF 2 00 Not Available This function retains the settings of
the unit if power supply is interrup-
01 Available
ted. The unit will restart when power
is restored if the unit was ON before
the power failure
 (Econofresh) All Fresh Operation 00 Not Available This function is able to open the
outdoor air damper.
01, 02 Available
(KPI) Ventilation mode 00 Automaticventilation This function is used to set the
ventilation mode of the total heat
01 Ventilationby total heat exchanger
exchanger.
02 Bypass Ventilation (No Total Heat Ex-
changer)
 (Econofresh) Enthalpy Sensor 00 Not Available This function can set the Enthalpy
Sensor Input
01 Available
(KPI) Increasing Supply Air Volume 00 Not Available This function is used to make the
room pressure higher than the su-
01 Available
rrounded room
 Not Prepared
6
 (Econofresh) Gas Sensor 00 Not Available This function can set the Gas Sensor
Input
01, 02 Available
(KPI) Precooling/Preheating Period 00 Std. This function delays the start up of
the total heat exchanger operation.
01 30 minutes
02 60 minutes
 Not Prepared
 Automatic setting for OFF timer 00 No Function This function is used to set the OFF
timer function automatically when the
01 OFF timer by 1 hour
unit is started by the remote control
02 OFF timer by 2 hours switch.
~ ...
23 OFF timer by 23 hours
24 OFF timer by 24 hours
 Remote Control Main-Sub Setting 00 Main This function is used when to remote
control are installed in one system.
01 Sub
 Note
– You can only change the setting condition of functions with “X” in the individual settings when you select the optional
function for “all rooms”.
– Items “” through “” are not available. Do not change setting condition “”.
Page 6-29
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.6.2. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS OF THE REMOTE (Indicated Setting Temperature = Suction Air Temperature
CONTROL SWITCH –4 °C → Return to 0 °C)
1. Removal of Heating Temperature Calibration () This is useful when the thermistor at the suction side
of an Indoor Unit is removed and installed into another
This function is utilized when the temperature settings of
place.
the remote control switch and the suction air temperature
of the indoor unit are required to be equal. The following table presents the indicated setting
temperature and the suction air temperature after
In standard heating operation, the suction air temperature
removal of heating temperature calibration.
is higher than the room temperature, therefore the
suction air temperature is calibrated at –4 °C.
Activation Temperature. Set temperature on remote controller (°C)

18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Cooling On – 22 24 26 28 30 32
Off – 20 22 24 26 28 30
Heating b1= 00 stan- On 22 24 26 28 30 30 30
dard
Off 24 26 28 30 32 32 32
b1= 01 On 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
after remo-
Off 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
val
2. Circulator function at heating thermo-OFF () 3. Enforced 3 minutes minimum operation time of
compressor ()
If fan speed LOW is selected at heating Thermo-OFF,
the air of the room might become stratified because When a compressor frequently starts and stops in
warm air stagnates near the ceiling. In this case, it is short intervals, this function should be used to guard
recommended that the circulator function explained the compressor. By setting this function, the mode of a
below be utilized. minimum 3 minutes operation will be added. (The mode
of a minimum 3 minutes stoppage is standard.)
<Circulator Function>
In case of SET-FREE, this function is standard even
The function keeps the fan speed at Thermo-OFF at the
when setting is not available.
same level as thermo-ON. In this case, air movement in
the room will be kept on the same level as Thermo-ON,
ensuring a homogenous air distribution. In the case that  Note:
an Auto Louver is equipped, this operation will be also When the safety device is activated or the “ON/
held on when the heating is turned Thermo-OFF. OFF” switch is pressed, the compressor is stopped
immediately.
 Note:
Perceptions of coolness, heat and air flow are subject 4. Change of filter cleaning time ()
to personal tastes and behaviours.
The period for filter sign indication is set for each indoor
It is therefore recommended to discuss this with unit model when shipping. The filter sign is indicated
customers thoroughly and then to set the unit according to the filter cleaning time (Factory-Setting).
accordingly. However, this filter cleaning time can be changed
depending on the condition of the filter as shown in the
table below.
Period for Filter Sign Indication
Approx. 100 hours Approx. 1200 hours Approx. 2500 hours No indication.
In Case of 4-Way Casset- Changed period Changed period Factory setting Changed period
te Type
Liquid crystal display on       or  
remote control switch   (*)
(*) For the RPK model, the factory setting is 200 hours
Page 6-30
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
5. Fixing the operation mode () 17. Remote control switch thermistor (C8)
This function is utilized when changes in operation This function is utilized to control the unit by the built-in
modes are not required. When this function is valid, the thermistor of the remote control switch (remote control
operation mode that has been set cannot be changed. thermistor) instead of the thermistor for suction air.
6. Fixing of Setting Temperature () Set it at “” or “” when you use it.
This function is utilized when changes in setting However, even when this function is set at “” or “” if
temperature are not required. When this function is valid, the temperature detected is abnormal due to the failure of
the setting temperature that has been set cannot be the remote control thermistor. etc., the indoor unit suction
changed. air thermistor is used automatically.
7. Fixing of Operation as Exclusive Cooling Unit () 18. Not prepared ()
This function is utilized when exclusive cooling operation 19. Not prepared ()
is required. This function invalidates the heating 20. Selection of forced stoppage logic ()
operation and the automatic COOL/HEAT operation, as
the operation of exclusive cooling unit. This function is utilized to select the logic of the contact
for forced stoppage signal input. The setting condition
8. Automatic COOL/HEAT operation () and the logic of the contact are as shown below.
This function is utilized to operate the unit with changing
cooling and heating operation automatically.
Setting Condition
This function is invalid when the outdoor unit is cooling ↓ Logic of Sequence Activation
only model or the function of “Fixing Operation as Contact
Exclusive Cooling Unit” is valid.
– AS for FXG/FX3 series, cooling and heating operation 00 Contact A Normal. Enforced
stoppage
mode can be changed individually for each indoor unit
in same refrigerant cycle 01 B Contact Enforced Normal.
stoppage
9. Fixing of Fan Speed ()
This function is utilized to fix the fan speed. When this 21. Not Prepared
function is valid, the fan speed is not changes by the
22. Power supply ON/OFF 1 ()
6
This function is utilized to start and stop the unit
10. Not prepared ()
according to the power supply ON/OFF. When this
11. Not prepared (C2) function is utilized in the condition that there is no person
12. Not prepared () to operate the unit, make the system with monitoring for
disaster prevention.
13. Drain Pump in Heating (When the humidifier is
installed) ()
This function is utilized to operate the drain pump in
 Note:
The unit is started and stopped according to the
heating operation. However, in case of SET-FREE the power supply ON/OFF due to the power failure.
Indoor Untis do not have humidifier. When the power failure is occurred during stoppage
Do not change setting condition “” of item “”. by the remote control switch operation, the unit is
14. High speed () started again automatically after the power supply is
recovered.
This function is utilized to increase the fan speed due to
the high ceiling. (Only available for RCI and RCD Units). 23. Not prepared ()
15. High Speed at Heating Thermo-OFF () 24. Power supply ON/OFF 2 ()
This function is used to increase the fan speed with This function is utilized to start the unit operation again
function (14) when thermo-OFF in heating operation. automatically when the power supply is recovered after
(The fan speed is not increased when thermo-OFF in the power failure over 2 seconds.
heating operation at the function (14) setting). (Only The standard unit is started operation again automatically
available for RCD Units). with all the same operating conditions such as operation
16. Canceling the enforced 3 minutes mode, etc. in case of the power failure within 2 seconds.
minimum �operation time of compressor () (The compressor unit is started operation again after
In case of SET-FREE, the “enforced 3 minutes minimim three minutes guard in addition to 2 seconds power
operation time of compressor” described in item (3) is the failure as a maximum.)
standard function.
This function is utilized to cancel the “Enforced 3 Minutes  Note:
Minimum Operation Time of Compressor” function. In case of power failure during the unit stoppage, the
unit is stopped after recovering the power supply.
Page 6-31
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
25. Ventilation mode (KPI) ()

This function is used to set the ventilation mode of the
 Note:
In case that the setting airflow mode by the remote
total heat exchanger. control switch is “HIGH”, the airflow of the total heat
The setting condition and the ventilatrion mode are as exchanger is “HIGH” even when this function is set.
shown below. 27. With humidifier (indication only) (KPI) (E3)
This function is utilized to control the total heat exchanger
Setting Condition with the humidifier. However, in case of the total heat
↓ Ventilation Contents of parts exchanger of SET-FREE, the humidifier is not attached.
Mode Do not set this function. When this function is not set, the
00 Auto Venti- Selecting effective ventilation mode (Total control of the humidifier is not performed.
lation Heat Exchanging Ventilation or Bypass 28. Precooling/preheating period (KPI) ()
Ventilation) for energy savingby detecting
the temperature difference between the This function is utilized to delay the start-up of the total
outdoor temperature and the indoor tem- heat exchanger operation.
perature.
The setting condition and the delay period of operation
01 Total Heat The Heat Exchanging is performed conti- start-up are as shown below.
Exchanging nuously when the total Heat Exchanger is
Ventilation operated. Setting Condition
↓ Delaying period of Operation Start-up
02 Bypass Venti- The Heat Exchanging is not performed
00 0 minutes
lation continuously when the total Heat Exchan-
ger is operated. 01 30 minutes
02 60 minutes
All fresh operation (Econofresh) (E1)
This function is able to open the outdoor air damper. Gas sensor (Econofresh) ()
The setting condition is showing below. This function is utilized to set the gas sensor input.
Setting Condition The setting condition is showing below.
↓ All fresh con- Contents of parts Setting Condition
trol
↓ Gas sensor Contents of parts
00 Not Available The outdoor damper is fully closed
00 Not Available The gas sensor input is not available
01 Available The outdoor damper is fully open
01 Available The gas sensor input is available
02 Available The outdoor damper is fully open
02 Available The gas sensor input is available
26. Increasing supply air volume (KPI) () 29. Not prepared (E5)
This function is utilized to increase the supply air volume 30. Automatic setting for OFF timer ()
with the one-step high tap of the fan motor for supply air This function is used to turn on the OFF timer of the
during operation of the total heat exchanger, make the indoor units.
room pressure higher than the surrounded room with the
increased supply air volume and prevent polluted air and Setting Condition Contents of parts
smell from entering into the room. 00 Not Available OFF timer not set
The setting air flow model by remote control switch and 01 Available Turns OFF after running for 1 hour
the actual air flow of the total heat exchanger when ~
setting this function are as shown below. Turns OFF after running for 24 hour
24
Setting air flow mode by Air Flow of Total Heat Ex- 31. Remote control main-sub setting ()
remote control switch changer
This function is used to set two remote-control switches
LOW MED in a same insulation; one in main mode and the other one
MED HIGH in sub mode.
HIGH HIGH Setting Condition Contents of parts
00 Main The remote control switch is set as
Enthalpy sensor (Econofresh) () main
This function is utilized to set the enthalpy sensor input. 01 Sub The remote control switch is set as
sub
The setting condition is showing below.
Setting Condition
↓ Enthalpy sensor Contents of parts
00 Not Available The enthalpy sensor is not available
01 Available The enthalpy sensor is available
Page 6-32
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
6.7.
6/30 OPTIONAL
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE THROUGH THE REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
(PC-P5H)
6.7. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE THROUGH THE REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (PC-P5H)
Normal mode (when unit is not operating)

Change to the function setting mode Press the � ( ) � ( ) and � ( ) switch
simultaneously
Press the � ( ) � ( ) and � ( ) switch (see Chapter 9 in TC for more information)
simultaneously for more than 3 seconds
� Mode setting
°C Press the � � switch and select the operation mode

: Auto
: Fan
Temp. � : Cool Temp.�
Operating mode
: Dry
Mode No. �
: Heat
* Set at “Auto” in normal condition
* In the case that the remote control switch is not available, the mode is set by central station,
Mode setting is not available
�( )
� Cancellation of adjusting set temperature for heating operation
Press the � � switch and select the operation mode
°C
6
: Standard
: Cancel
Setting
Mode No. �
* In the case that the indoor units are set, at both “Standard” and “Cancel” setting, the indication
will be “�” in such case by pressing � �, all the indoor units can be set at “�” or “�”
� ( ) Push twice (option � is not used)

� Simultaneous operation setting (total heat exchanger model only)
°C Press the � � switch and select the operation mode
: A/C
Temp. � : VENT I Temp. �

Setting : A/C + VENT I
Mode No. �
�( )
� Remote control main-sub setting
Press the � � switch and select the operation mode
°C
: Main remote control switch

: Sub remote control switch
Setting When this setting is changed, cut off the power supply of
Mode No. � all indoor units after returning to normal mode
Page 6-33
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
AVAILABLE OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 6/31
6.8. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE THROUGH WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH

(PC-LH3A + RECEIVER)
You can adjust the following optional functions with the DIP � PC-RLH9
switches OPTIONAL
6.8.1. of the receiver.
FUNCTIONS
Switch (COOL)
� Remove two screws
The following optional functions can be set by the DIP and open the case
switches of the receiver part. Switch (HEAT)
DIP switch (SW3)
� PC-RLH8/9/11/13
DIP switch Hole for cable

Optional function Cover
1 2 3 4 Printed circuit board Case
Setting of sub receiver part O - - -

Identifying of Indoor Unit - O (1)
� PC-RLH11
(1) Only for PC-RLH9,11,13
1. Remove the base.
2. Remove two crews
Switch (COOL) Hole for cable and open the case
� CAUTION: Switch (HEAT)
Turn OFF all the power sources before setting the �
DIP switches.
DIP switch (SW3)

� Setting of sub-receiver part
Cover Printed Case Base
For this optional function set pin marked with � to ON. circuit board
PC-RLH8/9/11
� PC-RLH13
Open the lid of case by removing two screws so that the (To be informed later)
following functions are available.
1. Remove the base
� PC-RLH8 2. Remove two
screws and open the
� Switch (COOL) case
Remove two screws
Switch (COOL) and open the case Switch (HEAT)
Switch (HEAT)
DIP switch (SW3)
(Factory Supplied) DIP Switch
(SW3)
Hole for cable
Cover Printed circuit board Case
Page 6-34
SMGB0032-rev1 - 05/2006
Test run
7. Test run
CONTENTS
7. TEST RUN _____________________________________________________________ 7-1

7.1. Checking Procedure before the Test Run _____________________________________ 7-2
7.2. Test Run Procedure by Means of the Remote Control Switch _____________________ 7-3
7.3. Test Run Procedure by Means of the Wireless Remote Control (PC-LH3A) ___________ 7-4
7.4. Test Run Procedure from the Outdoor Unit Side ________________________________ 7-6
7.5. Check List _____________________________________________________________ 7-8
7.6. Checking the Refrigerant Quantity ___________________________________________7-11
7.6.1. FSN(E)/FXN(E) ________________________________________________________ 7-11
Page 7-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
7/2 TEST RUN
When you have finished the installation, perform the test

run according to the following procedure. After performing � WARNING:
the test run, hand over the system to the customer. – Do not operate the system until all the check points
Perform the test run of the indoor units one by one in order. have been cleared.
Make sure that the electrical wiring and the refrigerant
a. Measure the resistance between the ground and
piping are correctly connected.
the terminal of the electrical components. Make
sure that the electrical resistance is more than 1
Start the indoor units one by one in order to make sure that
M�. Otherwise, do not operate the system until
the indoor units are correctly numbered.
you find the electrical leakage and you repair the
electrical leakage. Do not impress the voltage on
You should perform the test run according to the "7.2 Test
the terminals for transmission 1 and 2.
Run Procedure" on the next page.
b. Make sure that the stop valves of the outdoor unit
are fully open. Then, start the system.
c. Make sure that the switch on the main power
source has been ON for more than twelve hours
in order to warm the compressor oil by means of
the oil heater.
– Pay attention to the following items while the system
is running.
a. Do not touch any of the parts at the discharge
gas side with your hands because the
compressor chamber and the pipes at the
discharge gas side are hot at a temperature that
is higher than 90°C.
b. DO NOT PUSH THE BUTTON OF THE
MAGNETIC SWITCH(ES). If you do, you will
cause a serious accident.
– Do not touch any electrical components for more than
three minutes after turning OFF the main switch.
7.1. CHECKING PROCEDURE BEFORE THE TEST RUN
1. Make sure that the stop valve of the gas line and the stop
� NOTE:
1. Make sure that the field-supplied electrical
valve of the liquid line are fully open.
components (main switch fuse, fuse-free breaker,
2. Make sure that there is no refrigerant leakage. The flare earth leakage breaker, wires, conduit connectors and
nuts sometimes loosen because of the vibration during wire terminals) have been properly selected according
the transportation. to the electrical data in the technical catalog of the
3. Make sure that the refrigerant piping and the electrical unit. Also, make sure that the field-supplied electrical
wiring belong to the same system Make sure that the components comply with the national codes and the
setting of the unit number of DSW1 for FSN(E)/FXN(E) local codes.
or DSW4 for FSVNE or indoor units correspond to the 2. Use the shielded cables for the field wiring in order to
system. avoid the electrical noise. (The length of the shielded
cable should be less than 1000m. The size of
4. Make sure that the setting of the DIP switches on the shielded cable should comply with the local codes.)
printed circuit board of the indoor units and the outdoor 3. Make sure that the terminals for the power supply
units are correct. Especially, pay attention to the setting wiring ("L1" to "L1" and "N" to "N" of each terminal
of the lift between the indoor units and the outdoor units. board for AC380-415V. "R" to "R" and "T" to "T" of
Refer to chapter 3 "Electrical Wiring" for details. each terminal board for AC220V) and the terminals for
5. Make sure that the switch on the main power source has the intermediate wires between the indoor unit and the
been ON for more than twelve hours in order to warm the outdoor unit (Operating Line: terminals of each
compressor oil by means of the oil heater. terminal board for DC12V) coincide correctly.
6. Check whether or not the electrical wiring of the indoor Otherwise, you may damage some components
units and the outdoor units are connected as shown in 4. If the KPI is connected to the same remote control
chapter 3 "Electrical Wiring". switch as an indoor unit, the indoor unit will not
perform the test run. You need to disconnect
7. Make sure that each wire terminal (L1, L2, L3 and N) is the KPI from the installation.
correctly connected at the power source.
Page 7-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
TEST RUN 7/3
7.2. TEST RUN PROCEDURE BY MEANS OF THE REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
Turn ON the power source of the indoor units and the outdoor
� units.
Set the TEST RUN mode by means of the remote control
� switch.
Press the MODE switch and the CHECK switch Operation LED
simultaneously for more than three seconds.
a) If the TEST RUN indication and the counting number of
�� Counting number of
the connected units to the remote control switch (for the connected units
example "��") are displayed on the remote control
switch, the connection of remote control cable is
correct. Go to �.
b) If no indication or "��" appears or if the number of the
units that is displayed is smaller than the actual number
of the units, there is some abnormal operation.
� �
Go to �.
Remote
� control switch Fault Inspection points after the power source is OFF
indication
� The power source is not turned ON. 1. The connection between the connector and the wires:
� The connection of the remote control Red wire-No.1, Black wire-No.2, White wire-No.3.
cable is incorrect. 2. Connecting points of the remote control cable.
No indication.
� The connect wires of the power supply 3. The contact of the connectors of the remote control cable.
line are incorrect or loosened. 4. The connection order of each terminal board.
5. The screw fastening of each terminal board.
The counting � The setting of the unit number is 6. Setting of the DIP switches on the printed circuit board.
number of the incorrect. 7. Wire connection order of the bridge cable.
connected units � The connection of the control cables 8. Connecting points of the bridge cable.
is incorrect. between each indoor unit is incorrect. 9. The contact of the connectors of the bridge cable.
(When multiple units are controlled by
one remote control switch).
Back to � after the checking.
Select the TEST RUN mode by pressing the MODE switch (COOL OR HEAT).
� MODE
� Press the RUN/STOP switch.

a) The TEST RUN operation will start. (The TEST RUN operation will be finish �
after two hours. You can also finish the TEST RUN operation by pressing the
RUN/STOP
RUN/STOP switch again).
b) If the unit does not start or if the operation LED on the remote control switch
�
�
is flickering, there is some abnormal operation. Go to �.
Remote control
switch indication
Unit condition Fault Inspection points after the power source is OFF 7
1. The connection order of each terminal board. The fuse
The operation LED
on the PCB may have blown out due to an incorrect
flickers. (1 time/
The connect wires of the wiring. (The fuse can be recovered only once by the
1 sec.) And the
The unit does not start. operating line are DSW on the PCB). (Go to �).
unit number and
incorrect or loosened. 2. The screw fastening of each terminal board.
the alarm code "03"
3. The connection order of the power supply wire between
flicker.
the indoor units and the outdoor units.
The operation The connection of the
LED flickers. The unit does not start. remote control cable is This is the same as the item � 1, 2, and 3.
(1 time/2 sec.) incorrect.
The connection of the
The flickering
The unit does not start. thermistor or other
indicator is different Check the alarm code table in the service manual.
The unit starts once connectors is incorrect.
from the one (Service personnel should do the checking).
and then the unit stops. There is tripping of the
above.
protector.
The outdoor fans The connection order of
The connection order of the terminal board: TB1 in the
rotate in the reverse the power supply line is
outdoor unit.
order. incorrect.
Normal.
Some wires of the
The outdoor fans The connecting point of the power supply line. The contact
power supply line
do not start. of the motor connector of the outdoor fan.
are disconnected.
Back to � after the checking.
Instructions for the recovery when the fuse of the transmission circuit
� is blown out:
Except
RPK
Only
RPK
Only
RPK-FSN1M
1. Correct the wiring of the terminal board. Outdoor unit
st
2. Set the 1 pin of DSW7 on the indoor unit PCB to ON. ON ON ON
st
3. Set the 1 pin of DSW7 in the indoor units PCB to OFF.
st 1 2 1 2 ON OFF
4. Set the 1 pin of DSW7 in the indoor unit PCB to ON. 1 2
nd
5. Set the 2 pin of DSW10 on the outdoor unit PCB to ON.
(FSN(E)/FXN(E)). For FSVNE is DSW5.
Page 7-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
7/4 TEST RUN
7.3. TEST RUN PROCEDURE BY MEANS OF THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL (PC-LH3A)
� ATTENTION:
If the wired remote control switch is used or if multiple
units (SET-FREE, DC INVERTER and Utopia Series)
are operating simultaneously, you cannot perform the
test run by means of the remote control switch. If that is
the case, perform the test run by means of the wired
1) Perform the test run after completing the installation.

a) Set the batteries for the remote control switch.
b) Turn ON the power source of the indoor units and the
outdoor units.
c) The yellow ' ' LED on the receiver of the indoor unit
flickers (0.25 seconds ON � 0.25 seconds OFF).
Then, the yellow LED turns OFF. While the LED is
flickering, the unit will not operate because the unit is
initializing.
2) Set the TEST RUN mode 3) Set the operation mode by
by pressing the SET switch pressing the MODE switch.
and the OFF TIME switch
simultaneously for more
than three seconds. The
LCD should look like the
LCD on the right figure.
The TEST RUN mode The TEST RUN mode

is not operating. is operating.
4) Operate the test run by pointing the transmitter towards 5) Adjust the angle of the air grille as follows.
the receiver of the indoor unit. Then, press the RUN/STOP The air louver has a mechanism for the auto-swing
switch. When the indoor unit receives the commands, the function.
yellow ' ' LED of the receiver will turn on briefly. Do not move the louver by hand forcefully.
Make sure that the commands are received well and the a) Select the FAN mode by pressing the MODE switch.
selected mode 3) is set correctly.
In the TEST RUN mode, the red RUN LED of the receiver b) Set the louver angle by pressing the LOUVER switch.
is turned ON and the green TIMER LED flickers
(0.5 seconds ON � 0.5 seconds OFF) (*2).
6) Stop the test run (normal)
Then, the timer switches off for two hours.
a) The test run stops automatically after two hours.
� NOTE: b) You stop the test run by pressing the RUN/STOP
– If the yellow ' ' LED does not turn ON, the switch again.
commands from the remote control switch may not After the test run has finished, check that the red
have reached the receiver. Send the commands RUN LED and the green TIMER LED turn OFF.
again.
– (*2) In the case of the RPK model, the TIMER LED
is turned OFF.
Page 7-4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
TEST RUN 7/5
7) Stop the test run (abnormal) for the PC-RLH 9/11. Example:
If you cannot use the PC-LH3A because of battery
shortage or any other reason, perform the emergency Alarm
operation as follows.
(1) COOL switch: Press the COOL switch in order to start
code:
� �
the cooling process.
Yellow FILTER LED
Press the COOL switch again in order to stop the
cooling process. Green DEF LED
(2) HEAT switch: Press the HEAT switch in order to start DEF LED blinks 3 times.
the heating process. (0.5 seconds ON / 0.5 seconds OFF)
Press the HEAT switch again in order to stop the
heating process. FILTER LED blinks 5 times.
(0.5 seconds ON / 0.5 seconds OFF)
� NOTE:
During the emergency operation, the yellow LED
blinks (0.5 seconds ON / 0.5 seconds OFF).
(3) Alarm code display
� The red RUN LED (1 second ON / 1 second OFF)
� If some malfunction occurs because of the means that there is an abnormal transmission
activation of a safety device or any other reason, between the indoor units and the outdoor units.
the red RUN LED blinks (0.5 seconds ON / 0.5
seconds OFF).
� Refer to the chapter 8.2.1 for the alarm code table.
� The alarm code displays the number of blinks of the
green DEF LED and the yellow FILTER LED as
shown bellow:
Green DEF LED: Digit 2 of the alarm code blinks.
Yellow FILTER LED: Digit 1 of the alarm code
blinks. (Alphabet Code: A=10 blinks, B=11 blinks,
C=12 blinks, etc.).
Page 7-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
7/6 TEST RUN
7.4. TEST RUN PROCEDURE FROM THE OUTDOOR UNIT SIDE

� FSN(E)/FXN(E)
The test run procedure from the outdoor unit side is shown
� WARNING:
– Do not touch any other electrical components while
below. You can set this DIP switch while the power source
you are setting the switches on the PCB.
is ON.
– Do not attach or detach the service access panel
when the power source for the outdoor unit is ON
and the outdoor unit is operating.
– Set all the DIP switches of DSW4 to OFF after
Setting of the DIP switch (before the shipment) completing the test run.
DSW4 Printed circuit board of the outdoor unit (PWB1)
Switch for setting the service operation and function

1. Test run
2. COOL/HEAT setting
(ON: heating process) For Service
3. OFF (fixed) ON
ON OFF
4. Manual compressor OFF DWS4
1 2 3 4 5 6 5. ON: if the number of indoor units

is more than 16
6. Setting of the indoor unit is also
necessary
7. OFF (fixed at test run)
Setting of the DIP switches Operation Remarks

Test run � Setting of the operation mode � The indoor unit automatically starts to � Make sure that the indoor units start to
Cooling: Set DSW4 Pin No. 2 at OFF. operate when the test run of the outdoor operate in accord with the test run of the
ON unit is set. outdoor unit.
� You can perform the ON/OFF operation � If you start the test run from the outdoor
1 2 3 4 5 6 from the remote control switch or the unit and you stop the test run from the
DSW4-1 of the outdoor unit. remote control switch, the test run function
Heating: Set DSW4 Pin No. 2 at ON. of the remote control switch is cancelled.
� Continuous operation during two hours is However, the test run function of the
ON performed without the Thermo-OFF outdoor unit is not cancelled.
condition.
1 2 3 4 5 6 � If the more than one indoor unit is
connected with one remote control switch,
all the units start the test run at the same
� Starting the test run
time. Therefore, turn OFF the power
Set DSW4 Pin No. 1 at ON. The operation
source so that the indoor units do not
starts after a few 20 seconds.
perform the test run.
In case of the heating process, leave DSW4
If this is the case, the SET RUN indication
Pin No. 2 at ON.
of the remote control switch may flicker.
� This is not abnormal.
ON � The setting of DSW4 is not required for
the test run from the remote control
1 2 3 4 5 6 switch.
Manual � Setting of the � When DSW4 Pin No. 4 is at ON during the � Do not turn ON and OFF the compressor
compressor - manual compressor compressor operation, the compressor frequently.
OFF OFF: Set DSW4 Pin No. 4 at ON. stops operating immediately and the
ON indoor unit is under the Thermo-OFF
condition.
1 2 3 4 5 6 � When DSW4 Pin No. 4 is at OFF, the
compressor starts to operate after the
- Compressor ON: cancellation of the 3-minute guard.
Set DSW4 Pin No. 4 at OFF.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
Manual � Manual defrost operation starts � The defrost operation is available � Do not repeat the defrost operation
defrost Press the PSW1 for more than three regardless of the frosting conditions frequently.
seconds during the heating process. The and the total time of the heating process.
� When the PSW1 accepts the manual
defrost operation starts after two minutes.
� The defrost operation is not performed defrost operation, the remaining time
This function is available once the heating
when the temperature of the outdoor before starting the defrost operation
process has been running for five minutes.
heat exchanger is higher than 10°C, is displayed at the 7-segment display
� Manual defrost operation finishes the high pressure is higher than 3.3 Mpa on the PCB.
The defrost operation automatically (33kgf/cm2G) or under the Thermo-OFF
finishes and the heating process starts. condition. ��
Remaining time (every 4 seconds)
Page 7-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
TEST RUN 7/7

� FSVNE
The procedure of test run from outdoor unit side is
� WARNING:
Do not touch any other electrical parts when operating
indicated below. Setting of this DIP switch is available with
switches on the PCB.
the power source ON.
Do not attach or detach service cover when the power
Setting of Dip Switch (Before Shipment) source for the outdoor unit is ON and the outdoor unit
is operated.
DSW1 Turn all DIP switches of DSW1 OFF when the test run
Switch for Setting of Service Operation and Function operation is completed.
1. Test Run
2. COOL/HEAT Setting
ON
(ON: Heating Operation)
1 2 3 4 3. OFF (Fixed)
4. Manual Compressor OFF
Dip Switch Setting Operation Remarks

Test Run � Setting of Operation Mode � The indoor unit automatically start to � Take care that the indoor units
Cooling: Set DSW1-2 OFF. operate when the test run of the start operation in accord with
ON outdoor unit is set. the test run operation of the
� The ON/OFF operation can be outdoor unit.
1 2 3 4 performed from the remote control � The test run is started from the
switch or DSW1-1 of the outdoor unit.
Heating: Set DSW1-2 ON. outdoor unit and stopped from
� Continuous operation during 2 hours the remote control switch, the
ON is performed without Thermo-OFF.
test run function of the remote
1 2 3 4 control switch is cancelled.
However, the test run function
�Starting Test Run of the outdoor unit is not
Set DSW1-1 ON and the operation is cancelled
started after a few ~20 seconds.
� In case that the plural indoor
ON units are connected with one
1 2 3 4
remote control switch, all the
units start test run operation at
When heating operation, leave
the same time, therefore, turn
DSW1-2 at ON
the power source OFF for the
7
ON indoor units not to operate test
1 2 3 4 run. In this case, the “TEST
RUN” indication of the remote
control switch may flicker, and
this is not abnormal.
� The setting of DSW1 is not
required for the test run from
the remote control switch.
Manual OFF � Setting � When DSW1-4 is ON during � Do not repeat compressor
of -Compressor Manual OFF: compressor operation, the ON/OFF frequently.
Compressor Set DSW1-4 ON. compressor stops to operate
ON immediately and the indoor unit is
under the condition of Thermo-OFF.
1 2 3 4 � When DSW1-4 is OFF, the
compressor starts to operate after the
-Compressor ON: cancellation of 3-minutes guard.
Set DSW1-4 OFF.
ON
1 2 3 4
Manual � Manual Defrost Operation Starts �Defrost operation is available � Do not repeat defrost operation
Defrost Press PSW1 for more than 3 regardless of frosting condition and frequently.
seconds during heating operation, total time of heating operation.
the defrost operation is started after 2 �Defrost operation in not performed
minutes.This function is not available when the temperature of outdoor
within 5 minutes after starting heating heat exchanger is higher than 10°C,
operation high pressure is higher than 3.3MPa
2
� Manual Defrost Operation Finishes (33kgf/cm G) or Thermo-OFF.
Defrost operation is automatically
ended and the heating operation is
started.
Page 7-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
7/8 TEST RUN
7.5. CHECK LIST
� CHECK LIST ON TEST RUN

Client: Installer: Date:
Outdoor unit model: Outdoor unit serial No.: Checker:
Indoor unit
model
Indoor unit
serial No.
Piping length (m)

Additional refrigerant charge (kg)
1. General
No. Check item Result

1 Was the DIP switch DSW6 for the piping length in the outdoor unit set?
2 Was the DIP switch DSW3 for the piping lift in the outdoor unit set?
3 Are the power supply wires of the transmission cable making contacts on the piping?
4 Was a ground wire connected?
5 Is there any short circuit?
6 Is there any voltage malfunction among the different phases (L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1, L1-N)?
2. Refrigerant cycle
a. Cooling/heating process
No. Check item Result
1 Operate all the indoor units. (TEST RUN mode).
2 Operate all the indoor units at the �HIGH� speed.
3 If you turn ON and OFF the constant speed compressor repeatedly,
stop one indoor unit (an indoor unit with a small capacity).
b. Sampling data (cooling/heating process: if the indoor temperature is between 21°C and 30°C)
No. Check Item Result
1 After operating for more than 20 minutes.
2 Check Pd. and Td. Is TdSH 15 to 45 degrees?
3 Is Ps 0.2 to 1.1?
4 Is Pd 1.0 to 3.5? (If the outdoor temperature is high, the Pd. becomes high.)
Page 7-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
TEST RUN 7/9
3. Check Item after the sampling data
a. Cooling process (If the outdoor temperature is higher than 15°C)
No. Check item Standard Causes Result

1 Is H1 (compressor frequency) + (CC (number of Running horsepower of Low: excessive refrigerant;
running compressors)-1) X (�) abnormally low the indoor units X 15Hz. High: insufficient
or high? (It is applicable when the inlet air refrigerant;
temperature is three degrees higher than the DSW for capacity of indoor
setting temperature). units: Incorrect setting.
2 Is the fan actually running when Fo (airflow rate – Failure of the fan motor;
of fan) is other than "0"? Failure of the PCB;
Failure of the condenser.
3 Is the Td1 higher than the Td2 when only the – Incorrect connection or
compressor No.1 is running (when CC incorrect mounting of the
(number of running compressors) is �1�)? Td thermistor.
4 Is the total of iE (indoor expansion valves Total % of iE: Low: excessive refrigerant;
opening) abnormally low or high? horsepower of the High: insufficient
outdoor unit X (5~30). refrigerant, excessive pipe
resistance.
5 Is TL (liquid pipe temperature of the heat It is normal when Failure of the TL
exchanger of the indoor unit) lower than Ti TL-Ti < -5. thermistor;
(air inlet temperature of the indoor unit)? Fully closed expansion
valve;
Short circuit.
6 Is TG (gas pipe temperature of the heat It is normal when Failure of the TG
exchanger of the indoor unit) lower than Ti TG-Ti < -5. thermistor;
(air inlet temperature of the indoor unit.)? Fully closed expansion
(it is applicable when the inlet air temperature valve or slightly open
is three degrees higher than the setting expansion valve;
temperature.) Short circuit.
7 Is there any excessive difference among indoor It is normal if the Failure of the TL/TG
units at SHTG-TL of the heat exchanger of the difference among units thermistor;
indoor units? (It is applicable when the inlet air is within seven Fully open expansion
7
temperature is three degrees higher than the degrees. valve, slightly open
setting temperature.) expansion valve or fully
closed expansion valve.
8 Is there any excessive different among indoor It is normal if SH is Expansion valve locked in
units at SHTG-TL of the heat exchanger of the within three degrees fully open position; The
indoor units and is iE lower than �7�? lower than other units. refrigerant cycle number
does not match.
9 Is there any indoor unit with SH excessively It is normal if SH is Expansion valve locked in
lower than the value of other units, under the within three degrees slightly open position or
condition of IE (indoor unit expansion valve) higher than other units. closed expansion valve;
�100�? The refrigerant cycle
number does not match.
10 Is the difference between the discharge air – –
temperature and the inlet air temperature more
than seven degrees?
� NOTES:
1. The symbol with an underline indicates a check
item. The mark � � indicates the checking data.
2. Regarding the mark (�), you should apply the
following values.
Mark 
Mark �
8HP
8HP 10, 16, 20, 24HP28~32HP
10~26HP 30HP
65
65 78 78 8787
Page 7-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
7/10 TEST RUN
b. Heating process (if the outdoor temperature is higher than 0°C)
No. Check item Standard Causes Result

1 Is oE1,oE2 (outdoor unit expansion valves opening) oE1 = 30~80% Low: excessive
abnormally low or high when TdSH is 15 oE2 = 0 or 30~80% refrigerant;
to 45 degrees? (The higher the operating frequency, High: insufficient
the higher the oE1). refrigerant.
2 Is Pd �1.6� to �3.5�? – Low: leakage of the
(Pd is high when the indoor temperature is high). SVA (solenoid valve);
High: excessive gas
pipe resistance.
3 Is H1 (compressor frequency) + (CC (number of – Low: excessive
running compressors)-1) (�) abnormally low or high? refrigerant;
(The lower the room temperature and the outdoor High: insufficient
temperature, the higher the above value). refrigerant, excessive
pipe resistance.
4 Is Ps �0.2� to �1.1�? – Low: short circuit of
(Only under the condition that the electrical the indoor unit;
expansion valve (SVA) is OFF). Low/High: failure of the
following components:
outdoor fan, motor, fan
module, DC remote
control or outdoor
air sensor.
5 Is the temperature difference among the indoor – Failure of components
units* more than 15 degrees when iE (indoor unit such as the PCB,
expansion valve) is 100? the wiring, the coil,
*The temperature difference among the indoor units the valve;
means the following: Excessive pipe
b3 (Discharge Gas Temperature) - b2 (air inlet resistance;
temperature) that is displayed on the remote control Failure of the
switch by means of the check mode. However, this is thermistor for
applicable only when b2 (Air Inlet Temperature) - b1 the discharge
(setting temperature) is higher than three degrees. air temperature.
� NOTES:
1. The symbol with an underline indicates a check
item. The mark � � indicates the checking data.
2. Regarding the mark (�), you should apply the
following values.
Power supply MarkMark

 �
Power supply
8HP8HP 10~26HP 28~32HP
10, 16, 20, 24HP 30HP
380-415V 50 Hz
380-415V 50Hz 65 65 78 78 87 87
Page 7-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
TEST RUN 7/11
7.6. CHECKING THE REFRIGERANT QUANTITY
7.6.1. FSN(E)/FXN(E) � Checking procedures:

You can check the excess or the deficiency of the Cooling process
refrigerant by means of the data that is provided by the 1. Calculate iE (indoor unit expansion valve opening)
check mode of the 7-segment display. The following with the conversion value (�) that is shown below.
checking procedure is useful during the test run and the 2. Sum up the converted values of iE.
maintenance.
3. Compare the total of iE with the normal value.
� Before the checking procedure: Normal value: Outdoor unit capacity (HP) X 6 to
1. Operate all the indoor units at the TEST RUN mode and Outdoor unit capacity (HP) X 27
operate all the indoor units at the HIGH speed. Tendency: If the room temperature is high within
2. Check the following items in order to make sure that the the above normal value, the value
refrigerant cycle is stable. of iE will be large.
Judgement: Total of iE>normal value
1) The continuous operation lasts more than 20 minutes. ··· This means insufficient refrigerant.
2) Td · SH is 15 to 45 degrees. Total of iE<normal value
··· This means excessive refrigerant.
3) Ps is 0.2 to 1.1 Mpa.
4) Pd is 1.6 to 3.5 Mpa.
[Td · SH: Discharge gas temperature superheat] Heating process
1. Detect oE1 and oE2 (outdoor unit expansion valve
[Ps: Suction pressure] [Pd: Discharge pressure] opening).
3. Collect the checking data that is provided by the check 2. Compare oE1 and oE2 with the normal value.
mode of the 7-segment display.
Normal value: 20 to 75. (Refer to the next page for
4. Perform the checking according to the following details).
procedure. Tendency: When oE1 and oE2 are within the
Applicable air temperatures for the checking procedure: above range and
1) If the room temperature is high
within the above normal value, the
[Cooling] Room temperature:
value of oE1 to oE2 will be small.
20°C~30°C (DB)
2) If the outdoor temperature is high,
Outdoor temperature:
7
the value of oE1 to oE2 will be
15°C~40°C (DB)
large.
[Heating] Room temperature:
Judgement: oE1, oE2>normal value
20°C~30°C (DB)
··· This means insufficient refrigerant.
Outdoor temperature: oE1, oE2<normal value
0°C~15°C (DB) ··· This means excessive refrigerant.
� Conversion value at cooling
Indoor unit capacity Display at check mode 0 � iE < 50% 50% � iE < 100%
0.8 to 2.0 06~16 1.0 x iE 1.0 x iE
2.5 to 4.0 18~32 0.7 x iE 2.0 x iE
5.0 40~48 0.7 x iE 2.7 x iE - 100
Page 7-11
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
7/12 TEST RUN
Example:
� Cooling process
Indoor unit 1.0 2.5 2.5 4.0
iE (%) (from the checking data) 20 30 55 40
Converted value of iE 20 21 50 28
(1.0 X 20) (0.7 X 30) (2 X 55-60) (0.7 X 40)
Sum of converted value of iE (A) 119 (= 20+21+50+28)
Normal value (B) 78 to 351 (13 x 6 – 13 x 27)
Judgement OK [(A) is within the range (B).]
� Heating process
Indoor unit 1.0 2.5 2.5 4.0 RAS-10FSNE
Ti (indoor suction temperature) 26 27 23 23 -
Average of Ti 24
(To be added depending on the indoor unit capacity)
To (outdoor temperature) (°C) 10
oE1 + oE2 (%) (A) 74 (37+37)
Normal value (*1) (B) 72
Judgement OK [(A) is within the range (B) �15]
� Cases where this checking procedure is not

applicable:
This checking procedure is not applicable under the conditions
that are shown below.
In such cases, remove the causes of the conditions before
performing the checking procedure.
Tendency of indoor / outdoor

No. Conditions expansion valve opening
Cooling Heating
Tends to be
1 Short-circuited air at the indoor unit –
excessively open
Tends to be Tends to be
2 Short-circuited air at the outdoor unit
excessively open excessively closed
Resistance of the connecting pipe is big Tends to be Tends to be
3
(due to a smashed pipe or a small liquid pipe) excessively open excessively open
Tends to be
Locked (fully open) –
Failure of the expansion valve excessively closed
4
of the indoor unit Tends to be
Locked (fully closed) –
excessively open
Tends to be
Locked (fully open) –
Failure of the expansion valve excessively closed
5
of the outdoor unit Tends to be Tends to be
Locked (fully closed)
excessively open excessively open
Page 7-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
TEST RUN 7/13
� Expansion valve opening
RAS-5HP (heating
RAS-5HP (heatingprocess)
process)(OE1)
(OE1) RAS-8HP
RAS-8HP (heating
(heatingprocess)
process)(OE1)
(OE1)
Outdoor temperature (°C)

Indoor temperature (DB) (°C) Indoor temperature (DB) (°C)
RAS-10/12HP (heating
RAS-10HP (heating process)(OE1)
process) (OE1) RAS-14/16HP (heating
RAS-16HP (heating process)(OE1)
process) (OE1)
RAS-18/22HP (heating
RAS-20HP (heating process)(OE1+OE2)
process) (OE1+OE2) RAS-24/32HP
RAS-24, 30HP(heating
(heatingprocess)
process)(OE1+OE2)
(OE1+OE2)
7

OE: Outside expansion valve temperature
� NOTE:
1. Use these curves when you collect the checking data that is provided by the CHECK mode.
2. If the data provided by the CHECK mode is within �15%, the refrigerant charging amount is appropriate.
Page 7-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Test run
Page 7-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8. Troubleshooting
CONTENTS
8. TROUBLESHOOTING ____________________________________________________ 8-1

8.1. Initial Troubleshooting ____________________________________________________ 8-2
8.1.1. Checking by Means of the 7-Segment Display _________________________________ 8-2
8.1.2. Emergency Operation when the Inverter Compressor Is Damaged _________________ 8-3
8.1.3. Failure of the Power Supply to the Indoor Unit and the Remote Control Switch ________ 8-4
8.1.4. Abnormal Transmission between the Remote Control Switch and the Indoor Unit ______ 8-5
8.1.5. Abnormal Operations of the Devices ________________________________________ 8-6
8.2. Troubleshooting Procedure _______________________________________________ 8-14
8.2.1. Alarm Code Table ______________________________________________________ 8-14
8.2.2. Troubleshooting by Alarm Code ___________________________________________ 8-15
8.2.3. Troubleshooting in Check mode ___________________________________________ 8-68
8.2.4. Troubleshooting by means of the 7-segment display for FSN(E)/FXN(E) ____________ 8-74
8.2.5. Troubleshooting by means of the 7-segment display for FSVNE __________________ 8-80
8.2.6. Troubleshooting by means of the flashing alarm LEDs for RPK-FSNM _____________ 8-85
8.2.7. Running current of the compressor _________________________________________ 8-85
8.2.8. Protection Control Code on the 7-segment display _____________________________ 8-86
8.2.9. Activating Condition of the Protection Control Code for FSN(E)/FXN(E) ____________ 8-87
8.2.10. Activating Condition of the Protection Control Code for FSVNE ___________________ 8-88
8.3. Procedure for Checking Each Main Part _____________________________________ 8-88
8.3.1. Self-Checking Procedure of PCB by Means of the Remote Control Switch __________ 8-88
8.3.2. Self-Checking Procedure of the Remote Control Switch ________________________ 8-90
8.3.3. Self-Checking Procedure of the Indoor Unit PCB (Only for RPK) _________________ 8-93
8.3.4. Procedure for Checking Other Main Parts ___________________________________ 8-94
Page 8-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8/2 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1. INITIAL TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1.1. CHECKING BY MEANS OF THE 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY
� Simple checking procedure by means of the 7-segment display

1 �Turn on all the indoor units � All the indoor units which are connected to the outdoor unit.
2 Turn on the outdoor unit
3 Turn auto-addressing starts During the auto-addressing, you can check the following items by
means of the 7-segment display of the outdoor unit.
Outdoor unit
printed 1. Disconnection of the power supply to the Indoor Unit.
circuit board
2. Duplication of the Indoor Unit number.
PCB 1
Normal case The 7-segment display of the outdoor unit is not indicated.
If there is something wrong, the 7-segment display of the outdoor unit displays the following indications:
a. The indoor units are not supplied

with power. �� continues to flash after 30 seconds.
Abnormal b. Disconnection of the operating line

case between the outdoor units and the
continues to flash after 30 seconds.
indoor units.
��
c. Duplicated settings of the indoor unit number on the rotary switch RSW (Refer to the section 8.2.2,
"Troubleshooting by means of the Alarm Code" for the description of the alarm code "35").
Page 8-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING 8/3
8.1.2. EMERGENCY OPERATION WHEN THE INVERTER COMPRESSOR IS DAMAGED
� Failure of the inverter compressor d. Emergency operation

a. Contents
a. Contents of
of the
the operation
operation (applicable
applicable to
tothe
themodels:
models:
1. Turn OFF all the main switches.
RAS-8FSN(E)/FXN(E),
RAS-8~32FSN(E)/FXN(E) 10FSN(E)/FXN(E), 16FSN/FXN,
20FSN/FXN, 24FSN/FXN, 30FSN/FXN) 2. Disconnect the wiring from the inverter compressor.
Insulate the fasten terminals for the inverter
1. This operation is an emergency operation by means compressor wires by means of the insulation tape.
of a constant speed compressor, when the inverter
compressor fails. 3. Set the No.1 pin of DSW5 and the No.1 pin of DSW1
to ON.
2. By setting the No.1 pin of DSW5 on PCB1 to ON and
the No.1 pin of DSW1 on PCB to ON, the emergency 4. Turn ON all the main switches.
operation starts. 5. Operate the system by means of the remote control
3. The control of the emergency operation is the same switches.
with the normal control except that the inverter 6. The system is stopped by turning OFF all the remote
compressor is stopped. control switches or by turning OFF all the main
switches.
b. Operation condition
The constant speed compressor is forced to stop for � Failure of the constant speed compressor
the compressor protection under the condition below: a. Contents of the operation (applicable to the models:
Total Capacity of Thermo-ON Indoor Units RAS-8FSN(E)/FXN(E),
RAS-8~32FSN(E)/FXN(E) 10FSN(E)/FXN(E), 16FSN/FXN,
< 50% of Outdoor Unit Capacity 20FSN/FXN, 24FSN/FXN, 30FSN/FXN)
In case of the above condition, the compressor operates 1. This operation is an emergency operation by means
and stops repeatedly. This may cause the compressor of the inverter compressor, when the constant speed
failure. Therefore, the compressor is forced to stop in compressor fails.
order to protect the compressor.
2. This operation is controlled by a normal control.
b. Operation condition
� NOTE: 1. Set the No.2 pin of DSW5 to ON.
If the printed circuit board for the inverter (ISPM)
is damaged, this is not available. 2. If you set the DSW5, the temperatures of THM2,
THM3 and THM4 on the top of compressors are not
c. Method of emergency operation ignored.
Checking procedure before the emergency operation.
If the thermistor is short-circuited or cut, this
1. Measure the insulation resistance of the inverter operation is available.
compressor.
Do not perform the emergency operation when the
8
insulation resistance is 0 �.
There is a possibility that the refrigerant oil may be
oxidized. If the emergency operation is performed,
the other compressor may be damaged.
2. If the total capacity of the Thermo-ON indoor units
is more than 50% of the outdoor unit capacity, the
emergency operation is available.
3. In this emergency operation, the frequency of the
compressor is not controlled at each 1Hz.
Therefore, the alarm codes "07", "43", "44", "45" or
"47" may be displayed on the LCD. Details of alarm
codes are shown in the alarm code table (page 8-14).
4. This emergency operation does not provide the
sufficient cooling capacity and the sufficient heating
capacity.
5. This method is a temporary emergency operation
when the inverter compressor is damaged. Therefore,
replace the inverter compressor as soon as possible.
6. Set the No.1 pin of DSW7 to OFF and the No.1 pin of
DSW1 to OFF after installing the new compressor. If
you do not perform this setting, the inverter
compressor will be damaged.
Page 8-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
8/4
8.1.3. FAILURE OF THE POWER SUPPLY TO THE INDOOR UNIT AND THE REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
� The LED and the LCD are not indicated.

� Not operated
If the fuses are blown out or a breaker is activated,
investigate the cause of the overcurrent and take
the necessary action.
Action
Phenomenon Cause Check item
(Turn OFF the main switch)
Measure the voltage by

Power failure or power is not ON Supply the power
means of the voltmeter
Remove the cause of the

Short circuit supplied between Check for any uncovered
short circuit and replace the
Blown out fuse the wires part of the wires
fuse
or activation of
the breaker at
the power source Remove the cause of the
Short circuit of the wires to Measure the insulation
earth resistance
fuse

Short circuit supplied between Check for any uncovered
the wires part of the wires
fuse
Blown out fuse at
the control circuit
Short circuit of the control Measure the insulation
circuit to earth resistance
fuse
Measure the voltage at the

Failure of the transformer at the indoor unit side Replace the transformer
secondary side
Replace the cable or repair

Disconnected cable of the remote control switch Connect the cable
the cable
Insufficient connection or
incorrect connection of the
Insufficient indoor unit PCB
contacting at the
Correctly connect the
connectors of the Check the connectors
Insufficient connection connector
remote control
switch or incorrect connection of the
indoor unit PCB in the remote
control switch
Check the remote control

Replace the remote control
Failure of the remote control switch switch by means of the self-
switch if it failed
check mode *1)
Unconnected wires to PCB Check the connectors Correctly connect the wires
Failure of PCB
Check PCB by means of the
Failure of PCB Replace PCB if it failed
self-check mode *2)
Take action according to the procedure that is displayed in

Incorrect wiring connection
"TEST RUN"
*1): Refer to section 8.3.2.

Page 8-4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING 8/5
8.1.4. ABNORMAL TRANSMISSION BETWEEN THE REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH AND THE INDOOR UNIT
� RUN LED on the remote control switch:

Flickering every 2 seconds.
Action
Disconnection or insufficient contacting Check the cable and the Repair the cable or connect
of the remote control cable connections the cable
Check the wiring and the

Incorrect wiring connection (incorrect polarity) Repairing
connections
Check the remote control Replace the remote control

Failure of the remote control switch switch by means of the self- switch if the remote control
check mode *1) switch is faulty
Failure of PCB Disconnected wire to PCB Check the connectors Correctly connect the wires
(in the indoor
unit and the
remote control
switch) Check PCB by means of the
Failure of PCB Replace PCB if it failed
self-check mode *2)

Page 8-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8/6 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1.5. ABNORMAL OPERATIONS OF THE DEVICES
Action
Disconnected Measure the coil resistance

Failure of coil by means of the tester
the indoor Replace the Indoor unit fan
unit fan motor
motor Measure the insulation
Burnt-out coil
resistance
Disconnected Measure the coil resistance

Failure of coil by means of the tester
the outdoor Replace the outdoor unit fan
unit fan motor
motor Measure the insulation
Burnt-out coil
resistance
Failure of
the
RUN LED is ON magnetic Measure the voltage
and the LCD is Insufficient Replace PCB for the
switch for between the contacting
indicated contacting outdoor unit
the outdoor parts
However, the unit fan
system does not motor
operate
(For example,
the indoor fan, Measure the resistance
Failure of the comp. motor
the outdoor fan between two wires
or the
compressor does Replace the compressor
not operate)
Check for an abnormal
Failure of the comp.
sound from the Comp.
Failure of
the Check that the magnetic
Insufficient Replace the magnetic
magnetic switch activates correctly or
contacting switch
switch for not
comp.
Disconnected
Check the connections Correctly connect the wiring
wiring to PCB
Failure of
one of PCBs
Failure of Check PCB by means of the
Replace PCB if it failed
PCB self-check mode *1)
Failure of
thermistor
Failure of air
inlet
The Comp. does thermistor Disconnec- Replace or correctly
tion of Check it by
not stop or start connect the wires
thermistor self-checking *2)
even if the if Abnormal Operation exists
setting
temperature
Abnormal operation of the
on the LCD
remote control switch cord
changes to *3)

Failure of the indoor unit PCB Replace PCB if it failed
self-check mode *1)
Page 8-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING 8/7
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS OF THE DEVICES (Cont.)
Action
Check the setting condition

of "remote control
thermostat" by means of the
optional setting
Setting and control:
"00": Control by means of
the indoor thermistor
The Comp. does for the suction air
not stop or start "01": Control by means of
even if the the thermostat of the If the thermostat of the
setting Incorrect optional setting remote control switch remote control switch is not
temperature "02": Control by means of used, set at "00"
on LCD changes the average value of
to *3) the indoor thermistor
for the suction air and
the thermostat of the
remote control switch
*1): Refer to section 8.3.1~8.3.4.

*3): Even if the remote control switches are normal, the
compressor does not operate under the following
conditions:
1. Indoor temp. is lower than 21°C or outdoor temp.
Is lower than -5°C during the cooling process (DB).
2. Indoor temp. is higher than 27°C (DB) or outdoor temp.
is higher than 15°C (WB) during the heating process.
3. When a cooling (or heating) process signal is given
to the outdoor unit and a different mode as heating
(or cooling) process signal is given to the indoor units.
4. When an emergency stop signal is given to outdoor
unit.
Page 8-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8/8 TROUBLESHOOTING
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS OF DEVICES (Cont.)
Action
Failure of the
Failure of
Thermistor
the Check the Thermistor by Replace or Correctly
Discharge means of the connect the wiring when
Air Temp. Disconnected self-check mode *2) it is abnormal
Thermistor Wire of the
Thermistor
Indoor fan speed
does not change
Failure of the Remote Control
Replace if it failed
Switch
Check it by means of the
self-check mode *1)
Failure of PCB for the indoor
Replace if PCB fails
unit
Failure of Failure of
thermistor thermistor
for outdoor Replace or correctly
evaporating connect when it is abnormal
Disconnected
temp. during
wire of
heating
thermistor
Disconnected
Measure the resistance of
4-way valve
coil
coil
Failure of
Replace the 4-way valve
4-way valve
Incorrect
activation of Enforced power supply
No defrost 4-way valve
operation mode
is available
Disconnected control wires
during the
between indoor unit, CH unit Check the connectors Correctly connect the wiring
heating process
and outdoor unit
or the defrost
operation
continues
Disconnected
Check the connectors Correctly connect the wiring
wiring to PCB
Failure of
the outdoor
units of PCB
Failure of Check PCB by means of the Replace PCB when the
PCB self-check mode *1) check mode is not available
Disconnected
Check the connectors Correctly connect the wiring
wiring to PCB
Failure of
the Indoor
Unit of PCB
Failure of
PCB

The LED and the Replace if PCB fails
self-check mode *1)
LCD on the Failure of PCB in the indoor
remote control unit or the remote control
switch remain switch
ON
*1): Refer to section 8.3.1~8.3.4.

Page 8-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING 8/9
Action
Indoor cool load is greater than

Calculate the cool load Use a bigger unit
the cooling capacity
Gas leakage Correctly charge the

or shortage of Measure superheat refrigerant after repairing
refrigerant the gas leakage
Excessively
small diameter Measure and check the
Use the correct pipes
tube or long field-supplied pipes
piping
Incorrect
Check whether or not the
activation of the Replace the check valve for
temp. difference exists
check valve of the outdoor unit
before/after the check valve
the outdoor unit
Check for clogging Remove the clogging
Check the connection cord

Replace the connector
and the connector
Failure or
malfunction of Is there an operation sound
Replace the coil
the expansion from the coil?
valve
Is the thermistor on the

Replace the thermistor
compressor normal?
Insufficient
cooling process
Excessively Is the thermistor installed Correctly install the
low suction correctly on compressor? thermistor
pressure
Clogged
Is there dewing after the Replace the capillary tube in
capillary tube in
capillary tube? the CH-unit
the CH-unit
Clogged strainer
in the indoor
unit; CH-unit;
Check the temp. difference
at the inlet and the outlet of
Replace the strainer in the
8
clogging at the indoor unit, CH-unit
the strainer
low pressure
piping
Clogging at the
low pressure Check the temp. difference Remove the clogging
piping
Insufficient air Check for clogged air filter Clean the air filter
flow to the
indoor unit
heat
Check for an obstacle at the
exchanger Remove the obstacles
inlet or the outlet
Insufficient speed of the

Excessively Replace the fan motor
indoor unit fan motor?
low air temp.
to the indoor
unit heat
Short-circuited indoor Remove the cause of the
exchanger
unit air? short-circuited air
Page 8-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8/10 TROUBLESHOOTING
Action
Clogging of the outdoor unit

Remove the clogging
heat exchanger?
Obstacles at the inlet or the

Insufficient outlet of the outdoor unit Remove the obstacles
air flow to the heat exchanger
outdoor unit
heat
Is the service area for the
exchanger Secure the service area
outdoor unit sufficient?
Correct fan speed? Replace the fan motor
Excessively Short-circuited air to the Remove the cause of the

high air temp. outdoor unit? short-circuited air
to the
outdoor unit
heat Any other heat load near the
Remove the heat source
exchanger outdoor unit?
Excessively
Correctly charge the
charged Check each temp.
Excessively refrigerant
refrigerant
high
discharge
Non-
pressure Check each temp. and each Charge the refrigerant after
condensate gas
pressure the vacuum pumping
in cycle
Clogging of
the discharge Check for clogging Remove the clogging
piping
Insufficient
cooling process Check for clogging Remove the clogging

and the connector
Failure or
malfunction
Is there an operation sound
of the Replace the coil
from the coil?
expansion
valve
compressor normal?
Is the thermistor installed

Correctly install the
correctly on the
thermistor
compressor?

Malfunction or internal leakage
at the inlet and the outlet of Replace the 4-way valve
of the 4-way valve
the 4-way valve
Failure of the
bypass Check for Leakage of the
Replace the solenoid valve
solenoid Solenoid Valve
Excessively valve
high suction
pressure Malfunction
Check the Temp. Difference
or internal
between the Inlet and the Replace the 4-way valve
leakage of the
Outlet of 4-Way Valve
4-way valve
Check the expansion valve Replace the failed

Discharge temp. of the indoor
of the indoor unit in the expansion valve of the
unit is unstable
same system indoor unit
Page 8-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING 8/11
Action
Indoor heat load is greater than Replace the unit with

Calculate the heat load
the heating capacity a bigger unit
Gas leakage
or insufficient
Measure superheat refrigerant after the gas
refrigerant
leakage check and repairing
charge
Excessively
small Measure the field-supplied
Use the specified pipes
diameter or piping
long piping

and the connector
Failure or
malfunction
Is there an operation sound
of the Replace the coil
from the coil?
expansion
valve
compressor normal?
Is the thermistor installed Correctly install the

correctly on compressor? thermistor
Insufficient
heating process
Excessively Clogging of Check the temp. difference Replace the strainer for the
low suction I.U./O.U./CH- between the inlet and the outdoor unit, indoor unit or
pressure Unit strainer outlet of strainer CH-Unit
Clogging of Check the temp. difference

Remove the clogging
suction piping of each part
Is the outdoor unit heat

exchanger clogged?
Remove the clogging 8
Are there any obstacles
Insufficient
at the inlet or the outlet of Remove the obstacles
air flow
outdoor unit?
through the
outdoor unit
heat Is the service area for the Secure a sufficient
exchanger outdoor unit sufficient? service area
Check the speed of

Replace the fan motor
the outdoor unit fan
Excessively
low air temp.
Check for any
through Remove the cause of the
short-circuited air
the outdoor short-circuited air
to the outdoor unit
unit heat
exchanger
Defrosting is
Check the thermistor Replace the thermistor
insufficiently
for the defrost operation for the defrost operation
completed
Page 8-11
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Action
Check the filter for a

Remove the clogging
clogging
Insufficient
air flow to Check for any obstacles at
the indoor the inlet or the outlet of the Remove the obstacles
unit heat indoor unit
exchanger
Check the indoor fan speed Replace the fan motor
Excessively
Excessively high air temp.
high Check whether or not the Remove the cause of the
to the indoor
discharge short-circuited air exists short-circuited air
unit heat
pressure exchanger
Excessively
Check the refrigerant Correctly charge the
charged
quantity *1) refrigerant
refrigerant
Non-
condensate Check the refrigerant Recharge the refrigerant
gas in ref. quantity *1) after the vacuum pumping
cycle
Insufficient
heating process Clogging of
the discharge Check for clogging Remove the clogging
pr. piping

Malfunction or internal leakage
of the 4-way valve
the 4-way valve

Malfunction of the check valve
at the inlet and the outlet of Replace the check valve
of the outdoor unit
the check valve
Failure of the
bypass Check for leakage of the
Replace the solenoid valve
solenoid solenoid valve
Excessively valve
high suction
pressure Malfunction
or internal
leakage of
the 4-way valve
4-way valve
Check the expansion Replace the failed

Discharge temp. of the indoor
valve of the indoor unit in expansion valve of the
unit is unstable
the same system indoor unit
*1): Refer to chapter 10 of TC.
Page 8-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Action
Foreign particles inside of the Remove the foreign

Visually inspect it
fan casing particles
Indoor unit fan runner is hitting Adjust the position of the fan
Visually inspect it
the casing runner
Outdoor unit propeller fan is Adjust the position of the

Visually inspect it
hitting the shroud propeller fan
Faulty Check that each part is

Tightly fix each part
Installation tightly fixed
Cooling or
heating process Liquid ref. Adjust the suction gas temp.
Ensure superheat
with an abnormal Abnormal compression and pressure
sound sound from
the Wear or
compressor breakage of Abnormal Sound from the
Replace the compressor
the internal Inside of the Compressor
comp. parts
No heating
Check the Resistance Replace the oil heater or the
by the oil
(Oil Heater, Fuse) fuse
heater
Humming sound from the Check the surface of the Replace the magnetic
magnetic conductor contacts switch
Abnormal vibration of the

Check each fixing screw Tightly fix each screw
cabinets
Outdoor fan Obstacle at the outdoor fan Check the obstacles Remove the obstacles
8
does not operate
when the
compressor Wait for the switching of If the 4-Way Valve does not
Watching condition for the
operates the 4-Way Valve switch, check for insufficient
heating process
(1 ~ 3 minutes) refrigerant
Discharge pressure does not

increase higher than 2.3MPa Check the operation
Indoor fan does Add the refrigerant
due to the insufficient pressure *1)
not operate
refrigerant
when the
compressor
operates Disconnected Wiring for
Check the wiring Connect the wiring correctly
the Indoor Fan
*1): Refer to chapter 10 of TC.
Page 8-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.2. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
8.2.1. ALARM CODE TABLE
If the RUN LED flickers for 2 seconds, there is a failure in If the RUN LED flickers 5 times (5 seconds) with the unit number
the transmission between the Indoor Unit and the Remote and the alarm code displayed, make a note of the alarm code
Control Switch. Possible causes are: (refer to the table below) and ask your retailer for service.
Broken remote cable Unit number Alarm code Model code

Contact failure in the remote control cable
Defective IC or defective microcomputer
In any case, ask your retailer for service
Refrigerant cycle number Number of connected units
Code No. Category Content of Abnormality Leading Cause

01 Indoor Unit Tripping of Protection Device Failure of Fan Motor, Drain Discharge, PCB, Relay.
02 Outdoor Unit Tripping of Protection Device Activation of PSH
03 Transmission Abnormality between Indoor (or Outdoor) and Outdoor (or Indoor) Incorrect Wiring. Failure of PCB. Tripping of Fuse. Power Supply OFF
04 Inverter Abnormality between Inverter and Control PCB Failure in transmission of fan controller
04. Inverter. FSN(E)/FXN(E) Abnormality of Fan controller Fan controller transmission failure
05 Transmission Abnormality of Power Source Wiring Reverse Phase Incorrect Wiring.
Voltage Drop of Power Supply. Incorrect Wiring or insufficient Capacity of
06 Voltage Drop Voltage Drop by Excessively Low or High Voltage to Outdoor Unit
Power Supply Wiring.
07 Decrease in Discharge Gas Superheat Excessive Refrigerant Charge. Expansion Valve Open Lock.
Cycle Insufficient Refrigerant. Ref. Leakage, Clogging or Expansion Valve
08 Increase in Discharge Gas Temperature
Close Lock
09 Outdoor Unit Tripping of Protection Device Failure of Fan Motor.
11 Inlet Air Thermistor
12 Outlet Air Thermistor
Failure of Thermistor, Sensor, Connection.
13 Sensor on Freeze Protection Thermistor
14 Indoor Unit Gas Piping Thermistor
15 Fresh Outdoor Air Thermistor (Econofresh)
19 Tripping of Protection Device for Fan Motor Failure of Fan Motor
21 High Pressure Sensor
22 Sensor on Outdoor Air Thermistor
23 Outdoor Unit Discharge Gas Thermistor on Comp.
Failure of Thermistor, Sensor, Connection
24 Evaporating Thermistor
26 Only for FSVNE Suction Gas Thermistor.
29 Low Pressure Sensor
More than two CH-units are connected between the Indoor Units and
30 Incorrect connection system
Outdoor Unit
31 Incorrect Setting of Outdoor and Indoor Unit Incorrect Setting of Capacity Code.
Failure of Power Supply, PCB in other Indoor Unit. Failure of other Indoor
32 Abnormal Transmission of Other Indoor Unit
Unit of the same Refrigerant Cycle
System
35 Incorrect Setting in Indoor Unit No. Existence of the same Indoor Unit No. in the same Refrigerant Cycle
36 Incorrect Indoor unit Type Indoor Unit is not for R410A
Failure of Indoor Unit PCB. Incorrect wiring. Connection to PCB in Indoor
38 Abnormality of Protective Circuit in Outdoor Unit
Unit.
39 Abnormality of Running Current at Constant Compressor Overcurrent, Blown Fuse of Failure of Current Sensor.
43 Pressure Ratio Decrease Protection Activating Failure of Compressor, Inverter
Overload to Indoor in Cooling. High Temperature of Outdoor Air In
44 Low Pressure Increase Protection Activating
Heating Expansion Valve Open Lock
Pressure
45 High Pressure Increase Protection Activating Overload Operation. Excessive Refrigerant. Clogging of Heat Exchanger
46 High Pressure Decrease Protection Activating Insufficient Refrigerant.
47 Low Pressure Decrease Protection Activating Insufficient refrigerant .
51 Abnormality of Current Sensor for Inverter Failure of Sensor on Inverter PCB
52 Overcurrent Protection Activating Overload, Overcurrent, Locking to Compressor.
53 Inverter IPM Protection Activating Automatic Stoppage of IPM (Overcurrent, Low Voltage or Overheating).
Abnormal Inverter Fin Thermistor.
54 Increase in Inverter Fin Temperature
Abnormal Outdoor Fan
56 Abnormality of Detection for Fan Motor Position Abnormal detection Circuit of Transmission
57 Outdoor Fan Fan Controller Protection Activating Abnormal Fan Speed
58 Abnormality of Fan Controller Overcurrent, Abnormal Fan Controller Fin
96 Room temperature thermistor
Sensor on the KPI Unit Failure of Thermistor, Sensor ,Connection.
97 Outdoor temperature thermistor
3 Time Occurrence of Alarm Giving Damage to Compressor within 6
EE Inverter Compressor Protection
hours
Page 8-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.2.2. TROUBLESHOOTING BY ALARM CODE
Alarm code
Activation of the safety device in the indoor unit

��
� The RUN LED flickers and "ALARM" is displayed on the remote control switch.
� The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section.
The unit number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
� This alarm code is displayed when the contact between #1 and #2 of CN14 is not closed over
120 seconds during the cooling process, the heating process or the fan operation.
No Activation of the safety

RCI-FSN1E, RCD-FSN, RPC-FSNE,
device (such as
RPI-FSNE, RPF(I)-FSNE Series:
float switch FS) or
Is DC24V applied to both ends of R24?
incorrect wiring
Yes
Faulty PCB

Action
(Turn OFF the main switch) 8
Clogging of
High Drain Remove the clogged foreign
the Check the drain pan
Level particles
drainage
Check the continuity when Replace the float switch if

Fault
the drain level is low faulty
Activation of the
float switch
Faulty float Faulty Measure the resistance Fix the looseness and
switch contacting by means of the tester Replace the connector
Faulty
Check the connections Repair the connection
connection

Faulty indoor unit PCB Replace PCB if faulty
self-check mode *1)
*1): Refer to section 8.3.1 and 8.3.3.

Alarm code "01" is not displayed at the RPK series.
Page 8-15
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation of the safety device in the outdoor unit

��
� This alarm is displayed when one of the safety devices is activated during the compressor operation.
Does CMC1 turn ON

when starting?
Yes No
Is the voltage No
between PCN3#1 voltage
and the fasten terminal Faulty PCB1
"N" 220V or 240V during
Y52C1 ON?
No (No looseness)
Yes Faulty PCB1
No Yes
Is the protection
device still operating? Is PCN2 or PCN3 Restart after connecting
(No continuity between #1 loosened? PCN2 or PCN3 correctly
and #3 of PCN2)
Yes
No voltage
Does CMC1 turn ON for
Faulty PCB1
more than three seconds
Yes
Normal PCB1
Check the activation of the following safety devices. Remove the cause after checking
� High-Pressure Switch
PSH: 4.15 MPa (R410A)
Check item
Unit Connector for Fasten terminal Connector for the
CMC1 protection device
FSN(E)/FXN(E) PCN3 N PCN2, PCN16,
PCN17,PCN18,
PCN19 and PCN33
FSVNE PCN9 N PCN6
Page 8-16
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Action
Check the heat exchanger Remove the dust or the

for dust or for clogging clogging
Check the air filter for dust Remove the dust

Insufficient Air Flow to the Heat
Exchanger (Outdoor Heat
Check for any obstacles at
Exchanger during the Cooling
the inlet or the outlet of the Remove the obstacles
Process or Indoor Heat
heat exchanger
Exchanger during the Heating
Process)
Check the service area Secure service area
Check the speed

Replace the fan motor if
(Outdoor Fan: Cooling /
faulty
Indoor Fan: Heating)
Disconnected of the Fix the looseness or

Connector reconnect the connector
Malfunction of the Expansion
Valve
Replace the expansion
Activation of the Fully closed and locked
valve
High-Pressure
Switch due to the
Excessively High
Reduce the heat load or use
Discharge Calculate the heat load
a bigger unit
Pressure
Check for hot air near

Provide good circulation
the ceiling (Heating)
Excessively High Temp.
Air to the Indoor Unit
Check for short-circuited air Remove the short-circuited
(Heating) air
Check for other heat source Remove the heat source
Faulty
Pressure
Measure the discharge
pressure. Check the
continuity after the decrease
Replace the pressure switch
if faulty
8
Switch
of the pressure
Faulty High-
Pressure Insufficient Measure the resistance Fix the looseness.
Switch Contacting by means of the tester Replace the connector
Incorrect
Check the connections Repair the connections
Connection
Page 8-17
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Action
Check the connect wiring

and the connectors
Faulty or malfunction of the Check the operation sound

Replace the coil
expansion valve from the coil
Check the discharge gas

thermistor
Check the attaching state of

Reattach the thermistor
the discharge gas thermistor
Faulty gas bypass solenoid Replace the gas bypass

Check for clogging
valve solenoid valve
Check the cycle operation Charge the refrigerant

Overcharged refrigerant
temp. correctly
Activation of the
high-pressure Mixture of the non-condensate Check the air temp. Recharge the refrigerant
switch due to gas in the refrigerant cycle and the pressure after the vacuum pumping
the excessively
high discharge
pressure Clogging of the discharge
piping
Liquid line stop valve

or gas line stop valve Check the stop valves Fully Open the stop valves
is not in operation
Clogging of the check valve Check for clogging Replace the check valve
* When the coil of SVD1 is

faulty, change the coil
Fault Check solenoid valve
* When the main body of
of SVD1 (SVD1)
SVD1 is faulty, change
CH-Units
Faulty of Repair looseness

CH-Unit Insufficient
Contacting
Check the contacting and
Replace connector
connection below
Incorrect
Connection Repair connections
Page 8-18
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal transmission between the indoor units and the outdoor unit
��
� This alarm is displayed when an abnormal operation is maintained for three minutes after the normal
transmission between the indoor units and the outdoor unit. Also, an abnormal operation is maintained for
30 seconds after the micro-computer is automatically reset.
The alarm is displayed when the abnormal transmission is maintained for 30 seconds from the starting of
the outdoor unit.
� Investigate the cause of the overcurrent and take the necessary action when the fuses are blown out or
the breaker for the outdoor unit is activated.
(Refer to the next page)
Note from next page:

� FSN(E)/FXN(E)
*1) In case that the terminal resistance (DSW10-1P) is OFF when the H-Link Connection is performed.
Set the terminal resistance to ON when CN2 is removed.
Set the terminal resistance to OFF when CN2 is reconnected.
� FSVNE
*1) In case that the terminal resistance (DSW5-1P) is OFF when the H-Link Connection is performed.
Check item Check item

Power
Powersupply
supply Fasten terminal
Fasten terminal
400V 50 Hz Between R1 and S1
380-415V 50Hz Between R1 and S1
230V 50Hz Between R1 and N
220-240V 50Hz Between R1 and N
*2) Factory setting of PCB1 for non-pole transmission
Item Setting position

SW1 Left side (New transmission side)
JP1
CN2
Short circuit
Transmission wire connector 8
CN18 Non-occupied
Page 8-19
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
FSN(E)/FXN(E) Is DSW10-1P (terminal No

resistance) on PCB1 ON?
Set it correctly
FSVNE Is DSW5-1P (terminal
resistance) on PCB1 ON?
Yes
No Is the voltage between No

Is LED1 (red) on the fasten terminal "R1" Check the fuses of the
PCB1 ON? and "N" of PCB1 220V outdoor unit power supply
or 240V?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Is connector (PCN1, CN1)
Remove CN2 of Plug PCN1 and CN1
for the transformer
PCB1 correctly Outdoor
loosened?
unit
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Is LED3 (yellow) Is the fuse for PCB1
Replace the fuse
on PCB1 ON? blown out?
No No
Is LED3 (yellow) Faulty PCB1

on PCB1 flickering more
than once in 10 seconds?
No
Yes PCB1: Outdoor unit printed circuit board.
PCB1’: Indoor unit printed circuit board.
Connect CN2 of PCB1
Is DSW5-1P No
(end terminal resistance) Set it correctly
on PCB1 ON?
Yes
No Is voltage between No
Is LED1 (red) on
"R1" and "N" of PCN1 on Check CH-unit wiring
PCB1 ON?
PCB 220V or 240V?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Is connector (CN23, CN7)
Plug CN23 and CN7
for transformer on PCB
correctly
is loosened?
No
Is the fuse for PCB Yes CH-unit

Replace the fuse
blown?
No
Yes Is LED3 (green) Yes Faulty PCB1

Is LED3 (green)
still ON after removing
on PCB ON?
CN9 on PCB1?
No No Check other CH-units

No
Is LED3 (yellow) Check the wiring between
on PCB flickering more than outdoor unit and CH-units
once in 10 seconds? or fuse (EF1) for PCB
Yes
To next Page
Page 8-20
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Remove CN8 of PCB
Is LED2 (yellow) Yes

on PCB ON?
CH-unit
No Faulty PCB
Is LED2 (yellow) No No
Are other units
on PCB flickering more
in same condition?
than once in 10 seconds?
Yes Yes Faulty PCB1
Remove CN9 of PCB
Yes Is LED3 (yellow) ON Yes

Is LED3 on PCB1' ON? even if CN2 of PCB1’ Faulty PCB1
is removed?
No No Check other indoor units
No Check the wiring between

Is LED3 (yellow) on
the outdoor unit and the
PCB1’ flickering more than
indoor units or the fuse
once in 10 seconds?
(EF1) for PCB1
Yes
Indoor
Does the refrigeration No unit
system setting between
Set correctly
DSW1 on PCB1’ and
DSW5 on PCB1’ match?
Yes
Does the alarm occur with

all the indoor units?
No
Faulty PCB1'
8
Yes
Faulty PCB1
Page 8-21
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Action
Measure the voltage by

Power failure or no power supply Supply the power
means of the tester
Check the insulation Remove the short circuit

Short circuit between wires
material for breaks and replace the fuse
Blown out fuse

for the power Measure the insulation Remove the short circuit to
Short-circuited wire to ground
source or resistance ground and replace the fuse
activation of the
outdoor unit
Measure the resistance
breaker Replace the comp. and the
Faulty comp. motor between the wires and the
(Outdoor Unit fuse
insulation resistance
and CH-unit)
Replace the outdoor unit fan
Faulty outdoor unit fan motor between the wires and the
motor and the fuse
Check the insulation Remove the short circuit

Short circuit between wires
material for breaks and replace the fuse
Blown out fuse Short circuit of the control Measure the insulation Remove the short circuit
for control circuit circuit (to ground) resistance and replace the fuse
or activation of
outdoor unit
breaker Faulty solenoid coil for the
Measure the resistance of Replace the magnetic
(Outdoor Unit magnetic switch for the comp.
coil switch and the fuse
and CH-unit) motor

Failure of the outdoor unit Replace the outdoor unit fan
between the wires and the
fan motor motor and fuse
Faulty transformer Measure input voltage Replace transformer
Between outdoor unit and

Disconnected Check the continuity
indoor unit Replacing wires
wires insufficient of the wires.
repairing and tightening the
contacting or Check for looseness of the
screws and the correct
incorrect connection screws.
Power source wiring for the wiring
connection Check the terminal Nos.
outdoor unit
Disconnected wires to PCB Check the connections Correctly connect the wires
Faulty PCB
(outdoor unit,
indoor unit)
Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty
Check the continuity and the

Disconnected wire; insufficient Replacing wires, repairing
looseness of connection
contacting and tightening the screws
screws
Incorrect
wiring
Incorrect wiring Check the terminal Nos. Correctly connect the wires
Page 8-22
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
 
Troubleshooting
 





  
 

 
 
 


 



 



 
 

  
 
  
 
 
 




 
 

    


  


  
 

 

  

 



 
 

 



8
 


 
 




 





 
 

 


 

 


 

 

 

 

 





Page 8-23
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Action
Between control PCB, ISPM

Disconnected
and FANM Check the continuity of
wires, insufficient Replacing wires, repairing,
wires. Check for looseness
contacting or tightening screws and
of the connection screws.
incorrect incorrect wiring
Power source wiring for the Check the connection No.
connection
outdoor unit
Repair the wiring

Disconnected wires to PCB Check the connections
Faulty PCB connections
(PCB1 for the
control, PCB3 for
the inverter)
Check the continuity.

Disconnected wires; Replacing wires, repairing,
Check for looseness of
insufficient contacting tightening screws
connection screws
Incorrect wiring
Incorrect wiring Check the connection Nos. Correctly connect the wires
Page 8-24
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Code abnormal operation of picking up phase signal

��
� This alarm is displayed when the main power source phase is reversely connected or one phase
is not connected.
Yes
Single phase Correctly connect each phase of
(Is there any phase which is not connected)? the power source
PCB1 is normal
No
Yes
Correctly connect each phase of
Reverse phase connection?
the power source
PCB1 is normal
No
Yes
Is there any excessive voltage decrease Abnormal operation with the
at the power source? power source
PCB1 is normal
No
Faulty PCB1 or other cause.

Refer to next page
� NOTE:
PCB1: Outdoor unit printed circuit board.
� FSN(E)/FXN(E) � FSVNE
8
Voltage for unit to Voltage for unit to
be suspended be suspended
Running voltage: Running voltage:
342 to 456V 207
198toto253V
264V
Starting Starting
voltage: Less voltage: Less
than 323V than 187V
Action
Replacing wires, repair,

Check it according to the
Reverse or single phase tightening screws or correct
Activation of electrical wiring
wiring
reverse phase
sensor in the
outdoor unit
Faulty outdoor unit PCB Replace PCB if faulty
Page 8-25
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Excessively low voltage or excessively high voltage for the inverter

��
� This alarm code is displayed when the voltage between terminal "P" and "N" of ISPM is insufficient
and the alarm has three occurrences in 30 minutes. If the number of occurrences is smaller than two, the
retry operation is performed. The alarm code "06." means fan controller Abnormal Operation.
Restart the operation
FSN(E)/FXN(E) Is the power supply voltage No

380V ±10% or 415V ±10%? Check the wiring and the
FSVNE Is the power supply voltage cable capacity
230V ±10% or 240V ±10%?
220V
Yes
FSN(E)/FXN(E) Is the voltage over 323V during
the operation? No
FSVNE Is the voltage over 187V during
the operation?
Yes
Does the voltage fall during the Yes

operation because of the
operation of other apparatus?
Frequency can
No increase higher than
60Hz
Yes
How is the Compressor stops
Faulty ISPM. Replace
Does LED201 on ISPM ON? compressor immediately (lower
ISPM.
operation? than 30Hz)
Compressor stops
No
when frequency
increases (Approx.
No 30Hz to 60Hz)
Is the connection correct
between ISPM and
Connect correctly
Reactor (PCL) with Capacitor
(CB1, 2) or CMC?
� Be extremely careful because
Yes (Loose wiring
of the high voltage
Change of color)
FSN(E)/FXN(E) Is the DC voltage Yes No
over 460V?
Check the capacitors Replace the capacitors
FSVNE Is the DC voltage
(CB1, 2)
over 253V
240V?
Fault
Normal Capacitors have high voltage.
No
Be extremely careful *1)
Faulty ISPM. Replace

ISPM.
Check the wiring, ISPM and

the capacitors (CB1, 2). *2)
In the case the wiring is
correct, replace ISPM.
*1): If the capacitor has a high voltage, perform the high-voltage discharge procedure. Refer to section 8.3.4.
*2): Checking procedures of the diode module are displayed in item 8.3.4.
*3): DC voltage measuring position:
ISPM "P" Terminal to "+" Terminal of Tester, "N" Terminal to "–" Terminal of Tester Measuring Position: DC 1000V.
Page 8-26
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Excessively low or excessively high voltage for inverter fan module

��.
� This alarm code is displayed when the voltage between terminal "P" and "N" of Fan Controller is
insufficient and the alarm has three occurrences in 30 minutes. If the number of occurrences is smaller
than two, the retry operation is performed.
No
Is the power supply voltage 380V ±10% Check the wiring and the
or 415V ±10%? cable capacity
Yes
No
Is the voltage over 323V during the operation?
Yes
Does the voltage fall during the Yes

operation because of the
operation of other apparatus?
Frequency can
No increase higher than
60Hz
Yes
Fan stops
How is the fan Faulty fan controller.
Does LED201or FANM turn ON? immediately (Lower
operation? Replace FANM
than 30Hz)
Fan stops when

No
frequency increases
(Approx. 30Hz to
No 60Hz)
Is the connection correct

between ISPM and FANM?
Connect correctly
8
Yes
No
Is the fuse cut out?
Yes
Restart fuse
*1): If the capacitor has a high voltage, perform the high-voltage discharge procedure as described later
*2): Checking procedures of the diode module are displayed later
FANM: Inverter fan controller
Page 8-27
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Decrease of the discharge gas superheat (FSN(E)/FXN(E))

��
� If the discharge gas superheat is below 10 °C at the top of the compressor for 30 minutes, the retry
operation is performed. However, if the alarm occurs twice in addition to the first occurrence within two
hours, this alarm code is displayed.
Position of the Thermistor
No
Is the thermistor on top of
Faulty thermistor Model RAS- Thermistor
compressor OK? *1) [HP]FSN(E)/FXN(E) position (a)
Thermistor
Yes ref. Display 5 8 10 16 20 24 30
Is the thermistor installed
correctly on the compressor?
No Install the thermistor
correctly 
THM8
THM9 Note: ��
�� Inverter
fix compressor
THM12See position
�� of the
Yes THM13thermistor��in the next
THM14page ��
Was the compressor in cooling Heat
THM16 ��
mode or heating mode when Heating process No. of compressors 1 2 2 3 4 5 6
the alarm occurred?
Cool
Cooling process Exp. Valve connector number

5, 8 FSN(E) CN10
10 FSN(E) CN10, CN12
Check the high pressure Check the discharge pressure
16, 20 FSN CN10, CN11, CN12
and the compressor discharge and the compressor discharge
gas temperature. gas temperature. Calculate the 24, 30 FSN CN10, CN11, CN12, CN21, CN22
Calculate the superheat value superheat value 8, 10 FXN(E) CN10, CN11, CN12
in the outdoor unit PCB in the outdoor unit PCB
16, 20 FXN CN10, CN11, CN12, CN20
No
24, 30 FXN CN10, CN11, CN12, CN20, CN21
Is the superheat value No
Superheat value: under 10 °C?
under10 °C?
Yes FXN(E) Yes
Remove the sudden
Eliminate rapid Is the opening of the outdoor No changes of load like short
No Is the opening degree
change of heat load unit heat exchanger's expansion path of an outgoing air to
in a room or shot of Ex. Valve of oudoor the air intake of the
valve under 8%?
path of discharge air bypass below 5%? outdoor unit, or the cause
among outdoor units Yes of frequent thermo-
Yes ON/OFF
Plug connection
No Is the connector of
CN12 for Ex. Valve of  Note:
CN12 of PCB1 oudoor bypass See connector numbers in
properly connected properly? the next page
No Yes Are the connectors No

(CN10, CN11, CN12, CN20,
Match the refrigerant Are the refrigerant CN21 and CN22 of PCB) of the Plug the connectors CN10,
piping and the piping and the electric outdoor unit heat exchanger's CN11, CN12, CN21 and
electric wiring wiring matching? electric expansion valve CN22 of PCB properly
connected properly?
Yes Yes
Is the connector on the No

No Is the refrigerant correctly Charge the correct
Plug the connector indoor unit PCB for the charged? refrigerant volume
properly ex. valve connected
properly? Yes
No
Check the exp. valve. Self-
Is the gas leaking? inspection of PCB1
Yes
Repair the leaks of gas.

Correctly charge the refrigerant
*1): Refer to "Characteristics of thermistor"
Page 8-28
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
 Position of the Thermistor

Model RAS-[HP]FSN(E) / FXN(E) Thermistor position (a)
Thermistor ref. Display 5 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
THM8  Inverter
THM9  fix compressor
THM12 
THM13 
THM14 
THM16 
No. of compressors 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6
 Expansion valve connector number

Outdoor unit model FSN(E) Connector No. Outdoor unit model FXN(E) Connector No.
RAS-5/8FSN(E) CN10 RAS-8~12FXN(E) CN10, CN11, CN12
RAS-10/12FSN(E) CN10, CN12 RAS-16~22FXN CN10, CN11, CN12, CN20
RAS-14~22FSN CN10, CN11, CN12 RAS-24~32FXN CN10, CN11, CN12, CN20,
CN21
RAS-24~32FSN CN10, CN11, CN12, CN21,
CN22
Action
Ref. cycle is different from the Check the ref. cycle and the
Repair the wiring
electrical system electrical system
Measure the pressure.

8
Overcharged refrigerant (Refer to Figure
refrigerant
in "Test Run of SM".)
Replace the ex. valve if

Faulty Ex. valve Refer to 8.3.4.
faulty
Replace PCB and check the

Fault Replace PCB if faulty
operation
Decrease of the
discharge gas Faulty PCB
Disconnected
superheat wires for the
Check the connections Repair the wiring connection
Ex. valve
control
Replace the thermistor if

Fault Measure the resistance
faulty
Faulty
discharge Incorrect Correctly mount the
Check the mounting state
gas mounting thermistor
thermistor
Remove looseness,
Incorrect
Check the connections Replace the connector or
connection
Repair the connections
Page 8-29
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Decrease of the discharge gas superheat (FSVNE)

��
� If the discharge gas superheat is below 20 °C. at the top of the compressor for 30 minutes, the retry
operation is performed. However, if the alarm occurs twice in addition to the first occurrence within
two hours, this alarm code is displayed.
No
Is the thermistor on top of
Faulty thermistor
compressor OK? *1)
Yes
No
Is the thermistor installed Install the thermistor
correctly on the compressor? correctly
Yes

mode or heating mode when Heating process
the alarm occurred?
Cool
Cooling process
Check the high pressure Check the high-pressure

and the compressor discharge and the compressor discharge
gas temperature. gas temperature. Calculate the
Calculate the superheat value superheat value
in the outdoor unit PCB in the outdoor unit PCB
No
Is the superheat value No

Superheat value: under 20 °C?
under 20 °C?
Yes Yes
Is the connection on Indoor No

Unit PCB and intermediate Plug the connector
connector for expansion valve properly
connected properly?
Yes
Does outdoor fan motor No

Replace Outdoor fan motor
operate correcly?
Yes
No
Is refrigerant Charge correct refrigerant
correctly charged? volume
Yes
Yes
Repair leaks of gas.
Is gas leaking?
Correctly charge refrigerant
No
Remove the cause of short
path of discharge air to the
air intake of the outdoor unit
*1): Refer to "Characteristics of thermistor"
Page 8-30
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Action
Ref. cycle is different from the Check the ref. cycle and the
Repair the wiring
electrical system electrical system
Measure the pressure. Correctly charge the

Overcharged refrigerant
(Refer to 7.5) refrigerant

faulty

operation
Decrease of the
discharge gas Faulty PCB
Disconnected
superheat wires for the
Check the connections Repair the wiring connection
Ex. valve
control

faulty
Faulty
thermistor
Remove looseness,
Incorrect
Check the connections Replace the connector or
connection
Repair the connections
Page 8-31
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Excessively high discharge gas temperature at the top of the compressor chamber
��
� This alarm is displayed when the following conditions occur three times within one hour:
(1) The temperature of the thermistor on the top of the compressor is maintained higher than
132 °C for ten minutes;
(2) The temperature of the thermistor on the top of the compressor is maintained higher than
140 °C for five seconds.
Position of the Thermistor
No Model RAS- Thermistor

Is the thermistor on top of the
Faulty thermistor [HP]FSN(E)/FXN(E) position (a)
compressor OK? Thermistor
ref. Display 5 8 10 16 20 24 30
Yes THM8 �� Inverter
No 
THM9
THM12
Note: ��
��
fix compressor
Is the thermistor installed Install the thermistor See position of the
THM13 ��
correctly on the compressor? correctly thermistor in the next
THM14
page ��
THM16 ��
Yes
No. of compressors 1 2 2 3 4 5 6
mode or heating mode when Heating process
the alarm occurred?
Exp. Valve connector number
Cooling
5, 8 FSN(E)/FXN(E) CN10
Cooling process 10 FSN(E)/FXN(E) CN10, CN12

16, 20 FSN/FXN CN10, CN11, CN12
Yes CN10, CN11, CN12, CN21,
24, 30 FSN/FXN CN22
Check the outdoor unit PCB if the Check the outdoor unit PCB to see
compressor discharge gas whether the compressor discharge No
temperature is over 132 °C gas temperature is over 132 °C
Yes No Yes Remove the sudden

changes of the load like
Is the opening of all the No the short path of an
Is the opening of the outdoor
operating indoor unit ex. valve outgoing air to the air
unit ex. valve 100%?
100%? No intake of the outdoor unit,
or the cause of frequent
Yes Yes thermo-ON/OFF
Remove the sudden Are the connectors (CN10,
No
changes of the indoor load CN11, CN12, CN21 and CN22 Plug the connectors CN10,
(short path, etc.) or the of PCB1) of the outdoor unit CN11, CN12, CN21 and
short path of air between heat exchanger's expansion CN22 of PCB1 properly
outdoor and indoor unit valve connected properly?
Yes
No
 Note:
Is the amount of refrigerant Charge the correct See connector numbers in
correct? refrigerant volume the next page
Yes
No
Is the gas leaking? Check the exp. valve
Yes
Repair the leaks of gas.

Recharge the refrigerant
Page 8-32
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting

Model RAS-[HP]FSN(E) / FXN(E) Thermistor position (a)
Thermistor ref. Display 5 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
THM8  Inverter
THM9  fix compressor
THM12 
THM13 
THM14 
THM16 
No. of compressors 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6
 Expansion valve connector number

Outdoor unit model FSN(E) Connector No. Outdoor unit model FXN(E) Connector No.
RAS-5/8FSN(E) CN10 RAS-8~12FXN(E) CN10, CN11, CN12
RAS-10/12FSN(E) CN10, CN12 RAS-16~22FXN CN10, CN11, CN12, CN20
RAS-14~22FSN CN10, CN11, CN12 RAS-24~32FXN CN10, CN11, CN12, CN20,
CN21
RAS-24~32FSN CN10, CN11, CN12, CN21,
CN22
Action (Turn OFF the main

switch)
Ref. cycle is different from Check the ref. cycle and the
Repair the wiring
the electrical system electrical system
Shortage of refrigerant Check the pressures Correctly charge refrigerant

faulty
8
operation
Excessively high Faulty PCB

Disconnecte
discharge gas d wires for
temperature Check the connections Repair the wiring connection
Ex. valve
(at the top of the control
compressor)
Faulty gas bypass solenoid Replace the solenoid valve

Ref. leakage
valve if faulty

faulty
Faulty
thermistor
Remove looseness, replace
Incorrect
Check the connections the connector or repair the
connection
connections
Page 8-33
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation of the protection device for the outdoor fan motor for FSN(E)/FXN(E)
��
� This alarm code is displayed when the temperature of the internal thermostat (ITO1, 2) for the outdoor fan
motor is higher than 130 °C.
No Is the continuity present after the No

temperature has dropped to under 83 °C at
Does the outdoor fan run? Replace the motor
the internal thermostat of the outdoor fan
motor?
Yes
Yes
Is the connection bad at the connector Yes

PCN14 on PCB1 or the fan motor Correct the connection.
connectors Replace the connector
(CN1, CN2)?
No
<Common> No
If the voltage is over 264V or
Is 220V or 240V applied across R2
under 187V, check the power
and S2 on PCB2?
source and check the wiring
Is 220V or 240V applied across EF5(1)
around the outdoor unit PCB
and N of TB1?
Yes
Replace the outdoor fan motor if faulty.

Or check the outdoor temperature. If the
outdoor temperature is unusual, take a
suitable action to reduce the outdoor
temperature
Action
Measure the coil resistance

Faulty Outdoor Unit Fan Motor and the insulation Replace the motor if faulty
resistance
Check the continuity after

Replace the fan motor if no
Activation the fan motor temperature
Fault continuity of the internal
of the internal decreases to the room
thermostat under 83 °C
thermostat temp.
for the outdoor Faulty
unit fan motor internal Insufficient Measure the resistance Correct Looseness. Replace
thermostat contacting by means of the tester the connectors
Incorrect
connection
Page 8-34
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of thermistor for the indoor unit air inlet temperature
�� (air inlet thermistor)
� This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.24 k�) or cut (greater
than 840 k�) during the cooling process or the heating process. The system is automatically restarted
when the fault is removed.
No
Is THM1 connected to (intake)
Connect it
of PCB?
Yes
No
Is the resistance of THM1
Faulty thermistor
between 0.24k� and 840k�?
Yes
Faulty PCB Indoor unit

air inlet thermistor
Action

Fault Check the resistance
faulty
Faulty air inlet
thermistor
8
Repair the wiring and the
Incorrect connection Check the connection
connections
Replace PCB and

check the operation
� NOTE:
Thermistor This data is applicable to the following
resistance thermistors:
(K�) 1. Indoor unit discharge air temperature,
2. Indoor unit liquid refrigerant temperature
3. Indoor unit air inlet temperature
4. Outdoor temperature
5. Outdoor unit evaporating temperature
6. Indoor unit gas piping
Air temperature (°C)
Thermistor characteristics
Page 8-35
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of the thermistor for the indoor discharge air temperature
�� (air outlet thermistor)
No
Connect it
of PCB?
Yes
No
Faulty thermistor
Refer to the thermistor

Yes resistance in Alarm 11
Indoor unit In case of 4-way

Faulty PCB air outlet thermistor cassette
(THM2)
Action

faulty
Faulty air outlet
thermistor
Repair the wiring and
connections
Replace PCB and

check the operation
Page 8-36
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of the thermistor for the indoor unit heat exchanger liquid
�� pipe temperature (freeze protection thermistor)
No
Connect it
of PCB?
Yes
No
Faulty thermistor

Freeze protection
thermistor (THM3)
Faulty PCB
In case of 4-way
cassette
Action

faulty
Faulty I.U. gas
pipe air inlet
thermistor
Repair the wiring and
connections
Faulty PCB
Replace PCB and
check the operation
Replace PCB if faulty
8
Page 8-37
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of the thermistor for the indoor unit heat exchanger
�� gas pipe temperature (gas piping thermistor)
No
Connect it
of PCB?
Yes
No
Faulty thermistor

Thermistor for heat
exchanger gas pipe
Faulty PCB (for 4-way cassette)
Action

if faulty
Faulty air inlet
thermistor
connections
Replace PCB and

check the operation
Page 8-38
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of thermistor for fresh outdoor air (Econofresh)

��
No
Connect it
of PCB?
Yes
No
Faulty thermistor
Yes
Faulty PCB
Action

faulty
Faulty air inlet
thermistor
connections
Faulty PCB
Replace PCB and
check the operation
Replace PCB if faulty 8
� NOTE:
Thermistor This data is applicable to the following
resistance thermistors:
(K�) 1. Indoor unit discharge air temperature,
2. Indoor unit liquid refrigerant temperature
3. Indoor unit air inlet temperature
4. Outdoor temperature
5. Outdoor unit evaporating temperature
6. Indoor unit gas piping
Page 8-39
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation of the protection device for the indoor fan motor
�� (except RCI and RPK)
� This alarm code is displayed when the temperature of the internal thermostat for the indoor fan motor is
higher than 130 °C.
Yes
No No No
Is the continuity present
Does the indoor
at the internal thermostat Is the fan motor hot? Replace the motor
fan run?
of the indoor fan motor?
Yes Yes
No
Is the connection bad Repair the wiring and the
at the connector? connections
Yes
No
Is the coil resistance of the
Replace the motor
fan motor normal?
Yes
Check the indoor

temperature. If the indoor
temperature is unusual, take a
suitable action to reduce the
indoor temperature
Action

Faulty indoor unit fan motor and the insulation Replace the motor if faulty
resistance
Check the continuity after

Activation of the Replace the fan motor if
Fault the fan motor temperature
internal there is no continuity
decreases to room temp
thermostat for
the indoor unit Faulty
fan motor Insufficient Measure the resistance Correct looseness.
internal
contacting by means of the tester Replace the connectors
thermostat
Incorrect
connection
Page 8-40
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation of protection device for indoor fan motor (RCI-Model)

��
and the alarm code is indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
� This alarm code is indicated when the following condition occurs thre times in 30 minutes.
– Indoor fan rotates less than 70 rpm for 5 seconds during operation.
Does the indoor When the cause is checked by this flow chart,
fan run? confirm with the fan speed setting is Hi
No
Check the connector as PCB1: CN1, CN19, PCN1, PCN7

shown on the right PCB2: CN201, CN202, PCN201, PCN202, PCN203, N (Faston)
Yes
Yes Insuffcient voltage for PCB2
Is LED 1 on (DC 280V)
Faulty PCB2 Replace PCB2
PCB2 OFF?
No
No Is the voltage between Vcc 15 and
Is DC power supply for GND1 of PCB2 15V �10%
PCB2 correctly?
Yes
Yes
Is LED 4 on Faulty PCB1 or Insuffcient voltage for PCB 1 Replace PCB1 or
PCB1 OFF? Transformer Transformer
No
No Is the voltage between Vcc05 and
Is DC power supply for Faulty PCB1 GND of PCB1 5 �5% Replace PCB1 or
PCB1 correctly? or Transformer Is the voltage between Vcc12 and Transformer
GND of PCB1 12 �10%
8
Yes
Is fan motor speed Yes Remove CN201 on PCB2.
control command to fan Faulty fan motor Is the voltage between CN201 #3 and Replace fan motor
motor correctly? GNC1 more than 1V?
No
Yes Is the voltage between CND of PCB1
Is ulse signal to PCB2 and PC1 2# of PCB2 several voltage?
correctly?
No
Electrical
Faulty PCB1 Box
Yes
Replace PCB1
Transformer
Page 8-41
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation of protection device for indoor fan motor (RPK-Model)

��
� This alarm code is displayed when the running current of the indoor fan motor is higher than 1A.
No
No In the case of Hi-Tap No Yes
Does the indoor setting, is the voltage Is the fuse
Replace the PCB
fan run? between #1-#5 ofCN29 (EF1, EF2) cut out?
on PCB normal?
Yes No
Yes Replace the motor
No
Is the connection bad at the Repair the wiring and the
connector? connections
Yes
No
Is the coil resistance of
Replace the motor
the fan motor normal?
Yes
Check the dislocation of the

motor shaft and the obstacle
of the current of air
Action

Faulty indoor unit fan motor and the insulation Replace the motor if faulty
resistance
Check the output voltage

Activation of the Replace the fan motor
Fault and the fuse in the case of
overcurrent if there is no continuity
Hi-Tap setting
protection device
for the indoor fan
motor Insufficient Measure the resistance Correct looseness.
Faulty PCB
contacting by means of the tester Replace the connectors
Incorrect
connection
Page 8-42
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of the high-pressure sensor for the outdoor unit

��
� This alarm code is displayed when the pressure sensor voltage decreases lower than 0.1 V or increases
higher than 4.9V during the operation.
Is the connection Yes

CN7 of the outdoor unit PCB1 Connect correctly
bad?
No
No
Is 12 VDC applied across #1
and #3 of the connector CN7 Defective PCB1
of the outdoor unit PCB1?
Yes
Is the voltage under 0.1 VDC No

or over 4.9 VDC across #2
Faulty PCB1
and #3 of the connector CN7
Yes
Yes
Clogged check joint? Replace the check joint
No
Abnormal operation of high-

pressure sensor 8
Action
Check that the output Replace the pressure

Fault
voltage is correct sensor if faulty
Faulty high-
pressure sensor
Incorrect connection Check the connections
connections
Replace PCB and

check the operation
Indicated
Malfunction of the pressure
pressure value is Check the check joint for
sensor due to a faulty check Replace the check joint
excessively high clogging
joint
or low
Page 8-43
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of the thermistor for the outdoor temperature
�� (outdoor unit ambient thermistor)
� This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.2 k�) or cut (greater than
500 k�) during the operation. However, this alarm occurs during the test run mode only. In the case that
the thermistor is abnormal during the operation, the operation continues based on the assumption that
the outdoor temperature is 35 °C (Cooling) / 6 °C (Heating).
No � FSN(E)/FXN(E)
Is THM7 (TA) connected to
Connect it
PCB1?
Yes Outdoor unit

ambient
thermistor
No
Is the resistance of THM7 (THM7)
Faulty thermistor
Yes
Faulty PCB1
� FSVNE
Outdoor unit
ambient
thermistor
(THM7)
Action

faulty
Faulty thermistor
for the outdoor
unit ambient
Incorrect connection Check the wiring to PCB
connections
Replace PCB and

check the operation
Page 8-44
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of thermistor for discharge gas temperature on the top of
�� compressor chamber
The unit number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB. (*1)
If you find an abnormal operation of the thermistor, check all the thermistors as shown below.
� This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 0.9 k�) for one second
or cut (greater than 5946 k�) during the operation.

No
Is the setting of DSW2 Set DSW2 on PCB1 Position of the Thermistor
Model RAS-[HP]FSN(E) / Thermistor
on PCB1 right? correctly FXN(E) position (a)
Thermistor Display 5 8 Model
14 18 RAS-
24 28 Thermistor
Yes ref. [HP]FSN(E)/FXN(E)
10 16 20 26 30
12 22 32
position (a)
Thermistor
No THM8 Inverter
Are the thermistors * ref. Display
 5 8 10 16 20 24 30
connected to THM8, 9, 12, 13, Connect the thermistors THM8 �� Inverter
THM9 fix compressor
14, 16 and PCB1 THM9 
�� fix compressor
THM12
THM12 ��

Yes THM13 ��
THM13
THM14 
��
Is the resistance of thermistor No THM16 ��
THM14
THM the same as the Faulty thermistor 
No. of compressors 1 2 2 3 4 5 6
resistances in the figure below? THM16

Yes No. of compressors 1 2 3 4 5 6
Faulty PCB1
� � � Faulty Td1
Resistance of
thermistor
(K�)
� � �
8
Faulty Td4
Air temperature
Characteristics of Thermistor (*1) Indication on the display
of the outdoor unit PCB
Action

faulty
Faulty discharge
gas thermistor
Incorrect connection Check the wiring to PCB
connections
Replace PCB and

check the operation
Check the setting of DSW2 Correctly set DSW2

Incorrect setting of DSW2 on PCB1
on PCB1 on PCB1
Page 8-45
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of the thermistor for the evaporating temperature during
�� the heating process (outdoor unit)
The unit number and the alarm code are displayed on the display of the outdoor unit PCB. (*1)
If you find an abnormal operation of the thermistor, check all the thermistors as shown below.
� The evaporating thermistor during the heating process is attached to the heat exchanger as shown in the
figure below.
If thIs the thermistor is faulty, such as short-circuit (less than 0,2k�) or cut (more than 840k�) during
eight minutes continuously, this alarm is displayed. The position is indicated below.
No
Is THM10(Te1) or THM11(Te2)
Connect it
connected to PCB1?
Yes
Thermistor
(Evaporating
Is the resistance of the No Temperature
thermistor between 0.2k� and Faulty thermistor for Outdoor Unit)
500k�?
Yes � � � Faulty Te1

� � � Faulty Te2
Faulty PCB1
(*1) Indication on the display

of the outdoor unit PCB
Action

Faulty thermistor Fault Check the resistance
faulty
for the
evaporating
temperature
during heating Incorrect Connection Check the wiring to PCB
connections
Replace PCB and

check the operation
Thermistor
resistance
(K�)

Page 8-46
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of the thermistor for suction gas temperature
�� (Suction compressor thermistor FSVNE)
The RUN LED flickers and "ALARM" is displayed on the remote control switch.
The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section.
The unit number and the alarm code are indicated on the display of the outdoor unit PCB.
� This alarm code is indicated when the thermistor is short-circuited (less than 1 k�) or cut (greater than
6 M�) during the cooling or heating operation.
No
Is the thermistor conected R25 = 200 k�
Connect it B = 3920 k�
to THM9 of PCB? k�
Yes
No
Is resistance of THM9
Faulty thermistor
between 1k� and 6k�
Yes
Faulty PCB
°C
Action

faulty
Faulty Top of
Compressor
thermistor
Incorrect connection Check wiring to PCB1
connections
Replace PCB1 and

Faulty PCB1 Replace PCB1 if faulty
check the operation
Temperature
(°C)
Resistance
(k�)
Temperature
(°C)
Resistance
(k�)
8
0 640.44 65 41.79
5 500.66 70 35.11
10 394.16 75 29.61
15 312.41 80 25.07
20 249.20 85 21.31
25 200.00 90 18.17
30 161.45 95 15.55
35 131.06 100 13.35
40 106.96 105 11.50
45 87.74 110 9.93
50 72.32 115 8.60
55 59.97 120 7.47
60 49.96 125 6.51
The resistance value has fudge factor (�10%)
Page 8-47
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
29
Abnormal operation of the low-pressure sensor for the outdoor unit
� This alarm code is displayed when the pressure sensor voltage decreases lower than 0.1 V or increases
higher than 4.9V during the operation.
Is the connection CN8 Yes

of the outdoor unit PCB1 Connect correctly.
mated loose?
No
Is 5 VDC applied No
across #1 and #3 of the
Faulty PCB1.
connector CN8 of the outdoor
circuit board PCB1?
Yes
Is the voltage under 0.1 VDC No

or over 4.9 VDC across #2
Faulty PCB1.
and #3 of the connector CN8
Yes
Yes
Is the check joint clogged? Replace the check joint.
No
Abnormal operation with the

low-pressure sensor.
Action
Check that the output Replace the pressure

Fault
voltage is correct. sensor if faulty.
Faulty high-
pressure sensor
Incorrect connection Check the connections.
connections.
Replace PCB and

Faulty PCB Replace PCB if faulty.
check the operation.
Indicated
Malfunction of the pressure
pressure value is Check the check joint for
sensor due to a faulty check Replace the check joint.
excessively high clogging.
joint
or low
Page 8-48
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Incorrect wiring connection (FXN(E) series only)

��
� This alarm code is displayed when there are more than two CH units connected between outdoor unit
and indoor unit due to incorrect wiring connection.
� This alarm code is displayed when the outdoor unit PCB (PCB1) for FXN(E) series is attached incorrectly
to the CH Unit series outdoor unit.
No
Correct the wiring connection and
Is the wiring connection correct?
start the unit again.
Outdoor unit PCB is correct
Yes
No Replace PCB1 with the one for

Is PCB1 for FXN(E) series? FXN(E) series and start the unit
Outdoor unit PCB is for FSN(E) series again.
Yes
Faulty PCB for CH unit
Correct wiring Incorrect wiring

Incorrect Example:
Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit Two (2) CH units between
outdoor unit and indoor unit
No. 1, 2 No. 1, 2 No. 1, 2
of TB2 of TB2 of TB2
CH Unit CH Unit CH Unit CH Unit
No. 3, 4 No. 3, 4 No. 3, 4 No. 3, 4

of TB2 of TB2 of TB2 of TB2
Indoor
Unit
Indoor
Unit
Indoor
Unit
Indoor
Unit 8
Page 8-49
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Incorrect capacity setting or combined capacity between the indoor units
�� and the outdoor unit
� This alarm code is displayed when the DSW2 (DIP switch for the capacity setting) on the outdoor unit
PCB1 is not set (all the settings from #1 to #3 are at the OFF side) or when the DSW2 has not been
correctly set. (FSN(E)/FXN(E))
� This alarmcode is displayed when the DSW3 (DIP switch for the capacity setting) on the outdoor unit
PCB1 is not set or when DSW3 has not been correctly set. (FSVNE)
� This alarm code is displayed when the total indoor unit capacity is smaller than 50% or greater
than 150% of the combined outdoor unit capacity.
FSN(E)/FXN(E) Are #1-#3 of DSW2 No
on the outdoor unit
PCB1 set correctly?
Set the capacity for PCB1
FSVNE Are #1-#3 of DSW3
on the outdoor unit
PCB1 set correctly?
Yes Set the capacity for PCB.
If I. U. is No. 16 or lower, match
No DSW1 on PCB1 and DSW5 on PCB.
Are #1-#4 of DSW3 on the indoor unit If I. U. is No. 17 or higher,
PCB set correctly? set # 5 of DSW4 to ON on the O.U.
PCB1. Make sure that DSW5 on
Yes the I.U. PCB matches DSW1
setting on the O.U. PCB1
Are the setting of DSW1 on the No

outdoor unit PCB1 and the setting of
Set the DIP switches correctly
DSW5 on the indoor unit PCB totally
same in a refrigerant cycle?
Yes
Total capacity of the indoor units

is wrong
Action
Check the combination of

Correctly set the DIP switch
Incorrect capacity setting of the indoor unit the indoor units and the
DSW3
capacity setting on PCB
Check the capacity setting Correctly set the DIP switch

Incorrect capacity setting of the outdoor unit
on the outdoor unit PCB DSW2
Check the outdoor unit Make sure that the total

Total indoor unit capacity that is connected to the outdoor
model by calculating the indoor unit capacity is from
unit is beyond the permissible range
total indoor unit capacity 50% to 130%
Check the refrigerant cycle Set them correctly. Match

Refrigerant cycle setting of the outdoor unit
setting on outdoor unit PCB DSW1 on outdoor PCB and
and the indoor unit is different
and indoor unit PCB DSW5 on indoor PCB
Combination
Combined indoor unit
Outdoor unit model Notes
Total quantity *1) Total capacity (HP)
RAS-3FSVNE 1~4 1.5-3.9 *1): If the capacity of one indoor unit is
RAS-4FSVNE 1~6 2.5-5.2 the same as the capacity of the
RAS-5FSVNE 1~7 2.5-6.5 outdoor unit, the system can
RAS-5FSN 1~8 2.5-6.5 operate.
RAS-8FSN(E)/FXN(E) 2~13 4.0-10.4
RAS-10FSN(E)/FXN(E) 2~16 5.0-13.0
RAS-16FSN/FXN 2~20 8.0-20.8
RAS-20FSN/FXN 2~20 10.0-26.0
RAS-24FSN/FXN 2~27 12.0-31.2
RAS-30 FSN/FXN 2~32 15.0-39.0
Page 8-50
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation in the transmission of other indoor units

��
� This alarm code is displayed on the remote control switch of other indoor unit when no transmission data
is issued from a malfunctioning indoor unit for more than 60 minutes after receiving the transmission data
from the indoor unit.
Yes Yes
Is there any indoor unit with the Is the connector CN2 on PCB of Plug the connector CN2 properly and
alarm code "03"? the indoor unit loose? restart the operation
No No
Is there any indoor unit Yes

Is LED3 (yellow)
whose LED is not lit or whose Check the wires between the
flickering on the PCB of the
LCD is not indicated at the indoor unit and the outdoor unit
indoor unit?
remote control switch?
Yes No
Yes
Check the power source, the fuse Check the connections of the PCB
and the transformer of the indoor Is LED3 OFF? of the indoor unit or the connector
unit CN1
No
Is LED3 still ON?
Yes
Faulty indoor unit PCB

8
Action
Abnormal Transmission Take action according

Check the indoor unit with
Indoor unit�Outdoor unit to the information
the alarm code "03"
Outdoor unit�Indoor unit on pages 8-19 to 8-21
Check the indoor unit with Take action according

Abnormal Incorrect power supply
no light ON on the remote to the information
transmission (to the indoor unit) *1)
control switch on pages 8-5 to 8-6
from other units
If all the indoor units display
alarm code "32", check PCB
Faulty indoor unit PCB Replace PCB if faulty
by means of the self-check
mode for all indoor units
*1): This abnormal operation is displayed on an indoor unit which is normal, since the malfunction is due to an abnormal operation
of the transmission of the indoor units or due to an abnormal operation of the power source in the same refrigerant cycle and
electrical system. If the power source is abnormal, the abnormal operation cannot be displayed on its indoor unit. Therefore,
this alarm code is displayed on the remote control switch of other normal indoor unit.
Page 8-51
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Incorrect indoor unit number setting

��
� This alarm code is displayed five minutes after the power is supplied to the outdoor unit when the indoor
unit number which is connected to the outdoor unit is duplicated by the setting of the RSW.
In the case of H-LINK System, this alarm code is displayed when the DSW1 or DSW4 of the outdoor unit PCB
and the DSW5 of the indoor unit PCB are incorrectly set.
In this case, correctly set DSW1 or DSW4 on the outdoor unit PCB and DSW5 on the indoor unit PCB after
turning off the main switch.
Alarm code
Incorrect combination of the indoor unit

��
� This alarm code is displayed when the outdoor unit is connected with another type of indoor unit.
Page 8-52
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of picking up the circuit for the protection (outdoor unit)
��
� This alarm code is displayed when AC220V or AC240V is supplied to the voltage between the terminal #3
of PCN14 on PCB1 and the fasten terminal N on PCB1 in the outdoor unit during the inverter compressor
stoppage. This alarm code is displayed when no signal is detected for five seconds when the outdoor fan
stops.
� FSN(E)/FXN(E)
No Is AC220Vor AC240V applied

Is AC220V or AC240V applied
between terminal #3 of PCN2, PCN16,
between terminal #3 of PCN14
PCN17, PCN18, PCN19 and PCN33
on PCB1 and the fasten terminal "N" Faulty PCB1
on PCB1 and the fasten terminal "N"
on PCB1 during the stoppage? No
on PCB1 during the stoppage?
Yes Yes
PCB1 is normal
Check the wiring connection
of other PCB *1)
� FSVNE
IsIs220VAC
230VACorapplied
240VACtoapplied
PCN9 to No
between
PCN9 #1 and
between #3 during
#1 and #3 during Faulty PCB1
stoppage ?
stoppage?
Yes
PCB1 is normal
Check wiring connection
except PCB *1) 8
Action
Abnormal operation
Check the voltage that is Repair the wiring
of picking up the Incorrect connection
supplied to the connectors connections
circuit for protection

Faulty PCB. Replace PCB
connections
*1): FSN(E)/FXN(E). Check the wiring system that connects to PCN14, PCN2, PCN16, PCN17, PCN18, PCN19 and PCN33
on PCB1.
*1): FSVNE. Check the wiring system connecting PCN9 on PCB.
Page 8-53
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of the running current at the constant speed compressor

��
This alarm code is displayed when the following conditions occurs:
The running current of the constant speed compressor exceeds the value of the overcurrent limitation
during the operation.
The running current of the constant speed compressor detected is 0A, this value is the same 3 minutes
after stopping all the compressors and this phenomenon occurs three times within 30 minutes.
No
Check the wiring connection around
Does the CMC2~6 turn ON?
PCB1
Yes
No
Check the fuses and the wiring
Does the constant speed
between CMC2~6 and the constant
compressor operate?
speed compressor
Yes
Is the running current indicated No Is the connector CN4, 5, 6, 15 or 30 No

on the 7-Segment Display of of the current transformer Connect it correctly
PCB1 at the check mode? correctly connected?
Yes Yes
Check the constant speed compressor

and the current transformer.
Remove the cause after checking
Indication of the 7-segment display Abnormal operation of the constant

speed compressor
� � � MC2
� � � MC3
� � � MC4
� � � MC5
� � � MC6
Page 8-54
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Action
Excessively high voltage or Operate within

low voltage of the power 380V±10%(50Hz) or
source 415V±10%(50Hz)
Excessively large running

current of the compressor motor Imbalance among phases at Adjust the voltage between
the power source each phase
Excessively high discharge

Check for causes
pressure
Blown out fuse for the

Replace the fuses
power source
Looseness of the screws for

Single phase operation Tightly fix the screws
the power source
Overcurrent of Deterioration of the contact

the compressor Replace the magnetic
of the magnetic switch for
motor contactor
the compressor
Seizure of the compressor

Locked-up? Replace the compressor
bearing
Insulation failure of the Measure the insulation

Replace the compressor
compressor motor resistance
Check the continuity during

Fault Replace CT when faulty
the stoppage
Incorrect Measure the resistance Remove looseness and

Faulty CT
connection by means of the tester replace the connectors
Incorrect
8
Check the wiring Correct the wiring
wiring
Page 8-55
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation for protecting the system from the low compression ratio
��
� The unit number, the alarm code and the unit code are alternately displayed on the set temperature section,
� This alarm code is displayed when a compression ratio , �={(Pd + 0.1) /(Ps + 0.1)} is calculated from
a discharge pressure (MPa) and a suction pressure (MPa), and the condition which is lower than �= 1.8
occurs three or more than three times in 30 minutes.
No
Does the inverter operate? Check the inverter
Yes
No
Check the compressor and
Does the compressor operate?
the power cable
Yes
Yes
Is the four-way valve spindle mounted
Replace the four-way valve if faulty
at the middle position?
No
No
Are the high-pressure sensor and Replace the high-pressure sensor
the low-pressure sensor OK? or the low-pressure sensor if faulty
Yes
Yes
Is there a leak in the solenoid valve for the
Replace SVA if faulty
hot gas bypass (SVA)?
No
Check whether the inlet air temperature is

too low at the indoor units or the outdoor
units
Action
Inverter is not functioning Check the inverter Repair the faulty part
Compressor is not operating Check the compressor Replace the comp. if faulty
Valve stoppage at medium Measure the suction pipe Replace the 4-way valve
position of 4-way valve temp. of the 4-way valve if faulty
Excessively low Abnormal operation of the high- Check the connector for PCB,
compression pressure sensor or the low- the power source and Replace the sensor if faulty
ratio pressure sensor the pressure indication
Check the indoor unit and the

Excessively low air inlet Replace the thermistor if
outdoor unit air temp.
temperature of the indoor unit faulty
thermistor
Leakage of the solenoid valve

Check the solenoid valve Replace SVA if leaking
(outdoor unit)
Leakage of solenoid valve: Replace SVD1 and SVS

Check solenoid valve
SVD1, SVS1 of CH-Unit if leaking
Page 8-56
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation for protecting the system from excessively high suction pressure
��
� This alarm code is displayed when the compressor is operated under the conditions which are higher
than 1.5 MPa of the suction pressure and the alarm has two or more than two occurrences in 30 minutes.
Yes
Is there a leakage of SVA? Replace SVA if faulty
No
Yes
Is the four-way valve spindle mounted at Replace the four-way valve
the middle position? if faulty
No
No
Replace the low-pressure sensor
Is the low-pressure sensor OK?
if faulty
Yes
Check whether the inlet air temperature of

the indoor unit and the outdoor unit is too
high
Action
Check the outlet pipe temp. Check the connect wires.

Leakage of SVA
of SVA Replace SVA if faulty
Valve stoppage at the medium

position of the 4-way valve
Measure the suction gas
temp. of 4-way valve
Replace the 4-way valve
if faulty
8
Excessively high Abnormal suction Check the connectors of
Replace the sensor if faulty
suction pressure pressure sensor PCB and the power source
Excessively high indoor unit Check the indoor unit and

and outdoor unit suction the outdoor unit suction
faulty
air temperature air temp. thermistor
Leakage of solenoid valve: Replace SVD1 and SVS

Check solenoid valve
SVD1, SVS1 of CH-Unit if leaking
Page 8-57
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation for protecting the system from excessively high discharge pressure
��
� This alarm code is displayed when the compressor is operated under the conditions which are higher
than 3.8 MPa of the discharge pressure and the alarm has three or more than three occurrences in
30 minutes.
Yes
Is there a leakage of SVA? Replace SVA if faulty
No
Yes
Is the outdoor unit stop valve closed? Open the stop valve
No
No Check the connection of the circuit

Is the high-pressure sensor OK? board connector. Replace the high-
pressure sensor if faulty
Yes
Yes Check the circuit board and connection
Are the ex. valves fully closed and locked? of the circuit board connector. Replace
Check the outdoor electronic expansion valve the electronic expansion valves if faulty
No during the cooling process and the indoor electronic
expansion valve during the heating process
Are the electric wiring and the refrigerant Yes
piping between the indoor unit and outdoor Connect them correctly
unit incorrectly connected?
In the case of H-LINK connection, check
No the refrigerant cycle setting on the PCB
of the outdoor unit and the indoor unit
Check whether the inlet air temperature of the
indoor unit and the outdoor unit is too high
Action
Check the outlet temp. of Check the connection.

Leakage of SVA (outdoor unit)
SVA Replace SVA if faulty
Closed stop valve Check the stop valve Open the stop valve
Check the connectors for Replace the pressure

Abnormal high-pressure sensor
PCB sensor if faulty
Excessively high Excessively high air inlet Check the thermistor for inlet
discharge temp. of the indoor unit and air temp. of the indoor
faulty
pressure the outdoor unit unit and the outdoor unit
Incorrect connection between Check electrical system

Correctly connect
indoor unit and outdoor unit and ref. cycle
Locked Ex. valve with fully Check the connector for Repair connector for PCB or
closed opening PCB ex. valve. Replace it if faulty
Fully closed solenoid valve Check solenoid valve SVD1 Replace coil or CH-Unit
SVD1 (CH-Unit) opening in heating if faulty
Blown out fuses Check the continuity of fuses Replace the fuses
Stoppage of
the indoor fan
<wall type only> Replace PCB and
check the operation
Page 8-58
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation for protecting the system from excessively low suction pressure
�� (protection from the vacuum operation)
� This alarm code is displayed when a suction pressure is lower than 0.09 MPa (0.9 kg/cm²G)
for FSN(E)/FXN(E) or 0.02 MPa (0.2 kg/cm²G) for FSVNE for over 12 minutes and the alarm has
three or more than three occurrences in one hour.
Is the amount of refrigerant correct? No Correctly charge the refrigerant
Yes
Is the outdoor stop valve open? No Open the stop valve
Yes
Is the refrigerant leaking? Yes Repair the leaks
No
No Replace the suction pressure sensor

Is the suction pressure sensor normal?
if faulty
Yes
Yes Check the connection of the connectors

Are the electronic ex. valves fully closed
and the circuit board. Replace the
and locked?
electronic ex. valves if faulty
No
Check the indoor unit and outdoor unit ex. valve during the cooling
process and the outdoor ex. valve during the heating process
Check whether the connections of the electric � NOTE:

wiring and the refrigerant piping between the In the case of H-LINK system, check
indoor unit and the outdoor unit are wrong the refrigerant system setting of the
outdoor PCB and the indoor PCB.
Action
Check the volume of charged Repair the leakage and

Shortage of ref.
8
ref. or check for leakage correctly charge
Closed stop valve Check the stop valve Open the stop valve
Excessively low Abnormal low or high-pressure Check the connector for Replace the pressure
suction pressure sensor PCB sensor if faulty
(in vacuum)
Correctly connect between
Incorrect connection between the Check the electrical system
indoor unit and the outdoor unit and the ref. cycle
outdoor unit
Repair or replace the

Locked Ex. valve Check the connector for PCB connector of PCB or the
ex. valve
Measure the coil resistance Replace the outdoor fan motor

Faulty outdoor fan motor
and the insulation resistance if faulty
Check for the conduction after

Replace the outdoor
Internal Thermostat Fault the temperature of the outdoor
fan motor
for Outdoor Fan is fan motor is decreased
Activated in Heating Faulty
process internal Measure the resistance by Remove looseness and
thermostat Incorrect contact
means of the tester Replace the connector
Incorrect
Check the connection Connect correctly
connection
Page 8-59
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of the current transformer (0a detection)

��
� This alarm code is displayed when the current transformer is abnormal (0A detection or 5A alarm
condition) and the alarm has more than three occurrences in 30 minutes.
Condition of Activation: When the frequency of the compressor is maintained at 15~18Hz after the compressor
is started, one of the absolute values of the running current at each phase U+, U-,
V+ and V- is less than 0.5A (including 0.5A).
Power wiring of the comp. is not

Restart the operation through CT.
Pass the wires through CT
Compressor stops immediately

Faulty ISPM and Replace ISPM
(nearly 18Hz)
How is the compressor operation

when you restart the compressor?
Compressor does not operate

P17 is displayed *1)
Yes
No
Is the coil resistance
Replace the Comp.
of the comp. normal?
Yes
Is the voltage of U-V, V-W,

W-V in ISPM normal?
No
Replace ISPM
*1): P17 is displayed on the 7-segment display on the outdoor unit PCB.
Page 8-60
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation for protecting the inverter against the instantaneous overcurrent (1)
��
� This alarm code is displayed when the electronic thermal relay for the inverter is activated six or more
than six times in 30 minutes. The retry operation is performed five times.
� This alarm code is displayed when the electronic thermal relay for the inverter is activated 6 times in
30 minutes. Two retries are performed.
� Conditions:
1 The inverter current with 105% of the rated current runs continuously for 30 seconds.
2 The inverter current with 105% of the rated current runs intermittently and the accumulated time
reaches up to three and a half minutes, in ten minutes.
Current
Current values
values appear
appear in
in the
the next
next table:
table:
Models Rated current Rated current
Model
380-415V 50Hz
380~415V 50 Hz (400V for (E))
RAS-5FSN 230V 50 Hz
12.5A
RAS-5FSN RAS-8~32FSN(E)/FXN(E)
RAS-8-30FSN(E)/FXN(E)
12.5A 13.5A
–
RAS-8~32FSN(E)/FXN(E) 13.5A Rated –current
Model
220-240V 50Hz
RAS-3FSVNE – 14.5A
RAS-3FSVNE 14.5A
RAS-4FSVNE – 15.0A
RAS-4FSVNE 15.0A
RAS-5FSVNE –
RAS-5FSVNE 19.0A
19.0A
"2"
Is the cause of stoppage "��"
of the troubleshooting by means of the Refer to next page
7-segment display "2" or "4"?
"4"
Yes (ISPM is normal)

Is the compressor current larger Is the discharge pressure high?
than the activation current?
8
No
Check the pressure and the refrigerant
Smaller than cycle
the activation
current
Check the heat exchanger for clogging
Check the fan motor
Abnormal
Check ISPM. 1*) Replace ISPM.
Normal
Abnormal
Is wiring of ISPM correct? Connect ISPM correctly
Normal
ISPM is faulty. Replace ISPM.
*1): Regarding the checking of inverter components, refer to item 8.3.4.

Page 8-61
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation for protecting the inverter against the instantaneous overcurrent (2)
��
� This alarm code is displayed when the instantaneous overcurrent tripping occurs six times or more than
six times in 30 minutes. The retry operation is performed twice.
� This alarm code is displayed when the electronic thermal relay for the inverter is activated 6 times in
30 minutes. Two retries are performed.
Conditions: the inverter current is 105% of the rated current during 30 seconds continuously or
intermittently, and the accumulated time is more than three minutes during ten minutes. The inverter
current is 150% or greater of the rated current.
Turn off the power and

No Yes disconnect U, V, W from the No No
Restart the operation. compressor terminals. Is there any cause of
Does it trip soon? instantaneous voltage Check the compressor
Set the #1 pin of DSW1
on ISPM to ON and restart. decrease?
It trips Does it trip?
No immediately
Yes If trips Yes Check the power
source capacity
It trips after a
certain period
It trips
occasionally
Replace ISPM
Yes
Is the compressor running
current the same as the Check the compressor
rated current?
No
Faulty
Check ISPM 1*) Replace ISPM
OK
Yes
Are the input currents of Replace ISPM
three phases nearly equal?
No (Input currents out of balance)
Check the power supply
No
FSN(E)/FXN(E)
FSN(E)/FXN(E) Is
Is the
the supply
supply voltage
voltage 380-415V
380-415V ±10%
±10%?
FSVNE Is the supply voltage 230V _10%±10%?
220-240V
Yes
No
FSN(E)/FXN(E) Is the supply voltage 320V or more
Check the capacity and
during the operation?
the wiring of the power
FSVNE Is the supply voltage 187V or more
source
during the operation?
Yes
No
FSN(E)/FXN(E) Is the supply voltage 320V or more
during the operation when other
devices are operating?
Replace the inverter circuit
FSVNE Is the supply voltage 187V or more
board
during the operation when other
devices are operating?
Yes
1*): Regarding the checking of inverter components, refer to item 8.3.4.
Page 8-62
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Activation for protecting the ISPM

��
� ISPM has a detection function of the abnormal operation. This alarm is displayed when the ISPM module
detects the abnormal operation 7 times or more than 7 times in 30 minutes. The retry operation is
performed six times.
Conditions: the abnormal current to the ISPM, such as short-circuited, grounded, overcurrent
or control voltage decrease.
Turn off the power, disconnect No Check the compressor. (If there is
U, V, W from the compressor
a short circuit between the phase
terminals and restart. Does the
lines, replace the compressor)
protection function activate? 2*)
Yes
Faulty
Check the transistor module 1*) Replace the transistor module
Good
Loosen
Is the fixed screw on ISPM
Tighten the screw correctly
loosened?
No
Yes
Is the heat exchanger of the
Remove the clogging
outdoor unit clogged?
No
8
Replace ISPM.
1*): Regarding replacing or checking method for the ISPM refer to item 8.3.4.
2*): Set the #1 pin of DIP switch DSW1 on ISPM to ON when you are restarting with the terminals of the compressor disconnected.
After the troubleshooting, set the #1 pin of DIP switch DSW1 on ISPM to OFF.
Page 8-63
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Increase in the inverter fan temperature

��
� If the alarm code "51" or "54" occurs three times within 30 minutes, the alarm code
which occurred for the third time is displayed. The retry operation is performed twice.
Conditions: This alarm is displayed when the temperature of the internal themostat for ISPM is higher
than 100ºC.
No
Restart the operation.
Replace the ISPM.
Does it trip soon?
Yes
No
Is the silicon grease coated
Apply the silicon grease between
securely between ISPM and
ISPM and the fan securely *2)
the fan?
Good
Yes
Is the heat exchanger of the
Remove the clogging
outdoor unit clogged?
No
Replace ISPM. *1)
1*): Refer to section 8.3.4. for the replacing procedure and the checking procedure for the ISPM.
2*): Use the silicon grease that is provided as an accessory.
Page 8-64
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of fan motor protection

��
� This alarm is displayed when the revolution pulse output from the fan motor is 10rpm or less and the
reverse revolution signal is detected. The fan motor stops once. After ten seconds, the fan motor restarts.
If this occurs more than ten times in 30 minutes, this alarm is displayed. The abnormal operation occurs
when the fan motor stops and clogs.
Yes
This alarm is displayed due to the detected overcurrent generated
Does the motor run?
by the contrary wind. This is normal, check the installation
No
The alarm code is not displayed
Yes
Does the fan stop because of
Remove the foreign matter
the foreign matter?
No
Check the connector CN14 on PCB1 and CN201, CN203, CN206, CN207, U, V, W
on ISPM and CN51 and CN52 of the trunk connector
Yes
Connect the connectors
Are the connectors abnormal?
correctly
No
Does the motor run?

Yes
This is normal
8
No
Replace the fan motor
Yes
Does the motor run? This is normal
No
The alarm code is not displayed

Replace the PCB1 or the fan controller
If the fan motor does not run even after

replacing the PCB1, replace the ISPM.
Page 8-65
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of thermistor for the KPI (room temperature thermistor)

��
� This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited or cut during the KPI operation.
The system is automatically restarted when the fault is removed.
No
Connect it
of PCB?
Yes
No
Faulty thermistor
Yes
Faulty PCB
Action

faulty
Faulty air inlet
thermistor
connections

operation
Thermistor
resistance
(K�)

Page 8-66
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Abnormal operation of thermistor for KPI (outdoor temperature thermistor)

��
� This alarm code is displayed when the thermistor is short-circuited or cut during the KPI operation.
The system is automatically restarted when the fault is removed.
No
Connect it
of PCB?
Yes
No
Faulty thermistor
Yes
Faulty PCB
Action

faulty
Faulty air inlet
thermistor
connections
Replace PCB and

8
Check the operation
Thermistor
resistance
(K�)

Page 8-67
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Alarm code
Compressor protection
��
� This alarm code is displayed when one of the following alarms occurs three times within six hours. If the
outdoor unit operates continuously without removing the cause of the alarm, the compressor may be
seriously damaged.
Alarm code: Content of abnormal operation

�� Tripping of the protection device in the outdoor unit
�� Decrease in the discharge gas superheat
�� Increase in the discharge gas temperature
�� Abnormal operation of the running current at the
constant speed compressor
�� Pressure ratio decrease protection activating
�� Low pressure increase protection activating
�� High pressure increase protection activating
�� High pressure decrease protection activating
�� Low pressure decrease protection activating
You can check these alarms by means of the check mode 1. Follow the action that is indicated in each alarm
chart. You can clear these alarms only by turning OFF the main switch to the system. However, you must
pay careful attention before starting, because there is a possibility of causing serious damages to
the compressors.
Page 8-68
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.2.3. TROUBLESHOOTING IN CHECK MODE

Use the CHECK switch of the remote control in the following cases:
1. When the RUN LED is flickering.
2. To trace back the cause of the malfunction after restarting from the stoppage while the RUN
LED is flickering.
3. To check during the normal operation or during the stoppage.
4. To monitor the inlet air temperature and the discharge air temperature.
Check mode 1: Current data will be displayed

Check
mode Check mode 2: The data which was held immediately
before the failure will be displayed
� The indication will delay as the transmission between the

Normal mode
remote control switch and the indoor unit takes about ten
seconds.
CHECK
� All the data may be displayed as "��" or "��" or "��".
Press for more These transient data, which are produced temporarily by
than three seconds the software, do not affect the device functions at all.
(The alarm code may also be displayed as "��".)
�
The alarm code that identifies the last fault that has
Unit number and alarm occurred in the displayed unit.
code displayed The unit number of the connected unit or the unit number for
which the checking mode was selected previously.
Within seven seconds to ADDS: Number of the Indoor Unit in No. ** Cycle
After (A) RN: No. ** Refrigerant Cycle
seven check another unit
seconds
Forward: Press the "�" switch to
Check mode 1 increase from 00 to 01 to 02 ···
Backward: Press the "�" switch to
decrease from 15 to 14 to 13 ···
� Press "�" to see the previous indication

Press "�" to see the next indication
8
CHECK Press for more
than three
seconds
Unit number and alarm

code displayed
� Press "�" to see the next data
Press "�" to see the previous data
After See (A)

seven
seconds
Check mode 2
(Refer to "Check mode 1"
for details) � Press "�"
� In the Check mode 2, the data of the first three units that
are connected serially to a remote control switch are
available.
� You can press the CHECK switch to disable the Check
Check mode disabled
CHECK Press for more than mode 2.
three seconds Check mode 1 cannot be disabled even if you press the
CHECK switch.
Page 8-69
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Although the wireless controller is used for the wall type

indoor unit with the built-in receiver part, you can check the � NOTE:
alarm code by connecting the PC-P1HE. 1. The unit does not operate by pressing the operation
Suction grille switch.
2. The above function is available only when the alarm
occurs.
Connector
for check 3. The PCB check by means of the remote control switch
is not available.
4. The indication is the data when you are connecting
PC-P1HE. The indication is not the data before the
alarm occurs.
Contents of the Check mode 1

The next indication is shown if you press the part "�" of the
TEMP switch. If you press the part "�" of the TEMP switch,
the previous indication is shown.
Temperature indication Indication of the category code
Indication of the temperature, etc
Indoor unit temp.

1
setting (°C) �� Normal
. . . Temperature displayed
� –– (Thermistor is open-circuited
or PCB is defective)
Indoor unit
or
2 air inlet temp.
at thermistor (°C) �� Abnormal
129 (Temp. for top of comp.)
�
Indoor unit
FF (Thermistor is short-circuited
3 discharge air temp. at
thermistor (°C) �� or PCB is defective)
or
� 255
Indoor unit heat
or
4 exchanger liquid pipe
temp °C �� 127 (Temp. for top of comp.)
�
Temperature at Refer to section 8.3.1 “Self-Checking Procedure
5
remote sensor (°C) �� of PCB by means of the Remote Control Switch"
� During the transient periods such as starting

time and other, the indicators "��" or "��"
Outdoor unit ambient
6
temp. (°C) �� may be displayed for a limited time.
�
Indoor unit heat This is indicated only when a remote sensor is connected.
7 exchanger gas pipe
temp. (°C) �� The indicator "--" is normally displayed.
RPK series cannot connect a remote sensor.
Therefore, the indicator is "--".
�
Outdoor unit
8 evaporating temp.
during heating (°C) �� This indicates the internal information for the remote control switch.
In case of SET-FREE, this indication shows the number of running
compressors.
�
9 Control information
�� (Ex.) During the operation of several compressors, the average
temperature of two compressors is indicated.
� If the temperature is higher than 126°C, "��".
Discharge gas temp.
10 at the top of the comp.
chamber (°C) ��
�to next page
Page 8-70
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Heating Thermo-ON Alarm
Thermo temp. of the
11
remote control switch �� Coding Thermo-ON Operation
YH2 PCB
� Dark
relay
Part name
Relay for drain pump (MD) and/or

YH2
Indication on micro-computer input /output Y52H dew heater (EHW)
Y52H Relay for electric heater (CEH)
Y211
Relay for 4-way valve
Micro-computer Y212
12 input/output in
indoor unit �� Y211 Y52C1
Y52C1
Y52C2
Y20A
Relay for compressor
Relay for solenoid valve
�
Y20B
Y52C2
Y20B
Micro-computer
13 input/output in outdoor
unit �� Y20A
Symbols with a letter Y
are relays of PCB
� Dark
Outdoor Fan
� 
��
Y212
Operation
Operation OFF, Power
OFF, OFF OFF
Power
�  Thermo - OFF (Note 1)
�� Thermo - OFF (Note 1)
 Alarm (Note 2)
�� Alarm (Note 2)
 Freeze protection, overheating protection
� ��

��

Freeze protection, overheating protection
Instantaneous power failure at outdoor unit, reset (Note 3)
Instantaneous
Instantaneous power
power failure
failure at outdoor
at indoor unit, resetunit,
(Notereset
4) (Note 3)
�� Instantaneous power failure atlow
indoor unit, reset (Note 4)
Indication of unit stoppage cause  Stoppage
Stoppage
of cooling
of high
process
cooling
due to
process
outdoor temperature, stoppage of heating
due to low outdoor temperature, stoppage
process due to outdoor temperature
��
 Compressor
of heating quantity
processchangeover,
due to high stoppage
outdoor (HP³8)
temperature

�� Demand of 4-way
Compressor valve changeover
quantity changeover, stoppage (FX only)
stoppage (HP�8)
Demand,
Demandenforced stoppage
��
 of 4-way valve changeover stoppage (FX only)
14 Cause of stoppage ��
Retry due to pressure ratio decrease
 Demand, enforced stoppage
��
 Retry due to low pressure increase
�� Retry due to pressure ratio decrease
Retry due to high pressure increase
�

�� Retry due to low pressure increase
Retry due to abnormal current of constant speed compressor (HP³8)

��

Retry
Retry due
due to high pressure
to abnormal increase
high temperature of discharge gas, excessive low suction
Abnormal operation occurrence counter �� Retry due to abnormal current of constant speed compressor (HP�8)
pressure
 Retry
Retrydue
dueto decrease
to abnormalof discharge gas superheat
high temperature of discharge gas, excessive low
��
 Retry due pressure
suction to inverter tripping

�� Retry
Retrydue
dueto voltage decrease
to decrease of discharge gas superheat
Abnormal operation
15
occurrence counter �� 
��

��

Expansion
Retry due valve opening tripping
to inverter change protection
Operation mode changeover of indoor unit (Note 5)
Retry due to voltage decrease
Enforced thermo-off, when other indoor unit thermo-off
�� Expansion valve opening change protection
� 
��

��
Hot start after 4 hours switch on the outdoor unit
Operation mode changeover of indoor unit (Note 5)
Thermo off during energy saving operation
Enforced thermo-off, when other indoor unit thermo-off
Instantaneous power �� Hot start after 4 hours switch on the outdoor unit
16 failure occurrence
counter in indoor unit �� NOTE:
� 1. Explanation of Terms
Thermo-ON: A condition where an indoor unit is requesting
8
Transmission error the compressor to operate.
occurrence counter Thermo-OFF: A condition where an indoor unit is not
17 between remote control
switch and indoor unit
�� requesting the compressor to operate.
2. Even if stoppage is caused by "Alarm", "02" is not always
displayed.
� 3. If the transmission between the inverter printed circuit board and
Abnormal operation the control printed circuit board is not performed during 30
seconds, the stoppage cause is d1-05 and the alarm code "04"
18 occurrence counter on
inverter �� may be displayed.
4. If the transmission between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit is
� not performed during three minutes, the Indoor Units are stopped.
In this case, the stoppage cause is d1-06 and the alarm code "03"
� may be displayed.
� Countable up to 99.
Over 99 times, "99" is always displayed.
� � NOTE:
� 1. If a transmission error continues for three minutes, one is added to
the occurrence counter.
2. The memorized data can be cancelled by the method which is
� explained in section 8.3.1 "Self-checking Procedure of PCB by
Indication of automatic louver condition means of the Remote Control Switch".
�� : Normal
19 Louver sensor
�� : Abnormal
�to next page
Page 8-71
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Compressor pressure/frequency indication
Discharge pressure
20
(high) (x 0.1 MPa) ��
�
Suction pressure (low)
21
(x 0.01 MPa) ��
�
This is an indication for internal information for the remote
�� control switch. This does not have any specific meaning.
� The total frequency is displayed when several compressors

are running.
Operation frequency
23
(Hz) ��
�
Indoor unit capacity indication The capacity of the Indoor Unit is displayed as shown in the
table below.
24 Indoor unit capacity
�� Capacity code of indoor unit
� Indication code
Indication
06
06
code Equivalentcapacity
Equivalent capacity(HP)
0.8
0.8
(HP)
08
08 1.0
1.0
25 Outdoor unit code
�� 10
10
13
13
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
� 14
14
16
16
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.0
Refrigerant cycle
18
18 2.3
2.3
26
number �� 20
20
22
22
2.5
2.5
2.8
2.8
26 3.0/3.5
� 26
32
32
3.0/3.5
4.0
4.0
40
40 5.0
5.0
Refrigerant cycle 48 6.0
27
number �� 48
64
6.0
8.0
80 10.0
�
Expansion opening indication "n" indicates the total number of Indoor Units;
Indoor unit expansion

n= � ~ �, �, �, �, �, �, �, �
28
valve opening (%) �� (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
J3: 01 ~ 16 (01: when shipment (DSW5),
Decimal indication
� J4: 00 ~ 0F (00: when shipment (DSW5),
Outdoor unit Indication with 16 numbers
In case of models without the expansion valve
29 expansion valve
MV1 opening (%) �� (MV2), the same figure is displayed.
�
Outdoor unit
30 expansion valve
MV2 opening (%) ��
�
Outdoor unit
31 expansion valve
MVB opening (%) �� FXN only
�
Estimated electric current indication
Compressor Running The total current is displayed when several

32
Current (A) �� compressors are running.
In case of the inverter compressor, the running
� Returns to temperature indication current of the primary side of the inverter is
displayed.
Temperature indication
Page 8-72
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Contents of the Check mode 2
When more than three indoor units are connected to one

remote control switch, the latest data of only the first three
indoor units that are connected serially are displayed.
If you press the part "�" of the TEMP switch, the next
display appears. If you press the part "�" of the TEMP
switch, the previous display appears.
Indication of category code
Indication of temperature, etc
Indoor unit air inlet temp.

1
at thermistor (°C) �� Normal . . . Temperature displayed
–– (Thermistor is open-circuited
� or PCB is defective)
Abnormal or
Indoor unit discharge air
2
temp. at thermistor (°C) �� 129 (Temp. for top of comp.)
�
Indoor unit heat exchanger FF (Thermistor is short-circuited
3 liquid pipe temp.
(freeze protection) (°C) �� or
or PCB is defective)
� 255
or
4 Outdoor temperature (°C)
�� 127 (Temp. for top of comp.)
�
Indoor unit heat exchanger Refer to 8.3.1 “Self-Checking Procedure of
5
gas pipe temp. (°C) �� PCB by means of the Remote Control Switch"
� � NOTE:
1. During a transient period such as the starting time and other,
Evaporating temp.
6
at heating (°C) �� the indicator "--" may be displayed for a limited time.
2. All the data during the Check Mode 2 will be changed to "00"
if a power failure occurs during the alarm display.
�
��
This is an indication for the internal information for the remote
control switch.
This does not have any specific meaning.
8
�
Discharge gas temp. The average temperature is displayed when two compressors
8 at the top of comp. chamber
(°C) �� are running.
�
to next page
Page 8-73
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Compressor pressure/frequency indication
Discharge pressure
9
(high) (x 0.1 MPa) ��
�
Suction pressure (low)
10
(x 0.01 MPa) ��
�
�� This is an indication for the internal information for the remote
control switch.
This does not have any specific meaning.
�
Operating frequency The total frequency is displayed when several compressors
12
(Hz) �� are running
�
Expansion opening indication
Indoor unit expansion

13
valve opening (%) ��
�
Outdoor unit
14 expansion valve mv1
opening (%) ��
�
Estimated electric current indication
Compressor running
15
current (A) �� The total value is displayed when several compressors
are running
� Returns to temperature indication

Page 8-74
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.2.4. TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF THE 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY FOR FSN(E)/FXN(E)
Checking method by means of the 7-segment display
By means of the 7-segment display and the check switch (PSW) on the PCB1 in the outdoor unit, you can check the total
quantity of the combined indoor units, the 7-segment display operation conditions and each part of the refrigerant cycle.
PSW Check �To start checking, press the PSW2 switch for more than three seconds.
Manual Ref. Cycle PSW3 PSW2
Defrost Auto Check �To proceed checking, press the PSW2 switch for less than two seconds.
�To proceed in the reverse order, press the PSW3 for less than two seconds.
PSW1 PSW2 PSW3 PSW4
· · 4 To cancel this checking, press the PSW2 switch for more than three
seconds. The display will change to the indication one step before.
· ·
Then, press the PSW2 switch once again for more than three seconds.
· · 5 Note: Make sure that the checking mode is cancelled after the checking.
Backward Forward Otherwise, you may cause a malfunction.
PCB
Checking Item relay
Part name PCB relay Part name
PSW3 PSW2 Checking contents Y20A1 Y52C1
� �
Relay for solenoid
Output state of outdoor Y20B Y52C2
1
� �
valve (SVA/F/G)
micro-computer PSW2 PSW3 Y20F1,2 Y52C3
Relay for
Relay for
Y20CH1 Y52C4 compressor
cranckcase heater
Y211 Relay for 4-way Y52C5
Y212 valve Y52C6
7-Segment Relay for 1st fan at Relay for 1st fan at
YFAN1 DC fan
fix speed inverter speed
5 5~~22HP
20 HP
YCH1 Y52C1
SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1
Y20CHG Y211 Y52C2
Y52C3
Y20F1 Y212
Y52C3
Y20G DC Fan Y20A1 Y20B Y52C4
24
24 ~~ 30
32HP
HP Y20D1 YCH1 Y52C1
Y52C6
Y20CHG Y211 Y52C2
Y20D2
Y52C3
Y213 Y212
Y20F1 Y20F2 Y52C5 Y52C3
Y20G DC Fan Y20A1 Y20B Y52C4 YFAN3
PSW3 PSW2
Total of Thermo-ON
2
indoor unit capacity �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (x 1/8 HP)
8
Running frequency of PSW3 PSW2
3 inverter compressor
MC1 �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (Hz)
PSW3 PSW2
Number of running
4
compressors �� PSW2 PSW3
� �~�
PSW3 PSW2
5 Airflow rate
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ ��
PSW3 PSW2
Outdoor expansion valve
6
MV1 opening �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (%)
to next page
Page 8-75
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
from previous page
Checking item � Checking contents

PSW3 PSW2
7
MV2 opening
(For 1824
(For toto
32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (%)
PSW3 PSW2
9
MVB opening
(For 1010
(For toto
32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (%)
PSW3 PSW2
Discharge pressure
10
(high) �� PSW2 PSW3
�. � �� ~ �� (MPa)
PSW3 PSW2
11 Suction pressure (low)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�. � � �� ~ �� (MPa)
Discharge gas temp. on PSW3 PSW2 � = Open Circuited , �� = Short - circuited
12 the top of compressor

MC1 (TD1) �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (°C)

MC2 (TD2)
(For 88
(For toto
32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (°C)

MC3 (TD3)
(For 1416
(For toto
32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (°C)

MC4 (TD4)
(For 1820
(For toto
32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (°C)

MC5 (TD5)
(For 2424
(For toto
32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (°C)

MC6 (TD6)
(For 3030HP
(For / 32HP)
Only)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (°C)
PSW3 PSW2 �� = Open Circuited , �� = Short - circuited

Evaporating temperature
18
1 at heating �� PSW2 PSW3
� �� ~ �� (°C)

19
2 at heating
(For 1416
(For toto
30HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
� �� ~ �� (°C)

20
3 at heating �� PSW2 PSW3
� �� ~ �� (°C)
to next page
Page 8-76
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
from previous page
Checking item � PSW3 PSW2

Checking contents
�� = Open Circuited , �� = Short - circuited
21 Air temperature (TO)

�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (°C)
PSW3 PSW2
22 RESERVE
�� PSW2 PSW3
Estimated running PSW3 PSW2 Indicates running current of primary side of inverter
23 current of compressor
�� ~ �� (A)
Estimated running PSW3 PSW2

MC2
(For
(For88toto32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (A)
PSW3 PSW2
Estimated running
MC3
(For
(For14
16toto32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (A)
PSW3 PSW2
Estimated running
MC4
(For
(For18
20toto32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (A)

MC5
(For
(For24
24toto32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (A)

MC6
(For
(For30 / 32HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (A)
8
30HP Only)
PSW3 PSW2
Indoor unit
(No, 0 Unit)
�� PSW2 PSW3
��
No. 0 Unit)
� ~ �� (%)
* 29 expansion
valve opening ~ �
PSW3 PSW2
��
(No. F Unit)
No. F Unit)
��
Note 1
PSW2 PSW3
(Indicates only the units number connected)
� ~ �� (%)
PSW3 PSW2
Indoor unit
heat exchanger
(No, 0 Unit)
� � � PSW2 PSW3
��
No. 0 Unit)
�� ~ �� (°C)
* 30 liquid pipe temp.

(freeze protection) ~ �
PSW3 PSW2
(No. F Unit)
Note 1

��
No. F Unit)
�� ~ �� (°C)
to next page
Page 8-77
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
from previous page

PSW3 PSW2
Indoor unit
(No, 0 Unit)
� �� PSW2 PSW3
��
No. 0 Unit)
�� ~ �� (°C)
* 31 heat exchanger
gas pipe temp. ~ �
PSW3 PSW2
(No. F Unit)
Note 1

��
No. F Unit)
�� ~ �� (°C)
PSW3 PSW2
Indoor unit
(No, 0 Unit)
�� PSW2 PSW3
��
No. 0 Unit)
�� ~ �� (°C)
*
32 air inlet
temperature. ~ �
PSW3 PSW2
(No. F Unit)
Note 1

�� PSW2 PSW3
��
No. F Unit)
�� ~ �� (°C)
PSW3 PSW2
Indoor unit
(No, 0 Unit)
�� PSW2 PSW3
��
No. 0 Unit)
�� ~ �� (°C)
* 33 discharge air
temperature. ~ �
PSW3 PSW2
(No. F Unit)
Note 1

�� PSW2 PSW3
��
No. F Unit)
�� ~ �� (°C)
PSW3 PSW2
Indoor unit
(No, 0 Unit)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�
No. 0 Unit)
(x 1/8 HP)
* 34 capacity
setting. ~ � Refer to the table "Capacity Code of the Indoor Unit" for the
capacity code indication, page 8/65
PSW3 PSW2
(No. F Unit)
Note 1

�� PSW2 PSW3
��
No. F Unit)
(x 1/8 HP)
PSW3 PSW2
Indoor unit
(No, 0 Unit)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�
(No. 0 Unit)
� ~ ��
* 35 cause of
stoppage ~ � Refer to the "Cause of Stoppage" table, for the code
indication at page 8/63
PSW3 PSW2
(No. F Unit)
Note 1

�� PSW2 PSW3
�
(No. F Unit)
� ~ ��
Pressure ratio decrease PSW3 PSW2

36 protection restricted
control � �� PSW2 PSW3
�
�:
�:
Restricted control is not in operation
Restricted control is in operation
to next page
Page 8-78
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
from previous page

High-pressure increase PSW3 PSW2
�
�:
�:
Inverter final temperature PSW3 PSW2

38 increase protection
restricted control � �� PSW2 PSW3
�
�:
�:
PSW3 PSW2
Discharge gas temp.
39 decrease protection
�
�:
�:
PSW3 PSW2
Discharge gas temp.
40 decrease protection
�
�:
�:
Restricted control is not operation
PSW3 PSW2
Current protection
41
�
�:
�:
PSW3 PSW2 Displayed in 4 digit number

Total accumulated hours
42
of compressor MC1 �� PSW2 PSW3
��
� ~ ��
(x 10 times hours)

43
of compressor MC2
(For
(For88toto32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
��
� ~ ��
(x 10 times hours)

44
of compressor MC3 ��
� ~ ��
8
PSW2 PSW3
(For
(For14
16toto32HP)
30HP) (x 10 times hours)
Displayed in 4 digit number

PSW3 PSW2
45
of compressor MC4
(For
(For18
20toto32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
��
� ~ ��
(x 10 times hours)

PSW3 PSW2
46
of compressor MC5
(For
(For24
24toto32HP)
30HP)
�� PSW2 PSW3
��
� ~ ��
(x 10 times hours)

PSW3 PSW2
47
of compressor MC6
(For
(For30 / 32HP)
30HP only)
�� PSW2 PSW3
��
� ~ ��
(x 10 times hours)
The latest cause code of PSW3 PSW2

48
stoppage at outdoor unit �� PSW2 PSW3
��
to next page
Page 8-79
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
from previous page

Checking contents
Refer to page 17/14 for code indication
Cause code of stoppage
49
at inverter �� PSW2 PSW3
� � ~ ��
PSW3 PSW2
Cause code of stoppage
50
at fan motor controller �� PSW2 PSW3
� � ~ ��
PSW3 PSW2
Total capacity setting
51
of indoor unit �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (x 1/8 HP)
PSW3 PSW2
Total quantity of
52
combined indoor unit �� PSW2 PSW3
� �� ~ �� (sets)
PSW3 PSW2
Address of refrigerant
53
system �� PSW2 PSW3
� �~�
Return to START "��"
Example: Indoor unit expansion valve opening of ref. cycle

� NOTE 1: No. 6 indoor unit No. 0
– The 7-segment information for all the indoor Unit data
has been added one number before data, as shown
beside. � ��
�
Refrigerant Checking Item
Cycle Address
Regarding the mark *, the indoor unit refrigerant cycle number is displayed on the left hand. If more than 16 indoor units are
connected, the indoor wires of next refrigerant cycle number will be displayed subsequently.
Page 8-80
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.2.5. TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF THE 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY FOR FSVNE
Checking method by 7-segment display
By using the 7-segment and check switch (PSW) on the PCB1 in the outdoor unit, total quantity of combined indoor units,
7-segment operation conditions and each part of refrigerant cycle can be checked.
Check � To start checking, press the “PSW2”

PSW Manual
Defrost switch for more than 3 seconds.
� To proceed checking, press the
PSW3 PSW2 “PSW2” switch for less than 2
PSW1 PSW2 PSW3
seconds.
� To proceed reversely, press the
· · “PSW3” for less than 2 seconds.
7-Segment · · � To cancel this checking, press
· · the “PSW2” switch for more than
Backward Forward 3 seconds. The display will changed
SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 to the indication one step before.
Then, press the “PSW2” switch once
again for more than 3 seconds.
Y20A Y52C1
Checking Item
PSW3 PSW2 Checking Contents Y20B
Output State of Outdoor
1
Micro-Computer �� PSW2 PSW3 Y0H Y21
YFAN2
PSW3 PSW2
Total of Thermo-ON
2
indoor unit capacity �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ ��
According to “Capacity Code of Indoor
PSW3 PSW2 Unit table”
Running frequency of
3 inverter compressor
�� ~ �� (Hz)
PSW3 PSW2
Number of running
4
compressors �� PSW2 PSW3
� �~�
PSW3 PSW2
8
5 Air flow rate
�� PSW2 PSW3
� � ~ ��
Note: the longer number and the longer
PSW3 PSW2 airflow
6
MV1 opening �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (%)
PSW3 PSW2
Outdoor unit injection
7
opening �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (%)
PSW3 PSW2
Discharge pressure
8
(High) �� PSW2 PSW3
�. � �.� ~ �.� (MPa)
to next page
Page 8-81
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
from previous page

Checking contents
9 Suction pressure (low)

�� PSW2 PSW3
�. � � �� ~ �� (MPa)
Discharge gas temp. on PSW3 PSW2 � = Open Circuited , �� = Short – circuited, �� = Open circuit failure

MC1 (TD1) �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (°C)
PSW3 PSW2 �� = Open Circuited , �� = Short - circuited, �� = Open circuit failure
Evaporating
11
temperature 1 at heating �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (°C)
Ambient air temperature
12
(TO) �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (°C)
Compressor inlet
13
temperature �� PSW2 PSW3
� �� ~ �� (°C)
PSW3 PSW2
Estimate ruming current
14
of compressor �� PSW2 PSW3
�� (*)
Indicates running current of primary

Running current of PSW3 PSW2 side of inverter
15 Compressor 1 (Inverter
Primary Current) �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (A)
(*) In case of 3FSVNE will be

appear "_ _"
Indoor unit PSW3 PSW2
16 expansion
valve opening
�� PSW2 PSW3
��
No. 0 Unit)
� ~ �� (°C)
(No, 0 Unit) PSW3 PSW2
Indoor unit
��
No. 0 Unit)
�� ~ �� (%)
�
heat exchanger
17 liquid pipe temp.
(freeze protection)
~
PSW3 PSW2
Note 1
(No. F Unit)

��
No. F Unit)
�� ~ �� (%)
to next page
Page 8-82
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
from previous page

PSW3 PSW2
��
(No, 0 Unit)
No. 0 Unit)
Indoor unit
PSW2 PSW3
� �� ~ �� (°C)
18
heat exchanger
gas pipe temp. ~ �
PSW3 PSW2
(No. F Unit)

�� PSW2 PSW3
�
No. F Unit)
�� ~ �� (°C)
PSW3 PSW2
��
(No, 0 Unit)
No. 0 Unit)
Indoor unit
PSW2 PSW3
� � �� ~ �� (°C)
19
intake air
temperature ~ �
PSW3 PSW2
(No. F Unit)

�� PSW2 PSW3
� �
No. F Unit)
�� ~ �� (°C)
PSW3 PSW2
��
(No, 0 Unit)
No. 0 Unit)
Indoor unit
PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (°C)
20
discharge air
temperature ~ �
PSW3 PSW2
(No. F Unit)

�� PSW2 PSW3
��
No. F Unit)
�� ~ �� (°C)
PSW3 PSW2
Indoor unit
(No, 0 Unit)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�
No. 0 Unit)
(x 1/8 HP)
21 capacity
setting ~ �
(No. F Unit)
��
PSW3 PSW2
8
�
No. F Unit)
PSW2 PSW3
(x 1/8 HP)
According to “Capacity Code of Indoor

Unit table”
PSW3 PSW2
Indoor unit
(No, 0 Unit)
�� PSW2 PSW3
�
No. 0 Unit)
� ~ �� (x 1/8 HP)
22 cause of
stoppage ~ � According to the “Cause of stoppage”
PSW3 PSW2
(No. F Unit)

�� PSW2 PSW3
�
No. F Unit)
� ~ �� (x 1/8 HP)
PSW3 PSW2
Pressure ratio decrease
23
protection control � �� PSW2 PSW3
�
�:
�:
PSW3 PSW2
Discharge pressure
�
�:
�:
to next page
Page 8-83
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
from previous page

Inverter module PSW3 PSW2
temperature overheating
25
protection restricted
control
�
�:
�:
Discharge gas temp. PSW3 PSW2

�
�:
�:
PSW3 PSW2
TdSH decrease
�
�:
�:
PSW3 PSW2
Current protection
28
�
�:
�:
Restricted control is not operation
PSW3 PSW2
29
of compressor MC1 �� PSW2 PSW3
��
� ~ ��
(x 10 times hours)
30 Defrost interval
�� PSW2 PSW3
��
(minutes)

The last outdoor unit
31
alarm code �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ ��
32 Inverter stop cause code

�� PSW2 PSW3
� � ~ ��

PSW3 PSW2
Inverter module
33
temperature �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ ��

PSW3 PSW2
Total capacity setting of
34
indoor unit �� PSW2 PSW3
�� ~ �� (x 1/8 HP)

PSW3 PSW2
Connected indoor unit
35
quantity �� PSW2 PSW3
� ��
PSW3 PSW2
Refrigerant system
36
address �� PSW2 PSW3
� �~�
Return to START "��"
Page 8-84
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.2.6 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF THE FLASHING ALARM LEDS FOR RPK-FSNM
The red LED located on the panel indicates the following alarms:
Alarm 02 Unit protection This alarm is activated when the blinks sequence is two times ON/two seconds OFF
Alarm 03 Transmission error This alarm is activated when the blinks sequence is three times ON/two seconds OFF
Alarm 04 Inverter outdoor This alarm is activated when the blinks sequence is four times ON/two seconds OFF
unit error
For the rest of the alarms, the blink sequence is one second ON/one second OFF
8.2.7
8.2.6. RUNNING CURRENT OF THE COMPRESSOR
� Inverter primary current

The inverter primary current is estimated from the
running current of the compressor MC1 displayed on the
7-segment display, as shown on the right chart. Upper limit
Inverter primary current (A)
� Displayed running current of the compressor

MC2, MC3, MC4, MC5, MC6
The running current of the compressor MC2, MC3,
MC4, MC5, MC6 is detected by the current sensor. Lower limit
(CT2 ~ CT6)
Running current of compressor MC1

indicated on 7-segment
Cause code of stoppage for the inverter (content of check item "��")
Cause of stoppage Remark
Code Cause for corresponding Indication
8
Alarm code
unit during retry
Automatic stoppage of the transistor module (IPM
� Error)
(overcurrent, decrease voltage, increase temperature)
��
Instantaneous overcurrent
� ��
Abnormal inverter in thermistor
� ��
Electronic thermal activation
� ��
Inverter voltage decrease
� ��
Voltage increase
� ��
Abnormal transmission
� ��
Abnormal current sensor
� ��
Instantaneous power failure detection
� ��
Reset of micro-computer for inverter
(*)��
Earth fault detection for compressor (only starting)
(**)��
Abnormal power source phase
��
(*) for FSN(E)/FXN(E) is b instead of 11
(**) for FSN(E)/FXN(E) is C instead of 12
Page 8-85
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.2.8
8.2.7. PROTECTION CONTROL CODE ON THE 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY
1. When a protection control is activated, you can see the Code Protection control
protection control indication on the 7-segment display. Overcurrent retry of constant speed
�� compressor
2. The 7-segment display remains ON while the function Vacuum/discharge gas temperature
is working. The 7-segment display turns off when the �� rising protection retry
function is disabled. Discharge gas SUPERHEAT falling
3. When several protection controls are activated, the code �� retry
number with higher priority will be displayed. (See below �� Inverter trip retry
for the priority order). Insufficient voltage/excessive voltage
�� retry
Fan motor controller fan temp. rise
� Higher priority is given to protection control related to ��. protection
frequency control than to other protection controls.
��. Fan motor controller trip retry
Priority Order:
a) Pressure ratio control � FSVNE
b) High-pressure rise protection
Code Protection control
c) Current protection
�� Pressure ratio control (*)
d) Inverter fan temperature rise protection
e) Discharge gas temperature rise protection �� High-pressure rise protection (*)
f) Low-pressure fall protection
g) 4-way valve switching control �� Current protection (*)
h) Low-pressure rise protection Inverter fan temp rise protection
��
I) Demand current control
Discharge gas temperature rise
J) High-pressure fall protection �� protection (*)
K) Oil return control
�� Low-pressure fall protection
L) TdSH fall protection
� Regarding the retry control, the latest retrial will be Oil return control (frequency)
displayed unless a protection control that is related
��
to the frequency control is displayed. High-pressure fall protection
��
� FSN(E)/FXN(E) �� Pressure ratio falling protection retry
Code Protection control
�� Low-pressure rising retry
�� Pressure ratio control (*)
�� High-pressure rising retry

�� High-pressure rise protection (*)
Vacuum/discharge gas temperature
Current protection (*) �� rising protection retry
�� Discharge gas SUPERHEAT falling
Inverter fan temp rise protection
�� retry
��
�� Inverter trip retry
Discharge gas temperature rise
�� protection (*) Insufficient voltage/excessive voltage
�� retry
�� Low-pressure fall protection
�� High-pressure falling retry
4-way valve switching control (for 20,
�� 4-way valve switching control
24 and 30HP) (at cooling process) If the restricted control is activated, � is displayed instead
Oil return control (frequency) of � (*mark)
��
High-pressure fall protection
- The retry indication continues for 30 minutes unless
�� a protection control is displayed.
�� Demand current control - The retry indication disappears if the stop signal
comes from all the rooms.
�� TdSH fall protection - The Protection Control is activated quicker than
the normal situation during the Restricted Control.
�� Low-pressure rise protection
�� Pressure ratio falling protection retry

� NOTE:
The protection control code that is displayed on the
�� Low-pressure rising retry
7-segment display changes to an alarm code when the
abnormal operation occurs. Also, the same alarm code
�� High-pressure rising retry
is displayed on the remote control switch.
Page 8-86
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.2.9
8.2.8. ACTIVATING CONDITION OF THE PROTECTION CONTROL CODE FOR FSN(E)/FXN(E)
To monitor the conditions such as the temperature change The activating conditions of the protection control are shown
and others, the control of the frequency and other controls in the table below.
are performed by the protection control in order to prevent
the abnormal operations.
Code Protection control Activating condition Remarks
Compression ratio � 9 � Frequency decrease
�� Pressure ratio control Ps: Suction pressure of compressor [Mpa]
(Pd/(Ps+0.3)) � 2.2 � Frequency increase
High-pressure increase Pd: Discharge pressure of compressor
Pd � 3.6 Mpa (36kgf/cm G)� Frequency decrease
2
�� protection [Mpa]
Inverter output current � 12.5 A (5HP) 13.5 A (8~32HP)
(8-30 HP) �
�� Current protection -
Frequency decrease
Inverter fan temp. increase
�� Inverter fan temp. � 89°C � Frequency decrease -
protection
Temperature at the top of compressor is high
Discharge gas temperature
�� Frequency decrease (Maximum temperature is different -
increase protection
depending on the frequency)
Low-pressure is excessively low
Low-pressure decrease
�� Frequency decrease (minimum pressure is -
protection
different depending on the ambient temperature)
When switching,
4-way valve
�� P<1.0MPa a � Frequency increase �P = Pd - Ps
switching control
�P>1.3MPa � Frequency decrease
OilHz values are:

5-8HP =44 Hz
When frequency
Frequency is less
less than thanfor
135Hz OilHz for more
cooling/ 50Hzthan one hour,
for heating �
Oil return control frequency 44Hz (5/8HP), 10HP
56Hz (10/12/14HP),
= 56Hz
�� the P08 is activated
Frequency � 135Hz cooling/ 150Hz heating (20~30HP) 60Hz (16/18HP, 150Hz (20~32HP)
16HP = 60Hz
�� High-pressure fall protection Pd decreases � Frequency increase Pd: Discharge pressure of compressor
Demand setting value: Upper limit of the
Compressor run current � Demand setting value � compressor total current can be set by
�� Demand current control
Frequency decrease external input (80%, 70%, 60% at normal
situation)
When it activates three times in 30
�� Pressure ratio falling retry Compression ratio (Pd/(Ps+0.13)<1.8)
minutes, the alarm code "43" is displayed
2 When it activates three times in 30
�� Low-pressure rising retry Ps>1.5MPa (15 kgf/cm G)
minutes, the alarm code "44" is displayed
High-pressure 2 When it activates three times in 30
�� Pd>3.8MPa (38 kgf/cm G)
rising retry minutes, the alarm code "45" is displayed
Overcurrent retry of When it activates three times in 30
�� Current � Maximum value (*1), or Current<1.0A
8
constant speed compressor minutes, the alarm code "39" is displayed
2
In Case of Ps<0.09MPa (0.9kgf/cm G) for over 12 minutes, or When it activates three times in one hour,
Vacuum/discharge gas
�� discharge gas temperature � 132°C for over ten minutes or the alarm codes "47" (Ps) or "08"
temperature rising retry
discharge gas temperature � 140 °C for over five seconds (Discharge gas) are displayed
Discharge gas Discharge gas SUPERHEAT less than ten degrees is When it activates three times in two hours,
�� SUPERHEAT falling retry maintained for 30 minutes the alarm code "07" is displayed
Automatic stoppage of the transistor module, When it activates three times or six times
Fan motor controller fin
�� activation of the electronic thermal in 30 minutes, the alarm codes "51", "52"
temp increase protection
or abnormal current sensor and "53" are displayed
Insufficient When it activates three times in
Insufficient/excessive voltage at the inverter circuit or CB
�� voltage/excessive 30 minutes, the alarm code "06" is
connector part
voltage retry displayed
� NOTE: Model 380-415V 50 Hz

During the protection control (except during the alarm
stoppage), the protection control code is displayed. 8HP 14.0
The protection control code is displayed during the 10HP 14.0
protection control and turns off when you are 16HP 14.0
canceling the protection control. Model20HP 400V 50 Hz
14.0
After the retry control, the condition of monitoring 8~24HP
24HP 14.0 14.0
continues for 30 minutes.
26~32HP
30HP 15.5 15.5
The maximum value (*1) is the following:
Page 8-87
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.2.10
8.2.9. ACTIVATING CONDITION OF THE PROTECTION CONTROL CODE FOR FSVNE
To monitor the conditions such as the temperature change The activating conditions of the protection control are shown
and others, the control of the frequency and other controls in the table below.
are performed by the protection control in order to prevent
the abnormal operations.
Code Protection control Activating condition Remarks

Compression ratio � 9 � Frequency decrease Ps: Suction pressure of
�� Pressure ratio control
(Pd/(Ps+0.3)) � 2.2 � Frequency increase compressor [Mpa]
High-pressure increase Pd: Discharge pressure of
Pd � 3.6 Mpa (36kgf/cm G)� Frequency decrease
2
�� protection compressor [Mpa]
Inverter output current � 14.5 A (3HP); (5HP) 20.0 A (4HP) 25.0
�� Current protection -
(5HP) 13.5 A (8-30 HP) � Frequency decrease
Inverter fan temp. increase
�� Inverter fan temp. � 89°C � Frequency decrease -
protection
Temperature at the top of compressor is high
Discharge gas temperature
�� Frequency decrease (Maximum temperature is different -
increase protection
depending on the frequency)
Low-pressure is excessively low
Low-pressure decrease
�� Frequency decrease (minimum pressure is -
protection
different depending on the ambient temperature)
�� Oil return control frequency Frequency less than 135Hz for cooling/ 50Hz for heating
Pd: Discharge pressure of
�� High-pressure fall protection Pd decreases � Frequency increase
compressor
When it activates three times in
�� Pressure ratio falling retry Compression ratio (Pd/(Ps+0.13)<1.8) 30 minutes, the alarm code "43"
is displayed
2
�� Low-pressure rising retry Ps>1.5Mpa (15 kgf/cm G) 30 minutes, the alarm code "44"
is displayed
High-pressure 2
�� Pd>3.8Mpa (38 kgf/cm G) 30 minutes, the alarm code "45"
rising retry
is displayed
2 When it activates three times in
In Case of Ps<0.02 MPa (0.2kgf/cm G) for over 12 minutes, or
Vacuum/discharge gas one hour, the alarm codes "47"
�� discharge gas temperature � 132°C for over ten minutes or
temperature rising retry (Ps) or "08" (Discharge gas) are
discharge gas temperature � 140 °C for over five seconds
displayed
Discharge gas Discharge gas SUPERHEAT less than ten degrees is maintained
�� two hours, the alarm code "07" is
SUPERHEAT falling retry for 30 minutes
displayed
When it activates three times or
Automatic stoppage of the transistor module,
Fan motor controller fin six times in 30 minutes, the alarm
�� activation of the electronic thermal
temp increase protection codes "51", "52" and "53" are
or abnormal current sensor
displayed
Insufficient When it activates three times in
Insufficient/excessive voltage at the inverter circuit or CB
�� voltage/excessive 30 minutes, the alarm code "06"
connector part
voltage retry is displayed
�� High-pressure falling retry Pd>
� NOTE:
During the protection control (except during the alarm
stoppage), the protection control code is displayed.
The protection control code is displayed during the
protection control and turns off when you are
canceling the protection control.
After the retry control, the condition of monitoring
continues for 30 minutes.
Page 8-88
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.3. PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING EACH MAIN PART
8.3.1. SELF-CHECKING PROCEDURE OF PCB BY MEANS OF THE REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
Use the following troubleshooting procedure for testing the

PCB in the indoor unit and the outdoor unit
�
RUN/STOP
Stop operation Press
TEMP
PCB check mode � Press both switches

for three seconds CHECK
(ex.) indication of Unit No. "�"
Indication of unit number
After
seven seconds Indi-
Contents
cation
�� Normal
Abnormality (open-circuit, short-circuit, etc.) in circuit for:
Operating automatic PCB
check �� Air inlet temp. thermistor
�� Discharge air. temp. thermistor
Result After approx. five seconds (max. �� Liquid pipe temp. thermistor
Indoor unit PCB

30 seconds in case of a transmission �� Remote thermistor abnormality
failure between the indoor unit and �� Gas pipe temp. thermistor
the outdoor unit) Max. three types of �� Remote sensor

ABNORMAL OPERATIONS indicated. �� Transmission of central station
�� EEPROM
�� Zero cross input failure
8
Transmission of indoor units during this
Abnormal operation (1) �� checking operation
After 1 sec. � �� Transmission of outdoor unit
�� Internal thermostat fan input failure
Abnormal operation (2) �� PSW input failure

Outdoor unit PCB
�� PSH protection signal detection circuit
After 1 sec. � �� Phase detection
�� Transmission of inverter
Abnormal operation (3)

�� High-pressure sensor
�� Comp. discharge gas temp. thermistor
�� Low-pressure sensor
�� Heat exchanger evaporation temp. thermistor
After Contents �� Ambient air temp. thermistor
one second
To next page
Page 8-89
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
If you are using a wireless remote control switch with the built-in receiver part of the wall-type indoor unit and you need to
perform the above checking, perform the following procedure:
1. Turn OFF the power supply.
2. Disconnect the connector (CN25) for
on RPK-0.8~2.0FSNM
PWB(M). or (CN12) for RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM
3. Connect the PC-P1HE.
4. Turn ON the power supply.
After finishing the checking, turn OFF the power supply again and reconnect the connectors according to the previous situation
before the checking.
From previous page
If there is a next unit

�
TEMP
CHECK
[Self-checking indication of the next

Press unit]
Repetition of self-checking of Unit No. "0"
(ex).
Indication of
unit No. "1"
After seven
seconds
Result After 1 to 5 seconds
After one second
Result � ��
Release PCB
check mode
�
Press
RESET
� NOTE:
1. If this indication continues and the alarm code "��" is not displayed, this means that each one of indoor unit is not
connected to the remote control switch.
Check the wiring between the remote control switch and the indoor unit.
2. In this troubleshooting procedure, checking of the following parts of the PCB is not available.
PCB in Indoor Unit: Relay circuit, DIP switch, option circuit, fan circuit, protection circuit.
PCB in Outdoor Unit: Relay circuit, DIP switch, option circuit.
3. If this troubleshooting is performed in the system by means of the central station, the indication of the central station may
change during this procedure. However, this is not abnormal.
4. After this troubleshooting, the memory of the abnormal operation occurrence counter, which was described before, will be
deleted.
Page 8-90
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.3.2. SELF-CHECKING PROCEDURE OF THE REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
Cases where the CHECK switch is used.

1. If the remote control switch displays a malfunction. Indicating
2. For the regular maintenance check. No. LCD indication period
(sec.)
1 Turn ON the power source

Only for the 1 For one
� cancellation of second
Simultaneously press the following EEPROM, press the

following three
�
three switches. (During the operation,
you can press the switches.) switches
2 TEMP MODE simultaneously
2 For one
during the changes second
of the LCD.
�
�
TEMP
3
The LCD changes as shown in the right
figure. � 3 For one
second
� MODE �
After the LCD changes as shown in the
right figure, the RUN indicator flickers
4 For one
twice. second
4
�
��
To 11
For three
5
�
seconds
The LCD changes as shown below.

Press all the switches (13 switches)
one by one.
Every time you press the switch, the
number of the indication of the part (A)
in the figure below increases one.
5
��
�� Unless all the switches are
pressed, the checking does
not proceed to the next item.
8
� NOTES:
You can press the switches in any
order.
Pressing two or more switches
simultaneously is invalid and
not counted.
�
The remote control switch automatically
starts to check the transmission circuit. In case that the transmission
circuit is abnormal, the LCD
6
� remains as shown in the left
figure and the checking does
�� not proceed to the next item.
�
To the next page
Page 8-91
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
�
The detected temperature of the
remote control thermostat is displayed
at the (A) part in the figure below.
If the indicators "��" or "��" are displayed at the "A" part, the
7 A � remote control thermostat is abnormal.
��
��
�
The LCD changes as shown below. If you press the RESET switch or you leave the switches for
15 seconds, the data of EEPROM (storage cell inside of the
8
�� remote control switch) is cleared.
At this time, the number is displayed at the (A) part, which
is shown in the figure below. When the number "��" is
displayed, EEPROM is abnormal.
� A
The LCD changes as shown below. ��
��
9
��
If the number which is displayed at the (A) part is "��",
the checking does not proceed to the next item.
After several seconds have passed, the
remote control switch is automatically
activated again.
�
When the remote control switch is Cancellation of EEPROM
activated again, the RUN indicator 3
is ON and the operation is started.
Therefore, press the RUN/STOP �
switch and stop the operation. The LCD changes as shown below and the
remote control switch automatically cancels
the EEPROM.
� NOTE: 11
1. In case that the operation is not
automatically started when the
��
remote control switch is activated
10 again, the detection circuit for the
momentary stoppage may be
abnormal. However, the detection
circuit will not interfere with the The LCD changes as shown below
normal operation.
2. There is a case where the
operation is automatically stopped ��
after the automatic operation 12
when the remote control switch After several seconds have passed, the
is activated again. remote control switch is automatically
activated again. In this case, the operation
is not started automatically.
Page 8-92
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
8.3.3. SELF-CHECKING PROCEDURE OF THE INDOOR UNIT PCB (ONLY FOR RPK)
� Self-checking procedure by means of the relays � Procedure

on the indoor unit PCB
� Turn OFF the main power switch.
� To check the abnormal operation on the indoor unit PCB � Disconnect the connectors CN7 and CN8. Set the
due to a malfunction. DIP switch DSW2 as shown below.
� To check the abnormal operation on the indoor unit PCB Set the #1 pin to ON and the #2 pin to OFF.
according to the results of the checking procedure by
means of the CHECK switch on the remote control
switch and the self-checking function.
ON
OFF
DIP Switch DSW2
� Turn ON the main power switch.

Check Mode starts. (Refer to the next page.)
A Analog Test
B Relay Test
� After finishing the self-checking procedure, turn OFF

the power and reset the DIP switch as before.
Self-checking procedures in the check mode

for RPK-FSNM
Check item State of mode Confirmation method

(A) Initialize Exp. valve
and auto-louver Exp. Valve fully open � fully closed
Auto-louver is horizontally stopped.
(B) Analog test If the thermistors for the inlet air temperature, for the discharge air
temperature and for the freeze protection are normal, proceed to
the next step.
8
(C) Each relay test
52H1, 2, 3 Fan
(Low) Wireless
Perform repeatedly receiver part
Check the ON/OFF sound of the
(Red) Wireless
receiver part
relays and the LED.
(Green) Wireless
receiver part
(Yellow)
Termination Turn OFF and reset all the DIP switches as before.
Page 8-93
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
b. Connect the connect wires to an electrical brazer. The
discharging starts and this results in a hot brazer. Pay
attentionTroubleshooting
not to short-circuit between the terminal P and N.
RAS-2~5HVRNE
8.3.4. PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING OTHER MAIN PARTS
� High-voltage discharge procedure for replacing the parts
� DANGER:
Perform this high-voltage discharge procedure in
order to avoid an electrical shock.
Procedure:
a. Turn OFF the main switches and wait for three minutes. c. Connect the wires to terminals, P and N on ISPM.
Make sure that no high voltage exists. If LED201 is ON Plug d. Wait for two or three minutes and measure the voltage
after the start and LED201 is OFF after turning OFF the once again. Make sure that no voltage is charged.
power source, the voltage will decrease to lower than
DC50V.
Brazer
b. Connect the connect wires to an electrical brazer. The
discharging starts and this results in a hot brazer. Pay Connecting wires
attention not to short-circuit between the terminal P and N.
RAS-2~5HVRNE
ISPM
ISPM LED201
LED201
RAS-4~12HRNE
N
Plug N
Plug
Plug
Brazer PP
Brazer
Brazer
Connecting
Connecting
Connectingwires
Wires
Wires
ISPM
ISPM LED201
LED201
RAS-4~12HRNE
N
N
Plug
Plug
PP
Brazer
Brazer
Connecting
Connecting Wires
Wires
Page 8-94
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
ISPM and the - side of the tester to N terminal of ISPM.
If the resistance is more than 10 kΩ, it isnormal.
Troubleshooting
m. By touching the - side of the tester to the RB terminal of

ISPM and the + side of the tester to N terminal of ISPM.
If the resistance is more than 100 kΩ, it isnormal.
� Checking procedure for the electronic expansion valve
Indoor unit electronic expansion valve Outdoor unit electronic expansion valve
Check the liquid pipe temperature during the
heating process. It is abnormal if the liquid pipe pressure does
Locked with fully closed
It is abnormal if the temperature does not not increase during the cooling process.
increase.
It is abnormal under the following conditions: It is abnormal if the liquid pipe pressure does
the temperature of the freeze protection not increase and the outlet temperature of
Locked with slightly open
thermistor becomes lower than the suction air the expansion valve decreases after the
temperature when the unit which is under cooling process starts.
checking stops and the other units are under
the cooling process.
Electronic expansion valve
Freeze protection
thermistor
It is abnormal under the following conditions:

after the heating process for more than 30
minutes, the discharge gas temperature of
Locked with fully open the compressor is not 10°C higher than the
condensing temperature and there is no
other faults, such as an excessive charge of
refrigerant and others.
Unit under Other

checking units
Page 8-95
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
� Checking
 Checkingprocedure
procedureforISPM
the ISPM
for RAS-4~12HRNE
Rectification Parts of Internal Circuit of ISPM (Common)
Remove all the terminals of the ISPM before check.

If items (a) to (h) are performed and the results are
satisfactory, ISPM is normal. Measure it under 1 kΩ range
of a tester.
� CAUTION:
Do not use a digital tester.
a. By touching the + side of the tester to the P1 terminal of

ISPM and the - side of the tester to R and S of ISPM,
measure the resistance. If all the resistances are more
than 100 kΩ, it is normal.
b. By touching the - side of the tester to the P1 terminal of

ISPM and the + side of the tester to R and S of ISPM,
c. By touching the - side of the tester to the N terminal of

ISPM and the + side of the tester to R and S of ISPM,
d. By touching the + side of the tester to the N terminal of

ISPM and the - side of the tester to R and S of ISPM,
e. By touching the + side of the tester to the P terminal of

ISPM and the - side of the tester to U, V and W of ISPM,
f. By touching the - side of the tester to the P terminal of

ISPM and the + side of the tester to U, V and W of ISPM,
g. By touching the - side of the tester to the N terminal of

ISPM and the + side of the tester to U, V and W of ISPM,
h. By touching the + side of the tester to the N terminal of

ISPM and the - side of the tester to U, V and W of ISPM,
Page 8-96
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
� Checking procedure for the fan controller failure

1) Turn OFF the main switches and make sure that LED201 (Red) on Fan Controller is OFF. Otherwise, an
electrical shock may occur because the voltage may have changed more than DC50V in Fan Controller.
2) Remove all the wirings in Fan Controller and measure the resistance between the terminals by means of
an analog tester, according to the table below. Fix the tester range to 1KΩ. Check the color and the
terminal for measuring. Do not use a digital tester.
Tester probe
Criteria for resistance value
Red (+) Black (-)
P-R
P-S
P-T
R-N
S-N
T-N More than
P-U 1KΩ
P-V
P-W
U-N
V-N
W-N
R-P
S-P
T-P
The resistance value
N-R
increases by degrees after
N-S
the indicator moves for a
N-T
moment. The resistance value
U-P
increases by degrees after
V-P
1700KΩ~1900, KΩ
W-P
is displayed (x).
N-U
N-V
N-W
The interval of the measurement should be more than 30 seconds. Otherwise, an excessively high value may be displayed.
Page 8-97
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
 Checking procedure for the electrical coil parts
Abbreviations used for colors:

Black Brown Red Yellow Green Blue Grey Orange White Silver Violet
BLK BRN RED YEL GRN BLU GRY ORN WHT SIL VIO
Fan motor for the Indoor Units:

Indoor units Model Electrical wiring diagram Wiring No. Resistance (Ω)
RCI-1.0FSN1E 56 W DC Motor — —
RCI-1.5FSN1E
RCI-2.0FSN1E
RCI-3.5FSN1E
RCI-3.0FSN1E
RCI-3.5FSN1E 108 W DC Motor — —
RCI-4.0FSN1E
RCI-5.0FSN1E
RCI-6.0FSN1E
RCIM-1.5FSN 52 W DC Motor — —
RCIM-2.0FSN
RCIM-2.5FSN
RCD-1.0FSN 35 W BLK - RED 159.00
RCD-1.5FSN RED - WHT 92.00
RCD-2.0FSN at 20 ºC
RCD-2.5FSN 55 W BLK - RED 70.90
RCD-3.0FSN RED - WHT 81.70
at 20 ºC
RCD-4.0FSN 35 W x 2 BLK - RED 159.00

RED - WHT 92.00
at 20 ºC
RCD-5.0FSN 55 W x 2 BLK - RED 70.90
RED - WHT 81.70
at 20 ºC
RPC-2.0FSNE 65 W BLK - RED 59.90
RPC-2.5FSNE RED - YEL 16.90
RPC-3.0FSNE YEL - GRY 15.80
GRY - BLU 15.80
RED - WHT 63.60
at 20 ºC
Page 8-98
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
RPC-4.0FSNE 180 W BLK - RED 32.10
RPC-5.0FSNE RED - YEL 24.50
RPC-6.0FSNE YEL - GRY 24.50
RED - WHT 44.70
at 25 ºC
RPI-2.0FSN1E 65W BLK - RED 75.60

RPI-2.5FSN1E RED - BLU 12.80
BLU - GRY 12.70
GRY - YEL 12.60
RED - WHT 181.00
at 25 ºC

BLU - GRY 16.00
GRY - YEL 16.00
RED - WHT 45.20
8
at 21 ºC
BLU - GRY 8.00
GRY - YEL 8.00
RED - WHT 24.00
at 20 ºC
RED - BLU 4.70
BLU - GRY 9.02
GRY - YEL 4.08
RED - WHT 24.60
at 23 ºC
Page 8-99
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
RPK-0.8FSNM 20 W DC Motor — —
RPK-1.0FSNM
RPK-1.0FSN1M
RPK-1.5FSNM
RPK-1.5FSN1M
RPK-2.0FSNM
RPK-2.5FSNM 40 W
RPK-3.0FSNM
RPK-3.5FSNM 41 W
RPK-4.0FSNM
RPF(I)-1.0FSNE 28 W BLK - RED 231.70
RPF(I)-1.5FSNE RED - WHT 198.70
WHT - BLU 136.20
BLU - ORN 71.20
ORN - YEL 202.40
at 20 ºC
RPF(I)-2.0FSNE 45 W BLK - RED 97.90

RPF(I)-2.5FSNE RED - WHT 138.10
WHT - BLU 61.60
BLU - ORN 35.20
ORN - YEL 61.00
at 20 ºC
Fan motor for the Outdoor Units

Outdoor units Model Electrical wiring diagram Wiring No. Resistance (W)
RAS-5FSN DC Motor RED - WHT 6.75
370 W WHT - BLK 6.75
RED - BLK 6.75
at 21 ºC
RAS-8~32FSN(E) DC Motor YEL - BLUE 3,25

RAS-8~32FXN(E) 810 W Vcc BLU - ORN 3,25
(DC fan) ORN - YEL 3,25
at 21 ºC
HU
HV
HW
6VD
RAS-18~32FSN(E) NF7042 RED - BLK 6.74
RAS-16~32FXN(E) 275W RED - WHT 5.91
(Fix fan) at 21ºC
RAS-3~5FSVNE DC Motor
70 W
Page 8-100
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Other parts
Part name Unit models Model code Resistance (Ω)
Drain up motor RCI-1.0~6FSN1E ADP-1403 139.10
RCIM-1.5~2.5FSN at 21 ºC
RPI-2.0~6.0FSN1E
RCD1.0~6.0FSN KJV-1004 347.00
at 20 ºC
4-way valve RAS-5FSN VT40101+LB64046 1435.00
at 21 ºC
RAS-8~32FSN(E) VT60101+LB64046 1890.00
RAS-8~32FXN(E) at 20 ºC
Solenoid valve for the gas bypass (sva) RAS-5~32FSN(E) SR10PA 1800.00
Solenid valve for heat exchanger changeover at 20 ºC
(SV6)
Solenoid valve for oil return (svf)
Inverter compressor motor RAS-5~32FSN(E) E405AHD-36D2 239.00
Constant speed compressor motor RAS-8~32FSN(E) E605DH-59D2Y 61.00
E655DH-65D2Y 60.00
at 20 ºC
E505DH-59D2Y 60.00
at 20 ºC
Contactor for the compressor motor RAS-5~10FSN To be informed later
RAS-12~32FSN To be informed later
Page 8-101
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Checking procedure for the compressor
CHECK LIST ON THE COMPRESSOR

Client: Model: Date:
Serial No: Production date: Checker:
No. Check item Check method Result Remarks

1 Are THM8, THM9, THM12 and � Are the wires of each thermistor correctly
THM13 correctly connected? connected in a visual inspection?
THM8, THM9, THM12, THM13: � Make sure that 7-segment display of Td1 is
Discharge gas thermistor higher than Td2, Td3, Td4 when No.1 comp.
is operating.
Td1: Temperature of THM8
2 Are the thermistors THM8, � Make sure that thermistor on the top of comp.
THM9, THM12 and THM13 is correctly mounted in a visual inspection.
disconnected? � Make sure that the actually measured temp. is
greatly different from the display (Td1, Td2, Td3,
Td4) during the check mode.
3 Are the connectors for current � Make sure that indications A1, A2, A3 and A4
sensor correctly connected are 0 during the compressor stoppage.
4 Is current sensor faulty? � Make sure that indications A1, A2, A3 and A4
are not 0 during the compressor operation.
5 Is current sensing part on PCB3 (However, A2, A3 and A4 are 0 during the
faulty? stoppage of the compressors No.2, No.3 and
No.4).
6 Is the direction of current sensor
Check the direction � in a visual inspection.
(CTU, CTV) reverse?
7 Are the power supply wires U Make sure that the wires are correctly inserted.
and V inserted correctly into
the current sensor?
8 Are the ex. valves (MV1, MV2, Make sure that MV1�CN10 and MV2�CN11
MV3, MV4 and MVB) correctly are correctly connected.
connected?
9 Are the ex. valve coils (MV1, Make sure that each coil is correctly mounted
MV2, MV3, MV4 and MVB) on the valve.
correctly mounted?
10 Are the refrigerant cycle and Make sure that the refrigerant is flowing into the
electrical wiring system indoor units by operating one refrigerating cycle
incorrectly connected? only from the outdoor unit.
11 Is the opening of ex. valve Check the following by means of the check mode
completely closed (locked)? of the outdoor unit.
� Liquid pipe temp.(TL)< Inlet air temp.(Ti) during
the cooling process
� Liquid pipe temp.(TL)> Inlet air temp.(Ti) during
the heating process
12 Is the opening of ex. valve fully Make sure that the liquid pipe temp. is lower than
opened (locked)? the inlet air temp. of the stopped indoor unit when
other indoor units are operating under the cooling
process.
13 Are the contacts for the comp. Check the surface of each contact (L1, L2 and L3)
magnetic switch CMC faulty? in a visual inspection.
14 Is there any voltage malfunction Make sure that the voltage imbalance is smaller
among L1-L2, L2-L3 and L3-L1? than 3%.
Note that the power source voltage must be within
380V or 415V±10%, 220V±10 %.
15 Is the comp. oil acidified during Make sure that the oil color is not black.
the burning of the compressor
motor?
Page 8-102
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Troubleshooting
Additional information for "CHECK LIST ON THE COMPRESSOR"
Check item Additional information (mechanism of the compressor failure)

1&2 The discharge gas temperature (Td1) controls the liquid refrigerant return volume to the compressor when only
the compressor No.1 is operating. If THM8 and THM9 are connected in the reverse order, the liquid refrigerant
return volume will decrease even if the actual discharge gas temperature is high, because PCB1 is checking
the wrong compressor temperature. Therefore, this abnormal overheating process will result in the insulation
failure of the motor winding.
3, 4 & 5 The current sensor performs the overcurrent control (the operation frequency control) by detecting the current.
In this case, the insulation failure of the motor winding will occur because the control is not available in spite of
the actually high current.
6, 7 The current sensor checks the phase and adjusts the output electrical wave, in addition to the above-
mentioned items. If a fault occurs, the output electrical wave becomes unstable. This generates stress to the
motor winding and results in the insulation failure of the motor winding.
8, 9 During a cooling process, the fan speed of the outdoor unit controls the Pd and the MV of each indoor unit
controls the Td and the SH.
During a heating process, MV1, MV2, MV3, MV4 and MVB control the Td and the SH. If the expansion valves
are incorrectly connected, the correct control is not available. This results in the compressor seizure depending
on the returning conditions of the liquid refrigerant. Also, this may result in the insulation failure of the motor
winding depending on the overheating conditions.
10 If the refrigerant cycle and the electrical system are incorrectly connected, an abnormally low suction pressure
operation is maintained or an abnormally high discharge pressure operation is maintained. This results in
further stress to the compressor because the correct control of the compressor is not available.
11 Ditto.
12 The compressor may be locked due to the return operation of the liquid refrigerant during the cooling process.
13 If the contacting resistance becomes large, the voltage imbalance among each phase will cause an abnormal
overcurrent.
14 In this case, the overcurrent will occur, the efficiency will decrease or the motor winding will be excessively
heated.
15 In this case, it will result in the burning of the motor or the compressor seizure.
Page 8-103
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
9. Spare parts
Contents
9.1. Indoor Units ____________________________________________________________ 9-2

System Free - FSN(1)(E/M) ________________________________________________________ 9-2
RCI-1.0~6.0FSN1E ______________________________________________________________ 9-2
RCIM-1.0~2.0FSN _______________________________________________________________ 9-3
RCD-1.0~5.0FSN ________________________________________________________________ 9-4
RCD-4.0~5.0FSN ________________________________________________________________ 9-5
RPC-2.0~6.0FSNE _______________________________________________________________ 9-6
RPI-0.8~1.5FSN1E _______________________________________________________________ 9-7
RPI-2.0~6.0FSN1E _______________________________________________________________ 9-8
RPI-8.0~10.0FSNE _______________________________________________________________ 9-9
RPK-1.0/1.5FSN1M _____________________________________________________________ 9-10
RPK-0.8~2.0FSNM _____________________________________________________________ 9-11
RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM _____________________________________________________________ 9-12
RPF-1.0~2.5FSNE _____________________________________________________________ 9-13
RPFI-1.0~2.5FSNE _____________________________________________________________ 9-14
9.2. Outdoor Units __________________________________________________________ 9-15
Set Free - FSN(E)_______________________________________________________________ 9-15
RAS-5FSN ____________________________________________________________________ 9-15
RAS-8~12FSNE ________________________________________________________________ 9-18
RAS-14/16FSN _________________________________________________________________ 9-21
RAS-18~22FSN ________________________________________________________________ 9-24
RAS-24/26FSN _________________________________________________________________ 9-27
RAS-30/32FSN _________________________________________________________________ 9-30
RAS-8FXNE ___________________________________________________________________ 9-33
RAS-10/12FXNE _______________________________________________________________ 9-36
RAS-16FXN ___________________________________________________________________ 9-39
RAS-18~22FXN ________________________________________________________________ 9-42
RAS-24~26FXN ________________________________________________________________ 9-45
RAS-30/32FXN _________________________________________________________________ 9-48
 WARNING This Spare part list can be updated without previous notification. Check unit manufacturing serial number and consult with your Distributor for any update.
Page 9-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
9.1. Indoor Units
System Free - FSN(1)(E/M)
RCI-1.0~6.0FSN1E
(*) Electrical Parts NO. PART NAME REMARKS

U00A Terminal Board
U00B Terminal Board
U00C P-Spring Gas
U14 Condenser Assy
U15A Thermistor Air inlet
U15B Thermistor Air outlet
U15C Thermistor Gas pipe
U15D Thermistor LIquid pipe
U21 Expansion Valve
U31 Air Filter
U34 Air Grille
U35 Grille Knob
U36 Turbo Fan Fan runner
Drawing Number: EPN0465 U41 Heat Exchanger Assy
U65A Spacer
U65B CP Cover
U71A Fan Motor
U71B Drain Pump
U71C AS Motor Assy
U82 Transformer
U85A PI024 EX PCB
U85B PI012 Assy PCB
U85C PI979 Assy PCB
U87 Float Switch
U97 Drain Pan Assy
Page 9-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RCIM-1.0~2.0FSN
NO. PART NAME REMARKS

U04A Fuse 0.5A For Control Circuit
(*) Electrical Parts U04B Fuse 5A For Power Source
U15A Thermistor THM1 Air Inlet
U15B Thermistor THM2 Air Outlet
U15C Thermistor THM3 Freeze Protection
U15D Thermistor THM5 Gas
U21 Expansion Valve
U31 Air Filter For Air Panel P-N23WAM
9
U34 Air Grille For Air Panel P-N23WAM
U35A Knob For Air Panel P-N23WAM
U35B Knob For Air Panel P-N23WAM
U36 Runner
U41A/B Heat Exchanger Assembly
U65 Spacer For PCB
U71A Fan Motor 52W
Drawing Number: SPN20051 U71B Fan Motor Discharge Mechanism
U71C AS Motor For Air Panel P-N23WAM
U82 Transformer
U85A Printed Circuit Board Main
U85B Printed Circuit Board Power Supply
U85B Printed Circuit Board Noise Protection
U87 Float Switch
Page 9-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RCD-1.0~5.0FSN
Drawing Number: SPN200506
NO. PART NAME REMAKS

U04 Fuse 5A for control circuit
U14 Capacitor 4/5 mF 440vac
U15A Thermistor Thm1 air inlet
U15B Thermistor Thm2 air outlet
U15C Thermistor Thm3 freeze protection
U15D Thermistor Thm5 gas
U21 Exp. valve
U31 Air filter For P-G23DWA1
U34 Air grille (With air filter)
U36 Fan runner
U41 Heat exchanger
U65 Spacer
U71A Motor Fan motor 35W
U71B Motor Drian discharge mechanism
U71C Motor Swing Motor Assy for P-G23DWA1
U82 Transformer
U85A Printed circuit board Main PCB
U85B Printed circuit board Noise protection
U85C Printed circuit board Modulation
U87 Float SW
Page 9-4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RCD-4.0~5.0FSN
(*) Electrical Parts

U04 Fuse 5A for control circuit
U14A Capacitor 4mF 440vac
U14B Capacitor 5mF 440vac
U15A Thermistor Thm1 air inlet
U15B Thermistor Thm2 air outlet
U15C Thermistor Thm3 freeze protection
U15D Thermistor Thm5 gas
9
U21 Exp. valve
U31 Air filter For P-G46DWA1
U34 Air grille For P-G46DWA1 (with air filter)
U36 Fan runner
U41 Heat exchanger
U65 Plastic material
U71A Motor 55W electrical box side
U71B Motor 55W the other side
U71C Motor Drain discharge mechanism
U71D Motor P-G46DWA1 swing motor assy
U82 Transformer
U85A Printed circuit board Main PCB
U85B Printed circuit board Noise protection
U85C Printed circuit board Pulse width modulation
U87 Float SW
Page 9-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RPC-2.0~6.0FSNE
Drawing Number: EPN0454B
NO. PART NAME REMARKS NO. PART NAME REMARKS

U00 Terminal Board U41 Heat Exchanger Assembly
U02 Remote Control SW PC-P1HE (OPTIONAL) U64 Coupling
U14 Capacitor 3µF/ 4µF/ 5µF/ 6µF/ U65A Spacer
U15A Thermistor Liquid pipe (Freeze Protection) U65B Push Spacer
U15B Thermistor Gas Pipe U65C Grille Knob
U15C Thermistor Air Inlet U65D Grille Support
U15D Thermistor Air Outlet U71A Fan Motor
U21 Expansion Valve U71B AS Motor
U31 Air Filter U82 Transformer
U33 Bearing U85 Printed Circuit Board
U34A Air Intake Grille Air inlet U98A Side Cover L Left Side
U34B Grille Assy. C Air Outlet U98B Side Cover R Right Side
U36 Runner U98C Lower Cover Assy Lower Side
U37 Fan Casing U98D Upper Front cover Assembly
Page 9-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RPI-0.8~1.5FSN1E
Drawing Number: EPN 9

U00A Terminal board U41 Heat exchanger Assembly
U00B Fan assy Assembly U65A Spacer For fixing the printed circuit board
Expansion valve U65B Push spacer For fixing the printed circuit board
U13
cord U71A Fan motor
U14 Capacitor 2µf U71B Drain pump
U15A Thermistor Air inlet U13 Drain pump wire
U15B Thermistor Air outlet U82 Transformer
U15C Thermistor Freeze protection (liquid pipe) U85 Printed circuit board
U15D Thermistor Gas piping U87 Float switch
U21 Expansion valve U97 Drain pan
U31 Filter U98A Lower plate 1 Assembly
U36 Runner Right and left U98B Lower plate 2 Assembly
U37 Fan casing Right and left
Page 9-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RPI-2.0~6.0FSN1E
Drawing Number: EPN0605A-1B

U00 Terminal Board U41 Heat Exchanger Assembly
U02 Remote Control PC-P1HE (Optional) U65A Spacer For PCB Fixing
SW
U65B Push Spacer For PCB Fixing
U14 Capacitor 2.5µF, 8.0µF, 5.0µF, 3.15µF,
U71A Drain Pump
6.3µF
U71B Fan Motor
U15A Thermistor For liquid Pipe
U82 Transformer
U15B Thermistor For Gas Pipe
U85 Printed Circuit
U15C Thermistor For Inlet Air
Board
U15D Thermistor For Outlet Air
U87 Float Switch
U31 Filter
U97 Drain Pan Assembly
U36 Runner
U37 Fan Casing
Page 9-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RPI-8.0~10.0FSNE
9
Drawing Number: EPN0523A

U00 Terminal Board Right Side Runner & Casing
U37B Fan Casing Assy R (only)
U04 Fuse 10A
U41 Heat Exchanger Assembly
U13 Exp. Valve Cord
U65A Spacer For fixing the PCB
U14 Capacitor 18µF / 25µF
U71A Fan Motor Assy. Fan Unit Assy
U15A Thermistor Air Outlet
U71B Fan Motor Fan Motor (only)
U15B Thermistor Liquid Pipe
U75 Power Relay
U15C Thermistor Air Inlet
U15D Thermistor Gas Pipe U82 Transformer
U20 Fuse Holder U85A PI025 Assy.
U21 Exp. Valve U85B Relay PCB PI005
U31 Air Filter
U87 Float Switch
U37A Fan Casing Assy L Left Side Runner & Casing (only)
Page 9-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RPK-1.0/1.5FSN1M
Drawing Number: EPN0523A NO. PART NAME REMARKS

U04 Fuse 5A (For Control Circuit)
U15A Thermistor THM1 Air Inlet
U15B Thermistor THM2 Air Outlet
U15C Thermistor THM3 Freeze Protection
U15D Thermistor THM4 Gas
U21 Exp.Valve
U31A Air Filter Left Side
U31B Air Filter Right Side
U33 Bearing
U36 Fan Runner
U71A Motor Expansion Valve
U71B Motor Fan Motor 20W
U71C As Motor For Auto Swing Louver
U85A Printed Circuit Board
U85B Printed Circuit Board
U85C Printed Circuit Board
U85D Printed Circuit Board
Page 9-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RPK-0.8~2.0FSNM

U04 Fuse 5A (For Control Circuit)
U15A Thermistor Air Inlet
U15B Thermistor Air Outlet
U15C
U15D
U21
Thermistor
Thermistor
Exp.Valve
Freeze Protection
Gas 9
U31 Air Filter
U36 Fan Runner
U71A Fan Motor DC30V, 20W
U71B As Motor For Auto Swing Louver
U82 Transformer
U85 Printed Circuit Board
Page 9-11
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RPK-2.5~4.0FSNM
Details (U85A)

U04A Fuse 5A (For Control Circuit)
U04B Fuse 6A (For Fan Motor)
U04C Fuse 0,5A (For Control Circuit)
U15A Thermistor Air Inlet
U15B Thermistor Air Outlet
U15C Thermistor Freeze Protection
U15D Thermistor Gas
U21 Exp.Valve
U31 Air Filter
U36 Fan Runner
U71A Fan Motor 40/41W
U71B As Motor For Auto Swing Louver
U85A Printed Circuit Board
U85B Printed Circuit Board For Wireless receiver
U95A Drain Hose
U95B Drain Pan
Page 9-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RPF-1.0~2.5FSNE
Drawing Number: EPN0457B-1B

U00
U12
U13
Terminal board
Exp. Valve Cord
Exp. Valve Cord
U37
U41
U65A
Fan Casing
Heat Exchanger
Spacer
Assembly
For fixing PCB
9
U14 Capacitor 2µF / 4µF U65B Push Spacer For fixing PCB
U15A Thermistor Inlet U65C Grille Knob
U15B Thermistor Gas U71 Fan Motor
U15C Thermistor Liquid U82 Transformer
U15D Thermistor Outlet U85 Printed Circuit Board
U21 Expansion Valve U98A Back Cover Assembly
U31 Air Filter U98B Front Cover Assembly
U34A D Grille Air Outlet U98C Side Cover Assembly
U34B Air Inlet Grille Air Inlet U98D Upper Cover
U34C Air Inlet Grille Air Inlet
U36 Runner
Page 9-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RPFI-1.0~2.5FSNE

Drawing Number: EPN0457B-2B U00 Terminal board
U12 Exp. Valve Cord
U13 Exp. Valve Cord
U14 Capacitor 2µF / 4µF
U15A Thermistor Inlet
U15B Thermistor Gas
U15C Thermistor Liquid
U15D Thermistor Outlet
U21 Expansion Valve
U31 Air Filter
U36 Runner
U37 Fan Casing
U65A Spacer For fixing PCB
U65B Push Spacer For fixing PCB
U71 Fan Motor
U82 Transformer
U85 Printed Circuit Board
U98A Back Cover Assembly
Page 9-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
9.2. Outdoor Units
Set Free - FSN(E)
RAS-5FSN
 Cycle Parts
Drawing Number: SPN200408 (RAS-5FSN)
Page 9-15
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
 Structural Parts
Page 9-16
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
 Electrical Parts
Side A
Side B
Electrical Box
Side A Side B
Drawing Number: SPN200408 (RAS-5FSN)

U01A Pressure SW Pd U62A Noise suppressor NF1
U01B Pressure SW Ps U62B Noise suppressor NF2
U01C Pressure SW High pressure U65A Spacer
U04A Fuse 20A U65B Spacer
U04B Fuse 12A U65C Spacer
U14A Capacitor 2700µf CB1, CB2 U65D Spacer
U14B Capacitor 1800µf CB3 U70 Compressor For inverter
U15A Thermistor TD1 U71 Motor 0,37kW
U15B Thermistor TE1 U72 Mag. Contactor
9
U15C Thermistor TA U74A Resistor
U21A Exp. valve U74B Resistor
U21B Coil for exp. valve U77A Solenoid valve
U27A Stop valve U77B Coil for solenoid valve
U27B Stop valve U78 oil heater
U28A Check joint U79 Four-way valve Assembly
U28B Check joint U81 Coil for 4-way valve
U30A Strainer U82A Reactor
U30B Strainer U82B Transformer DCL
U30C Strainer U85A fan controller
U32A Vibration absorber U85B Printed circuit board Ispm
U32B Vibration absorber U85C Printed circuit board PCB1
U34A Air grille Outlet U89 Accumulator
U34B Air grille Inlet U98A Cabinet panel
U40 Condenser Assembly U98B Cabinet panel
U51 Propeller fan U98C Bellmouth
U58 Receiver Assembly
Page 9-17
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RAS-8~12FSNE
 Cycle Parts
RAS-8FSNE
(Only)
RAS-8FSNE
(Only)
RAS-8~12FSNE
(Only)
Drawing Number: EPN0521C (RAS-8~12FSNE)
Page 9-18
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RAS-8FSNE
(Only)
9
RAS-8FSNE
(Only)
Page 9-19
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Side A
Side B
Side A
Side B
Electrical Box
NO. PART NAME REMARKS NO. PART NAME REMARKS NO. PART NAME REMARKS
U01A Pressure switch High pressure U30E Strainer U72B Mag. contactor
U01B Pressure sensor PD U30F Strainer U74A Resistor
U01C Pressure sensor PS U32A V-P Rubber 380/415V,
U74B Resistor
U04A Fuse 20A U32B V-P Rubber 50Hz, 3~
U04B Fuse 12A U34A Outlet Protector Outlet U77A Solenoid valve
U14A Capacitor 2700µf U34B Protector Net assy Inlet U77B Coil 20
U14B Capacitor 1800µf U40A Condenser Assembly U77C Solenoid valve
U15A Thermistor TD1 U40B Plate assy U78A Heater harness
U15B Thermistor TD2 U42 Check valve U78B Heater harness
U15C Thermistor TE1 U51 Propeller fan U79 Four-way valve Assy
U15D Thermistor TA U55 Oil separator assy U81 Coil for 4-way valve
U21A Exp. valve U58 L tank U82A Reactor
U21B Coil for exp. valve U62A Noise filter U82B Transformer
U21C Exp. valve U62B Noise filter U85A Fan controller Fanm 20A
U27A Stop valve U65A Spacer U85B Inv module Ispm
U27B Stop valve U65B Push spacer U85C PCB PO032 Assy PCB1
U28A Check joint U70A Compressor For inverter U89 Accumulator
U28B Check joint U70B Compressor U98A Front cover upper Assy
U30A Strainer U70B Compressor U98B Front cover B
U30B Strainer U70B Compressor U98C Upper cover M
U30C Strainer U71 Fan motor 0.81kW
U30D Strainer U72A Mag. contactor
Page 9-20
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RAS-14/16FSN
 Cycle Parts
Drawing Number: SPN200408 (RAS-14/16FSN)
Page 9-21
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Page 9-22
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
U01A Pressure sw High pressure U32A Vibration absorber U74A Resistor
U01B Pressure sw PD U32B Vibration absorber U74B Resistor
U01C Pressure sw PS U34A Air grille Outlet U77A Solenoid valve
U04A Fuse 20 A U34B Air grille Inlet Coil for solenoid
U77B
U04B Fuse 12 A U40A Condenser Assy valve
U14A Capacitor 1800µf Plate heat U77C Solenoid valve
U40B
U14B Capacitor 2700µf hexchanger U77D Solenoid valve
U42A Check valve U78A Oil heater
9
U15A Thermistor TD
U15B Thermistor TE U42B Check valve U78B Oil heater
U15C Thermistor TA U51 Propeller fan U79 Four-way valve
U21A Exp. valve U55 Oil separator U81 Coil for 4-way valve
U21B Coil for exp. valve U58 Receiver Assy U82A Reactor
U21C Exp. valve U62A Noise suppressor U82B Transformer
U21D Coil for exp. valve U62B Noise suppressor U85A Fan controller
U27A Stop valve U65A Spacer U85B Printed circuit board
U27B Stop valve U65B Spacer U85C Printed circuit board
U28A Check joint U65C Spacer U89 Accumulator
U28B Check joint U65D Spacer U98A Cabinet panel
U30A Strainer U70A Compressor For inverter U98B Cabinet panel
U30B Strainer U70B Compressor U98C Cabinet panel
U30C Strainer U71 Motor 0,81kW U98D Cabinet panel
U30D Strainer U72A Mag. contactor
U30E Strainer U72B Mag. contactor
Page 9-23
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RAS-18~22FSN
 Cycle Parts
Page 9-24
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
9
Page 9-25
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Side A
Side B
Side A
Side B
Electrical Box
U01A Pressure sw High pressure U34B Air grille Inlet U74A Resistor
U01B Pressure sw PD
U40A Condenser Assy U74B Resistor
U01C Pressure sw PS
Plate heat U77A Solenoid valve
U04A Fuse 20A U40B
exchanger
U04B Fuse 12A U77B Solenoid valve
U42A Check valve
U14A Capacitor 2700µf Coil for solenoid
U42B Check valve U77C
U14B Capacitor 1800µf valve
U14C Capacitor 16µf U42C Check valve U78A Oil heater
U15A Thermistor TD
U51 Propeller fan U78B Oil heater
U15B Thermistor TE
U15C Thermistor TA U55 Oil separator Assy U79 Four-way valve Assy
U21A Exp. valve U58 Receiver Assy Coil for 4-way
U81
U21B Coil for exp. valve valve
U62A Noise supprssor
U21C Exp. valve U82A Reactor
U62B Noise supprssor
U27A Stop valve U82B Transformer
U27B Stop valve U65A Spacer
U85A Fan control Fanm
U28A Check joint U65B Spacer
Printed circuit
U28B Check joint U85B Ispm
U65C Spacer board
U30A Strainer
U70A Compressor For inverter Printed circuit
U30B Strainer U85C PCB1
board
U30C Strainer U70B Compressor
U89 Accumulator
U30D Strainer U71A Motor 0,275kW
U30E Strainer U98A Cabinet panel
U71B Motor 0,81kW
U32A V-P Rubber U98B Cabinet panel
U32B V-P Rubber U72A Mag. contactor
U98C Cabinet panel
U34A Air grille Outlet U72B Mag. contactor
Page 9-26
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RAS-24/26FSN
 Cycle Parts
Page 9-27
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Page 9-28
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Left Electrical Box

Right Electrical Box
Left Electrical Box
U01A Pressure sw High pressure U30F Strainer U71A Motor 0,275kW
U01B Pressure sw PD U32A V-P Rubber U71B Motor 0,81kW
U01C Pressure sw PS U32B V-P Rubber U72B Mag. contactor
U04A Fuse 20A U34A Air grille Outlet U72C Mag. contactor
U04B Fuse 12A U34B Air grille Inlet U74A Resistor
9
U04C Fuse 20A U40A Condenser Assy U74B Resistor
U14A Capacitor 2700µf U40B Condenser Assy U77A Solenoid valve
U14B Capacitor 1800µf U40C Plate heat exchanger U77B Solenoid valve
U14C Capacitor 16µf U42A Check valve U77C Coil for solenoid valve
U15A Thermistor TD U42B Check valve U78A Oil heater
U15B Thermistor TE U42C Check valve U78B Oil heater
U15C Thermistor TA U51 Propeller fan U79 Four-way valve Assy
U21A Exp. valve U55 Oil separator Assy U81 Coil for 4-way valve
U21B Coil for exp. valve U58 Receiver Assy U82A Reactor
U27A Stop valve U62A Noise supprssor U82B Transformer
U27B Stop valve U62B Noise supprssor U85A Fan control Fanm
U28A Check joint U65A Spacer U85B Printed circuit board Ispm
U30A Strainer U65B Spacer U85C Printed circuit board PCB1
U30B Strainer U65C Spacer U89 Accumulator
U30C Strainer U65D Spacer U98A Cabinet panel
U30D Strainer U70A Compressor For inverter U98B Cabinet panel
U30E Strainer U70B Compressor U98C Cabinet panel
Page 9-29
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RAS-30/32FSN
 Cycle Parts
Drawing Number: SPN200408 (RAS-30/32FSN
Page 9-30
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Page 9-31
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Left Electrical Box

Left Electrical Box
U01A Pressure sw High pressure U32A V-P Rubber U72A Mag. contactor
U01B Pressure sw PD U32B V-P Rubber U72B Mag. contactor
U01C Pressure sw PS U34A Air grille Outlet U72C Mag. contactor
U04A Fuse 20A U34B Air grille Inlet U74A Resistor
U04B Fuse 12A U40A Condenser Assy U74B Resistor
U04C Fuse 20A U40B Condenser Assy U77A Solenoid valve
U14A Capacitor 2700µf U40C Plate heat exchanger U77B Solenoid valve
U14B Capacitor 1800µf U42A Check valve U77C Coil for solenoid valve
U14C Capacitor 16µf U42B Check valve U78A Oil heater
U15A Thermistor TD U42C Check valve U78B Oil heater
U15B Thermistor TE U51 Propeller fan U79 Four-way valve Assy
U15C Thermistor TA U55 Oil separator Assy U81 Coil for 4-way valve
U21A Exp. valve U58 Receiver Assy U82A Reactor
U21B Coil for exp. valve U62A Noise supprssor U82B Transformer
U27A Stop valve U62B Noise supprssor U85A Fan control Fanm
U27B Stop valve U65A Spacer U85B Printed circuit board Ispm
U28A Check joint U65B Spacer U85C Printed circuit board PCB1
U30A Strainer U65C Spacer U89 Accumulator
U30B Strainer U65D Spacer U98A Cabinet panel
U30C Strainer U70A Compressor For inverter U98B Cabinet panel
U30D Strainer U70B Compressor U98C Cabinet panel
U30E Strainer U71A Motor 0,275kW U98D Cabinet panel
U30F Strainer U71B Motor 0,81kW
Page 9-32
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Set Free - FXN(E)
RAS-8FXNE
 Cycle Parts
Drawing Number: SPN200504 (RAS-8FXNE)
Page 9-33
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Page 9-34
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Side A
Side B
Side A
Side B
U01A Pressure sw High pressure U30B Strainer U72A Mag. contactor
U01B Pressure sw PD U30C Strainer U72B Mag. contactor
U01C Pressure sw PS U30D Strainer U74A Resistor
U04A Fuse 20 A U30E Strainer U74B Resistor
U04B
U14A
U14B
Fuse
Capacitor
Capacitor
12 A
2700µf
1800µf
U32A
U32B
U34A
Vibration
Vibration
Air grille Outlet
U77A
U77B
U77C
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
9
U15A Thermistor TD1 U34B Air grille Inlet U78A Oil heater
U15B Thermistor TD2 U40A Condenser U78B Oil heater
U15C Thermistor TE1, TE2 U42A Check valve U79 Our-way valve Assy
U15D Thermistor TA U42B Check valve U81 Coil for 4-way valve
U15E Thermistor TA U51 Propeller fan U82A Reactor
U21B Cord for Exp. valve U55 Oil separator Assy U82B Transformer
U21C Exp. valve U58 Receiver Assy U85A Fan controller FANM
U21D Cord for Exp. valve U62A Noise suppressor U85B Printed circuit board ISPM
U27A Stop valve U62B Noise suppressor U85C Printed circuit board PCB1
U27B Stop valve U65A Spacer U89 Accumulator
U27C Stop valve U65B Push Spacer U98A Cabinet panel
U28A Check joint U70A Compressor For inverter U98B Cabinet panel
U28B Check joint U70B Compressor U98C Cabinet panel
U30A Strainer U71 Motor 0,81kW
Page 9-35
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RAS-10/12FXNE
 Cycle Parts
Drawing Number: SPN200504 (RAS-10/12FXNE)
Page 9-36
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
9
Page 9-37
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Side A
Side B
Side A
Side B
U01A Pressure sw High pressure U30B Strainer U71 Motor 0,81kW
U01B Pressure sw PD U30C Strainer U72A Mag. contactor
U01C Pressure sw PS U30D Strainer U72B Mag. contactor
U04A Fuse 20 A U30E Strainer U74A Resistor
U04B Fuse 12 A U30F Strainer U74B Resistor
U14A Capacitor 2700µf U32A Vibration U77A Solenoid valve
U14B Capacitor 1800µf U32B Vibration U77B Solenoid valve
U15A Thermistor TD1 U34A Air grille Outlet U77C Solenoid valve
U15B Thermistor TD2 U34B Air grille Inlet U78A Oil heater
U15C Thermistor TE1, TE2 U40A Condenser Assy U78B Oil heater
U15D Thermistor TA Plate Heat U79 Our-way valve Assy
U40B
U15E Thermistor TA Hexchanger U81 Coil for 4-way valve
U21A Exp. valve U42A Check valve U82A Reactor
U21B Cord for Exp. valve U42B Check valve U82B Transformer
U21C Exp. valve U51 Propeller fan U85A Fan controller FANM
U21D Cord for Exp. valve U55 Oil separator Assy U85B Printed circuit board ISPM
U21E Cord for Exp. valve U58 Receiver Assy U85C Printed circuit board PCB1
U27A Stop valve U62A Noise suppressor U89 Accumulator
U27B Stop valve U62B Noise suppressor U98A Cabinet panel
U27C Stop valve U65A Spacer U98B Cabinet panel
U28A Check joint U65B Push Spacer U98C Cabinet panel
U28B Check joint U70A Compressor For inverter
U30A Strainer U70B Compressor
Page 9-38
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RAS-16FXN
 Cycle Parts
Drawing Number: SPN200504 (RAS-16FXN)
Page 9-39
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Page 9-40
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Side A
Side B
Side A
Side B
NO. NAME PARTS REMARKS NO. NAME PARTS REMARKS NO. NAME PARTS REMARKS
U01A Pressure sw High pressure U30G Strainer U72B Mag. contactor
U01B Pressure sw PD U32A Vibration absorber U74A Resistor
U01C Pressure sw PS U32B Vibration absorber U74B Resistor
U04A Fuse 20 A U34A Air grille Outlet U77A Solenoid valve
U04B Fuse 12 A U34B Air grille Inlet U77B Solenoid valve
U14A Capacitor 2700µF U40A Condenser Assy U77C Solenoid valve
U14B Capacitor 1800µF U40B Condenser Assy U77D Solenoid valve
U14C Capacitor 16µF Plate heat U78A Oil heater
9
U40C
U15A Thermistor TD exchanger U78B Oil heater
U15B Thermistor TE U42A Check valve U79 Four-way valve
U15C Thermistor TA U42B Check valve Coil for 4-way
U81
U21A Exp. valve U42C Check valve valve
U21B Exp. valve U42D Check valve U82A Reactor
U21C Exp. valve U51 Propeller fan U82B Transformer
U27A Stop valve U55 Oil separator U85A Fan controller FANM
U27B Stop valve U58 Receiver Assy Printed circuit
U85B ISPM
U27C Stop valve U62A Noise suppressor board
U28A Check joint U62B Noise suppressor Printed circuit
U85C PCB1
U65A Spacer board
U28B Check joint
U65B Spacer U89 Accumulator
U30A Strainer
U70A Compressor Inverter U98A Cabinet panel
U30B Strainer
U70B Compressor U98B Cabinet panel
U30C Strainer
U71A Motor 0,275 kW U98C Cabinet panel
U30D Strainer
U30E Strainer U71B Motor 0,81 kW
U30F Strainer U72A Mag. Contactor
Page 9-41
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RAS-18~22FXN
 Cycle Parts
Drawing Number: SPN200504 (RAS-18~22FXN)
Page 9-42
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
9
Page 9-43
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Side A
Side B
Side A
Side B
U01A Pressure sw High pressure U30E Strainer U71A Motor 0,275 kW
U01B Pressure sw PD U30F Strainer U71B Motor 0,81 kW
U01C Pressure sw PS U30G Strainer U72A Mag. Contactor
U04A Fuse 20 A U32A Vibration absorber U72B Mag. contactor
U04B Fuse 12 A U32B Vibration absorber U74A Resistor
U14A Capacitor 2700µF U34A Air grille Outlet U74B Resistor
U14B Capacitor 1800µF U34B Air grille Inlet U77A Solenoid valve
U14C Capacitor 16µF U40A Condenser Assy U77B Solenoid valve
U15A Thermistor TD U40B Condenser Assy U77C Solenoid valve
U15B Thermistor TE U40C Plate heat exchanger U77D Solenoid valve
U15C Thermistor TA U42A Check valve U78A Oil heater
U21A Exp. valve U42B Check valve U78B Oil heater
U21B Exp. valve U42C Check valve U79 Four-way valve
U21C Exp. valve U42D Check valve U81 Coil for 4-way valve
U27A Stop valve U51 Propeller fan U82A Reactor
U27B Stop valve U55 Oil separator U82B Transformer
U27C Stop valve U58 Receiver Assy U85A Fan controller FANM
U28A Check joint U62A Noise suppressor U85B Printed circuit board ISPM
U28B Check joint U62B Noise suppressor U85C Printed circuit board PCB1
U30A Strainer U65A Spacer U89 Accumulator
U30B Strainer U65B Spacer U98A Cabinet panel
U30C Strainer U70A Compressor Inverter U98B Cabinet panel
U30D Strainer U70B Compressor U98C Cabinet panel
Page 9-44
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RAS-24~26FXN
 Cycle Parts
Drawing Number: SPN200504 (RAS-24/26FXN)
Page 9-45
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
 tructural Parts
Drawing Number: SPN200504 (RAS-24/26FXN
Page 9-46
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Left Electrical Box

Drawing Number:
SPN200504
(RAS-24/26FXN
Left Electrical Box
U01A Pressure sw High pressure U32A Vibration absorber U72A Mag. Contactor
U01B Pressure sw PD U32B Vibration absorber U72B Mag. contactor
U01C Pressure sw PS U34A Air grille Outlet U74A Resistor
U04A Fuse 20 A U34B Air grille Inlet U74B Resistor
U04B Fuse 12 A U40A Condenser Assy U77A Solenoid valve
U14A Capacitor 2700µF U40B Condenser Assy U77B Solenoid valve
U14B Capacitor 1800µF Plate heat U77C Solenoid valve
U40C
9
U14C Capacitor 16µF exchanger U77D Solenoid valve
U15A Thermistor TD U42A Check valve U78A Oil heater
U15B Thermistor TE U42B Check valve U78B Oil heater
U15C Thermistor TA U42C Check valve U79 Four-way valve
U21A Exp. valve U42D Check valve U81 Coil for 4-way valve
U21B Cord for Exp. valve U51 Propeller fan U82A Reactor
U27A Stop valve U55 Oil separator U82B Transformer
U27B Stop valve U58 Receiver Assy U85A Fan controller FANM
U27C Stop valve U62A Noise suppressor Printed circuit
U85B ISPM
U28A Check joint U62B Noise suppressor board
U28B Check joint U65A Spacer Printed circuit
U85C PCB1
U30A Strainer U65B Spacer board
U30B Strainer U65C Spacer U89 Accumulator
U30C Strainer U65D Spacer U98A Cabinet panel
U30D Strainer U70A Compressor Inverter U98B Cabinet panel
U30E Strainer U70B Compressor U98C Cabinet panel
U30F Strainer U71A Motor 0,275 kW U98D Cabinet panel
U30G Strainer U71B Motor 0,81 kW
Page 9-47
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
RAS-30/32FXN
 Cycle Parts
Page 9-48
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
9
Page 9-49
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Spare parts
Left Electrical Box

Drawing Number:
SPN200504
(RAS-30/32FXN)
Left Electrical Box
U01A Pressure sw High pressure U30G Strainer U71B Motor 0,81 kW
U01B Pressure sw PD U32A Vibration absorber U72A Mag. Contactor
U01C Pressure sw PS U32B Vibration absorber U72B Mag. contactor
U04A Fuse 20 A U34A Air grille Outlet U74A Resistor
U04B Fuse 12 A U34B Air grille Inlet U74B Resistor
U14A Capacitor 2700µF U40A Condenser Assy U77A Solenoid valve
U14B Capacitor 1800µF U40B Condenser Assy U77B Solenoid valve
U14C Capacitor 16µF Plate heat U77C Solenoid valve
U40C
U15A Thermistor TD exchanger U77D Solenoid valve
U15B Thermistor TE U42A Check valve U78A Oil heater
U15C Thermistor TA U42B Check valve U78B Oil heater
U21A Exp. valve U42C Check valve U79 Four-way valve
U21B Cord for Exp. valve U42D Check valve U81 Coil for 4-way valve
U27A Stop valve U51 Propeller fan U82A Reactor
U27B Stop valve U55 Oil separator U82B Transformer
U27C Stop valve U58 Receiver Assy U85A Fan controller FANM
U28A Check joint U62A Noise suppressor Printed circuit
U85B ISPM
U28B Check joint U62B Noise suppressor board
U30A Strainer U65A Spacer Printed circuit
U85C PCB1
U30B Strainer U65B Spacer board
U30C Strainer U65C Spacer U89 Accumulator
U30D Strainer U65D Spacer U98A Cabinet panel
U30E Strainer U70A Compressor Inverter U98B Cabinet panel
U30F Strainer U70B Compressor U98C Cabinet panel
U71A Motor 0,275 kW U98D Cabinet panel
Page 9-50
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10. Servicing
CONTENTS
10. SERVICING __________________________________________________________ 10-1

10.1. Outdoor Unit RAS-FSVNE ________________________________________________ 10-3
10.2. Outdoor Unit RAS-FSN(E) ______________________________________________ 10-18
10.3. Outdoor Unit RAS-FXN(E) ______________________________________________ 10-18
10.4. RCI ________________________________________________________________ 10-45
10.4.1. Removing the long life filter ______________________________________________ 10-45
10.4.2. Removing the air intake grille ____________________________________________ 10-45
10.4.3. Removing the electrical box cover_________________________________________ 10-45
10.4.4. Removing the optional air panel __________________________________________ 10-46
10.4.5. Removing the fan runner and fan motor ____________________________________ 10-46
10.4.6. Removing the bell-mouth________________________________________________ 10-47
10.4.7. Removing the printed circuit board (PCB) ___________________________________ 10-47
10.4.8. Removing the drain pan ________________________________________________ 10-47
10.4.9. Removing the drain-up mechanism ________________________________________ 10-47
10.4.10. Removing the float switch _______________________________________________ 10-47
10.4.11. Removing the thermistor for liquid pipe and gas pipe __________________________ 10-48
10.4.12. Removing the electronic expansion valve coil ________________________________ 10-48
10.4.13. Removing the automatic louver motor ______________________________________ 10-48
10.5. RCIM – FSN _________________________________________________________ 10-51
10.5.1. Removing the air filter __________________________________________________ 10-51
10.5.2. Removing the air intake grille ____________________________________________ 10-51
10.5.3. Removing the electrical box cover_________________________________________ 10-51
10.5.5. Removing the fan runner and fan motor ____________________________________ 10-53
10.5.6. Removing the bell-mouth________________________________________________ 10-53
10.6. RCD _______________________________________________________________ 10-60
10.6.1. Removing the long-life filter and the air inlet grille _____________________________ 10-60
10.6.2. Removing the electrical box panel_________________________________________ 10-60
10.6.4. Removing the fan runner and the fan motor _________________________________ 10-61
10.6.10. Removing the electronic expansion valve coil ________________________________ 10-65
10.7. RPI IN-THE CEILING TYPE______________________________________________ 10-67
10.7.1. Removing the electrical box and electrical parts ______________________________ 10-67
10.7.2.
10.7.3.
10.7.4.
Removing the air inlet thermistor __________________________________________ 10-67
Removing the loutlet air thermistor ________________________________________ 10-68
Removing the liquid and gas pipe thermistors________________________________ 10-68
10
10.7.5. Removing the fan parts _________________________________________________ 10-69
10.7.6. Removing the drain pump _______________________________________________ 10-69
10.8. RPC ________________________________________________________________ 10-71
10.8.2. Removing the side panel ________________________________________________ 10-71
10.8.3. Removing the discharge air grille _________________________________________ 10-71
10.8.4. Removing the fan motor ________________________________________________ 10-72
10.8.5. Removing the bearing __________________________________________________ 10-73
10.8.6. Removing the coupling _________________________________________________ 10-73
10.8.8. Removing the thermistors for liquid pipe and gas pipe _________________________ 10-74
Page 10-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10.9. RPK-1.5/2 ___________________________________________________________ 10-76

10.9.1. Removing the Air filter __________________________________________________ 10-76
10.9.2. Removing the front panel _______________________________________________ 10-76
10.9.3. Removing the motor for the automatic louver ________________________________ 10-77
10.9.4. Removing the thermistor for liquid pipe, gas pipe, discharged air and suction air ____ 10-77
10.9.7. Removing the heat exchanger____________________________________________ 10-79
10.9.8. Removing the fan motor ________________________________________________ 10-80
10.9.9. Removing the electronic expansion valve ___________________________________ 10-81
10.10. RPK-2.5~4.0 _________________________________________________________ 10-83
10.10.1. Removing the right side cover ____________________________________________ 10-84
10.10.2. Removing the thermistors for liquid pipe, gas pipe, discharge air and suction air_____ 10-85
10.10.5. Removing the heat exchanger____________________________________________ 10-88
10.10.6. Removing the fan and the fan motor _______________________________________ 10-89
10.10.7. Removing the suction air grille ___________________________________________ 10-90
10.10.8. Removing the electronic expansion valve coil _______________________________ 10-91
10.11. RPK 1.5FSN1M _______________________________________________________ 10-93
10.11.1. Removing the Air Filter _________________________________________________ 10-93
10.11.2. Removing front panel __________________________________________________ 10-94
10.11.3. Removing the Electrical Box Panel ________________________________________ 10-95
10.11.4. Removing the Motor for the Automatic Louver _______________________________ 10-95
10.11.5. Removing the Thermistors for Liquid Pipe, Gas Pipe, Discharge air and Suction Air __ 10-96
10.11.6. Removing the Drain Pan ________________________________________________ 10-97
10.11.7. Removing the Heat Exchanger ___________________________________________ 10-98
10.11.8. Removing the Fan and the Fan Motor _____________________________________ 10-99
10.11.9. Removing the Electronic Expansion Valve Coil ______________________________ 10-100
10.11.10. Removing the Printed Circuit Board ______________________________________ 10-101
10.12. RPF _______________________________________________________________ 10-103
10.12.1. Removing the air inlet grille _____________________________________________ 10-103
10.12.2. Removing the air filter _________________________________________________ 10-103
10.12.3. Removing the discharge air grille ________________________________________ 10-103
10.12.4. Removing the front panel ______________________________________________ 10-104
10.12.5. Removing the fan motor _______________________________________________ 10-104
10.12.6. Removing the printed circuit board (PCB) __________________________________ 10-105
10.12.7. Removing the thermistors for liquid pipe and gas pipe ________________________ 10-106
10.13. RPFI ______________________________________________________________ 10-106
10.13.1. Removing the air filter _________________________________________________ 10-106
10.13.2. Removing the front panel ______________________________________________ 10-106
10.13.3. Removing the fan motor _______________________________________________ 10-107
10.13.4. Removing the printed circuit board (PCB) __________________________________ 10-107
10.13.5. Removing the thermistors for liquid pipe and gas pipe ________________________ 10-107
10.14. Cleaning the indoor heat exchanger ______________________________________ 10-108
10.14.1. Required tools for cleaning (for all indoor units) _____________________________ 10-108
10.14.2. Cleaning the 4-way cassette indoor unit ___________________________________ 10-110
10.14.3. Cleaning the 2-way cassette indoor unit ___________________________________ 10-113
10.14.4. Cleaning the wall type indoor unit ________________________________________ 10-115
10.14.5. Cleaning the floor type indoor unit and the floor concealed type indoor unit ________ 10-115
10.14.6. Cleaning the ceiling type indoor unit ______________________________________ 10-117
Page 10-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/3
10.1.
9.1. OUTDOOR UNIT RAS-FSVNE
OUTDOOR UNIT
��WARNING: TURN OFF all the main switches

9.1.1. FSVNE
� REMOVING SERVICE COVER
1. Remove the main parts according to the following
procedures. To reassemble perform the procedures in
reverse.
2. To prevent contamination of the refrigerant with water or
foreign particles, do not expose open to atmosphere for long
periods.
3. If necessary, seal pipe ends using caps or tape.
4. Remove the two fixing screws (upper part 1, lower part 1),
slide the service cover downward and remove.
Service Cover
� REMOVING AIR OUTLET GRILLE

Air Outlet Grille
1. Remove the two (2) fixing screws of the shroud. Lift the air
outlet grille holding the lower parts and unhook the extrusion
(3 locations) of the air outlet grille from the shroud.
Catch (6 location both sides) Shroud
10
Page 10-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/4 SERVICING

� REMOVING OUTDOOR FAN
Upper Cover
1. Remove the service cover according to the item 9.1.1
“Removing Service Cover”.
2. Remove the air outlet grille according to the item 9.1.2
“Removing Air Outlet Grille”.
3. Remove the fans by removing the cap nuts and the flat
washers fixing the propeller fans onto the motor shaft. If it is
difficult to remove the fan, use pullers.
4. Remove the eight (8) screws fixing the upper cover and
remove the upper cover.
Flat washer
Cap nut
 REMOVING OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR

1.
� REMOVING
Disconnect theOUTDOOR
connectors for FANthe MOTOR
motors in the electrical box.
1.
2. Disconnect the connectors for the motors
Cut the plastic tie of the motor clamp by using in thenipper.
electrical
box. (2) Cut the plastic tie of the motor clamp by using
3. Remove the
nipper. (3) four (4)the
Remove fixing
fourscrews for screws
(4) fixing the motor.
for the motor.
� NOTES: Fan Motor Lead Wires

1. When mounting the motor, ensure the cables point
directly downward. Fix the protection tube edge
downward to ensure the water may not keep in it. Motor Clamp
2. Fix the motor wires onto the motor clamp with a plastic tie Screw with
to prevent them obstructing the propeller fans. Spacer
� CAUTION:
When mounting the fan motor, don't touch the shaft of
connector pins. Static electricity could damage the motor.
3. Mounting Propeller Fan:
Insert the skidding protection part of fan boss in
accordance with the cutting part of the motor shaft, and
fix the screw after exerting screw part of the shaft. Fan Motor
(Tightening Torque of 8.0 N.m: 80 kg.cm)
4. When connecting the motor wire, check to ensure that
the colors of the connectors on the PCB are matched
with wires.
5. Firmly fix the air outlet grille to the shroud.
� REMOVING COMPRESSOR � RAS-3FSVNE

� For RAS-3FSVNE:
“Removing Service Cover”. If the outdoor unit is installed Upper Cover
close to a wall, disconnect the refrigerant pipe and move the Terminal Board
outdoor unit away from the wall.
a) Remove the terminal board cover. Rear
Cover
b) Disconnect the upper wiring of the terminal board. Terminal Board Valve Stay
Cover Check Joint
2. Remove the valve stay of Pipe Side
Check Joint
3. Collect refrigerant from check joint of stop valve and pipe Valve Stay
side.
4. Release the lace for the sound proof cover. Open the sound
Check Joint
proof cover from the front side. Rear Pipe
Sound Front Pipe Cover
Proof cover Cover
Page 10-4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/5

� For RAS-4~5FSVNE:
1. Remove the service cover according to the item 9.1.1 � RAS-4~5FSVNE
“Removing Service Cover”. If the outdoor unit is installed
Upper Cover
close to a wall, disconnect the refrigerant pipe and move the
outdoor unit away from the wall.
2. Collect the refrigerant from the check joint.
3. Remove the valve stay.
4. Release the lace for the Sound Proof Cover. Open the Rear Cover
Sound Proof Cover from the front side.
� NOTE: Rear Pipe Cover

Remove the Sound Proof Cover in the arrow mark Sound proof
direction as shown. cover
Do not deform any piping when you are removing the Front Pipe Cover
panel. If you deform the piping, the welded portion may
be broken. Pay attention to the sharp edges of the side
panel in order to avoid any injury.
� For RAS-3~5FSVNE
� RAS-3FSVNE
5. Remove the terminal panel for the compressor and
disconnect the wiring to the compressor terminals. Make
sure that the terminal numbers and the mark band are Terminal Box Cover
correct. If the terminal numbers and the mark band are not
identified, this will cause incorrect wiring when you are
reassembling.
� NOTES: Sound proof Cover
– Make sure that the fasten terminals for the compressors

are normal. When a pulling force of 20N or more is
required, it is normal. Otherwise, replace the fasten
terminals with new terminals. Free Terminal
(not used)
– Make sure that the wires are correctly inserted.
– It is recommended that the fasten terminals Discharge Pipe
be clamped to increase the contacting force after
replacing the compressor.
6. Remove the thermistor Box cover and remove the � RAS-4~5FSVNE

thermistor.
Thermistor Box Cover
Thermistor
Sound proof Cover
Wires
10
Terminal Box
Cover
Page 10-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/6 SERVICING

7. Remove the oil heater by releasing the spring. Remove the
spring by expanding as shown in the figure beside.
Spring
Oil Heater
8. Remove the discharge pipe thermistor.

� RAS-3FSVNE � RAS-4~5FSVNE
9. Disconnect the discharge and suction pipes of the
compressor. (For 4/5FSVNE disconnect the liquid injection
pipe). Discharge Pipe
Make sure that there is no positive pressure inside the Discharge Pipe
Thermistor
pipes. Cut the pipe at the compressor side of the brazing Thermistor
part. Remove the cut pipe of the compressor.
Cut
10. Removing by using burner after cuting
� NOTES: Cut
– Completely clean the oil if the oil has spread to the other Cut
parts such as the compressor panel, the wiring bottom
base, and others.
– Make sure that the pipes are cut before working with a
burner.
– Make sure that you do not burn the electrical component
when you are brazing.
� RAS-3FSVNE
Foot Position 1 2 3
11. Remove the nut that fix the compressor and remove the
compressor. There is no nut at the rear side. When you Nut -- 0 --
are removing the compressor, pay special attention
not to touch or deform the surrounding pipes. 0 = Exits
� NOTES:
– Pay special attention to the edges of the plates and
others when you are working.
– If you are removing the compressor with the oil pipe,
cover the end of the pipe with the tape in order to avoid a
spill.
– Do not expose the refrigerant cycle to the environment Nut
for a long period in order to avoid mixing the water with
foreign particles. Mount the new compressor quickly.
– If you cannot measure the oil level, charge an additional
300 (cm3).
– If the oil is foul, replace the old oil with the new oil.
Page 10-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/7

� RAS-4/5FSVNE
Foot Position 1 2 3 4
12. Remove the two nuts that fix the compressor and
remove the compressor. There is no nut at the rear side. Nut 0 0 -- --
When you are removing the compressor, pay special
attention not to touch or deform the surrounding pipes. 0 = Exits
� NOTES:
– Pay special attention to the edges of the plates and
– If you are removing the compressor with the oil pipe,
cover the end of the pipe with the tape in order to avoid a
spill.
– Do not expose the refrigerant cycle to the environment
foreign particles. Mount the new compressor quickly. Nut
– If you cannot measure the oil level, charge an additional

300 (cm3).
– If the oil is foul, replace the old oil with the new oil.
13. Attach the new compressor. Perform the brazing

according to the following order:
1. Discharge pipe.
2. Suction pipe.
3. Liquid injection pipe.
� NOTES: Wet cloth

– Attach the compressor with the cap. Remove the cap just
before you start the brazing work.
– Connect the change hose for the pressure release to the
check joint of the low-pressure side.
– When you are brazing the suction pipe, make sure that
the connecting part is firmly inserted and that the
compressor side is cooled in order to avoid the brazing
material from entering the compressor.
– To avoid overheating the compressor when you are
brazing, cool it down using a wet cloth.
– The piping of compressor shall be connected by brazing.
When heating with a burnner, oil adhered inside of pipes
can flame up. Make sure that flammable material is not
around before the operation.
10
Page 10-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/8 SERVICING

Upper Cover
� REMOVING HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
Screw
(M5, Qty.9)
2. Remove the nine (9) M5 screws fixing the rear cover and
the five (5) M5 screws fixing the pipe rear cover. Slide the Electrical Box
rear cover and pipe cover downward.
Valve Stay
Rear Cover
Front Pipe Cover
Liquid Tank Rear Pipe Cover
3. Collect the refrigerant from the check joint according to the

� RAS-3FSVNE
item 9.1.5 “Removing Compressor”.
Electrical Box
4. Disconnect the fasten terminals.
Upper Cover
5. Remove the high pressure switch from the brazing part by
a burner. Liquid Discharge Pipe
Tank
High
Pressure
Switch
Brazing Part
High Pressure Switch
� RAS-4~5FSVNE
Upper Cover
Electrical Box
Discharge Pipe
Pressure Switch
for control
Liquid
Tank
Brazing Part
High Pressure
Switch
Page 10-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/9

� REMOVING COIL FOR REVERSING VALVE
� RAS-3FSVNE
� DANGER:
Do not touch the electrical parts when LED201 (Red) on
the ISPM is lit to prevent from an electrical shock. Reversing Valve
1. Remove the service cover according to the item 9.1.1 Upper Cover
2. Remove three (3) screws fixing the power plate and turn the
one toward the front side.
PCN6
� NOTES: Electrical Box

– Check to ensure that LED201 (Red) is OFF when turning
the power plate. Remove Screws
– Refer to section 8.3.4.
9.1.11for
forLED
LED201
201location
location
3. Disconnect the PCN6 on the PCB1 of the electrical box.
Reversing Valve Coil
4. Remove the coil for the reversing valve after removing the
fixing screw (1 piece). Fixing Screw for Compressor
� RAS-4~5FSVNE
Reversing Valve
Electrical Box
Upper Cover
P-Attaching
Plate
PCN6
Fixing Screw for

Reversing
Valve Coil
Compressor
10
Page 10-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/10 SERVICING

� REMOVING COIL FOR EXPANSION VALVE
� RAS-3FSVNE
� DANGER: Pull out the

the ISPM is lit to prevent from an electrical shock. expansion valve coil
upwards
1. Remove the service cover according to the item 9.1.1 Expansion
“Removing Service Cover”. valve coil
2. Remove the “Rear Cover”.

3. Remove the three (3) screws fixing the electrical box and
turn the power plate toward the front side as shown in the
item 2.1.7 “Removing Coil for Reverse Valve”.
� NOTES:
– Check to ensure that LED201 (Red) is OFF when
turning the power plate.
– Check to ensure that coil No. and location is correctly Liquid tank
located.
– Check to ensure that the clip of the coil is securely
attached to the pipe.
4. Disconnect the CN5A connector on the PCB1 of the
electrical box. (For 4/5FSVNE CN5B)
5. Pull out the coil for expansion valve on the liquid tank
upwards.
� RAS-4~5FSVNE
Pull out the expansion

valve coil upwards
EV0: Expansion valve
coil (Marking “1”)
EV1: Expansion valve
Solenoid Valve coil (Marking “2”)
coil (20B) Clip
Liquid tank
Page 10-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/11

� REMOVING PCB1
� DANGER:
Do not touch the electrical components.
When handling the PCB1, take care of not to use
excessive force as this will cause damage. Holder Holder
2. Disconnect all the connectors connected to the PCB1. PCB1 for
control
3. Pull out the PCB1 from the power plate by unhooking the
extrusion parts. Power
plate
Partition
plate
Transformer Terminal board
Holder
PCB1 for
control
� REMOVING SOLEID VALVE COIL
� RAS-3FSVNE
� DANGER:
Do not touch the electrical parts when LED201 (Red) a
the ISPM is lit to prevent from an electrical shock.
10
Solenoid Screw
1. Remove the service cover according to the item 9.1.1 valve
Reversing
2. Remover the “Rear Cover”.
valve
3. Remove three (3) screws fixing the power plate and turn
one toward the front side.
� NOTE:
Page 10-11
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/12 SERVICING

� RAS-4~5FSVNE
4. Disconnect the CN5A, 5B (only 4/5FSVNE) connector on
the PCB1 of the electrical box.
5. Remove the fixing screw for the solenoid valve coil and
pull out upwards.
Reversing valve
Screw
Solenoid
valve
� REMOVING THE 4-WAY VALVE
� RAS-3FSVNE
� DANGER:
Connection point (the outdoor
1. Remove the service cover according to the item 9.1.1 4-way heat exchanger)
“Removing Service Cover”. valve
Connection point High pressure sensor
2. Remover the “Upper Cover”.
(discharge pipe)
Connection point
4. Collet refrigerant from check joint.
5. Remove the 4-way valve coil according to the item 9.1.9.
“Removing solenoid valve coil”. Suction pipe
Lower pressure
6. Remove three (3) screws fixing the power plate and turn sensor
one toward the frontside. V-stay fixing screw
Connection point
7. Disconnect the PCNE on the PCB1 of the electrical box. (total liquid tank)
High pressure
sensor
Page 10-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/13

� RAS-4~5FSVNE
8. Remove the high pressure sensor.
9. Disconnect the connector for high pressure sensor. Connection point (the outdoor
heat exchanger)
11. Remove 4-way valve assy.
12. Disconnect the pipes of the 4 way valve.
Make sure that there is not positive pressure inside the
High pressure sensor
pipes. Cut the pipe at the compressor side of the brazzing
part. Remove the pipe of the compressor.
4-way valve
� NOTES: Connection point
– Make sure that the pipes are cut before working with Connection point
a burner. (discharge pipe)
– Make sure that did not burn the electrical component Suction pipe
Connection point Connection point
– Cover the reversing valve with a wet cloth.
(total liquid tank)
Connection point
� REMOVING THERMISTOR FOR SUCTION PIPE
� DANGER: Thermistor for

suction pipe
2. Remover the cord lamp and thermistor.
3. Disconnect THM10 connector from PCB1.
� NOTE:
10
Page 10-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/14 SERVICING

� REMOVING EXPANSION VALVE COIL
� RAS-3FSVNE
� DANGER:
the ISPM is lit to prevent from and electrical shock. Expansion valve
coil (EV0)
EV0 (connection point)
5. Cut the pipes at the expansion valve coil of connect point.
Remove the cut pipe of the liquid tank.
6. Removing by using burned affter cuting.
� NOTES:
– Make sure that the pipes are cut before working with
a burner.
– Make sure that did not burn the electrical component
� RAS-4~5FSVNE
8. Remove the high pressure sensor.
9. Disconnect the connector for high pressure sensor.
11. Remove 4-way valve assy. 20B (Connection point)
Expansion valve coil
12. Disconnect the pipes of the 4 way valve. Solenoid valve (EV0)
Make sure that there is not positive pressure inside the coil (20B)
EV0 (Connection point)
pipes. Cut the pipe at the compressor side of the brazzing Expansion
part. Remove the pipe of the compressor. valve coil (EVJ)
EVJ (Connection point)
� NOTES: 20B (Connection point)
– Make sure that the pipes are cut before working with
a burner.
– Make sure that did not burn the electrical component
Page 10-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/15

� REMOVING PRESSURE SENSOR
� RAS-3FSVNE
� DANGER:
the ISPM is lit to prevent from and electrical coil parts. High pressure sensor

High pressure union
Low pressure sensor
Low pressure union
Compressor High pressure switch
� RAS-4~5FSVNE
Low pressure sensor

High pressure sensor
Low pressure union
High pressure union
High pressure switch
Compressor
Tension of wire
after attaching shall be
within 3 winds
Tightening Position ( )
Spanner size: 14 N � m
Doble Spanner
Tightening Position (
Spanner size: 13 N � m
)
10
Page 10-15
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/16 SERVICING

� REMOVING ISPM
� DANGER:
2. Remove the three (3) screws fixing the electrical box and
turn the power plate toward the front side. ISPM
LED 201
� NOTES: (Red)
– Identify terminal Nos. with the mark band Nos. when
reassembling. If incorrectly connected, malfunction or
damage to the electrical parts will occur.
– When changing the PCB, ensure to set all the dip Capacitor
switches to the same configuration as the original.
3. Disconnect all wires connecting to the ISPM.
– Disconnect CN201, CN202, PCN201, PCN202 (Wire for Magnetic
Fan Motor) Disconnect CN203, CN204, CN206, contactor
Power plate
– Disconnect TB, N, P, P1 and R, S, U, V, W on the
terminal board and the faston terminal TB3 of ISPM.
4. Remove the four (4) screws fixing the ISPM. Fan Motor
lead wires
� NOTES:
– Do not hold the PCB on the ISPM when removing the ISPM
ISPM. When handling the PCB, take care of not to use
excessive force as this will cause damage.
– Do not remove the insulation part from the screw after
removing the screws.
Power
– Identify terminal number with the mark band number wires for Fan Motor
when reassembling. If incorrectly connected, compressor lead wires
malfunction or damage to the electrical parts will
occur.
– Pay attention not to clamp the wires when close the
power plate.
Page 10-16
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/17

� REMOVING ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
� RAS-3FSVNE
� DANGER:
ISPM
“Removing Service Cover”. LED201
(Red)
2. Remove three (3) screws fixing the electrical box and turn
the power plate toward the front side.
� NOTE:
– Capacitor has polarity (+ and -), check to ensure each Q
terminal No
Capacitor
3 Removing Other Electrical Components
Magnetic contactor
– Remove the wire connecting to the capacitor.
– Disconnect the wire connecting to the magnetic Reactor
contactor.
Remove the magnetic contactor by removing two (2) Noise filter
screws.
– Remove the reactor by removing four (4) screws. (In
case of 4/5 HP the screws are eight.) � RAS-4~5FSVNE
– Disconnect the wire connecting to the noise filter.
– Remove the noise filter by holding the expanded part of
the holders (6 pcs.) with long-nose pliers. ISPM
� NOTE: LED201
(Red)
When reassembling, identify terminal number with the
mark band number.
Capacitor
Magnetic
contactor
Reactor
10
Noise filter
Long-nose Plier
Noise filter
Details of Q Holder
Page 10-17
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/18 SERVICING

10.2
9.1.2. & FSNE/FXNE
10.3 OUTDOOR UNIT RAS-FSN(E)/FXN(E)
� REMOVING THE AIR INLET GRILLE

1. Remove the two/the four screws at the bottom of the air inlet
grille (rear side of the unit).
Upper cover
2. Remove the air inlet grille (rear side) by pulling
and unhooking the four hooks at both sides.
3. Remove the six screws for the air inlet grille
(side of the unit).
4. Remove the two screws for the upper panel Insert
(indicated by (�).
Air Intake
� NOTE:
Grille
Insert
(RearSide) Air Intake
Grille (Side)
The length of the screws for the upper panel (�) is
Screw Insert
different from the other screws (M4 x l 20mm).
5. Remove the air inlet grille (side of the unit) by pulling and RAS-5~16FSN(E)
unhooking. RAS - 5 ~ 16 FSN
RAS-8~12FXN(E)
RAS-8/10FXN(E)
Upper cover
Insert
Air Intake
Grille
(RearSide)
Screw
Insert
Insert Air Intake
Grille (Side)
Insert
RAS-18~32FSN
RAS - 20 ~ 30 FSN
RAS-16~32FXN
RAS-16~30FXN
Page 10-18
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/19

� REMOVING THE FRONT SERVICE PANEL
1. Remove the screws. Slightly lift the panels upwards
and remove the panels.
RAS-5FSN ____________
RAS-5FSN............... 6 screws
6 screws.
RAS-8~12FSNE/FXNE __8
RAS-8, 10FSN(E).... 8 screws. screws Side Cover
RAS-14/16FSN ________ 10 screws
RAS 8~20FXN(E) .... 8 screws.
RAS-18~22FSN ________ 18 screws Service Panel
RAS-16 FSN............
RAS-16~22FXN ________ 10 screws.
18 screws
RAS-24~32FSN/FXN 8___20
RAS-20, 24FSN....... screws.
screws RAS - 8 ~ 10 Square Hole
RAS-30FSN............. 10 screws. only (Two in both sides)
RAS-24/30FXN........ 10 screws.
� NOTES: Hook
(Two in both sides)
1) When you are removing screws for the front service
access panel, remove the screw at the lower part of RAS-5~12FSN(E)
RAS-5~10FSN(E)
the panel first. RAS-8~12FXN(E)
RAS-8~20FXN(E)
2) When you are attaching the front service access panel,
insert the hook in the bottom end of the square hole at
the side panel, as shown in the figure below. (Do not
insert inside the bottom of the base).
Side Cover
The Details of Hook Area
Hook Service Panel
Side cover
Do not insert
inside of Square Hole
bottom base
Insert the hook firmly Square Hole

Service Panel in the bottom end Hook (Two in both sides)
of square hole
(Two in both sides)
Bottom Base RAS-14/16FSN(E)FXN(E)

RAS - 16 FSN
Side Cover
Service Panel Square Hole

(Two in both sides)
Hook
(Two in both sides)
RAS-18~22FSN
RAS - 20 FSN
10
RAS-16~22FXN
Side Cover
Service Panel
Square Hole
(Two in both sides)
Hook
(Two in both sides)
RAS-24~32FSN/FXN
RAS - 24 ~ 30 FSN
RAS-30FXN
Page 10-19
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/20 SERVICING

� REMOVING THE FAN GUARD NETS
Screw
1. Remove the four/the eight screws and remove the fan
guard net.
FAN Guard Net
RAS-5~16FSN(E) ______4 screws
RAS-5, 8, 10, 16 FSN/FXN….4 screws.
RAS-8/12FXN(E) _______4 screws Upper cover
RAS-20, 24, 30 FSN/FXN; 16 FXN…. 8 screws.
RAS-18~32FSN ________ 8 screws
RAS-16~32FXN ________ 8 screws
� NOTE:
Do not apply load on the upper panel (plastic part).
Otherwise, you may deform or break the upper panel.
RAS-5~16FSN(E)
RAS-5~16FSN(E)
RAS-8~12FXNE
RAS8/10FXN(E)
Screw
FAN Guard Net

Upper cover
Upper cover
RAS-18~32FSN
RAS - 20 ~ 30 FSN/FXN
RAS-16~32FXN
16 FXN
Page 10-20
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/21

� REMOVING THE OUTDOOR FAN
1. Remove the fan guard nets according to the section 9.1.3, Nut
"Removing the Fan Guard Nets".
Flat Washer
� NOTE: Propeller Fan

Do not apply load on the upper panel (plastic part).
Otherwise, you may deform or break the upper panel. Motor Shaft
Upper cover
2. Remove the fans by removing the cap nuts and flat washers
that fix the propeller fans onto the motor shafts. If it is
difficult to remove the fan, use a puller.
3.
3. Remove
Remove the the front
front service
service access
access panel
panel and
and the
the electrical
electrical box
panel according
box panel to section
according to the “Removing
informationthe front service
in section 9.1.2. panel”. Electrical Box Cover
Disconnect the connectors for the motors in the electrical box.

Remove
box. Remove the motors by removing
the motors the four
by removing the fixing bolts bolts
four fixing for the
motors.
for the motors.
� NOTE: Screws
1. There are washers (two locations on the heat exchanger

side) between the motor and the motor clamp. Pay
special attention when you are ready for removing the
motor.
2. Keep the cord outlet of the motor pointing downward
when you are mounting the motor.
3. Fix firmly the washers (two pieces) between the motor
and the motor clamp on the heat exchanger side
(washer: SUS, outer diameter Ø18 x inner diameter Ø8.5
x thickness t1.6). Electrical Box Electrical Box
4. Mounting the propeller fan. Put and push the propeller
fan by identifying the mark with the cut part of the DC AC DC
Motor Motor Motor
motor shaft. Firmly fix the propeller fan twice with a
tightening torque of 30N·m (300 kg·cm) after the head
of the fan shaft comes up.
5. Connect the motor wires to the power connectors at the RAS-5~16FSN(E)
RAS-5~16FSN(E) RAS-18~32FSN
RAS20~30FSN/FXN
upper part of the electrical box. RAS-8~12FXN(E)
RAS-16FXN
AC Motor (M8)
DC Motor (M5) Motor Shaft
Motor
Upper Cover
Motor Clamp
Cable
Connector
10
Washer
(Not used for
RAS - 5 FSN)
Page 10-21
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/22 SERVICING

� POSITION FOR ATTACHING THE AC MOTOR
When you are attaching the AC motor (*), attach the motor by
positioning the motor toward front side. Otherwise, the gap
between the propeller fan and the bell mouth will not be
enough. If that is the case, the propeller fan and the bell mouth
may touch each other while they are running.
With Washer Motor Clamp
1. To attach the outdoor fan, perform in reverse order the
procedure for removing the outdoor fan.
2. Make sure that the gap between the propeller fan and the
Rear Side Front Side
upper panel is even. Make sure that there is no contact (Heat Exchanger Side) (Service Cover)
noise between the propeller fan and the upper panel
when the propeller fan is operating.
Attach the motor by positioning
Motor
� NOTE: toward front side
(Gap between bolt and fixing
hole for the motor: 2mm approx.)
If the washers are not attached, the washers are
attached in incorrect positions, or the AC Motor is RAS-8~32FSN(E)/FXN(E)
RAS - 8 ~ 30 FSN(E)/FXN(E)
positioned incorrectly, a contact or an abnormal noise
may occur.
(*) The AC motor is available for the following units only:
RAS-8~32FSN(E) / FXN(E)
RAS-8FSN(E)(FXN(E), RAS-10 FSN(E)(FXN(E),
RAS-16FSN/FXN, RAS-20FSN/FXN, RAS-24FSN/FXN
and RAS-30FSN/FXN.
� REMOVING THE COMPRESSOR

Cap
Before starting the work, collect the refrigerant into a cylinder
from the cycle or refer to the "Pump-Down Procedure".
1. Remove the front service access panel according to the Lace
section 9.1.2, "Removing the Front Service Panel".
2. Release the lace for the top cap of the compressor and
remove the top cap. Water-Proof
Cover
3. Remove the Td thermistor on the top of the compressor.
� NOTE:
You will use again the thermostat fixer, the holder and
the thermostat holder when you are ready for
reassembling.
Keep the fixers and the holders in a box so that these
parts are stored correctly.
Thermistor Holder
Thermistor Fixer
TD Thermistor
Page 10-22
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/23

4. Release the lace for the waterproof panel. Open the Direction to remove the cover
waterproof panel from the front side.
� NOTE: Water-Proof Cover
Remove the waterproof panel in the arrow mark direction

as shown. Pay attention to the cut part (*) of the
waterproof panel in order to avoid any damage.
� NOTE:
Do not deform any piping when you are removing the
panel. If you deform the piping, the welded portion may
be broken. Pay attention to the sharp edges of the side
panel in order to avoid any injury. Cut Part
5. Remove the terminal panel for the compressor and
disconnect the wiring to the compressor terminals. Make Oil Heater
sure that the terminal Nos. and the mark band are correct. If
os
the terminal N . and the mark band are not identified, this
will cause incorrect wiring when you are reassembling.
� NOTES:
1. Make sure that the fasten terminals for the compressors
Faston Terminal
are normal. When a pulling force of 20N or more is (or Ring Terminal)
required, it is normal. Otherwise, replace the fasten
terminals with new terminals.
2. Make sure that the wires are correctly inserted.
3. It is recommended that the fasten terminals
be clamped to increase the contacting force after
replacing the compressor.
Terminal Box
Wires
Mark Band
6. Remove the oil heater by releasing the spring.

Remove the Spring
by expanding as shown
Spring
Oil Heater
10
Page 10-23
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/24 SERVICING

7. Disconnect the discharge and suction pipes of Cut
the compressor.
Make sure that there is no positive pressure inside the
pipes. Cut the pipe at the compressor side of the
brazing part. Remove the cut pipe of the compressor. Cut
Remove it by using
burner after cutting
� NOTES:
1. Completely clean the oil if the oil has spread to
the other parts such as the compressor panel, the
wiring bottom base, and others.
2. Make sure that the pipes are cut before working with
a burner. Oil Evacuating Pipe
8. Remove the oil-evacuating pipe of the compressor (only the
constant speed compressor). Pinch and cut the pipe at
the compressor side of the brazing part, so that the
refrigerant oil does not spill from the oil-evacuating pipe.
Make sure that the oil of the brazing part is removed before
removing the oil-evacuating pipe from the pipe side.
Oil Pan
� NOTE: Remove it by using

Work according to this procedure. If a burner is applied burner after cutting
directly without cutting, it will cause a fire.

Do not throw out the oil that is collected by the oil pan and
others. (The oil will be measured).
Page 10-24
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/25

9. Remove the three nuts that fix the compressor and Plane View
remove the compressor. There is no nut at the rear side.

Foot of
When you are removing the compressor, pay special Compressor
Without nut
attention not to touch or deform the surrounding pipes.
Nut Compressor
(3 locations)
� NOTES: Suction Pipe

1. Pay special attention to the edges of the plates and
Dischange Pipe
2. If you are removing the compressor with the oil pipe,
cover the end of the pipe with the tape in order to avoid Oil dischange Pipe
a spill. Front Side
3. Do not expose the refrigerant cycle to the environment
foreign particles. Mount the new compressor quickly.
4. If you cannot measure the oil level, charge an additional
300(cm3).
5. If the oil is foul, replace the old oil with the new oil.
Refrigerant Oil
Oil Pan
10. Take out the rest of the refrigerant oil from the discharge
piping and measure the rest of the refrigerant oil. (This work
10.Take out the when
is necessary rest ofyou
the are
refrigerant oil the
replacing from the discharge
constant speed
piping and measure the rest of the refrigerant oil.
compressor):
� The oil quantity from the old compressor is larger that
the oil quantity of the new compressor� An additional
change is necessary.
� The oil quantity of the refrigerant which remains in
the compressor is less than the oil level of the new
compressor � An additional change is unnecessary.
� Additional oil change: Evacuated charge of the old
compressor – initial change of the new compressor (cm3)
+ 200(cm3) (Inside Compressor Chamber).
3
Compressor Initial charge (cm )
E405AHD 1200
500
E505DH
E605DH 500
E655DH
10
Page 10-25
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/26 SERVICING

11. Attach the new compressor. Perform the brazing according
to the following order:
1) Oil Evacuating Pipe (in the case of the constant
speed compressor).
2) Discharge Pipe.
3) Suction Pipe.
Pay special attention to the oil pipe: do not to deform the oil
pipe when you are attaching the nuts on the front side.
� NOTES:
� Attach the compressor with the cap. Remove the cap just Brazing
before you start the brazing work.
� Connect the change hose for the pressure release to the
check joint of the low-pressure side.
� When you are brazing the suction pipe, make sure that Cover with wet cloth
Brazing
the connecting part is firmly inserted and that the
compressor side is cooled in order to avoid the brazing
material from entering the compressor.
12. Change the refrigerant oil that was calculated in procedure
10 from the check joint of the low-pressure side. Change the
Brazing
refrigerant oil from the change hose after the light vacuum.
� NOTES:
� Use a clean change hose.
� Perform this work in a short time (within 20 minutes
approximately) and use a container with a small opening
so that the refrigerant oil does not absorb the moisture in
the atmosphere.
13. In order to perform the vacuum pumping and changing the
refrigerant. Set all the conditions to their original state. If the
compressor is in replacing mode, follow the indications in
section 11.11.2, "Pump-down method for replacing the
compressor".
Page 10-26
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/27

� REMOVING THE HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH, RAS - 5 FSN
THE HIGH-PRESSURE SENSOR AND
High Pressure
THE LOW-PRESSURE SENSOR Switch
Check Joint for
High Pressure Sensor
1. Remove the front service access panel according to the High Pressure
Check Joint
section 9.1.2, "Removing the Front Service Panel". Check Joint for
Low Pressure Sensor
Low Pressure
Check Joint
Compressor
RAS-8~12FSN(E)
RAS - 8 ~ 10 FSN(E) RAS-14~16FSN
RAS - 16 FSN
High Pressure
Switch Check Joint for
Check Joint for Compressor High Pressure High Pressure Sensor
High Pressure Sensor Check Joint for
Switch
Check Joint for Low Pressure Sensor
Low Pressure Sensor
Low Pressure
Check Joint
High Pressure Low Pressure
Check Joint Check Joint
High Pressure
Check Joint
Compressor High Pressure Switch

1 Compressor on the left side
totaly 3 per unit
RAS-18~22FSN
RAS - 20 FSN RAS-24~32FSN
RAS - 24 ~ 30 FSN
High Pressure
Switch Compressor High Pressure
Compressor Switch
Check Joint for
High Pressure Sensor
Check Joint for
Low Pressure Sensor
Check Joint for
Low Pressure Sensor
Check Joint for High Pressure
High Pressure Sensor Check Joint
Low Pressure
High Pressure Check Joint
Check Joint
High Pressure Switch Low Pressure High Pressure Switch
10
Check Joint
2 Compressors on the left side 3 Compressors on the left side totaly 5 per unit (24)
totaly 4 on
4 Compressors perthe
unitleft side, totaly 5 per unit (26) 4 Compressors on the left side totaly 6 per unit (30)
4 Compressors on the left side, totaly 6 per unit (28~32)
Page 10-27
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/28 SERVICING

RAS-8~12FXN(E)
RAS – 8, 10 FXN(E) RAS-16~22FXN
RAS – 16 - 20 FXN(E)
Check Joint for High Pressure Switch

High Pressure High Pressure Sensor Check Joint for Low
High Pressure
Switch Pressure Sensor
High Pressure
Switch Compressor
Check Joint
Check Joint for Low

Pressure Sensor
Low Pressure
Check Joint
Low Pressure
Check Joint
Check Joint for

Compressor High Pressure Sensor
Compressor
High Pressure
Check Joint
RAS-24~32FXN(E)
RAS – 24 - 30 FXN(E)
High Pressure Check Joint for Low
Switch Pressure Sensor
Compressor Check Joint for
High Pressure High Pressure Sensor
Switch
Compressor
High Pressure
Check Joint
Low Pressure
Check Joint
44 Compressors on the
compressors on the left
left side
side,totatly
totaly 55 per
per unit
unit (24)
(26)
5 Compressors on the left side, totaly 6 per unit (28~32)
5 compressors on the left side totaly 6 per unit (30)
Page 10-28
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/29

� REMOVING THE HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH
(DETAILED PROCEDURE) High Pressure Switch
1. Collect the refrigerant. Faston Terminal

Brazing Pant
2. Disconnect the fasten terminals.
3. Remove the high-pressure switch from the brazing part
of the discharge pipe by means of a burner.
� NOTE:
Do not expose the refrigerant cycle to the environment
foreign particles in the refrigerant cycle. If you expose
the refrigerant cycle for a long period, seal the hole.
RAS - 5 FSN
Faston Terminal
Brazing Pant
RAS - 8~30FSN(E)
RAS - 8~30FXN(E)
10
Page 10-29
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/30 SERVICING

� REMOVING THE HIGH-PRESSURE SENSOR Tension of wire
after attaching shall be
AND THE LOW-PRESSURE SENSOR within 3 winds
(DETAILED PROCEDURE) Tightening position ( )

spanner size: 14
1. Remove the connector for the pressure sensor wiring at the
various PCB.
Tightening position ( ) Doble Spanner
� NOTE: Spanner size: 17
Make sure that you remove the connector first.

Otherwise, you will damage the wire. <Part fixed by sealing tape>
A Do not touch this part
2. Remove the refrigerant pipe of the high-pressure sensor or with spanner
Model Tightening
Tightening torque
the low-pressure sensor by using two spanners. Model
torque
RAS-5~32FSN(E) 14N·m
RAS-5~30FSN(E)/FXN(E) 14 N · m
RAS-8~32FXN(E)
RAS-5FSN
RAS - 5 FSN RAS-8~12FSN(E)
RAS-8/10 FSN(E)
RAS-8~12FXN(E)
RAS - 8 / 10 FXN(E)
RAS-14~16FSN
RAS - 16 FSN
RAS-16~22FXN
RAS - 16 / 20 FXN
RAS-18~22FSN
RAS - 20 FSN
RAS-24~32FSN
RAS - 24 / 30 FSN
RAS-24~32FXN
RAS - 24 / 30 FXN
Page 10-30
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/31

� REMOVING THE 4-WAY VALVE COIL
1. Remove the front service access panel according to the
2. Remove the 4-way valve coil by means of a Phillips
screwdriver first. Use a spanner or an adjustable wrench.
RAS-8~12FXN(E)
RAS - 8 / 10 FXN(E)
RAS-5FSN
RAS8/10FSN(E)
RAS-16~20FXN
RAS - 16 / 20 FXN
RAS-14~16FSN
RAS - 16 FSN
RAS-16~22FXN
RAS-18~22FSN
RAS - 20 FSN RAS-24~32FXN
RAS - 24 / 30 FXN
Location for Four - Way Valve
Four - Way Valve Coil
RAS-24~32FSN
RAS - 24 / 30 FSN
Removing the coil
10
Page 10-31
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/32 SERVICING

� REMOVING THE SOLENOID VALVE COIL
1. Remove the front service access panel according to the Screw
Solenoid
2. Remove the fixing screw (1 piece) for the solenoid valve
coil. If it is impossible to use the Phillips screwdriver, use a
spanner or an adjustable wrench.
3. Replace the solenoid valve coil.
RAS-5FSN
RAS - 8/10FSN(E)
RAS-8~12FXN(E)
RAS - 8 ~ 10 FXN(E)
RAS-14~16FSN
RAS - 16 FSN
RAS-16~22FXN
RAS - 16 ~ 20 FXN
RAS-18~22FSN
RAS - 20 FSN
Only 30 FSN
RAS-24~32FXN
RAS - 24 ~ 30 FXN
RAS-24~32FSN
RAS - 24 ~ 30 FSN
Page 10-32
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/33

� REMOVING THE EXPANSION VALVE COIL
Coil Coil
1. Before this work, remove the service access panel
according to the section 9.1.2, "Removing the Front Service Turn the coil and
Panel". remove the coil
Coil Bracket bracket from the slot
2. Turn the coil as shown in the diagram and remove the coil
bracket from the slot. Then, pull the coil upwards.
� NOTE: Coil
Pay special attention to avoid any injury when you are
removing the coil. Expansion Valve
Expansion Valve
3. When you are attaching the coil, fix the coil to the expansion
valve slot by turning the coil. If you apply an excessive
force, you could deform the coil bracket. There are several
slots on the expansion valve circumference. Any slot is Correct Incorrect
acceptable. Correct position Deformed the coil Bracket
of coil bracket by excessive force
� NOTE:
Coil
The force that you apply to attach the coil should be less Coil
than 60N. Verify the position of the coil.
Coil
Expansion Valve
Expansion Valve
� FSN(E) MVB: MVB :

RAS-10/12FSN(E)
10 FSN(E) only only
RAS-8FSN: 1 coil1 coil RAS-14/16FSN:

RAS-5FSN: 1 coil
RAS - 5 FSN: 1 coil RAS - 8 FSN: RAS - 16 FSN:3 3coils
coils
RAS-10/12FSN:
RAS - 10 FSN:2 2coils
coils
� FXN(E)
RAS-18~22FSN: 3 coils
RAS - 20 FSN: 3 coils
RAS-24~32FSN:
RAS - 24 / 30 5FSN:
coils 5 coils
10
RAS-10/12FXN(E)
10 FXN(E) only only
RAS-8FXN(E): 2 coil2 coil

RAS - 8 FXN(E):
RAS-10/12FXN(E): 3 coils RAS-16~22FXN: 4 coils RAS-24~32FXN: 5 coils
RAS - 10 FXN(E): 3 coils RAS - 16/20 FXN: 4 coils RAS - 24 / 30 FXN: 5 coils
Page 10-33
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/34 SERVICING

� REMOVING THE THERMISTOR FOR THE LIQUID Thermistor
PIPE Thermistor
Holder
� NOTE:
When you are removing the thermistor for the liquid pipe,
make sure that you do not remove the valve when you
are pulling the cable. Seal
completely
1. Remove the front service access panel according to the by cork tape
2. Remove the two screws that fix the electrical box panel and
remove the electrical box panel.
3. Pull out the fixing plate for the thermistor from the pipe after
removing the CORK TAPE. Then, remove the thermistor for
the liquid pipe.
RAS-5FSN
RAS - 5 FSN
RAS-14~16FSN
RAS-16 FSN
RAS-8~12FSN(E)
RAS - 8 ~ 10 FSN(E)
RAS-18~22FSN
RAS-20 FSN
RAS-8~12FXN(E)
RAS - 8 ~ 10 FXN(E)
RAS-24~32FSN
RAS-24,30 FSN
RAS-16~22FXN
RAS - 16 ~ 20 FXN
RAS - 5FSN RAS - 20FSN

RAS - 8FSN
RAS-5FSN RAS - 24FSN
RAS-18FSN
RAS-8FSN
RAS - 10FSN RAS - 30FSN
RAS-20FSN
RAS-10FSN
RAS - 16FSN RAS-22FSN
RAS-12FSN RAS-24FSN
RAS-14FSN RAS-26FSN
RAS-16FSN RAS-28FSN
RAS-30FSN
RAS-32FSN
RAS-24~32FXN
RAS - 24 ~ 30 FXN
Page 10-34
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/35

� REMOVING THE OUTDOOR THERMISTOR
1. Remove the front service access panel according to the RAS - 10 FSN
section 9.1.2, "Removing the Front Service Panel"
2. Remove the two screws for the electrical box panel and Screw (Upper)
<M4 x 20mm>
remove the electrical box panel.
3. Remove the screws that are indicated in the diagram and Upper Cover
remove the upper panel. Screw (Rear Side)
<M4 x 12mm>
4. Remove the air inlet grille according to the section 9.1.1,
"Removing the Air Inlet Grille".
5. Remove the fixing clamp of the wiring.
6. To attach the thermistor, perform in reverse order the Wiring Route
procedure for removing the thermistor.
� NOTES:
1) The length of screws for the upper panel is different from
the other screws (M4 x L20mm).
2) Follow the procedure for removing the upper panel in
order to avoid damaging the part. The details for attaching Thermistor
Outdoor Thermistor
TH Holder
Air Intake
Grille
(Lateral)
<Removing Upper Cover>
Remove screws Lift up front part • Lift the whole cover

10 cm aprox. by pulling toward
front side
F F F
R R R R R R
O E O E O E
N A N A N A
T R T R T R
10
Page 10-35
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/36 SERVICING
� NOTES: Check to ensure that

the bottom edge of
Refer to the diagram and pay special attention to the bellmonth is on the
front cover upper 2 Upper Cover
mounting bell mouth and the front upper panel 2 as shown in the figure
correctly. Otherwise, an abnormal vibration on the upper
cover may occur during the operation of the outdoor fan.
Bellmonth
Front Cover Upper 2
<Section A >
Bellmonth
Front Cover
Upper 2
Page 10-36
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/37

� REMOVING THE 4-WAY VALVE
Terminal Board Power Source
Before starting the work, collect the refrigerant into a cylinder for control circuit Terminal Board
from the cycle and turn off all the main switches.
1. Remove the front service access panel according to the
Stop Valve
2. Remove the electrical box panel according to the section
"Removing the Electrical Components".
3. Remove all the field wiring at the terminal board for the
control between the indoor units and the outdoor units, and
the power source terminal board.
4. Disconnect the wiring connections and make sure that the
two stop valves are open.
5. Remove the discharge pipe, the suction pipe and the oil
heater for the compressor wiring according to the section
"Removing the Compressor". Remove the 4-way valve coil.
6. Disconnect the brazing that is indicated by (�) in the
diagram. Cover the reversing valve with a wet cloth in order
to protect the reversing valve from excessively high
temperatures from a burner.
� NOTE:
Do not break the brazing of the upper end of the 4-way
valve. Otherwise, leakage may occur when you mount it
again.
RAS-5FSN
RAS - 5FSN RAS-8~12FSN(E)
RAS - 8/10FSN(E)
RAS-24~32FSN
RAS - 24/30 FSN
RAS-14~16FSN
RAS - 16FSN RAS-18~22FSN
RAS - 20FSN
10
RAS-8~12FXN(E) RAS-16~22FXN
RAS - 16 ~ 20 FXN RAS-24~32FXN
RAS - 8 ~ 10 FXN(E) RAS - 24 ~ 30 FXN
Page 10-37
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/38 SERVICING

Disconnect the following parts in order to remove the 4-way
valve:
a) Brazing portion between the 4-way valve and the
discharge pipe.
b) Brazing portion of the right pipes and the left pipes or the
three pipes from the 4-way valve.
c) Brazing portion of the center pipe of the three pipes from
the 4-way valve.
� NOTES:
Cover the reversing valve with a wet cloth in order to
protect the reversing valve from excessively high
temperatures from a burner.
Brazing
Brazing
Brazing
Four-Way Valve Four-Way Valve
Four-Way Valve
RAS-5FSN RAS-8~12FSN(E)
RAS - 8 / 10 FSN
RAS - 5 FSN RAS-8~12FXN(E)
RAS - 8 ~ 10 FXN(E)
Four-Way Valve Four-Way Valve Four-Way Valve
RAS-14~16FSN
RAS - 16 FSN RAS-18~22FSN
RAS - 20 FSN RAS-16~22FXN
RAS - 16 ~ 20 FXN
Four-Way Valve
Four-Way Valve
RAS-24~32FSN
RAS - 24 / 30 FSN RAS-24~32FXN
RAS - 24 ~ 30 FXN
Page 10-38
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/39

� REMOVING THE STOP VALVE FSN
This procedure is an example for the RAS-10FSN. A similar
procedure can be applied to other models.

1) Remove the front service access panel according to the
2) When you are removing the stop valve (gas side), Brazing (Gas)
disconnect the brazing (which is indicated in the diagram) Disconnect brazing by
by covering the stop valve with a wet cloth. When you are covering it with wet cloth
removing the stop valve (liquid side), disconnect the brazing

in the pipes between the stop valve and the plate heat
Brazing (Liquid)
exchanger.
3) Remove the screws for the plate and remove the stop valve
with the plate. (In the case of only the liquid side, you do not
need to remove the plate).
4) To attach the stop valve, perform in reverse order the
procedure for removing the stop valve. Screws
After removing stop valve
� REMOVING THE STOP VALVES

FXN
This procedure is an example for the RAS-10FXN(E). A similar
procedure can be applied to other models.

1) Remove the front service access panel according to the
2) When you are removing the stop valves (gas sides).
Disconnect the brazing or flaring (which is indicated in the
Brazing (Gas)
diagram) by covering the stop valve with a wet cloth. When
you are removing the stop valve (liquid side), disconnect the
brazing in the pipes between the stop valve and the plate Disconnect brazing or
heat exchanger. flaring by covering
it with web cloth
3) Remove the screws for the plate and remove the stop valve
with the plate. (In the case of only the liquid side, you do not
need to remove the plate).
4) To attach the stop valve, perform in reverse order the
procedure for removing the stop valve.
After removing stop valve Screws
10
Page 10-39
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/40 SERVICING

� REMOVING THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Electrical Box
Removing the electrical box:
Before this work, remove the service access panel according
to the section "Removing the Front Service Panel".
a) Loosen the two screws that fix the electrical box cover.
Make sure that the electrical box cover does not fall off.
b) Loosen the clamps for the electrical wiring.
c) Disconnect the connectors that are connected to the PCB. RAS-5~12FSN(E)/FXN(E)
Ras – 5, 8, 10 FSN(E)/FXN(E)
d) Remove the compressor cables, the power source cables
Electrical Box
and the operation wires from the electrical box.
e) Disconnect the connectors for the fan motor.
f) Lift up the electrical box and unhook the electrical box from
the side panel. Draw the electrical box forwards. (Make sure
not to pull the cables with a great force).
��WARNING RAS-14~16FSN
Ras – 16 FSN
1. Identify the terminal Numbers with the mark band
Numbers when you are reassembling. If you connect the Electrical Box
terminals incorrectly, a malfunction or a damage of the
electrical components will occur.
2. If you replace the control PCB, set all the DIP switches at
the same position as the original position that the DIP
switches had. Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.
RAS-16~22FSN/FXN
Ras – 20 FSN/16-20 FXN
Sub-Electrical Box
Electrical Box
RAS-24~32FSN/FXN
Ras – 24 / 30 FSN/FXN
Removing
Electrical Box
Cover
Electrical Box
After Removing Service Cover
Electrical Box Hang Electrical Box Cover

on the Screws
Electrical Box
Screws
Hole of Electrical
Box Cover
Page 10-40
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/41

� REMOVING THE PCB (ELECTRICAL BOX FOR
CONTROL) PCB Mounting Plate
RAS-5FSN
Before this work, remove the front panel according to
a) Disconnect the connectors that are connected to the PCB
and clamp the hook of the holder A by means of pinchers
and pull out the PCB.
� NOTES:
1. Do not touch the electrical components of the PCB.
2. Do not apply a great force to the PCB. RAS-5FSN
RAS-5 FSN
RAS-8,10,12,18,20,22FSN/FXN; 16FSN
RAS-8,10,20FSN PCB Mounting Plate
Before this work, remove the right-side front panel according to

the section "Removing the Front Service Panel".
and clamp the middle portion of the holder A by means of
pinchers and pull out the PCB.
� NOTES:
2. Do not apply a great force to the PCB.
RAS-8, 10,2012,
RAS-8, 10, 18, 20, 22FSN(E)/FXN(E)
FSN(E)/FXN(E);
RAS-16FXN
16 FXN; 20 FSN/FXN
RAS-14, 16, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32FSN/FXN

RAS-16,24,30FSN PCB Mounting Plate
Before this work, remove the right-side front panel according to

the section "Removing the Front Service Panel".
and clamp the middle portion of the holder A by means of
pinchers and pull out the PCB.(*)
� NOTES:
2. Do not apply a great force to the PCB.
(*) The
(*) The 14/16
16 HPHP machines
machines havehave 6 holes,
6 holes andand
the the
20 –20~32HP
30 HP RAS-14, 16FSN
RAS-16, 24, 30 FSN;
machines have
machines 8 holes.
have 8 holes. RAS-24~32FSN/FXN
24-30 FXN
10
Page 10-41
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/42 SERVICING

� REMOVING OTHER ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
PCB Mounting Plate
(ELECTRICAL BOX FOR CONTROL)
Before this work, remove the right-side front panel according
to the section "Removing the Front Service Panel".
a) Disconnect the cables that are connected to each electrical
component. ISPM
b) Remove the screws for the mounting of the electrical
components.
c) When you are replacing the electrical box behind the PCB
mounting plate, remove the two screws that are located
towards the front side (RAS-5, 8, 10, 12, 18, 20, 22FSN/FXN;
(RAS-5,8,10,20FSN).
RAS-16FXN)
Phillips screwdriver (30 cm)
RAS-5 FSN
Removing the ISPM (RAS-5FSN)
Half open the PCB mounting plate and loosen the U, V
terminal (Inverter Secondary Part) by using a Phillips
screwdriver (30cm). Loosen other terminals after fixing the
PCB mounting plate.
Page 10-42
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 9/43

� REMOVING THE NOISE FILTER
1) Remove the field wiring on the terminal board for the
transmission (TB2) and the terminal board for the power
source (TB1).
2) Remove the clamp for the field wiring by pinching and
pulling the hook of the clamp by means of pinchers.
3) Remove the four fixing screws for the mounting plate of the
terminal board.
Disconnect the wiring that is connected to the noise filter and
remove the noise filter by pinching and pulling the holder hook
by means of pinchers. Insert your finger into the noise filter
attaching area and pull the noise filter.
� NOTE: Terminal Board

for Transmission
Terminal Board
for Power Source
Clamp
Do not touch the electrical components on the noise
filter. Do not apply a great force to the noise filter.
� NOTE: Terminal Board

Mounting Plate
os os Clamp
Identify the terminal N . with the mark band N . when Hook
you are reassembling. If you connect the terminals
incorrectly, a malfunction or a damage of the electrical
components will occur.
Noise Filter
for FAHM
Terminal Board
Mounting Plate
Hook
Noise Filter
10
Page 10-43
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
9/44 SERVICING

� REMOVING THE ISPM
1. Disconnect all the wires that are connected to the ISPM:
1) Disconnect CN206, CN207.
2) Disconnect N, P, P1, RB and R, S, T, U, V, W on ISPM. ISPM
LED201
� NOTE:
Do not touch the electrical components when the red
LED on the ISPM and the Fan Controller is lit up. If you
touch the electrical components, an electrical shock will
occur.
2. Remove the four fixing screws for the ISPM and remove
the SPM.
� NOTES:
1. Identify the terminal Nos. with the mark band Nos. when
incorrectly, a malfunction or a damage of the electrical
components will occur.
2. When you are remounting the plate, do not clamp the
electrical wires between a mounted electrical component
and the plates or the electrical parts.
3. When you are attaching the ISPM, spread silicon grease
over the rear surface. Silicon grease is provided as
a spare part (P24773).
� REMOVING THE Fan Controller

1. Disconnect all the wires that are connected to the Fan
Controller:
1) Disconnect CN201, CN203.
2) Disconnect the fasten terminals S, N, U, V, W on the
Fan Controller.
� NOTE: FANM
Do not touch the electrical components when the red

LED on the ISPM and the Fan Controller is lit up. If you
touch the electrical components, an electrical shock will
occur.
2. Remove the five screws for the Fan Controller and remove
the Fan Controller.
Fixing Screw (M3)
3 Locations
� NOTES:
os os
1. Identify the terminal N . with the mark band N . when
incorrectly, a malfunction or a damage of the electrical Fixing Screw (M4)
components will occur. 2 Locations
2. When you are remounting the plate, do not clamp the

electrical wires between a mounted electrical component
and the plates or the electrical parts.
3. When you are attaching the Fan Controller, spread
silicon grease over the rear surface. Silicon grease is
provided as a spare part (P26221).
Page 10-44
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10.4. RCI
4-Way Cassette
10.4.1. REMOVING THE LONG LIFE FILTER
1. The long life filter is located inside of the air intake grille. Knob
Detach the filter after opening the air intake grille. By pushing
the knob in the arrow mark direction, the air intake grille can
be opened.
2. The filter can be removed from the air intake grille by
supporting the lower side of the air intake grille and filter, and
unhooking it from the extrusion part.
Push knob
Air intake grille
10.4.2. REMOVING THE AIR INTAKE GRILLE

Upper Part of Filter
By lifting the air intake grille at an angle of approximately 30°
and releasing its chain, the air intake grille can be removed by Hook
holding it upwards and then towards you. If the chain is released Air intake
and the angle is 90°, the air intake grille can not be removed. grille
Chain
Long life
filter
Hook
Electrical
10.4.3. REMOVING THE ELECTRICAL BOX COVER
box cover
By opening the air intake grille, the electrical box can be seen.
Remove two (2) screws fixing the electrical box cover and
remove the cover.
10
Screws
Page 10-45
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10.4.4. REMOVING THE OPTIONAL AIR PANEL

(Electrical Box)
1. Remove the electrical box cover according to the item
"Removing the Electrical Box Cover".
Disconnect the connector CN17 for louver motor on the indoor
PCB.
2. Remove the air intake grille from the optional air panel. Main PCB
3. Remove the four Panel (4) corners pockets as below. Insert
slotted screwdriver or coin into the 3 slots in each corner
pocket and unhook the hook of corner pocket. CN17-Connector for Louver Motor
4. Remove four (4) screws of the optional air panel and hook it
by using the hinge to the hook of the drain pan as shown in
the figure.
Remove the optional air panel from the unit.
Panel Corner Hinge
Hook
3 sockets
Fixing Screw
10.4.5. REMOVING THE FAN RUNNER AND FAN
(Electrical Box)
MOTOR Wire Clamp
PCB
1. Remove the air intake grille according to the item "Removing
the Air Intake Grille".
2. Drawing Electrical box:
– Disconnect the thermistors (THM2), drain motor
connector (PCN6) and float switch connector (CN14)
from the PCB.
– Loosen screw of the wire clamp and remove the wire
clamp.
– Remove 3 fixing screws of the electrical box and hang
the electrical box.
Fixing Screw for Electrical Box
(PCB)
Drain Pump Motor Float Switch Discharge Thermistor
Connector (PCN6) Connector (CN14) Connector (THM2)
Page 10-46
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10.4.6. REMOVING THE BELL-MOUTH

1. Remove three (3) screws fixing the bell-mouth onto the drain pan
and remove the bell-mouth.
2. Remove nut and washer fixing the runner and remove the runner.
3. Remove the earth wire for the fan motor. (Only for 4, 5 and 6 HP).
4. Disconnect the fan motor connector.
5. Remove three (3) nuts fixing the fan motor and remove the fan
motor. (When reassembling the fan motor, tightening torque of the
nut for the fan motor is approximately 8 N-m.) Nut (3 pcs.)
Screw (3 pcs.)
Bell-Mouth
Runner
Flat Washer
Motor
Cap Nut
10.4.7. REMOVING THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (PCB)

1. Remove the air intake grille according to the "Removing the Air
Intake Grille".
2. Remove the electrical box cover according to the item "Removing
the Electrical Box Cover".
3. Disconnect the all wiring connectors of the PCBs.
4. Remove the PCBs by holding the expanded part of the holders
using long-nose pliers.
(Electrical Box)
PCB (Control)
PCB
10
PCB Holder Electrical
PCB (Power Source)
Box
Page 10-47
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10.4.8. REMOVING THE DRAIN PAN

1. Remove the optional air panel according to the item
"Removing the Optional Air Panel".
2. Remove the electrical box cover according to the item
"Removing the Electrical Box Cover".
Disconnect the connectors of the air outlet thermistor, piping
thermistors (2), electronic expansion valve, drain pump, float
switch and fan motor.
3. Remove the fan runner and fan motor according to the item
"Removing the Fan Runner and Fan Motor".
4. Check clogging at the drain hole.
(Do not use a cutter when removing the rubber plug. If used,
Rubber Plug
the rubber plug will be damaged.)
5. Remove four (4) bolts for fixing the drain pan and remove the
drain pan. Drain Pan
Bolt for Fixing

Drain Pan
10.4.9. REMOVING THE DRAIN-UP MECHANISM

Screw for Earth Wiring
1. Remove the drain pan according to the item "Removing the
Drain Pan".
2. Remove the hose band and remove the drain hose.
3. Remove screw of earth wiring. Fixing Plate
4. Hold the drain-up mechanism and remove three (3) screws of

the fixing plate for the drain-up mechanism.
5. Remove the drain-up mechanism with the fixing plate.
Screws
Drain-Up Mechanism
Drain Hose Location of Hose Band
10.4.10.REMOVING THE FLOAT SWITCH

Screw for Fixing Plate
Drain Pan".
2. Loosen the resin nut for fixing the float switch and remove the
float switch.
Remove two (2) screws of fixing base for fixing the drain-up
mechanism when removing the drain-up mechanism. Nut
Fixing Base
Drain-Up
Float Switch Mechanism
Page 10-48
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
 WARNING: TURN OFF all the main switches and disconnect the power supply from the unit.
10.4.11.REMOVING THE THERMISTOR FOR LIQUID
PIPE AND GAS PIPE (Up-close view of Thermistor Installation)
1. Remove the optional air panel according to the item Fixing Plate of
"Removing the Optional Air Panel". thermistor
2. Remove the bell-mouth according to No.3 of the item

Drain Pan". Thermistor
4. Remove the butyl sheet, pull out the fixing plate for the
thermistor from the gas pipe, where the thermistor is located,
and then pull out the thermistor.
5. Remove the butyl sheet, pull out the fixing plate for the
thermistor from the liquid pipe, where the thermistor is
located, and then pull out the thermistor.
(Thermistor Gas Pipe) (Thermistor Liquid Pipe)
Fixing Plate of thermistor
Fixing Plate of Thermistor

Thermistor
Butyl Sheet
Butyl Sheet Thermistor
10.4.12.REMOVING THE ELECTRONIC EXPANSION

VALVE COIL
2. Remove the bell-mouth according to No.3 of item "Removing
the Fan Runner and Fan Motor".
Drain Pan".
4. Remove the butyl sheet at the electronic expansion valve.
5. Prepare two (2) spanners. Hold the part of the valve body with
one spanner and loosen the lock nut with another spanner by
turning the lock nut counterclockwise.
Expansion Valve
 NOTE:
Do not hold the motor part when loosening the lock nut by
spanner. The base of the drive part may turn idle and be
10
broken.
Page 10-49
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
6. Turn the lock nut by a few turn, and the drive part is separated
from the screw and can be removed. Fig. 1 Expansion Valve
7. Prepare the new drive part for replacement (service part) with
the position of the driver (drive screw) already adjusted.
Pulse Motor
 NOTE: Gear Drive Part
During replacement work, pay attention to the separation
part and prevent the dust, foreign particle, etc. from Output Shaft
entering into the separation part. (The exposed part by
separation is the mechanical part of the valve.) Lock Nut
Bellows
Do not hurt the junction part of the valve with the tools. Valve
8. Put the drive part onto the valve body, hold them with their
axes matching and attach the lock nut to the screw part of the
valve body. Valve Part
9. Tighten the lock nut with spanner after tightening lightly by Valve Body
hand.
The tightening torque shall be within the range of 12 Nm (120
kg-cm) to 15 Nm (150 kg-cm). Valve Sheet
 NOTE: Fig. 2 Direction of Drive Part

Do not apply the strong forces such as the rotating torque
and the bending load to the motor by holding the motor by
hand when tightening the lock nut.
The direction of the eccentric part of the motor is
assembled as the eccentric part of although the motor
is directed toward the counter direction of the fittings for
piping at the valve body, the alteration of this direction do
not affect the open/close function of the valve. Therefore,
the adjustment of the direction of the motor part is not
required if the position of the motor is moved toward the
rotating direction after replacement as shown in Fig. 2.
However, pay attention to the direction of the motor for the
coil of the electronic expansion valve not to touch other
pipings and the side plate of the electrical box.
10. After completion of the replacement, attach the electronic
expansion valve in the reverse procedures for removing.
10.4.13.REMOVING THE AUTOMATIC LOUVER MOTOR (Air Panel)

4 Corners,
4 Automatic swing Louvers
2. Remove the motor cover after removing one (1) screw fixing
the motor cover for the automatic louver motor.
3. Draw out the louver shaft from the automatic louver motor and
remove the automatic louver motor with fixing plate.
4. Disconnect all the connectors connected to the motor.
Pannel Corner Motor Cover

(Air Pannel Corner)
Screw Connector
Motor cover Louver Shaft
Automatic
louver
motor
Panel
Screw
Page 10-50
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/48 SERVICING
� WARNING: TURN OFF all the main switches
10.5. RCIM – FSN

4-Way Cassette
10.5.1. REMOVING THE AIR FILTER

1. The air filter is located inside of the air intake grille. Detach
the filter after opening the air intake grille. By pushing the Knob
knob in the arrow mark direction, the air intake grille can be
opened.
2. The filter can be removed from the air intake grille by
supporting the lower side of the air intake grille and filter,
and unhooking it from the extrusion part.
Air Intake Grille
10.5.2. REMOVING THE AIR INTAKE GRILLE

1. By lifting the air intake grille at an angle of approximately
45° and releasing its chain, the air intake grille can be
removed by holding it upwards and then towards you. If the Filter Notch
chain is released and the angle is 90°, the air intake grille
can not be removed.
Approx.
Filter Hook 45º
� NOTE: Air Filter
– If the louvers are moved due to cleaning or for any
reason, set the “Auto Swing” mode to take the four
louvers in the same position
Filter Stopper Air Intake

Grille
10.5.3. REMOVING THE ELECTRICAL BOX COVER

1. By opening the air intake grille, the electrical box can be
seen.
Remove three (3) screws fixing the electrical box cover and Electrical
remove the cover. Box Cover
10
Screws
Page 10-51
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/49
10.5.4. REMOVING THE OPTIONAL AIR PANEL Enlarged View
1. Open the intake air grille and disconnect the connector for Connector for Auto Swing Motor
the auto louver (Air Panel Side)
Connector for Auto Swing Motor

(Indoor Unit Side)
Without Air Inlet Grille
Electrical Box
2. Removing four corner covers of the optional air panel.

Remove screw (a) from the front panel side. Unhook two
hinges by moving in the arrow mark direction (b).
Remove the four corner covers by moving in the arrow mark
direction (c).
Refrigerant Pipe Connections

3. Loosen two screws, A and B fixing the air panel onto the Electrical Control Box
indoor unit. Indoor Unit
Remove other two screws. (Remove the screw located on
the printed “PIPE SIDE” and the screw located on the
opposite side).
Fixing Plate
Indoor Unit
Fixing Plate
Indication
“PIPE SIDE”
Long Screw
Air Panel
Long Screw
(Q’ty 4)
4. Remove the optional air panel after unhooking the hinge Long screw
onto the hooks at the two positions by rotating the optional
air panel in the arrow mark direction.
Long screw
Page 10-52
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/50 SERVICING
10.5.5. REMOVING THE FAN RUNNER AND FAN
MOTOR
1. Remove the intake air grille according to “1. Removing Air
Filter and Intake Air Grille.” Float Switch Connector
(CN14)
2. Drawing Electrical Box
Electrical Box
– Remove the electrical box cover, and remove the Fixing Screw
discharge air thermistor (THM2), the drain pump
connector (PCN6), the float switch connector (CN14), the Drain Pump Connector
Fan Motor Connector (PCN6)
connector for auto louver (CN17) and connector for fan (CN201)
motor (PCN203, CN201) from the PCB.
– Remove three screws fixing the electrical box and
suspend the electrical box. Electrical Box
Fan Motor Connector
(CN203) Fixing Screw
Electrical Box Fixing Connector for Auto Louver

Screw for Auto Louver (THM2) Outlet Thermistor
(THM2) (CN17)
10.5.6. REMOVING THE BELL-MOUTH

1. Remove the three screws fixing the bell mouth onto the
drain pan and remove the bell-mouth.
2. Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor
– Remove the nut and the washer fixing the fan runner.
– Remove three nuts fixing the fan motor and remove the
fan motor.
� NOTE:
Fix the fan runner with a tightening torque of
approximately 4 Nm when reassembling.
Vibration absorber
rubber (3 parts)
Fan motor
Nut (3 parts)
Fan runner
10
Washer
Nut
Tightening torque 4 Nm
Bell-Mouth
when reassembling
Screw (3 parts)
Page 10-53
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/51
10.5.7. REMOVING THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
(PCB)
1. Remove the air intake grille according to the "Removing the
Air Intake Grille". Power
transformer
2. Remove the electrical box cover according to the item Holder
"Removing the Electrical Box Cover". PCB
3. Disconnect the all wiring connectors of the PCBs.
PCB for control
4. Remove the six holders fixing the PCB for control, four (4) Electrical Box
holders fixing the PCB for power source and four holders
fixing the PCB for the noise filter using long-nose pliers.
� NOTE:
– Do not touch electrical components on the PCBs
– If big force is applied to the PCB, it will be faulty. Electrical Box PCB for power
source
– Pay attention to the connector’s position on PCB when
reassembling. If assembled at the incorrect position, PCB
will be faulty.
Terminal Block for PCB for Noise

Terminal block Transmission / Filter
for power source Remote Controller

1. Remove the optional air panel according to "Removing
Optional Air Panel”.
2. Disconnect the outlet thermistor, pipe thermistors (liquid:1,
gas:1), expansion valve, drain pump, float switch and fan
motor after opening the electrical box cover according to
“Removing Electrical Box Cover”.
3. Remove the electrical box and the bell-mouth according to
“Removing Fan Runner and Fan Motor”.
4. Remove two screws fixing the cable holder onto the drain
pan and remove the cable holder.
5. Remove Drain Water:
– Remove water on the drain pan by pulling out the rubber
plug. Silicon sealant is applied around the rubber plug, Drain Pan
but the rubber plug is easily removed by pulling out the
bottom of it.
– (Do not damage or pull out by using sharp-edged articles
such as a cutter. Do not remove or damage the rubber
plug bottom insulator when reassembling.)
– Check to ensure that the water hole is not clogged.
6. Removing Drain Pan
Rubber Plug
– Remove the four screws fixing the drain pan onto the
indoor unit. Cable Holder
– Remove the drain pan by pulling it downwards.
A : Drain Pan Setscrew

� NOTE: B : Screw for Cable Holder
– Do not use sharp-pointed articles such as a screwdriver
for fixing the rubber plug.
– After fixing the rubber plug, there must be 2 - 3mm
clearance from the drain pan.
Page 10-54
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/52 SERVICING

Drain Pan".
Fixing Plate
Drain-Up
Mechanism
Screws
2. Remove the hose band and remove the drain hose.

3. Remove screw of earth wiring.
Hose
Disconnect the Drain-Up Mechanism

drain hose
4. Hold the drain-up mechanism and remove the screw of the

fixing plate for the drain-up mechanism.
� NOTE:
When reassembling, insert the drain hose fully to the end
of the drain pump.
10
Page 10-55
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/53
10.5.10. REMOVING THE FLOAT SWITCH

1. Remove the drain pan according to “Removing Drain Pan”. Screw
Resin Nut
2. Removing Float Switch:
– The float switch is located at the rear side of the drain Fixing Plate for Float
pan.
Hook
– Remove the screw fixing the float fixing plate onto the Float Switch
drain pan.
� NOTE:
When reassembling, ensure to fit the hook with the notch
and screw up.
3. Loosen the resin nut of the float switch and remove the float
switch from the fixing plate. Drain Pan
Notch
� NOTE:
When reassembling, the tightening torque for the resin
nut shall be within the range of 0.3 Nm – 0.4 Nm.
If the tightening torque is hither than this, the resin nut
will be damaged.
Page 10-56
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/54 SERVICING
10.5.11. REMOVING THE THERMISTOR FOR

LIQUID PIPE AND GAS PIPE
"Removing the Optional Air Panel". Heat Exchanger Motor
2. Remove the bell-mouth according to No.3 of the item
Drain Pan".
4. Remive the partition plate for evaporator fixing the heat
exchanger (remove five screws).
5. Removing thermistors for liquid pipe and gas pipe: Partition Plate for
Remove the butyl sheet applied to each thermistor, and Evaporator
remove the thermistors for the liquid pipe and the gas pipe.
The thermistors are fixed with the thermistor holders. Setscrew for Partition Plate
Motor Lead
Details of assembly: for Evaporator (5)
Thermistor Lead for Liquid Pipe Thermistor, Gas

Thermistor pipe Pipe Thermistor and Electronic
Expansion Valve
Assemblyr
6. Removing the coil for electronic expansion valve.

Remove the butyl sheet applied to the electronic expansion
valve.
Lock out
7. Prepare two spanners. Hold the part of the valve body with Electronic expansion valve
one spanner and loosen the lock nut with another spanner Valve
by turning the lock nut counterclockwise.
� NOTE:
Do not hold the motor part when loosening the lock nut
by spanners. The base of the drive part may turn idle and
be broken.
8. Turn the lock nut by a few turn, and the drive part is
separated from the screw and can be removed.
9. Prepare the new drive part for replacement (servicing part)
with the position of the driver (drive screw) already adjusted.
� NOTE:
During replacement work, pay attention to the separation Butyl sheet
part and prevent the dust, foreign particle, etc. from Thermistor Thermistor
holder holder Butyl sheet
entering into the separation part. (The exposed part by
Liquid pipe Gas pipe
separation is the mechanical part of the valve.)
thermistor
10
Do not damage the junction part of the valve with the thermistor
tools.
10. Put the drive part onto the valve body, hold them with
their axes matching and attach the lock nut to the screw
part of the valve body.
11. Tighten the lock nut with spanner after tightening lightly
by hand.
The tightening torque must be within the range of:
12 Nm – 15 Nm.
Page 10-57
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/55
� NOTE:
Do not apply strong forces such as the rotating torque
Pulse Motor
and the bending load to the motor by holding the motor
by hand when tightening the lock nut.
The direction of the eccentric part of the motor is Drive Part
assembled as the eccentric part of the valve body, the Gear
alteration of this direction do not affect the open/close
function of the valve.
Therefore, the adjustment of the direction of the motor Output Shaft
part is not required if the position of the motor is moved
toward the rotating direction after replacement as shown Lock Nut
in the right figure. Bellows
12. After completion of the replacement, attach the electronic

expansion valve in the reverse procedures for removing. Valve
Apply the butyl sheet firmly. Valve Valve
Sheet Part
Valve body
� NOTE:
Ensure to check that the cables do not touch the fun
runner after assembling.
Expansion Valve
Adjustment of direction is not required.

(However, pay attention not to touch the pipes
or the drain pan.)
Direction of Drive Part
Page 10-58
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/56 SERVICING
10.5.12. REMOVING THE AUTOMATIC LOUVER

MOTOR
"Removing the Optional Air Panel". Louver Setscrew (1)
2. Disconnect the connecter connected to the AS motor.
3. Remove one screw fixing the louver and one(1) screw fixing
the AS motor.
Connector
4. Remove the AS motor by pulling out with the louver, and
then sliding it.
5. After changing the AS motor, reassemble the louver with
adjusting the stopper’s position as shown in the right figure.
At this time, the D cut part of the AS motor shaft must
coincide with the D cut part of the louver.
AS Motor
AS motor
Setscrew
Stopper
Louver
10
Page 10-59
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/57
10.6. RCD
2-way cassette
10.6.1. REMOVING THE LONG-LIFE FILTER AND

THE AIR INLET GRILLE
1. The long-life filter is located inside of the air inlet grille. You Upper Part
Upper Part of
of Filter
Filter
can open the air inlet grille by pushing the knob as shown
Hinges
Hinges
below.
2. Detach the filter after opening the air inlet grille. You can
remove the filter from the air inlet panel by supporting the
louver side of the air inlet grille and the filter, and by
unhooking the grille from the extrusion part. Air Intake
Air Intake Grille
Grille
3. You can remove the air inlet grille by releasing the chain of Long Life
Long Life Filter
Filter Hinges
Hinges
the air inlet grille, lifting the chain upwards, and then Lower Part
Part of
of Filter
Filter
Lower
drawing the chain towards you.
Knob
Knob
Air Intake
Air Intake Grille
Grille
10.6.2. REMOVING THE ELECTRICAL BOX PANEL

Screw
Screw
If you open the air inlet grille, you can see the electrical box.
Loosen one screw that fix the electrical box panel and remove
the panel.
ElectricalBox
Electrical Box
10.6.3. REMOVING THE OPTIONAL AIR PANEL

1. Remove the electrical box panel by opening the air
inlet grille.
Disconnect the connector (CN17) for the auto-louver
on the indoor unit PCB.
2. Remove the air inlet grille from the optional air panel.
Remove the four screws that fix the optional air panel.
3. Remove the optional air panel after unhooking the hinge off
the hooks at the two positions near the drain pan.
(Before Alteration) (After Alteration)

Connector for Louver Motor Connector for Louver Motor
PCB 2 PCB 2
(AC Chopper Model)
PCN4 TB
CN7
CN4
PCB PCB
Optional Air Panel
Hinge
Hook
Screws
Screw x 2
(M6x30, Only for P-G46)
Page 10-60
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/58 SERVICING
10.6.4. REMOVING THE FAN RUNNER AND THE

FAN MOTOR
1. Remove the optional air panel according to the
section "Removing the Optional Air Panel".
2. Removing the Electrical Box.
a. Disconnect the connectors for each wire.
b. Remove the two screws that fix the electrical box and
turn the electrical box downwards by approximately 90°. Screw
Screw
(The electrical box is hung by the hinge. Do not remove

the fixing screw for the hinge).
Screw
Screw Hinge
Hinge Hinge
Hinge
Electrical
Electrical
Box
Box
3. Removing the Bell Mouth

Remove the fixing plate after removing one screw that fix
the fixing plate on the support plate of the indoor unit.
(For 4.0 and 5.0HP)
Remove the bell mouth by removing the two screws that fix
the bell mouth onto the fixing plate for the drain pan of the
indoor unit.
* Q’ty of Bell Mouth: 1 (RCD-1.5 to 3.0FSN)
2 (RCD-4.0 to 5.0FSN)
RCD-1.5 to 3.0 FSN RCD-4.0 to 5.0 FSN
Fixing Plate for Drain Pan

Fixing Plate
Supporting Plate
Bell-Mouth Bell-Mouth
Bell-Mouth Bell-Mouth
Fixing Screw Fixing Screw
Bell-Mouth
10
Page 10-61
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/59
4. Remove the fan runner and the fan motor
Remove the fan runner after removing the cap nut and
the washer that fixes the fan runner.
– Disconnect the ground wire for the fan motor.
– Remove the four nuts that fix the fan motor and remove
the fan motor.
(When you are reassembling, the required tightening
torque for the cap nut is approximately 8N-m (80kg-cm). Nut
Nut
* Qty of the Fan Runner and the Fan Motor: Fan
Fan Motor
Motor
Each 1 (RCD-1.5 to 3.0FSN)
Each 2 (RCD-4.0 to 5.0FSN) Earth
Earth
Runner
Runner
Flat
Flat Washer
Washer
Cap
Cap Nut
Nut

(PCB)
1. Remove the air inlet grille according to the section Holder
Holder Holder
Holder
"Removing the Long-Life Filter and the Air Inlet Grille".

2. Remove the electrical box panel according to the
section "Removing the Electrical Box Panel".
3. Pull out the PCB by pinching the expanded part of the PCB
holders (which hold the PCB at four positions) by means of
long-nose pliers.
4. Remove the three fixing screws for the AC chopper.
(When you are reassembling, pay attention not to squeeze,
because the sealed ground wire and the transformer ground
wire are commonly squeezed by one screw).
AC Chopper
AC Chopper
Module PCB
Module PCB PCB
PCB
� NOTE:
Do not touch the electrical components on the PCB.
PCB
PCB
If you apply a great force to the PCB, the PCB will
become faulty.
Electrical Box
Electrical BoxCover
Cover Expanded
ExpandedPart
Part
of
of Holder
Holder
Page 10-62
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/60 SERVICING

1. Remove the air inlet grille according to the section
Removing the Long-Life Filter and the Air Inlet Grille".
2. Remove the bell mouth according to the section "Removing
the Fan Runner and the Fan Motor".
3. Remove the panel after removing the two fixing screws for
the panel of the service access hole near the pipes inside
the unit.
4. Removing the float switch Screws
Screws
Disconnect the connectors and remove the float switch after Service Access
Service Access
Cover
Cover Fixing Plate for for
removing two screws which fix the fixing plate for the float Fixing Screws Fixing Plate
Connector
Connector Fixing Screws Float Switch
Float Switch
switch onto the fixing plate for the drain-up mechanism.
Fixing Plate for

Drain-Up Mechanism
Fixing Plate for
Drain-Up Mechanism Float Switch
Float Switch

"Removing the Long-Life Filter and the Air Inlet Grille".
Fixing Plate
Fixing Plate
2. Remove the bell mouth according to the section "Removing Connector
Connector

3. Remove the drain pan according to the section "Removing
the Drain Pan".
4. After disconnecting the wire connector, remove the Drain Hose
Drain Hose
two fixing screws for the fixing plate for the drain-up
mechanism. First support the drain-up mechanism by hand Hose Band
Hose Band Fixing Screws
Fixing Screws
in order not to drop the drain-up mechanism. Then, remove
the hose band from the drain hose. Then, disconnect the Drain-UpMechanism
Drain-up Mechanism
drain hose, and finally remove the drain-up mechanism.
10
Page 10-63
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/61

"Removing the Long-Life Filter and the Air Inlet Grille". RCD-1.0
RCD-1.5toto
3.0 FSN
3.0 FSN
2. Open the electrical box panel according to the section
"Removing the Electrical Box Panel". Disconnect the
connect wire between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit,
the electrical wiring for the electrical box and the connectors
inside of the electrical box.
3. Remove the bell-mouth according to the section "Removing
4. Discharge the drain water on the drain pan by removing the
rubber plug. The sealing agent is used around the rubber
plug. However, you can remove the rubber plug by pulling
out the rubber plug. Do not scratch the rubber plug with a
cutter and others. Make sure that the water hole is not Drain
Drain Pan
Pan
Fixing Plate
Fixing Plate for
for Drain
Drain Pan
Pan
clogged by pricking the water hole with a pencil.
5. Removing the drain pan:
– Remove two screws that fix the enforced plate onto the
fixing plate for the drain pan. Remove the two screws
that fix the support plate onto the fixing plate for the drain
pan and remove the support plate. (For RCD-4.0FSN
and RCD-5.0FSN)
– Remove the two fixing plates for the drain pan.
Rubber Plug
Rubber Plug
– Remove the drain pan.
RCD-4.0 to 5.0 FSN
Enforced Plate
Drain Pan
Fixing Plate for

Drain Pan
Rubber Plug
Support Plate
Page 10-64
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/62 SERVICING
10.6.9. REMOVING THE THERMISTOR FOR LIQUID

PIPE AND GAS PIPE
Liquid Side
Liquid Side Thermistor
Thermistor forfor
2. Remove the bell mouth according to the section "Removing Gas
GasPipe
Pipe
Holder
Holder
the Drain Pan".
4. Remove the insulation material for the pipe, remove the Insulation
Insulation
thermistor holder from the gas piping and remove the Gas Side
Gas Side
thermistor for the gas pipe.

5. Remove the butyl sheet, remove the thermistor holder from
the liquid piping and remove the thermistor for the liquid Thermistor
Thermistor Holder
Holder
pipe. Butyl Sheet
Butyl Sheet
Holder
Holder Thermistor forfor
Thermistor Liquid PipePipe
Liquid
10.6.10. REMOVING THE ELECTRONIC

EXPANSION VALVE COIL
section "Removing the Optional Air Panel". ExpansionValve
Expansion Valve
2. Remove the fan assembly according to the section,
"Removing the Fan Runner and the Fan Motor".
the Drain Pan".
4. Remove the butyl sheet at the electronic expansion valve.

5. Prepare two spanners (#19 and #14). Hold the part of the
valve body with one spanner and loosen the lock nut with
another spanner by turning the lock nut counterclockwise.
� NOTE:
Do not hold the motor part when you are loosening the
lock nut by means of a spanner. The base of the drive
part may turn idle and may break.
6. Turn the lock nut by a few turns. Then, the drive part
separates from the screw and you can remove the drive
10
part.
7. Prepare the new drive part for replacement (service part)
� NOTE:
During the replacement work, pay attention to the
separation part and prevent the dust, the foreign particles
and others from entering the separation part. (The part
that is exposed by the separation is the mechanical part
of the valve.) Do not damage the junction part of the
valve with the tools.
8. Put the drive part onto the valve body, hold the drive part
and the valve body with their axes matching and attach the
lock nut to the screw part of the valve body.
Page 10-65
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/63
9. Tighten the lock nut with a spanner after tightening lightly
by hand. The tightening torque should be within the range of
12Nm (120kg-cm) to 15Nm (150kg-cm).
Pulse Motor
Pulse Motor
� NOTE: Gear
Drive Part
Drive Part
Do not apply great forces, such as the rotating torque Gear
and the bending load, to the motor by holding the motor

by hand when you are tightening the lock nut. Output Shaft
Output Shaft
The direction of the eccentric part of the motor is Lock Nut
Lock Nut
Bellows Adjustment of direction
Adjustment is not required.
of direction is not required
assembled as the eccentric part of the expansion valve. Bellows
Although the motor is directed toward the counter
Valve
direction of the fittings for piping at the valve body, the Valve
Valve
Valve Valve Part
alteration of this direction does not affect the open/close Valve Body Sheet Valve Part
Valve Body Sheet
function of the valve. Therefore, the adjustment of the
direction of the motor part is not required if the position of
the motor is moved toward the rotating direction after the
replacement, as shown below.
However, make sure that the direction of the motor for Fig. 1 Expansion Valve Fig. 2 Direction of Drive Part
the coil of the electronic expansion valve does not touch Fig. 1 Expansion Valve Fig. 2 Direction of Drive Part
other piping and the side plate of the electrical box.
10. After finishing the replacement, attach the electronic
expansion valve by performing in reverse order the
procedure for removing the electronic expansion valve.
Insulation
Insulation

C
C Cover
Cover
MOTOR Assembly
Assembly
2. Remove the insulation material that is mounted with the Optional
Optional
Air
Air Panel
Panel
adhesive at both sides of the C panel assembly.
Insulation
Insulation
3. Remove the two screws that fix the C panel assembly and
Screws
Screws
remove the C panel assembly from the optional air panel.
C
C Cover
Cover
Assembly
Assembly
Motor
Motor
Assembly
Assembly
Optional
Optional
Air
AirPanel
Panel
4. Remove the two screws that fix the motor assembly and Screws
Screws
Connector
Connector
remove the two stoppers by lifting the motor assembly
upwards (to the arrow direction) by hand. Motor Assembly
Motor Assembly
You can remove the stopper by pulling the stopper. You can
remove the motor assembly by removing the connector at Stopper
Stopper
the same time.
5. Remove one screw that fixes the crank and cut the plastic Plastic
PlasticTie
Tie
tie that fixes the motor cord.
Motor
Remove the motor after removing the two fixing screws. MotorAssembly
Motor Assembly Motor
Motor
Motor Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Crank
Crank
Page 10-66
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
 WARNING: TURN OFF all the main switches

10.7. RPI - IN-THE-CEILING TYPE
RPI-2.0~6.0 FSN1E
10.7.1. REMOVING THE ELECTRICAL BOX AND
ELECTRICAL PARTS
1. Remove Electrical Box cover, for accessing the electrical
components. Electrical box
cover location
Electrical Box
Electrical Box cover
Fixing Screw
P.C.B.
Fixing Screw
Capacitor
Fixing Screw
Transformer
Fixing Screw
Terminal Board
2. It is possible to remove Electrical Box from the unit by taking out

the attaching screws.  
 
(Remove Electrical Box)
10.7.2. REMOVING INLET AIR THERMISTOR Back Cover Cord Band
 NOTE:
10
To disconnect this component properly from the PCB,
see the Electrical Wiring Diagram chapter of this
Nylon Band
Manual.
1. Remove the screws that fix the Back Cover.
Thermistor
The thermistor is located as shown in the detail
Air Inlet thermistor loaction
Page 10-67
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing

10.7.3. REMOVING THE OUTLET AIR
THERMISTOR
 NOTE:
Manual. Outlet Termistor
1. The thermistor is located on the outlet side as shown in
the detail.
10.7.4. REMOVING THE LIQUID AND GAS PIPE

THERMISTORS Electrical Box

 NOTE:
Manual.
Cover the Thermistors with the Cork Tape or Pipe
Insulation according to each location. Both materials
are factory supplied. Replace them if damaged during Electrical Box cover
the servicing.
1. Remove the Electrical Box Cover.
2. Remove the Service Cover.
Service Cover

3. Liquid and Gas Thermistors are fixed by Special Clamp

on the cuper pipe. 
- Liquid Thermistor is coverd by Cork Tape
- Gas Thermistor is covered by Pipe Insulation.
Thermistor
Gas
Thermistor liquid
Page 10-68
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing

10.7.5. REMOVING THE FAN PARTS 
Parts list: (Fan Motor / Fan Casing / Runner).
1. Perform step 1 from point 10.7.2 of this chapter.

2. Remove the Tape located on the center of the Casing,
push clousing lockers and remove the half part of the
Casing.
3. Take out the screws from the Fixing Brackets, and Clousing Runner
remove Fan motor together with the Fan Runners  lockers
Fan Motor
carefully. Tape
4. Loosen the screws that fix Fan Runners from the shaft.

5. In case of removing the whole Fan Caing, it shall be
removed the second half of the fan Casing by removing Shaft
the screws which fix it to the Fan Motor Stay.
Fixing Brackets
Fan Casing
10.7.6. REMOVING THE DRAIN PUMP
 NOTE:
Manual
1. Perform steps 1 and 2 from point 10.7.4 of this chapter.
2. Take out the Drain Pump from the Drain Pump support by Drain pump
removing the bolts.
3. After installing the new Draing Pump seal properly the
Draing Pipe joints.
Service
Cover
Bolts Drain pump
 NOTE:
If a new Drain Pump has been installed, is necessary
to take out the Electrical Box from the unit for wiring
the Drain Pump to the PCB.
See point 10.7.1 of this chapter to remove electrical
box from the unit. 10
Page 10-69
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing


 NOTE:
Manual
1. Perform steps 1 and 2 from point 10.7.4 of this chapter.
Float Switch location
2. Loosen the screws that fix it to the stay.
Float Switch

1. Take out the Air Filter Support by removing the screws.
2. Slide down the air filter.
Air filter support


 Air filter
Air filter support


Page 10-70
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/69
10.8. RPC
Ceiling type

1, The air filter is located inside of the air inlet grille. Remove
the air filter after opening the air inlet grilles.
2. Push the knobs of the air inlet grille backwards.
3. Open the air inlet grille downwards.
4. By lifting up the knob, you can remove the filter.
10.8.2. REMOVING THE SIDE PANEL

5. Pull the side panel towards you.
�
Hook at the front part of
6. Unhook the hook at the lower part of the side panel. the side panel
7. Lift up the side panel.
Side panel
Hook at the upper
part of the side panel
(2 Nos)
�
Hook at the upper
part of the side panel
(2 Nos)
10.8.3. REMOVING THE DISCHARGE AIR GRILLE Fixing screw
M4 screw
1. Remove the side panel according to the section "Removing
10
the Side Panel". Do not hold this
louver
2. Remove the crank assembly that is mounted on the right-
side shaft of the air deflector.
Connector
Page 10-71
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/70 SERVICING
3. Pull out the deflector including the bearing after removing Fixing screw
the four fixing screws at the right and the left.
Air deflection
Bearing Air deflection
10.8.4. REMOVING THE FAN MOTOR

1. Open the air inlet grille according to the section "Removing
the Air Filter".
2. Remove the stay at the air inlet.
Air inlet panel Stay Fixing screw

3. Disconnect the connector for the indoor fan motor.
Wiring panel
4. Hook the electrical box on the lower frame after removing

the screws that fix the electrical box.
Lower
Electrical frame
box
� NOTE:
During this work, support the electrical box by hand and
make sure not to drop the electrical box.
5. Remove the casing (1) by pressing the hook part at the
four positions towards the inner side. (1)
Hook
Casing
Page 10-72
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/71
6. Loosen the screws by means of a hexagon wrench.
Motor
To
loosen
Allen key
Coupling
7. After removing the fixing band, remove the fan motor by
sliding the fan motor backwards. Pay attention not to drop Fixing band
the fan motor.
Fixing screw
10.8.5. REMOVING THE BEARING

the side panel". Fixing screw
2. Loosen the two screws that fix the bearing and the shaft for the bearing
by means of a hexagon wrench.
Fixing screw
3. Remove the bearing after removing the two fixing for the shaft
screws (M8).
Casing
Bearing
Air filter
10.8.6. REMOVING THE COUPLING

10
the Side Panel".
2. Separate the casing into two pieces according to the
section "Removing the Fan Motor".
Loosen the screw for the coupling by means of a hexagon
wrench.
3. Remove the M8 screw that fixes the bearing, according
to the section "Removing the Bearing".
4. Remove the coupling after removing the shaft and the turbo
fan assembly.
Page 10-73
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/72 SERVICING

MOTOR
1. Remove the right-side panel according to the section
"Removing the Side Panel".
2. Remove the M4 screws and remove the AS motor assembly
from the right shaft of the discharge air grille. Pay attention
not to damage the AS Motor assembly.
3. Remove the two screws (A) that fix the motor for the auto-
louver and remove the motor from the AS Motor fixing plate.
Remove one screw (B) that fixes the shaft of the motor
for the auto-louver and the pinion AS.
� NOTE:
When you are assembling, tighten the two screws (A)
with a torque of 0.8Nm (8kg-cm) and one screw (B) with
a torque of 0.4 Nm (4kg-cm) by means of a torque
wrench.
10.8.8. REMOVING THE THERMISTORS FOR LIQUID

PIPE AND GAS PIPE
1. Remove the right-side panel and the left-side panel
according to the section "Removing the Side Panel".
2. Remove the lower panel.
Lower panel
3. Remove the drain pan after disconnecting the drain hose. Stay
Drain hose Drain pan
4. Remove the thermistors for the liquid pipe and the gas pipe.
Side panel
Thermistor for
the gas pipe
Heat
exchanger
Thermistor for
the liquid pipe
Page 10-74
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/73

(PCB)
1. Open the air inlet panel according to the section "Removing
the Air Filter".
2. Disconnect the wiring connector for the fan motor.
3. Turn the electrical box according to item 4 of the
section "Removing the Fan Motor" and hook the electrical
box at the lower frame.
4. Remove the panel after removing the two screws that fix the
electrical box panel.
� NOTE:
During this work, support the electrical box and make
sure not to drop the electrical box. Panel
5. Four holders support the PCB. Pinch the expanded part of

the holder by means of long-nose pliers.
� NOTE:
Do not touch the electrical components. Do not apply a
great force to the PCB. If you apply a great force, the
PCB will become faulty. PCB
Expanded
part of holder
PCB
10.9. RPK-1.5/2
1. Pull up the right side and the left side of the air inlet grille as
shown in the figure.
10
2. Pull down the air filter after lifting the grille and remove the
air filter from the hinge.
Page 10-75
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
part of holder
Servicing
PCB
10.9. RPK-1.5/2
1. Pull up the right side and the left side of the air inlet grille as
2. Pull down the air filter after lifting the grille and remove the
air filter from the hinge.
10/74 SERVICING
10.9.2. REMOVING THE FRONT PANEL

Bush
SCREW FRONT
1. Press the "PUSH" marks at both ends of the front panel and PANEL
open the suction grille by pulling toward the front side.
2. Remove one screw at the center of the front panel.
After removing the screw, close the front panel once.
3. Remove the three bushes at the louver part of the air outlet
and remove three screws.
SCREWS
4. Hold both sides of the front panel, pull the front panel
toward the front side slowly and lift up the front panel while
you pay attention not to touch the louver at the air outlet.
5. Lift up the front panel slightly. Then, the three hooks at the
upward part of the front panel are detached from the holes Front panel Front
of the unit body and you can remove the front panel toward panel Extrusion
the front side.
Square hole
� NOTE:
DO NOT hit the front panel when you are removing the Unit body
front panel. If you do so, you may break the unit body.
6. For attaching the front panel, first attach the front panel at
the air outlet side. Then, attach the three hooks at the upper
part of the front panel.
7. Open the front panel as the procedure (1) and fix the screw
(1 piece) at the center of the front panel.
8. There are three stoppers at the inner side of the front panel.
Press the hook part from the front side and make sure that
Stoppers
there is no gap between the front panel and the unit body.
� NOTE:
If there is a gap between the front panel and the air No gap
outlet, the gap may cause an air leakage and dew may
appear at the front panel. Then, the dew may drop.
9. After attaching the front panel, tighten the three screws
at the lower part of the air outlet and cover the three screws
with the bushes.
Page 10-76
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/75
10.9.3. REMOVING THE MOTOR FOR THE

AUTOMATIC LOUVER Connector (White) Connector (Black)
1. Remove the front panel according to the section "Removing
the Front Panel".
2. Remove the electrical box according to the section Screws (4 pcs.)
"Removing the Electrical Box Panel".
3. Remove the four screws which fix the AS motor.
4. Draw out the AS motor horizontally. The AS motor
separates from the louver shaft.
5. For attaching the AS motor, insert the shaft of the AS motor
into the D-cut hole of the louver, and perform in reverse
order the procedure for removing the AS motor.
AS motor
Connector (White) Connector

AS motor
(Black)
Louver (Gray)
Louver (White)
10.9.4. REMOVING THE THERMISTOR FOR LIQUID

PIPE, GAS PIPE, DISCHARGED AIR AND
SUCTION AIR
the Front Panel". Expansion valve
2. Remove the electrical box according to the section
"Removing the Electrical Box".
Thermistor for the liquid pipe
3. Removing the Thermistor for the Liquid Pipe Thermistor for the holder
Remove the butyl sheet that protects the thermistor for the
liquid pipe and remove the thermistor from the holder. Lead wire of the thermistor
Butyl sheet
10
4. Removing the Thermistor for the Gas Pipe
Remove the piping insulation material that protects the Expansion valve Plastic tie
thermistor for the gas pipe, by cutting the plastic tie and the Gas pipe Thermistor for the gas pipe
surrounding tapes. Then, remove the thermistor from the Piping insulation material
holder.
Thermistor holder
Lead wire of the thermistor
Page 10-77
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/76 SERVICING
5. Removing the thermistor for the discharge air Vertical louver
Remove the thermistor for the discharge air from the holder
of the vertical louver and the hook at the right side of the air
outlet.
Transmisor for
the discharge air Holder
Vertical louver
Transmisor for
the discharge air
Holder
120 mm Hook
6. Removing the thermistor for the suction air

Remove the thermistor for the suction air by cutting the 20mm
plastic tie that fixes the thermistor onto the right side of the
electrical box.
Thermistor for the

suction air
Plastic tie

Connector for the remote control switch
the Front Panel".
2. Remove one screw for the electrical box panel. Screw
3. Remove the power supply wiring and the wiring connection
between the indoor unit and outdoor unit. Connector for the AS
Motor
Electrical
Earth box panel
screws Terminal board
Screw Screw
Connector for the fan motor
4. Remove the lead wires for the expansion valve, the fan
motor, the thermistors for the liquid pipe and the gas pipe,
the AS Motor (X 2) and the remote control switch from the
connectors. Also, remove ground wires (x2) of the heat
exchanger.
5. Remove the thermistor for the discharge air from the holder
that is fixed at the vertical louver of the air outlet.
6. Draw out the electrical box toward the front side after
removing the two screws that fix the electrical box.
7. For attaching the electrical box, set the electrical box,
connect the connectors and perform in reverse order the
procedure for removing the electrical box.
Page 10-78
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/77

1. Remove the front panel according to the section "Removing Heat Heat exchanger
the Front Panel". exchanger
2. Remove the electrical box according to the section Detach
"Removing the Electrical Box Panel". the
3. Remove the drain pan from the unit by detaching the hooks hook
(B)
(A) and (B) from the left side of the drain pan, and by
detaching the hook (C) while you are pulling the right side of Drain pan
the air panel toward the front side.
Detach the
4. For attaching the drain pan, perform in reverse order the
hook (A) Detach the hook (C)
procedure for removing the drain pan.
� NOTE:
Make sure that the hooks (A), (B) and (C) are hooked
correctly.
Draw the drain
pan toward the
front side
10.9.7. REMOVING THE HEAT EXCHANGER

Heat exchanger
the Front Panel".
the Drain Pan".
4. Remove the piping stay at the rear side of the indoor unit. Rear side of the indoor unit
Screw
Rear piping of the heat
exchanger
Piping stay Screw
5. Detach the hook that holds the left side of the heat Screw
exchanger and remove one screw that fixes the heat
exchanger.
Detach the
hook
6. Remove one screw that fixes the heat exchanger and

detach the hook that holds the right side of the heat
exchanger. Detach the hook
10
Screw
Page 10-79
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/78 SERVICING
7. Lift up the heat exchanger. Draw out the rear piping of the
heat exchanger from the square hole by pulling the upper Unit body
part of the heat exchanger forward, and then remove the Square hole
heat exchanger.
8. For attaching the heat exchanger, perform in reverse order
the procedure for removing the heat exchanger.
Pull the upper part of the
heat exchanger forward
� NOTE:
After attaching the heat exchanger, make sure that the
hooks and the screws at the right side and the left side of Heat exchanger
the heat exchanger are correctly attached.

1. Remove the heat exchanger according to the section Supporting plate
"Removing the Heat Exchanger".
2. Remove the supporting plate for the bearing by pushing the
knobs at both sides of the supporting plate toward the inside
and by detaching the hooks.
Push the knobs at both sides
and detach the hooks
Knob
Bearings (inside)
Hook
Hook
3. Remove the motor holders 1 and 2 that fix the fan motor. In Motor holder 2
order to remove the motor holder, insert the screwdriver at Fan motor
the hook part as shown in the figure.
Motor holder 1
4. After removing the motor holder 1, loosen one screw (1) that
fixes the motor shaft and the fan.
Screwdriver
Hook
Motor holder 1,2
5. Draw the fan leftward while you are lifting up the bearing Fan motor
Lift up the fan and draw
side of the fan slightly. Then, the fan and the fan motor are the fan leftward
removed.
Loosen the screw
Page 10-80
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/79
6. For attaching the fan motor and the fan, perform in reverse Partition
8mm Partition plate
order the procedure for removing the fan motor and the fan. plate
Fan motor
7. Fix the fan at the position with a 8mm clearance between Bearing
the left end (bearing side) of the fan and the partition plate.
8. Fix the fan motor with the outlet of the lead wire at the
position as shown below.
Fan motor
Lead wire of the

motor
60°
10.9.9. REMOVING THE ELECTRONIC EXPANSION

VALVE
the Front Panel".
3. The butyl sheet is adhered around the piping of the heat
exchanger, the electronic expansion valve and the inlet
piping and outlet piping of the electronic expansion valve.
Remove the butyl sheet of the surface of the piping, the coil
part of the expansion valve and the part of the valve body.
4. Prepare two spanners. Hold the part of the valve body with
one spanner and loosen the lock nut with another spanner Expansion valve coil
by turning the lock nut counterclockwise. Heat exchanger
� NOTE:
Turn the lock nut by a few turns. Then, the drive part
part. Remove the butyl
Prepare the new drive part for replacement (service part) sheet
with the position of the driver (drive screw) already adjusted. Remove the butyl
sheet
� NOTE: Lead wire of
expansion valve
part and prevent the dust, the foreign particles and others
from entering the separation part. (The part that is
10
exposed by the separation is the mechanical part of the
valve).
Do not damage the junction part of the valve with the
tools.
Put the drive part onto the valve body, hold the drive part
lock nut to the screw part of the valve body. Tighten the lock
nut with a spanner after tightening lightly by hand.
The tightening torque should be within the range of
12Nm(120kg-cm) ~ 15Nm (150kg-cm).
Page 10-81
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/80 SERVICING
� NOTE:
Do not apply great forces, such as the rotating torque
by hand when you are tightening the lock nut.
Although the direction of the eccentric part of the motor is Pulse Motor
Pulse Motor
assembled with the eccentric part of the motor directed
Drive Part
toward the counterdirection of the fittings for piping at the Drive Part
GearGear
valve body, the alteration of this direction does not affect
the open/close function of the valve. Output Shaft
Output Shaft
Therefore, the adjustment of the direction of the motor
LockLock
NutNut Adjustment of direction is not required.
part is not required if the position of the motor is moved Bellows
Bellows
Adjustment of direction
toward the rotating direction after the replacement, as is not required
Valve
Valve
Valve
Valve Valve Part
Valve Part
However, make sure that the direction of the motor for Valvebody
Body Sheet
sheet
Valve
the coil of the electronic expansion valve does not touch
5. Attach the removed butyl sheet to the electronic expansion
valve again.
Fig. 1 Expansion Valve Fig. 2 Direction of Drive Part
Page 10-82
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/81
10.10. RPK-2.5~4.0
� NOTE:
In order to remove the filter, you need to change
the louver position using one of the following remote
control switches: PC-P1HE and PC-RLH3A. SET TEMP.
FAN HIGH SWING
LOUVER ON/OFF TIMER
COOL MED
1. Press the "��" switch. "��" (Up & Down Panel Operation) HEAT LOW
ADDS RN HR
NO FUNCTION UNIT
DEFROST
will be displayed in the Liquid Crystal Display. DRY A/C SERVICE
ABNML FILTER
+ CENTRAL
AUTO VENT H.STRG T. RUN CHECK
2. When you are operating multiple indoor units by means of a RUN / STOP TEMP.
2
remote control switch, press the TEMP. (Temperature
Setting) switch and set the address that you need to open.
MODE FAN SPEED ON/OFF TIMER RESET
3. By pressing the TIME (Time Setting) switch, you keep the

VENTI LOUVER CHECK
louver at a horizontal position. If you press the "∇" when the 1 TIME
louver angle is at a closing position, the louver will move to

the horizontal position.
If you press the "∆" when the louver angle is at the 3
horizontal position, the louver angle will move to the closing
position.
� In case of PC-LH3A
1. Face the transmitter toward the receiver of the indoor unit
and press the RESET switch.
AUTO Hi
H E AT Me
DRY °C Lo
COOL TIMER
2. Change the louver angle to the horizontal position. If you FA N ON OFF
press the RESET switch when the louver angle is horizontal MODE
RUN/STOP
FAN
position, the louver will be moved at the closing position.
RESET TEMP. LOUVER
1 2 CANCEL SET
OFF TIME ON TIME

TIMER
3. Pull the air filter downward from the air filter grille.
AirIntake
Air IntakeGrille
Grille
10
4. Press the “Reset” switch on the remote control switch Air Filter
Air Filter
after cleaning the air filter
Catch
Catch
4. Press the "Reset" switch on the remote control switch after

cleaning the air filter.
Page 10-83
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/82 SERVICING
10.10.1. REMOVING THE RIGHT SIDE COVER

1. Remove one screw fixing the right side cover.
Release Catch
Release Catch Remove Screw.
Remove Screw
2. Release the lower left side catch of the right side cover.
Pull the right cover slighty and release the catch.
Right
Right Side Cover
Side Cover
Lift upward.
Lift upward
Push
Push
Catch
Catch
3. Remove the lower side of the right side cover, and release Catch
Catch
the upper side catch.
Catch
Catch Liftupward
Lift upward.
Square
Square
Hole
Hole Right
Right
Side Cover
Side Cover
Page 10-84
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/83
10.10.2. REMOVING THE THERMISTORS FOR

LIQUID PIPE, GAS PIPE, DISCHARGE AIR
AND SUCTION AIR
1. Remove the right side cover according to the section Expansion
Expansion
“Removing right side cover”, and remove the suction air Valve
Valve
grille.
FreezeProtection
Freeze Protection
“Removing the electrical box panel”. Thermistor
Thermistor
3. Removing the Thermistor for the Liquid Pipe. Thermistor

Thermistor
Remove the butyli sheet that protects the thermistor for the Holder
Holder
Thermistor
liquid pipe and remove the thermistor from holder.
Thermistor
LeadWire
Lead Wire
ButylSheet
Butyl Sheet
Holder Plastic Tie (1 piece)

4. Removing the Thermistor for the Gas Pipe. Plastic Tie (1 piece)
Remove the piping insulation material that protects the Thermistor
Thermistor Holder
PipingInsulation
Piping Insulation
thermistor for the gas pipe, by cutting the plastic and the GasGas
Pipe Thermistor
pipe Thermistor
(Tape- Covered)
(Tape-Covered)
surrounding tapes. Then, remove thge thermistor from the
holder.
Thermistor Lead
Thermistor Lead
Wire
Expansion
Expansion
Wire
Valve
Valve
Gas Pipe
Gas Pipe
5. Removing the Thermistor for Discharge Air. Discharge

Discharge
Remove the plastic tie that fix the thermistor for discharge Air
Air Thermistor
Thermistor
and remove the thermistor from the frame work.
ASMotor
AS Motor
Thermistor
Thermistor
Lead Wire
Lead Wire
PlasticTie
Plastic Tie
35mm
35mm
6. Removing the Thermistor for the suction Air. Heat

Heat SuctionAirAir
Suction
Remove the aluminium tape that fix the thermistor onto the Exchanger
Exchanger Thermistor
Thermistor
right side of the electrical box.
25mm
25mm
10
Aluminum
Aluminum
Tape
Tape
Piping
Piping
Cover
Cover
Page 10-85
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/84 SERVICING

1. Remove the right side cover according to the section
“Removing right side cover”, and remove the suction air
grille.
2. Pull the cover of the discharge air lower side toward the
front side, and remove it.
3. Remove 4 screws fixing the drain pan toward the lower side
Cover for
and remove it. Cover for
Discharge
Side Air
Discharge Air
Lower
Lower Side
Pull toward Front Side

Pull toward Front Side
4. Remove the right side cover according to the section Heat Exchanger
Heat Exchanger
grille. Pulltoward
Pull toward
Screw FrontSide
Front Side
5. Pull the cover of the discharge air lower side toward the Screw
front side, and remove it. (4(4pcs.)
pcs.)
6. Remove 4 screws fixing the drain pan toward the lower side
and remove it.
B
DrainPan
Drain Pan
A
Putty
Putty Catch
Catch
Catch
Catch
DrainPan
Drain Pan DrainPan
Drain Pan
Viewfrom
View from
A A Viewfrom
View from
B B
Page 10-86
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/85

1. Remove the right side cover according to the section Connector for
Connector for
Connector for Gas
Connector for Gas Fan
FanMotor
Motor (CN29)
(CN29)
and
and Freeze Protection
Freeze Protection
grille. Thermistor (THM5,THM3)
Thermistor (THM5,THM3) Connector for
Connector for
2. Remove one screw for the electrical Box Panel. Remote
Remote Control
Control
Switch
Switch (CN13)
(CN13)
3. Remove the power supply wiring and the wiring connection
between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit. Electrical
Electrical
4. Remove the lead wires for the expansion valve, the fan Box
BoxCover
Cover
motor the thermistors for the liquid pipe and the gas pipe,
Connector
Connectorfor
the AS motor and the remote control switch for three Screw
Screw Auto-Louver
for
for Auto-Louver
Motor
Motor(CN22)
connectors. Also, remove ground wires of the heat for
exchanger. Earth
Earth
(CN22)
Wiring
Wiring
5. Remove the thermistor for discharge air and suction air.
6. Remove the two screws of electrical box. Screw
Screw
7. Detach the hook of upperside of electrical box.
Connector for Terminal
TerminalBoard
Board
Connector for
8. For attaching the electrical box, set the electrical box, Expansion Valve (CN11)
Expansion Valve (CN11)
connect the connectors.
� ATTENTION: Upper
Upper Catch
Catch
Make sure that there are two different length of screws.
(A) M4x8
(B) M4x10
(A)Fixed
(A) FixedScrew
Screw
(Truss-Headed
(Truss-Headed
and8mm
and 8mmLength)
Length)
forElectrical
for ElectricalBox
Box
(B)Fixed
(B) Fixed Screw
Screw (Truss-Headed
(Truss-Headed and and
10mm
10mm Length)
Length) for for Electrical
Electrical Box Box
10
Page 10-87
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/86 SERVICING

grille. Pipe
Pipe
2. Remove the drain pan according to the section “Removing Holder
Holder
the drain pan”. M4Truss
M4 Truss
3. Remove the electrical box panel according to the section HeadScrew
Head Screw
”Removing the electrical box panel”. (Length:10mm)
(Length:10mm)
4. Remove the piping stay at the back side of the heat

exchanger.
5. Remove the stay, stay2 ate the left side of the heat
exchanger.
6. Remove the screw of the heat exchanger on the right.
7. Remove the two screws of the upper cover.
M4Truss
M4 Truss Head
Head Screw
Screw
8. Detach the hook of the left and right side, by lift up the heat (Length:10mm)
(Length: 10mm)
exchanger and draw out the heat exchanger to the fron
side.
FixingStay
Fixing Stay1 1 Catch
Catch
� NOTE:
If you don’t lift up the heat exchanger, hook may break
down.
Heat Exchanger
Heat Exchanger
FixingStay
Fixing Stay
2 2
M4 Truss
M4 Truss Head
HeadScrew
Screw
Catch
Catch (Left and
(Left andRight
Rightside)
side)
Fixing Stay33
Fixing Stay (Length:12mm)
(Length: 12mm)
Upper
Upper
Cover
Cover
(b) Pull
(b) Pull toward
toward M4 Truss
M4 Truss
Front Side.
Front Side HeadScrew
Head Screw
(Length:12mm)
(Length: 12mm)
(a)(a) Liftupup
Lift
HeatExchanger
Heat Exchanger
Page 10-88
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/87
10.10.6. REMOVING THE FAN AND THE FAN

MOTOR
1. Remove the heat exchanger according to the section
“Removing the heat exchanger”.
2. Remove one screw and two catches at the cover of the Screw
Screw
upper side fan motor and remove the cover. Cover
Cover
3. Loose one screw fixing the motor shaft and the fan.
Release
Release
Loosen
Loosen Screw.
Screw Cover Catch.
Cover Catch
4. Remove three screws fixing the fan motor plate and remove
the fan motor.
Fixing
Fixing
Plate
Plate
Screw
Screw
(3 pcs.)
(3 pcs.)
5. Remove the two screws fixing the fan motor and the fan, Fan
Fan Screw
Screw
perform the reverse procedures for removing. (2 pcs.)
(2 pcs.)
Bearing
Bearing
Partition
Partition
PartitionPlate
Plate
6. Fix the fan at the position with 9.5mm clerance between the
left end (Bearing side) of the fan and partition plate.
Partition
9.5mm
9.5mm Plate
Plate
Bearing
Bearing FanMotor
Fan Motor
Fan
Fan
10
7. Fix the fan motor with the oulet of lead wire at the position at 50°o
50
as shown below.
Motor LeadWire
Motor Lead Wire
Fan Motor
Fan Motor
Page 10-89
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/88 SERVICING
10.10.7. REMOVING THE SUCTION AIR GRILLE

“Removing right side cover”.
2. Remove one screw of the left side cover.
LeftSide
Left Side
Cover
Cover
Screw
Screw
Release
Side Catch
3. Detach the hook (A) of left side cover. Release Catch
Suction Air Grille
Upper Suction Air Grille
4. There are the hook (B) at the left side cover will be Upper Side.
removed.
A Catch
A Catch
B Catch
B Catch
(3 parts)
(3 parts)
Pull toward
Pull toward
Left Side
Left Side.
Left Side Cover
Left Side Cover
5. Remove four screws of suction air grille. Hook

Hook
6. Lift up the suction grille slightly, you can remove the suction Lift Upper
Lift Upper Side.
Side
air grille by detaching hooks.
Screw(4(4
Screw pcs.)
pcs.)
Page 10-90
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/89

the Front Panel".
Remove the butyl sheet of the surface of the piping, the coil Heat Expansion
part of the expansion valve and the part of the valve body. Heat
Exchanger Expansion
Valve Coil
Exchanger Valve Coil
4. Prepare two spanners. Hold the part of the valve body with
one spanner and loosen the lock nut with another spanner
by turning the lock nut counterclockwise. Pipe
Pipe
Holder
� NOTE: Holder
part.
Prepare the new drive part for replacement (service part)
Remove
Remove
Butyl Sheet
Butyl Sheet Lead Wire of
� NOTE: Lead WireValve
Expansion of
Expansion Valve
from entering the separation part. (The part that is
exposed by the separation is the mechanical part of the
valve).
Do not damage the junction part of the valve with the
tools.
6. Put the drive part onto the valve body, hold the drive part
The tightening torque should be within the range of
12Nm(120kg-cm) ~ 15Nm (150kg-cm).
10
Page 10-91
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/90 SERVICING
� NOTE:
by hand when you are tightening the lock nut. Pulse Motor
Although the direction of the eccentric part of the motor is Pulse Motor
assembled with the eccentric part of the motor directed Drive Part
Gear Drive Part
toward the counterdirection of the fittings for piping at the Gear
Output Shaft
Lock
LockNut
Nut
part is not required if the position of the motor is moved Bellows Adjustment of direction
Bellows
toward the rotating direction after the replacement, as
Valve
shown in the Figure 2. Valve
Valve
However, make sure that the direction of the motor for Valve Valve Part
Valve Body Sheet Valve Part
Valve Body Sheet
valve again.
10.11. RPK 1.5FSN1M

Wall type

1. Pull up the right side and the left side of the flat panel as
2. Hold up the air filter and remove the nails, then pull down
the air filter.
Page 10-92
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
valve again.
Servicing
10/90 SERVICING
� NOTE:
10.11. RPK 1.5FSN1M
Wall type
by hand when you are tightening the lock nut. Pulse Motor
Although the direction of the eccentric Pulse Motor
10.11.1. REMOVING THE AIR FILTERpart of the motor is
assembled with the eccentric part of the motor directed Drive Part
1. Pull up the right side and the left side of the flat panel as Gear Drive Part
toward the counterdirection of the fittings for piping at the Gear
Output Shaft
Lock
LockNut
Nut
part is not required if the position of the motor is moved Bellows Adjustment of direction
Bellows
Valve
shown in the Figure 2. Valve
Valve
However, make sure that the direction of the motor for Valve Valve Part
Valve Body Sheet Valve Part
Valve Body Sheet
2. valve
Hold up again.
the air filter and remove the nails, then pull down
8. the
Afterairfinishing
filter. the replacement, attach the electronic
10.11. RPK 1.5FSN1M

Wall type

1. Pull up the right side and the left side of the flat panel as
2. Hold up the air filter and remove the nails, then pull down
10
the air filter.
Page 10-93
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/91
10.11.2. REMOVING FRONT PANEL

1. Open the left panel completely.
After removing the back of right arm pushing towars inside, Flat Panel
remove the flat panel slowly pulling and closing.
2. Remove the air filter.
Front Panel
3. Remove the two screws.
(Pay attention not to snap the nails)

4. Pull the lower center part of front panel and revove nails
paying attention not to touch the side blade.
Hold up slightly front panel, so that upper rectangular hole
(3 positions) release from the nails of the body.
Body
5. Regarding installation of front panel, set firstly air oulet part,
and inlet the upper protusion part (3 positions). Then fix
nails pushing the lower center part.
Front panely
� NOTE:
Gap between front panel and air outlet part may be a Rectangular note
cause of leaking wind.
Fron panel may fall due to water dropping.
Front panel Body
6. Tighten the two screws and install air filter
7. Put in the bearing part of right and left arm of the flat panel
along the step of the body correctly.
Then close the flat panel. Bearing part
Hole
Stop
Page 10-94
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/92 SERVICING
1. Remove the front panel according to the section "Removing Fixed screw for Fixed screw for electrical box
front panel". earth wiring
2. Remove the cover of the electrical Box Panel
3. Remove the cover of terminal board, power supply wiring,
transmission wiring and remote control wiring.
4. Remove the thermistor for liquid pipe in PCB, thermistor for
gas pipe, thermistor for discharge and suction air, connector
for fan motor, earth wiring and connector for expansion
valve.
5. Remove the three fixed screws for electrical box.
Fixed screw for

electrical box
Fixed screw for

terminal board
10.11.4. REMOVING THE MOTOR FOR THE

AUTOMATIC LOUVER
1. Remove the front panel according to the section "Removing AS Motor
front panel".
2. Remove the electrical box panel panel according to the
section "Removing electrical box panel"
3. Remove the screw fixing AS Motor
4. Pull AS Motor to the side, then AS Motor is released from
the side blade bearing.
5. Regarding installation of AS Motor, put in the bearing of AS
Motor to dent part of side blade, and set it in reverse order
than performed for removing.
10
Screw fixing AS Motor
Page 10-95
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/93
LIQUID PIPE, GAS PIPE, DISCHARGE AIR
AND SUCTION AIR
1. Remove the front panel according to the section "Removing Thermistor for discharge air Thermistor for defrosting
front panel".
3. Removing the thermistor for defrosting:
– Remove the butyl sheet that protects the thermistor for
deforsting and release the thermistor from the holder.
– Regarding installation of the Thermistor for defrosting, fix
the thermistor with the holder and protect the thermistor
with butyl sheet.
– After installing the thermistor, fix the expansion valve and
thermistor for defrosting and gas pipe with a band and
cover piping area with butyl sheet.
4. Removing the thermistor for the Gas Pipe:
– Remove the butyl sheet that protects the thermistor for
the gas pipe. Then remove the thermistor from the holder Thermistor for Discharge air Thermistor for Gas pipe
– Regarding installation of the thermistor for the gas pipe,

fix the thermistor with the holder and protect the
thermistor with butyl sheet.
– After installation of the thermistor, fix the expansion valve
and thermistor for defrosting and gas pipe with a band
and cover piping area with butyl sheet.
5. Removing the thermistor for Discharge Air
– The thermistor for discharge air is in the position A or B.
– Remove the thermistor by cuting the two bands that fix Thermistor for suction air
the thermistor in the cable band of heat exchanger.
– Regarding installation of the thermistor, fix the thermistor
with two bands in cable band.
6. Removing the thermistor for Suction Air
– Remove the thermistor by pulling out rubber bush from
the body and by removing insulation thax fixes the
termistor from the backside.
– Regarding installation of the thermistor for the suction air,
put the rubber bush and fix the thermistor with the
insulation.
Rubber bush fot the thermistor for suction air
Backside of the body Body
Thermistor for the

suction Air Lead
Wire
Location of the
Insulation
thermistor for the
suction Air
Page 10-96
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/94 SERVICING
front panel".
3. Remove two screws fixing the drain pan C� � B
Drain pan fixed screw

A
Drain pan fixed screw
4. Release three nails fixing the drain pan and remove the A
drain pan from the body.
5. Regarding installation of the drain pan, perform it in reverse Drain pan
center pillar
order the procedure for the removing.
� NOTE:
Confirm if the 3 nails fix the drain pan correctly. Drain pan Move the nail to
nail fixed the arrow
direction and
� remove drain pan
center pillar
B Drain pan fixed

nail
Release to the
� arrow direction
C Drain pan fixed

nail
�
Release to the
arrow direction
10
Page 10-97
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/95

1. Remove the front panel according to the section "Removing Unit back side Piping cover
front panel".
section "Removing electrical box panel".
the Drain Pan".
Heat exchanger tail tube
4. Remove two nails in the inside of piping cover at backside Piping cover front side
of the indoor unit and remove piping cover.
5. Remove a screw fixing rigth side of heat exchanger.
6. Remove a screw fixing left side of heat exchanger and
remove the catch.
Piping hold nail
. Heat exchanger fixed screw
Heat exchanger catch part
7. Pull up heat exchanger obliquely-direction and pull out heat Notched part of body
exchanger tail tube from the notched part of the body, and
the remove the heat exchanger. Body
� NOTE:
Confirm that no gap exist between heat exchanger and
the motor holder. Gap may cause a problem of dew
spark
�
Heat exchanger
Page 10-98
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/96 SERVICING
10.11.8. REMOVING THE FAN AND THE FAN

MOTOR
1. Remove the heat exchanger according to the section Motor holder
"Removing the heat exchanger".
2. Remove the motor holder
3. Loose the screw that fixes fan motor bearing and the fan.
Motor holder
fixed screw
Fan
Fan Motor
Fan fixed screw
4. Remove the bearing holder Bearing holder

5. Hold the fan with a hand and hold up the bearing side
slightly and pull it to the left. Then, remove the fan and the
fan motor.
6. Regarding installation of fan motor and fan, perform it in a
reverse order procedure for the removing. Bearing holder
fixing screw
Hold up fan
and pull it
Bearing
7. Fix the fan at the position where the gap between right side
fan motor and the body is 6 ~ 7 mm
10
Body
6~7 mm
8. Fix the fan motor with the outlet of lead wire at the position 45°
at as shown.
Location of fan
motor lead wire
Page 10-99
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/97

front panel".
Remove the butyl sheet of the surface of the piping, the coil
part of the expansion valve and the part of the valve body.
4. Prepare two spanners (no. 9 and No. 14). Hold the part of
the valve body with one spanner and loosen the lock nut
with another spanner by turning the lock nut clockwise in
relation to the motor.
� NOTE:
Pulse Motor
separates from the screw and you can remove the drive Drive Part
part. Gear
6. Prepare the new drive part for replacement (service part)

with the position of the driver (drive screw) already adjusted. Output Shaft
� NOTE: Lock Nut

Bellows
from entering the separation part. (The part that is Valve
exposed by the separation is the mechanical part of the Valve Valve
valve). Sheet Part
Do not damage the junction part of the valve with the Valve body
tools.
7, Put the drive part onto the valve body, hold the drive part
The tightening torque should be within the range of Expansion Valve
12 Nm(120kg-cm) ~ 15Nm (150kg-cm).
� NOTE:
Do not apply great forces, such as the rotating torque Adjustment of direction is not required.
and the bending load, to the motor by holding the motor (However, pay attention not to touch the pipes
by hand when you are tightening the lock nut. or the drain pan.)
Although the direction of the eccentric part of the motor is
assembled with the eccentric part of the motor directed
toward the counterdirection of the fittings for piping at the
the open/close function of the valve.
part is not required if the position of the motor is moved
shown beside.
However, make sure that the direction of the motor for
the coil of the electronic expansion valve does not touch Direction of Drive Part
valve again.
Page 10-100
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/98 SERVICING
10.11.10. REMOVING THE PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD
section "Removing electrical box panel" Receiver wiring connector
2. Remove service board wiring connector of control PCB,
sensor wiring connector and earth line.
3. Remove sensor fixing cover
Service board
wiring connector Earth line fixed
screw
Service board
Sensor fixed
Sensor fixed
cover screw
cover
Sensor board
4. Remove wiring A and B in the terminal board.

Spacer Spacer
5. Remove all remaning connectors in control PCB (Expansion
valve connection and AB wiring in terminal board connector
can not be removed).
6. Remove 5 spacers and remove PCB.
Control PCB
Spacer
Spacer
10
Page 10-101
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/99
7. Leave power source printed board unresolved after
removing space lock of power source printed board
(Removing the spacer totally is not required).
Spacer
8. Remove the side cover of electricl box after removing the 3

locks of side cover. (Flathead screwdriver makes the work
easy).
Side cover
lock
Side cover
lock
Side cover
9. Pull ou the power source printed board from the electrical

Pull out
box.
Power source
printed board
Page 10-102
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/100 SERVICING
10.12. RPF
Floor Type
10.12.1. REMOVING THE AIR INLET GRILLE

1. Loosen the screws for the fixing plate at the right side of
each air inlet grille. Then, move the fixing plates.
2. By pushing the knob at both sides of the air inlet grille
towards the arrow mark direction, the air inlet grille can be
opened with an angle of 30°.
3. Remove the air inlet grille from the hinged part.
Knob

1. The air filter is located on the inner side of the air inlet grille.
Remove all the air inlet grilles.
2. Remove the air filter by pulling the knob of the air filter.
10.12.3. REMOVING THE DISCHARGE AIR GRILLE

1. The discharge air grilles are mounted on the top by means Fixing plate
10
of a guide rail. Top panel
2. By opening the top panel and by sliding the discharge air
grilles, you can remove the discharge air grilles.
Discharge air grille
Page 10-103
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/101
1. Remove the air filter according to the section "Removing the
Air Filter".
2. Remove the front panel from the slit after removing the four
fixing screws at the lower part and pulling out the front panel Front
downwards. panel
Screw
Screw

2. Remove the air filter according to the section "Removing
the Air Filter".
the front panel".
4. Remove the mounting plate for the fan motor after removing
the four fixing screws.
5. Disconnect the wiring connector for the fan motor. Remove Connector
the wiring assembly and the connector.
Wiring
assembly
6. Remove the casing (1) by pressing the hook part at the (1)
four positions towards the inner side.
Hook
Casing
7. Loosen the screws by means of a hexagon wrench.
Motor
To loosen Hexagon
wrench
Page 10-104
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/102 SERVICING
8. After removing the fixing plate, remove the fan motor by
sliding the fan motor backwards. Pay attention not to drop
the fan motor.
Band
Fixing screw

BOARD (PCB)
2. Remove the air filter according to the section "Removing
Side panel
the Air Filter".
the front panel".
4. You can remove the side panel by removing the
three fixing screws and pulling the side panel downwards.
Screw
5. Remove the electrical box panel after removing the

two fixing screws. Electrical box
panel
Screw
6. You can turn the electrical box up to an angle of 90°

by removing the two fixing screws and by unhooking the
10
hook at the rear side of the electrical box.
7. Four holders support the PCB. Pull out the PCB from the
PCB hole by pushing the expanded part of the holder by
means of long-nose pliers and by putting a finger near
the hole of the PCB.
� NOTES:
1. Do not touch the electrical components. Do not apply a
great force to the PCB. If you apply a great force, the
PCB will become faulty.
Rear side Front side
2. When you are reassembling, make sure that each of the unit of the unit
terminal is correctly connected. Refer to the wire marks
and the terminal codes. If you connect the terminals
incorrectly, a malfunction or a damage of the electrical Expanded part of
components will occur. holder
Page 10-105
PCB (low voltage)
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/103

2. Remove the air filter according to the section "Removing the Side panel
Air Filter".
the front panel".
4. Remove the side panel after removing the three fixing
screws.
10.13. RPFI
Floor-Concealed Type

1. The air filter is located at the inner upper part of the inlet.
2. Remove the air filter by pulling the center knob and by
bending the filter.
Air filter

Air Filter".
2. Remove the front lower panel after removing the screws
(1.0HP: 9 pcs. 1.5HP: 10 pcs.) at the lower part of
the front panel.
Front lower
panel
Page 10-106
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/104 SERVICING
3. Remove the front upper panel after removing the
eleven fixing screws.
Screw
Front upper
panel

Air Filter".
the Front Panel".
3. Remove the fan motor as explained in items 4 to 8 of the
section "Removing the Fan Motor".

BOARD (PCB)
the Front Panel".
2. Remove the PCBs as explained in items 5 to 7 of the
section "Removing the Printed Circuit Board (PCB)".

Air Filter".
the Front Panel".
3. Remove the thermistor as explained in items 4 to 6 of the
section, "Removing the Thermistors for the Liquid Pipe and
the Gas Pipe".
10
Page 10-107
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/105
10.14. CLEANING THE INDOOR HEAT EXCHANGER
10.14.1. REQUIRED TOOLS FOR CLEANING (FOR ALL INDOOR UNITS)

No. Tool Remarks
1 Cleaning water pump A water pump that is equipped with a tank is recommended
2 Water tank clean water Approx. 18 liters

3 Nozzle
4 Brush (non-metal) If the heat exchanger is heavily clogged with dust, remove the dust with this brush.
The length of brush should be 25 ~ 35mm.
5 Hose for water pan Select a hose according to the site requirements
6 Bucket 2 for 5 liters
7 Phillips screwdriver 1
8 Nipper 1
9 Adjustable wrench 1
10 Megohm tester 500V
11 Cleaning agent Select a neutral-type cleaning agent
12 Spray To spray the cleaning water
13 Tape with adhesive To fix the vinyl sheet in order to protect the room from the cleaning water
14 Rope 1m, 4 Pieces
15 Vinyl sheet Select a vinyl sheet with 0.5mm thickness
16 Gloves
Page 10-108
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/106 SERVICING
No. Remarks
17 Cleaning water collector
− In-the-ceiling type
− 2-way cassette
− Wall type
− Ceiling type
Bar
Insert the
bar
Transparent Insert the bar

vinyl sheet
Boss
Hose
Inner side of Ø120 hole should be covered with felt sheet in order to insert the spray nozzle.
18 Cleaning water collector kit
− 4-way cassette
No Part Material Remarks Qty

1 Tent with handling panel Vinyl chloride sheet 1t, with handling panel 0.3t 1
2 Support A Stainless 8
3 Sheet A Vinyl chloride sheet 1t, with support B and magnet 1
4 Sheet B Vinyl chloride sheet 1t, with support B and magnet 1
5 Sheet C Vinyl chloride sheet 1t, with support B and magnet 1
6 Sheet D Vinyl chloride sheet 1t, with support B and magnet 1
7 Motor panel Vinyl chloride sheet 1t, with magnet 1
8 Motor band Vinyl chloride sheet 1t, magic tape 1
9 Wiring panel Vinyl chloride sheet 1
10 Gloves Rubber 1
11 Sling rope 1m 4
10
Tent
With
Handing panel magnets Continuously
With
Elastic support B
Sheet A Sheet B Sheet C Sheet D
string
Support A
With magnets
Motor
band
Page 10-109
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/107
10.14.2. CLEANING THE 4-WAY CASSETTE

INDOOR UNIT
� Spread a vinyl sheet over the floor in order to protect
furniture and others from the cleaning water before doing
this work.
Procedure:
– Remove the optional air panel according to the section � NOTES:
"Removing the Optional Air panel". Remove the drain pan after removing the drain water on
– Remove the electrical box after opening the electrical box the drain pan.
panel and after disconnecting the connectors between – Remove the drain water on the drain pan after pulling
the indoor units and the outdoor units and other out the rubber plug. Make sure that water can flow
connectors, according to the section, "Removing the smoothly through the hole by pricking the hole with a
Electrical box Panel". pencil.
– Remove the bell mouth and the fan according to the – Remove the drain pan after removing the four fixing
section, "Removing the Turbo Fan and the Fan Motor". screws. Carefully remove the drain pan, because the
– Remove the drain pan according to the section drain water may remain at the bottom of the drain pan.
"Removing the Drain Pan". – Clean and dry the drain pan after removing the drain
– Remove the float switch according to the section pan. Carefully handle the drain pan to avoid damaging
"Removing the Float Switch". the drain pan.
1. Attach a vinyl sheet around the heat exchanger so that the Motor panel
cleaning water will not be splashed over the insulation
surface and the drain-up pump. Fix the vinyl sheet on the
side plate of the heat exchanger by means of a tape with
adhesive. Seal the gap between the vinyl sheets by means
of a tape with adhesive.
� NOTE:
Put a vinyl sheet here
Wear gloves to avoid any injury by the fins of the heat in order to protect the
exchanger. Water collector insulation sheet from
In addition to the magnets, fix the motor panel by means the splashed cleaning
of a tape with adhesive Attach the water water.
collector to the heat
Motor band exchanger.
Magnet Magnet
Magic tape
Tape with adhesive

Magnet
Magnet Inner side

Vinyl sheet
Motor 5 Nos. (A,B,C,D)
panel
Page 10-110
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/108 SERVICING
2. Scratch off the dust on the inner surface of the heat
exchanger downwards by means of a brush. Collect all the
dust in a bucket or a carton box.
3. Suspend the cleaning water collector from the indoor unit.

– Tie the rope on the suspension bolts for the indoor unit
and put the rope downwards.
– Insert the support bars into the holes of the water
collector.
– Tie the rope on the support bar of the water collector and
suspend the water collector.
– Connect a hose to the boss and put the end of the hose
in a bucket.
Indoor unit Suspension bolt

Rope
Suspension bracket
Support bar Cleaning water 20~30mm The water collector

(8 Nos.) collector should be located
20 to 30mm higher
Boss than the bottom of
the unit.
Hose Cleaning water

collector
Bucket 10
4. Put approximately 15 liters of the cleaning agent for the
aluminium fins in a supply tank.
Cleaning agent for

the aluminium fins
Page 10-111
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/109
5. Insert the spray nozzle through the hole of the cleaning
water collector. Operate the water pump and clean the dust
on the heat exchanger. After cleaning, spray the clean water
in order to remove the cleaning water.
Adjust the pressure of the water pump in order not to
damage the fins.
� NOTE:
If the cleaning water stays, the fins will be corroded. Cleaning spray
Adjust the pressure of the pump at 2.5 to 5.0 kg/cm² in
order not to damage the fins.
Bucket
6. After cleaning, mount the drain pan by extending the rope

downwards.
� NOTE:
If the cleaning water collector is removed, wipe off the
drops from the indoor unit.
Drain pan
Cleaning
water
collector
Page 10-112
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/110 SERVICING
7. Check the insulation of the drain pump with a megohm-
meter. Make sure that the insulation is greater than 1 MΩ
when 500V is applied.
8. Connect the wiring as the wiring was connected before.
9. Neutralization Treatment after the Cleaning
The cleaning agent that is specified in the section 10.14.1 is
neutral-type. However, the cleaning water after the use may
not be neutral. Collect all the cleaning water and make the
necessary neutralization treatment for the cleaning water.
10.14.3. CLEANING THE 2-WAY CASSETTE

INDOOR UNIT
Spread a vinyl sheet over the floor in order to protect furniture
and others from the cleaning water before doing this work.
1. Remove the drain pan according to the section, "Removing
the Drain Pan". Clean the drain pan after removing the drain
pan.
2. Remove the float switch according to the section,
"Removing the Float Switch"
3. Remove the drain-up mechanism according to the section, Fixing
"Removing the Drain-Up Mechanism". plate for
the fan
4. Removing the Dust on the Heat Exchanger

Remove the dust on the fins at the inlet side of the heat Motor panel
exchanger by scratching off downwards.
Collect all the dust in a bucket or a carton box.
Put a vinyl sheet here

in order to protect the
Water collector insulation sheet from
the splashed cleaning
Attach the water
water.
collector to the heat
exchanger.
5. Put a vinyl sheet around the heat exchanger so that the

cleaning water will not be splashed over the insulation
10
surface and the drain-up pump. Fix the vinyl sheet on the
side plate of the heat exchanger by means of a tape with
adhesive.
Seal the gap between the vinyl sheets by means of a tape
with adhesive.
� NOTE:
It is recommended that gloves be used during this work
in order to avoid any injury.
Put a vinyl sheet in order to avoid the splashed cleaning
water.
Page 10-113
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/111
6. Suspend the cleaning water collector from the indoor unit.
Indoor unit
– Connect a rope to the suspension bracket of the indoor
unit and put the rope downwards.
– Insert the support bar into the hole of the cleaning water
collector. Support
– Suspend the cleaning water collector with the rope from bar
the indoor unit. Rope
Suspension bracket
– Connect a hose to the boss for the cleaning water
collector and put the other end in a bucket. Cleaning
7. Spraying the Cleaning Water water collector
Spray the cleaning water over the fins of the heat
exchanger.
Boss
Hose
Bucket
8. Cleaning with clean water

Insert the spray nozzle through the hole of the cleaning
water collector.
Operate the pump and clean the fins with the clean water.
Adjust the pressure of the water pump in order not to Nozzle
damage the fins.
� NOTE:
If the cleaning water stays, the fins will be corroded. Spray
Adjust the pressure of the pump at 2.5 to 5.0 kg/cm²
in order not to damage the fins.
Hose
Bucket
Pump
9. After you finish the cleaning and the dropping water stops,
attach the fan assembly and the drain pan.
10. Check the insulation of the drain-up pump with a megohm-
11. Connect the wiring as the wiring was connected before.
Mount the air distribution chamber and the optional air panel
Page 10-114
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/112 SERVICING
10.14.4. CLEANING THE WALL TYPE INDOOR UNIT

1. Remove each part according to the section "Wall Type".
2. Remove the front panel according to the section, "Removing
the Front Panel".
3. Remove the electrical box according to the section,
the Drain Pan".
5. Remove the heat exchanger according to the sections
"Removing the Heat Exchanger and the Fan Motor".
6. Cleaning
– Remove the dust with a brush.
– Cover a vinyl sheet over the electrical components in
order to protect the electrical components from the
splashed cleaning water.
– If you use the cleaning agent, clean the heat exchanger
with the clean water completely.
– Adjust the pressure of the pump in order not to damage
the fins.
The cleaning agent that is specified in the section 10.14.1
is neutral-type.
However, the cleaning water after the use may not be
neutral.
Collect all the cleaning water and make the necessary
neutralization treatment for the cleaning water. Bucket
Pump
� NOTES:
If the cleaning water stays, the fins will be corroded.
Adjust the pressure of the pump at 2.5 to 5.0 kg/cm²
in order not to damage the fins.
10.14.5. CLEANING THE FLOOR TYPE INDOOR

UNIT AND THE FLOOR CONCEALED TYPE
INDOOR UNIT
the Front Panel".
10
2. Disconnect the drain hose from the field-supplied pipe.
Heat exchanger
3. Cover the rear side of the heat exchanger with a vinyl sheet
after removing the front side partition and the drain pan. Cover the
After covering the rear side, remount the front side partition heat
exchanger
and the drain pan.
with vinyl
sheet
Front side
partition
Drain pan
Page 10-115
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/113
4. By lifting the drain hose, put the end of the hose in a bucket.
Bucket
Drain hose
5. Removing the Dust on the Heat Exchanger

Remove the dust on the heat exchanger with a brush by
scratching the dust downwards. Collect all the dust in a
bucket or a carton box.
Bucket
6. Spray the cleaning water over the fins of the heat

exchanger.
7. Cleaning with the clean water

Cover the wiring connectors with the insulation tape.
Operate the pump and clean the heat exchanger with the
clean water completely.
Adjust the pressure of the pump in order not to damage the
fins.
� NOTES:
Page 10-116
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
10/114 SERVICING
8. After checking that no power is supplied, connect the drain
pipe and remove the insulation tape for the wiring
connectors. Then, mount the front panel correctly.
9. Check the insulation of the terminal board in the electrical
box. If the insulation is greater than 1MΩ by a 500 Megohm-
meter, the insulation is normal.
10.14.6. CLEANING THE CEILING TYPE INDOOR

UNIT
Spread a vinyl sheet over the floor in order to avoid the
cleaning water before doing this work.
1. Remove the left-side panel and the right-side panel

according to the section, "Removing the Side Panel".
2. Remove the discharge deflector according to the section
"Removing the Discharge Air Grille".
3. Open the air inlet grille according to the section "Removing
the Air Filter".
4. Remove the lower panel and the drain pan according to the
section, "Removing the Thermistors for the Liquid Pipe and
the Gas Pipe".
5. Remove the indoor fan motor and the fan assembly
according to the section "Removing the Fan Motor".
6. Remove the partition plate 2 after removing the two fixing
screws.
7. Remove the fixing plate for the fan after removing the two
screws at the left-side partition and one screw at the right-
side partition.
8. Attach the drain pan and the lower panel according to the
procedures in reverse order in the section 4. 10
Page 10-117
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Servicing
SERVICING 10/115
9. Cover all the components (except the drain pan) with a vinyl
sheet in order to avoid the splashed cleaning water.
10. Spray the cleaning water over the fins from the rear side of
the heat exchanger. If the heat exchanger is heavily
covered with the dust, use a brush in order to wipe off the
dust.
11. Cleaning with the Clean Water
– Operate the pump and clean the heat exchanger with the
clean water completely.
– Adjust the pressure of the pump in order not to damage
the fins.
� NOTES:
Wear the gloves in order to avoid any injury during this
work due to the sharp edges of the fins.
Pay attention to the drain pan not to overflow.
12. Check the insulation of the terminal board with a megohm-
13. Make sure that the water can flow smoothly after pouring
the water on the drain pan.
not be neutral.
Collect all the cleaning water and make the necessary
neutralization treatment for the cleaning water.
Page 10-118
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main partts
11. Main parts
CONTENTS
11. MAIN PARTS ___________________________________________________________11-1

11.1. Inverter _______________________________________________________________11-2
11.1.1. Specifications of Inverter FSN(E)/FXN(E) ___________________________________ 11-2
11.1.2. Specifications of Inverter FSVNE __________________________________________ 11-4
11.1.3. Inverter Time Chart _____________________________________________________ 11-5
11.1.4. Protective Function _____________________________________________________ 11-6
11.2. Thermistor _____________________________________________________________11-7
11.2.1. Resistance Value of the Thermistor _________________________________________ 11-8
11.3. Electronic Expansion Valve _______________________________________________11-10
11.3.1. Electronic Expansion Valve for the Outdoor Unit ______________________________ 11-10
11.3.2. Electronic Expansion Valve for the Indoor Unit _______________________________11-11
11.4. Pressure Sensor _______________________________________________________11-12
11.5. Auto Louver Mechanism _________________________________________________11-13
11.5.1. RCI (4-Way Cassette Type) ______________________________________________ 11-13
11.5.2. RCD (2-Way Cassette Type) _____________________________________________ 11-14
11.5.3. RPC (Ceiling Type) ____________________________________________________ 11-15
11.6. Scroll compressor ______________________________________________________11-16
11.6.1. Reliable Mechanism for Low Vibration and Low Sound ________________________ 11-16
11.6.2. Principle of Compression _______________________________________________ 111-6
11
Page 11-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main parts
10/2 MAIN PARTS
11.1.
10.1. INVERTER
INVERTER
11.1.1. SPECIFICATIONS OF INVERTER FSN(E)/FXN(E)

10.1.1. SPECIFICATIONS OF INVERTER FSN(E)/FXN(E)
Aplicable model
Aplicable model RAS-5~32FSN(E)/FXN(E)
RAS5~30FSN(E)/FXN(E)
Aplicable power
Applicable Powersource
Source 3
3 Phase.
Phase, 380V,
380V, 415V
415V 50 Hz
50/HZ
voltage
Input Voltage RAS-5~32FSN(E)
RAS5~30 FSN(E) 8~64A
RAS-8~30FXN(E) 14~66A
RAS8-30 FXN(E) 14~66A
Control Method Vector Control
Range Output Frequency 20~115HZ
Accuracy of Frequency 0,01
Controlled Frequency 0,01 Hz at Applicable frequency range
Output / Characteristics Conditions:
1. Power Source Voltage AC380/415V
2. Non-Loading (Free Output)
3. Ammeter Type Volt-Meter (X1.1)
24~32HP
24 and 30HP
Refer to the note in next page.

Soft Start Stop 0.125~3.00 Hz/s
Protection Function
Excessive High or Low Voltage Excessive Low Voltage at a voltage is lower than 350V DC
for Inverter Excessive High Voltage at a voltage is higher than 750V DC
Abnormality of Current Sensor Stoppage at a current of compressor smaller than 1.5A.
(0A Detection) When the frequency is 15 to 18Hz after starting.
Cause of Abnormality: Failure of Current Sensor
Failure of ISPM
Failure of Compressor / Fan motor
Disconnected Wiring
Page 11-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main partts
MAIN PARTS 10/3
Protection Function
Overcurrent Protection for
Inverter (1)
Detecting current is more than

(2) 150% of the rated current.
(3)
Rated Current x 150%
(4)
Rated Current x 105%
20µs 20ms 30s Time
(1) Short-Circuit Trip of Arm Internal Protection

(2) Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Transistor Module or ISPM
(3) Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip
(4) Electronic Thermal Trip
Condition is maintained longer than 30 seconds or accumulated longer than 3 minutes
during 10 minutes sampling time.
Protection of Transistor module or ISPM has four protection function for self-protection.
Transistor Module (1) Some of the output terminals between "U" and "V", "V" and "W", "W" and "U" has a
short-circuit.
(2) Running current reaches the maximum rated current.
(3) Abnormal temperature is measured by internal thermistor.
(4) Control voltage decreases abnormally.
Overload Control Overload control as a current greater than (Rated Current X105%).
Overload control release at a current smaller than (Rated Current X 88%).
Fin Temperature Increase The unit is stopped when the ISPM temperature is higher than 100°C.
(Only for 24 and 30HP)
Earth Detection The unit is stopped when the compressor is earthing.
(Only for 24 and 30HP)
11
Page 11-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main parts
10/4 MAIN PARTS
11.1.2.
10.1.2. SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS OF
OF INVERTER
INVERTER FSVNE
FSVNE
Applicable Model RAS-3FSVNE, RAS-4/5FSVNE
Applicable Power Source 1 Phase, 220V, 240V 50Hz/220V 60 Hz
Input Voltage 180 ~ 264 VAC
Input Current RAS-3FSVNE: 25A; RAS-4/5HVRNE:32A (at Rated current 220/240V 50Hz)
Control Method Vector Control
Range Output Frequency 20 to 115Hz
Accuracy of Frequency 0.01Hz at Applicable Frequency Range
Controlled Frequency 1Hz
Output / Characteristics
Soft Start Stop 0.125 ~ 3.00 Hz/s

Protection Function
Excessive High or Low Voltage Excessive Low Voltage at a voltage is lower than 194V DC
for Inverter Excessive High Voltage at a voltage is higher than 420V DC
Abnormality of Current Sensor Stoppage at a current of compressor smaller than 1.5A.
(0A Detection) When the frequency is 15 to 18Hz after starting.
Cause of Abnormality: Failure of Current Sensor
Failure of ISPM
Failure of Compressor / Fan motor
Disconnected Wiring
Protection Function
Overcurrent Protection for
Inverter
IGBT Rated Current x 130%
IGBT Rated Current

(Overcurrent setting x 150%
(Overcurrent setting x 105%
(1) Short-Circuit Trip of Arm

(2) Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Internal Protection of ISPM
(3) Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip
(4) Electronic Thermal Trip
Condition is maintained longer than 30 seconds or accumulated longer than 3 minutes
during 10 minutes sampling time.
Protection of ISPM ISPM has four protection function for self-protection
(1) Some of the output terminals between "U" and "V", "V" and "W", "W" and "U" has a
short-circuit.
(2) Running current reaches the maximum rated current.
(3) Temperature is measured by internal thermistor increases excessively.
(4) Control voltage decreases excessively.
Overload Control Overload control as a current greater than (Rated Current X105%).
Overload control release at a current smaller than (Rated Current X 88%).
Fin Temperature Decrease The unit is stopped when the ISPM temperature is higher than 100oC.
Earth Detection The unit is stopped when the compressor is earthing.
Page 11-4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main partts
MAIN PARTS 10/5
11.1.3.
10.1.3. INVERTER
INVERTER TIME
TIME CHART
Main Circuit Frequency LOW

Power Source
Frequency All bit 1 All bit 1 Operation
HIGH
Frequency
Instruction
Output Voltage
Soft Start-Stop
(Frequency) The changing speed
depends on the outer
setting.
Failure Signal
Output
Activation of
Protection Device Transmit Protection
10sec. Error 30sec. Activation
Overload Signal
Activation Recovery
Charged Indication
(Red LED5 on PCB5
or LED2 on PCB2)
11
Page 11-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main parts
10/6 MAIN PARTS
11.1.4. PROTECTIVE
10.1.4. PROTECTIVE FUNCTION
FUNCTION
1. Excessive High or Low Voltage for Inverter 4. Protection of Transistor Module and ISPM
a) Level of Detection a) Level of Detection
- When the voltage of direct current is greater than When some of the output terminals between “U” and
(A) V, abnormalities are detected. “V”, “V” and “W”, “W” and “U” of transistor module or
- When the voltage of direct current is smaller than ISPM are short-circuited, an abnormality is detected.
(B) V, abnormalities are detected. When the running current of transistor module or
ISPM reaches (Maximum Rated Current x 105%),
380 - 415V, 50Hz an abnormality is detected.
Power Supply 220V, 60Hz
380V, 60Hz
When an internal temperature is measured by
(A) 750 440 internal thermistor of transistor module or ISPM,
an abnormality is detected.
(B) 350 194 When the control voltage of transistor module or
ISPM decreases, an abnormality is detected.
b) Function b) Function
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter When abnormalities are detected, the inverter
compressor is stopped and transmit the signal code compressor is stopped and the signal code of
of stoppage cause to PCB1. stoppage cause is transmitted to PCB1.
c) Cancellation of Protection Function c) Cancellation of Protection Function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is
cancelled when a stopping order is given or main canceled when a stopping order is issued or main
power source is cut off. power source is cut off.
2. Abnormality of Current Sensor 5. Fin Temperature Increase (Only for 24 and 30HP)
a) Level of Detection a) Level of Detection
When current of the inverter compressor decreases When the temperature of internal thermistor exceeds
lower than 0.5A during the inverter compressor more than 100oC, an abnormality is detected.
frequency between 15Hz and 18Hz, an abnormality is b) Function
detected.
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter
b) Function compressor is stopped and the signal code of
When abnormalities are detected, the inverter stoppage cause is transmitted to PCB1.
compressor is stopped, and transmit the signal code c) Cancellation of Protection Function
of stoppage cause to PCB1.
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is
c) Cancellation of Protection Function canceled when a stopping order is issued or main
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is power source is cut off.
cancelled when a stopping order is issued or main 6. Earth Detection
power source is cut off.
a) Level of Detection
3. Overcurrent Protection for Inverter
When the starting current of the compressor reaches
a) Level of Detection 80% of the overcurrent protection value, an
When the current detected by current sensor reaches abnormality is detected.
150% of the rated current, overcurrent is detected. b) Function
(Instantaneous Overcurrent)
When the current detected by current sensor compressor is stopped and the signal code of
exceeds 105% of the rated current continuously stoppage cause is transmitted to PCB1.
for 30 seconds or for 3.5 minutes in total during
a 10 minutes period, overcurrent is detected. c) Cancellation of Protection Function
(Electric Thermal Relay) Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is
b) Function canceled when a stopping order is issued or main
power source is cut off.
compressor is stopped and transmit the signal code
of stoppage cause to PCB1.
c) Cancellation of Protection Function
Transmission for signal code of stoppage cause is
canceled by stopping order is issued or main power
source is cut off.
Page 11-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main partts MAIN PARTS 10/7
11.2.
10.2. THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
Thermistors for the outdoor unit

Thermistor for the discharge gas temperature
(THM8 for inverter compressors; THM9, THM12,
THM13, THM14 and THM16 for constant speed
compressors)
Thermistor for
the evaporating
temperature
(THM10, THM11
Thermistor for the and THM15)
outdoor ambient
temperature
(THM7)
Thermistors for the indoor unit
Thermistor for the gas

pipe temperature in
indoor heat exchangers
(THM5)
Thermistor for the

inlet air temperature Thermistor for the liquid
(THM1) pipe temperature in
indoor heat exchangers
Thermistor for the air to provide freeze
oulet temperature (THM2) protection (THM3)
11
Page 11-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
10/8 MAIN PARTS
Main parts
11.2.1.
10.2.1. RESISTANCE
RESISTANCEVALUE
VALUEOF THE
THERMISTOR
OF THE THERMISTOR
� Overheating prevention of the discharge gas

(Thermistor for checking the upper part of
compressor: THM8, THM9, THM12, THM13,
THM14 and THM16)
a. There is a thermistor that checks the temperature of the
upper part of the compressor in order to prevent the
discharge gas from overheating. If the discharge gas
temperature increases excessively, the deterioration
of the lubrication oil and its lubrication properties will
occur. This will cause a shorter compressor life.
b. If the discharge gas temperature increases excessively,
the compressor temperature increases. In the worst case,
the winding of the compressor motor will burn out.
c When the temperature of the upper part of the compressor
increases during the heating process, the unit is controlled
according to the following method:
Fig. 10.2. Refrigerant cycle of the outdoor unit
1. An electronic expansion valve of the liquid bypass RAS-10FSN(E)
opens and the high-pressure refrigerant returns to the
compressor through the accumulator. This decreases
the compressor temperature. � Thermistor for the outdoor temperature (THM7)
2. If the temperature of the upper part of the compressor When the outdoor ambient temperature decreases to -8°C
exceeds 132°C for 10 minutes, the compressor will or a lower temperature during the cooling process, the
stop. Even if an electronic expansion valve opens in compressor will stop. Resistance values of the thermistor
that situation, the compressor will also stop. This way, are shown in Fig. 10.3.
the compressor is protected. Resistance values of the
thermistor are shown in Fig. 10.1.
Resistance value of thermistor (k�)
d. If the temperature of the upper part of the compressor

exceeds 132°C for 10 minutes during the cooling process,
the compressor will stop. (Refer to the block diagram for
details.)
Outdoor ambient temperature (°C)
Fig. 10.3. Resistance values of the thermistor for the outlet

air temperature
� Thermistor for the defrost operation

Temperature (°C) (THM10, THM11 and THM15)
The resistance values of this thermistor are the same as the
Fig. 10.1. Resistance values of the thermistor for resistance values of the thermistor for the outdoor ambient
overheating protection of the discharge gas temperature.
Page 11-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main partts
MAIN PARTS 10/9
� Thermistor for the room temperature control � Thermistor for the control of the discharge air
(thermistor for the inlet air temperature of the temperature (Thermistor for the discharge air
indoor unit, THM1) temperature of the indoor unit, THM2)
The thermistor for the inlet air temperature (THM1) controls The thermistor for the discharge air temperature (THM2)
the room temperature. The remote control switch displays the prevents the cold blow during the heating process. The
selected temperatures by means of figures. Set the room resistance values of the thermistor are shown in Fig. 10.4.
temperature so that the room temperature does not become
too cool or too hot. It is recommended to set the room � Thermistor for the liquid pipe temperature of the
temperature in the following ranges. indoor heat exchanger
Economical cooling mode: 27°C to 29°C
Economical heating mode: 18°C to 20°C When the temperature of the indoor heat exchanger
The resistance values of the thermistor are shown in Fig. 10.4. decreases to 0°C or a lower temperature for 3 minutes, the
thermostat automatically turns off. When the temperature
of the indoor heat exchanger increases to 16°C or a higher
temperature, the thermostat turns on.
�
The purpose of this function is to prevent frosting on the
indoor heat exchanger during the cooling process and the
dry operation.
The resistance values of the thermistor are shown in Fig. 10.4.
� Thermistor for the gas pipe temperature of the

indoor heat exchanger
The thermistor for the gas pipe temperature senses the
Temperature (°C) evaporating temperature during the heating process. The
resistance values of the thermistor are shown in Fig. 10.4.
Fig. 10.4. Resistance values of the thermistor for the inlet air
temperature
� CAUTION:
The thermo-off valve of the thermistor for the inlet
air temperature of the indoor unit is set at a higher
temperature than the temperature displayed on the
remote control switch by 4°C (the maximum inlet
air temperature is 34°C). The suction air temperature
during the heating process has a tendency to become
higher than the temperature of the occupied zone in
order to provide a more efficient heating operation.
11
Page 11-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main parts
10/10 MAIN PARTS
11.3.
10.3. ELECTRONIC EXPANSION
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
VALVE
11.3.1.
10.3.1. ELECTRONIC
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION
EXPANSION VALVE
VALVEFOR
FORTHE
THEOUTDOOR
OUTDOORUNIT
UNIT
Micro-computer
Pulse signal
Pulse motor
2-Phase permanent magnetic pulse motor
Control 0 to 500 pulse by 1 pulse
Refrigerant flow control

Precise control
Needle
Items Specifications
For the main cycle of:
Applicable to the models RAS-5FSN, RAS-8FSN(E)/FXN(E), RAS-10FSN(E)/FXN(E), RAS-16FSN/FXN,
RAS-20FSN/FXN, RAS-24FSN/FXN, RAS-30FSN/FXN
Type EKV (10.0USRT) series
Refrigerant R410A
Working temperature range -30°C � 65°C (Operation time of the coil: less than 50%)
Mounting direction Drive shaft in vertical direction within an angle of 45° as maximum
Flow direction Reversible
Drive method 4-Phase canned motor method
Rated voltage DC12V�1.8V
83PPS (Pulse width at ON: 36mm sec, OFF: 60mm sec)
Drive condition
1,2 Phase excitation
Coil resistance (each phase) 46� � 10% (at 20°C)
ON
OFF
Wiring
Wiring diagram, Drive circuit diagram
and activation mode Drive
circuit
Valve Close Open
Activation
Page 11-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main partts MAIN PARTS 10/11
11.3.2.
10.3.2. ELECTRONIC
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION
EXPANSION VALVE
VALVEFOR
FORTHE
THEINDOOR
INDOORUNIT
UNIT
Micro-computer
Pulse signal Pulse Motor
2-Phase permanent magnetic pulse motor

Gear
Control 0 to 2,000 pulse by 1 pulse
Output Shaft
Refrigerant flow control Lock Nut

Bellows
Precise control
Valve
Valve
Valve Body Sheet
Items Specifications
Type EDM type
Refrigerant R410A
Working temperature range -30°C � 70°C (with coils which are not electrified)
Mounting direction Drive shaft in vertical direction, motor upside and 90° in four direction
Flow direction Reversible
Drive method 4-Phase pulse motor
Voltage rate DC12V�1.2V
100� � 250PPS (Pulse width over 3mm)
Drive condition
2 Phase excitation
Coil resistance (each phase) 150� � 10% (at 20°C)
Procedu
re
Phase
Wiring
Wiring diagram, drive circuit Valve diagram
and activation mode activation
Close Open
Drive
circuit
Activation mode
11
Page 11-11
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main parts
10/12 MAIN PARTS
11.4.
10.4. PRESSURE SENSOR
PRESSURE SENSOR
High-pressure control Low-pressure control

A high-pressure sensor detects the high pressure during the A low-pressure sensor detects the suction pressure during
heating process. The PID control with the operation capacity the cooling process. The PID control with the operation
of the indoor units controls the compressor frequencies. This capacity of the indoor units controls the compressor
way the high pressure is controlled within an appropriate frequencies. This way the suction pressure is controlled
range. The output of the high-pressure sensor during the within an appropriate range. If the suction pressure becomes
heating process performs the protective control and the excessively low, the cooling action may be insufficient and
control of the gas bypass valve. the parts in the refrigerant cycle may be damaged. Therefore,
if the output of the low-pressure sensor indicates vacuum and
the valve remains in the same position for 12 minutes or
longer, the compressor will stop in order to avoid damage.
Heating process Cooling process
PID control for PID control for

compressor frequencies compressor frequencies
with the operation with the operation
capacity of the indoor capacity of the indoor
units Low- units
pressure
control
Gas bypass valve check Vacuum preventive
for protective control control
Page 11-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main partts
MAIN PARTS 10/13
11.5.
10.5. AUTO LOUVERMECHANISM
AUTO LOUVER MECHANISM
11.5.1. RCI
10.5.1. RCI (4-WAY
(4-WAY CASSETTE
CASSETTE TYPE)
TYPE)
1. Auto-Louver Operation
The louvers of the optional air panel with auto-louver
swing simultaneously by four drive motor.
The parts of the auto-louver mechanism are shown below.
The motor (1) is installed to the louver directly.
The louver (2) is operated by rotating the motor.
Four pieces of the motor (1) are installed to the unit and
rotated simultaneously.
No. Part Name No. Part Name
1 Motor 3 Bearing
2 Louver 4 Stopper AS
(3) Bearing AS (3) (2) (3) (4)

(1) (1)
(2) Louver (1) Motor
(4) Stopper AS
(1)
(1)
(3) Bearing AS
2. Auto-Louver Stoppage
Press the "AUTO LOUVER"

of the remote control switch
during auto-louver operation.
� 0 (zero) Reset
The AS stopper of the
louver (2) touches the steel
plate stopper, and the louver (1) Motor
is reset to the 0 position. (4) Motor
�
The power supply for the
motor (1) is turned OFF when
the louver is at the setting
position. Steele Plate
Stopper
�
The louver is stopped at the
(2) Louver
11
setting position.
Page 11-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main parts
10/14 MAIN PARTS
11.5.2. RCD
10.5.2. RCD (2-WAY
(2-WAY CASSETTE
CASSETTE TYPE)
TYPE)
1. Auto-Louver Operation
The louvers of the optional air panel with auto-louver
swing simultaneously by a drive motor. The parts of the
auto-louver mechanism are shown below.
(1) Sttoper
Louver Arm
Bearing Bearing Arm
Shaft B
Sttoper
AS Motor Assembly Sttoper
Crank Arm
Sttoper
Louver
Bearing Bearing Arm Shaft A
The principle of the auto-louver mechanism is as follows;

The motor (1) rotates, the crank (2) fixed to the shaft of
the motor (1) rotates, the rotating torque is changed at the
arm (3) and transmitted to the arm shaft A (4) and the arm
shaft B (5).
The circular reciprocating force gives the driving force to
the louver (6) and rotates the louver.
No. Part Name No. Part Name
1 Motor 5 Arm Shaft B
2 Crank 6 Louver
3 Arm Fixing Plate
7
4 Arm Shaft A of Motor
(4) Arm Shaft A
Press the "AUTO LOUVER"

of the remote control switch
Bearing (6) Louver Bearing
during auto-louver operation.
(3) Arm
(1) Motor
�
The crank (2) touches the (3) Arm
stopper of the fixing plate of (6) Louver

(2) Crank
motor (7), and the louver is

reset to the 0 position.
Bearing
�
(5) Arm Shaft B
(3) Arm
The power supply for the
motor (1) is turned OFF when
(7) Fixing Plate
the louver is at the setting for Motor (1) Motor
position.
Motor Shaft
Stopper
�
(2) Crank
The louver (6) is stopped at (3) Arm
the setting position.
Page 11-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main partts
MAIN PARTS 10/15
11.5.3. RPC (CEILING TYPE)

10.5.3.
1. Auto-Louver Operation (1) AS Motor

The louvers of the optional air panel with autolouver swing
simultaneously by a drive motor. (2) Pinion
The parts and the principle of the auto-louver mechanism are
(5) Cover
shown in the right figure.
(6) Louver
The AS motor (1) rotates, the pinion (2) fixed to the shaft of
the AS motor (1) rotates, the rotating torque is changed at the (4) Bearing
rack (3) and the circular reciprocating force gives the driving (3) Rack
force to the louver (4) and rotates the louver.
Press the "AUTO LOUVER" of the

remote control switch during auto-louver
operation.
�
The rack (3) touches the stopper of the (3) Rack
cover (6), and the louver is reset to the (6) Louver (1) AS Motor
0 position.
�
(2) Pinion
The power supply for AS motor (1) is
turned OFF when the louver is at the
setting position. Stopper (5) Cover
�
The louver (4) is stopped at the setting
position.
11
Page 11-15
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Main parts
10/16 MAIN PARTS
11.6.
10.6. SCROLL COMPRESSOR
SCROLL COMPRESSOR
11.6.1.
10.6.1. RELIABLE
RELIABLE MECHANISM
MECHANISM FOR
FOR LOW
LOW VIBRATION
VIBRATION AND
AND LOW
LOW SOUND
SOUND
1. The rotating direction is definite.
2. The pressure inside of the chamber is high pressure, and the surface temperature of the chamber is 60 °C to 110 °C.
11.6.2. PRINCIPLE OF COMPRESSION

10.6.2.
1. The gas is inhaled from the inlet port at the outer frame of the fixed scroll
2. The gas inside of the compression space is compressed toward the center
of the scroll.
3. The compression space is minimum at the center of the scroll, and the gas
compressed at the maximum is discharged from the outlet port of at the
center of the scroll.
4. The above procedures (Suction Compression Discharge) is repeated

continuously.
Gas
Rotating Scroll
Compression
Space
Suction procedure
Fixed Scroll Discharge Process
Compression Process
Page 11-16
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Field work instruction
12. Field work instruction
CONTENTS
12. FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION _____________________________________________ 12-1

12.1. Checking the Power Source and the Wiring Connection ________________________ 12-2
12.2. Burnt-Out Compressor Due to an Insufficient Refrigerant Charge __________________ 12-2
12.3. Insufficient Cooling Performance when a Long Piping Is Applied __________________ 12-3
12.4. Abnormally High Operation Sound (In-The-Ceiling Type Indoor Unit) _______________ 12-3
12.5. Alarm Code “31” ________________________________________________________ 12-4
12.6. Not Cooling Well Due to Insufficient Installation Space for the Outdoor Unit __________ 12-4
12.7. Attention for Set-Free FXN(E) Series ________________________________________ 12-5
12.8. Guideline for Selecting the Drain Pipe for the Indoor Unit _______________________ 12-8
12.9. Caution with the Refrigerant Leakage _______________________________________ 12-8
12.9.1. Maximum Permissible Concentration of the HCFC Gas _________________________ 12-8
12.9.2. Calculation of the Refrigerant Concentration__________________________________ 12-8
12.9.3. Countermeasure for the Refrigerant Leakage According to the KHK Standard _______ 12-9
12.10. Maintenance Work _____________________________________________________ 12-9
12.11. Service and Maintenance Record _________________________________________ 12-10
12.12. Service and Maintenance Record by Means of the 7-Segment Display _____________12-11
12.12.1. Service and Maintenance Record by Means of the 7-Segment Display ____________ 12-11
12.12.2. Pump-Down Method for Replacing the Compressor __________________________ 12-12
12.12.3. Check Data Sheet of the Outdoor Unit (Set-Free FSN(E)/FXN(E) Series) _________ 12-14
12
Page 12-1
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
11/2 FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION
WARNING: TURN OFF all the main switches.
12.1.
11.1. CHECKING THEPOWER
CHECKING THE POWER SOURCE
SOURCE AND
AND THE
THE WIRING
WIRING CONNECTION
CONNECTION
Check the following items in the case of abnormal operation:
No. Check item Procedure

1 Is the breaker of the fuse cut out? Check the secondary voltage of the breaker and the fuse by means of a tester.
2 Is the secondary power source Disconnect the secondary side of the transformer and check the voltage by means
on the transformer correct? of a tester.
Indoor Unit
Transformmer
12 V
220 V or
Circuit and Voltage

240 V
Secondary
Side
Primary
Side 12 V
3 Is the wiring loosened or Check the wiring connection on the PCB.

incorrectly connected? � Thermistor connectors
� Connector of the remote control cable
� Connector of the transformer
� Each connector in a high-voltage circuit
Check the connectors according to the Electrical Wiring diagram.
12.2.
11.2. BURNT-OUT COMPRESSOR
BURNT-OUT COMPRESSOR DUE
DUE TOTO
ANAN INSUFFICIENT
INSUFFICIENT REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT CHARGE
CHARGE
� Question and answer for the field work

Example 1: Burnt-out compressor due to an insufficient refrigerant charge
Phenomenon After commissioning, the alarm code "08" sometimes occurred and the compressors were burnt out
after operating for two months.
Cause The refrigerant piping work was performed during the summer season. The additional refrigerant was
not sufficiently charged from the discharge gas side.
This insufficient refrigerant charge resulted in the overheating of the discharge gas and the oil
deterioration, which was finally due to the separated operation despite the alarm code "08".
Countermeasure 1. The compressor was replaced with a new compressor.
2. The correct refrigerant amount was charged according to the refrigerant piping length
and the connected indoor units.
Remarks Additional refrigerant charge: Open the liquid stop valves slightly when you charge the additional
refrigerant from the check joint of the liquid stop valves (the discharge gas side) during the cooling
process. If the liquid stop valve is fully open, it is difficult to charge the additional refrigerant. Do not
charge the refrigerant from the gas stop valve.
Page 12-2
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
FIELD WORK INSTRUCTION 11/3
12.3.
11.3. INSUFFICIENT COOLING
INSUFFICIENT COOLING PERFORMANCE
PERFORMANCE WHEN
WHEN A LONG
A LONG PIPING
PIPING IS APPLIED
IS APPLIED
Example 2: Insufficient cooling performance when a long piping is applied
Phenomenon Sufficient cooling was not available for an indoor unit that was located at the farthest position.
Cause If the location of an outdoor unit is 20 meters lower than the location of the indoor units, resetting
of the DIP switch DSW3 is required.
However, no setting was performed. Therefore, the largest discharge pressure was not increased.
This resulted in an insufficient cooling performance for the indoor unit.
I.U
Insufficient
cooling
O.U
DSW3
Countermeasure The setting of the DSW3 was changed.

Remarks Pay a special attention to the size of the liquid pipe if the lift between the indoor units and the outdoor units
is higher than 20 meters. Refer to "Piping Work in TC" for details.
12.4.
11.4. ABNORMALLY HIGHOPERATION
ABNORMALLY HIGH OPERATION SOUND
SOUND (IN-THE-CEILING
(IN-THE-CEILING TYPETYPE INDOOR
INDOOR UNIT) UNIT)
Example 3: Abnormally high operation sound (in-the-ceiling type indoor unit)
Phenomenon The operation sound at the "HIGH" speed was abnormally high.
Cause The indoor units were installed without the ducts. Since there scarcely was any external static pressure, an
abnormally big air volume was supplied. This resulted in a higher air speed through the heat exchanger.
Damper Indoor unit
A. Filter
Countermeasure In order to reduce the airflow rate, a plate that is used as a damper at the discharge gas side
was added.
Remarks Note that the running current is increased when no external pressure is given to the indoor unit.
12
This results in an overheating.
Page 12-3
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
12.5
11.5. ALARM CODE"31"
ALARM CODE “31”
Example 4: Alarm code "31"
Phenomenon Alarm code "31" sometimes occurred and the system stopped.
The combination of the indoor units and the outdoor unit was the following.
Cause
Power
ON
source
ON OFF ON ON ON
I.U. I.U. I.U.
O.U.
This system was used in a tenant building. One of tenant's customers turned off the main switch for
the indoor unit while other indoor units are running. This results in a different setting of the total indoor
unit capacity in the same refrigerant cycle.
Countermeasure All the main switches for the indoor units were always ON.
12.6
11.6. NOT COOLINGWELL
NOT COOLING WELL DUE
DUE TOTO INSUFFICIENT
INSUFFICIENT INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION SPACE
SPACE FOROUTDOOR
FOR THE THE
OUTDOOR UNIT
UNIT
Example 5: Not cooling well due to insufficient installation space for the outdoor unit
Phenomenon The cooling process was well performed through the intermediate season. However, the cooling process
was not adequately available when the outdoor temperature was higher than 35°C.
Cause Since the outdoor units were installed without a sufficient installation space, the hot discharge air from
other outdoor units circulated. In this case, although the outdoor temperature was 35°C, the actual
suction air temperature was nearly 50°C and the protection system against the excessively high suction
pressure was activated. Then, the frequency of the compressor was decreased and the cooling capacity
was also decreased accordingly. Since the outdoor units were installed in-line back to back with a
distance of 600mm between the backs, the hot discharge air from other outdoor units circulated.
Min. 300mm
Fence
Min. 300mm
Countermeasure To protect the unit from a short circuit, fences were mounted at the discharge air side as shown below.
Page 12-4
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
12.7
11.7. ATTENTION FORSET-FREE
ATTENTION FOR SET-FREE FXN(E)
FXN(E) SERIES
SERIES
The SET-FREE FXN(E) series has been designed for the � Simultaneous COOL/HEAT Operation
system to provide simultaneous cooling and heating
� Phenomenon
operations during intermediate seasons and the refrigerant
cycle is controlled according to heat balance of cooling and During the simultaneous cooling and heating operation,
heating. Therefore, pay attention to the followings for the the capacity comparatively decreases when compared
selection of installing sites and the installation work. with the capacity whilst operating all the indoor units at
As especially, this SET-FREE FXN(E) series is operated by the same mode.
mixed refrigerant R410A (FXN(E)), special attention is The capacity decrease mentioned above should be
required. Follow the items below. taken into consideration when in actual operation,
especially for the small capacity units (0.8 to 1.5HP).
� The SET-FREE FXN(E) series is for general office
building air conditioning. Therefore, it is recommended Cooling
that different air conditioning systems be selected in a
All Indoor Units in
place where systems are utilized for (i) machine rooms Cooling Operation /
or computer rooms, providing big heat load and (ii) Mainly Cooling Operation
thermostatic chamber, requiring precise temperature
control.
� By operating this unit with other cooling/heating
Cooling Capacity (%)

equipment at the same time, thermo-ON/OFF may occur
frequently or the heat load change may be big, and it
may cause the decrease of the unit performance or Mainly Heating
shorten the lifetime of the unit. Do not install the unit in a Operation
place where operation with other cooling/heating
equipment is required.
� System Design of FXN(E) Series

1. Installing Site: Outdoor Air Temperature (°C DB)
Do not install the unit in such places;
a) where temperature difference among rooms is
excessively big and the heat load when cooling and Heating
heating is excessively big during simultaneous
COOL/HEAT operation. All Indoor Units in
b) where the heat load change of a room is big and Heating Operation /
Mainly Heating Operation
thermo-ON/OFF may occur frequently especially
during simultaneous COOL/HEAT operation.
c) where temporary capacity decrease according to
ON/OFF operation of other rooms is not allowed.
Heating Capacity (%)
d) where starting up in simultaneous COOL/HEAT

operation mode is always required.
Mainly Heating
2. Piping Work: Operation
Do not perform the piping work as follows;
a) The piping length between the farthest indoor unit
and the last multi-kit is excessively long.
b) The CH units are used individually for each indoor
unit in a same room.
c) There is a height difference between CH units. Outdoor Air Temperature (°C DB)
� Countermeasure
Perform the heat load calculation with the decreased
capacity as shown in the graph in page 11-7.
Do not install the unit in such a place where temperature
difference among rooms is big and the heat load when
cooling and heating is excessively big during
simultaneous COOL/HEAT operation.
12
Page 12-5
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
� Influence by ON/OFF Operation of Other � Piping Length of Farthest Indoor Unit:

Rooms: � Phenomenon
� Phenomenon During the simultaneous cooling and heating operation,
During the simultaneous cooling and heating operation, the cooling capacity of the farthest indoor unit is
the actual capacity of the indoor units in operation is decreased when the farthest indoor unit is in cooling
decreased for a short time due to the influence of heat operation and the second farthest indoor unit is in
balance when the cooling or heating operation when heating operation.
some other indoor units is started or stopped, or thermo-
ON/OFF. � Countermeasure
It is recommended that the piping length between the
� Countermeasure multi-kit and the farthest indoor unit be within 5m. In
The following conditions and the system as shown case that the piping length between the multi-kit and the
below are not appropriate for FXN(E) series, since other farthest indoor unit is longer than 5m, use the T-branch
indoor units may be influenced by the indoor unit. at only the liquid pipe instead of liquid multi-kit. The
Therefore, it is recommended that different air direction of the T-branch is as shown below. Purchase
conditioning systems be selected. the T-branch locally for this piping work and prepare at
a) There is a room where the heat load change is big each site. If the diameter of the pipe between the
and ON/OFF operation of indoor unit is excessively outdoor unit and CH unit is different, use a reducer.
frequent.
b) where capacity decrease for a short time according to Max. 30m
ON/OFF operation of other rooms is not allowed. L (m)
L (m) < 5m
However, this system can be applied to a room where … Multi-kit
gradual heat load change is given, such as a heating L (m) > 5m
operation in the morning, cooling operation during … T-branch at the
daytime and heating operation in the evening. Liquid Pipe only
� Example
In case that the mainly cooling operation is changed to
the mainly heating operation especially when the big
capacity indoor unit (ex.: 5HP) is stopped at cooling
operation or thermo-OFF, the outdoor heat exchanger is CH Unit
changed from condenser to evaporator functions and Outdoor Unit
CH Unit
the cooling capacity of other indoor units in continuous Outdoor Unit
cooling operation is excessively decreased.
CH Unit
Horizontal
CH Unit
� Start-Up in Simultaneous COOL/HEAT

CH Unit
Operation Mode:
10HP Outdoor Unit
� Phenomenon
In case of starting up in the simultaneous COOL/HEAT
Indoor Unit 5HP 3HP 1HP operation mode when the outdoor temperature is low,
Cooling Heating Cooling the capacity increase time of the unit operation is longer
On / OFF (Continuous) (Continuous) in comparison with the only cooling or heating operation
mode (especially in starting up of small capacity
operation; 1HP cooling and 1HP heating [Example]).
Mainly Mainly
� Countermeasure
Cooling Heating
Do not install the unit where starting up in simultaneous
COOL/HEAT operation mode is always required. In case
ON OFF ON OFF ON that the simultaneous COOL/HEAT operation is
required, it is recommended that individual refrigerant
Capacity
5HP Cooling Unit systems be applied for cooling and heating, or the
Thermo ON /OFF
starting up is performed in only cooling or heating
operation mode, and change over the operation mode to
Approx. 10min. the simultaneous COOL/HEAT mode when 10 to
20 minutes have passed after starting up operation.
Capacity
1HP Cooling Unit

Continuous Operation
Page 12-6
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
� Example
* In Case of Start-Up in Simultaneous COOL/HEAT * In Case of Start-Up in Cooling Operation Mode (and
Operation Mode Changeover to Simultaneous COOL/HEAT Operation
Mode Afterward)
Cooling
Capacity
Heating Cooling
Capacity
Heating
ON
ON
10 to 20min.
� Automatic COOL/HEAT Operation

2. Fan Operation When Changing Cooling/Heating
In the case that the indoor units are operated under an
Operation Mode
automatic cooling/heating operation by pressing the AUTO
COOL/HEAT switch, pay attention to the followings. � Phenomenon
In the case that room temperature rapidly increases
1. Interference of Cooling Unit and Heating Unit during this automatic COOL/HEAT operation, the
� Phenomenon operation mode is changed in order, heating operation
=> fan operation => cooling operation.
In the case that more than 2 indoor units are closely
During this mode change, the fan operation continues
installed and operated in the same room, each indoor
for more than 10 minutes in order to avoid unwanted
unit interferes with the next unit, resulting in inefficient
influences to other indoor units.
operation.
� Countermeasure
� Countermeasure
It is recommended that other systems be considered if
Do not use CH units individually for each indoor units in
very precise temperature control is required.
a same room.
In such a case, connect the indoor units in a same room
to one CH unit and operate indoor units in the same
operation mode, if it is possible.
Cooling Heating
CH Unit
CH Unit
Outdoor Outdoor
Unit Unit
12
Page 12-7
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
12.8
11.8. GUIDELINE FORSELECTING
GUIDELINE FOR SELECTING THE
THE DRAIN
DRAIN PIPE
PIPE FORFOR
THE THE INDOOR
INDOOR UNIT UNIT
� Method for selecting the drain pipe diameter
1. Calculation of the Drain Flow Volume
� NOTE:
VP20 and VP25: Not Applicable to the Common Pipe
Calculate that the drain flow volume is approximately VP30, VP40 and VP50: Applicable to the Common Pipe
3 (I/hr) per 1HP of the nominal capacity of the indoor unit.
For Example: Table B. Permissible drain flow volume of the vertical vinyl
Common drain pipe for four 2HP indoor units pipe
and four 2.5HP indoor units. Inner diameter
JIS symbol Permissible flow volume (I/hr]
Total horsepower 4 � 2HP + 4 � (mm)
of the indoor unit 2.5 HP=18HP VP20 20 220
18HP� 3 (l/hr � HP) = VP25 25 410
Total drain flow volume
54 (l/hr) VP30 31 730
VP40 40 1400
2. Select the drain pipe from the Table A and the Table B VP50 51 2760
Horizontal common pipe VP65 67 5710
VP30 for above Example
with the slope 1/50
VP75 77 8280
Horizontal common pipe
VP30 for above Example
with the slope 1/100
Vertical common pipe VP30 for above Example � NOTE:
VP20, VP25 and VP30: Not applicable to the
Table A. Permissible drain flow volume of the horizontal common pipe
vinyl pipe VP40, VP50, VP65 and VP75: Applicable to the
common pipe
Inner diameter Permissible flow volume (I/hr]
JIS symbol
(mm) Slope=1/50 Slope=1/100
>100mm
Pitch of 1/25 ~ 1/100
VP20 20 39 27
VP25 25 70 50
VP30 31 125 88
VP40 40 247 175
VP50 51 472 334 Common drain piping Connecting pipe should
(horizontal) be downward
Common drain piping
(vertical)
12.9 CAUTION
11.9. CAUTIONWITH
WITHTHE
THE REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE
LEAKAGE
The designers and the installers have the responsibility to 12.9.2.

11.9.2. CALCULATION
CALCULATIONOF
OFTHE
THEREFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT
follow the local codes and the local regulations that specify the CONCENTRATION
CONCENTRATION
safety requirements against the refrigerant leakage.
1. Calculate the total quantity of refrigerant R (kg) that is
12.9.1. MAXIMUM charged in the system that connects all the indoor
11.9.1. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
PERMISSIBLE units of the rooms that need air conditioning systems.
CONCENTRATION OF
CONCENTRATION OF THE
THE HCFC
HCFC GAS
GAS 2. Calculate the room volume V (m³) of each room.
The refrigerant R410A, which is charged in the SET-FREE 3. Calculate the refrigerant concentration C (kg/m³)
FSN system, is an incombustible non-toxic gas. However, of the room according to the following equation:
if the leakage occurs and the gas fills a room, the gas may R: Total quantity of charged refrigerant (kg)
cause suffocation. R
V: Room volume (m³)
The maximum permissible concentration of the HCFC gas —=C
C: Refrigerant concentration (�0.44* kg/m³
and the R410A in the air is 0.44 kg/m³, according to the V
for the R410A)
refrigeration and air conditioning system standard (KHK S
0010) by the KHK (High-Pressure Gas Protection Association) * Use this value only for reference because this value is
of Japan. Therefore, you must take some effective measures not fixed yet.
in order to lower the R410A concentration in the air below
0.44 kg/m³, if there is a leakage.
Page 12-8
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
System A Outdoor unit System B Outdoor unit
12.9.3.
11.9.3. COUNTERMEASURE
COUNTERMEASURE FOR
FOR THE
THE
System A System B
Refrigerant: 30kg
Refrigerant: 35kg
REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE
LEAKAGE ACCORDING
ACCORDING
TO
TO THE
THE KHK
KHK STANDARD
STANDARD
Height 2.5m
According to the KHK standards, you should arrange the
E D C B A
facility as follows so that the refrigerant concentration will
be bellow 0.3 kg/m³. Floor Floor Floor
Floor 200m² Floor 60m²
1. Provide a shutterless opening that will allow the fresh air 20m² 40m² 40m²
to circulate into the room.
2. Provide a doorless opening with a size of 0.15% or more Gas leak detector
to the floor area. Opening: 0.06m²
Ventilator 2m³/min
3. Provide a ventilator, which must be linked with a gas
leak detector, with a ventilating capacity of 0.5m³/min or
more per Japanese Refrigeration Ton (=compressor Room R (kg) V (m³) C (kg/m³) Countermeasure
displacement m³/h/8.5 of the air conditioning system
which uses the refrigerant). A 30 150 0.2 -
B 65 500 0.13 -
O.U. model ton O.U. model ton C 35 100 0.35 -
D 35 100 0.35 -
RAS-5FSN 2.27
C+D 35 200 0.175 -
RAS-8FSN(E)/ FXN(E) 3.76
E 35 50 0.7 2m³/min
RAS-10FSN(E)/ FXN(E) 4.04
RAS-16FSN/ FXN 5.81
RAS-20FSN/ FXN 7.58
RAS-24FSN/ FXN 10.15
RAS-30FSN/ FXN 12.12
4. Pay a special attention to the place, such as a basement

and others, where the refrigerant may stay, because the
refrigerant is heavier than the air.
12.10 MAINTENANCEWORK
11.10. MAINTENANCE WORK
� For the indoor unit and the outdoor unit 6. Control device and protection device
1. Fan and fan motor � Setting: Do not readjust the setting in the field unless
the setting is maintained at a point that is different
� Lubrication: All the fan motors are prelubricated and from the point that is listed in the section "7.6.
sealed at the factory. Therefore, no lubrication SAFETY AND CONTROL DEVICE SETTING"
maintenance is required. of "TC".
� Sound and vibration: Check for abnormal sounds
and vibrations. � For the indoor unit
� Rotation: Check the clockwise rotation and the
rotating speed. 1. Air filter
� Insulation: Check the electrical insulation resistance. � Cleaning: Check for any accumulated dirt and any
2. Heat exchanger accumulated dust. Remove the dirt and the dust.
� Clog: Inspect the heat exchanger at regular intervals 2. Drain pan, drain-up mechanism and drain pipe
and remove any accumulated dirt and any � Drain line: Check and clean the condensate
accumulated dust from the heat exchanger. drain pipe at least twice a year.
You should also remove from the outdoor units other � Drain-up mechanism: Check the activation
obstacles, such as the growing grass and the pieces of the drain-up mechanism.
of paper, which might restrict the airflow. 3. Float switch
3. Piping connection � Activation: Check the activation of the float switch.
� Leakage: Check for the refrigerant leakage at the
piping connection. � For the outdoor unit
4. Cabinet
1. Compressor
� Stain and Lubrication: Check for any stain and any
� Sound and vibration: Check for abnormal sounds
lubrication. Remove the stain and the lubrication.
and vibrations.
� Fixing Screw: Check for any loosened screw or any
� Activation: Check that the voltage drop of the power
lost screw. Fix the loosened screws and the lost
supply line is within 15% at the start and within 2%
screws. Insulation Material: Check for any peeled
during the operation.
thermal insulator on the cabinet. Repair the thermal
insulator. 2. Reverse valve
5. Electrical equipment � Activation: Check for any abnormal activation sound.
� Activation: Check for an abnormal activation of the 3. Strainer
magnetic contactor, the auxiliary relay, the PCB and � Clog: Check that there is no temperature difference
12
others. between both ends.
Line condition: Pay attention to the working voltage, 4. Ground wire
the working amperage and the working phase � Ground line: Check for the continuity to earth.
balance. Check for any faulty contact that is caused
by the loosened terminal connections, the oxidized 5. Oil heater
contacts, the foreign matter, and other items. Check � Activation: You should activate the oil heater at least
the electrical insulation resistance. twelve hours before the start-up by turning ON the
main switch.
Page 12-9
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
11/10FieldFIELD
work instruction
WORK INSTRUCTION
12.11 SERVICEAND
11.11. SERVICE ANDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE RECORD
RECORD
No. Check item Action Judgement No. Check item Action Judgement
1 Is the service area 20 Check for a leakage in
Yes No
sufficient? the electronic expansion ditto Good Not good
2 Is there a short circuit of valve.
Yes No
the discharged air? 21 Check for a leakage in
ditto Good Not good
3 Any heat influence? Yes No the piping.
4 Is the ground wire 22 Check the direction of By viewing the
Yes No Good Not good
connected? the fans. airflow volume
5 Refrigerant piping Good Not good 23 Voltage among each Higher than
Good Not good
phase AC220V
6 Fixing the units Good Not good
24 Vibration and sound Check the fan,
7 Is there any damage on
the compressor,
the outer surface or the Yes No Good Not good
the piping, and
internal surface?
others.
8 Checking the screw and Tighten if Not
Tightened 25 Activation of each Check the
the bolts loosened. tightened
operation mode activation of the
9 Tightening the Terminal Tighten all the COOL switch,
Screws terminal screws Not the HEAT
Tightened Good Not good
with a Phillips tightened switch, the
screwdriver. STOP switch
10 Are the compressor Push all the Not and the TEMP
Pushed
terminals tightly fixed? terminals. pushed switch.
11 Insulation resistance Measure the 26 High-pressure cut-out Check the
insulation switch actual activation Good Not good
resistance with value.
an insulation 27 Check the activation of Check the
resistance meter. the drain-up activation during
Good Not good Good Not good
Comp. and fan mechanism. the cooling
motor: greater process.
than 3M�
28 Air inlet temperature of
Others: greater (°C)DB (°C)WB
the indoor unit DB/WB
than 3M�
12 Does the drain water Check the smooth 29 Air outlet temperature of
(°C)DB (°C)WB
flow smoothly? flow by pouring Good Not good the indoor unit DB/WB
some water. 30 Air inlet temperature of
(°C)DB (°C)WB
13 Check for a leakage in Check for any the outdoor unit DB/WB
Good Not good 31 Air outlet temperature of
the compressor. leakage. (°C)DB (°C)WB
14 Check for a leakage in the outdoor unit DB/WB
the outdoor heat ditto Good Not good 32 High-pressure switch kg/cm²G
exchanger. 33 Low-pressure switch kg/cm²G
15 Check for a leakage in 34 Operating voltage V
the indoor heat ditto Good Not good
exchanger. 35 Operating current A
16 Check for a leakage in 36 Instructions to the client
ditto Good Not good Done Not yet
the 4-way valve. for cleaning the air filter
17 Check for a leakage in 37 Instructions to the client
ditto Good Not good about the cleaning Done Not yet
the check valve.
method
18 Check for a leakage in
ditto Good Not good 38 Instructions to the client
the accumulator. Done Not yet
about the operation
19 Check for a leakage in
ditto Good Not good
the strainer.
Page 12-10
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
� Data sheet for checking by means of the 7-segment display
Outdoor unit model (Serial No. ) RAS- (Serial No. ) RAS- (Serial No. ) RAS- (Serial No. ) RAS- (Serial No. ) RAS- (Serial No. )
1. Operation mode
2. Start time of the test run
3. Start time of the data collection
4. Read-out data from the 7-segment display
12.11
12.12.1
Protection control code
PSH1 PSH 2 PSH 3 PSH 4 PSH 5 PSH 6 DCFan FAN1 PSH1 PSH 2 PSH 3 PSH 4 PSH 5 PSH 6 DCFan FAN1 PSH1 PSH 2 PSH 3 PSH 4 PSH 5 PSH 6 DCFan FAN1 PSH1 PSH 2 PSH 3 PSH 4 PSH 5 PSH 6 DCFan FAN1 PSH1 PSH 2 PSH 3 PSH 4 PSH 5 PSH 6 DCFan FAN1
Outdoor micro-computer input/output SC

SVA1 SVF1 SVG RVR1 RVR2 CH1 SVA1 SVF1 SVG RVR1 RVR2 CH1 SVA1 SVF1 SVG RVR1 RVR2 CH1 SVA1 SVF1 SVG RVR1 RVR2 CH1 SVA1 SVF1 SVG RVR1 RVR2 CH1
11.12.1.SERVICE
11.12. SERVICE
SERVICE
Total of running indoor unit capacity Op
Page 12-11
AND
Inverter frequency at the compressor No.1 H1

SERVICE AND
AND
Number of running compressors CC

Airflow rate of the outdoor fan Fo
Expansion valve opening 1~6 of the outdoor unit oE1~6, B oE1 oE2 oE3 oE4 oE5 oE6 oEB oE1 oE2 oE3 oE4 oE5 oE6 oEB oE1 oE2 oE3 oE4 oE5 oE6 oEB oE1 oE2 oE3 oE4 oE5 oE6 oEB oE1 oE2 oE3 oE4 oE5 oE6 oEB
High discharge pressure [MPa] Pd

Low suction pressure [MPa] Ps
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
ANDMAINTENANCE
Temperature on the top of the compressor No.1~No.6 Td1~6 Td1 Td2 Td3 Td4 Td5 Td6
Td1 Td2 Td3 Td4 Td5 Td6 Td1 Td2 Td3 Td4 Td5 Td6 Td1 Td2 Td3 Td4 Td5 Td6 Td1 Td2 Td3 Td4 Td5 Td6
MAINTENANCE
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
TE1 TE2 TE1 TE2 TE1 TE2 TE1 TE2 TE1 TE2
RECORD
Evaporating temperature at heating 1.2 TE 1.2

RECORD
RECORD
Outdoor temperature To
BYBY
RECORD
Current at the compressor No.1~No.6 A1~6 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6

BY BY
MEANS
MEANS
Expansion valve opening of the indoor unit iEN

MEANS
OFOF
Liquid pipe (freeze) temperature of the heat exchanger of the indoor unit TLn
THE
Gas pipe temperature of the heat exchanger of the indoor unit TGn
MEANS
Air inlet temperature of the indoor unit Tin

THE
Discharge air temperature of the indoor unit Ton

OF THE
Indoor unit capacity CAn

Cause code of the stoppage at the indoor unit d1n
Restricted control for prevention of compression ratio decrease C11
OF THE
7-SEGMENT
Restricted control for prevention of high pressure increase C13

7-SEGMENT
Restricted control for prevention of the temperature increase of the inverter fan C14
Restricted control for prevention of discharge gas temperature increase C15
Restricted control for prevention of TdSH decrease C16
7-SEGMENT
Restricted control for prevention of overcurrent C17

DISPLAY
Total accumulated hours of the compressors No.1~No.6 UJ1~6 UJ1 UJ2 UJ3 UJ4 UJ5 UJ6 UJ1 UJ2 UJ3 UJ4 UJ5 UJ6 UJ1 UJ2 UJ3 UJ4 UJ5 UJ6 UJ1 UJ2 UJ3 UJ4 UJ5 UJ6 UJ1 UJ2 UJ3 UJ4 UJ5 UJ6
DISPLAY
Outdoor alarm code AC

7-SEGMENT
Cause code of the stoppage at the inverter iTC

Total capacity setting of CP
DISPLAY
Total quantity of the combined AA

Address of the refrigerant system GA
RVR1: 4-way valve CH1: Crankcase heater

DISPLAY
RVR2: 4-way valve DC Fan: Direct control fan

SVA1: Solenoid valve Fan 1: Constant speed fan
SVF1: Solenoid valve
SVG: Solenoid valve
12
12.12.2
11.12.2.PUMP-DOWN
PUMP-DOWNMETHOD
METHODFOR REPLACING
FOR THE
REPLACING COMPRESSOR
THE COMPRESSOR
No. Procedure Remarks
1 Turn off the main switch of the outdoor unit.

Remove the covers, the thermistor, the crankcase Make sure that the terminal part of the detached power
heater, the power wirings, and other items according supply wires is not exposed by the winding insulation
2
to the chapter "Removing the Parts of the Oudoor tape and other items.
Unit".
Attach the manifold to the check joint of the high-
3 pressure side and the low-pressure side of the
outdoor unit.
4 Turn on the main switch of the outdoor unit.
Set the exclusion of the compressor by setting the DSW5-1 ON: Compressor No.1
DSW so that a broken compressor will not work. (52C1: Inverter compressor),
5
You can set the exclusion of the compressor by DSW5-2 ON: Compressor No.2 (52C2),
setting the DSW5-1~DSW5-6 of the PCB1. DSW5-3 ON: Compressor No.3 (52C3), and the others.
Pre-Pump-Down by means of the Cooling Process:
� Start the test run of the cooling process. � After closing the gas stop valve, the decrease
(DSW4-1 ON). of Ps is fast. To guarantee the reliability of the
� The test run should run for approximately 20 compressor, make sure that the decrease
minutes (until the test run reaches does not reach PS< 0.1Mpa when you
PS>0.3Mpa, Td>75oC, as a rough target). perform the enforced stoppage.
� Display of Ps in seven seconds of the
6 outdoor PCB.
� Close the gas stop valve quickly. Then,
perform
the enforced stoppage (DSW4-4 ON) when
Ps < 0.2Mpa.
� Set the DSW4-1 to OFF in order to cancel
the test run of the cooling. Set the DSW4-4
to OFF in order to cancel the enforced
stoppage.
� This operation is performed for up to a
The compressor replacing mode is performed:
maximum of ten minutes.
7 � The DSW4-6 on the outdoor unit PCB� ON
� If the inverter compressor is excluded, the
(The cooling is run).
operation starts after three minutes.
The operation finishes when one of the following � The operation may finished when any of the
conditions occurs: conditions 1) to 3) occurs.
1) Ten minutes have passed and STP is
displayed in seven segments.
8
2) "08" is displayed in seven segments.
3) When Ps< 0.1MPa is continued for one
minute, in ten minutes STP is displayed in
seven seconds and the operation finishes.
To avoid the spillage of all the refrigerant if
9 Close the liquid stop valve completely.
the check valve is broken.
Page 12-12
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
No. Procedure Remarks
Check for a leakage of the check valve on the � When you stop the compressor for replacing:
discharge gas side: � You can check the leakage of the check valve
� DSW4-4 (Enforced stoppage of the compressor) by means of the Ps variation because the SVA
� ON, so that the compressor will not run opens so that the discharge gas side of the
although the running command is sent from the inverter compressor can connect to the low-
remote control switch. pressure side.
� Check that variation of Ps on the outdoor unit � 0.03 Mpa / 2 minutes is within the permissible
PCB is 17 seconds. Make sure that the Ps limits for the check valve on the discharge gas
increase is within 0.03 Mpa in two minutes side.
after the Ps increase at the stoppage (during � The leakage of the check valve may cause an
10 approximately five minutes). Also make sure incorrect brazing, due to the gas pressure at the
that Pd>Ps. brazing of the discharge piping.
� If the compressor-replacing mode is performed
again, set the DSW4-4 to OFF and keep the
0.03MPa DSW4-4 at the OFF side during ten minutes.
Ps
or smaller
Then, start according to the procedure No6.
2 Min
Time
Collect the refrigerant by means of the refrigerant � The discharge of the refrigerant in the
collection: atmosphere is strictly forbidden. Make sure that
� Perform either A or B, depending the refrigerant is collected by the collector.
on the process 10. � Keep a note of the quantity of the collected
A: The leak rate at the process 10 is within the refrigerant.
11
specification � Collect the refrigerant only at
the low-pressure side.
B: The leak rate at the process 10 is greater than
the specification � Collect all the refrigerant of
the outdoor unit side by means of the machine.
� Make sure that there is no pressure increase of
the low-pressure sides after collecting the
After collecting the refrigerant, remove the change refrigerant.
hose (collector side) of the low-pressure side, so that � Make sure that the refrigerant cycle is the
12
the low-pressure side of the refrigerant cycle will be atmosphere pressure. Otherwise, problems such
the atmosphere pressure. as the blowing of gas and the suction of the
cutting material) may occur when you are
removing the compressors.
13 Turn OFF the main switch of the outdoor unit.
Perform the replacement of the compressor and the Make sure that you follow the instructions.
14 change of the refrigerant oil according to the section
"Replacing the Compressor".
If you collect the refrigerant only on the low-pressure
Perform the vacuum from the check joint of side (A in 11). You cannot perform the vacuum of the
15
the low-pressure side. refrigerant from the check joint of the high-pressure
side.
Open the liquid stop valve and the gas stop valve
16
completely when you finish the vacuum.
Make sure that the power is turned OFF and attach the
following items: the power supply wire, the thermistor,
17
the crankcase heater, the 63H wiring, the panel and
the nut).
Set the DSW back to the original setting. Make sure
18 that all the wirings to the compressor are connected
correctly.
If the replacement of the compressor takes more than
two hours, an additional change of the refrigerant is
12
Recharge the refrigerant that is collected in the
19 process by the stop valve of the liquid side during the necessary.
cooling at the TEST RUN mode. Additional Change =
(Replacing Time – 2 hours) x 0.5kg.
Page 12-13
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
12.12.3.
11.12.3. CHECK
CHECKDATA
DATASHEET
SHEETOF
OFTHE
THEOUTDOOR
OUTDOORUNIT
UNIT(SET-FREE FSN(E)/FXN(E)
(SET-FREE SERIES)
FSN(E)/FXN(E) SERIES)
Client: Date:
Remote control switch of the indoor unit

Operation mode
Test run is started at:
Data is collected at:
Data item Example
Setting temperature of the indoor unit ��

Air inlet temperature ��
Discharge air temperature. ��
Liquid pipe temperature of the heat exchanger
of the indoor unit ��
Temperature of the remote control thermistor ��
Outdoor temperature � ��
Gas pipe temperature of the heat exchanger
of the indoor unit. ��
Evaporating temperature at heating ��
Control information �� --
Discharge gas temperature ��

Indoor micro-computer input/output ��
Outdoor micro-computer input/output �� ==
Cause of the stoppage at the unit ��

Check mode 1
Number of the abnormal operation ��

Number of the instantaneous power failure
at the indoor unit ��
Number of the transmission error ��
Number of the abnormal operation at the inverter ��
Status of the lower sensor ��
Discharge pressure ��
Suction pressure ��
Control information ��
Working frequency ��
Indoor unit capacity ��
Outdoor unit code ��
Refrigerant cycle number ��
Expansion valve opening of the indoor unit ��
Expansion valve opening 1 of the outdoor unit ��
Current at the compressor ��
Page 12-14
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Air inlet temperature ��

Discharge air temperature ��
Liquid pipe temperature of the heat exchanger
of the indoor unit ��
Outdoor temperature ��
Gas pipe temperature of the heat exchanger
of the indoor unit. ��
Check mode 2
Evaporating temperature at heating ��

Discharge gas temperature ��
Discharge pressure ��
Suction pressure ��
Working frequency ��
Expansion valve opening of the indoor unit ��
Expansion valve opening of the outdoor unit ��
Current at the compressor ��
12
Page 12-15
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
Page 12-16
SMGB0032-rev1 - 06/2006
HITACHI is participating in the EUROVENT Certification Programme.
Products are as specified in the EUROVENT Directory of Certified
Products.
Hitachi Air Conditioning Products Europe, S.A.

Ronda Shimizu,1 - Políg. Ind. Can Torrella
08233 Vacarisses (Barcelona) España
ISO 9001 Certified by AENOR, Spain
ISO 14001 Certified by AENOR, Spain
Hitachi Air Conditioning Systems Operation

Shimizu-shi, Shizuoka-ken, Japan
ISO 9001 Certified by JQA, Japan
ISO 14001 Certified by JQA, Japan
Hitachi Air Conditioning Products (M) Sdn. Bnd.

Lot No. 10, Jalan Kemajan Bangi Industrial Estate
43650 Bandar Baru Bangi, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Certification ISO 9001, Malaysia
Certification ISO 14001, Malaysia
SMGB0032 rev.1 06/2006 - Printed in Spain

Hitachi Service Manual FSN FXN FSVN Rev 06-2006t

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hitachi Service Manual FSN FXN FSVN Rev 06-2006t

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SET-FREE FSN(E)/

UNITS CODE LIST

INDOOR UNITS FSN(1)(E/M) – System Free

RCI RCIM RCD RPC RPI

INDOOR UNITS FSN(1)(E/M) – System Free

RPK RPK (mini) RPF RPFI

Meaning of model codiﬁcation: RPI 3.0 FS N (1) (E)

FSN OUTDOOR UNITS FXN OUTDOOR UNITS

FSVNE OUTDOOR UNITS

Meaning of model codiﬁcation: RAS 10 FS FX V N E

CODE LIST ACCESSORIES

PSC-5S Central station 60291050

PSC-5T 7 day timer 60291052

PC-P5H Optional remote controller 60290879

PC-LH3A Wireless control switch 60291056

Accessory Name Code Figure

PC-RLH9 Receiver kit 60291107

PC-RLH11 Receiver kit 60291109

PC-RLH13 Receiver kit 60291294 (Figure not available)

PCC 1A Optional function connector 60199286

PRC-10E1 2P extension cord 7E790211

HARC-BXE (A) Lonwork BMS interface 60290874

HARC-BXE (B) Lonwork BMS interface 60290875

CS-NET CS-NET + inteface 6E191922

DBS-26 Drain discharge boss 60299192

Accessory Name Code Figure

P-G23DWA1 Air panel for RCD 60291106

B-32H4 Adapter for deodorant ﬁlter 60199790

F-23L4-K Anti bacteria ﬁlter 60199791

PDF-23CE Duct connection ﬂange 60199795

OACI-232 Fresh air intake kit 60199797

PD-75 Fesh air intake kit 60199798

PI-23LS5 3-way oulet parts 60199799

TKCI-232 T duct connecting kit 60199801

Accessory Name Code Figure

E-102SN Branch pipe 60291202

1 UNITS INSTALLATION ___________________________________________________ 1-1

1.11.1. Installation Location (5 to 12 HP) __________________________________________ 1-31

� WARNING: – Mount suspension bolts using M10 (W3/8) as size, as

is installed higher than 3 meters, it is also

1.1. TRANSPORTATION OF OUTDOOR UNIT

1. Hanging method Rope

Do not remove Angle of wire

� For installation (18~32HP)

- Hang the unit without removing the packaging with

Angle of wire more

Do not apply any

Push through wire

1.2.1. FACTORY-SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES 1.2.2. INITIAL CHECK

Accessory Qty. Purpose

(mm) – If a false ceiling has already been installed, complete

all piping and wiring work inside the ceiling before

hooking-up the indoor unit.

I-Beam Suspension Bolt Attach this side of

– Tighten the nuts of the suspension brackets after the

1.2.4. AIR PANEL INSTALLATION

Stamp Air Panel

*: Fix screw until this end touches it

– If any gap has even though tighten long screws

� Wiring connection for the air panel

� CAUTION: 2. Connect the connectors as shown below (view of the

Connector for Auto Connector for Auto Swing Motor